ELECTRICAL WIRING 9th CANADIAN EDITION

MULLIN
GEROLIMON

RESIDENTIAL
GRANELLI
TRINEER
BRANCH
SIMMONS

BASED ON
THE 2021
CANADIAN
ELECTRICAL
CODE
 2021 Canadian Electrical Code
and related products
Meeting the requirements of the updated IEC 62368-1
standard

In addition to CSA C22.1:21, Canadian Electrical Essentials Training

Code, Part I, CSA Group offers a variety of Self-guided online | Instructor-led public | Instructor-
related publications and resources designed led onsite
to assist with the interpretation and application Ideal for new Code users. Gain an understanding of the
of the Code. definitions, scope and objective of the 2021 Code as
they apply to construction-related electrical
installations.
Handbook
The 2021 Canadian Electrical Code Handbook provides
Modular Training
detailed rationale and background information behind
the requirements in CSA C22.1:21. The handbook helps Self-guided online | Instructor-led onsite
you find information quickly and explains the rules in Create your own self-guided online or instructor-led
plain, easy-to-understand language. onsite course based on specific sections of the Code.
Choose from more than 30 training modules referencing
Integrated eBook Code & Handbook specific Code sections to create a customized learning
experience for you or your team.
This versatile digital eBook contains the 2021 Canadian
Electrical Code, Handbook and the Electrical Quick
Reference Guide in one complete package. Accessible
on tablet, mobile, desktop, and most web browsers. Learn more
For more information or to purchase CSA C22.1:21,
Canadian Electrical Code, Part I products:
1 800 463 6727
[Link]/2021CECode

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association. All Rights Reserved.

ELECTRICAL WIRING
RESIDENTIAL
9th CANADIAN EDITION

MULLIN | GEROLIMON
GRANELLI | TRINEER
BRANCH | SIMMONS

BASED ON
THE 2021
CANADIAN
ELECTRICAL
CODE

Australia Brazil Canada Mexico Singapore United Kingdom United States

Electrical Wiring: Residential, Ninth Canadian © 2022, 2019 Cengage Learning, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
Edition
Ray C. Mullin, Sandy F. Gerolimon, Adapted from Electrical Wiring: Residential, 20th Edition, by Phil Simmons,
Ron Granelli, Craig Trineer, Tony Branch, Ray C. Mullin. Copyright © Cengage Learning, Inc., 2021. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
Phil Simmons
No part of this work covered by the copyright herein may be reproduced or
distributed in any form or by any means, except as permitted by Canadian
Senior Director, Product: Jackie Wood
copyright law, without the prior written permission of the copyright owner.
Senior Portfolio Manager: Alexis Hood
Red Seal Program–Sceau Rouge trademarks and logos are overseen by
Product Marketing Manager: Amanda Henry the Canadian Council of Directors of Apprenticeships (CCDA) and the
Director, Content and Production: Toula DiLeo department of Employment and Social Development Canada. Cengage is

Content Development Manager: Katherine Goodes an independent entity from the Red Seal Program–Sceau Rouge, and is not
affiliated with Red Seal Program–Sceau Rouge in any manner.
Senior Content Production Manager: Jennifer Hare
Cognero and Full-Circle Assessment are registered trademarks of Madeira
Senior IP Analyst: Christine Myaskovsky
Station LLC.
IP Project Manager: Betsy Hathaway

Production Service: MPS Limited For product information and technology assistance, contact us at
Cengage Customer & Sales Support, 1-800-354-9706
Copy Editor: Michael Kelly
or [Link].
Technical Reviewer: Marcia Ranger

Designer: Felicia Bennett For permission to use material from this text or product, submit all
requests online at [Link].
Cover Image: Chris McDowell Photography

Library and Archives Canada Cataloguing in Publication:

Title: Electrical wiring, residential / Mullin, Gerolimon, Granelli, Trineer,

Branch, Simmons.

Names: Mullin, Ray C., author.

Description: 9th Canadian edition. | First Canadian edition published under

title: Electrical wiring, residential, in 1994. | “Based on the 2021 Canadian
Notice to the Reader Electrical Code.” | Includes indexes.
Publisher does not warrant or guarantee any of
Identifiers: Canadiana (print) 20210198532 | Canadiana (ebook)
the products described herein or perform any
20210198540 | ISBN 9780176929770 (softcover) | ISBN 9780176930134
independent analysis in connection with any of the
(PDF)
product information contained herein. Publisher does
Subjects: LCSH: Electric wiring, Interior. | LCSH: Dwellings—Electric equipment.
not assume, and expressly disclaims, any obligation
to obtain and include information other than that Classification: LCC TK3285 .M84 2021 | DDC 621.319/24—dc23
provided to it by the manufacturer. The reader is
Print text ISBN: 978-0-17-692977-0
expressly warned to consider and adopt all safety
Ebook ISBN: 978-0-17-693013-4
precautions that might be indicated by the activities
described herein and to avoid all potential hazards. By Cengage
following the instructions contained herein, the reader 200 Pier 4 Boulevard
willingly assumes all risks in connection with such Boston, MA 02210
instructions. The publisher makes no representations USA
or warranties of any kind, including but not limited
to, the warranties of fitness for particular purpose Cengage is a leading provider of customized learning solutions with
or merchantability, nor are any such representations employees residing in nearly 40 different countries and sales in more than
implied with respect to the material set forth herein, 125 countries around the world. Find your local representative at:
and the publisher takes no responsibility with respect [Link].
to such material. The publisher shall not be liable for
To learn more about Cengage platforms and services, register or access
any special, consequential, or exemplary damages
your online learning solution, or purchase materials for your course, visit
resulting, in whole or part, from the readers’ use of,
[Link].
or reliance upon, this material.

Printed in the United States of America

Print Number: 02 Print Year: 2021
Brief Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Unit 1: General Information for Electrical Installations . . . 1
Unit 2: Drawings and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Unit 3: Electrical Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Unit 4: Determining the Number and Location of
Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits . . . . . . . . 57
Unit 5: Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring
Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage
Drop, and Neutral Sizing for Services . . . . . . . . . . 70
Unit 6: Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device
Bonding, and Induction Heating Resulting
from Unusual Switch Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Unit 7: Service Entrance Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Unit 8: Service Entrance Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Unit 9: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault
Circuit Interrupters, Transient Voltage Surge
Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles . 177
Unit 10: Luminaires and Ballasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Unit 11: Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms,
Study, and Halls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Unit 12: Branch Circuits for the Living Room
and Front Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Unit 13: Branch Circuits for Bathrooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Unit 14: Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance
Circuits for the Kitchen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

iii
iv BRIEF CONTENTS

Unit 15: Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges,

Counter-Mounted Cooking Units
G, Wall-Mounted Ovens F , Food Waste

Disposals H, and Dishwashers I . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Unit 16: Branch Circuits for the Laundry,
Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic . . . . . . . . . . 287
Unit 17: Electric Heating and Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . 303
Unit 18: Oil and Gas Heating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Unit 19: Recreation Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Unit 20: Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area . . 342
Unit 21: Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms
and Security Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Unit 22: Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs . . . . . . . . . 376
Unit 23: Television, Telephone, Data, and
Home Automation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Unit 24: Lighting Branch Circuit for the
Garage and Outdoor Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Unit 25: Standby Power Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Unit 26: Alternative Energy Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Appendix A: Profession as an “Electrician” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

Appendix B: Specifications for Electrical Work—Single-Family
Dwelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Appendix C: Jack Pin Designations and Colour Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Appendix D: EIA/TIA 568A and 568B: Standards for Cabling Used
in Telecommunications Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Code Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Subject Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

Residential Plans (Inserted at Back of Book)

Sheet 1 of 8 Site Plan
Sheet 2 of 8 Foundation/Basement Plan
Sheet 3 of 8 First Floor Plan
Sheet 4 of 8 Cross Section A-A
Sheet 5 of 8 Basement Electrical Plan
Sheet 6 of 8 First Floor Electrical Plan
Sheet 7 of 8 Interior Elevations; Rooms, Doors, and Windows
Schedule; Electrical Panel Layout
Sheet 8 of 8 Code Requirements for Swimming Pool
Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

UNIT

1
General Information for Electrical Installations . . . . . . . . . 1
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Codes and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Personal Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Testing and Accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Electrical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Common Conversions of Trade Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

UNIT Drawings and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2
Technical Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Visualizing a Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Building Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Symbols and Notations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
The Working Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Electrical Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Electrical Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
UNIT

3
Luminaires and Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Junction Boxes and Switch (Device) Boxes
(Rules 12-3000 Through 12-3036) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
v
vi CONTENTS

Non-Metallic Outlet and Device Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Ganged Switch (Device) Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Boxes for Conduit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Special - Purpose Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Number of Conductors in a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Selecting a Box When All Conductors Are the Same Size . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Selecting a Box When Conductors Are Different
Sizes, Rule 12-3034 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Box Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Locating Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Positioning Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

UNIT

4
Determining the Number and Location of
Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Basics of Wire Sizing and Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Lighting Branch Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Receptacle Branch Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Preparing a Lighting and Receptacle Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

UNIT

5
Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire
Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral
Sizing for Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Voltage Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Approximate Conductor Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Calculation of Maximum Length of Cable Run Using Table D3 . . . . . . . 81
Non-Metallic-Sheathed Cable (Rules 12-500 Through 12-526) . . . . . . . 81
Armoured Cable (Rules 12-600 Through 12-618) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Installing Cables Through Wood and Metal Framing Members
(Rule 12-516) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Installation of Cable in Attics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Installation of Cables Through Ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Connectors for Installing Non-Metallic-Sheathed and
Armoured Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
 CONTENTS vii

Electrical Metallic Tubing (Rules 12-1400 Through 12-1414)

and Rigid Metal Conduit (Rules 12-1000 Through 12-1014) . . . . . . . 93
Rigid PVC Conduit (Rules 12-1100 Through 12-1124) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Flexible Connections (Rules 12-1000 Through 12-1014 and
12-1300 Through 12-1308) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Flexible Metal Conduit (Rules 12-1002 Through 12-1014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (Rules 12-1300
Through 12-1308) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Liquidtight Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit (Rules
12-1300 Through 12-1308) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

UNIT Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device

6
Bonding, and Induction Heating Resulting
from Unusual Switch Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Conductor Identification (Rule 4-032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Toggle Switches (Rules 14-500 Through 14-514) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Bonding at Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Ungrounded-Type Receptacles, Rule 26-702 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Induction Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Tamper-Resistant Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

UNIT

7
Service Entrance Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Size of Service Entrance Conductors and Service
Disconnecting Means . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Service Calculations for a Single-Family Dwelling,
Rule 8-200: Calculating Floor Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Service Calculations for Apartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Service Entrance Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

UNIT

8
Service Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Overhead Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Mast-Type Service Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Underground Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Main Service Disconnect Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Electric Vehicle Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Service Entrance Conduit Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Grounding—Why Ground? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
viii CONTENTS

Grounding Electrode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Grounding the Service When Non-Metallic Water Pipe is Used . . . . . . 154
Summary—Service Entrance Equipment Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Multiple Meter Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Branch-Circuit Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Interrupting Ratings for Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Panels and Load Centres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Reading the Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

UNIT

9
Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters, Arc-Fault
Circuit Interrupters, Transient Voltage Surge
Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles . . . . . . . 177
Electrical Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Code Requirements for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs) . . . 178
Precautions for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter in Residence Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Feedthrough Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Identification, Testing, and Recording of GFCI Receptacles . . . . . . . . . 184
Replacing Existing Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Ground-Fault Protection for Construction Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters (AFCIs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Isolated Ground Receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

UNIT

10
Luminaires and Ballasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Bringing Light to a Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Residential Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Types of Luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
CEC Requirements for Installing Recessed Luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Ballast Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Luminaire Voltage Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
LED versus Incandescent Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Lamp Efficacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Lamp Colour Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
 CONTENTS ix

UNIT

11
Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls . . . 216
Grouping Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Cable Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Estimating Loads for Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Drawing the Wiring Diagram of a Lighting Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Receptacle Branch-Circuit Master and Study Bedroom . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Branch-Circuit A24 Outside Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Determining the Wall Box Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Bonding of Wall Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Positioning of Split-Circuit Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Positioning of Receptacles Near Electric Baseboard Heating . . . . . . . . 224
Luminaires in Clothes Closets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Lighting Branch-Circuit A14 for Master Bedroom,
Front Bedroom, and Bathrooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Sliding Glass Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Selection of Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Lighting Circuit for Study, Exterior Rear, Living Room,
and Hall Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Paddle Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

UNIT Branch Circuits for the Living Room and Front Entry . . 235

12
Lighting Circuit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Dimmer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Incandescent Lamp Load Inrush Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Branch Circuit for Front Entry, Porch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

UNIT Branch Circuits for Bathrooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

13
Bathrooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
General Comments on Lamps and Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Lighting Fixtures in Bathrooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Hallway Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Receptacle Outlets in Hallways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Bonding Requirements for a Bathroom Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Indoor Air Quality and the Bathroom Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Hydromassage Bathtub Circuit A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
x CONTENTS

UNIT Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance

14
Circuits for the Kitchen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Lighting Circuit B7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Kitchen Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Small-Appliance and Branch Circuits for Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Split-Circuit Receptacles and Multi-Wire Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
General Bonding Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

UNIT Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges,

15
Counter-Mounted Cooking Units G ,
Wall-Mounted Ovens F , Food Waste
Disposals H , and Dishwashers I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit Circuit G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Wall-Mounted Oven Circuit F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Branch-Circuit Requirements for Ranges, Ovens,
and Countertop Cooking Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Freestanding Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Branch Circuits Supplying Separate Built-in Cooking Units . . . . . . . . . 279
Food Waste Disposal H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Dishwasher I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Portable Dishwashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Cord Connection of Fixed Appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

UNIT

16
Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom,
and Attic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Dryer Circuit D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Receptacle Outlets—Laundry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Lighting Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Humidity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Attic Lighting and Pilot Light Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Attic Exhaust Fan Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

UNIT

17
Electric Heating and Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
General Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Types of Electric Heating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Separate Circuit Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Control of Electric Heating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
 CONTENTS xi

Circuit Requirements for Baseboard Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Location of Electric Baseboard Heaters in Relation
to Receptacle Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Circuit Requirements for Electric Furnaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Heat Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Marking the Conductors of Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Room Air Conditioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Receptacles for Air Conditioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Central Heating and Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Special Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Loads Not Used Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

UNIT Oil and Gas Heating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

18
Principles of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Self-Generating (Millivolt) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Supply Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Control-Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

UNIT

19
Recreation Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Recreation Room Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Two- and Three-Wire Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

UNIT Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area . . . . . . . . 342

20
Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Workbench Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Receptacle Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Cable Installation in Basements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Multioutlet Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Empty Conduits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Workshop/Utility area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Well Pump Circuit B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Jet Pump Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Deep Well Submersible Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Water Heater Circuit C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Heating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
xii CONTENTS

Speed of Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Scalding from Hot Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
What about Washing Dishes? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Metering and Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Water Heater Load Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Effect of Voltage Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

UNIT

21
Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms
and Security Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
The Importance of Smoke Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Types of Smoke Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Manufacturers’ Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Combination Direct/Battery/Feedthrough Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Carbon Monoxide Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Security Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

UNIT Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

22
Pool Wiring (Section 68) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Electrical Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
CEC-Defined Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Grounding and Bonding of Swimming Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Lighting Luminaires under Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Electric Heating of Swimming Pool Decks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Spas and Hot Tubs (Rules 68-400 Through 68-408) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Hydromassage Bathtubs (Subsection 68-300 to 68-308) . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Fountains and Decorative Pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

UNIT

23
Television, Telephone, Data,
and Home Automation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Television Tv   — . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Satellite Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
CEC Rules for Installing Antennas and Lead-in Wires (Section 54) . . . 395
Telephone Wiring ▲ (Section 60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Data Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
 CONTENTS xiii

EIA/TIA 568A & 568B Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Home Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

UNIT

24
Lighting Branch Circuit for
the Garage and Outdoor Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Lighting Branch Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Receptacle Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Outdoor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Underground Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Overhead Garage Door Opener E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Central Vacuum System K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

UNIT

25
Standby Power Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
The Need for Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Why Standby (Temporary) Power? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
What Types of Standby Power Systems Are Available? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Standard Requirements for Standby Power Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Wiring Diagrams for a Typical Standby Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Transfer Switches or Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Disconnecting Means . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Generator Sizing Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

UNIT

26
Alternative Energy Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Feed-in Tariff (Microfit) and Net Metering Across Canada . . . . . . . . . . 440
Generating Electricity with Magnetism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Hydro Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Micro Hydro Power Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Wind Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Utility-Interactive Solar Photovoltaic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
The Basic Utility-Interactive Photovoltaic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
The CEC and Alternative Energy Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
xiv CONTENTS

Appendix A: Profession as an “Electrician” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

Appendix B: Specifications for Electrical Work—Single-Family
Dwelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Appendix C: Jack Pin Designations and Colour Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Appendix D: EIA/TIA 568A and 568B: Standards for Cabling Used
in Telecommunications Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Code Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Subject Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

Residential Plans (Inserted at Back of Book)

Sheet 1 of 8 Site Plan
Sheet 2 of 8 Foundation/Basement Plan
Sheet 3 of 8 First Floor Plan
Sheet 4 of 8 Cross Section A-A
Sheet 5 of 8 Basement Electrical Plan
Sheet 6 of 8 First Floor Electrical Plan
Sheet 7 of 8 Interior Elevations; Rooms, Doors, and Windows
Schedule; Electrical Panel Layout
Sheet 8 of 8 Code Requirements for Swimming Pool
Introduction

This ninth Canadian edition of Electrical Wiring: Residential is based on the 2021 edition of the
Canadian Electrical Code, Part I (CEC), the safety standard for electrical installations. The
authors wish to extend their gratitude to the electricians and instructors who contribute their
insight and knowledge to this book. All of the authors in this series are, themselves, trades-
men and see the advantage of having a second set of eyes on a problem. Trade knowledge is
constantly evolving as new products and new methodologies are incorporated into the com-
munity knowledge base, so the authors are constantly looking for new perspectives.
Electrical Wiring: Residential provides an entry-level text that is both comprehensive
and readable. It is suitable for colleges, technical institutes, vocational/technical schools,
and electrical programs in high schools, and for readers who want to study the subject on
their own.
The wiring in the home illustrated in Electrical Wiring: Residential incorporates more
features than are absolutely necessary, to present as many Canadian Electrical Code (CEC)
rules as possible so that students are provided with the information they need to complete a
safe installation. The text focuses on the technical skills required to perform electrical instal-
lations. Topics include calculating conductor sizes, calculating voltage drop, sizing services,
connecting electrical appliances, grounding and bonding equipment, and installing various
fixtures. These are critical skills that can make the difference between an installation that
“meets code” and one that is exceptional. An electrician must understand that the reason for
following CEC regulations is to achieve an installation that is essentially free from hazard to
life and property.
The CEC is the basic standard for the layout and construction of all electrical systems
in Canada. However, some provincial and local codes may contain specific amendments
that must be adhered to in all electrical wiring installations in those jurisdictions. Therefore,
regional authority supersedes the CEC.
The authors encourage the reader to develop a detailed knowledge of the layout and
content of the CEC, which must be used in conjunction with a comprehensive study of
Electrical Wiring: Residential to derive the greatest benefit from the text.
The CEC is divided into numbered sections, each covering a main division. These sec-
tions are further divided into numbered rules, subrules, paragraphs, and subparagraphs.
All references in the text are to the section or to the section rule number. For example,
Rule 8-200 1) a) i) refers to Section 8, Rule 8-200, Subrule 1, item a, item i. This explana-
tion should assist the student in locating CEC references in the text.
Thorough explanations are provided throughout, as the text guides the student through
the steps necessary to become proficient in the techniques and CEC requirements described.

xv
Preface

Electrical Wiring: Residential, Ninth Canadian Edition, will prove a valuable resource to instruc-
tors and students alike. It includes numerous 2021 Canadian Electrical Code, Part I references
and wiring techniques. Each unit is a complete lesson ending with review questions to summa-
rize the material covered. The units are sequenced to introduce the student to basic principles
and wiring practices, and progress to more advanced areas of residential electrical wiring.
This text assumes no prior knowledge of residential electrical wiring, but the student
will need a reasonable level of mechanical aptitude and skill to be successful in the practical
application of the techniques discussed.
The text guides students through the working drawings for a residential electrical instal-
lation, the proper wiring of receptacles, and the minimum required number of lighting and
power branch circuits. Voltage drop calculations based on the CEC are shown. Ground-
ing, bonding, and ground-fault circuit interrupters are discussed, together with the light-
ing branch circuits for all of the rooms in the house, as well as for the garage, workshop,
and exterior. Special-purpose outlets for ranges, dryers, air conditioners, water heaters, and
water pumps are explained, as are electric, oil, and gas heating systems; smoke detectors and
smoke alarms; swimming pools, spas, and hot tubs; and low-voltage-signal systems, security
systems, and low-voltage remote-control systems, or “smart house wiring.”
The text details service entrance equipment and the installation of the electrical service,
including the calculations for the sizing of the service entrance conductors, conduit, switch,
grounding conductor, and panel. A unit discussing alternative energy exists to help prepare
the learner for the ever diversifying Canadian electrical grid. All units of the book now refer-
ence the national training standard known as the Red Seal Occupational Standard (RSOS),
which harmonizes the training requirements across Canada.

FEATURES
●● Content has been updated throughout to reflect ongoing trends in installation practice
and methodologies.
●● New! All text material fully updated to reference the 2021 edition of the CEC.
●● New! References to the Red Seal Occupational Standard (RSOS) have been added to all
units.
●● New! Added to this edition is a new Appendix A that explains the RSOS/NOC and its
importance, objectives, and structure. This new feature benefits students who will be
taking their Red Seal Examination.
●● Green technology has been updated and increased, where applicable.
●● New revisions to electrical layout have been added.

xvii
xviii PREFACE

●● New! Enhanced receptacle section in Unit 9.

●● References to the 2021 CEC are shown in italics to simplify cross-referencing to the CEC.
●● Metrication is in keeping with the 2021 CEC.
●● Descriptions of Canadian practice and applications.
●● Numerous diagrams of Canadian Standards Association (CSA)–approved equipment found in
everyday wiring installations.
●● Step-by-step explanations of wiring a typical residence.
●● Complete set of blueprints to help apply CEC theory to real working drawings.

Instructor Resources average of 31 slides per unit, many featuring key

figures, tables, and photographs from Electrical
Wiring: Residential, Ninth Canadian Edition. Instructor
notes can be added, making it simple for instructors
to customize the deck for their courses.

Test Bank Image Library

The test bank is available on a cloud-based platform. This resource consists of digital copies of figures,
Testing Powered by Cognero® is a secure online tables, and photographs used in the book. Instructors
testing system that allows instructors to author, may use these JPEGs to customize the PowerPoint
edit, and manage test-bank content from anywhere slides or create their own PowerPoint presentations.
Internet access is available. No special installations The Image Library Key describes the images and
or downloads are needed, and the desktop-inspired lists the codes under which the JPEGs are saved.
interface, with its drop-down menus and familiar,
intuitive tools, allows instructors to create and man-
age tests with ease. Multiple test versions can be Blueprints
created in an instant, and content can be imported or Revised and updated by Electrical Wiring series
exported into other systems. Tests can be delivered co-author Nick Palazzo, Humber College, and tech-
from a learning management system, the classroom, nically checked by the text’s authors, the set of
or wherever an instructor chooses. Testing Pow- blueprints accompanies this textbook.
ered by Cognero for Electrical Wiring: Residential,
Ninth Canadian Edition can be accessed through
[Link]. Instructor's Solutions Manual
This Test Bank was revised by the text authors:
Ron Granelli, Humber College; Sandy F. Gerolimon, The Instructor’s Solutions Manual to accompany
Humber College, and Craig Trineer, Humber College. Electrical Wiring: Residential, Ninth Canadian
It has been technically reviewed by Marcia Ranger. Edition, has been updated by the text’s authors and
It includes over 660 multiple-choice and over technically reviewed by Marcia Ranger. To assist
125 short-answer questions. the instructor, questions from the end of each unit
have been included with answers/solutions. These
may be used as additional review or examination
PowerPoint questions.

Microsoft® PowerPoint® lecture slides were also

revised and updated by the text authors. There is an
 PREFACE xix

MindTap Student Ancillaries

MindTap is the digital learning solution that pow-
ers students from memorization to mastery. It gives
instructors complete control of their course—to
provide engaging content, challenge every indi-
vidual, and build student confidence. Instructors MindTap
can customize interactive syllabi to emphasize pri-
ority topics as well as add their own material or Modern students require modern solutions. MindTap
notes to the ebook as desired. This outcome-driven is a flexible all-in-one teaching and learning platform
application gives instructors the tools needed to that includes the full ebook, a customizable learning
empower students and boost both understanding and path, and various course-specific activities that drive
performance. student engagement and critical thinking.
Ron Granelli and Nick Palazzo have ensured the
MindTap quizzes were updated, and all MindTap Download the Cengage Mobile App
assets were technically reviewed by Marcia Ranger.
The MindTap for the ninth Canadian edition also fea- Get access to a full, interactive ebook, readable
tures a Red Seal styled exam, complete with original online or off; study tools that empower anytime,
drawings and comprehensive feedback. This prac- anywhere learning; and 24/7 course access. The
tice exam was prepared by Ron Granelli and Nick Cengage Mobile app keeps students focused and
Palazzo. ready to study whenever it is convenient for them.
Acknowledgments

Every effort has been made to be technically correct and to avoid typographical errors. The
authors want to thank Marcia Ranger from Cambrian College, our colleague and sharp-eyed
technical reviewer, for her innumerable contributions to the full text, solutions manual, blue-
prints, Test Bank, and MindTap assets. We would also like to welcome Chad Soucy from
New Brunswick Community College aboard as our new technical reviewer. This series of
books is uniquely Canadian and the involvement of our colleagues across the country keeps
it so! The authors also wish to acknowledge the valuable assistance of Bill Wright in the
preparation of the original architectural drawings for this book. Thank you as well to the
people at Cengage Canada for their encouragement and professional advice. In particular,
we wish to thank Katherine Goodes, our content development manager, who keeps us on
track and guides our every step. The authors also wish to thank Tony Branch for his innu-
merable contributions to the books for the last decade. We wish him good fortune in his
endeavours moving forward.
The authors are also indebted to past and present reviewers of each textbook in the
Electrical Wiring series for their comments and suggestions:

Daniel Smythe, University of the Larry Cantelo, IBEW

Fraser Valley Rodney Deline, Durham College
Jacques Martin, Conestoga College Robert A. Engley, Red River College
Orest Staneckyj, Cambrian College Kent Gilbert, Conestoga College
Marcia Ranger, Cambrian College John Girden, Fanshawe College
Neil Blackadar, Nova Scotia Commu- Curt Goodwin, Nova Scotia Commu-
nity College nity College
Laurie Dauphinee, Nova Scotia Dean Lahey, Conestoga College
­Community College Ted Peters, Nova Scotia Community
George Locke, Mohawk College College
Steven Willis, Fanshawe College Tony Poirier, Durham College
Samuel Johnson, Vancouver Island Patrick Rooney, George Brown
University College
Al Hamilton, Fanshawe College

We wish to thank the following for contributing data, illustrations, and technical
information:

AFC Cable Systems, Inc. Eaton

Belkin International, Inc. Electri-Flex Co.
Broan-NuTone Canada Inc. Enphase Energy, Inc.
Cooper Industries ERICO International Corporation
xxi
xxii Acknowledgments

Honeywell Inc. National Electrical Contractors

Hubbell Canada LP Association
Independent Electricity System National Fire Protection Association
Operator (IESO) Northern Cables Inc.
IPEX Inc. Progress Lighting
Jeff Wampler Reid Wylde Engineering Ltd.
Kohler Power Systems Schneider Electric
Landis+Gyr Seatek Co., Inc.
Legrand/Pass & Seymour, Inc. Thomas & Betts Corporation
Legrand/Wiremold Company Underwriters Laboratories of
Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. Canada Inc.
Milbank Manufacturing Company Watkins Manufacturing Corporation
Wilo SE

With the permission of Canadian Standards CSA logo on page 5 used courtesy of the
Association, (operating as “CSA Group”), 178 Rexdale CSA Group
Blvd., Toronto, ON, M9W 1R3, material is reproduced SCC logo on page 4 used courtesy of the Standards
from CSA C22.1:21, Canadian Electrical Code, Council of Canada
Part I (25th edition), Safety Standard for Electrical ULC logo on page 5 used courtesy of the Under-
Installations. This material represents the opinions of writers Laboratories of Canada
the authors; it does not represent the position of CSA
Group, which is represented solely by the code in its For any further information or to give feedback
entirety. While use of the material has been authorized, on this textbook, you can contact the authors by
CSA Group is not responsible for the manner in which email:
the data is presented, nor for any representations and [Link]@[Link]
interpretations. No further reproduction is permitted. [Link]@[Link]
For more information or to purchase standard(s) from
CSA Group, please visit [Link] or call
1-800-463-6727.
 UNIT

1
General Information
for Electrical Installations
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to
●● identify the purpose of codes and standards RED SEAL
related to electrical systems
OCCUPATIONAL
●● describe the importance of the Canadian STANDARD
Electrical Code (CEC) (RSOS)
●● describe the layout of the CEC
For the Red Seal exam,
●● identify approved equipment note that this unit covers
●● explain the importance of electrical inspection the following RSOS task:
●● identify links to websites relating to the electrical ●● Task A-3
trade
●● list the agencies that are responsible for
establishing electrical standards and ensuring
that materials meet the standards
●● discuss systems of measurement used on
construction drawings
●● begin to refer to the CEC

1
2 Unit 1 General Information for Electrical Installations

SAFETY use of electrical energy. Meeting the requirements

of the CEC ensures an essentially safe installation.
Electrical installations are required to be safe. The CEC does not take economics into con-
Because of the ever-present danger of electric shock sideration. For instance, a house built using
and/or fire due to the failure of an electrical sys- wood frame construction may be wired with non-
tem, electricians and electrical contractors must use metallic-sheathed cable or armoured cable. Both
approved materials and methods. Therefore, codes meet the requirement of the CEC, but one costs sev-
and standards are used to ensure that the exposure eral times as much as the other.
of users, installers, and maintenance personnel to The CEC is divided up into evenly numbered sec-
the shock and fire hazards associated with electrical tions, each one covering a main division of the work.
systems is minimized. Each section has a title that describes what will be cov-
ered by the section. Ten general sections cover basic
installation requirements (see Table 1-1). The rest are
CODES AND STANDARDS amending or supplementary sections, which change
Codes are standards that deal with life safety issues the general requirements of the Code for specific types
and are enforceable by law. Residential electrical of equipment or installations (see Table 1-2). Rules
wiring systems are required to meet building codes
and electrical codes. Building codes dictate such
Table 1-1
things as which rooms and areas (such as stairwells)
require luminaires (lighting fixtures) and how they General sections of the CEC.
are to be controlled. Electrical codes deal with the SECTION TITLE
actual installation of the luminaires and controls.
0 Object, scope, and definitions
Municipal, provincial, and federal governments
2 General rules
can pass laws regarding the installation of electrical
equipment. 4 Conductors
The Canadian Electrical Code, Part I (CEC) 6 Services and service equipment

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

is the standard that governs electrical work across 8 Circuit loading and demand factors
Canada. It is adopted by the provinces, is enacted in 10 Grounding and bonding
legislation, and is the basis of a bill (with provincial 12 Wiring methods
amendments) that passes through the provincial leg- 14 Protection and control
islature, becoming law and enforced by municipali-
16 Class 1 and Class 2 circuits
ties or provincial electrical safety authorities.
26 Installation of electrical equipment
The first edition of the CEC was published in
1927. It is revised every three years to take into
account changes in equipment, wiring systems, and
new technologies. The standards steering commit- Table 1-2
tee for the CEC solicits comments and proposals
Some supplementary or amending sections
from the electrical industry and others interested of the CEC.
in electrical safety. Information about the structure
SECTION TITLE
and operation of the committee, how to propose an
© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

amendment, or how to request an interpretation can 28 Motors and generators

be found in CEC Appendix C. Copies of the CEC 30 Installation of lighting equipment
can be ordered from the Canadian Standards Asso- 32 Fire alarm systems, smoke and carbon
ciation (CSA Group). monoxide alarms, and fire pumps
The object of the CEC is to provide a minimum 62 Fixed electric heating systems
safety standard for the installation and maintenance 68 Pools, tubs, and spas
of electrical systems, to safeguard people from the 76 Temporary wiring
hazards of fire and electric shock arising from the
 Unit 1 General Information for Electrical Installations 3

in one amending section cannot be applied to another

amending section unless they specifically state that EXAMPLE
they may. Rule 6-112 provides information about
The sections are divided into subsections support for the attachment of overhead
and numbered rules with captions. For example, supply or consumer’s service conductors (see
Section 12-500 contains non-metallic-sheathed Appendix B).
cable rules, where 12 identifies the section and Rule 6-112 in Appendix B outlines the compon­
500 is the rule number in the section. 12-500 is ents that may be used for an overhead mast
service and methods of installation.
the first rule of the subsection that deals with the
Appendix D is tabulated general information.
installation of non-metallic-sheathed cable. The
This textbook will refer to several Appendix D
12-500 series of rules (12-500 through 12-526)
tables, including Tables D1, D3, D5, and D6.
describes how non-metallic-sheathed cables are to
be installed.

Tables
exactly what you want to look up, use the index at
At the end of the main body of the CEC are a num- the back of the book. If you have just a general idea
ber of tables, preceded by a list of all of the tables. of what you are looking for, use the table of contents
At the top of each table is a list of rules that refer at the front of the book.
you to the table, which can be helpful in looking up
rules. The tables cover such things as the ampacity
of wires, number of conductors in raceways, number Some Code Terminology
of conductors in boxes, and depth of cover over con-
ductors installed underground. ●● Acceptable: Acceptable to the authority having
jurisdiction
Diagrams ●● May: Permitted or allowable
After the tables are a number of diagrams, preceded ●● Notwithstanding: In spite of
by a list of all of the diagrams. Some of the diagrams ●● Practicable: Feasible or possible
included show pin configurations for both locking ●● Shall: Indicates a mandatory requirement
and non-locking receptacles.
●● Shall be: Compulsory, mandatory, a requirement
Appendixes ●● Shall have: The same as shall be
●● Shall not: Not permitted, not allowed, must
Of the 13 CEC appendixes, the two that are impor- not be
tant for you are Appendix B and Appendix D.
Appendix B is “Notes on Rules.” These notes give
●● Shall be permitted: Is acceptable, is allowed, is
supplemental information about rules. Whenever a permitted
rule refers to Appendix B, you must read that infor- Other terminology in the form of definitions can
mation. Appendix B uses the same numbering sys- be found at the beginning of the CEC in the defini-
tem as the main body of the CEC. Simply look up in tions of Section 0 and at the beginning of some of
Appendix B the rule number from the main body of the sections where terminology specific to the topic
the CEC. Appendix D offers general information to covered in that section is given. This textbook is
support installations. designed to be used in conjunction with the CEC.
Throughout the text, reference will be made to
Table of Contents and Index the rules, tables, and appendixes found in the 25th
(2021) edition of the CEC. To distinguish these from
The CEC provides an index and a table of con- the tables and appendixes in this text, all references
tents to help you look up information. If you know to them are in italics.
4 Unit 1 General Information for Electrical Installations

Standards If you are unsure about an approval label other

than CSA or ULC, look for C at the seven o’clock
Standards describe minimum performance levels position on the label.
for equipment and systems. The Canadian Electri- For equipment that has not been approved,
cal Code, Part II, found in Appendix A, consists of arrangements may be made for field approval
safety standards for electrical equipment and is a by contacting the inspection authority in your
mandatory part of the CEC. Another standard used province. This authority should also be able to
in the electrical field is TIA-570A, which is used provide you with a complete list of companies
when installing communication cabling. that can approve electrical equipment in your
province.

Personal SAFETY
When it comes to personal safety, you have to make Standards Council of Canada (SCC)
it your responsibility.

Courtesy of the Standards

When you ask most people if they work safely,

Council of Canada
they answer that they do. The question is: Do you
know enough about safe working practices to work
safely? See if you can answer the five questions
below. If you can’t, you require additional safety
The Standards Council of Canada (SCC) is a
training.
federal Crown corporation whose mandate is to
1. What are the proper procedures for locking out promote efficient and effective voluntary stan-
and tagging electrical equipment? dardization as a means of advancing the national
2. When is a worker required to wear a safety belt economy, and benefiting the health, safety, and
or safety harness on a construction site? well-being of the public. It is Canada’s voice on
3. What are five pieces of personal protective matters pertaining to standards both nationally and
equipment? internationally.
SCC fulfills its mandate by accrediting organi-
4. What are the classes of products identified by zations engaged in standards development, certifica-
WHMIS symbols? tion, and testing; by approving National Standards
5. What precautions should be taken when using of Canada (NSC); by coordinating participation in
ladders for electrical installations? international forums such as the International Orga-
You can obtain information about safe working nization for Standardization (ISO) and the Interna-
practices from the provincial government, construc- tional Electrotechnical Commission (IEC); and by
tion safety associations, and construction unions. developing standardization solutions for govern-
ment and industry.
In short, the Standards Council of Canada
TESTING AND ACCREDITATION gives accreditation to inspection, accreditation, and
assessment bodies. It assures that the organizations
All electrical equipment sold or installed in Canada is that develop and ensure standards conform to stan-
required to be approved for its intended use. Approved dards themselves. For instance, the SCC verifies
equipment has met specified safety standards set by that CSA and ULC, as well as many other standards
federal and provincial governments. Currently, sev- that we are all familiar with, adhere to consistent
eral companies are accredited to approve electrical standards themselves.
equipment. Equipment that has been approved by an The accreditation process of the SCC is typi-
approval agency will have an identifying label such cal of most standards organizations and involves
as CSA or ULC. several steps. First, an applicant must review the
 Unit 1 General Information for Electrical Installations 5

accreditation requirements provided, requesting CSA Group

an application package and submitting it. The
SCC has specific and separate application pro-

Courtesy of CSA Group

cesses for the following: inspection bodies; testing
laboratories of many kinds; cybersecurity certifi-
cation bodies; accreditation programs; informa-
tion technology security evaluation and testing
facilities; standards development organizations; CSA Group is a not-for-profit, member-based orga-
product, process, and service certification pro- nization formed in 1919 to develop standards that
grams of many types; management systems; address the needs of a broad range of organizations
personnel certification; inspection programs; and disciplines. These standards can be used for
greenhouse gas programs; and proficiency testing product testing and certification requirements and
providers. are often adopted by provincial and federal govern-
Next, applicants must request and fill out and ment authorities to form the basis for legislation
submit their application, which is reviewed by the and/or compliance requirements.
SCC for completeness, risk assessment, and the Thousands of manufacturers work directly with
ability to carry out the assessment within a period CSA Group to have their products tested and cer-
of one year. Upon successful completion of this tified, and the CSA mark (shown here) appears on
phase, the SCC then reviews all assessment docu- billions of products around the world.
ments, verifying each one. If all is in order, the

Courtesy of CSA Group

SCC will perform a site assessment, in effect to
audit and to verify all the information provided.
Then a closing meeting is performed where the
leader of the SCC team informs the applicant of
the SCC’s findings. At this point, any disputes The Canadian Electrical Code is one of the
regarding the findings can be addressed. If they many codes and standards that are developed by
are not, then the discrepancies are included in the CSA Group. The Canadian Electrical Code has
report. Applicants are given 30 days to respond to been adopted by provincial authorities to become
the submitted findings of the SCC, and the SCC law in the various provinces. For more information,
has 10 business days to review and respond to the visit [Link].
plan of action put forth by the applicant. Two sub-
sequent attempts are allowed to address findings
Underwriters Laboratories
in the event that the SCC does not like the ini-
tial plan of action. The applicant has 90 days to of Canada (ULC)
implement corrective action once a plan of action
has been agreed to. Once all concerns have been
Courtesy of the Underwriters
Laboratories of Canada
addressed, SCC approval is given, and companies
can use the SCC logo on their products, services,
and accreditations.
Upon receiving accreditation from the SCC,
regular inspections are scheduled to ensure Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) is an
compliance and adherence to mandated SCC independent product safety testing, certification, and
guidelines. inspection organization. ULC has tested products
Through these activities, SCC facilitates Cana- for public safety for over 100 years and is accredited
dian and international trade, protects consumers, by the SCC.
and promotes international standards cooperation. ULC also publishes standards, specifications,
For more information, visit [Link] and classifications for products having a bearing on
6 Unit 1 General Information for Electrical Installations

fire, accident, or property hazards. For more infor-

mation, contact one of ULC’s offices in Montreal, Table 1-3
Ottawa, Toronto, or Vancouver, or visit its website at Metric units of measure.
[Link]. PROPERTY SI UNIT SYMBOL

Length Metre m
ELECTRICAL INSPECTION Area Square metre m2
Volume Cubic metre m3
Most electrical safety regulations require that a
Time Second s
permit be obtained for the inspection of all work
related to the installation, alteration, or repair of Speed (velocity) Metres/second m/s
electrical equipment. It is the responsibility of the Acceleration Metres/second squared m/s2
electrical contractor or person doing the work to Temperature Degrees Celsius ˚C
obtain the permit. When the installation has passed Force Newton N
inspection, the inspection authority will issue a Energy Joule J
connection permit (also called authorization for Work Joule J
connection or current permit) to the supply author-
Power Watt W
ity. The supply authority will then make connection
Mass Kilogram kg
to the installation.
Since local codes vary, the electrician should Weight Kilogram kg
also check with the local inspection authority. Elec- Pressure Pascal Pa
trical utility companies can supply additional infor- Flow Litres/minute L/m
mation on local regulations. The electrician should Electric charge Coulomb C
be aware that any city or province adopting the CEC Electric current Ampere A
may do so with amendments and may also have Electric potential Volt V
additional licensing laws. difference
Luminous flux Lumen lm
Illuminance Lux lx
UNITS OF MEASURE
Two common systems of measurement are used in
Canada: the International System of Units (abbrevi-
ated SI from its French name: Système international
d’unités), or metric, and the American standard unit
(ASU), which uses inches and feet. Although SI is Table 1-4
the official system of measurement in Canada, the SI prefixes.
ASU system is widely used. Refer to Tables 1-3, PREFIX VALUE
1-4, and 1-5.
Mega (M) 1 000 000
Kilo 1 000
Length Hecto 100
Deka (deca) 10
The basic SI unit of measure for length is the metre.
Base unit (metre) 1
The SI system has a base of 10 (the next larger unit
Deci 0.1
is 10 times the size of the smaller unit) and uses pre-
fixes to identify the different units of length. Centi (c) 0.01
Construction drawings normally give SI dimen- Milli (m) 0.001
sions in millimetres or metres to prevent confusion. Micro (μ) 0.000 001
The ASU commonly uses inches, feet, yards, Nano (n) 0.000 000 001
rods, and miles to measure length.
 Unit 1 General Information for Electrical Installations 7

13
5 16 0
Table 1-5
4 11320
ASU units.
1
UNIT VALUE 3 80

1
Inch /36 yard 3
2 160

Foot 12 inches
1140
Yard 3 feet
1
Rod 5½ yards, 16 feet 2 0
1 2 3 4 5 6
Mile 320 rods, 1760 yards, 5280 feet

Figure 1-1 Reading tape measure divisions.

Construction drawings may use feet (   ́), inches

(˝), and fractions of an inch as units of measure.
A standard steel tape measure that uses ASU units Common Conversions
is divided into feet, inches, and fractions of an inch. of Trade Sizes
The first 12 inches of the tape normally has divi-
sions of 1/32 of an inch. The remainder of the tape Raceways such as rigid conduit and electrical metallic
is divided into 16ths of an inch. Figure 1-1 shows tubing (EMT) are designated by trade sizes because
how to read a tape measure using ASU units. An the actual inside diameter of a conduit or tubing is not
architect’s scale is used for working with construc- its stated size. For example, ½ in. (trade size) rigid
tion drawings that use ASU units. Scales are cov- steel conduit has an inside diameter of 0.632 inches,
ered in Unit 2. Table 1-6 gives useful conversions ½ in. EMT has an internal diameter of 0.606 inches,
from ASU to metric units. and ½ in. ENT (non-metallic tubing) has an internal

Table 1-6
Converting ASU to SI (metric) units.
MULTIPLICATION FACTOR
PROPERTY ASU UNIT FOR CONVERSION TO SI SI UNIT

Length Inch  25.4 Millimetre

Foot  304.8 Millimetre
Yard  914.4 Millimetre
Rod  5.0292 Metre
Furlong  201.17 Metre
Mile  1.609 347 Kilometre
Area Sq in.  645.16 Sq mm
Sq ft  92 903 Sq mm
Sq yd  0.8354 Sq m
Volume Cu in.  16.39 Cubic centimetre (cm3) or millilitre (mL)
Cu ft  0.028 32 Cubic metre
Cu yd  0.7646 Cubic metre
Liquid volume Fl oz  29.6 Millilitre
Gallon  3.78 Litre
8 Unit 1 General Information for Electrical Installations

diameter of 0.574 inches. All are considered to be

½ in., or simply refer to each as 16 trade size. Table 1-8
The 2021 CEC designates raceways in metric Standard AWG wire sizes and metric (mm2).
units only: The actual size of the raceway has not CIRCULAR MILS
changed, only the fact that metric units of measure AMERICAN WIRE OR EQUIVALENT METRIC WIRE
are used to designate the trade size of the raceway. SIZE (AWG) CIRCULAR MILS SIZE (mm2)
Table 1-7 lists the equivalent metric and American 937 0.50
designator units. 20 1020
The volume of device and junction boxes in
18 1620
CEC Table 23 are given in both metric and imperial
1974 1.0
units. They are described in both millilitres (mL)
and cubic inches (in.3). 16 2580
American wire gauge (AWG) sizes are still used 2960 1.5
in the 2021 CEC. Metric wire sizes are not identical 14 4110
to AWG sizes. Standard metric sizes generally fall 4934 2.5
between American wire gauge sizes. Table 1-8 gives 12 6530
standard AWG sizes and their circular mil area and
7894 4.0
metric wire sizes and their equivalent circular mil sizes.
10 10 380
11 840 6.0

Table 1-7 8 16 510

19 740 10.0
Metric and American designators for common
trade sizes of raceways. 6 26 240

METRIC DESIGNATOR AMERICAN DESIGNATOR 31 580 16

12 3
∕8 4 41 740

16 ½ 49 340 25

21 ¾ 3 52 620

27 1 2 66 360
35 1¼ 69 070

41 1½ 1 83 690
98 680 50

Courtesy of Thomas & Betts Corporation

53 2
63 2½ 1/0 105 600

78 3 2/0 133 100

91 3½ 138 100 70
103 4 3/0 167 800
129 5 187 500 95
155 6 4/0 211 600
 Unit 1 General Information for Electrical Installations 9

REVIEW

Where applicable, responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. What is the difference between a code and a standard?

2. What Code sets standards for the installation of electrical equipment?

3. What authority enforces the standards set by the CEC?

4. Does the CEC provide minimum or maximum standards?

5. What do the letters CSA signify?

6. Does compliance with the CEC always result in an electrical installation that is ade-
quate, safe, and efficient? Why?

7. What are the general sections of the CEC?

8. Is the section of the CEC that deals with wiring methods a general section or an
amending section?

9. When is an electrical installation required to be inspected?

10 Unit 1 General Information for Electrical Installations

10. What should you look for when trying to determine whether a piece of electrical
equipment is approved for use in Canada?

11. If a piece of electrical equipment is not approved for use in Canada, what should
you do?

12. When the words “shall be” appear in a code reference, they mean that it (must) (may)
(does not have to) be done. (Underline the correct answer.)
13. Why is it important for standards organizations to exist?

14. Which Red Seal skill requires you to identify sources of information relevant to plan-
ning job tasks, specifically creating and keeping to job schedules?
 UNIT

2
Drawings and
Specifications
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to
●● identify the various types of technical drawings RED SEAL
●● identify the line types used on construction OCCUPATIONAL
drawings STANDARD
●● visualize building views (RSOS)
●● read common scales For the Red Seal exam,
●● explain how electrical wiring information is note that this unit covers
conveyed to the electrician at the construction or the following RSOS tasks:
installation site ●● Task A-3
●● demonstrate how the specifications are used
in estimating costs and in making electrical
installations
●● identify and explain the application of the
various common line types used on drawings
●● explain why symbols and notations are used on
electrical drawings
●● identify symbols used on architectural,
mechanical, and electrical drawings
11
12 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications

TECHNICAL DRAWINGS
Border Line Centre Line
Several types of drawings are used in the technical
trades. This book uses three primary types of draw- Visible Object Line Cutting Plane Line
ings: architectural drawings, schematic drawings,
and wiring or layout diagrams (see an example of Hidden Line Section Lines
a schematic drawing and of a wiring diagram in Extension Lines
Figure 2-1). Architectural drawings show the floor Construction Line
plans of a building and the relative positions and
distances between elements within the building. Projection Line Dimension Lines
Schematic drawings show all of the significant com-
ponents of a system and their relationships to each Phantom Line Arrowheads
other, but use simplified, standard icons to repre-
sent devices. Wiring diagrams are like schematic Break Line Ticks

diagrams but the pictures used may look like the

Leader
devices that they are meant to represent, and the lay- Contour Line

out of the pictures may resemble the actual layout of Figure 2-2 Line types.
each device relative to each other device.
Technical drawings are used to show the size and
shape of an object. The basic elements of a technical
Visible Lines. Visible lines are continuous lines
drawing are lines, symbols, dimensions, and notations.
that show the visible edges of an object. An example
of a visible line would be the outside edge of the
Lines foundation wall shown on Sheet 3 of the drawings
provided with this book.
The lines that make up working drawings are some-
times referred to as the alphabet of lines, since
each one is unique and conveys a special meaning.
Figure 2-2 shows types of lines commonly found on Hidden Lines. Hidden lines are short dashed
construction drawings. lines. They show the edges of an object that are
hidden from view by surfaces that are closer to the
Lamp viewer. Hidden lines are used to show the location
Lamp
and position of the basement windows on Sheet 1 of
the drawing set.

Cable Centre Lines. Centre lines show the centre of

an arc or circle. They consist of alternating long
S
and short dashes. The exact centre of a circle is
normally indicated by the crossing of two short
S
dashes.

Section Lines. A sectional view (also called a sec-

Source Source tion or cross-section) is a view of a building in which
Figure 2-1 Example of a schematic drawing (on
we imagine a portion of the building has been sliced
the left) and of a wiring diagram (on the right). off to reveal the internal construction details. Section
lines show the solid parts (e.g., walls, floors) of the
 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications 13

portion of the building shown in the sectional view. lines indicate existing grades and solid contour lines
Section lines are also called cross-hatching. Different show finished grades.
types of cross-hatching represent different types of
materials used in the building. In Section A-A on
Sheet 4 of the drawings, different types of cross- 2.3 m

hatching indicate concrete used for the basement 2.4 m

floor, cement blocks used for the basement walls, 2.6 m

2.5 m

and bricks used on the outside walls above grade.

Cutting Plane Lines. Cutting plane lines con-
sist of a long dash followed by two short dashes.
They indicate where a building is being sectioned.
Lineweight refers to the thickness of a line
The basement floor plan, Sheet 3 of the drawings,
used on a drawing. Object lines have a heavier
uses a cutting plane line to show where the build-
lineweight (are thicker) than other lines, such as
ing is being sectioned. The arrows at each end of
hidden lines or dimension lines. Items of other
a cutting plane line indicate the direction you are
trades that appear on electrical drawings normally
looking when you are viewing the section. Refer to
have a lighter weight (are thinner) than the electri-
Cross Section A-A on Sheet 4.
cal items.
A A

VISUALIZING A BUILDING
Pictorial drawings are three-dimensional drawings
Phantom Lines. Phantom lines are short dashed that show two or more surfaces of an object in one
lines (about 1.5 times as long as the dashes for view. Three types of pictorial drawings are shown in
hidden lines) that show an alternative position. Figure 2-3. Figure 2-4 shows a pictorial drawing of
Figure 2-10B (bottom row) shows a double-action the wiring of a house.
door where actual positions are depicted with solid Unfortunately, pictorial drawings distort shapes
lines and alternate positions are dotted lines. Closed such as angles, arcs, and circles so that it is difficult
switch positions are shown by solid line while alter- to show the actual dimensions. Since it is important
nate positions are shown with a phantom line. that construction drawings show the exact size and
shape of an object, most construction drawings are
two-dimensional drawings.
Construction drawings are made using ortho-
Break Lines. Break lines are used where only a
graphic projection, which shows the true size and
part of the drawing needs to be shown. For exam-
shape of an object through a number of views. Each
ple, a break line might be used in a connection
diagram where it is necessary to show the termi-
nation of both ends of a cable but not the cable in
between.

Perspective

Isometric Oblique

Contour Lines. Contour lines are used on plot Figure 2-3 Pictorial drawings.
plans to show changes in elevation. Dashed contour
14 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications

BUILDING VIEWS
Plan Views
A plan view shows how a building will look when
viewed from directly above it. Plan views are used
to show lengths and widths. Floor plans and site
plans are examples of plan views. Figure 2-6 shows
the first floor plan of the house used as an example
in this book.

Elevations
An elevation is a side view of the building.
Elevations are used to show heights and widths.
Elevations are commonly used to show outside
walls, interior walls, and the placement of such
things as cupboards and equipment. Figure 2-7
shows the front (south) elevation of the house.

Figure 2-4 Three-dimensional view of house Sections

wiring.
A sectional view of the building (after a portion of the
building has been removed) is used to show the inte-
Top rior construction details of the building. Figure 2-8
shows a portion of Section A-A on Sheet 4.

Front
Left
Side SYMBOLS AND NOTATIONS
Graphical symbols are used on construction draw-
ings to represent equipment and components.
Symbols are used to show the size, location,
Top View and ratings of equipment. The Standards Coun-
cil of Canada (SCC) approves national standards
for symbols used on construction drawings and
accredits organizations such as the CSA Group
that are engaged in standards development. CSA
Left Side Front View Right Side standard Z99.3-1979 (1989) includes symbols
View View for electrical drawings. They relate closely to
the symbols published by the Institute of Electri-
Figure 2-5 Orthographic projection.
cal and Electronics Engineers and the American
National Standards Institute, which publish simi-
view shows two dimensions. To visualize an object lar standards for the United States.
(such as a house), two or more views will often be Figure 2-9 is a portion of a floor plan showing the
required. Figure 2-5 shows an example of ortho- symbols for two three-way switches controlling an
graphic projection. overhead light, and three duplex receptacles are also
Construction drawings use the terms plan for a shown. Symbols commonly used on construction
top view and elevation for a side view. drawings are shown in Figure 2-10 (A through E).
 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications 15

Figure 2-6 Floor plan.

Figure 2-7 Front elevation.

16 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications

Figure 2-8 Typical wall section.

Notes Explaining Symbols

●● When symbols are used to indicate future
equipment, they are shown with dashed lines
S3 and will have a note to indicate such use.
●● The orientation of a symbol on a drawing does
not alter the meaning of the symbol.
●● Lighting fixtures are generally drawn in a man-
S3 ner that will indicate the size, shape, and orien-
tation of the fixture.
●● Symbols found on electrical plans indicate
only the approximate location of electrical
equipment. When exact locations are required,
check the drawings for dimensions and confirm
all measurements with the owner or owner’s
representative.
A notation will generally be found on the plans
Figure 2-9 Electrical symbols on a floor plan. (blueprints) next to a specific symbol calling atten-
tion to a variation, type, size, quantity, or other
 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications 17

ELEVATION PLAN SECTION

Common
Brick Same as plan views
Brick
Face
With note telling kind of brick
(Common, face, etc.) Firebrick

Concrete or
block

Cut stone Rubble Cut stone

Stone

Cast stone
(Concrete) Cast stone Rubble or
Cut stone Rubble (Concrete) cut stone

Glass or

Small scale Large scale

Plaster Stud, lath, and plaster

Solid plaster wall

Floor areas are left blank;

Wood
note indicates kind of
wood used. Ends of boards
Siding Panel except trim Trim

Loose fill or batts

Insulation Same as plan views
Board and quilt

Solid and cork

Sheet metal Occasionally

flashing indicated by note

Metals Steel Cast iron

Indicated by note
other than or drawn to scale Same as elevation
flashing Small Aluminum Bronze
scale or brass
Large scale
or
Reinforcing bars
Structural Indicated by note or
steel or drawn to scale or
L-angles, -beams, etc.
Small scale Large scale

Figure 2-10A Architectural drafting symbols.

18 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications

ELEVATION VIEWS FROM OUTSIDE

Drip cap Meeting Muntin Points to side of

rail sash with hinges

Stile
Mullion

Sill Outside casing

OPENINGS IN A FRAME WALL

Mullion

Double hung Outswinging Awning

window casement window window Door
Inswinging
casement window

ELEVATION VIEWS FROM OUTSIDE

OPENINGS IN 8 in. (203 mm) BRICK WALL

Double hung Outswinging Horizontal Jalousie

window casement window sliding window window Door
Wall not plastered Plaster line

OPENINGS IN BRICK VENEER WALL ELEVATIONS SIMILAR TO BRICK WALL

Double hung DH Fixed glass DH

window Inswinging window window Door
casement window

ELEVATIONS SIMILAR TO BRICK WALL

Double hung Awning Double hung Awning

window window Door window window Door
OPENINGS IN A BRICK CAVITY WALL OPENINGS IN AN SCR BRICK WALL

OPENINGS IN INTERIOR PARTITIONS

Plastered arch
Interior Double-action Folding door Sliding door
door (accordion)
door

Figure 2-10B Architectural drafting symbols (continued).

 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications 19

PIPING PIPE FITTINGS (continued) PLUMBING (continued)

Piping, in general For welded or soldered fittings, Bell and
Screwed Plain kitchen sink
use joint indication shown below spigot
(Lettered with name of material conveyed)
S
Non-intersecting pipes Kitchen sink, R & L drain board
Lateral

Steam Kitchen sink, L H drain board

Expansion joint flanged
Condensate Combination sink & dishwasher
Cold water VALVES
Combination sink & laundry tray
Hot water For welded or soldered fittings, Bell and
Screwed S&T
use joint indication shown below spigot Service sink
Air
Gate valve SS
Vacuum Wash sink (Wall type)
Gas Globe valve
Wash sink
Refrigerant
Angle globe valve
Laundry tray
Oil LT
Angle gate valve
Water closet (Low tank)
PIPE FITTINGS Check valve
Water closet (No tank)
For welded or soldered fittings, Bell and
Screwed Angle check valve
use joint indication shown below spigot Urinal (Pedestal type)
Joint
Stop cock
Urinal (Wall type)
Elbow–90° deg Safety valve
Urinal (Corner type)
Elbow–45° deg Quick opening valve
Urinal (Stall type)
Elbow–turned up Float opening valve
Urinal (Trough type)
Elbow–turned down TU
Motor operated gate valve
Drinking fountain (Pedestal type)
Elbow–long radius LR DF
PLUMBING Drinking fountain (Wall type)
Side outlet elbow-
outlet down Corner bath DF
Drinking fountain (Trough type)
Side outlet elbow-
Recessed bath DF
outlet up Hot water tank HW
T
Base elbow Roll rim bath
Water heater WH
Double-branch elbow Sitz bath SS
Meter
Single-sweep tee Foot bath FB M
Hose rack
Double-sweep tee Bidet HR
B
Hose bibb
Reducing elbow Shower stall HB
Gas outlet
Tee Shower head (Plan) (Elev) G
(Plan) Vacuum outlet
Tee–outlet up Overhead gang shower (Elev)
Drain
Tee–outlet down Pedestal lavatory D
PL Grease separator G
Side outlet tee Wall lavatory
outlet up WL Oil separator
Corner lavatory O
Side outlet tee
outlet down Lav Cleanout C
Manicure lavatory O
Cross Medical lavatory Garage drain
ML
Reducer Dental lavatory
Floor drain with backwater valve
Dental lav
Eccentric reducer
Roof sump

Types of joints

Flanged Screwed Bell & spigot Welded Soldered

Figure 2-10C Standard symbols for plumbing, piping, and valves.

20 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications

Blank Off. adjustable Damper automatic Damper deflecting Damper deflecting up

Damper deflecting down Damper volume Duct flow direction Duct inclined drop

PLAN
D

ELEVATION

Duct inclined rise Duct section exhaust, return Duct section supply Duct section notation
Type
exhaust

Riser to 2nd floor Riser to 2nd floor K E

R
Place
kitchen

Riser to 1st floor Riser to 1st floor

Duct connection below joist Fan flexible connection Vanes Louver & screen air intake

Ventilator, cowl Ventilator, gooseneck Ventilator, rainproof Ventilator, standard

PLAN PLAN
PLAN PLAN

ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION ELEVATION

SINGLE-LINE REPRESENTATION

Supply Return Damper & retractor Anchor

S R PA

Hanger Expansion joint Louver opening Register or grille

H L

Figure 2-10D Sheet metal ductwork symbols.

 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications 21

ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLAN SYMBOLS

Single-pole switch C Clock outlet

3-way switch X Exit light

4-way switch F Fan outlet

Door switch Ionization type smoke alarm

Dimmer switch Photoelectric type smoke alarm

Remote control master T Thermostat

Remote control switch T Transformer size and type as noted

Motor starter switch Pushbutton

Lowercase letter designates
Buzzer
switching arrangement
Single receptacle 5-15R Bell

Duplex receptacle 5-15R D Door opener

Duplex receptacle 5-15R
floor-mounted CH Door chime

Duplex receptacle 5-20R TV TV outlet

Split-wired duplex receptacle 5-15R WH Water heater

Split-switched duplex
S receptacle 5-15R
3-conductor split-wired
receptacle 5-15R Data outlet

Dryer receptacle Telephone outlet

D
Range receptacle Data/telephone outlet
R

A Special-purpose outlet

Multioutlet assembly

Track lighting length and L

F
number of fixtures as noted

Paddle fan Paddle fan

Ceiling outlet with lamp

Wall outlet

Electrical panel flush-mounted

A
Fluorescent luminaire
Uppercase letter denotes style Electrical panel surface-mounted
d Lowercase letter denotes DP distribution panel
switching arrangement LP lighting panel
PP power panel

Recessed fluorescent luminaire

Branch-circuit wiring. Short lines
indicate ungrounded conductors.
The long line indicates an identified
Fluorescent strip luminaire or neutral conductor. A backward
slash indicates a bonding conductor.
The arrow indicates a home run.

Figure 2-10E Electrical symbols for floor plans.

22 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications

necessary information. In reality, a symbol might the owner or architect when exact positioning of
be considered to be a notation because, according to equipment is required.
the dictionary, symbols “represent words, phrases,
numbers, and quantities.”
Another method of using notations to avoid clut- SCALE
tering up a blueprint is to provide a system of sym-
A drawing of an object that is the same size as the
bols that refer to a specific table. For example, the
object is said to be drawn full scale or at a scale
written sentences on plans could be included in a
of 1:1.
table referred to by a notation. The special symbols
Construction drawings reduce the size of a
that refer to the table would have been shown on the
building down to fit on a piece of paper by drawing
actual plan.
everything proportionally smaller than it actually is.
If the word “typical” appears as a notation, it
This is called reduced scale. A drawing that uses a
means that construction details are uniform through-
scale of 1:50 indicates that the building is 50 times
out the building. An example would be “typical
larger than the drawing. A drawing with a scale of
two-bedroom suite.” This indicates that all the two-
¼0 5 1 ft has a scale of 1:48.
bedroom suites are identical.
Enlarged scale would produce a drawing larger
than the actual object. Printed circuit boards are
DIMENSIONS drawn using enlarged scale since many of the com-
ponents used in the manufacture of printed circuit
Dimensions are used to show the size of an object. boards are very small. An example of enlarged scale
Metric dimensions are normally expressed in milli- is 2:1, which indicates the drawing is twice as large
metres or metres. as the component.
When the American system of units is used on
building drawings such as floor plans, measure- Types of Scales (Measuring
ments are expressed in feet, inches, and fractions of
Instruments)
an inch. This is referred to as architectural practice.
There are 12 inches in 1 foot. A ́ mark after a num- Three types of scales are commonly used on con-
ber indicates a measurement in feet (e.g., 2 ́). If the struction drawings: architectural, metric, and engi-
number is followed by 0, it represents a dimension neering. When the drawing is in feet and inches,
in inches (e.g., 20). Architectural dimensions may be an imperial architectural scale is used. Figure 2-11
expressed in feet and inches or in inches; for exam- shows a portion of an architect’s triangular scale
ple, a dimension of 3 ́60 may be expressed as 420. showing the ¹∕80 and ¼0 scales.
The standard on construction drawings is to use feet For metric drawings, a metric scale is used.
and inches. For working with civil drawings (e.g., roads, dams,
Building dimensions are normally shown on the bridges), an engineering scale is used. Table 2-1 lists
architectural drawings from which all measurements common construction drawing scales.
should be taken. Be sure to confirm dimensions with Figure 2-12 gives examples of reading scales.

1 1
— 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 72 76 80 84 88 92 —
8 46 44 40 38 36 34 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 4

Figure 2-11 Architect’s scale.

 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications 23

Table 2-1 Read as 6.7 m or 6700 mm

Common construction drawing scales. 1:100

0 1m 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
METRIC ARCHITECTURAL ENGINEERING

1:20 1/20 5 1900 10 5 10

1:50 1/40 5 1900 10 5 20
METRIC SCALE 1:100
1:100 1/80 5 1900 10 5 30
1:200 1/160 5 1900 10 5 40 Read as 3.9 m or 3900 mm

1:500 1/320 5 1900 10 5 50

1:50
0 1m 2 3 4

THE WORKING DRAWINGS METRIC SCALE 1:50

The architect or engineer uses a set of working Read as 23'0"

drawings or plans to make the necessary instruc- Read as 8'0"
tions available to the skilled trades that are to build
1
— 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28
the structure. The plans show sizes, quantities, and 8 46 44 42 40 38 36 34 32

locations of the materials required and the con-

struction features of the structural members. Each
skilled construction trade—masons, carpenters,
electricians, and others—must study and interpret ARCHITECTURAL SCALE 1/8" 5 1 ft
these details of construction before the actual work
Read as 8'6"
is started.
The electrician must be able to convert the two- 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 1
—
14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 4
dimensional plans into an actual electrical instal-
lation, visualize the many views of the plans, and
coordinate them into a three-dimensional picture, as
shown in Figure 2-4. ARCHITECTURAL SCALE 1/4" 5 1 ft
The ability to visualize an accurate three-
dimensional picture requires a thorough knowl- Read as 4.8

edge of blueprint reading. Since all of the skilled

trades use a common set of plans, the electrician 10 1 2 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

must be able to interpret the lines and symbols that

refer to the electrical installation and also to inter-
pret those used by the other construction trades.
The electrician must know the structural makeup ENGINEERING SCALE 1" 5 10 ft
of the building and the construction materials to Read as 7.3
be used.
50 6 0 58 56 54 52 50 48 46
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14

The Drawing Set

A set of drawings is made up of several numbered
sheets. If there are many sheets in a set of drawings, ENGINEERING SCALE 1" 5 50 ft
they will be broken down into subsets of architec-
tural, electrical, mechanical drawings, etc. The elec- Figure 2-12 Reading scales.
trical drawings will be numbered E-1, E-2, E-3, etc.
24 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications

A typical set of construction drawings includes of other trades will show the locations of the equip-
a site plan, floor plans, elevations, details and sec- ment associated with that trade.
tions, symbols legend, schedules, diagrams, and
shop drawings.
Elevations
Elevations show the vertical faces of buildings, struc-
Site (Plot) Plan
tures, and equipment. Elevations are used to show
The site plan shows both interior and exterior vertical faces. Sheet 7 of
the drawings that accompany this textbook shows
●● the dimensions of the lot
elevations of the kitchen cupboards. On Sheet 1, you
●● a north-pointing arrow will find the elevations (south, north, east, and west)
●● the location of utilities and their connection of the building.
points
●● any outdoor lighting Details and Sections
●● easements (rights for use of some aspect of the
property by someone other than the owner; e.g., Details are large-scale drawings that are used when
use of a road that crosses the owner’s property) floor plans and elevations cannot provide suffi-
cient detail. Sheet 8 provides details of the require-
●● contour lines to show changes in elevation ments for the installation of a swimming pool.
●● accessory buildings (e.g., detached garages, Sheet 7 shows details of the bathroom vanities
storage sheds) as well as of the kitchen cabinets. Sections show
●● trees to be saved internal details of construction. See Section A-A
on Sheet 4.

Floor Plans
Legend of Symbols
Depending on the complexity of the building, a
A legend of symbols provides the contractor or elec-
set of drawings for a single-family dwelling may
trician with the information necessary to interpret
have only a single floor plan for each storey of
the symbols on the drawing.
the building. As the complexity of the building
increases there will be a number of floor plans for
each storey (one for each trade). A logical break- Schedules
down would be
Schedules are lists of equipment. The door sched-
●● Architectural
ule on Sheet 7 of the plans describes the size and
●● Electrical types of doors required for the house. Electrical
●● Mechanical schedules are made for such equipment as light-
●● Plumbing ing fixtures (luminaires), panelboards, raceways
and cables, motors, and mechanical equipment
●● HVAC (heating, ventilating, and air conditioning) connections.
●● Structural
On very complex installations, each electri- Diagrams
cal system such as power, lighting, voice/data, fire
alarm, and security/access control may have its own One-line and riser diagrams are provided to quickly
plan for each storey. show the flow of power throughout the building.
Use architectural floor plans to find room mea- Riser diagrams are used to show vertical details
surements, wall thickness, the sizes of doors and while using a one-line format to show power, tele-
windows, and the swing of doors. The floor plans phone, or fire alarm systems.
 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications 25

Shop Drawings followed by detailed requirements for the various

trades—excavating, masonry, carpentry, plumbing,
Shop drawings are used by equipment manufactur- heating, electrical, painting, and others.
ers to show details of custom-made equipment for The drawings for the residence used as an
a specific job. Installation diagrams that come with example for this textbook are included at the back
equipment could be considered to be shop drawings. of the text. The specifications for the electrical
work indicated on the plans are given in this book’s
SPECIFICATIONS Appendix B.
In the electrical specifications, the list of standard
Working drawings are usually complex because of electrical parts and supplies frequently includes
the amount of information they must include. To manufacturers’ names and catalogue numbers of the
prevent confusing details, it is standard practice to specified items. This ensures that these items will
include with each set of plans a set of detailed writ- be the correct size, type, and electrical rating, and
ten specifications prepared by the architect. that the quality will meet a certain standard. To allow
Specifications are written descriptions of mate- for the possibility that the contractor may be unable
rials and methods of construction. They provide to obtain the specified item, the words “or equiva-
general information for all trades involved in the lent” are usually added after the manufacturer’s name
construction of the building, as well as specialized and catalogue number.
information for the individual trades. Specifications The specifications are also useful to the electri-
include information on the sizes, type, and desired cal contractor as all of the items needed for a spe-
quality of the parts to be used in the structure. cific job are grouped together and the type or size of
Typical specifications include a section on Gen- each item is indicated. This information allows the
eral Clauses and Conditions that is applicable to all contractor to prepare an accurate cost estimate with-
trades involved in the construction. This section is out having to find all of the data in the plans.

REVIEW

Note: For these exercises, refer to the blueprints provided with this textbook. Also, refer to the
CEC when necessary. Where applicable, responses should be written in complete sentences.

PART 1: Drawings

1. Identify three line types shown on Sheet 2.

2. Determine the length of the following line using the indicated scales.
SCALE LENGTH
1:50 ____________________ _____________________
1:75 _____________________
1:100 _____________________
∕ 0 5 1 ft
18
_____________________
¼0 5 1 ft _____________________
26 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications

3. What is the purpose of specifications?

4. In what additional way are the specifications particularly useful to the electrical
contractor?

5. What is done to prevent a plan from becoming confusing because of too much detail?

6. Name three requirements contained in the specifications regarding material

(Appendix B).
a.
b.
c.
7. What are the drawings showing details of custom-made equipment called?

8. What phrase is used when a substitution is permitted for a specific item in a

specification?

9. What is the purpose of an electrical symbol?

10. What is a notation?

11. List five electrical notations found on the plans for the residence used as an example
in this book. Refer to the blueprints provided with this textbook.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications 27

PART 2: STRUCTURAL FEATURES

1. To what scale is the basement plan drawn?

2. What is the size of the footing for the steel support columns in the basement?

3. What kind of finish is on the wall of the front porch?

4. Give the size, spacing, and direction of the ceiling joists in the workshop.

5. What is the size of the lot on which this residence is located?

6. In what compass direction is the front of the house facing?

7. How far is the front garage wall from the curb?

8. How far is the side garage wall from the property lot line?

9. How many steel support columns are in the basement, and what size are they?

10. What is the purpose of the I-beams that rest on top of the steel support columns?

11. What type of floor is to be in the garage?

12. Where is access to the attic provided?

13. Give the thickness of the outer basement walls.

14. What material is indicated for the foundation walls?

15. Where are the smoke/CO alarms located in the basement?

28 UNIT 2 Drawings and Specifications

16. What is the ceiling height in the basement workshop, from the bottom of the joists to
the floor?

17. Give the size and type of the front door.

18. Who is to furnish the range hood?

19. Who is to install the range hood?

20. Which task or tasks (and subtasks) in the Red Seal essential skills relate to the
interpretation of plans, drawings, and specifications?
 UNIT

3
Electrical Outlets
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to
●● identify and explain the electrical outlet symbols
used in the plans of the single-family dwelling
●● discuss the types of outlets, boxes, fixtures, and
RED SEAL
switches used in the residence
OCCUPATIONAL
●● explain the methods of mounting the various STANDARD
electrical devices used in the residence (RSOS)
●● understand the meaning of the terms receptacle
outlet and lighting outlet For the Red Seal exam,
note that this unit covers
●● understand the preferred way to position the following RSOS tasks:
receptacles in wall boxes
●● Task C-16
●● position wall boxes in relation to finished wall
surfaces ●● Task C-17
●● make surface extensions from concealed wiring
●● determine the number of wires permitted in a
given size box

29
30 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

ELECTRICAL OUTLETS
The Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) defines an outlet Always allow at least 150 mm of
free conductor at all outlets and
as a point on a wiring system where current is taken junctions so that you can work
to supply utilization equipment. easily with the wiring devices
to be installed.
The type and location of electrical outlets used
for an installation are shown on electrical floor plans
(Figure 3-1).
A receptacle outlet is an outlet where one or
more receptacles are installed (Figure 3-2).
A lighting outlet is intended for the direct
connection of a lampholder, a lighting fixture, or
a pendant cord terminating in a lampholder
(Figure 3-3).
A toggle switch is not an outlet; however, Figure 3-2 When a receptacle is connected to
the term outlet is used broadly by electricians the wires, the outlet is called a receptacle outlet.
to include non-current-consuming switches and For ease in working with wiring devices, CEC
similar control devices in a wiring system when Rule 12-3000 6) requires that at least 150 mm of
free conductor be provided.
estimating the cost of the installation. Each type
of outlet is represented on the plans as a symbol.
Figure 3-1 shows the receptacle by the symbol .
Standard electrical symbols are shown in Figure 2-10E
the outlet. These lines are usually curved so that they
in Unit 2. cannot be mistaken for visible object lines. Outlets
The curved lines in Figure 3-1 run from the shown on the plan without curved lines are perma-
lighting outlet to the switch or switches that control nently powered and have no switch control.
When preparing electrical plans, most archi-
tects, designers, and electrical engineers use
symbols approved by the Standards Council of
Canada (SCC) whenever possible. However,
plans may contain symbols that are not found
S3

Lighting
S3 outlet

Figure 3-3 When a luminaire is connected to the

wires, the outlet is called a lighting outlet. The CEC
Figure 3-1 Use of electrical symbols and requires that at least 150 mm of free conductor be
notations on a floor plan. provided.
 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 31

Luminaires AND OUTLETS

SYMBOL NOTATION

Plugmold entire length of Architects often include in the specifications an

1
workbench. Outlets 90 cm O.C. amount of money to purchase electrical fixtures.
install 122 cm to centre from
floor, GFCI-protected.
The electrical contractor includes this amount in
the bid, and the choice of fixtures is then left to the
Track lighting. Provide five homeowner. If the owner selects luminaires whose
2 lampholders. total cost exceeds the fixture allowance, the owner
is expected to pay the difference between the actual
Two 40-watt rapid start cost and the specification allowance. If the lumi-
3 fluorescent lamps in valance, naires are not selected before the roughing-in stage
control with dimmer switch.
of wiring of the house, the electrician usually installs
outlet boxes having standard fixture mounting studs.
Figure 3-4 How notations might be added to Most modern surface-mount luminaires can be
a symbol to explain its meaning. The architect or fastened to an octagon box (Figure 3-7A) or an out-
engineer can choose to fully explain the meaning
let box with a plaster ring using appropriate #8–32
directly on the plan if there is sufficient room or,
if there is insufficient room, a notation can be metal screws and mounting strap furnished with the
used. luminaire.
A box must be installed at each outlet or switch
location, Rule 12-3000 1). There are exceptions
to this rule, but in general they relate to special
in these standards. When unlisted (nonstandard) manufactured wiring systems where the “box” is
symbols are used, the electrician must refer to an integral part of the system. For standard wiring
a legend that interprets these symbols. The methods, such as cable or conduit, a box is usually
legend may be included on the plans or in the required.
specifications. In many instances, a notation on Figures 3-8A, 3-8B, 3-9A, and 3-9B illustrate
the plan will clarify the meaning of the symbol. types of non-metallic and metallic boxes.
See Figure 3-4. Outlet boxes must be accessible, Rule 12-3014 1).
Figures 3-5, 3-6A, 3-6B, and 3-6C show elec- Be careful when roughing in boxes for fixtures
trical symbols for outlets and their meanings. and also when hanging luminaires to
Although several symbols have the same shape,
differences in the interior presentation plans indi-
●● non-metallic device boxes
cate their different meanings. For example, dif- ●● non-metallic device plaster rings
ferent meanings are shown in Figure 3-5 for the ●● metallic device boxes
outlet symbols. A good practice in studying sym-
●● metallic device plaster rings
bols is to learn the basic forms first and then add
the supplemental information to obtain different ●● any non-metallic box, unless specifically marked
meanings. on the box or carton for use as a luminaire sup-
port, or to support other equipment, or to accom-
modate heat-producing equipment
Unless the box, device plaster ring, or carton
is marked to indicate that it has been listed by the
S GFCI WP
Split- GFCI Weatherproof Split- CSA for the support of luminaires, do not use where
switched
receptacle
receptacle
outlet
receptacle
outlet
wired
receptacle
luminaires are to be hung. Refer to Rule 12-1110.
outlet outlet Be careful when installing a ceiling outlet box
(three-wire CCT)
for the purpose of supporting a fan. See Unit 11
Figure 3-5 Variations in outlet symbols. for a detailed discussion of paddle fans and their
installation.
32 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

OUTLETS CEILING WALL

Surface-mounted
luminaire

Lampholder S S
with pull switch PS
PS

Recessed R R
luminaire

Surface-mounted
fluorescent luminaire

Recessed
fluorescent luminaire R R

Surface or pendant
continuous row
fluorescent luminaire(s)

Recessed
continuous row
fluorescent luminaire(s) R

Bare lamp
fluorescent luminaire(s)

Surface or X X
pendant exit light

Recessed RX RX
exit light

Courtesy of National Electrical Contractors Association

Blanked B B
outlet

Outlet controlled
by low-voltage
switching when L L
relay is installed
in outlet box

Junction box J J

Figure 3-6A Symbols for different types of lighting outlets.

 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 33

RECEPTACLE OUTLETS

Single receptacle outlet Clothes dryer outlet

D

Duplex receptacle outlet Exhaust fan outlet

Triplex receptacle outlet C Clock outlet

Duplex receptacle outlet,

Floor outlet
S split-switched

Multioutlet assembly; arrow

shows limit of installation.
Double duplex receptacle Appropriate symbol indicates
(quadplex) type of outlet. Spacing of
outlets indicated by “X” cm.

Weatherproof receptacle outlet Floor single receptacle outlet

F = flush-mounted, S = surface-mounted
WP

F
Ground-fault circuit interrupter Floor duplex receptacle outlet
receptacle outlet F = flush-mounted, S = surface-mounted
GFCI

Courtesy of National Electrical Contractors Association

s
Range outlet Floor special-purpose outlet
F = flush-mounted, S = surface-mounted
R

Special-purpose outlet (subscript letters indicate special

variations: I = dishwasher; also A, B, C, D, etc., are letters
I keyed to explanation on drawings or in specifications).

Figure 3-6B Symbols for receptacle outlets.

34 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

S Alarm—smoke
J Junction box—ceiling

H Alarm—heat J Junction box—wall

Lighting or power
Battery or
panel, recessed

or Lighting or power
Buzzer panel, surface-mounted

Circuit breaker MD Motion detector

Data outlet M Motor

Disconnect switch, fused; Motor: “2” indicates

2 horsepower
size as indicated on drawings.
xxAF
“xxAF” indicates fuse ampere
yyAT rating. “yyAT” indicates switch
ampere rating.
Overload relay

Disconnect switch, unfused;

Push button
xxA size as indicated on
drawings. “xxA” indicates
switch ampere rating.
Switch and fuse

Doorbell
or Telephone outlet

CH Door chime
Telephone outlet—
WP or WP weatherproof

D Door opener (electric) or Telephone outlet—

W W wall mounted

Fan: ceiling-suspended Telephone/data outlet

(paddle)

Courtesy of National Electrical Contractors Association

T Thermostat—line voltage
L
Fan: ceiling-suspended
(paddle) fan with light
T Thermostat—low voltage
LV

Fan: wall TS Time switch

Ground T Transformer

Figure 3-6C Miscellaneous symbols.

 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 35

40 Round covers 40 Pan box 40 Extension ring

Bonding
screw
54-C-6 54-C-1 56111 53151-K

40 Octagonal boxes
2 1/80 deep-344 mL
(21 in.3)

All photos: Courtesy of Thomas & Betts Corporation

Bonding Bonding
screw screw

54171-L 54171-LB
Clamps for Clamps for
non-metallic non-metallic
sheathed cable sheathed cable,
side bracket

Figure 3-7A Octagonal outlet boxes, showing extension ring and covers.

If the owner selects luminaires before construc-

tion, the architect can specify these fixtures in the
plans and/or specifications, giving the electrician
advance information on any special framing, recess-
ing, or mounting requirements. This information
must be provided in the case of recessed luminaires,
which require a specific wall or ceiling opening.
Many types of luminaires are available. Figure
3-10 shows several typical luminaires that may be
found in a dwelling unit. It also shows the electri-
cal symbols used on plans to designate these fix-
tures and the type of outlet boxes or switch boxes
on which the luminaires can be mounted. A standard
receptacle outlet is shown as well. These switch
boxes are made of steel as shown in Figures 3-9A
and 3-9B; they may also be made of plastic, as
shown in Figure 3-8A.
Courtesy of Craig Trineer

When mounting an outlet box in a wall or ceil-

ing that is to be insulated and covered with a vapour
barrier, you must make special provision to main-
tain the integrity of the vapour barrier. A polyethyl-
ene boot covers the outlet box and is sealed to the
Figure 3-7B Device box complete with vapour boot. 6-mm polyethylene vapour barrier.
36 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

Figure 3-8A Non-metallic device box.

Figure 3-7B shows a typical polyethylene boot

installed on a 102-mm (4-in.) receptacle or switch box.
After inserting the
box into the hole
cut in the drywall,
the bracket SWITCHES
springs outward—
behind the
drywall. When Figure 3-11 shows some of the standard symbols
tightened, the for various types of switches and typical connection
screws secure the
box in place. diagrams. Any sectional switch box or 4" (102 mm)
square box with a side-mounting bracket and raised
switch cover can be used to install these switches
(Figure 3-10).
After inserting the
box into the hole
cut in the drywall, JUNCTION BOXES AND
when screws are
turned, “ears” flip
SWITCH (DEVICE) BOXES (RULES
upward behind the 12-3000 THROUGH 12-3036)
drywall, tightly
locking the box in
place. Junction boxes are sometimes placed in a circuit for
convenience in joining two or more cables or con-
duits. All conductors entering a junction box are
joined to other conductors entering the same box
to form proper connections so that the circuit will
Figure 3-8B Non-metallic device box.
operate in its intended manner.

Bonding screw
tapped hole
Bonding screw
tapped hole
Courtesy of Thomas & Betts Corporation

Courtesy of Thomas & Betts Corporation

Figure 3-9A Gang-type switch (device) box. Figure 3-9B Octagon box.
 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 37

SYMBOL TYPE OF LUMINAIRE OR OUTLET BOXES THAT MAY BE USED

C
1.

Or
B

Or

Ceiling (A) Adjustable bracket with outlet box.

lighting Surface-mounted luminaire (B) Outlet box with bracket for
outlet (lighting fixture) joist mounting.
(C) Outlet box with captive nails/bracket
for joist mounting.
(D) Boxes are “listed” for luminaire (lighting
fixture) support
Photos left column courtesy of Progress Lighting [1, 3], Eaton’s Cooper Lighting Business [2], Leviton Manufacturing Company [4A & 4B]

2. Connections to the light fixture (luminaire) are made in the

box shown at the side of the luminaire. The connections are
accessible through the opening for mounting the luminaire,
as shown. CEC Rule 30-910.

Recessed
ceiling
lighting
outlet Recessed luminaire (lighting fixture)

3.
A B

© 2018 Cengage, All photos right column courtesy of Thomas & Betts Corporation
Wall
lighting (A) Device box with captive nails/bracket
outlet for stud mounting.
(B) Mounting bracket for outlet box.
Wall-mounted luminaire (lighting fixture)
also called a “sconce”

4. A C

Duplex B
receptacle
outlet

(A) Single-gang switch (device) box.

Triplex (B) 102 mm square box with captive nails for
receptacle A B stud mounting.
outlet (C) 102 mm square single-gang raised adapter ring.

Figure 3-10 Typical electrical symbols, items they represent, and boxes that could be used.
38 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

SYMBOL FLUSH TOGGLE SWITCH OPERATION CONNECTIONS

On Off
Single-pole

S2

On Off
Double-pole

S3
C C

Position Position
Three-way 1 2

S4

Position Position
1 2
Four-way

Sp

For controlling Also available in three-way

lights from one type for controlling light
Switch and point, with pilot from two points,
pilot light light indication with pilot light indication

Figure 3-11 Standard switches and symbols.

 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 39

All electrical installations must conform to the inside the boxes to bond any and all metal raceways
CEC standards requiring that junction boxes be and/or armoured cables together, Rule 12-3000 2).
installed so that the wiring contained in them shall The house wiring system is usually formed by
be accessible without removing any part of the a number of specific circuits, each consisting of
building. In house wiring, this requirement limits a continuous run of cable from outlet to outlet or
the use of junction boxes to unimproved basements, from box to box. The residence plans show many
garages, and open attic spaces, because blank box branch circuits for general lighting, appliances,
covers exposed to view detract from the appearance electric heating, and other requirements. The spe-
of a room. An outlet box such as the one installed cific CEC rules for each of these circuits are cov-
for the front hall luminaire is really a junction box ered in later units.
because it contains splices. Removing the luminaire
makes the box accessible, thereby meeting CEC
requirements. Refer to Figures 3-12 and 3-13. GANGED SWITCH
Rule 12-3000 1) requires that a box or fitting be (DEVICE) BOXES
installed wherever splices, switches, outlets, junc-
A flush switch or receptacle outlet for residential
tion points, or pull points are required (Figure 3-12).
use fits into a standard 3 × 2 × 2½-in. (204 ml) sec-
However, sometimes a change is made from one
tional switch box (sometimes called a device box).
wiring method to another, for example, armoured
When two or more switches (or outlets) are located
cable to electrical metallic tubing (EMT). The fit-
at the same point, single switch boxes may be ganged
ting where the change is made must be accessible
or fastened together to provide the required mounts
after installation (see Figure 3-14).
(Figures 3-15B and 3-15C) or a welded (two or
Boxes shall be rigidly and securely mounted,
more) gang box may be used (Figure 3-15A).
Rule 12-3010 1).
Three switch boxes can be ganged together by
removing and discarding one side from both the
NON-METALLIC OUTLET first and third switch boxes, and both sides from
AND DEVICE BOXES the second (centre) switch box. The boxes are then
joined together (Figure 3-15B). After the switches
The CEC permits non-metallic outlet and device are installed, the gang is trimmed with a gang plate
boxes to be installed where the wiring method is non- having the required number of switch handle or
metallic sheathed cable, Rule 12-524. Non-metallic receptacle outlet openings. These plates are called
boxes may be used with armoured cable or metal two-gang wall plates, three-gang wall plates, and
raceways, but only if a proper means is provided so on, depending on the number of openings.

XX
Bond X
X

Bond

Figure 3-12 A box (or fitting) must be installed wherever there are splices, outlets, switches, or other
junction points. Refer to the points marked X. A potential CEC violation is shown at point XX. However,
this is a violation only if the cable is not supplying equipment with an integral connection box or if the
apparatus has not been approved as a connection box, Rules 12-3000 1) and 12-3014 1).
40 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

Junction box concealed

Ceiling in ceiling

Exposed extension–conduit

A
Violation. It is against the Code to make an extension from
a cover that is attached to a recessed
junction box or device box, Rule 12-3026 1)

Junction box concealed

Ceiling in ceiling

Extension ring
Exposed extension–conduit

B This Meets Code. A box or extension ring must be mounted over and
mechanically secured to the original box, Rule 12-3026 1)

Separate equipment-
bonding conductor
Junction box concealed
Ceiling in ceiling

Flexible extension
C
Extension must provide a separate
equipment-bonding conductor.
Violation. A box or extension ring must be mounted over and
mechanically secured to the original box, Rule 12-3026 1)

Figure 3-13 How to make an extension from a flush-mounted box.

The dimensions of a standard sectional switch 6 mm from the finished surface when the boxes
box, 3 × 2 in. (76.2 3 50.8 mm), are the dimen- are mounted in noncombustible walls or ceilings
sions of the opening of the box. The depth of the made of concrete, tile, or similar materials. When
box may vary from l½ to 3½ in. (38–89 mm), the wall or ceiling construction is of combustible
depending on the requirements of the building material (wood), the box must be set flush with the
construction and the number of conductors and surface or project from it. See Figures 3-17A and
devices to be installed. Rules 12-3000 through 3-17B. These requirements are meant to prevent
12-3036 cover outlets, devices, and junction the spread of fire if a short circuit occurs within
boxes. See Figure 3-16 for a list of common box the box.
dimensions. Single-gang device boxes are normally mounted
Rule 12-3016 1) states that boxes must be to a structural member of the building with nails
mounted so that they will be set back not more than or screws. Ganged sectional device boxes may be
 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 41

Figure 3-14 A transition from one wiring method to another. In this case, the armour of the AC90 cable
is removed, allowing sufficient length of the conductors to be run through the conduit. A proper fitting as
shown must be used at the transition point, and the fitting must be accessible after installation.
Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon
Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

Figure 3-15B Standard flush switches installed

in ganged sectional device boxes.

Figure 3-15A Device boxes. This box has welded Figures 3-18A and 3-18B. When an outlet box is
sides. The boxes in Figure 3-15C have removable to be mounted at a specific location between joists,
sides, which permits several boxes to be ganged
together.
as for luminaires, an offset bar hanger is used
(Figure 3-10).
Older installations of switch boxes may have
nails passing through the box. This is no longer
installed using a pair of metal or wood mounting permitted unless the nails are not more than
strips, Rule 12-3010 2). These strips may also be 6.4 mm from the back or ends of the box. See
used to install a device box between wall studs. See Rule 12-3010 5).
42 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

included with this textbook indicate special-

purpose outlets by a triangle inside a circle with a
subscript letter. In some cases, a subscript number
is added to the letter.
When a special-purpose outlet is indicated
on the plans or in the specifications, the electri-
cian must check for special requirements, such

Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

as a separate circuit, a special 240-volt circuit,
a special grounding or polarized receptacle, a
device box with extra support (Figure 3-21),
or other preparation. Special-purpose outlets
include
●● central vacuum receptacle

Figure 3-15C Sectional boxes can have sides

●● weatherproof receptacle
removed and secured to another sectional box, ●● dedicated receptacle, perhaps for a home
creating a two-gang box. computer
●● air-conditioning receptacle
●● clock receptacle
BOXES FOR CONDUIT WIRING
For some types of construction, conduit rather than NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS
cable wiring is used. IN A BOX
When conduit is installed in a residence, it
is quite common to use 4" × 4" square boxes Rule 12-3034 dictates that outlet boxes, switch
trimmed with suitable plaster covers (Figure 3-16). boxes, and device boxes be large enough to pro-
There are sufficient knockouts in the top, bottom, vide ample room for the wires without having to
sides, and back of the box to permit a number of jam or crowd the wires into them. CEC Table 23
conduits to run into it. Plenty of room is avail- specifies the maximum number of conductors
able for the conductors and wiring devices. Note allowed in standard outlet boxes and switch boxes
how easily these 4" × 4" square outlet boxes can see Table 3-1. A conductor running through the
be mounted back to back by installing a small box is counted as one conductor. Each conduc-
fitting between them; see photos B and C in tor originating outside the box and terminating
Figure 3-19. inside it is counted as one conductor. Conductors
You can trim 4-in. (102-mm) square outlet boxes that originate and terminate within the box are not
with one-gang or two-gang plaster rings where wir- counted.
ing devices will be installed. Where luminaires will be When conductors are the same size, the proper
installed, use a plaster ring having a round opening. box size can be selected by referring to CEC
Any unused openings in outlet and device boxes Table 23. When conductors of different sizes are
must be closed, as per Rule 12-3024, using knock- used, refer to CEC Table 22; see Table 3-2.
out fillers, Figure 3-20. Tables 22 and 23 must take in to account the vol-
ume occupied by fittings or devices such as fixture
studs, wire connectors, hickeys, switches, or recep-
tacles that may be in the box. For assistance in this
SPECIAL - PURPOSE OUTLETS
case, see Table 3-3. When the box contains one or
Special-purpose outlets are normally shown on more fittings (such as fixture studs or hickeys; see
floor plans. They are described by a notation and Figure 3-22), the number of conductors must be one
are also detailed in the specifications. The plans fewer than shown in Table 23 for each type of device.
 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 43

QUICK-CHECK BOX SELECTION GUIDE

FOR BOXES GENERALLY USED FOR RESIDENTIAL WIRING
DEVICE BOXES 332311/2 33232 332321/4 332321/2 33233
(7.5 in.3) (10 in.3) (10.5 in.3) (12.5 in.3) (16 in.3)

Wire Millilitres 131 163 163 204 245

size
14 AWG 14 5 6 6 8 10

12 AWG 12 4 5 5 7 8

The number of conductors is “per gang”

SQUARE BOXES 434311/2 434321/8
411/163411/16311/2 411/163411/16321/8
(21 in.3) (30.3 in.3)

Wire Millilitres 344 491 491 688

size
14 AWG 14 14 20 20 28

12 AWG 12 12 17 17 24

OCTAGON BOXES 4311/2 4321/8

(15.5 in.3) (21.5 in.3)

Wire Millilitres 245 344

size
14 AWG 14 10 14

12 AWG 12 8 12

HANDY BOXES 4321/8311/2 4321/8317/8 432321/8

(10.3 in.3) (13 in.3) (14.5 in.3)

Wire Millilitres 147 229 262

size
14 AWG 14 6 9 10

12 AWG 12 5 8 9

RAISED COVERS
Where raised covers are marked with their
volume in cubic inches, that volume may be added
to the box volume to determine maximum number
of conductors in the combined box and raised
cover. Non-metallic raised covers are available.

MASONRY BOXES
33/432321/2 33/432331/2
(14 in.3) (21 in.3)

Wire Masonry boxes have lots of room. Available

size up to 6 gang. The conductor fill is for each
14 AWG 7 10 gang. Refer to Table 23.

12 AWG 6 9
3-gang box

Note: Be sure to make deductions from the above maximum number of conductors permitted for wire connectors, wiring devices,
and fixture studs. The volume is taken directly from Table 23 of the CEC.

Figure 3-16 quick-check box selection guide.

44 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

Concrete, tile, or other Wood or other

noncombustible material combustible material

Box set back

not more than
6 mm Box set flush with
finished surface

Figure 3-17A Box position in walls and ceilings constructed of various materials, Rule 12-3016.

Repair these
gaps

Nail or Two-gang cable

screw device boxes
50 mm 3
100 mm
wood stud

Figure 3-17B Repair these gaps, Rule 12-3016.

Screw in
mounting bracket
19-mm-thick wood strip min.,
Rule 12-3010 2)

Positioning
tabs for 12 -in.
drywall

Mounting
strips

Figure 3-18A Device boxes installed between Front view Top view
studs using metal mounting strips. If wooden
boards are used, they must be at least 19 mm Figure 3-18B A method of mounting device
thick and securely fastened to the stud. boxes to wood studs.
 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 45

A B

a part of Cengage, Inc. Reproduced by permission. [Link]/permissions

From Mullin/Simmons. Electrical Wiring Residential, 18E. © 2015 Delmar Learning,

Figure 3-19 Boxes for conduit wiring.

Deduct two conductors for each device mount­ed dimmer switches are installed. In most cases, dim-
on a single strap (switches, receptacles). The deduc- mer switches are larger than conventional switches.
tion of two conductors has become necessary Deduct one conductor for every two wire con­
because of severe crowding of conductors in the box nec­tors. For example, for two or three wire con­nec­
when the switch or receptacle is mounted or when tors, deduct one wire; for four or five connectors,
46 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

SELECTING A BOX WHEN

ALL CONDUCTORS ARE
THE SAME SIZE

EXAMPLE
A box contains one fixture stud and two
cable clamps. The number of conductors
permitted in the box shall be one fewer than
shown in CEC Table 23. (Deduct one conductor
for the fixture stud.)
A further deduction of two conductors is made
for each wiring device in the box, but if two
devices are mounted on the same strap, they
count as a single device. For example, if a switch
Figure 3-20 Unused openings in boxes must and a receptacle are mounted on a single strap,
be closed according to CEC Rule 12-3024. only two conductors are deducted.
This is done to contain electrical short-circuit Larger devices such as smart switches or
problems inside the box or panel and to keep
dimmers must have the volume of the box, and
rodents out.
hence the number of allowable conductors in it,
WIRES MUST BE 150 mm MINIMUM, CEC reduced by the volume occupied by the device
Rule 12-3000 6). See Figure 3-2.
(CEC Rule 12-3034 3).

SELECTING A BOX WHEN

CONDUCTORS ARE DIFFERENT
SIZES, Rule 12-3034 4)*
Courtesy of Thomas & Betts Corporation

When the box will contain different size wires, do

the following:
●● Determine the size of conductors to be used and the

number of each (e.g., two No. 10 and two No. 12).

●● Determine if the box is to contain any wiring

devices (switch or receptacle), wire connectors,

or fixture studs. This volume adjustment must be
based on the volume of the largest conductor in the
Figure 3-21 Flush-mounted device box for steel box. Dimmers and smart switches must have their
studs with required additional support.
volume subtracted from the available space within
the box in accordance with Rule 12-3034 3).
●● Deduct one conductor for each pair of wire con-

nectors. For example, two or three equal one

deduct two wires. There is no deduction for the wire, four or five equal two wires. Note: If only
first wire connector because it will probably one wire connector is used, it is not counted.
be used for the second bonding connection. Be ●● Deduct two conductors for each switch or

sure to include all conductor sizes (No. 14, No. 12, receptacle that is less than 25 mm between
No. 10, No. 8, and No. 6 AWG) when determining the mounting strap and the back of the device.
the size of the box to be installed. See Figures 3-23 ●● Make the necessary adjustments for devices,

and 3-24 for examples of this CEC requirement, wire connectors, and fixture studs.
Rule 12-3034 1).
* © 2021 Canadian Standards Association
 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 47

Table 3-1
CEC Table 23.
CEC TABLE 23
Number of INSULATED CONDUCTORS in boxes
(Rule 12-3034)

Maximum Number of
Conductors (per AWG size)
Capacity
Box Dimensions      Trade Size mL (in.3) 14 12 10 8 6
Octagonal 4 3 1½ 245 (15) 10 8 6 5 3
1
4 3 2 /8 344 (21) 14 12 9 7 4
Square 4 3 1½ 344 (21) 14 12 9 7 4
1
4 3 2 /8 491 (30) 20 17 13 10 6
411/16 3 1½ 491 (30) 20 17 13 10 6
11 1
4 /16 3 2 /8 688 (42) 28 24 18 15 9
Round 43½ 81 (5) 3 2 2 1 1
Device 3 3 2 3 1½ 131 (8) 5 4 3 2 1
33232 163 (10) 6 5 4 3 2
3 3 2 3 2¼ 163 (10) 6 5 4 3 2
3 3 2 3 2½ 204 (12.5) 8 7 5 4 2
33233 245 (15) 10 8 6 5 3
4 3 2 3 1½ 147 (9) 6 5 4 3 2
4 3 21/8 3 17/8 229 (14) 9 8 6 5 3
3 7
4 3 2 /8 3 1 /8 262 (16) 10 9 7 5 3
Masonry 3¾ 3 2 3 2½ 229 (14)/gang 9 8 6 5 3
3¾ 3 2 3 3½ 344 (21)/gang 14 12 9 7 4
4 3 2¼ 3 23/8 331 (20.25)/gang 13 11 9 7 4
3
4 3 2¼ 3 3 /8 364 (22.25)/gang 14 12 9 8 4
Through Box 3¾ 3 2 3.8/mm (6/in.) depth 4 3 2 2 1
Concrete Ring 4 7.7/mm (12/in.) depth 8 6 5 4 2
FS 1 Gang 229 (14) 9 8 6 5 3
1 Gang tandem 557 (34) 22 19 15 12 7
© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

2 Gang 426 (26) 17 14 11 9 5

3 Gang 671 (41) 27 23 18 14 9
4 Gang 917 (56) 37 32 24 20 12
FD 1 Gang 368 (22.5) 15 12 10 8 5
2 Gang 671 (41) 27 23 18 14 9
3 Gang 983 (60) 40 34 26 21 13
4 Gang 1392 (85) 56 48 37 30 18

●● Select the box based on the total volume Solution

required for conductors according to Table 23. Two No. 14 AWG wires 3 24.6 mL/wire 5 49.2 mL
Two No. 12 AWG wires 3 28.7 mL/wire 5 57.4 mL
EXAMPLE Three wire connectors
What is the minimum volume required Each pair counts as one No. 12 wire 5 28.7 mL
for a box that will contain one switch, Each switch counts as two No. 12 wires 5 57.4 mL
two No. 14 wires, two No. 12 wires, and three No. 33 Total volume 5 192.7 mL
wire connectors? The cable is armoured cable.
48 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

Table 3-2
CEC Table 22.
CEC Table 22
Space for INSULATED CONDUCTORS in boxes
(Rule 12-3034)
Hickey Fixture stud
Usable Space Required

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Size of Conductor, for Each Insulated
AWG Conductor, mL Figure 3-22 Hickey and fixture stud.

14 24.6
12 28.7
10 36.9
8 45.1
6 73.7 their volume or have dimensions comparable to
the boxes in Table 23, their volume may be con-
sidered when determining the total volume, Rule
12-3034 6).
Therefore, select a box having a minimum vol- In some cases, the volume listed in Table 23 is
ume of 192.7 mL of space. A 3 3 2 3 2½ in. device not equivalent to the length 3 width 3 depth of the
box has a volume of 204 mL from Table 23, and this box. When doing calculations using boxes listed in
would be sufficient. The cubic-inch volume may be Table 23, use the volume found in the table. Other-
marked on the box; otherwise refer to the column of wise, multiply L 3 W 3 D to find the actual volume
Table 23 entitled “Capacity.” of the box. For example, a 12 3 12 3 6 in. box is
When sectional boxes are ganged together, the not found in Table 23. Therefore, the box volume is
volume to be filled is the total volume of the assem- 12 3 12 3 6 5 864 in.3 (14.1 L). Figures 3-25 and
bled boxes. Fittings, such as plaster rings, raised 3-26 show how a 19 mm raised cover (plaster ring)
covers, and extension rings, may be used with the increases the wiring space of the box to which it is
sectional boxes. If these fittings are marked with attached.

Table 3-3
Quick checklist for determining the proper size of boxes.
●● If box contains NO fittings, devices, fixture studs, hickeys, ●● . . . refer directly to CEC Table 23.
switches, or receptacles . . .
●● If box contains ONE or MORE fittings, fixture studs, or ●● . . . deduct ONE from maximum number of
hickeys . . . conductors permitted in Table 23 for each type.
●● For each device on a single strap containing ONE or MORE ●● . . . deduct ANOTHER TWO from Table 23.
devices such as switches, receptacles, or pilot lights . . .
●● For ONE or MORE isolated (insulated) grounding conductors . . . ●● . . . deduct ANOTHER ONE from Table 23.
© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

●● For each PAIR of insulated wire connectors . . . ●● . . . deduct another conductor from the number
permitted by Table 23.
●● For conductors running through the box . . . ●● . . . count ONE conductor for each conductor
running through the box.
●● For conductors that originate outside the box and terminate ●● . . . count ONE conductor for each conductor
inside the box . . . originating outside and terminating inside the box.
●● If no part of the conductor leaves the box—for example, a ●● . . . don’t count the conductor.
“jumper” wire used to connect a receptacle . . .
 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 49

Bond Solution  See Rule 12-3034 and Tables 22 and

23 for volume required per conductor.
This box and cover will take

418 mL
5 14 No.12 conductors
28.7 mL per No.12 conductor
maximum, less
the deductions
for devices and
connectors, per
Figure 3-23 The transformer leads are not Rule 12-3034 2)
counted, since no part of the conductors from the
transformer leaves the box.

Figure 3-23 shows how transformer leads No. 18

AWG or larger are treated when selecting a box.
Bonding Wire No. 16 or No. 18 AWG supplying a lumi-
conductor naire is not counted when sizing the box that the
fixture is mounted on; see Figure 3-24. This is
stated in Rule 12-3034 1) d).
Figure 3-16, the quick-check box selection
guide, shows some of the most popular types of
For code boxes used in residential wiring. You can refer to it
Fixture purposes,
canopy this box as you work your way through this text.
contains
five
conductors.
3/40 raised
cover

Figure 3-24 Luminaire wires are not counted in

de­­termining correct box size. CEC Rule 12-3034 1)
d) specifies that No. 18 and No. 16 AWG fixture Additional wiring space provided by the
raised cover is 20 3 30 3 3/40 5 4½ in.3 5 74 mL (cm3).
wires supplying a luminaire mounted on the
box containing the luminaire wires shall not be Figure 3-25 Raised cover. Raised covers are
counted. sometimes called plaster rings.

Electrical inspectors are very aware that GFCI 40 square, 3/40 deep
40 3 1½0 raised plaster ring
receptacles, dimmers, and certain types of timers square box (raised section measures
20 3 30 3 3/40)
take more space than regular receptacles. Therefore,
it is a good practice to install device boxes that will
provide lots of room for wires, instead of pushing 418 mL (25.5 in.3)
total space
and crowding the wires into the box.

EXAMPLE 344 mL (21 in.3) 74 mL (4½ in.3)

as found in Table 23 marked on cover
How many No. 12 conductors are per-
Figure 3-26 Volume of box and plaster ring.
mitted in the box and raised plaster ring
shown in Figure 3-26?
50 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

When wiring with cable, “feeding through” a changes in the locations of outlets and switches as
box is impossible. But when installing the wiring the building progresses.
using conduit, it is possible to feed straight through There are no Code rules for locating the height
a box. Only one wire is deducted for a wire running of outlets. A number of conditions determine the
straight through a box. proper height for a switch box. For example, the
height of the kitchen counter backsplash deter-
mines where the switches and receptacle outlets
BOX FILL are located between the kitchen countertop and the
cabinets.
The following method can make box fill easier The location of receptacles is covered in Rule
to calculate when determining the proper size of 26-722 of the CEC and Unit 4 of this text.
junction box or wall box to install when all of the When locating receptacles near electric base-
conductors are the same size: board heaters, refer to the section “Location of Elec-
1. Count the number of circuit wires. tric Baseboard Heaters in Relation to Receptacle
Outlets” in Unit 17.
2. Add one wire for a fixture stud (if any).
3. Add one wire for each pair of wire connectors.
4. Add one wire for one or more isolated (insulated) POSITIONING RECEPTACLES
grounding conductors (if any). Although no actual CEC rules exist on position-
5. Add two wires for each wiring device. ing receptacles, there is a concern in the electrical
Look up the total count in Table 23 to find a box industry that a metal wall plate could come loose
appropriate for the intended use that will hold the and fall downward onto the blades of an attach-
number of conductors required. ment plug cap that is loosely plugged into the
receptacle, thereby creating a potential shock and
fire hazard.
EXAMPLE Therefore, when metal wall plates are used,
Six circuit conductors 6 position the grounding hole to the top. A loose metal
One wiring device (switch) 12 plate could fall onto the grounding blade of the
Three wire connectors 11 attachment plug cap, but no hazard would result.
Total 9

Therefore, select a box capable of containing

nine or more conductors. See Table 23.
It is possible to select a smaller box when using
EMT than when using the cable wiring method
because it is possible to “loop” conductors through
the box. These count as only one conductor for the Position the bonding hole to the top.
purpose of box fill count; see Figure 3-27.
When metal cover plates are used for horizon-
tal receptacles, position grounded neutral blades
LOCATING OUTLETS on top. A loose metal plate could fall onto these
grounded neutral blades with no hazardous effect.
Electricians commonly consult the plans and
specifications to determine the proper heights
and clearances for installing electrical devices.
The electrician then has these dimensions veri-
fied by the architect, electrical engineer, designer,
or homeowner to avoid unnecessary and costly Position neutral blades on top.
 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 51

Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

A Conduit: Since two conductors are looped through the box,

the conductor count in this illustration is four.

Cable (each with two circuit

conductors plus one bare equipment-
bonding conductor)

B Cable: The conductor count in this illustration is four. The

two bare equipment-bonding conductors are not counted.

Cable and internal clamps (each

cable has two circuit conductors
plus one bare equipment-bonding conductor)

C Cable and a box with internal cable clamps: The conductor count in this
illustration is four. The two bare equipment-bonding conductors are not counted;
The two cable clamps are not counted.

Figure 3-27 Conductor count for both metal conduit and cable installations.

Do not position the “hot” terminal on top. A loose To ensure uniform installation and safety, and in
metal plate could fall onto these live blades. If this accordance with long-established custom, standard
was a split-circuit receptacle fed by a three-wire, electrical outlets are located as shown in Figure 3-28.
120/240-volt circuit, the short would be across the These dimensions usually are satisfactory. However,
240-volt line. the electrician must check the blueprints, specifica-
tions, and details for measurements that may affect
the location of a particular outlet or switch.
The cabinet spacing, available space between
the countertop and cabinet, and the tile height
may influence the location of the outlet or switch.
For example, if the top of the wall tile is exactly
1.22 m (48 in.) from the finished floor line, a wall
Do not position the “hot” terminal on top. switch should not be mounted 1.22 m (48 in.)
52 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

SWITCHES
*Height above floor
Regular 1.17 m (46 in.)
Between counter and kitchen
cabinets (depends on backsplash) 1.1221.17 m (44246 in.)

RECEPTACLE OUTLETS Where doorways

are framed with a
*Height above floor single stud, install
Regular 300 mm (12 in.) blocking as shown
(not permitted above electric base- before mounting
board heaters) switch boxes.
This will ensure
Between counter and kitchen cabinets that the switch
(depends on backsplash) 1.1221.17 m (44246 in.) does not interfere
with the door trim.
In garage 1.22 m (48 in.)

WALL BRACKETS
*Height above floor
Outside 1.8 m (72 in.)
Inside 1.52 m (60 in.)
Side of medicine cabinet 1.52 m (60 in.)
Figure 3-30 Locating switches next to doorways.
*Note: All dimensions given are from the finished floor to the
centre of the outlet box. Verify all dimensions before roughing in.

Figure 3-28 Outlet locations.

See Figure 3-30 for how to locate switches next
to a doorway.

to centre. This is considered poor workmanship

Faceplates
since it prevents the wall plate from sitting flat
against the wall. The switch should be located Faceplates for switches and receptacles shall be
entirely within the tile area or entirely out of the installed to completely cover the wall opening and
tile area; see Figure 3-29. This situation requires seat against the mounting surface. The mounting
the full cooperation of all trades involved on surface may be the wall or the gasket of a weather-
the construction job and a careful review of the proof box.
architectural drawings, before roughing in the Faceplates should be level. In addition, a
outlets. minor detail that can improve the appearance of

Improper
location

A B C D
Where a wall is partially tiled, a switch or receptacle outlet must be located
entirely out of the tile area (A) or entirely within the tile area (B), (C).

The faceplate in (D) does not “hug” the wall properly. This installation is
considered unacceptable by most electricians (Rule 12-3002).

Figure 3-29 Locating an outlet on a tiled wall.

 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 53

BONDING
Bonding is the joining together of all the non-
current-carrying metal parts of an electrical system
with a conductor that has a low impedance (opposi-
tion to the flow of current). Bonding provides pro-
tection from shock hazards by maintaining all of
the non-current metal parts of the electrical system
Align screw-slots
at the same potential (voltage). It prevents a voltage
like this, from developing between (the enclosures of) two
pieces of electrical equipment due to static buildup
or the failure of insulation on conductors.
Bonding is the most important part of the instal-
lation of electrical outlets. It will permit the system
to “fail safe.” Your electrical inspector will look
closely at the workmanship involved in the installa-
tion of the bonding conductors.
It is important that the continuity of the bonding
Not like this.
conductor be maintained. Therefore, the bonding
Figure 3-31 Aligning the slots of the faceplate conductor is brought into the box and attached to
mounting screws in the same direction makes the the bonding screw in the box before it is attached to
installation look neater. the green bonding screw on a receptacle. With such
connections, if someone cut the connections to the
receptacle to remove it, it would not interfere with
the installation is to align the slots in all the face- the bonding connection to the box.
plate mount­ing screws in the same direction; see When connecting the bonding conductor to
Figure 3-31. the bonding screws in outlet boxes, ensure that the
The location of lighting outlets is determined conductor does not get pinched between the head
by the amount and type of illumination required of the screw and the shoulder of the box (which
to provide the desired lighting effects. (It is not prevents the conductor from slipping out from
the intent of this text to describe how proper and under the head of the screw as the screw is tight-
adequate lighting is determined; rather, it covers ened down). This can damage the bonding conduc-
the proper methods of installing the circuits for tor, which reduces its size (cross-sectional area)
such lighting.) and its effectiveness.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. What does a plan show about electrical outlets?

54 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

2. What is an outlet?

3. Match the following switch types with the proper symbol.

a. single-pole Sp
b. three-way S4
c. four-way S
d. single-pole with pilot light   S3
4. The plans show curved lines running between switches and various outlets. What do
these curved lines indicate?

5. Why are the lines mentioned in Question 4 usually curved?

6. a. What are junction boxes used for?
b. Are junction boxes normally used in wiring the first floor?

c. Are junction boxes normally used to wire exposed portions of the basement?

7. How are single gang device boxes mounted?

8. a. What is an offset bar hanger?

b. What types of boxes may be used with offset bar hangers?

9. What methods may be used to mount luminaires to an outlet box fastened to an

offset bar hanger?
 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets 55

10. What is the size of the opening of a device box for a single device?

11. The space between a door casing and a window casing is 89 mm. Two switches
are to be installed at this location. What problems could you encounter when
placing the switches in this location? What would you recommend as a possible
solution?

12. Three switches are mounted in a three-gang device box. The wall plate for this
assembly is called a plate.
13. [Circle the correct answer.] For each fixture stud inside a box, (increase) (decrease)
the number of conductors allowed by one.
14. a. How high above the finished floor are the switches located in the garage of this
dwelling?
b. In the living room of this dwelling?
15. How high above the finished floor are the receptacle outlets in the garage walls located?
In the living room?
16. Outdoor receptacle outlets in this dwelling are located mm
above grade.
17. In the spaces provided, draw the correct symbol for each of these items:

a. Lighting panel j. Special-purpose outlet

b. Clock outlet k. Fan outlet
c. Duplex outlet l. Range outlet
d. Outdoor telephone outlet m. Power panel
e. Single-pole switch n. Three-way switch
f. Four-way switch o. Pushbutton
g. Duplex outlet, split-wired p. Thermostat
h. Lampholder with pull switch q. Electric door opener
i. Weatherproof outlet r. Multioutlet assembly

18. The front edge of a box installed in a combustible wall must be

with the finished surface. Rule number?
56 UNIT 3 Electrical Outlets

19. List the maximum number of #12 AWG conductors permitted in a

a. 4 3 1½ in. (102 3 38 mm) octagon box.
b. 411/16 3 1½ in. (119 3 38 mm) square box.
c. 3 3 2 3 2½ in. (76 3 51 3 64 mm) device box.
20. Hanging a ceiling fixture directly from a plastic outlet box is permitted only if

21. It is necessary to count fixture wires when counting the permitted number of
conductors in a box according to Rule 12-3034 1) d).
[Underline or circle the correct answer.] (True) (False)
22. CEC Table 23 allows a maximum of ten wires in a certain box. However, the box will have
two wire connectors and one fixture stud in it. What is the maximum number of wires
allowed in this box?

23. When laying out a job, the electrician will usually make a layout of the circuit, taking
into consideration the best way to run the cables and/or conduits and how to make up
the electrical connections. Doing this ahead of time, the electrician determines exactly
how many conductors will be fed into each box. With experience, the electrician will
probably select two or three sizes and types of boxes that will provide adequate space
to meet Code requirements. CEC Table 23 shows the maximum number of conductors
permitted in a given size box. However, the number of conductors shown in the table
must be reduced
by conductor(s) for two wire connectors
by conductor(s) for the fixture stud
by conductor(s) for each wiring device mounted on a single strap
by conductor(s) for one or more bare copper bonding conductors
24. Define the term bonding. Why is the installation of bonding conductors important?

25. Which section of the Red Seal standard pertains to the installation and maintenance of
branch circuit wiring and devices in a residential setting?
 UNIT

4
Determining the Number
and Location of Lighting
and Receptacle Branch
Circuits
RED SEAL
OCCUPATIONAL
Objectives
STANDARD
After studying this unit, you should be able to (RSOS)
●● determine the number and location of lighting For the Red Seal exam,
outlets in a dwelling unit note that this unit covers
●● determine the minimum number of and location the following RSOS tasks:
of receptacles required in a dwelling unit ●● Task A-3
●● identify CEC requirements for lighting and ●● Task C-16
receptacle branch circuits
●● Task C-17

57
58 UNIT 4 Determining the Number and Location of Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits

In the design and planning of dwelling units, it is circuitry not considered to be a lighting branch cir-
standard practice to permit the electrician to plan the cuit or a small-appliance circuit are covered later in
circuits. Thus, most residence plans do not include this text.
layouts for the various branch circuits. The electri-
cian may follow the general guidelines established by
the architect; however, all wiring systems must con- LIGHTING
form to the standards of the Canadian Electrical Code
In this unit, we look at where luminaires (lighting
(CEC) and the National Building Code of Canada
fixtures) and receptacles must be located to meet the
(NBC), as well as local and provincial requirements.
minimum requirements of the CEC. Figure 4-1 shows
This unit focuses on lighting branch circuits and
the lighting requirements graphically. Luminaires,
small-appliance circuits. The circuits supplying the
lamp holders, and ballasts will be covered in Unit 10.
electric range, oven, clothes dryer, and other specific

Attic

Outdoor
entrance
Inside
attached
Bedroom Hallway Bathroom garage

Lighting
Outdoor outlet not
entrance Any required
Utility
Stairway habitable room outside
room of vehicle
door

Underfloor space When a rigid luminaire is readily accessible

Basement Habitable Stairway used for storage and mounted less than 2.1 m above the floor,
recreation it must either be protected from mechanical
room damage by a guard or replaced by a short,
flexible drop light.

Lighting outlet must be wall switch-controlled.

However, switch-controlled receptacles may be installed in place
of lighting outlets in bedrooms or living rooms.

Lighting outlet(s) should be switch-controlled if space is used for

storage or if space contains equipment that will require servicing,
such as air conditioning and furnaces. The lighting outlet(s)
should be located near the equipment. The switch must be located
near the entry to the space.

If stairway has four or more steps, install switches on both levels.

Figure 4-1 Lighting outlets in a typical dwelling unit.

 UNIT 4 Determining the Number and Location of Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits 59

The provisions for supplying a luminaires in a

room or area and whether it is to be controlled by
a wall switch are found in Part 9 of the National
Building Code of Canada.

RECEPTACLES This duplex receptacle

meets the requirements of CSA
configuration 5-20R Diagram 1.
Receptacles are required in dwelling units and must
be tamper-resistant (Rule 26-706), and in most
cases must have arc-fault protection, Rule 26-658.
Receptacles are used for the connection of large and
small appliances. General use receptacles installed
for small appliances are 15-ampere, 125-volt
(two pole, three wire) or 20-ampere, T slot, 125-volt This duplex receptacle
(two pole, three wire). See Figure 4-2. meets the requirements of CSA
configuration 5-15R Diagram 1.
Some residences are lighted by table and floor
lamps plugged into switch-controlled wall recepta- Figure 4-2 These are 15- and 20-ampere,
cle outlets. In bedrooms and living rooms, switch- 125-volt receptacle configurations.
controlled wall receptacles are permitted in lieu of
ceiling and/or wall lighting outlets. Only half of removing the tab on the “hot” side of the receptacle
the receptacle may be switched if the receptacle is (Figures 4-3 through 4-5).
needed to satisfy the minimum number of recepta- With the advent of the Internet of things (IOT)
cles required by Rule 26-720 k). This is achieved by and smart devices came receptacles that have their

Polarized Duplex Receptacle

Long prong Short prong is

is identified “hot” conductor
conductor

Leave tab Remove tab

in place on “hot” side

Use a screwdriver
in slot and twist the
tab off on “hot”
side only

Figure 4-3 Duplex receptacle showing method for removing tab on the hot side.
60 UNIT 4 Determining the Number and Location of Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits

Stereo plugs
in here.

“Hot” line

Leave tab
bridge
between Remove tab
terminals

Switch leg
15-ampere 1-pole
circuit breaker
Light plugs Two-wire
in here. circuit from
panel

Identified conductor

Figure 4-4 Split-switched receptacle wiring diagram.

Kettle plugs
in here.

“Hot” line 1

Leave tab 15-ampere

bridge two-pole
between Remove tab circuit 240 volts
terminals breaker
“Hot” line 2 Three-wire
circuit from
panel

Toaster plugs
in here.

Neutral conductor

Figure 4-5 Split-wired receptacle (split receptacle) on a two-pole 15-ampere breaker connected to a
three-wire circuit for use in a kitchen.

own integral switching. These devices can be wire- Table 4-1 and Figures 4-6 through 4-8 outline
lessly connected to a control device or through a the minimum number of receptacles required in a
smartphone application and can turn loads on and dwelling unit, and their locations.
off remotely, as a timed function or as part of a rou-
tine. These devices are discussed in Rule 26-720.
The side tab of the receptacle does not need to be BASICS OF WIRE SIZING
broken off to achieve this. AND LOADING
This unit will identify the locations where the
CEC requires 15-ampere, 125-volt (5-15R) and The CEC defines a branch circuit as “that portion of
20-ampere, 125-volt (5-20R) receptacles. For infor- the wiring installation between the final overcurrent
mation on special applications of receptacles or device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s)”; see
their branch circuits, see Units 11 through 20. Figure 4-9.
 UNIT 4 Determining the Number and Location of Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits 61

Table 4-1

CEC requirements for receptacles in dwelling units.

ROOM OR AREA PROVIDE CEC REFERENCE RULE

Living room, dining No point along the floor line of a wall may be more than 1.8 m 26-722 a)
room, family room, horizontally from a receptacle, including isolated wall spaces
bedroom 900 mm or longer.
See the rule for exclusions.

Hallway No point in a hallway may be more than 4.5 m from a receptacle. 26-722 e)
Receptacles in rooms off the hallway may be used if the opening to
the room from the hallway is not fitted with a door.

Laundry room One receptacle for the washing machine. 26-720 e)

At least one additional receptacle.

Bathroom At least one receptacle, within 1 m of the wash basin and 26-720 f)
ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI)–protected.

Kitchen One receptacle for a refrigerator. 26-722 d)

One receptacle for a gas range if gas piping has been provided.
Counter receptacles such that no point measured along the back of
the counter is more than 900 mm horizontally from a receptacle.
Counter receptacles may be 15-A, three-conductor split circuit, or
20-A T slot.
See Unit 14 for more detail.
Isolated work surfaces 300 mm or more require a receptacle.
At least one receptacle for a permanently installed island.
At least one receptacle for counter peninsula.
At least one receptacle in a dining area forming part of a kitchen.
One receptacle for a microwave in its own enclosure. 26-720 h) iii)

Utility room At least one receptacle. 720 e)

Unfinished At least one receptacle. 26-720 e)

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

basement areas

Balcony, porch, At least one receptacle. 26-722 b)

veranda

Outdoors At least one receptacle for the use of outdoor appliances. 26-724 a)

Garage, carport One receptacle for each parking space. 26-724 b)

Miscellaneous One receptacle for a cord-connected central vacuum if ducting 26-720 l)

system is installed.

The CEC defines a feeder as the circuit conduc- (fuses or breakers) sized larger than the ampacity of
tors between the service equipment and the final the conductor. The CEC covers motors and motor
branch-circuit overcurrent device. In the residence circuits specifically in Section 28. The rating of the
used as an example in this text, the wiring between branch circuit is determined by the lesser of the rat-
Panel A and Panel B is a feeder. ing of either the overcurrent device or the ampacity
The ampacity (current-carrying capacity) of of the wire. For example, if a 20-ampere conductor
a conductor must not be less than the rating of the is protected by a 15-ampere fuse, then the circuit is
overcurrent device protecting that conductor, Rule a 15-ampere branch circuit, Rule 8-104 1).
14-104. An exception is a motor branch circuit, The ampacity of branch-circuit conductors must
where it is common to have overcurrent devices not be less than the maximum load to be served.
62 UNIT 4 Determining the Number and Location of Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits

Isolated wall surface

requires receptacle if 965
No point along the
more than 900 mm long. mm
wall to be more
than 1.8 m
Total length of wall 4.78 m. horizontally from a
Two receptacles will be required. receptacle. Maximum
The maximum spacing spacing between
between them is 3.6 m. receptacles is 3.6 m.
One receptacle centred on this wall
space meets CEC requirements.
No point in
3442 mm hallway to be
more than 4.5 m
from a receptacle.

Wall space under

window is considered
usable as the window
does not extend to
the floor.
Bathrooms and
Door openings washrooms. Receptacle
and areas occupied located within 1 m of
by open door not wash basin GFCI-
Provide at least counted as usable protected. Maintain
one receptacle wall space. 1 m spacing to tub or
for the use of shower.
outdoor
appliances.

Figure 4-6 Locating receptacles on the first floor.

Where the circuit supplies receptacle outlets, as is typ- the wire must be rated for 15 amperes in Table 2;
ical in houses, the conductor’s ampacity must be rated a No. 14 R90 XLPE is suitable.
to carry the load, Rule 8-104 2). The load current must The ampacities of conductors commonly used in
not exceed 80% of the rating of the overcurrent device residential occupancies are listed in Table 2. These
for that circuit, Rules 8-304 and 8-104 6) a). are subject to correction factors, which must be
Where the ampacity of the conductor does not applied where there are high ambient temperatures
match up with a standard rating of a fuse or breaker, (e.g., in attics). See Note 1 to Table 5A.
the next higher standard size of overcurrent device Conductor ampacities are also de-rated when
may be used, provided the overcurrent device does four or more conductors are installed in a single
not exceed 800 amperes, Rule 14-104 1) a). This is raceway or cable. See CEC Table 5C (see Table 4-3).
not applicable to residential branch circuits because A continuous load should not exceed 80% of the
the standard overcurrent device sizes listed in ampere rating of the branch circuit. The CEC defines
CEC Table 13 (see Table 4-2) correspond directly a continuous load as one that persists under normal
with the ampacities listed in Table 2 for No. 14 operation for “more than one hour in any two-hour
and No. 12 gauge wire, Rule 14-104 2). Table 13 period if the load does not exceed 225 amperes,” Rule
shows that the maximum overcurrent protection is 8-104 3) a). The CEC permits 100% loading on an
15 amperes when No. 14 AWG copper wire is used. overcurrent device only if that overcurrent device is
Residential branch circuits are fed from panel- listed for 100% loading. The CSA has no listing of
boards having overcurrent devices that are rated to circuit breakers of the moulded-case type used in resi-
be run continuously at a maximum of 80% of their dential installations that are suitable for 100% loading.
ampere rating. The conductors attached to these This calls for the judgment of the electrician
overcurrent devices may not be loaded to more than and/or the electrical inspector. Will a branch circuit
80% of the ampere rating listed in Table 2. For exam- supplying a heating cable in a driveway likely be
ple, a 15-ampere circuit breaker has a maximum on for one hour or more? The answer is “probably.”
load of 12 amperes (15 amperes × 0.8). Therefore, Good design practice and experience tell us to never
 UNIT 4 Determining the Number and Location of Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits 63

Countertop One receptacle

island requires in dining area
Isolated work surfaces a receptacle. of a kitchen.
300 mm or greater require
a receptacle.

Counter receptacles to be At least one GFCI

15-A split or 20-A T slot. protected receptacle
397 mm in each bathroom/
Receptacles within 1.5 m washroom within 1 m
of sink must be of any wash basin.
GFCI-protected.
No point in
Provide a receptacle for built-in
One receptacle the hall to be more
microwave oven if space is provided.
for refrigerator than 4.5 m horizontally
from a receptacle. One
No point along the back wall receptacle in each 10 m
of the counter to be more (or fraction) of hallway.
than 900 mm from a
receptacle. Door openings and
areas occupied by an
Laundry room. Provide open door are not
one receptacle for the counted as usable
washing machine and wall space.
at least one additional
receptacle.

Garage. Provide a
minimum of one
receptacle for Provide at least one
each car space. receptacle for the
use of outdoor
appliances.

One receptacle
at the front of the
house and one at
the back controlled
by an indoor
wall switch is
recommended.

Figure 4-7 Locating receptacles in the kitchen, laundry room, and garage.

load a circuit conductor or overcurrent protective In this residence, all lighting circuits are rated
device to more than 80% of its rating. at 15 amperes. The maximum loading of these cir-
For residential applications, all loads are con- cuits is 12 amperes (15 amperes × 0.8). Therefore,
sidered to be continuous except for the load on the the minimum number of circuits for general lighting
service or feeder conductors unless they meet the and power is
conditions of Rule 8-200 3).
The CEC considers most receptacle outlets in a Watts
5 Amperes
residence to be part of the basic load, and additional 120 volts
load calculations are not necessary. Appliance out-
lets with loads greater than 12 amperes are not con- Amperes
5 Minimum number of citcuits required
sidered part of the basic load; these larger loads are 12
calculated individually. The power requirements for
these receptacle outlets will be discussed in detail Note that the CEC provides the minimum number of
later in this textbook. branch circuits required. For various purposes, you
To determine the number of lighting circuits may install more.
required, divide the total watts by the voltage rating Load calculations for electric water heaters,
of the circuit(s) to be used. ranges, motors, electric heat, and other specific
64 UNIT 4 Determining the Number and Location of Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits

No point along the wall

to be more than 1.8 m
Receptacles within 1.5 m
horizontally from a
of a sink require GFCI
receptacle. Maximum
protection.
spacing between
receptacles is 3.6 m.
Isolated wall surfaces
require a receptacle if
more than 900 mm wide.
Finished basement area Unfinished basement

Door openings and areas

occupied by open door Provide at least one
are not counted as receptacle for
usable wall space. unfinished basement
area.

Figure 4-8 Locating receptacles in the basement.

Last overcurrent Outlet

actual voltage may be 220, 245, or 247. This pro-
device vides us with uniformity, to avoid misleading and
confusing results in our computations.
Branch-circuit
conductors

Figure 4-9 Branch circuit. LIGHTING BRANCH CIRCUITS

The CEC limits overcurrent protection for light-
ing branch circuits to a maximum of 15 amperes
in dwelling units, Rule 30-104. When a branch cir-
loads are in addition to the general lighting load, and cuit is loaded, it will normally have a maximum of
are discussed throughout this text as they appear. 12 outlets, Rule 8-304. If the actual load on the cir-
cuit is known, the number of lighting outlets may
be increased as long as the load on the circuit does
not exceed 80% of the rating of the circuit breaker
VOLTAGE or fuse protecting the branch circuit. It is normally
All calculations throughout this text use voltages of impossible to tell what the actual load of each light-
120 volts and 240 volts. CEC Rule 8-100, entitled ing fixture on a branch circuit is when doing the
“Current Calculations,” states that the voltage divi- rough-in, unless a large number of recessed lumi-
sors to use shall be 120, 208, and 240, as applicable. naires are installed; therefore, the maximum number
This voltage is used for calculation even though the of outlets on a lighting branch circuit is 12.
 UNIT 4 Determining the Number and Location of Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits 65

Table 4-2

CEC Table 13.

CEC TABLE 13
RATING OR SETTING OF OVERCURRENT DEVICES PROTECTING CONDUCTORS*
(Rules 14-104 and 28-204)

Ampacity of Rating or Setting Ampacity of Rating or Setting Permitted

Conductor (Amperes) Permitted (Amperes) Conductor (Amperes) (Amperes)

0–15 15 126–150 150

16–20 20 151–175 175
21–25 25 176–200 200
26–30 30 201–225 225
31–35 35 226–250 250
36–40 40 251–300 300
41–45 45 251–300 300
Source: © 2021 Canadian Standards Association

46–50 50 301–350 350

51–60 60 351–400 400
61–70 70 351–400 400
71–80 80 401–450 450
81–90 90 451–500 500
91–100 100 501–600 600
101–110 110 601–700 700
111–125 125 701–800 800

* For general use where not otherwise specifically provided for.

RECEPTACLE BRANCH
Table 4-3
CIRCUITS
CEC Table 5C.
Branch circuits in dwelling units can consist of
CEC TABLE 5C
AMPACITY CORRECTION FACTORS FOR lighting only, receptacles only, or a combination
Tables 2 and 4 of lighting and receptacles. When a circuit consists of
(Rule 4-004 and Tables 2 and 4)
© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

a combination of lighting and receptacles, the pro-

Number of Insulated Ampacity Correction tection for the circuit is limited to 15 amperes, the
Conductors Factor
same as it would be if the circuit had lighting only.
1–3 1.00
When a circuit contains receptacles only, the pro-
4–6 0.80
tection for the circuit cannot exceed the rating of the
7–24 0.70
receptacle, Rule 14-600. Receptacles for general appli-
25–42 0.60
cations in dwelling units (convenience receptacles)
43 and up 0.50
may be CSA configuration 5-15R or 5-20R (T slot)
and are found in CEC Diagram 1 (see Figure 4-2 in this
textbook). If 15-ampere receptacles (5-15R) are used,
When you install track lighting with movable the overcurrent protection is limited to 15 amperes. If
fixtures, the authors recommend that you count 20-ampere receptacles are used (5-20R), the overcur-
every 600 mm as one outlet. rent protection is permitted to be 20 amperes.
66 UNIT 4 Determining the Number and Location of Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits

Table 4-4
CEC requirements for branch circuits supplying receptacles in dwelling units. Rules 26-656, 26-706.
ROOM OR AREA PROVIDE CEC REFERENCE RULE

Living room, dining Maximum of 12 outlets per 15A circuit unless circuit protec- 8-304
room, family room, tion is marked for continuous operation.
hallway, bedroom
Laundry room, utility At least one circuit solely for receptacles in laundry rooms. 26-654
room At least one circuit solely for receptacles in utility room
or areas.
Bathroom No special requirements in CEC. Consult with your local
electrical inspector for recommendations.
Kitchen One circuit for the receptacle for a refrigerator. A receptacle 26-654
provided for a clock outlet is permitted on this circuit.
A minimum of two circuits to be provided for counter 26-656
receptacles, when more than one counter receptacle is pro-
vided. No more than two counter receptacles are permitted
on a circuit except that receptacles provided for people with
disabilities may be added.
One circuit when a receptacle has been supplied for built-in 26-654
microwave oven.

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Balcony, porch, veranda One circuit, if for a single dwelling unit and accessible from 26-656
grade level.
Outdoors One circuit for receptacles located outdoors. 26-656
Garage, carport One circuit for receptacles in garages or carports. The 26-656
garage lighting and door opener may be on the same
circuit.
Miscellaneous One receptacle for a cord-connected central vacuum if 26-654
ducting system is installed.

The general requirements for receptacle branch cir- the floor plan if you want to control the luminaires
cuits are found in CEC Sections 8 and 26. Table 4-4 in a room from one location. Write “S3” on the floor
and Figures 4-10 through 4-12 outline the basic CEC plan if you want to control the lights from two loca-
requirements for branch circuits supplying receptacles tions. If you want to control the luminaires from
in dwelling units. Units 11 through 20 give more infor- more than two locations, see Unit 6.
mation about receptacles and their branch circuits. Use Table 4-1 to determine the location of
receptacles required by the CEC and locate them on
the floor plans. Use Figures 4-6 through 4-8 to assist
PREPARING A LIGHTING you. Add any extra receptacles that you feel enhance
AND RECEPTACLE LAYOUT the design.
When you have completed the layout of light-
Begin by using Table 4-1 to identify where lumi- ing and receptacle outlets, group the outlets into
naires are required. Locate the luminaires on the circuits. In general, 12 outlets are permitted on
floor plan. Add any extra luminaires (such as in a circuit. There can be a mixture of lights and
closets) that you feel enhance the design. (Just receptacles in most cases. Use Table 4-2 and
remember that the lowest bid will normally get the Figures 4-10 through 4-12 to help you.
job.) Determine where you would like to locate the Further information about additional loads that
switches controlling the luminaires. Write “S” on will be added to the layout are found in later units.
UNIT 4 Determining the Number and Location of Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits 67

Lighting and receptacles,

maximum of 12 outlets
per 15A circuit.

Smoke alarm
may not be on
GFCI- or AFCI-protected
circuits.

Bathrooms and washrooms.

Receptacle located within
1 m of wash basin, GFCI-
protected. Maintain 1 m
Provide at least spacing to tub or shower.
one circuit for
outdoor
receptacles.

Figure 4-10 Circuiting for receptacles.

A sufficient number of duplex receptacles

Island receptacle installed on the remaining finished walls in
is considered a accordance with Rule 26-722 a). The
counter receptacle. receptacle installed for a gas range may
be on the same circuit.
Counter receptacles to be
15A split or 20A T slot.

Receptacles within 1.5 m

of sink must be
GFCI-protected.
Provide a minimum of two branch Provide a separate
circuits for kitchen counter circuit for a refrigerator
receptacles when more than one receptacle.
receptacle is installed. No more
than two receptacles may be on a
branch circuit. Receptacles in the
side of the counter provided for
persons with disabilities may be
added to the circuit.

Provide a separate
circuit for built-in a microwave
oven receptacle.
Provide a separate circuit for
receptacles in laundry
room.

Provide a separate circuit for a central

vacuum receptacle.

Provide at least one

Garage. Provide a circuit for outdoor
separate circuit for receptacles.
receptacles in a
garage or carport.
The lighting and
garage door opener
may be on the same
circuit.

Figure 4-11 Circuiting for kitchen, laundry, and garage receptacles.

68 UNIT 4 Determining the Number and Location of Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits

Receptacles within
1.5 m of a sink must
be GFCI-protected.
Finished basement area

Unfinished basement

A maximum of 12 outlets
permitted per circuit.
Provide a separate circuit for
receptacles in a utility room.

Figure 4-12 Circuiting for basement receptacles.

Review

Where applicable, responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. A living room wall is 6 m long. How many receptacles are required for the wall if no
doors exist on the wall?

2. A hallway is 3 m long and has a doorway fitted with a door at each end. Does this hall-
way require a receptacle?

3. A hallway is 6 m long and has an open doorway at each end. The hall opens onto two
rooms that each have one receptacle within 1 m of the doorway. Does this hallway
require a receptacle?

4. How many receptacles are required in an unfinished basement with an area of 63 m2?

5. A kitchen counter is 3 m long. A sink that is 600 mm is located in the exact centre of
the counter. How many receptacles are required for the counter?

6. How many of the receptacles in Question 5 require GFCI protection?

 UNIT 4 Determining the Number and Location of Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuits 69

7. A counter has an isolated work space of 600 mm between a sink and a built-in oven.
Is a receptacle required for this space?

8. How many luminaires or lampholders are required for an unfinished basement area
that is 63 m2?

9. How many receptacles are required in an attached two-car garage?

10. How many luminaires are required in an attached two-car garage?

11. When is a luminaire required for a stairway?

12. When is a switch control required at the top and bottom of a stairway?

13. When a stairway leads to an unfinished basement that has an outside exit, is a switch
required at the top and bottom of the stairs?

14. When should a receptacle be provided for a central vacuum unit?

15. A receptacle in a utility room is supplied from its own circuit. Can the wiring from the
receptacle be extended to supply eight outlets in a finished family room?

16. Why shouldn’t a freezer be placed on a circuit protected by a GFCI?

17. What outlets in a dwelling unit must have AFCI protection?

18. A counter has three 5-20R receptacles. What is the minimum number of branch
circuits that may be used for these receptacles?

19. What is the minimum number of circuits that may be run to a laundry room?

20. Does the receptacle located next to a wash basin in a bathroom have to be on its own circuit?

21. Which task on the Red Seal Occupational Skills standard pertains to the installation of
luminaires and wiring devices?
UNIT

5
Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring
Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage
Drop, and Neutral Sizing for Services
Objectives
RED SEAL After studying this unit, you should be able to
OCCUPATIONAL ●● define the terms used to size and rate
STANDARD conductors
(RSOS)
●● discuss aluminum conductors
For the Red Seal exam, ●● describe the types of cables used in most
note that this unit covers dwelling unit installations
the following RSOS tasks:
●● list the installation requirements for each type of
●● Task B-7 cable
●● Task B-11 ●● describe the uses and installation requirements
●● Task C-16 for electrical conduit systems
●● Task C-17 ●● describe the methods used for the bonding at
the service equipment
●● describe the use and installation requirements
for flexible metal conduit
●● make voltage drop calculations
(Continued)
70
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 71

●● make calculations using CEC, Tables D3

Table 5-1
and D5
Conductor applications chart.
●● understand the fundamentals of the
CONDUCTOR
markings found on the terminals SIZE APPLICATIONS
of wiring devices and wire connectors
No. 16, No. 18 Cords, low-voltage control
●● understand why the ampacity of high- AWG circuits, bell and chime wiring

temperature insulated conductors may No. 14, No. 12 Normal lighting circuits, circuits
AWG supplying receptacle outlets
not be suitable at that same rating on No. 10, No. 8, Clothes dryers, ovens, ranges,
a particular terminal on a wire device, No. 6, No. 4 AWG cooktops, water heaters, heat
breaker, or switch pumps, central air condi-
tioners, furnaces, feeders to
subpanels
●● determine when a reduced neutral can
No. 3, No. 2, No. 1 Main service entrances, feeders
be used on residential services (and larger) AWG to subpanels

CONDUCTORS
Throughout this text, all references to conductors of use without exceeding its temperature rating.
are for copper conductors, unless otherwise stated. This value depends on the square millimetre(s) area
(mm 2) of the conductor. The conductor size and
area, AWG or kcmil, can be found in CEC Table D5,
Wire Size columns 1 and 2, or CEC Tables 1 through 4.
The copper wire used in electrical installations is The conductor size and area range from No. 14
graded for size according to the American Wire (2.08 mm2) to No. 2000 kcmil (1010 mm2).
Gauge (AWG) standard. The wire diameter in the Conductors must have an ampacity not less
AWG standard is expressed as a whole number. than the maximum load they are supplying; see
AWG sizes vary from fine, hairlike wire used in Figure 5-1. All conductors of a specific branch
coils and small transformers to very large-diameter circuit must have an ampacity of the branch circuit’s
wire required in industrial wiring to handle heavy rating; see Figure 5-2. There are some exceptions to
loads. this rule, such as taps for electric ranges (Unit 15).
The wire may be a single strand (solid con- CEC Tables 1 through 4 list the conductor size,
ductor) or consist of many strands. Each strand mm2 area, and the allowable ampacities for copper
of wire acts as a separate conducting unit. Con- and aluminum conductors in free air or when not
ductors that are No. 8 AWG and larger gener- more than three are installed in a raceway or cable.
ally are stranded, Rule 12-914. The wire size used Table 12 lists the allowable ampacities of equipment
for a circuit depends on the maximum current to wire and flexible cords. These ampacities are reduced
be carried. The Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) if the conductors are installed in areas of high ambi-
states that the minimum conductor size permit- ent (surrounding) temperature (Table 5A). Ampacities
ted in house wiring is No. 14 AWG. (Exceptions
to this rule are covered in CEC Section 16 and
Table 12 for the wires used in luminaires, bell wir-
ing, and remote-control low-energy circuits.) See Minimum
20-ampere 5A 5A 5A 5A
the conductor applications chart in Table 5-1. conductors

Ampacity Figure 5-1 Branch-circuit conductors are

required to have an ampacity not less than the
Ampacity is defined as the current in amperes a con- maximum load to be served.
ductor can carry continuously under the condition
72 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

Aluminum Conductors
The conductivity of aluminum wire is not as great as
that of copper wire for a given size. For example, a
No. 8 90°C copper wire has an ampacity of 55 amperes
15-ampere according to Table 2. Aluminum wire has a significant
circuit weight advantage, but a No. 8 90°C aluminum wire
JB has an ampacity of only 45 amperes, Table 4.
It is important to consider resistance when
selecting a conductor for a long run. An aluminum
Conductors must
conductor has a higher resistance than a copper con-
have minimum ductor of the same wire size, which therefore causes
15-ampere rating
a greater voltage drop.

Voltage drop (Ed) 5 Amperes (I) 3 Resistance (R)

Figure 5-2 All conductors in this circuit Although aluminum conductors are approved
supplying readily accessible receptacles shall
for branch-circuit wiring, they are seldom used for
have an ampacity of not less than the rating of
the branch circuit. In this example, 15-ampere this application. They are, however, widely used in
conductors must be used, Rule 8-104 1). such applications as apartment feeders and utility
distribution systems. They are also found on such
equipment as ballasts and luminaires.
are also reduced when there are more than three con-
ductors in a raceway or cable (Tables 5B and 5C).
Common Connection Problems
Circuit Rating Problems often arise with aluminum conductors that
The rating of the overcurrent device (OCD) and are not properly connected, as follows:
the ampacity of the wire must be compared. The ●● A corrosive action is set up when dissimilar
branch-circuit ampacity rating is the lesser of these wires come into contact with each other, espe-
two values (Figure 5-3). cially if moisture is present.
●● The surface of aluminum oxidizes as soon as
15-ampere OCD it is exposed to air. If this oxidized surface is
not broken through, a poor connection results.
15-ampere conductor
When installing aluminum conductors, particu-
larly in large sizes, you must brush an inhibi-
15-ampere OCD tor onto the aluminum conductor and scrape
the conductor with a stiff brush where the con-
20-ampere conductor
nection is to be made. Scraping the conductor
breaks through the oxidation, and the inhibitor
15-ampere OCD keeps the air from coming into contact with the
conductor, preventing further oxidation. Alumi-
30-ampere conductor
num connectors of the compression type usu-
ally have an inhibitor paste factory-installed
Figure 5-3 These are all classified as 15-ampere
circuits even though larger conductors were used inside the connector.
for some other reason, such as solving a voltage ●● Aluminum wire expands and contracts more
drop problem. The lesser of the amperage rating than copper wire for an equal load, another
of the overcurrent device or the wire determines
the rating of a circuit, Rule 8-104 1). possible cause of a poor connection. Crimp
connectors for aluminum conductors are
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 73

usually longer than those for comparable copper connections that depend on solder are not permitted
conductors, resulting in greater contact surface for connecting service entrance conductors to ser-
of the conductor in the connector. vice equipment. The labour costs make the cost of
using solder-type connections prohibitive.
Proper Installation Procedures Solderless connectors, designed to establish
connections by means of mechanical pressure, are
Proper, trouble-free connections for aluminum con- quite common. Figure 5-4 shows some types of wire
ductors require terminals, lugs, and/or connectors connectors and their uses.
that are suitable for the type of conductor being As with the terminals on wiring devices (switches
installed. and receptacles), only wire connectors marked “AL”
Terminals on receptacles and switches must may be used with aluminum conductors. This mark-
be suitable for the conductors being attached. ing is found either on the connector itself or on (or
Table 5-2 shows how the electrician can iden- in) the shipping carton.
tify these terminals. Listed connectors provide Connectors marked “AL/CU” are suitable for
proper connection when properly installed. See use with aluminum, copper, or copper-clad alumi-
Rules 12-116 and 12-118. num conductors. This marking also appears on the
connector itself or on (or in) the shipping carton.
Wire Connections Connectors not marked “AL” or “AL/CU” are
for use with copper conductors only.
When splicing wires, the joints or splices shall be Conductors made of copper, aluminum, or
covered with an insulation equivalent to that on copper-clad aluminum may not be used in combi-
the conductors being joined, Rule 12-112. nation in the same connector unless the conductor
Wire connectors are known in the trade by such is specially identified for the purpose either on the
names as screw terminal, pressure terminal connec- connector itself or on (or in) the shipping carton.
tor, wire connector, MarretteTM, Wing-Nut™, Wire- The conditions of use will also be indicated. Such
Nut™, Scotchlok™, split-bolt connector, pressure connectors are usually limited to dry locations.
cable connector, solderless lug, and solder lug. Rule 12-118 covers termination and splicing of
Solder-type lugs are not often used today. In fact, aluminum conductors.

Table 5-2
Approved equipment and conductor combinations.
MARKING ON TERMINAL
TYPE OF DEVICE OR CONNECTOR CONDUCTOR PERMITTED
15- or 20-ampere receptacle and switch CO/ALR Aluminum, copper, copper-clad aluminum
15- and 20-ampere receptacle and switch None Copper, copper-clad aluminum
30-ampere and greater receptacle and AL/CU Aluminum, copper, copper-clad aluminum
switch
30-ampere and greater receptacle and None Copper only
switch
Screwless pressure terminal connector None Copper or copper-clad aluminum
of the push-in type
Wire connector AL/CU Aluminum, copper, copper-clad aluminum
Wire connector None Copper only
Wire connector AL Aluminum only
Any of the above devices Copper or CU only Copper only
74 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

Crimp connectors used to splice and terminate

No. 20 AWG to 500 kcmil aluminum-to-aluminum,
aluminum-to-copper, or copper-to-copper conductors.

Properly crimp
then tape

Connectors used to connect wires together on combinations

of No. 18 AWG through No. 6 AWG conductors. They are
twist-on, solderless, and tapeless.
*Wire-Nut ®, Wing-Nut ®, Marrette ® and Twister ® are registered
trademarks of Ideal Industries, Inc. Scotchlok® is
a registered trademark of 3M. Wire connectors variously known as
Wire-Nut®, Wing-Nut®, Twister ®, Marrette® and Scotchlok®

Connectors used to connect wires together in combinations

of No. 16 AWG, No. 14 AWG, and No. 12 AWG conductors. They are
crimped on with a special tool, then covered with a snap-on
insulating cap.
Crimp-type wire connector
and insulating cap

Solderless connectors are available in sizes

No. 4 AWG through 500 kcmil conductors.
They are used for one solid or one stranded
conductor only, unless otherwise noted on
the connector or on its shipping carton. The
screw may be of the standard screwdriver
slot type, or it may be for use with an Allen
wrench or socket wrench. Solderless connectors

Compression connectors are used for No. 8 AWG

through 1000 kcmil conductors. The wire is inserted
into the end of the connector, then crimped on with
a special compression tool.

Compression connector

Split-bolt connectors are used for connecting

two conductors together, or for tapping one
conductor to another. They are available in
sizes No. 10 AWG through 1000 kcmil. They are
used for two solid and/or two stranded conductors
only, unless otherwise noted on the connector
or on its shipping carton. Split-bolt connector

Figure 5-4 Types of wire connectors.

Insulation of Wires A thermoplastic will deform and melt when excess

Rule 12-100 requires that insulation on conduc- heat is applied to it. Any insulation with a desig-
tors be suitable for the conditions in which they are nation that starts with a “T,” such as T90 Nylon or
installed. The insulation must completely surround TEW, is a thermoplastic.
the metal conductor, have a uniform thickness, and A thermoset material will not soften and deform
run the entire length of the wire or cable. when heat is applied to it. When heated above its
One type of insulation used on wires is a ther- rated temperature, it will char and crack. Any insu-
moplastic material (T90 Nylon or TEW), although lation that starts with “R,” such as R90XLPE, is a
thermoset (rubber) compounds are also widely used. thermoset material.
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 75

CEC Table 19 lists the various conductor insula- These are the types of conductors found in non-metallic-
tions and applications. sheathed cable (NMD90), armoured cable (AC90), and
Table 2 gives the allowable ampacities of copper conductors commonly installed in conduit.
conductors in a cable for various types of insulation; Note that in the common building wire categories,
see Table 5-3. The ampacity of 60°C wire is found we find 60°C, 75°C, and 90°C temperature ratings.
in Column 2, 75°C in Column 3, and 90°C in When selecting a conductor based on Columns 3
Column 4. or 4 of Table 2 (see also the table footnotes), make
CEC Table 4 gives the allowable ampacities sure its ampacity is compatible with the equipment
of aluminum conductors in a raceway or cable. the conductors are being connected to. We can use
Table 11 lists the conditions of use for various cords, the high temperature ratings when high temperatures
wires, and cables. are encountered, such as in attics, or when we must
The insulation covering wires and cables used de-rate because of the number of conductors in a con-
in house wiring is usually rated at 300 volts or less. duit, but we must always check the temperature rat-
Exceptions to this are low-voltage bell wiring and ings of terminals to make sure that we are not creating
fixture wiring. a “hot spot.” Terminals and/or the label in the equip-
ment might be marked “75°C only” or “60°/75°C.”
Temperature Considerations
Neutral Size
Conductors are also rated for the temperature they
can withstand. For example: In Figure 5-5, the grounded neutral conduc-
tor N is permitted to be a smaller AWG than the
Type TW 60°C “hot” ungrounded phase conductors (L–1 and
Type TWN75 75°C L–2) (Rule 4-018) only if it can be proved that all
Type T90 Nylon 90°C three service entrance conductors are properly and
Type RW90 90°C adequately sized to carry the loads computed by
Rule 8-200. Some utilities may not permit the reduc-
Conductors with TWN75, T90 Nylon, or tion of the service neutral for services of less than
RW90XLPE insulation are the types most com- 200 amperes. Therefore, check with the local utility
monly used in conduits because their relatively and inspection authority before proceeding.
small size makes them easy to handle and allows Rule 4-018 1) states that “the neutral conductor
more conductors in a given size of conduit. The last shall have sufficient ampacity to carry the unbal-
two conductors are rated for 90°C so they can be anced load.” Rule 4-018 2) further states that “the
used in high temperatures, such as those found in maximum unbalanced load shall be the maximum
attics, near recessed luminaires, and around cables connected load between the neutral and any one
buried in insulation. ungrounded conductor.”
The most commonly used cable is NMD90, In this residence, a number of loads carry little or
a non-metallic-sheathed type. Easy to handle, it is no neutral current, including the electric water heater,
rated for 90°C. electric clothes dryer, electric oven and range, elec-
The permitted ampacity of all 90°C-rated con- tric furnace, and electric air conditioner (Figure 5-5).
ductors used in ceiling light outlet boxes is reduced These appliances often draw their biggest cur-
to that of 60°C-rated conductor, Rule 30-408. rent through the “hot” conductors because they are
fed with 240-volt C or 120/240-volt circuits E .
Conductor Temperature Ratings Loads B are connected line-to-neutral only.
Thus, we find logic in the CEC, which permits
CEC Table 2 shows the types of insulations available reducing the neutral size on services, feeders, and
on conductors for building wire used in most electrical branch circuits where the computations prove that the
installations. This is the table that electricians refer to neutral will be carrying less current than the “hot”
most often when selecting wire sizes for specific loads. phase conductors.
76 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

Table 5-3

CEC Table 2 extract.

CEC TABLE 2
ALLOWABLE AMPACITIES FOR NOT MORE THAN THREE INSULATED COPPER CONDUCTORS, rated not more
than 5000 V and unshielded, IN RACEWAY OR CABLE (BASED ON AN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE OF 30°C)*
(Rules 4-004, 8-104, 12-3034, 26-142, 42-008, and 42-016 and Tables 5A, 5C, 19, 39, and D3)
Allowable Ampacity† ††
Size AWG or kcmil mm2 60°C‡ 75°C‡ 90°C‡ ** 110°C‡ See Note 125°C‡ See Note 200°C‡ See Note
14§ 2.08 15 20 25 25 30 35
12§ 3.31 20 25 30 30 35 40
§
10 5.26 30 35 40 45 45 60
8 8.37 40 50 55 65 65 80
6 13.3 55 65 75 80 90 110
4 21.2 70 85 95 105 115 140
3 26.7 85 100 115 125 135 165
2 33.6 95 115 130 145 155 190
1 42.4 110 130 145 165 175 215
0 53.5 125 150 170 190 200 245
00 67.4 145 175 195 220 235 290
000 85.0 165 200 225 255 270 330
0000 107 195 230 260 290 310 380
250 127 215 255 290 320 345 —
300 152 240 285 320 360 385 —
350 177 260 310 350 390 420 —
400 203 280 335 380 425 450 —
500 253 320 380 430 480 510 —
600 304 350 420 475 530 565 —
700 355 385 460 520 580 620 —
750 380 400 475 535 600 640 —
800 405 410 490 555 620 660 —

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

900 456 435 520 585 655 700 —
1000 507 455 545 615 690 735 —
1250 633 495 590 665 745 — —
1500 760 525 625 705 790 — —
1750 887 545 650 735 820 — —
2000 1010 555 665 750 840 — —
Col. 1A Col. 1B Col. 2 Col. 3 Col. 4 Col. 5 Col. 6 Col. 7

*
See Table 5A for the correction factors to be applied to the values in Columns 2 through 7 for ambient temperatures over 30°C.
†
The ampacity of aluminum-sheathed cable is based on the type of insulation used on the copper conductors.
‡
These are maximum allowable conductor temperatures for one, two, or three conductors run in a raceway, or two or three conductors run
in a cable, and may be used in determining the ampacity of other conductor types listed in Table 19, which are so run, as follows: From
Table 19 determine the maximum allowable conductor temperature for that particular type, then from this table determine the ampacity
under the column of corresponding temperature rating.
§
See Rule 14-104 2).
**
For mineral-insulated cables, these ratings are based on the use of 90°C insulation on the emerging conductors and for sealing. Where
a deviation has been allowed in accordance with Rule 2-030, mineral-insulated cable may be used at a higher temperature without a
decrease in allowable ampacity, provided that insulation and sealing material approved for the higher temperature are used.
††
See Table 5C for the correction factors to be applied to the values in Columns 2 through 7 where there are more than three conductors in a
run of raceway or cable.
Note: These ampacities apply to bare wire or under special circumstances where the use of insulated conductors having this temperature rat-
ing is acceptable.
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 77

L–N–L Load
120/240-volt load
E
M

L–1

120 volt
120 volt L–N LOAD B
120/240-volt, N 240 volt
1-phase, 3-wire
residential
240 volt L–L LOAD C
service 120 volt
120 volt L–N LOAD B
L–2

Figure 5-5 Line-to-line and line-to-neutral loads.

VOLTAGE DROP To find voltage drop

Low voltage can cause lights to dim, television pic-

tures to shrink, motors to run hot, electric heaters to K3I3L32
Ed 5
produce less than their rated heat output, and appli- mm2
ances to operate improperly.
where
Low voltage in a home can be caused by
Ed 5 Allowable voltage drop in volts
●● wire that is too small for the load being served
K 5 Resistance of conductor at 75°C:
●● a circuit that is too long ●● For copper conductors:
●● poor connections at the terminals
About 0.02 ohms per metre
●● conductors operating at high temperatures hav- ●● For aluminum conductors:
ing higher resistance than when operating at
lower temperatures About 0.0321 ohms per metre
A simple formula for calculating voltage drop I 5 Current in amperes flowing through the
on single-phase systems considers only the direct- conductors
current (DC) resistance of the conductors and the L 5 Length in metres
temperature of the conductor. The more accurate for-
mulas consider alternating-current (AC) resistance, 2 5 constant used for single-phase loads, use
reactance, three-phase installations, temperature, and ∙∙3 for three-phase installations
spacing in metal conduit and in non-metallic conduit. mm2 5 Square millimetre area of the conduc-
Voltage drop is covered in great detail in this book’s tor (Table 5-4)
companion textbook, Electrical Wiring: Commercial, To find conductor size:
also published by Cengage Canada.
The simple voltage drop formula is more accurate
with smaller conductors, but loses accuracy as conduc- K3I3L32
mm2 5
tor size increases. It is sufficiently accurate for the volt- Ed
age drop calculations necessary for residential wiring.
78 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

Always calculate a voltage drop when your deci-

Table 5-4 sion to use the higher-temperature-rated conductors
Square millimetre area for building wire and cable. was based on the fact that the use of smaller-size
NOMINAL
conduit would be possible. Select the proper size of
conductor to use for the job according to the load
AWG mm2 Area requirements and then complete a voltage drop cal-
14* 2.08 culation to see that the maximum permitted voltage
12 *
3.31 drop is not exceeded.
*
10 5.26
8 8.37
6 13.3 EXAMPLE
4 21.2 What is the approximate voltage drop on
3 26.7 a 120-volt, single-phase circuit consisting of
2 33.6 No. 14 AWG copper conductors where the
1 42.4 load is 11 amperes and the distance of the
0 53.5 circuit from the panel to actual load is
00 67 .4 25.9 m?
000 85
Solution
0000 107

K3I3L32
*
These sizes are customarily supplied with solid conductors. See Ed 5
mm2
CEC Table D5, Appendix D, columns 1 and 2 or use CEC Tables 1
through 4 for more conductor sizes and their square millimetre area. 0.02 3 11 3 25.9 3 2
5
2.08
Code Reference to Voltage Drop 5 5.48 volts drop

Rule 8-102 states the maximum allowed voltage

Note: Refer to Table 5-4 for the mm2 value.
drop percentages. The voltage drop shall not exceed
3% in any feeder or branch circuit (Figure 5-6) and
5% overall.
Figure 5-7 explains the requirements for a volt- The 5.48 voltage drop in Example 1 exceeds the
age drop that involves both the feeder and a branch voltage drop permitted by the CEC, which is
circuit. 3% of 120 volts 5 3.6 volts
Using No. 12 AWG:
Caution Using High-Temperature Wire
0.02 3 11 3 25.9 3 2
When trying to use smaller conduits, be careful Ed 5
3.31
about selecting conductors on the ability of their
insulation to withstand high temperatures. Refer- 5 3.44 volts drop
ence to Table 2 will confirm that the ampacity of
high-temperature conductors is greater than the This meets Code.
ampacity of lower-temperature conductors. For
instance: EXAMPLE
●● No. 8 90°C copper has an ampacity of 55 Find the wire size needed to keep the voltage
amperes. drop to no more than 3% on a single-phase
●● No. 8 60°C copper has an ampacity of 40 240-volt circuit that feeds a 44-ampere air con-
amperes. ditioner. The circuit originates at the main panel,
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 79

120.0 116.4

3% of 120 volts = 3.6 volts

120 volts – 3.6 volts = 116.4 volts

Load
Branch circuit

Figure 5-6 Maximum allowable voltage drop on a branch is 3%, Rule 8-102 1) a). Note: there must be a
load to establish a voltage drop.

which is located about 19.8 m from the air condi- If you compare the calculation of voltage
tioner. No neutral is required for this equipment. drop to the size of the wire or current, note that
The equipment has a known termination tempera- the larger wire gauge was from the current calcu-
ture of 75°C. lation. If the voltage drop calculation required a
larger wire than the current table, the larger wire is
Solution  First, size the conductors at 125% always installed.
of the air-conditioner load:

44 3 1.25 5 55-ampere conductors are required. APPROXIMATE

Checking Table 2, the copper conductors CONDUCTOR SIZE
would be No. 6 rated at 75°C.
Rule One
The permitted voltage drop is
Ed 5 240 3 0.03
For wire sizes up through 0000, every third size
doubles or halves in square millimetre area. A No. 1
5 7.2 volts AWG conductor is two times larger than a No. 4
K3I3L32 AWG conductor (42.4 versus 21.2), and a “0” wire
mm2 5
Ed is one-half the size of “0000” wire (53.5 versus 107).
0.02 3 44 3 19.8 3 2
5
7.2 Rule Two
5 4.84 mm minimum
2
For wire sizes up through 0000, every consecutive
According to Table 5-4, this would be a No. 10 wire size is about 1.26 times larger or smaller. A
AWG conductor, but this size of conductor would No. 3 AWG conductor is about 1.26 times larger
be too small for the load. So, you are back to a than a No. 4 AWG conductor (21.2 3 1.26 5 26.7).
No. 6 conductor. Thus, a No. 2 AWG wire is about 1.26 times smaller
than a No. 1 AWG wire (42.4 4 1.26 5 33.6).
80 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

5% of 120 volts = 6 volts

120.0 120 volts – 6 volts = 114 volts 114.0

Main

Subpanel

Load

60
60
20
20
15
15

Feeder Branch circuit

2% Ed 3% Ed

3% Ed 2% Ed

5% Ed maximum

Figure 5-7 Rule 8-102 1) b) states that the total voltage drop from the beginning of a feeder to the
farthest outlet on a branch circuit should not exceed 5%. In this figure, if the voltage drop in the feeder
is 3%, do not exceed 2% voltage drop in the branch circuit. If the voltage drop in the feeder is 2%, do not
exceed 3% voltage drop in the branch circuit. Note: there must be a load to establish a voltage drop.

A No. 10 AWG copper conductor has a square Solution

millimetre area of 5.26 and a resistance of 1.2 ohms
per 300 m. The resistance of aluminum wire is about WIRE SIZE mm2 OHMS PER 300 m
2 ohms per 1000 ft (300 m). By remembering these 10 5.26 1.2
numbers, you will be able to perform voltage drop 9
calculations without having the wire tables readily 8
available. 7 10.52 0.6
6 13.25 0.0476
EXAMPLE
When the mm2 of a wire is doubled, its resist‑
 hat are the approximate millimetres
W
ance is cut in half. And inversely, when a given wire
squared (mm2) and resistance at 300 m for a
size is reduced to one-half, its resistance doubles.
No. 6 AWG copper conductor?
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 81

CALCULATION OF MAXIMUM
EXAMPLE
LENGTH OF CABLE RUN USING
TABLE D3 What is the maximum distance that a
No. 10/2 *NMWU copper wire circuit may
CEC Table D3 (Table 5-5) gives a method of cal-
be run underground from the panel if it is carry-
culating the maximum length of a two-wire circuit.
ing a load of 20 amperes at 240 volts with a 3%
According to Rule 8-102 1), this may not exceed
maximum voltage drop?
3%. It considers
●● AWG of the wire Solution
●● current on the wire (load) L 5 TBL D3 dist. 3 % VD 3 DCF 3 Volts/120
●● distance of the conductor run (e.g., 10 m from 5 7.8 3 3 3 1.06 3 240/120
panel to outlet)
5 49.61 m
●● rated conductor temperature *
Note: Based on Table 19, the maximum allowable conductor tem-
●● percentage of allowable ampacity perature of NMWU is 60°C.

●● type of conductor, CU or AL, Table D3, Note 5

●● percentage voltage drop on feeder or branch NON-METALLIC-SHEATHED
circuit CABLE (RULES 12-500 THROUGH
●● voltage applied to circuit 12-526)
You can use the following formula to find the Description
maximum length of a run of wire using Table D3:
Non-metallic-sheathed cable is a factory assembly
L 5 TBL D3 dist. 3 % VD 3 DCF 3 Volts/120
of two or more insulated conductors having an outer
where sheath of moisture-resistant, flame-retardant non-
L 5 Maximum length of two-wire metallic material. This cable is available with two,
CU conductor run in metres three, or four current-carrying conductors, ranging in
TBL D3 dist. 5 Distance shown in Table D3 for size from No. 14 through No. 2 for copper or alumi-
the size of wire (AWG heading num. Two-wire cable contains one black conductor,
at top of table) and the actual one white conductor, and one bare bonding conduc-
load in amperes (“Current, A” tor or green insulated bonding conductor. Three-wire
column), at 1% drop in voltage cable contains one black, one white, one red, and one
% VD 5 M aximum percentage volt- bare bonding conductor or green insulated conductor.
age drop allowed on a feeder or The Canadian Standards Association (CSA) lists
branch circuit (Rule 8-102) (value three classifications of non-metallic-sheathed cable:
should be shown as a whole num- ●● Type NMD90 has a flame-retardant, moisture-
ber, not as a percentage) resistant non-metallic covering over the con-
DCF 5 D istance correction factor, ductors and is suitable for both dry and damp
­calculated by the distance cor- locations.
rection factor table found in
Table D3, Note 3, using “Per­­ ●● Type NMWU cable is a flame-retardant, mois-
centage of allowable ampacity” ture-resistant, corrosion-resistant, fungus-resis-
and rated conductor temperature tant non-metallic covering over the conductors.
NMWU is designed especially for use in wet and
Actual load amperes direct burial locations.
% allowable ampacity 5 3 100
Allowable conductor ampacity
Electricians once referred to non-metallic-
Volts 5 Voltage that the circuit operates sheathed cable as Romex or Loomex. Table 19 indi-
at (e.g., 120, 208, 240) cates that the conductors in Type NMD90 cable
82 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

Table 5-5
CEC Table D3.
CEC TABLE D3
DISTANCE TO CENTRE OF DISTRIBUTION FOR A 1% DROP IN VOLTAGE ON NOMINAL 120-V, 2-CONDUCTOR COPPER CIRCUITS
(See Appendix B Note to Rule 4-004.)
Insulated Copper Conductor Size, AWG
Current, 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 3 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 4/0
A
Distance to centre of distribution measured along the insulated conductor run, m (calculated for conductor insulation temperature of 60°C)
1.00 24.2 38.5 61.4
1.25 19.4 30.8 49.1
1.6 15.1 24.1 38.4 61.0
2.0 12.1 19.3 30.7 48.8
2.5 9.7 15.4 24.6 39.0 62.0
3.2 7.6 12.0 19.2 30.5 48.5
4.0 6.1 9.6 15.3 24.4 38.8 61.7
5.0 4.8 7.7 12.3 19.5 31.0 49.3
6.3 3.8 6.1 9.7 15.5 24.6 39.1 62.2
8.0 3.0 4.8 7.7 12.2 19.4 30.8 49.0
10.0 2.4 3.9 6.1 9.8 15.5 24.7 39.2 62.4
12.5 3.1 4.9 7.8 12.4 19.7 31.4 49.9 62.9
16 2.4 3.8 6.1 9.7 15.4 24.5 39.0 49.1 62.0
20 3.1 4.9 7.8 12.3 19.6 31.2 39.3 49.6 62.5
25 3.9 6.2 9.9 15.7 24.9 31.4 39.7 50.0 63.1
32 4.8 7.7 12.2 19.6 24.6 31.0 39.1 49.3 62.1

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

40 3.9 6.2 9.8 15.6 19.7 24.8 31.3 39.4 49.7 62.7
50 4.9 7.8 12.5 15.7 19.8 25.0 31.5 39.8 50.1 63.2
63 3.9 6.2 9.9 12.5 15.7 19.8 25.0 31.6 39.8 50.2
80 3.1 4.9 7.8 9.8 12.4 15.6 19.7 24.8 31.3 39.5
100 3.9 6.2 7.9 9.9 12.5 15.8 19.9 25.1 31.6
125 5.0 6.3 7.9 10.0 12.6 15.9 20.1 25.3
160 4.9 6.2 7.8 9.9 12.4 15.7 19.8
200 5.0 6.3 7.9 9.9 12.5 15.8
250 6.3 8.0 10.0 12.6
320 6.2 7.8 9.9

Notes: 1. Table D3 is calculated for copper wire sizes No. 18 AWG to No. 4/0 AWG and, for each size specified, gives the approximate distance in metres to the centre of distribution measured along the conductor
run for a 1% drop in voltage at a given current, with the conductor at a temperature of 60°C. Inductive reactance has not been included because it is a function of conductor size and spacing.
2. The distances for a 3% or 5% voltage drop are three or five times those for a 1% voltage drop.
3. Because the distances in Table D3 are based on conductor resistances at 60°C, these distances must be multiplied by the correction factors in the following table according to the temperature rating of the con-
ductor used and the percentage load with respect to the allowable ampacity. Where the calculation and the allowable ampacity fall between two columns, the factor in the higher percentage column shall be used.
Distance Correction Factor
Percentage of Allowable Ampacity
Rated Conductor Insulation Temperature 100 90 80 70 60 50 40
60°C 1.00 1.02 1.04 1.06 1.07 1.09 1.10
75°C 0.96 1.00 1.00 1.03 1.06 1.07 1.09
85–90°C 0.91 0.95 1.00 1.00 1.04 1.06 1.08
110°C 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.02 1.05 1.07
125°C 0.82 0.87 0.92 0.97 1.00 1.04 1.07
200°C 0.68 0.76 0.83 0.90 0.96 1.00 1.04
4. For other nominal voltages, multiply the distances in metres by the other nominal voltage (in volts) and divide by 120.
5. Aluminum conductors have equivalent resistance per unit length to copper conductors that are smaller in area by two AWG sizes. Table D3 may be used for aluminum conductors because of this relationship
(e.g., for No. 6 AWG aluminum, use the distances listed for No. 8 AWG copper in Table D3). Similarly, for No. 2/0 AWG aluminum use the distances for No. 1 AWG copper.
6. The distances and currents listed in Table D3 follow a pattern. When the current, for any conductor size, is increased by a factor of 10, the corresponding distance decreases by a factor of 10. This relationship
can be used when no value is shown in the table. In that case, look at a current 10 times larger. The distance to the centre of distribution is then 10 times larger than the listed value.
7. For multi-conductor cables, ensure that the wire size obtained from this table is suitable for ampacity from Table 2 or 4, and Rule 4-004.
8. For currents intermediate to listed values, use the next higher current value.
9. Example of the use of this table:
Consider a 2-conductor circuit of No. 12 AWG copper NMD90 carrying 16 A at nominal 240 V under maximum ambient of 30°C.
The maximum run distance from the centre of distribution to the load without exceeding a 3% voltage drop is:
Maximum run length for No. 12 AWG, 16 A, 1% voltage drop at nominal 120 V from table is 6.1 m
Distance correction factor to be used is:
From Table 2, allowable ampacity for 2-conductor No. 12 AWG NMD90 (90°C rating per Table 19) is 30 A. The given current is 16 A or 53% (16/30) of the allowable ampacity.
The distance correction factor to be used, from Note (3), 85–90°C row, 60% column, is 1.04.
The maximum run length is:
240 V
6.1 m 3 3s%d 3 1.04 3 5 38 m
120 V
If the distance is between 38 and 60.5 m, a larger size of conductor is required, e.g., No. 10 AWG (40 A allowable ampacity) 9.7 m 3 3(%) 3 1.08 3 240 V/120 V 5 62.9 m.
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 83

are rated for 90°C (194°F), making the cable suit-

able for the high temperatures found in attics, near
recessed luminaires, and around cables buried in
insulation.

Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

Non-metallic-sheathed cable has a bare cop-
per conductor that is used for bonding purposes
only (Figure 5-8). This bonding conductor is not
intended for use as a current-carrying circuit wire.
Equipment bonding requirements are specified
in Rules 10-600 through 10-616. These rules require
that all boxes and luminaires in the residence be
bonded to ground. Figure 5-8 Non-metallic-sheathed Type NMD90
cable showing (top to bottom) a black “ungrounded”
Table 16 (Table 5-6 below) lists the sizes of
(hot) conductor, a bare equipment-bonding conductor,
the bonding conductors used in cable assemblies. and a white “identified or grounded” conductor.
Note that the copper bonding conductor shown is a

Table 5-6

CEC Table 16.

Minimum size of field-installed system bonding jumpers and bonding conductors
(See Rule 10-616.)

Ampere Rating or Allowable Ampacity Minimum Size of System Bonding Jumper and Bonding Conductor
Setting of Overcurrent of Largest
Device Protecting Ungrounded
Conductor(s), Conductor or Group
Equipment, etc. of Conductors. Wire Bus
Copper, AWG Aluminum, Copper, Aluminum,
Not Exceeding or kcmil AWG or kcmil mm2 mm2
20 14 12 2.0 3.5
30 12 10 3.5 5.5
60 10 8 5.5 8.5
100 8 6 8.5 10.5
200 6 4 10.5 21.0
300 4 2 21.0 26.5
400 3 1 26.5 33.5
500 2 0 33.5 42.5
600 1 00 42.5 53.5
800 0 000 53.5 67.5
1000 00 0000 67.5 84.0
1200 000 250 84.0 127.0
© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

1600 0000 350 107.0 177.5

2000 250 400 127.5 203.0
2500 350 500 177.5 253.5
3000 400 600 203.0 355.0
4000 500 800 253.5 405.5
5000 700 1000 355.0 507.0
6000 800 1250 405.5 633.5
84 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

Table 5-7
Uses permitted in typical residential wiring for type NMD90 and NMWU
non-metallic-sheathed cable.
FOR TYPICAL RESIDENTIAL WIRING TYPE
NMD90 and NMWU CABLE TYPE NMD90 TYPE NMWU

May be used on circuits of 300 volts or less Yes Yes

Has flame-retardant and moisture-resistant outer covering Yes Yes
Has fungus-resistant and corrosion-resistant outer covering No Yes
May be used to wire one- and two-family dwellings or multifamily dwellings Yes Yes
May be installed exposed or concealed in dry or damp locations Yes Yes
May be embedded in masonry, concrete, plaster, fill No No
May be used for concealed wiring in Category 1 and Category 2 locations, No Yes
Rules 22-200, 22-202
May be installed in wet locations No Yes
May be used for direct burial locations No Yes
May be used as service entrance cable No No
Must be protected against damage Yes Yes

smaller size than the circuit conductors for 20- and ●● The cable must not be used in circuits of more
30-ampere ratings. than 300 volts between conductors.
Table 5-7 shows the uses permitted for Types ●● Wherever non-metallic-sheathed cable is less than
NMD90 and NMWU cable. Refer also to conditions 1.5 m above a floor, Rule 12-518 requires that the
of use in CEC Table 19. cable be protected from mechanical damage by
providing a metal conduit or a guard, or by install-
ing the cable in a location where there is no poten-
Installation tial hazard (Figure 5-11). A fitting (bushing or
connector) must be used at both ends of the conduit
Non-metallic-sheathed cable is the least expen- to protect the cable from abrasion, Rule 12-906.
sive of the wiring methods. It is relatively light A metal conduit must be bonded to ground, Rule
in weight and easy to install. It is widely used for 10-118, Appendix B.
dwelling unit installations on circuits of 300 volts ●● When cables are “bundled” together for dis-
or less. The installation of all types of non-metallic-
tances longer than 600 mm (Figure 5-12), the
sheathed cable must conform to the requirements of
heat generated by the conductors cannot eas-
Rules 12-500 through 12-526 (Figure 5-9):
ily dissipate, Rule 4-004 13). These conductors
●● The cable must be strapped or stapled not must be derated according to CEC Table 5C.
more than 300 mm from a box or fitting. See
When non-metallic-sheathed cable is run close
Figure 5-10 for permitted fasteners.
to a heating source, an air space must be main-
●● The intervals between straps or staples must not tained to minimize the transfer of heat to the cable
exceed 1.5 m. Rule 12-506 4). The spacing requirements are
●● The cable must be protected against physical ●● 25 mm to heating ducts
damage where necessary. ●● 50 mm to masonry chimneys
●● The cable must not be bent or stapled so that ●● 150 mm to chimney and flue cleanouts
the outer covering or the wires are damaged.
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 85

Maximum distance between

straps or staples
is 1.5 m Non-metallic cable
must be secured
within 300 mm of
non-metallic box

Clamp
necessary

Do not staple
2-wire NMSC cable Bare bonding
on edge Non-metallic conductor
sheath outer
Maximum distance jacket should
between straps be visible inside
or staples is the box after
1.5 m installation

Distance between box and first strap or

staple not to exceed 300 mm

Leave at least 150 mm of conductor

measured from where conductor
enters box

Figure 5-9 Installation of non-metallic-sheathed cable.

Figure 5-10 Approved devices used for

attaching NMSC to wood surfaces. Always check
the manufacturer’s information listed on the box
for proper use. Non-metallic-
sheathed cable Protect cable
with rigid PVC
The spacing may be reduced if an approved Protect cable conduit or other
from abrasion approved means.
thermal barrier is placed between the conductor and on both ends, Protect at least
the heat source that will maintain an ambient con- Rule 12-906 1.5 m above floor
ductor temperature of 30°C.
Figure 5-13 shows the CEC requirements for
securing non-metallic-sheathed cable.
Rule 10-614 3) requires that every metallic and
non-metallic outlet box for use with non-metallic
cable must have provisions for attaching the bond-
Figure 5-11 Installation of exposed non-
ing conductor. Figure 5-15 shows a gangable switch
metallic-sheathed cable where passing through
(device) box with a bonding screw by which the a floor.
bonding conductor may be connected underneath.
86 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

ARMOURED CABLE
(RULES 12-600 THROUGH 12-618)
Description
The CEC describes the construction of armoured
Fire or draft stopped
cable in Table D1. It lists three types: AC90 (com-
Non-metallic-
with thermal insulation, monly called “BX”), ACWU90, and TECK90.
caulk, or sealing foam
sheathed AC90 is approved for dry locations only. At one
cables
time, BX was a trademark owned by the General
Electric Company; it is now a generic term.
Armoured cable is an assembly of insulated
conductors in a flexible metallic enclosure; see
Figure 5-16. Armoured cable may be used in a
variety of locations depending on the type of
jacket on top of the armoured cable and the loca-
tion for the cable.
Figure 5-12 Bundled cables. When cables are
bundled for distances over 600 mm, the correction All three types may be used for a service
factor in CEC Table 5C applies. entrance above grade in dry locations, but ACWU90
and TECK90 are approved for service entrance

This is incorrect unless Cables of any size may be run

protected from injury, through holes bored in joists
Rule 12-514 b)

Cables of any size

may be run on the
sides of joists

Cables of any size may be

This is incorrect unless protected
run parallel to sides
from injury, Rule 12-514 1) b)
or face of joists

Figure 5–13 Rule 12-514 states how non-metallic-sheathed cable must be run in unfinished basements.
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 87

Ceiling joist Non-metallic-sheathed cable

Ceiling boxes must have provisions for

securing the non-metallic-sheathed cable

Figure 5-14 Rule 12-524 requires boxes to be of a type for use with NMSC.

Bonding screw

Courtesy of Thomas & Betts Corporation

Figure 5-15 Gangable device boxes with clamps for NMSC.

below grade. In all instances, verify with the local Use and Installation of Armoured
supply authority which cables you can use for ser- Cable*
vice entrances.
Armoured cable is generally available with two, Armoured cable can be used in more applications
three, or four conductors in sizes from No. 14 AWG than non-metallic-sheathed cable. Rules 12-600
to 2000 kcmil, inclusive: through 12-618 govern the use of armoured cable
in dwelling unit installations. AC90 and TECK90
●● Two wire 5 One black, one white 1 one bare
armoured cable
●● Three wire 5 One black, one red, one white 1 ●● may be used on circuits and feeders for applica-
one bare
tions of 600 volts or less
●● Four wire 5 One black, one red, one blue, one ●● may be used for open and concealed work in
white 1 one bare
dry locations
Armoured cable must have an internal bonding ●● may be run through walls and partitions
wire of copper or aluminum to meet the bonding
requirements of the CEC. ●● may be laid on the face of masonry walls and
buried in plaster if the conductors are not larger
than No. 10 AWG and used for the extension of
Courtesy of Northern

existing outlets
●● must be secured within 300 mm of every outlet
Cables Inc.

box or fitting and at intervals not exceeding 1.5 m

Figure 5-16 Flexible armoured cable.
*© 2021 Canadian Standards Association
88 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

Courtesy of AFC Cable Systems, Inc., New Bedford, MA

Figure 5-17 Anti-short bushing prevents the sharp metal armour from cutting the conductor insulation.

●● must not be bent so that the radius of the curve To prevent cutting of the conductor insulation
of the inner edge is less than six times the exter- by the sharp metal armour, insert an anti-short bush-
nal diameter of the cable ing at the cable ends (Figure 5-17).
●● must have an approved fibre or plastic insulat- Both non-metallic-sheathed cable and armoured
ing bushing (anti-short) at the cable ends to cable have advantages that make them suitable for
protect the conductor insulation (Figure 5-17) particular types of installations. However, the type
of cable to be used in a specific situation depends
Armoured cable (Types ACWU90 and TECK90)
largely on the wiring method permitted or required
is approved for use in these situations:
by the local building code.
●● underground installations
●● burying in masonry or concrete during con-
struction with minimum 50 mm of covering
●● installation in any location exposed to
weather
●● installation in any location exposed to oil, gaso-
line, or other materials that have a destructive
Courtesy of Seatek Co., Inc.

effect on the insulation

To remove the outer metal cable armour, you
should use a tool like the one shown in Figure 5-18A
or a hacksaw (Figure 5-18B) to cut through one
of the raised convolutions of the cable armour. Do
not cut too deep or you will cut into the conductor
Figure 5-18A This tool precisely cuts the outer
insulation. Then bend the cable armour at the cut. It
armour of armoured cable, making it easy to
will snap off easily, exposing the desired amount of remove with a few turns of the handle.
conductor.
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 89

INSTALLING CABLES
THROUGH WOOD AND
METAL FRAMING MEMBERS
(RULE 12-516)
To complete the wiring of a residence, you must
run cables through studs, joists, and rafters. One
method is to run the cables through holes drilled at
the approximate centres of wooden building mem-
bers, or at least 32mm from the nearest edge. Holes
bored through the centre of each 2 3 4 will meet the
requirements of Rule 12-516 (Figure 5-19).
Where cables and certain types of raceways are
run concealed or exposed parallel to a stud, joist,
rafter, or other building framing member, the cables
and raceways must be supported and installed so
that there is at least 32 mm from the edge of the
stud, joist, or other framing member to the cable or
Courtesy of Craig Trineer
raceway. If the 32 mm clearance cannot be main-
tained, a metal protection plate covering the width
of the member or a bushing inside the hole through
the member must be used to protect the cable from
damage, extending at least 13 mm beyond both
sides of the member, Rule 12-516; see Figures 5-19
Figure 5-18B A hacksaw can be used to cut and 5-20.
through a raised convolution of the cable armour. This additional protection is not required when
the raceway is rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC con-
duit, or EMT.

1 Cables run through holes drilled in

centres of studs, edge of bored hole
shall be not less than 32 mm from the Less than
nearest edge of the stud; otherwise, 32 mm
a metal protection plate must be used.

32 mm
Less than 3
32 mm

Steel

Cables

Notched
studs
2x2

2x4 2 Metal protection plate covering

at the width of the 2 x 4 or 2 x 2.

Figure 5-19 Methods of protecting cables, Rule 12-516. This rule does not apply to rigid metal conduit,
rigid PVC conduit, or EMT.
90 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

encountering metal joists or studs without any addi-

tional protection. The logic is similar to the excep-
tion that permits non-metallic-sheathed cable to be
fished between outlets without requiring supports as
stated in Rule 12-520.
The recreation room of this residence requires
adequate protection against physical damage for
the wiring. The walls in the recreation room are
to be panelled. Therefore, if the carpenter uses
Pipe
1 3 2 or 2 3 2 furring strips (Figure 5-21A), non-
metallic-sheathed cable would require additional
Metal protection
protection up the walls from the receptacle outlet
plate and switch. This could be quite costly and time-
consuming, and a good case could be made for
doing the installation in EMT.
Watch out for any wall partitions where 2 3 4
studs are installed “flat”; see Figure 5-21B. In this
case, you can either provide mechanical protection
as requ­ired by Rule 12-516 3) or install the wiring
in EMT.
Steel framing is used in a wide variety
32 mm
of residential applications, including single-
and multi-dwelling buildings. The framing is
Figure 5-20 Where cables or certain types of galvanized sheet steel that is prepunched to
raceways are run parallel to a joist or stud (any accommodate the installation of electrical and
framing member), keep the cable 32 mm from mechanical piping and cabling. Steel framing is
the edge of the framing member. Where this
clearance is impossible to maintain, install a metal
used for non-structural (light-gauge) and structural
protection plate, Rule 12-516. (heavy-gauge) applications.
When installing metal boxes on steel fram-
ing, you can use self-piercing screws on light-
You cannot install additional protection inside gauge framing, but self-drilling screws will be
the walls or ceilings of an existing building where required on heavy-gauge framing. A minimum of
the walls and ceilings are already closed in. Rule three threads should penetrate the framing. Steel
12-520 permits armoured cables to be “fished” studs do not provide as much support as wooden
between boxes or other access points when studs; therefore, extra support must be provided to

Foundation wall

10 3 20 or 20 3 20 Drywall or
furring strips panelling

Figure 5-21A When 1 3 2 or 2 3 2 furring strips are installed on the surface of a basement wall,
additional protection must be provided.
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 91

Drywall
20 3 40 studs or panelling

Figure 5-21B When 2 3 4 studs are installed “flat,” such as might be found in non-load-bearing
partitions, a cable running parallel to or through the studs must be protected against nails or screws being
driven through the cable. This means protecting the cable with protection plates or equivalent for its entire
length, or installing the wiring in a metallic raceway system.

prevent movement of the box after the drywall has INSTALLATION OF CABLE
been installed, Rule 12-3010. IN ATTICS
When running NMSC through metal framing,
you must protect the cable from mechanical injury Wiring in the attic must be done in cable and meet
by an approved insert where it passes through a the requirements of Rules 12-500 through 12-526
framing member, Rule 12-516 (Figure 5-22). for non-metallic-sheathed cable.

Metal
studs

Sharp
edges

Figure 5-22 Steel stud installation showing approved bushings for running NMSC through steel studs.
92 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

In accessible attics (see Part A of Figure 5-23), Part C of Figure 5-23 illustrates a cable installa-
cables must not be installed tion that most electrical inspectors consider to be safe.
●● across the top of floor or ceiling joists 1 , Because the cables are installed close to the point
where the ceiling joists and the roof rafters meet, they
●● across the face of studs 2 or rafters 3 that have
are protected from physical damage. It would be very
a vertical distance between the rafter and floor
difficult for a person to crawl into this space, or to
or floor joists exceeding 1 m.
store cartons in an area with a clearance of less than
Guard strips are not required if the cable is run 1 m (Part B of Figure 5-23). Although the plans for this
along the sides of rafters, studs, or floor joists 4 , residence show a 600-mm-wide catwalk in the attic,
provided Rule 12-516 1) 2) is met. the owner may decide to install additional flooring

3
Greater than 1 m 2
2.13 m

A
4

Less than 1 m Less than 1 m

Figure 5-23 Protection of cable in attic. See Rule 12-514 Appendix B, Figure B12-3.
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 93

Guard strips The CEC permits Type NMD90 cable to be

installed in joist and stud spaces (e.g., cold air
returns) in dwellings, provided it meets the require-
Running board
ments of Rule 12-010 5). It recommends that Type
NMD90 pass through such spaces only if the cable
is run at right angles to its long dimensions. Always
check with your local inspection department and the
National Building Code of Canada (Figure 5-25).

CONNECTORS FOR
INSTALLING NON-METALLIC-
SHEATHED AND ARMOURED
CABLE
Cables may be run through holes bored in the The connectors shown in Figure 5-26A are used for
joists, Rule 12-516 1). However, check local building terminating non-metallic-sheathed cable, and in Fig-
codes since holes may not be drilled in any part of
a prefabricated roof system. ure 5-26B are connectors used with armoured cable.
Both are used to terminate into boxes and panel-
Figure 5-24 Methods of protecting cable
installations in attics. See Rule 12-514 Appendix B,
boards. These connectors clamp the cable securely
Figure B12-3. to each outlet box. Many boxes have built-in clamps
(Figure 5-26C) and do not require the separate con-
nectors. Knockouts and pryouts on the sides of
in the attic to obtain more storage space. Because of boxes allow installation of cables and connectors;
the large number of cables required to complete the see Figure 5-26D.
circuits, it would interfere with flooring to install Unless the CSA listing of a specific cable con-
running boards or guard strips wherever the cables nector indicates that the connector has been tested
run across the tops of the joists. If running boards or for use with more than one cable, the rule is one
guard strips are used on the upper face of the ceil- cable, one connector.
ing joists in the attic or roof space, they shall be at
least 38 mm × 38 mm; see Figure 5-24. However, the
cables can be run through holes bored in the joists and ELECTRICAL METALLIC
along the sides of the joists and rafters. In this way, TUBING (RULES 12-1400
the cables do not interfere with the flooring. Note that THROUGH 12-1414) AND RIGID
most building codes will not allow manufactured roof METAL CONDUIT (RULES 12-1000
systems to be drilled. This includes roof trusses. THROUGH 12-1014)
When running cables parallel to framing mem- In a building constructed of cement block, cinder
bers, maintain at least 32 mm between the cable and block, or poured concrete, it is necessary to make
the edge of the framing member, Rule 12-516 1) 2). the electrical installation in conduit.
This minimizes the possibility of driving nails or According to the CEC installation requirements,
screws into the cable. EMT and rigid metal conduit:
●● may be used for open or concealed work
INSTALLATION OF CABLES ●● may be buried in concrete or masonry (with
THROUGH DUCTS certain provisions)
Rules 2-130 and 2-132 are strict about what types
●● may be used in combustible or noncombustible
of wiring methods are permitted for installing cables construction
through ducts or plenum chambers. These stringent In general, EMT must be supported within
rules are for fire safety. 1 m of each box or fitting and at 1.5 m intervals
94 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

Joist
Joist

Cold air space

(return)

Stud
Cable may be installed
in this space if run
Stud
at right angles
to the long
dimension of space

Not recommended

Figure 5-25 Non-metallic-sheathed cable may pass through cold air return, joist, or stud spaces
in a dwelling, provided they meet the requirements in Rule 12-010 5).

All photos: Courtesy of Thomas & Betts Corporation

Figure 5-26A Various cable connectors for non-metallic-sheathed cable.

 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 95

All photos: Courtesy of Thomas &

Betts Corporation
Figure 5-26B Various cable connectors for armoured cable and flexible conduit.

Not over 1 m between support and box or fitting

Clamp used for armoured
cable (AC90) and
non-metallic-sheathed
cable (NMD90)

Not over 1.5 m between A coupling is

supports for 16 and 21 a “fitting”
Clamp for Clamp for trade size conduits
non-metallic- non-metallic-
sheathed sheathed Figure 5-27 CEC requirements for support
cable cable
(NMD90) (NMD90)
of rigid metal conduit (Rule 12-1010) and EMT
(Rule 12-1406). For supporting rigid PVC conduit,
Octagonal boxes Device boxes refer to Rule 12-1114.

Figure 5-26C Typical cable clamps for boxes.

conductors than does EMT, which has a thinner wall

but is more expensive.
Conduit Knockouts The residence specifications in this text
16 trade 21 trade 27 trade indicate that a meter base is to be supplied and
size size size
installed by the electrical contractor. Main Panel A,
a combination panel, is located in the workshop.
22 mm 28 mm 35 mm
The meter base is located on the outside of the
house as indicated on the electrical plan. The elec-
Cable Pryouts
trical contractor must furnish and install a 53-trade
size rigid PVC conduit between the meter base
and Main Panel A.
17 mm
Rule 12-906 requires that insulating bushings or
equivalent be used where No. 8 or larger conduc-
12 mm
tors enter a raceway. Also, if rigid metallic conduit
Figure 5-26D Knockouts and pryouts. Note the is used between the meter base and the combina-
difference between the nominal trade sizes of the tion panel, bonding-type bushings must be used on
knockouts and the actual diameters. the service entrance conduit. (See Rule 10-604 for
methods of bonding at the service equipment.)
The plans indicate that EMT is to be run from
along runs for 16 and 21 trade size tubing; see the workshop to the attic.
Figure 5-27 and Rule 12-1010. Properly installed EMT provides good con-
The number of conductors of the same size per- tinuity for equipment bonding, a means of with-
mitted in EMT and rigid conduit is given in Tables drawing or pulling in additional conductors, and
10, 8, and 9. Heavy-wall rigid conduit provides excellent protection against physical damage to the
greater protection against mechanical injury to conductors.
96 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

RIGID PVC CONDUIT are needed. See Rule 12-1114 for maximum sup-
(RULES 12-1100 THROUGH port spacing.
12-1124) Rule 12-1118 and Appendix B give a formula
for calculating the linear expansion of various
PVC conduit is easily handled, stored, cut, and materials. Since PVC has one of the highest coef-
joined. It is commonly used for service entrance ficients of linear expansion, check that the maxi-
conduit in residential services in both overhead and mum expansion of the conduit due to temperature
underground applications. Easy to work with, it pro- change will not exceed 45 mm, Rule 12-1118. The
vides a rigid, watertight conduit for the consumer’s formula is
service conductors.
When joining PVC to a fitting, you must cut, ∆l 5 L 3 ∆T 3 C
ream, clean, and glue the conduit. To cut PVC, where
use a hacksaw; for larger sizes of conduit, use a ∆l 5 C hange in length, in millimetres, of
mitre box so that the cut is square. Measure twice, a run of rigid PVC conduit, due to
cut once. After cutting PVC conduit, ream out the the maximum expected variation in
burrs with a knife and clean the end of the pipe temperature
and inside of the fitting with an approved PVC L 5 Length of the run of conduit in metres
pipe cleaner. Then apply a liberal coat of solvent ∆T 5 Maximum expected temperature change,
cement to both surfaces, slide together, and give in degrees Celsius
a quarter turn to make sure the solvent is spread C 5 Coefficient of linear expansion
evenly on the material. Hold together for a few
seconds, and the joint is made. See Figure 5-28,
Parts A and B.
Do not use an open flame to bend PVC, Rule EXAMPLE
12-1108 and Appendix B. Instead, use an approved
heat gun, heat blanket, or other flameless heat A 25-m length (L 5 25) of rigid PVC
source to heat the pipe to about 125°C; see Parts conduit is run outside where the minimum
C and D of Figure 5-28. Always heat an area of at expected temperature is 240°C and the maximum
least 10 times the diameter of the conduit before expected temperature is 1 40°C (DT 5 80). The
attempting to bend it. If not heated enough, the coefficient of linear expansion for PVC conduit
pipe will kink or collapse. When you make a 90° is 0.0520 mm per m per °C (C 5 0.052),
bend, the centre radius of the bend must meet the Rule 12-1118 and Appendix B.
minimum radius requirements of Table 7, Rule
12-924.
Solution
Thus, for 16 trade size conduit, the minimum
radius is 102 mm. If the radius is ten times the Dl 5 L 3 DT 3 C
internal diameter, it is a lot easier to fish and pull 5 25 3 80 3 0.052
in wires after the conduit is installed. Draw a
template of the bend first, and then heat the con- 5 104 mm
duit and shape it to the template; see Part E of The expansion and contraction of the
Figure 5-28. conduit exceeds the 45 mm maximum
To provide adequate support for the conduit permitted in Rule 12-1118; therefore, an
system, you must use proper straps. The two-hole “O” ring expansion joint with at least 104 mm
strap in Figure 5-29, Part O, allows the conduit to of expansion will be required; see items E and
move as it expands or contracts. Never clamp the F in Figure 5-29. Generally, where the expected
conduit tightly, Rule 12-1114 3). The spacing for temperature change is more than 14°C, you
supports is about half the distance for other types should use expansion joints.
of conduit; therefore, twice the number of straps
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 97

B C

Photos A–E: Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

D E

Figure 5-28 (A) Clean conduit and apply solvent cement. (B) Insert conduit into fitting and rotate a
quarter turn. (C) Heat conduit until soft using approved heater or heat gun (D) for bending conduit.
(E) Use template for 90° bends, Rule 12-1108 and Appendix B.
98 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

A B C D

Service entrance Meter hub Offset connector Rigid metal to PVC

cap conduit adaptor

F
E G H I

O-ring expansion O-ring expansion Type “LB” Type “LL” Type “LR”
joint closed joint open

J K L M

Type “C” Type “E” Type “T” Type “TA”

N O

Photos A–P: Courtesy IPEX Inc.

PVC coupling Two-hole strap

Figure 5-29 Various PVC fittings: Access fittings, a TA fitting for connection to a panel or a box,
a coupling, and a two-hole PVC strap for support.
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 99

A
A

Photos A–C: Courtesy of Electri-Flex Co.

B

Figure 5-30 (A) Flexible metal conduit.

(B) Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. C
(C) Liquidtight flexible non-metallic conduit.

Figure 5-31 Fittings for (A) flexible metal

conduit, (B) liquidtight flexible metal conduit,
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS and (C) liquidtight flexible non-metallic
(RULES 12-1000 THROUGH 12-1014 conduit.
AND 12-1300 THROUGH 12-1308)
Some equipment installations require flexible
connections, both to simplify the installation and to
stop the transfer of vibrations. In residential wiring,
flexible connections are used to wire attic fans, food armoured cable, the cable armour is wrapped
waste disposers, dishwashers, air conditioners, heat around the conductors at the factory to form a
pumps, recessed luminaires, and similar equipment. complete cable assembly.
The three types of flexible conduit used for Figure 5-32 shows some installations that
these connections are commonly use flexible metal conduit. The flexibility
●● flexible metal conduit; Figure 5-30, Part A required to make the installations is provided by
the flexible metal conduit, and a separate bonding
●● liquidtight flexible metal conduit; Figure 5-30,
conductor is required to be run within the conduit,
Part B
Rule 10-610 3).
●● liquidtight flexible non-metallic conduit; Summarizing Rules 12-1002 through 12-1014
Figure 5-30, Part C concerning flexible metal conduit:
Figure 5-31 shows types of connectors used ●● Do not install in wet locations unless the
with flexible conduit. conductors are suitable for that use (RW90,
TWN75). Ensure that water will not enter the
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT enclosure or other raceways to which the flex
(RULES 12-1002 THROUGH 12-1014) is connected.
●● Do not bury in concrete.
Rule 12-1002 covers the use and installation
of flexible metal conduit. This wiring method ●● Do not bury underground.
is similar to armoured cable, except that the ●● Do not use in locations subject to corrosive
conductors are installed by the electrician. For conditions.
 100 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

Food waste
●● You may use conduit for exposed or concealed
disposer installations.
●● Same conductor fill rules as regular conduit,
Rule 12-1014.
●● Use fittings approved for use with flexible
metal conduit.

LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE
METAL CONDUIT (RULES 12-1300
THROUGH 12-1308)*
The use and installation of liquidtight flexible metal
Flexible conduit are described in Rules 12-1300 through
metal
conduit 12-1308. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit has a
“tighter” fit to its spiral turns than standard flex-
90° 90°
ible metal conduit, as well as a thermoplastic outer
jacket that is liquidtight. It is commonly used as the
flexible connection to a central air-conditioning unit
located outdoors.
90° Figure 5-33 shows the CEC rules for the use of
90° liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
Equipment Liquidtight flexible metal conduit:
bonding conductor
●● May be used for exposed and concealed
Figure 5-32 Some common places where
installations.
flexible metal conduit may be used.
●● May be buried directly in the ground if so listed
and marked.
●● May not be used where subject to physical
abuse.
●● Do not use the metal armour of flexible con-
●● May not be used if ambient temperature and
duit as a bonding means; a separate bonding
heat from conductors will exceed 60°C unless
conductor must be installed inside flexible
marked for a higher temperature.
conduit, Rule 10-610 3).
●● 12 trade size is not permitted longer than 1.5 m.
●● Runs of 12 trade size flexible metal conduit
are not permitted to be longer than 1.5 m, ●● Must have the same conductor fill as regular
Rule 12-1004. conduit, Rule 12-1014.
●● Support conduit every 1.5 m. ●● The maximum number of insulated conductors,
Rule 12-910.
●● Support conduit within 300 mm of box, cabi-
net, or fitting. ●● Must be used only with approved fittings.
●● If flexibility is needed, support conduit within ●● Must not be used when flexing at low tempera-
900 mm of termination, Rule 12-1010 3). tures, may cause damage to the jacket.
●● Do not conceal angle-type fittings because
access will be needed when pulling in wires. *© 2021 Canadian Standards Association
 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 101

A Runs of not more than 1.5 m

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

of 12 trade size are permitted
for connections to equipment

B Liquidtight flexible metal conduit

may not be used as a bonding
means in any size

Figure 5-33 Liquidtight flexible metal conduit rules, Rules 12-1300 through 12-1308.

●● Is not acceptable as a bonding means, ●● You may use it outdoors when listed and
Rule 10-610 3). marked as suitable for this application.
●● Must not have concealed angle-type fittings. ●● You may bury it directly in the earth when listed
and marked as suitable for this application.
●● You may not use it where it might be subject to
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NON- mechanical damage.
METALLIC CONDUIT (RULES
12-1300 THROUGH 12-1308)* ●● You may not use it if ambient temperature
and heat from the conductors will exceed the
Summarizing CEC rules pertaining to liquidtight temperature limitation of the non-metallic
flexible non-metallic conduit: material.
●● Do not use in direct sunlight unless specifically ●● 12 trade size is allowed for enclosing the leads
marked for use in direct sunlight. to a motor, Rule 12-1302 2).
●● You may use it in exposed or concealed ●● Conductor fill is the same as for regular con-
installations. duit, Rule 12-1304.
●● It can become brittle in extreme cold ●● It must be used with approved fittings.
applications. ●● A separate bonding conductor is required and
should be sized with reference to Table 16 and
*© 2021 Canadian Standards Association installed according to Rule 10-616.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. What is the largest size of solid wire that is commonly used for branch circuits and
feeders?

2. What is the minimum size of branch-circuit conductor that may be installed in a dwell-
ing unit?
102 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

3. What exceptions, if any, are there to the answer for Question 2?

4. Define the term ampacity.

5. What is the maximum voltage rating of all NMSC?

6. What is the maximum ampacity of the following Type T90 Nylon copper conductors.
Refer to CEC, Table 2.
a. 14 AWG amperes
b. 12 AWG amperes
c. 10 AWG amperes
d. 8 AWG amperes
e. 6 AWG amperes
f. 4 AWG amperes
7. What is the maximum operating temperature of these conductors? Give the answer in
Celsius. (Use Tables 11 and 19.)
a. Type TW
b. Type NMWU
c. Type LVT
d. Type DRT
8. What are the colours of the conductors in non-metallic-sheathed cable for
a. two-wire cable?
b. three-wire cable?
9. For non-metallic-sheathed (Type NMD90) cable, can the uninsulated conductor be
used for purposes other than bonding?
10. Under what condition may non-metallic-sheathed cable (Type NMD90) be fished in
the hollow voids of stud walls?
11. a. What is the maximum distance permitted between straps when using non-metallic-
sheathed cable (NMSC)?
b. What is the maximum distance permitted between a box and the first strap when using
NMSC?
12. What is the difference between Type AC90 and Type TECK90 cable?

13. [Fill in the blank and then circle the correct answer.] Type AC90 cable may be bent
to a radius of not less than ______ times the diameter of the cable, measured to the
(inside, outside) edge of the cable.
14. When armoured cable is used, what protection is provided at the cable ends?
UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing 103

15. What protection must be provided when installing a cable in a notched stud or joist?

16. Cables passing through a stud where the edge of the bored hole is less than mm
from the edge of the stud require additional protection.
17. a. Is non-metallic-sheathed cable permitted in your area for residential occupancies?

b. From what source is this information obtained?

18. [Circle the correct answer.] Does flexible metal conduit require a bonding conductor
to be run within the conduit? State the CEC rule number with your answer. (Yes) (No)

19. [Circle the correct answer.] Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (may) (may not) serve
as a bonding means.
20. The allowable current-carrying capacity (ampacity) of aluminum wire is less than
that of an equivalent copper wire. Use Rule 4-002 and Tables 2, 4, and 13 to com-
plete the following table. Enter both ampacity and maximum overcurrent protection
values.

COPPER ALUMINUM
WIRE Ampacity Overcurrent Protection Ampacity Overcurrent Protection
No. 12 R90
No. 10 R90
No. 3 TW75
0000 TW
500 kcmil RW75

21. [Circle the correct answer.] All solderless wire connectors are approved to connect
aluminum and copper conductors together in the same connector. (True) (False)
22. Terminals of switches and receptacles marked CO/ALR are suitable for use with
and conductors.
23. When non-metallic-sheathed cables are bunched or bundled together for distances
longer than 600 mm, what happens to their current-carrying ability?
104 UNIT 5 Conductor Sizes and Types, Wiring Methods, Wire Connections, Voltage Drop, and Neutral Sizing

24. A 120-volt branch circuit supplies a resistive heating load of 10 amperes. The distance
from the panel to the heater is about 43 m. Referring to CEC Table 2 or Table D5, in
Appendix D, columns 1 and 2, calculate the voltage drop using (a) No. 14, (b) No. 12,
(c) No. 10, and (d) No. 8 AWG copper conductors.
25. In Question 24, it is desired to keep the voltage drop to 3% maximum. What is the
minimum size of wire that would be installed to accomplish this 3% maximum
voltage drop?

26. Use Table D3 from the Code book and compare your answer to question 24 using a 3%
voltage drop.
Use this formula:
L 5 Lt 3 P 3 DCF 3 (V / 120)
where
L 5 the maximum distance to the centre of distribution in metres
Lt 5 the distance to the centre of distribution in metres given in Table D3 for 1% voltage drop
at 120 V
P 5 the voltage drop percent required in the circuit
DCF 5 the distance correction factor given in Note (3) to Table D3
V 5 the voltage required by the load
So
A 120-volt branch circuit supplies a resistive heating load of 10 amperes. The distance
from the panel to the heater is about 43 m. Calculate the voltage drop using the follow-
ing AWG copper conductors with a temperature rating of 60°C.
(a) No. 14
(b) No. 12
(c) No. 10
(d) No. 8
27. Which cable is permissible to be used as a service entrance cable?
a. NMD90
b. T90 Nylon
c. NMWU
d. AC90
 UNIT

6
Switch Control of Lighting
Circuits, Device Bonding,
and Induction Heating
Resulting from Unusual
Switch Connections RED SEAL
OCCUPATIONAL
STANDARD
(RSOS)
Objectives
For the Red Seal exam,
After studying this unit, you should be able to note that this unit covers
●● identify the grounded and ungrounded the following RSOS tasks:
conductors in cable or conduit (colour coding) ●● Task B-11
●● identify the types of toggle switches for lighting ●● Task C-16
circuit control ●● Task C-17
●● select a switch with the proper rating for the
specific installation conditions
●● describe the operation that each type of toggle
switch performs in typical lighting circuit
installations
●● demonstrate the correct wiring connections the
CEC requires for each type of switch
105
106 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating

●● understand the various ways to bond with an identifiable coloured stripe (not green) run-
devices to a device box ning along the insulation, Rule 4-024 1).
When a two-wire circuit is used, the white iden-
●● understand how to design circuits to tified (grounded) circuit conductor is not truly a
avoid heating by induction neutral conductor unless
The electrician installs and connects various types ●● It is the conductor that carries only the unbal-
of lighting switches. To do this, the electrician must anced current from the other conductors, as in
know the operation and method of connection of the case of multiwire circuits of three or more
each type of switch, understand the meanings of conductors, Rule 4-004 3).
the current and voltage ratings marked on lighting ●● It is the conductor where the voltage from every
switches, and follow the Canadian Electrical Code other conductor to it is equal under normal
(CEC) requirements for installing them. operating conditions.
Improper installation can result in fires and elec-
Therefore, the white identified (grounded) circuit
tric hazards. To prevent this, all devices and wiring
conductor of a two-wire circuit is not really a “neutral,”
must be done in compliance to the CEC. Anything
even though many electricians refer to it as such. See
less is an unsafe installation!
Figures 6-1A and 6-1B.

CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION Colour Coding (Cable Wiring)

(RULE 4-032)
Non-metallic-sheathed cable (NMD90) and
Before making any wiring connections to devices, armoured cable (AC90) are colour-coded as follows:
the electrician must be familiar with the ways in ●● Two-wire: One black (“hot” phase conductor)
which conductors are identified. For alternating- One white (“identified” grounded
current (AC) circuits, the CEC requires that the conductor)
grounded (identified) circuit conductor have an One bare (bonding conductor)
outer covering that must be white. The CEC also or
recognizes that installations may require that iden- One black (“hot” phase conductor)
tified conductors from different systems are to be One red (“hot” phase conductor)
installed in the same raceway, box, or enclosure. In One bare (bonding conductor)
this case, the identified conductors of the other sys-
●● Three-wire: One black (“hot” phase conductor)
tem shall be permitted to be white with a coloured
stripe, other than green, along the insulation as indi- One white (“identified” grounded
cated in Rule 4-024 2). In multiwire branch circuits, conductor)
the grounded circuit conductor is also called a neu- One red (switch wire)
tral conductor only when all the phases of the sys- One bare (bonding conductor)
tem are used, Rule 4-020 and Section 0. or
The ungrounded (“hot”) conductor of a circuit One black (“hot” phase conductor)
must be marked in a colour other than green or One white (“neutral” grounded
white. You will feel a shock if you hold this conduc- conductor)
tor and the grounded conductor at the same time, or One red (“hot” phase conductor)
touch this conductor and a grounded surface such as One bare (bonding conductor)
a water pipe at the same time. Four-wire: One red (“hot” phase conductor)
●●

One black (“hot” phase conductor)

Neutral Conductor One blue (“hot” phase conductor)
One white (“neutral” grounded
In all residential wiring, the grounded neutral con- conductor)
ductor’s insulation is white. It may also be white One bare (bonding conductor)
 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating 107

“Hot ” conductor Colour Coding (Raceway Wiring)

When the installation is in a raceway, Rule 4-032 3)
120 volts
permits the electrician to use any of the above
Neutral or grounded conductor
240 volts
colours for the hot phase conductor except:
●● Green: R eserved for grounding and bonding
120 volts
conductors only
“Hot” conductor
●● White: Reserved for use as the grounded identi-
This is a three-wire circuit. The grounded conductor can be termed a fied or neutral circuit conductor
neutral conductor.

Changing Colours
“Hot ” conductor

Should it become necessary to change the actual

120 volts colour of the conductor to meet CEC requirements,
Identified or grounded conductor
the electrician may change the colours, as indicated
in Table 6-1.
This is a two-wire circuit. The grounded conductor is not truly a neutral For conductors installed in a raceway only, Rule
conductor.
4-024 1) requires that all insulated neutral conduc-
Figure 6-1A Definition of a true neutral conductor. tors, up to and including No. 2 AWG, be identified
by a white covering or by three continuous stripes
along the entire length of the conductor. Rule 4-026
allows an exception to Rule 4-024 1): when the insu-
lated neutral conductor is larger than No. 2 AWG,
1 [ 3W panel the conductor insulation can be black if it is perma-
L1 L2 N
nently identified before installation at each end with
1 [ 2W branch circuit
either white tape, white paint, or white heat-shrink
Identified conductor tubing.
See Rule 4-003 4)
The insulated grounding or bonding conductors
1 [ 3W branch circuit should be green or green with strips run continuously
throughout the entire run of the conductor in the race-
Neutral conductor
See Rule 4-003 3) way. If the conductor is larger than No. 2 AWG, it is
3 [ 4W panel permitted to use a black conductor if it is identified
L1 L2 L3 N
permanently at each visible end with either green tape,
1 [ 2W branch circuit
green paint, or green heat-shrink tubing, Rule 4-032 1).
Identified conductor When colour-coded circuits are required, phase
See Rule 4-003 4)
A conductors are to be coloured red, phase B con-
1 [ 3W branch circuit ductors should be coloured black, phase C conduc-
tors are to be coloured blue, and neutral conductors
Identified conductor
See Rule 4-004 4)
should be coloured white, or white with a coloured
stripe where more than one system is present in the
3 [ 4W branch circuit
raceway, box, or enclosure, Rule 4-032 3).
For cable installations only, Rule 4-030 1)
Neutral conductor permits you to use the identified conductor as an
See Rule 4-003 3) ungrounded “hot” conductor if any exposed portion
of the white conductor is permanently identified
Figure 6-1B The difference between an identified
at each accessible point in the circuit by coloured
conductor and a neutral conductor in single-phase
three-wire and three-phase four-wire panels. paint, heat-shrink tubing, tape, permanent marker,
or equivalent means. (see Figure 6-2).
108 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating

14/2 NMD90 cable used for the arc fault circuit

Table 6-1 interrupter (AFCI)-protected circuit may have a
Changing colour of wire. blue jacket. Different coloured cables for specific
FROM TO DO
applications aid the electrician when the conductors
are terminated in the panel, clearly identifying the
Red, Bonding For conductors larger ampacity and type of circuit breaker required.
black, conductor than No. 2 AWG, strip
blue off insulation to make
it bare, or paint it green
where exposed in the TOGGLE SWITCHES (RULES
box, or mark exposed 14-500 THROUGH 14-514)
insulation with green
In Raceways

tape, Rule 4-032 1) b).

The most frequently used switch in lighting
Red, Grounded For conductors larger
black, neutral than No. 2 AWG,
circuits is the toggle flush switch; see Figure 6-3.
blue conductor should be suitably When mounted in a flush device box, the switch is
labelled or otherwise concealed in the wall with only the insulated handle
clearly marked at
each end at the time or toggle protruding.
of installation; white Figure 6-4 shows how switches and receptacles
tape or white paint is
acceptable, Rule 4-026.
are protected in damp or wet locations using
White Ungrounded Un-identify with
weatherproof covers.
“hot” coloured tape or paint
conductor

conductor (Figure 6-2), Rule

In Multi-

Cables

4-030 1).

Courtesy of Hubbell Canada LP

Type NMD90

Black plastic
tape

Figure 6-2 You may wrap the white wire with at

least 150 mm, half-wrap coloured tape where it is Figure 6-3 Toggle flush switches.
accessible and visible so that everyone will know
that this wire is not a grounded conductor, Rule
4-030 1). Note: This cannot be done in a raceway,
Rule 4-032 3).

When using two-conductor non-metallic-

Courtesy of Craig Trineer

sheathed cable for applications that do not require

an identified conductor other than switch lines, the
authority enforcing the code may require the use of a
Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

cable that has a red conductor in place of the white.

In residential applications, this would be for loads
that operate at 240 volts, such as electric heaters and
hot water tanks. This cable usually has a red jacket
so that the inspection authority can easily identify it.
Many electricians choose to use non-metallic-
sheathed cable with different coloured jackets. For
Figure 6-4 Receptacle outlet and toggle switch
example, the 12/2 NMD90 cable used for the 20-ampere are protected by a weatherproof cover.
T-slot receptacles may have a yellow jacket, or the
 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating 109

Toggle Switch Ratings Manually operated general-use AC switches are

used to control
The Canadian Standards Association (CSA) classi­­­
●● alternating currents only
fies toggle switches for lighting circuits as general-
use switches. These switches are divided into three ●● resistive, inductive, and tungsten filament lamp
sections: general-use AC/DC switches, manually loads not to exceed the ampere rating of the
operated general-use AC switches, and manually switch at 120 volts
operated general-use 347V AC switches. AC general-use switches are marked “AC only”
General-use AC/DC switches are used to control in addition to identifying their current and voltage
●● alternating-current (AC) or direct-current (DC) ratings. A typical switch marking is 15 amperes,
circuits 120–277 volts AC. The 277-volt rating is required
on 277/480-volt systems.
●● resistive loads not to exceed the voltage and
Manually operated general-use 347-volt AC
ampere rating of the switch
switches are used to control
●● inductive loads not to exceed one-half the
●● AC loads only
ampere rating of the switch at rated voltage
●● resistive and inductive loads not to exceed the
●● tungsten filament lamp loads not to exceed
ampere rating of the switch at 347 volts
the ampere rating of the switch at 125 or
250 volts when the switch is not marked with In addition, the current rating shall not be less than
the letter “T” 15 amperes, 347 volts. The switches are designed
so they cannot be mounted in boxes for general-
A tungsten filament lamp draws a very high
use AC/DC and manually operated general-use AC
momentary inrush current at the instant the circuit
switches: Their mounting holes are 6.4 mm farther
is energized because the cold resistance of tungsten
apart than those in standard switches.
is very low. For instance, the cold resistance of
If they are grouped or ganged in the same
a typical 100-watt lamp is about 9.5 ohms. This
box, AC general-use switches operating in circuits
same lamp has a hot resistance of 144 ohms when
exceeding 300 volts to ground must have perma-
operating at 100% of its rated voltage.
nent barriers installed between them. A typical
Normal operating current would be
switch is 15 amperes, 347 volts. The 347-volt rating
is required on 347/600-volts systems. Switches and
E 120 devices rated at 347 volts will not be installed in
I5 5 5 0.83 amperes dwelling units because the maximum allowable
R 144
voltage is 150 volts to ground, Rule 2-110.
But, maximum instantaneous inrush current could Terminals of switches rated at 15 or 20 amperes,
be as high as when marked CO/ALR, are suitable for use with alu-
minum, copper, and copper-clad aluminum conductors.
E 170 (peak voltage)
I5 5 5 17.9 amperes Switches not marked CO/ALR are suitable for use
R 9.5 with copper and copper-clad conductors only.
This inrush current drops off to normal operat- Screwless pressure terminals of the conductor
ing current in about six cycles (0.10 seconds). The push-in type may be used with copper and copper-
contacts of T-rated switches are designed to handle clad aluminum conductors only. These push-in type
these momentary high inrush currents. terminals are not permitted for use with ordinary
The AC/DC general-use switch normally is not aluminum conductors, Rule 12-118 6).
marked AC/DC. However, it is always marked with Further information on switch ratings is given in
the current and voltage rating, such as 10 A–125 V Rule 14-508 and in CSA Standard C22.2 No. 111-18,
or 5 A–250 V–T, Rule 14-508 b) iii). “General-Use Switches.”
110 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating

Table 5-2 in Unit 5 lists the markings on wiring screw, you do NOT need a bonding conductor,
devices indicating the types of conductors for which Rule 10-614 5). Figure 6-9 shows a switch with a
the devices are used. green hexagon-bonding terminal; in this case, you
must run a bonding conductor from the switch to
Toggle Switch Types the device box.
In Figure 6-6, the 120-volt source feeds the
Toggle switches are available in four types: single- octagon box directly, and a three-wire cable with
pole, three-way, four-way, and double-pole. black and red wires is used as a switch loop between
Single-Pole Switch. A single-pole switch is used the lamp and the single-pole switch. Rule 4-022 2)
when a light or group of lights or other load is to be requires that when a cable is used, the identified
controlled from one switching point. The switch is conductor be installed at each location of a manual
identified by its two terminals and the toggle marked or automatic control device for the control of perma-
ON/OFF. The single-pole switch is connected in nently installed luminaires at a branch circuit outlet.
series with the ungrounded or hot wire feeding the Figure 6-7 shows another application of a single-
load. pole switch. The feed is at the switch that controls
Figure 6-5 shows a single-pole switch con- the lamp. The receptacle outlet is independent of the
trolling a light from one switching point. The switch.
120-volt source feeds directly through the switch Three-Way Switch. The term three-way is
location. The identified white wire continues somewhat misleading, since a three-way switch
directly to the load, and the black “hot” wire is is used to control a light from two locations. A
broken at the single-pole switch. Note: General- three-way switch has one terminal to which the
use switches, light dimmers, and motion-sensing internal switch mechanism is always connected.
equipment that go into a device box are all consid- This terminal is called the common terminal.
ered devices. Devices require a bonding conduc- The two other terminals are called the traveller
tor from the device box to the device terminal on wire terminals. The switching mechanism alter-
the device when a bonding terminal is provided. nately switches between the common terminal and
If the device does NOT come with a bond either one of the traveller terminals. Figure 6-8

Source
Lamp Lamp

Source
Lamp
Lamp

Cable

Cable
S

S1

Source Source S

Figure 6-5 Single-pole switch in circuit with

feed at switch. Note: The switch has NO bonding
Figure 6-6 Single-pole switch in circuit with
terminal, so a bonding conductor is NOT required
feed at light.
from the device box, Rule 10-614 5).
 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating 111

Cable

Lamp

Lamp

Receptacle
outlet
Receptacle
outlet
Source Source

Figure 6-7 Lamp controlled by single-pole switch with live receptacle outlet and feed at switch.

Traveller
wires

Traveller
terminals

Common
terminal

Figure 6-8 Two positions of a three-way switch.

shows the two positions of the three-way switch,

which is actually a single-pole, double-throw Courtesy of Hubbell Canada LP

switch.
A three-way switch differs from a single-
pole switch in that the three-way switch does
not have an ON or OFF position. Thus, the
switch handle does not have ON/OFF markings
(Figure 6-9) and cannot be used as a disconnect-
ing means, Rule 2-304 2). The three-way switch
can be identified further by its three terminals. Figure 6-9 Toggle switch: three-way flush switch.
The common terminal is darker in colour than The green hexagon bonding terminal is provided
on the switch. Rule 10-614 5) requires a bonding
the two traveller wire terminals, which are usu- conductor from the device box to the switch.
ally natural brass in colour.
112 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating

Three-Way Switch Control with Feed at Switch. Lamp

Three-way switches are used when a load is to be
controlled from two different switching points.
Lamp
Figure 6-10 shows how two three-way switches are
used. Note that the feed is at the first switch control
point.
Cable
Three-Way Switch Control with Feed at Light. S3
The circuit in Figure 6-11 uses three-way switch
control with the feed at the light. For this circuit, the
C
white wire in the cable must be used as part of the S3
three-way switch loop.
Alternative Configuration for Three-Way Switch
Control with Feed at the Light. Figure 6-12
shows another arrangement of components in a
three-way switch circuit. The feed is at the lamp
with cable runs from the octagon box to each of the
S3
three-way switch control points located on either S3
C
side of the lamp.
Three-way switches are needed in rooms that
have entry from more than one location. In this
residence, the kitchen lighting, service entrance
lighting, study/bedroom lighting, and the master Source Source
bedroom lighting require three-way switches.
Figure 6-10 Circuit with three-way switch
Conductor Colour Coding control. The two-wire source cable is at the
for Switch Connections first three-way switch and the lamp is fed
with a two-wire cable from the second three-
The colour coding for the travellers (messenger) for way switch. The black and red conductors
three-way and four-way switch connections when between the two three-way switches are called
using cable can vary. Rule 30-600 requires that the travellers. The white conductors are required
at each 3-way switch, Rule 4-022 2). Be sure
white (identified) conductor always be connected that the white conductor at the luminaire is
to the silver terminal of a lampholder or recep- connected to the lampholder’s white (silver)
tacle. Because of the many ways that three-way or terminal. See Rule 30-600.

White wire cut short in device box, Rule 4-030 3)

14/2 NMD90

Cable

Source
14/3 NMD90

C
Lamp
C
S3 S3

Figure 6-11 Circuit with three-way switch control and feed at the light.
 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating 113

Source

Lamp

Cable

14/3 & 14/2

14/4 A B

Figure 6-13 Two positions of a typical four-way

switch.

14/2
14/3 cable
Cut white wire

Four-way switches are used when a load must

be controlled from more than two switching points.
C C
S3 S3
To do this, three-way switches are connected to the
source and to the load. The switches at all other con-
Figure 6-12 Alternative circuit with three-way trol points, however, must be four-way switches.
switch control and feed at the light. Figure 6-14 shows how a lamp can be controlled
from any one of three switching points. Take care in
connecting the traveller wires to the proper termi-
nals of the four-way switch. The two traveller wires
four-way switches can be connected, the choice of from one three-way switch are connected to the two
colours to use for the travellers is left to the elec- terminals on the top of the four-way switch, and the
trician. Most electrical contractors and electricians other two traveller wires from the second three-way
establish some sort of colour coding that works well switch are connected to the two terminals on the
for them. bottom of the four-way switch.
One option is to establish black and red for Some four-way switches have the connections
the travellers and make up the electrical splices from side to side on the switch. Traveler screws are
accordingly; see Figure 6-11. This is not a CEC brass and silver colour for paired connection. The
requirement. electrician must verify this using a continuity tester
Figure 6-10A shows another option: The white before connecting the switch.
conductor is spliced straight through to the lamp- Take care when installing the flat-type four-
holder; the black and red are the travellers. way switches generally known as “Decora” or
This issue does not arise when using conduit, “Designer.” Many of these switches use a differ-
because a variety of conductor insulation colours ent terminal connection layout than a toggle-type
exist for the travellers and switch returns. You can- four-way switch. Check the packaging or use
not use white here for travellers! a continuity tester to verify connections before
installing.
Four-Way Switch. The four-way switch is
constructed so that the switching contacts can Double-Pole Switch. A double-pole, or two-pole,
alternate their positions; see Figure 6-13. The switch may be used when two separate circuits must
four-way switch has two positions, but neither is be controlled with one switch; see Figure 6-15.
ON or OFF. This switch can be readily identified A double-pole switch may also be used to provide
by its four terminals and the absence of ON or a double-pole disconnecting means for a 240-volt
OFF markings. load; see Figure 6-16.
114 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating

Lamp
S3 S4 S3

C
C

Source 3-wire cable 3-wire cable

S3 S4 S3
C Lamp
C

Figure 6-14 Circuit with switch control at three locations.

light switches are available in several styles; see

Separate circuits Figures 6-17 through 6-19.

White BONDING AT RECEPTACLES

Figure 6-15 Application of a double-pole switch. Ground-fault protection is covered in detail in Unit 9.
However, providing bonding of the equipment,
bonding of the conductor to a metal box and to the
Double-pole toggle switches are not commonly
receptacle’s bonding terminal, is important.
used in residential work. Double-pole disconnect
To wire grounding-type receptacles with
switches, however, are used quite often in residences
armoured cable, the cable must contain a separate
for the furnace, water pump motors, and other
bonding connector to bond the metal device box
240-volt circuits.
and the bonding terminal of the receptacle. If non-
Switches with Pilot Lights. Sometimes a metallic-sheathed cable is used, it too must contain
pilot light is desired at the switch location, to a separate bonding conductor. Figure 6-20 shows
reminder you if the load is in operation, as is the the bonding conductor of non-metallic-sheathed
case for the attic lighting in this residence. Pilot cable attached to the receptacle.

240-volt
supply
240-volt
load

2-pole
switch

Figure 6-16 Double-pole (two-pole) disconnect switch.

 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating 115

A 120-volt Switch off — lamp on Load off

supply

120-volt Switch on — lamp off

B Load on
supply

Figure 6-17 In Part A, the switch is in the OFF position: The neon lamp in the handle of the switch glows,
and the load is off. This is a series circuit. The neon lamp has extremely high resistance. In a series circuit,
voltage divides proportionately to the resistance. Therefore, the neon lamp “sees” line voltage (120 volts)
for all practical purposes, and the load “sees” zero voltage. The neon lamp glows. In Part B, the switch is in
the ON position: The neon lamp is shunted out and therefore has zero voltage across it, so the neon lamp
does not glow. Full voltage is supplied to the load. This type of switch might be referred to as a locator
because it glows when the load is off and does not glow when the load is on.

Switch on

120-volt Pilot
Load on
supply lamp on

Figure 6-18 A true pilot light. The pilot lamp is an integral part of the switch. When the load is turned
on, the pilot light is also on. When the load is turned off, the pilot light is also off. This switch has three
terminals because it requires a grounded neutral circuit conductor.

Courtesy of Hubbell Canada LP

Figure 6-19 This pilot light switch is a true pilot light. The pilot light is on when the load is on, and is off
when the load is off. This is possible through its internal electronic circuit. This type of switch can be used
on any 120-volt, AC grounded electrical circuit. It uses the system’s equipment ground as its reference to
permit the pilot light to glow. It does not require a grounded neutral conductor. The pilot light “pulsates”
about 60 times per minute.
116 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating

Identified grounded
conductor
Bonding (white)
conductor
(bare) Hot
conductor
(black)
Bonding conductor attached
Non-metallic-
from the box to the bonding terminal
sheathed cable
on receptacle, Rule 10-614 5)
Yoke or receptacle strap with bonding
conductor

Text © 2021 Canadian Standards Association; Illustration

Grounding-type
receptacle

Switch box with

bonding washer
head screw

Figure 6-20 Connections for grounding-type receptacles. See Rule 10-614 5).

Almost all bonding terminals of the type shown To ensure the continuity of the equipment-
in Figure 6-20 are bonded to the metal yoke of the bonding conductor path, Rule 10-614 requires that
receptacle. However, this connection might not pro- splices shall not depend on solder, and the removal
vide reliable continuity between a bonded device of a device will not interfere or interrupt the bond-
box and the bonding circuit of the receptacle. ing conductor, as clearly shown in Figures 6-21
A device box is said to be bonded when it is and 6-22. When wiring with non-metallic-sheathed
connected to a bonding conductor that is part of cable, the equipment-bonding conductor is a non-
a cable or when it is connected to a bonded metal insulated, bare conductor. When wiring with conduit,
raceway, Rule 10-614. When the receptacle is fas- an equipment-bonding conductor, when required,
tened to a bonded device box, the bonding termi- can be either a bare or a green insulated conductor,
nal may well be bonded through the threads of the sized per Table 16.
No. 6-32 mounting screws. For a 4 × 1½ square A bonding jumper (Figure 6-20) is required
junction box, bonding to the raised cover could between all receptacles and the device box bond-
take place through the threads of the No. 8-32 ing connection, Rule 10-614. The No. 6-32 mount-
cover mounting screws. However, it is doubtful ing screws of most receptacles and switches are
that the continuity of the bonding circuit is reliable held captive in the yoke by a small fibre or card-
under these conditions. Therefore, Rule 10-614 board washer. Removing this washer gives addi-
requires the installation of a separate bonding tional metal-to-metal contact. However, this is not
jumper between all receptacles and the device adequate as a bonding means.
box bonding connection, whatever wiring method Some device-box manufacturers use washer
is used—metal conduit, armoured cable, or non- head screws so that a bonding conductor can be
metallic-sheathed cable with a bonding conductor. placed under them. This method is useful for install-
The metal device box must be bonded in addition ing armoured cable or non-metallic-sheathed cable,
to using the bonding terminal of the receptacle; as it provides a means to terminate the bonding con-
see Figure 6-20. ductor in the metal device box.
 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating 117

Grounding-type
wire connector

Text © 2021 Canadian Standards Association; Illustration

Figure 6-21 An approved method of connecting the bonding conductor using a special grounding-type
wire connector. See Rule 10-614 5).

NMD90
B NMD90
Bare bonding
conductor

W W

W Bare bonding
B W
conductor
B

NMD90 NMD90

Typical boxes with built-in

cable clamps

Figure 6-22 Method of attaching bare bonding conductors to device box or octagon box. See Rule 10-614 5).

Rule 10-614 3) states that the bonding conductor UNGROUNDED-TYPE

must be secured to every metal box even if the RECEPTACLES, Rule 26-702
receptacle has a special self-bonding strap; see
Figures 6-23 and 6-24. Rule 10-614 5) specifies Modern appliances and portable hand-held tools
that when you install such a receptacle, you must have a three-wire cord and a three-wire bonding-
wire a bonding conductor from the device box to type attachment plug cap. Frequently, these tools
the receptacle terminal screw in such a manner that and appliances are plugged into ungrounded-type
disconnection or removal of the receptacle will not receptacles with only two prongs. In these circum-
interrupt the bonding continuity. stances, the appliance is not bonded and the user
118 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating

has probably cut off or bent the bonding prong

Narrow slot for to use the appliance. This is an incorrect and
Wide slot for ungrounded
grounded “hot” wire unsafe practice. As a result, it will later be impos-
“neutral” wire
Brass coloured sible to bond the appliance even when it is plugged
Tamper-
resistant mark
terminal for
“hot” wire
into a properly connected three-wire grounding-
Bonding slot type receptacle.

Courtesy of Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All Rights Reserved

Break-off tab
Ampere rating,
15 A
for split-wired
use
These circumstances require two methods of
Underwriters connection:
Laboratories mark
Voltage rating,
Silver-coloured
125 V ●● the use of double-insulated tools and appliances.
terminals for
grounded CSA mark ●● the use of a portable double-insulated ground-
“neutral” wire
(hidden) Holes for fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacle to
back-wiring
(hidden) supply the equipment.
Green hexagon
screw to attach
the bonding wire Break-off
In neither case is the equipment bonded to ground.
(hidden) plaster ear In many cases, it may be necessary to replace
existing ungrounded-type receptacles due to damage
or because a three-wire grounding-type attachment
plug is to be used. A grounding-type receptacle may
be used if the receptacle is bonded to ground by one
Figure 6-23 Grounding-type receptacle detailing
of these methods:
parts of the receptacle. ●● Connect to a metal raceway or cable sheath that
is bonded to ground, Rule 26-702 1) a).
Plastic or nylon face ●● Bond the receptacle to the system ground with a
separate bonding conductor, Rule 26-702 1) b).
●● Bond the receptacle to a grounded metal
cold-water line, Rule 26-702 1) c).
Break-off tab for Brass terminal for
split-wired use “hot” wire; silver If it is not possible to use one of these meth-
Internal
terminal for
“neutral” wire ods, the new receptacle can be protected by a
copper
alloy Class A-type GFCI breaker, Class A-type GFCI
contacts
Thermoplastic receptacle, or connection to the load side of a feed
back-body
through a Class A-type GFCI receptacle, Rule
26-702 2).
Break-off
plaster ear

Holes for
INDUCTION HEATING
back wiring
When AC circuits are run in metal raceways or
trenches and through openings in metal boxes,
Automatic
bonding the circuiting must be arranged to prevent induc-
Brass-plated steel strap that
holds complete receptacle
to metallic
boxes tion heating of the metal, Rule 12-904 1). This
Hex-shaped
terminal for
means that the conductors of a given circuit
connection of
bonding
must be arranged so that the magnetic flux sur-
conductor rounding each conductor will cancel that of
the other(s); see Figures 6-25, 6-26, and 6-27.
Figure 6-24 Exploded view of a grounding-type
receptacle, showing all internal parts. This also means that when individual conduc-
tors of the same circuit are run in trenches,
 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating 119

Source

This is okay.

Source

This is okay.

Source

This is okay.

Source

This is a violation of
Rule 12-904 1)

Figure 6-25 Arranging circuitry to avoid induction heating, according to Rule 12-904 1), when metal
raceway or armoured cables (BX) are used. Always ask yourself, “Is the same amount of current flowing in
both directions in the metal raceway?” If the answer is “No,” induction heating can damage the insulation
on the conductors.

they should be kept together, not spaced far apart Conductors of

[Figure 6-28 and Rule 12-012 4)]. same circuit

TAMPER-RESISTANT Metal
RECEPTACLES box

Tamper-resistant receptacles are designed to mini-

mize the occurrence of electrical shock and arc-
flash incidents that occur when conductive objects Separate openings

are inserted into the receptacle slots. Most of Figure 6-26 Induction heating can occur when
these incidents take place in homes. So, tamper- conductors of the same circuit are run through
resistant receptacles were designed to prevent different openings of a metal box.
contact with live electrical components when an
object is inserted into one of the receptacle slots.
In one manufactured design, the slots for the must open simultaneously. By inserting simulta-
ungrounded (hot) conductor and the grounded neous pressure from the two blades of the plug
(identified) conductor are closed by shutters that cap equally against each shutter, the shutters will
120 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating

Conductors of
same circuit

Aluminum
plate
Do keep
wires together

Figure 6-27 To reduce the inductive effects

of Figure 6-26, a plate of aluminum or other
nonmagnetic metal should be used, Rule 4-008
and Appendix B.

open. See Figure 6-29. CEC Rule 26-706 specifies Do not keep
that, in a dwelling, unless a receptacle is rendered wires separated.
inaccessible or is located more than 2 m above
Figure 6-28 Arrangement of conductors in
the floor or finished grade, all receptacles of CSA trenches.
configuration 5-15R and 5-20R shall be tamper-
resistant receptacles and shall be so marked.

Courtesy of Progress Lighting

Spring-loaded shutter mechanism Insertion of a two- or three-bladed
restricts access to an object in any plug will open the shutters, allowing
one side of the receptacle. electrical contact.

Figure 6-29 Tamper-resistant principle overview.

Review

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. Which colour may the identified grounded circuit conductor be? [Circle all that apply.]
State the CEC rule that specifies this.
a. green
b. white
 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating 121

c. yellow
d. green with yellow stripes
Rule

2. A T-rated switch may be used to its current capacity when controlling an

incandescent lighting load.
3. What switch type and rating are required to control five 300-watt tungsten filament
lamps on a 120-volt circuit? Show calculations.

4. To control a lighting load from one control point, what type of switch would you use?

5. Single-pole switches are always connected to the wire.

6. Complete the connections in the following arrangement so that both ceiling light
outlets are controlled from the single-pole switch. Assume the installation is in cable.

120-volt
supply

7. a. Complete the connections for the diagram. Installation is cable.

120-volt
supply

b. Which colour conductor of the cable feeds the switch?

c. Which colour conductor is used as the return wire?
d. What are the colours of the conductors connected to the luminaire?
122 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating

8. What type of switch is installed to control a luminaire from two control points?
How many switches are needed?

9. Complete the connections in the following diagram so that the lamp may be controlled
from either three-way switch.

120-volt
supply
C C
S3 S3

10. Show the connections with a feed starting at the lamp and controlled from any one
of three switch locations. The installation requires cables to be used, Rule 4-022 2)
applies. Identify the wires using proper colour coding.

120-volt
supply
C C

S3 S4 S3

11. Match the following switch types with the correct number of terminals for each.
Three-way switch Two terminals
Single-pole switch Four terminals
Four-way switch Three terminals
12. When connecting single-pole, three-way, and four-way switches, they must be wired
so that all switching is done in the circuit conductor.
13. If you had to install an underground three-wire feeder to a remote building using three
individual conductors, which of the following installations “meets code”? [Circle
correct installation.]

A B
 UNIT 6 Switch Control of Lighting Circuits, Device Bonding, and Induction Heating 123

14. Is it always necessary to attach the bare equipment-bonding conductor of a non-

metallic-sheathed cable to the green hexagonal bonding screw on a receptacle? Explain.

15. When two non-metallic-sheathed cables enter a box, is it permitted to bring both bare
bonding conductors directly to the bonding terminal of a receptacle, using the termi-
nal as a splice point?
16. In a raceway installation, what is the minimum size AWG conductor permitted to
be suitably labelled at each end with green tape to indicate it is used as a bonding
conductor?
a. No. 3 AWG
b. No. 2 AWG
c. No. 1 AWG
d. No. 1/0 AWG
UNIT

7
Service Entrance
Calculations
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to

RED SEAL ●● determine the total calculated load of the

OCCUPATIONAL residence
STANDARD ●● calculate the size of the service entrance
(RSOS) conductors, including the size of the neutral
conductors
For the Red Seal exam, ●● understand the CEC requirements for services,
note that this unit covers
Rules 8-200 and 8-202
the following RSOS tasks:
●● fully understand special CEC rules for single-
●● Task B-7
family-dwelling service entrance conductor
●● Task B-11 sizing
●● Task C-16 ●● perform an optional calculation for computing
the required size of service entrance conductors
for the residence

124
 UNIT 7 Service Entrance Calculations 125

Before calculating the ampacity of service and for demand watts. If the residence has an electric
service entrance conductors required for the resi- furnace, the load must be included at 100% of its
dence, you must take an inventory of all loads in rating, Rule 62-118 4).
excess of 1500 watts. The calculations are based
on the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC). Always Step 3. Calculate the load for the electric range
consult local electrical codes for any variations or the combined load for a separate cooktop and
in requirements that may take precedence over oven, Rule 8-200 1) a) iv).
the CEC.
Step 4. Add the kilowatt rating of any tankless
water heaters, swimming pool heaters or hot tub
and spa heaters. In this case, there should be no
SIZE OF SERVICE ENTRANCE de-rating, Rule 8-200 1) a) v).
CONDUCTORS AND SERVICE
DISCONNECTING MEANS* Step 5. Electric-vehicle-charging equipment is
loaded at 100%, Rule 8-200 1) a) vi); also refer to
Service entrance conductors (Rule 8-200) and the section 86 for EV requirements. A level 2 charger
disconnecting means shall not be smaller than has been selected for this installation that requires
1. 14 400 W, three-wire, for a single-family 9600 W.
dwelling when the floor area, excluding the
Step 6. A demand factor of 25% must be applied
basement floor area, is less than 80 m2, Rule
to any additional loads in excess of 1500 watts if
8-200 1) b) ii).
an electric range is included. If there is no electric
2. 24 000 W, three-wire, for a single-family dwell- range because the residence has a gas range, the
ing when the floor area, excluding the basement first 6 kW loads in excess of 1500 watts are added
floor area, is more than 80 m2, Rule 8-200 1) at 100%. If the load is greater than 6 kW, the
b) i). remainder should be added at 25%, Rule 8-200 1)
The load on a residential service is a noncon- a) vii).
tinuous load, Rule 8-200 3). This means that the
service conductors, the service switch, and the panel For clarity, these calculations have been summa-
are sized based on the demand amperes. To correctly rized in Tables 7-1 and 7-2.
calculate the demand amperes for the service, you
must follow the steps listed in Rule 8-200 1) a), as
follows:
Table 7-1
Step 1. Calculate the basic load based on the living
Demand watts calculation for service and
area of the house, Rule 8-200 1) a) i). neutral conductor.
Step 2. Calculate the electric space-heating load SERVICE CALCULATION
and the air-conditioning load. Use the larger of these Demand Watts
loads in calculating the demand if you know that Load Line 1, Line 2
they cannot be used at the same time, Rule 8-106 3).
Basic 7 000 W
If it is possible for the electric heat and the air con-
Heat 13 000 W
ditioning to operate at the same time, you must
Range 6 820 W
include both loads in calculating the demand.
Electric car 9 600 W
If baseboard heating is used with individual thermo-
Other—Dryer 1 425 W
stats in each room or area, refer to Rule 62-118 3)
—Water heater 750 W
—Well pump 600 W
39 195 W
Lines 1, 2; I 5 P/E 39 195/240 5 163.3 A
*© 2021 Canadian Standards Association
126 UNIT 7 Service Entrance Calculations

Table 7-2
Service requirements.
MINIMUM CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR A SERVICE
Reference Minimum Service Calculation Panel A for Residence
Minimum service ampacity, Rule 8-104 1) 163.3 A 200 A
Minimum service switch 200 A 200 A
Minimum fuse or breaker, Table 13 175 A 200 A
Minimum ground conductor, Rule 10-114 No. 6 copper No. 6 copper
Minimum bonding jumper, Table 16 No. 6 copper No. 6 copper
Minimum AWG 3/0 RW75XLPE 3/0 copper RW75XLPE (jacketed)
Minimum AWG neutral 3/0 copper RW75XLPE (jacketed)
Minimum conduit size, Tables 10A, 8, and 9G 53 trade size 53 trade size
Minimum panel ampacity 200 A 200 A
Minimum number of circuits, Rule 8-108 1) 30 30

SERVICE CALCULATIONS adequate lighting and receptacle outlets must

FOR A SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLING, be provided.
RULE 8-200: CALCULATING To simplify the calculation, the author has cho-
FLOOR AREA sen to round off dimensions for those areas (garage,
porch, and portions of the inset at the front of the
Ground-Floor Area house) not to be included in the computation of the
general lighting load.
To estimate the total basic load for a dwelling, Figure 7-1 shows the procedure for calculating
you must calculate the occupied floor area of the area for the ground floor of this residence.
the dwelling. Note in the residence plans that
the ground-floor area has an irregular shape.
In this case, the simplest method of calculating
the occupied floor area is to determine the total Basement Area
floor area using the inside dimensions of the The basement area of the home contains the fur-
dwelling. Then subtract open porches, garages, nace, the hot water tank, and other service equip-
and other unfinished or unused spaces from the ment. According to Rule 8-110, only 75% of the
total area if they are not adaptable for future inside dimensions are to be used in calculating the
use, Rule 8-110. (Some deviation may exist living area of the basement because 25% houses
between calculations shown and what you mea- the above equipment.
sure. This is due to the printing process used Fo r o u r c a l c u l a t i o n s , w e m a k e t h e s e
to produce the drawings. They are intended for assumptions:
academic use only.)
Many open porches, terraces, patios, and 1. Basement walls are 305 mm thick.
similar areas are commonly used as recre- 2. Garage is unexcavated so that additional support
ation and entertainment areas. Therefore, for the weight of vehicles is not required.
 UNIT 7 Service Entrance Calculations 127

16.765 m

Walls are 100 mm thick.

16.765 2 (0.1 1 0.1) m 5 16.565 m
10.670 2 (0.1 1 0.1) m 5 10.470 m
Ground-floor area 16.565 m 3 10.470 m 5 173.435 m2
Deduct areas Garage 2 15.543 m2
Not to be Open porch 2 12.174 m2
Included. Open patio 2 7.846 m2

10.670 m
Inside dimensions 137.872 m2
of residence Rule 8-110

4.775 m 3 3.255 m 3.74 m 3 3.255 m

5 15.543 m2 5 12.174 m2
3.675 m 3 2.135 m
5 7.846 m2

Figure 7-1 Determining the ground-floor living area to be used to calculate basic load, Rule 8-110.

On this basis, our area calculations can be made Basic Load Calculations,
as detailed in the sections. Rule 8-200 1) a i) ii)
For this calculation, Rule 8-200 1) a) i) ii) requires that
Ground-Floor Area Calculations the load be based on 100% of the living area on the
ground floor plus 75% of the living area in the basement.
16.765 2 (0.1 1 0.1) m 5 16.565 m
10.670 2 (0.1 1 0.1) m 5 10.470 m Area to be considered:
100% of ground floor (137.872 m2) 5 137.872 m2
16.565 m 3 10.470 m 5 173.435 m2
75% of the basement area:
Less area not included: 75% of 135.139 m2 5 101.354 m2
2.135 m 3 3.675 m 5 2 7.846 m2 Total area 5 238.493 m2
3.255 m 3 3.740 m 5 212.174 m2 Total area 5 238.493 m2
3.255 m 3 4.775 m 5 215.543 m2 1st 90 m2 5 5000 W
Total ground-floor area 5 137.872 m2 This leaves 148.493 m2 (238.493 m2 2 90 m2).

An additional 1000 W must be added for each

Basement Area Calculations 90 m2 or portion thereof in excess of 90 m2. Since
148.493 m2/90 5 1.65, use two times:
17.045 2 (0.305 1 0.305) m 5 16.435 m
10.945 2 (0.305 1 0.305) m 5 10.335 m 2 3 1000 W 5 2000 W
16.435 m 3 10.335 m 5 169.856 m2 A. Basic load 5 5000 W 1 2000 W 5 7000 W
Less area not included:
2.135 m 3 3.735 m 5 2 7.974 m2 Electric Furnace and Air Conditioning,
1.485 m 3 3.735 m 5 25.546 m2 Rule 8-200 1) a) iii)
4.51 m 3 4.7 m 5 221.197 m2
When it is known that an interlock is installed to pre-
Total basement area 5 135.139 m2 vent simultaneous operation of the air conditioning
128 UNIT 7 Service Entrance Calculations

and electric space heating, whichever is the greater Step 3: Range 1st 12 kW 5 6000 W
load will be used for calculating the demand, 2.05 kW 3 40% 5 820 W
Rule 8-106 3). Therefore, if the air conditioner load Demand watts 5 6820 W 6820 W
is less than the heating load, it need not be included
in the calculations. Air conditioner load is
Step 4: Electric vehicle charger 9600 W
30 amperes 3 240 volts 5 7200 W
Step 5: Other Loads
This is less than the heating load. Dryer 3 25% 5 1425 W
The electric furnace for this home is applied at Water heater 3 25% 5 750 W
a demand of 100%, based on Rule 62-118 4). If this Well pump 3 25% 5 600 W
home had been heated with baseboard heaters, we Demand watts 5 2775 W 2775 W
would have been able to derate the amount over 10 kW
at a demand factor of 75%, Rule 62-118 3). Total load (demand watts) 39 195 W
39 195 / 240 5 163.313 [Link]
B. Electric furnace 5 13 000 W

Service Entrance Conductor Size

Electric Range or Wall-Mounted Oven
and Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit When the ampacity of the service feeders has been
Combined, Rule 8-200 1) a) iv) determined, the ungrounded copper conductors are
sized from Table 2. It is common to have aluminum
Wall-mounted oven 5 6600 W conductors installed up to the line side of the meter
Counter-mounted cooking unit 5 7450 W base and from the load side of the meter base into the
Total 5 14 050 W (14.05 kW) panel.
For rating of 12 kW or less load 5 6000 W Take care in this type of installation to ensure
14.05 kW − 12 kW 5 2.05 kW that the aluminum conductors are installed in lugs
Add 2.05 kW 3 40% 5 820 W rated and approved for the purpose, Rule 12-118 3).
An appropriate joint compound, for example,
C. Range load 5 6820 W Noalox™ or Penetrox™, must be used to penetrate
D. Electric car charger 5 9600 W the oxide film and prevent it from re-forming when
E. Dryer 5 5700 W 3 25% 5 1425 W terminating or splicing all sizes of stranded alumi-
num conductors, Rule 12-118 2).
F. Water heater 5 3000 W 3 25% 5 750 W It is important to follow the requirements of
G.    Well pump 5 2400 W 3 25% 5 600 W Rule 2-136. All conductors that are exposed to direct
A 1 B 1 C 1 D 1 E 1 F 1 G 5 Total demand load sunlight must be approved for the purpose. Conduc-
  5 39 195 W tors that are approved for exposure to sunlight will
be surface-marked appropriately.

Summary of Calculations
Neutral Conductor
Step 1: Basic Load
According to Rule 4-018, the neutral conductor
238.493 m2
is sized according to the unbalanced load on the
290 m2 1st 90 m2 5 5000 W
service. This wire shall be the larger of the bond-
148.493 4 90
ing conductor, sized from CEC as specified in
5 1.65 or 2 3 1,000 5 2000 W
Rule 10-210 b).
Demand watts 5 7000 W 7000 W This conductor may be run bare provided it
is made of copper and is run in a raceway, Rule
Step 2: Heat 13 000 W 13 000 W 6-308 a). Verify this with your local inspection
(Electric furnace @ 100%) authority before proceeding.
 UNIT 7 Service Entrance Calculations 129

The neutral conductor is sized by the maxi- a main overcurrent protective device greater than
mum unbalanced load between line 1, line 2, and the calculated demand load. Our demand load was
the neutral. calculated at 163.3 A and determined the minimum
This means that 240-volt loads are not included overcurrent device to be 175 A from Table 13, but we
in calculating the demand watts on the neutral. used a 200 A circuit breaker that came with the com-
These may include bination panelboard.
●● central air conditioner
●● electric furnace Main Service Ground 10-114
●● well pump and Appendix B
●● water heater The main service ground is sized from Rule 10-114
Since some utilities do not allow a reduction in and Appendix B, which stipulate that the grounding
the size of the neutral conductor for services less conductor of a system is best suited to carrying most
than 200 amperes, check with provincial codes or fault currents when sized not smaller than a No. 6
the local inspection authority before proceeding copper or No. 4 aluminum conductor, which are all
with a reduced neutral installation. that is required to establish equipotentiality with the
ground at a service location.

Consumer’s Service Ampacity Rating

Main Service Bonding Conductor
The minimum rating of a consumer’s service is (Table 16)
based on a comparison between the overcurrent
device and the ampacity of the line conductors. The bonding jumper for metallic service raceways
Whichever is the lower value determines the is sized from Table 16 and is based on the ampac-
ampacity rating of the service. This would also ity of the largest service conductor, Rule 10-616 2).
apply for branch circuits or feeders, Rule 8-104 1). This jumper connects the service raceway by means
of a ground bushing to the metal enclosure. Accord-
ingly, it provides a low impedance path for adequate
Main Service Panel bonding to prevent dangerous conditions that may
result from equipment failure or lightning strikes.
The main panel for a service is described in the CEC
as the service box. This could be a separate switch con-
taining fuses or a circuit breaker. In reality, it is more Main Service Conduit Size (Tables 8,
commonly installed as a combination panel comprising 9G, and 10A)
the service entrance portion and the distribution portion.
The standard available sizes of disconnecting The minimum size of conduit for the service
means are 30 amperes, 60 amperes, 100 amperes, entrance is based on 40% conduit fill (Table 8).
200 amperes, and 400 amperes. The total area of the conductors is calculated using
Optional available sizes are 125-ampere and Table 10A. Then the 40% column is used to find
225-ampere panels. However, most residential appli- the minimum size of the rigid PVC conduit. If all
cations are now either 100 amperes or 200 amperes. of the conductors are of the same type and sized
Using the demand watts calculation previously com- using PVC, Table 9G may be used to size the race-
pleted, it is determined that a 200-ampere service way. For this service, a 53 trade size conduit is
would be required for this residence. adequate for the three jacketed 3/0 RW75XLPE
copper conductors.
Note that the service mast is usually 63 trade
Main Service Fuse or Circuit Breaker
size rigid metal conduit, but the conduit from the
The size of the main fuse or circuit breaker is based meter base into the panel must be sized using the
on the calculated demand load from Rule 8-200. Pick methods described.
130 UNIT 7 Service Entrance Calculations

Table 7-3

CEC Table 16.

Minimum size of field-installed system bonding jumpers and bonding conductors
(Rule 10-616)

Ampere rating or Allowable Minimum size of system bonding jumper and bonding conductor
setting of overcur- ampacity of largest
rent device protecting ungrounded
conductor(s), conductor or group
equipment, etc. of conductors. Wire Bus
Copper, AWG Aluminum, Copper, Aluminum,
Not Exceeding or kcmil AWG or kcmil mm2 mm2
20 14 12 2.0 3.5
30 12 10 3.5 5.5
60 10 8 5.5 8.5
100 8 6 8.5 10.5
200 6 4 10.5 21.0
300 4 2 21.0 26.5
400 3 1 26.5 33.5
500 2 0 33.5 42.5
600 1 00 42.5 53.5
800 0 000 53.5 67.5
1000 00 0000 67.5 84.0
1200 000 250 84.0 127.0

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

1600 0000 350 107.0 177.5
2000 250 400 127.5 203.0
2500 350 500 177.5 253.5
3000 400 600 203.0 355.0
4000 500 800 253.5 405.5
5000 700 1000 355.0 507.0
6000 800 1250 405.5 633.5

Main Service Panel Ampacity a 70-ampere two-pole breaker, taking up only two
and Number of Circuits positions.
Rule 8-108 1) states that four additional spaces
The ampacity of the service panel is based on the must be left for future overcurrent devices. For the
ampacity of the main service switch, for example, a purposes of this calculation, Rule 8-108 1) is satis-
100-ampere switch and a 100-ampere panel. fied by leaving at least four spaces available in the
The minimum number of circuits for the 30-circuit panel. These four minimum required
panel is listed in Rule 8-108 1). In this case, spaces could be used to feed future loads.
the 200-ampere service requires a minimum of According to the calculated demand load of
30 circuits. If the house had been heated with base- 39 195 watts (163.3 ampere), we selected a panel-
board heaters, it would have required 40 circuits. board of 200 ampere using No. 3/0 AWG copper
The baseboard heaters would have required a conductors from Table 2.
number of two-pole breakers (30 amperes maxi- The 240-volt loads are not to be included in the
mum), whereas a central furnace could be fed by calculation for neutral conductors.
 UNIT 7 Service Entrance Calculations 131

Calculation for Subpanel B SERVICE CALCULATIONS

FOR APARTMENTS
The calculation for the subpanel is based on the load
supplied. Rule 6-102 1) allows for only one main Often, single-family homes are constructed or ren-
service to be installed to the residence. We cannot ovated to divide the space into two or more units.
apply Rule 8-200 to a subpanel because that rule This type of building is considered to be a duplex or
must be applied to the whole house. an apartment building and requires that the services
We must provide enough power at the second be calculated according to Rule 8-202.
panel to handle the known loads. Therefore, the rec- For this example, we assume that our building is
ommended feeder to Panel B is 100 amperes. constructed with a completely independent apartment
To install a 100-ampere panel, we need No. 3/3 in the basement. The living area has not changed.
NMD90 copper cable (from Table 2). The heat will be changed to electric baseboard
Checking the specifications and also Figure heaters with 7.5 kW located in the ground-floor unit
8-2 in Unit 8, we find that No. 3/3 NMD90 cop- and 5.5 kW in the basement. The floor plans will
per cable supplies Panel B. There is a second option be modified so that all loads previously allocated
in the specifications, which is to run a 35 trade to the service will be connected to the ground-floor
size EMT using three copper conductors of No. 3 unit service. The basement unit will have a 3 kW
RW75XLPE jacketed. water heater and a 12 kW range. Laundry facilities
will not be available in the basement unit.
The service calculation for an apartment unit
Main Disconnect
is almost identical to that of a single dwelling. The
The main disconnect in the residence is a 200-ampere only difference is in the basic load calculation.
inverse-time circuit breaker in a combination panel.
Many electric utilities state that the conductors feeding Ground-Floor Unit
this type of disconnect must have the same ampere rat-
ing as the disconnect. Some utilities also state that the Basic load based on a floor area of 137.88 m2:
neutral conductor cannot be reduced in size because it First 45 m2 3500 watts
is not always possible to foresee the type of load that
Next 45 m2 1500 watts
may be connected to the panel. As a result, it is some-
Next 90 m2
times difficult to conform to all the rules of the electric
or portion 1000 watts
utility as well as the local electrical code. By installing
Total basic load 6000 watts 6000 watts
three 3/0 RW75XLPE copper conductors for the line
Range - first 6000 watts
and neutral conductors, you will satisfy most local and
12 kW
provincial electrical code requirements.
Remaining
2.05 kW 3
Grounding Conductor 40% 820 watts
Total range 6820 watts 6820 watts
The grounding conductor connects the main service Other loads:
equipment neutral bar to the grounding electrode. Dryer 3 25% 1425 watts
The grounding electrode might be the underground Water heater 3
metallic water piping system, a driven ground rod, or 25% 750 watts
a concrete-encased ground. All of this is discussed
Well pump 3
in Unit 8.
25% 600 watts
When grounding conductors are sized and
Total 2775 watts 2775 watts
installed according to Rule 10-114 we find that
Subtotal 15 595 watts
the minimum grounding conductor must be a
No. 6 AWG copper conductor, or No. 4 AWG Electric heat 7500 watts
aluminum. Grand total 23 095 watts
132 UNIT 7 Service Entrance Calculations

Basement Unit ampacity of the consumer’s service conductors is

not the sum of the individual services, but a cal-
Basic load based on a floor area of 135.95 m2 culation based on the individual demand loads
First 45 m2 3500 watts and Rule 8-202 3). To perform this calculation, we
Next 45 m2 1500 watts must begin with the demand of each unit, without
Next 90 m2 or any electric heat or air-conditioning loads.
portion 1000 watts The calculation is
Total basic load 6000 watts 6000 watts 100% of the largest unit 5 15 595 3 100%
Range - First 6000 watts 6000 watts 5 15 595 watts
12 kW
65% of the next
Other loads:
largest unit 5
Water heater
12 750 3 65% 5 8287.5 watts
3 25% 750 watts 750 watts
Subtotal 12 750 watts Subtotal 23 882.5 watts

Electric heat Add the electric heat as outlined in Rule 62-118 3):
3 100% 5500 watts Total installed electric heat 5 7.5 kW 1 5.5 kW
Grand total 18 250 watts 5 13 kW
To determine the ampacity of the service for the 100% of the first 10 kW 5 10 kW 3 100% 5
ground floor: 10 000 watts
75% of the remaining 3 kW 5 3 kW 3 75% 5
Demand watts 23 095 watts 2250 watts
5 5 96.2 amperes
System voltage 240 volts
Subtotal 12 250 watts
Therefore, a 100-ampere service would be accept-
Grand total 36 132.5 watts
able. However, the installer may wish to increase the
service to 125 amperes to allow for future growth.
To determine the ampacity of the basement unit Minimum Service Ampacity
service:
Calculated demand 36 132.5 watts
Demand watts 18 250 watts 5 5 150.6
5 5 76 amperes System voltage 240 volts amperes
System voltage 240 volts
The minimum consumer’s service ampacity is
Therefore a 100-ampere service would be installed.
considerably less than the sum of the individual
This type of service installation usually is in
services. For this application, the installer would
the form of a single consumer’s service, divided
normally install a 200-ampere service to allow for
into several parts in a multigang meter socket
future growth.
and terminating in separate service boxes. The

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or to the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where appli-
cable, responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. When a service entrance calculation results in a value of 15 kW, what is the minimum
size service required by the CEC?
 UNIT 7 Service Entrance Calculations 133

2. a. What is the demand load per 90 m2 for the general lighting load of a residence?

b. What are the demand factors for the electric baseboard heating load in dwellings?

3. a. What is the ampere rating of the circuits that are provided for the general lighting and
power loads?
b. What is the maximum number of outlets permitted on a 15-ampere branch circuit
by the CEC?
c. How many 15-ampere circuits are in use in this residence?
4. Why is the air-conditioning load for this residence omitted in the service calculations?
What is the CEC rule number?

5. What demand factor may be applied to loads greater than 1500 watts, such as a clothes
dryer and water heater, in addition to an electric range, Rule 8-200 1) a) vii) A)?

6. What load may be used for an electric range rated at not over 12 kW?

7. What is the load for an electric range rated at 16 kW, Rule 8-200 1) a) iv)? Show
calculations.

8. What is the computed load when an electric furnace heating is used in a residence
[Rule 62-118 3) 4)] ?
9. On what basis is the neutral conductor of a service entrance determined?

10. Why is it permissible to omit an electric space heater, water heater, and certain
other 240-volt equipment when calculating the size of the neutral service entrance
conductor for a residence?
134 UNIT 7 Service Entrance Calculations

11. Calculate the minimum size of service entrance conductors required for a residence
containing the following: floor area 8 m 3 12 m; 12 kW electric range; 5 kW dryer,
120/240-volt; 2200-watt sauna heater, 120-volt; 12 kW of baseboard heaters with
individual thermostat control, 240-volts; two 3 kW, 240-volt air conditioners; 3 kW,
240-volt water heater tank.
Determine the sizes of the ungrounded conductors and the neutral conductor. Use
type RW90 copper conductors.
Two No. AWG ungrounded conductors
One No. AWG neutral (or bare neutral if permitted)
One No. AWG system grounding conductor to electrode

STUDENT CALCULATIONS
Minimum service ampere rating

Minimum main disconnect switch ampere rating

Minimum fuse or circuit breaker

Minimum bonding jumper

Minimum PVC conduit size

Minimum panel ampere rating

Minimum number of circuits in panel

 UNIT 7 Service Entrance Calculations 135

12. What is the calculated load in amperes to size a consumer service for the following
single-family dwelling?
  181 m2 total area
   8.4 kW range
   5.4 kW dryer
   4.8 kW hot water tank
   20 kW baseboard heaters, with separate thermostats per room
   4.8 kW electric pool heater
   Consumer’s service supply is 120/240 volts

a. 120 amperes
b. 157.7 amperes
c. 167.7 amperes
d. 178.13 amperes

UNIT

8
Service Entrance
Equipment
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to
●● define electric service, supply service,
consumer’s service, overhead service, and
RED SEAL underground service
OCCUPATIONAL ●● list the various CEC rules covering the
STANDARD
installation of a mast-type overhead service and
(RSOS) an underground service
For the Red Seal exam, ●● discuss the CEC requirements for disconnecting
note that this unit covers the electric service using a main panel and load
the following RSOS tasks: centres
●● Task B-7 ●● understand the requirements for charging
electric cars and other vehicles
●● Task B-11
●● discuss the grounding of interior alternating
current systems and the bonding of all service
entrance equipment
●● describe the various types of fuses
●● select the proper fuse for a particular installation
●● explain the operation of fuses and circuit
breakers (continued)
136
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 137

●● explain the term interrupting rating A consumer’s service is considered to be all of the
wiring from the service box to the point where the util-
●● determine available short-circuit current
ity makes connection. A service box is a main switch
using a simple formula and fuses or the main breaker in a combination panel.
●● perform cost-of-energy calculations CEC Section 0 defines a supply service as the sin-
gle set of conductors run by the utility from its mains to
●● understand how to read a watt-hour the consumer’s service. On an overhead service, this is
meter usually from the transformer on the pole to the point of
attachment on the service mast. With an underground
Service Equipment service, this may be from the transformer to the line side
of the meter base. If the electric utility defines the point
An electric service is required for all buildings con- of connection as the transformer, the wires that are run
taining an electrical system and receiving electrical from the transformer to the meter base form part of the
energy from a utility company. The Canadian Elec- consumer’s service. Always check with your local util-
trical Code (CEC) describes the term service in two ity for the specific bylaws and requirements that pertain
ways: consumer’s service and supply service. to services.
Weather head
Service mast (entrance cap) Transformer
Mast clamp Point of
Roof plate Triplex neutral
attachment
supported cable

Roof
Drip loop

Utility
Service-entrance Overhead If Service Point,
customer provides
pole
conductors
services underground
conductors
Meter

Service Service
disconnecting raceway Riser
means

Service-entrance
Grounding
equipment
conductor

Grounding
electrode

Service-entrance Service-entrance Typically three insulated

equipment conductors conductors Service laterals may be
brought up into a Text © 2021 Canadian Standards Association
Service Meter pad-mounted transformer.
disconnecting
means If Service Point, utility
provides underground
conductors Underground
Grounding service
conductor

Grounding
electrode

Figure 8-1 Service entrance, main panel, and grounding for overhead and underground service. The
metal water pipe from a public water main provides the best ground for a service when bonded to metal
gas and waste pipes to implement equipotential bonding, Rule 10-700.
138 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

In general, watt-hour meters are located on the OVERHEAD SERVICE

exterior of a building. Local codes may permit the
watt-hour meter to be mounted inside the building. In An overhead supply service consists of the overhead
some cases, all of the service entrance equipment may service conductors (including any splices) that are
be mounted outside the building. This includes the connected from the mains of the supply authority to
watt-hour meter and the disconnecting means, Rules the service entrance conductors at the mast for the
6-206 3) and 6-408. consumer’s service.
The electric utility generally must be contacted A combination panel has two sections: the ser-
to determine the location of the meter, Rule 6-408. vice box (service entrance portion) and the panel-
This will usually be within 1 m from the front of board (the distribution portion); see Figure 8-2.
the house and 1.8 m above grade to the centre of the In Figure 8-2, there is a dashed line between
socket. The final say on the space provided for the the two portions of the combination panel. The pan-
meter rests with the local supply authority in accor- elboard (distribution portion of the combination
dance with Rule 6-410. panel) is not considered to be part of the service
entrance wiring. Therefore, it is very important that

These conductors 3-3/0

furnished and installed RW75XLPE
by utility in most (jacketed) 600 V
localities. Check with in 53-trade size PVC conduit Grounding conductor
local electric utility Ground bushing Bonding jumper sized as per
if metal conduit, as per Table 16 Rule 10-114
Rule 10-604

Service
N entrance
200-ampere portion of
LB
main panel
Fitting L1 L2
Transformer

Panel A
(200 ampere 120/240 volt)
Distribution
portion
Equipment Neutral bus of panel
bonding conductor
bus
100 A
See Table 53 for
Minimum cover requirements
No. 3/3 NMD90 cable 100-A two-pole breaker

Water meter

Remove brass
bonding screw
L1 L2
© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Equipment bonding Bonding jumper as per

Panel B conductor bus Table 16, Rule 10-616
100 ampere
120/240 volt Main
24 circuits Neutral bus water
shut-off

Underground
metallic water
pipe to main,
Rule 10-700

Figure 8-2 CEC terms for the services. See Figures 8-21, 8-22, 8-23, 8-24, and 8-25 for grounding requirements.
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 139

all of the service entrance wiring enters only the ser- parts of the building. As per Rule 6-112 3), the point
vice entrance portion of the panel. of attachment of the conductors to the building must
Figure 8-2 shows how a pad-mounted transformer not be higher than 9 m above grade, and minimum
feeds the service in the residence, which in turn feeds clearances from the conductors to grade should not
Panel B. Figure 8-2 also illustrates the CEC terms for be less than
the various components of a service entrance. 5.5 m for highways, lanes, and alleys
5.0 m for commercial and industrial driveways
MAST-TYPE SERVICE 4.0 m for residential driveways
ENTRANCE 3.5 m for sidewalks
The service conductors must not be less than
The mast service (Figures 8-3 through 8-5) is a com- 1 m from a window, door, or porch, Rule 6-112 4).
monly used method of installing a service entrance. Normally there must be a clearance of 915 mm
The mast service is often used on buildings with low (Rule 6-112 5), Appendix B) between the point of
roofs, such as ranch-style dwellings, to ensure ade- attachment and the roof. However, this may be
quate clearance between the ground and the lowest ser- reduced if a minimum of 600 mm is maintained
vice conductor. between the roof and the bottom of the drip loops on
The mast must be run through the roof, as the supply conductors (Figure 8-4).
shown in Figure 8-4, and must be fastened to com-
ply with CEC requirements. The specific require-
ments for installing this type of service are set out in Service Mast Support (Rule 6-112,
Rule 6-112 and CEC Appendix B. Appendix B)
Clearance Requirements for The bending force on the conduit increases with an
Mast Installations increase in the distance between the roof support
and the point where the supply service conductors
When installing an overhead service, you must are attached. The pulling force of service conduc-
maintain certain clearances between the conductors tors on a mast service conduit increases as the length
and other surfaces such as the ground and nearby of the supply service conductors increases. As the
F
E
Conductors shall have clearance of not less
than 1 m from windows, porches, doors, etc.
G

B D
A Text © 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Sid
ew
alk

Note: Clearances Clearances for service A 5 3.5 m min. E 5 1 m min

are designated supply residential B 5 4.0 m min. F 5 Conductors that run above the top level of a window
by letters 120/240-volt C 5 3.5 m min. are considered out of reach from that window.
A through G. single phase D 5 5.5 m min. 1 m clearance not required.
G = 3.5 m min. from drip loop to finish grade, 9 m max.

Figure 8-3 Clearances for a typical service entrance installation, Rule 6-112 3).
140 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

Max. 750 volts between conductors B

A
Guy wires
or pipe Stiff-leg or
brace of pipe
Minimum or similar
600 mm

Roof flashing
at penetration
2 “U” bolts shown, (typical)
3 are required
(CEC Rule 6-112, Appendix B)
Overhanging
portion of roof

Guy wire

If the mast height

extends above the
roof more than
Mast 1.5 m, a guy wire
would be required.

Figure 8-4 (A) Clearance requirements for consumer’s service conductors passing over residential roofs,
Rule 6-112 and Appendix B, where voltage between conductors does not exceed 750 volts. (B) Typical
methods of securing and supporting a mast-type service.

length of the service conductors decreases, the pull- add to the conductors. If the mast is more than 1.5 m
ing force on the mast service conduit decreases. above the uppermost support, the mast must have a
If extra support is not provided, the mast must be guy wire attached to the roof rafters by an approved
an approved tubular support member (most common) fitting, Rule 6-112 9) and Appendix B. Consult the
or 63 trade size rigid steel conduit, Rule 6-112 5) 6). utility company and electrical inspection authority for
This size prevents the conduit from bending due to information relating to their specific requirements for
the strain of the supply service conductors. If extra clearances and support for service masts.
support is provided, it should be in the form of a guy The CEC rules for installation and clear-
wire that attaches to the roof rafters of the house and ances apply to the supply service and consum-
the service mast by means of approved fittings. This er’s service conductors. For example, the service
provides support for long runs of supply service con- conductors must be insulated, except where the
ductors and for the extra weight that ice storms can provisions of Rule 6-308 are met and approved for
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 141

3/0 RW75XLPE
copper conductors
63-trade size cast weather head
for 200-A service

Rack and spool

assembly

Drip loop

Min. three points

Through bolt
of support
bracket
Two-hole
bracket
63-trade size rigid steel mast

63-53-trade size mast adapter

53-trade size rigid close nipple
53-trade size rigid conduit may be used
to extend raceway if mast
not long enough.
Meter hub

Overhead meter
Base Type "S"
200 ampere

53-trade size
meter offset
Conduit size
determined
by size of 53-trade size PVC strap
conductor
and insulation
type
Offset meter
53-trade size PVC LB terminal adapter

Figure 8-5 A method of connecting conduit to meter base on a 200-ampere overhead service entrance
installation.

exposure to direct sunlight as required by Rule 2-136. UNDERGROUND SERVICE

In this case, the grounded neutral conductors are not
required to have insulation. The underground service is the cable installed
Rule 6-112 and Appendix B give clearance underground from the customer’s meter socket to
allowances for the supply service passing over the the utility’s supply. This cable is usually, but not
roof of a dwelling (Figure 8-4). always, supplied by the utility company.
The installation requirements for a typical ser- New residential subdivisions often include
vice entrance are shown in Figures 8-5 and 8-6. underground installations of the electrical system.
Figure 8-3 shows the required clearances above the The transformer and primary high-voltage conduc-
ground. The wiring connections, grounding require- tors are installed by, and are the responsibility of,
ments, and CEC references are given in Figure 8-6. the utility company.
142 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

Point of attachment to Grounding

buildings shall be a conductor
maximum of 9 m above
grade, Rule 6-112 3)

Weather head PVC conduit

to be 150 to 300 mm
Drip loop above point of
E
attachment,
Rule 6-116

750 mm min. length,

Rack and
Rule 6-302 3) N
spool
assembly To ground
Three two-hole electrode
clamps or eye- 200-A main breaker
L1 L2
bolt mast support

Conduit size,
Rule 6-112 5) 6) Brass main
bonding Neutral
screw, bar bonded
Recommended Rule 10-210. to ground
height of Not to
meter socket scale Bonding bus
1.8 m. Verify
with utility,
Neutral
Rule 6-408 Main switch
bonded to
and overcurrent Neutral bus
meter
enclosure Meter protection,
base hub Rule 14-010

100-A two-pole 15-A one-pole

LB fitting breaker breaker 15-A
Electrical equipment required
branch
to interrupt fault currents
Fuses or circuit circuit
shall have ratings sufficient

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

for the voltage employed and breakers must have
for the fault current that is interrupting rating
available at the terminals, sufficient for voltage
Rule 14-012 employed and current
that must be interrupted,
Rule 14-012

Disconnect means
located at readily
accessible location nearest
Grade point of entrance of service
conductors, Rule 6-206 1)

Figure 8-6 The wiring of a typical overhead service entrance installation.

The electrical contractor supplies and installs 8-6). Some local codes may require conduit to be
the consumer’s service conductors, but the local util- installed underground from the pole to the service
ity may require a specific type of cable that it may entrance equipment. Requirements for underground
supply to the contractor at a reasonable cost. Always services are given in Rule 6-300. The underground
check with the local utility in addition to the inspec- conductors must be suitable for direct burial in the
tion authority before commencing work. Figure 8-7 earth.
shows a typical underground installation. If the electric utility installs the underground
The wiring from the external meter to the main service conductors, the work must comply with the
service equipment is the same as the wiring for a rules established by the utility, Section 0, Scope.
service connected from overhead lines (Figure These rules may not be the same as Rule 6-300.
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 143

Main meter

Meter base mounted

on side of residence Grade
Main service
entrance panel

Main switch Bell end 600 mm

and service or bushing
entrance panel
Cables must
Pad-mounted enter conduit
Conduit run 300 mm
transformer vertically.
down to LB fitting to bottom
Conduit run to of trench
below ground line

Underground service entrance

conductors run from the meter
Conduit run from LB fitting into to the pad-mounted transformer
main service entrance panel placed on the lot line south-east
corner of the lot.

Figure 8-7 Underground service.

When the underground conductors are installed Service disconnecting means to be

readily accessible and nearest the
by the electrician, Rule 6-300 applies. This rule point where the service entrance
conductors enter the building.
deals with the protection of conductors against dam- Consult with electrical inspector
age and sealing of underground conduits where they to determine whether greater lengths
inside the building are permitted.
enter a building.
This switch is not as
close as possible to
the point where
the service entrance
MAIN SERVICE DISCONNECT conductors enter
LOCATION the building.

The main service disconnect means shall be installed

at a readily accessible location so that the service
entrance conductors within the building are as short
as possible. See Figure 8-8.
The reason for this rule is that the service
entrance conductors do not have overcurrent pro-
tection other than that provided by the utility’s
transformer fuses. Should a fault occur on these
service entrance conductors within the build-
ing (at the bushing where the conduit enters Figure 8-8 Main service disconnect location,
the main switch, for instance), the arcing could Rule 6-206 1) b) c).
result in a fire.
144 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

The electrical inspector (authority having juris- A circuit directory is shown in Figure 8-9. The
diction) must make a judgment as to what is consid- Panel B circuit directory is shown in Figure 8-13.
ered to be a readily accessible location nearest the
point of entrance of the service entrance conductors,
Rule 6-206 1). Disconnect Means (Panel A)
Rule 2-100 3) a) states that all panels must have
a legible circuit directory indicating what the cir- The requirements for disconnecting the electric
cuits are for. You can see the circuit directory on services are covered in Rule 6-200. Rule 6-200 1)
the inside of the door of the panel or on the side requires that each consumer’s service be provided
of the panel front cover. The main service Panel with a single service box.

L1 L2

200 A
Main
service
disconnect

CCT CCT
1 2
Electric furnace 70 A 40 A Central air conditioner
3 4

5 6
Well pump 20 A 20 A Water heater
7 8

15 A 15 A
Hydromassage bathtub 9 G 10 Sump pump receptacle

Study/bedroom receptacles 15 A 15 A A
11 A 12 Freezer receptacle

Workbench receptacles 15 A 15 A
13 A A 14 M. bedroom, F. bedroom, and hall receptacles
Entry and front outside 15 A 15 A
lights and smoke + M. bedroom, F. bedroom, and
15 16
CO alarms c/w strobe light main and ensuite bathroom lights
15 A 15 A
Powder rm washroom, ensuite, 17 G 18 Study/bedroom, exterior rear,
and main bathroom receptacles and living room and hall lights
15 A
Utility room receptacle 19 A 20
50 A Electric vehicle class 2 charger
21 22
Feeder to panel B 100 A 15 A
23 AG 24 Outdoor receptacles
15 A
Spare 25 26 Attic exhaust fan

Spare 27 28 Spare

Spare 29 30 Spare

A G
These branch circuits are Neutral bus bar Receptacles on this circuit
required to be protected by required to be GFCI protected.
a listed combination type Bonding conductor Install listed GFCI circuit breaker
AFCI device. Rule 26-658 in panel, or listed GFCI receptacles
bus bar
at required locations. Rule 26-704

Figure 8-9 Circuit schedule of main service Panel A.

 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 145

However, Rule 6-200 2) sets out the circum-

stances in which more than one service box is
permitted:
●● The subdivision is made at the meter base.
●● Maximum rating is 600 amperes and 150 volts
to ground.
●● The meter base is located outdoors.
When selecting a panelboard for a single dwell-
ing, there must be at least four additional spaces left
for future overcurrent devices with a provision for a
two-pole breaker, Rule 8-108.

Courtesy of Craig Trineer

The minimum rating for a single-family residen-
tial service is 100-ampere, three-wire when
●●The area excluding the basement is 80 m2 or
more, Rule 8-200 1) b) i)
and
Figure 8-10 Typical main panel with 200-ampere
●● 24 kW is the minimum service load to be applied. main breaker suitable for use as service entrance
The minimum rating for a single-family residen- equipment, Rule 6-200 1).
tial service is 60-ampere, three-wire when
●●The area is 80 m2 or less, Rule 8-200 1) b) ii)
and
●● 14.4 kW is the minimum service load to be applied Rule 10-600 states that unless panelboards are
extra-low-voltage, all non-current-carrying parts of
For this residence, Panel A provides a electrical equipment must be bonded to ground.
200-ampere circuit breaker for the main discon- The panelboard must have an approved means
nect. Panel A also has a number of branch-circuit for attaching the bonding conductors when cable is
overcurrent devices to protect the many circuits used (Figure 8-11).
originating from this panel (Figures 8-9 and 8-10).
This type of panel is listed by the Canadian Stan- Bonding. At the main service entrance equipment,
dards Association (CSA) as a load centre and as the grounded neutral conductor must be bonded to
service equipment. The panel meets CEC require- the metal enclosure. For most residential-type pan-
ments and is designed to accommodate full- and els, this main bonding jumper is a bonding screw
half-width breakers. This panel may be surface- or furnished with the panel. This bonding screw is
flush-mounted. inserted through the neutral bar into a threaded hole
Panel A is located in the workshop. The place- in the back of the panel itself. The bonding screw
ment of the main disconnect is determined by the will be brass or green in colour and must be clearly
location of the meter. The disconnect is mounted at visible after it is in place.
an accessible point as close as possible to the place As previously mentioned, Rule 10-210 d) pro-
where the service conductors enter the building. hibits bonding the grounded neutral of a system to
The local utility company generally decides where any equipment on the load side of the main service
the supply service, or the consumer’s service in the disconnect. Therefore, the brass or green main bond-
case of an underground service, is to be located, and ing jumper screw furnished with residential-type
also provides the electrician with a meter location. panels will be inserted at the main service panel only.
The consumer’s service is the responsibility of the This screw must be removed at subpanels, such as
electrician, and the supply service is the responsibil- Panel B in the recreation room of the residence. See
ity of the utility. Figure 8-12.
146 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

Ground Bonding Grounding conductor

bushing jumper
Connector

Brass bonding
Service
screw (may be
entrance
coloured green)
portion
Neutral block

Neutral bus bar

10-32 screw
connecting bus
to panel enclosure

Distribution
Bonding conductors
portion

Bonding conductor bus bar. Bonding bus Branch circuit identified or

bar must be bonded to panel enclosure. neutral white conductors
The bonding conductor bus bar shall not
be connected to the neutral bus bar.

Figure 8-11 Connections of service neutral, branch-circuit neutral, and equipment-bonding conductors
at main panelboards, Rule 10-210 1) b).

Load Centre (Panel B)

When the main service panel is located some dis-
tance from areas having many circuits and/or a heavy
load concentration, such as the kitchen or laundry of
this residence, it is recommended that load centres be
installed near these concentrations of load. The indi-
vidual branch-circuit conductors are run to the load
centre, not back to the main panel. Thus, the branch-
circuit runs are short, and line losses (voltage and
Courtesy of Craig Trineer

wattage) are less than if the circuits had been run all
the way back to the main panel.
To determine if there is a cost or benefit and if
the lower line losses justify installing an extra load
centre, the cost of material and labour to install the
extra load centre should be compared to the cost of Figure 8-12 Typical load centre of the type
installed for Panel B in this residence. The bonding
running many branch circuits back to the main panel. screw will be removed from the neutral block,
A typical load centre is shown in Figure 8-12. Rule 10-210 a).
The circuit schedule for Panel B, the load centre of
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 147

L1 L2
N
125 A
OOOOOOO
Main lug only (MLO)

CCT CCT
1 2
Dryer 30 A 40 A Counter-mounted cooking unit
3 4
15 A
Dishwasher receptacle 5 A 6
Garage, laundry, powder 15 A 40 A Oven
rm, kitchen, attic, and 7 8
service entrance lights
15 A 15 A Rec. room wet bar receptacles
Kitchen refrigerator receptacle 9 A 10
15 A 15 A Rec. room and workshop
Washer and laundry room receptacles 11 A 12
lighting
20 A 15 A
Kitchen counter receptacles 13 A 14 Rec. room receptacles

Kitchen counter and island 20 A 15 A

15 A 16 Living room, dining area, and
receptacles
service entrance receptacles
15 A 15 A
Microwave receptacle 17 A 18 Rec room bar refrigerator receptacle
15 A 15 A
Food waste disposal 19 A 20 Central vacuum receptacle
15 A
Spare 21 A 22 Garage receptacles

Spare 23 24 Spare

Spare 25 26 Spare

Spare 27 28 Spare

Spare 29 30 Spare

A
The outlets and devices on Neutral bus bar
G
Receptacles on this circuit
this branch circuit are required to be GFCI protected.
required to have AFCI Install listed GFCI circuit breaker
protection by one of six Bonding conductor in panel, or listed GFCI receptacles
methods. Rule 26-658. bus bar at required locations. Rule 26-704.

Figure 8-13 Circuit schedule of Panel B.

the residence, is shown in Figure 8-13. Panel B is legislate future restrictions on the use of hydrocar-
located in the recreation room. It is fed by No. 3/3 bon-fuelled vehicles. The use of electric vehicles
NMD90 cable originating from Panel A. The con- (EV) is projected to increase greatly over the fore-
ductors are protected by a 100-ampere, 240-volt, seeable future.
two-pole overcurrent device in Panel A. The over- To determine what is meant by the terminology
current protection can be fuses or circuit breakers. used with electric vehicles, Rule 86-100 should be con-
This is discussed later in this unit. sulted. In Appendix B, the definition of electric vehicles
is expanded to include LSVs or “low speed vehicles.”
ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING There are currently three main types of electric
car chargers, some of which may have different end
Electric vehicles are a growing segment of the connectors required for a specific brand of vehicle.
auto industry, with governments adding pur- The charger types are differentiated by the amount
chasing incentives and major cities beginning to of power that they can deliver.
148 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

Level 1 Chargers
Level 1 chargers are connected to 120-volt recep-
tacles and have the ability to supply power of no
more than 1.92 kW to a vehicle. The connector on a
level 1 charger is typically a J1772 connector. It can
take from 8 to 20 hours to fully charge an EV from a
level 1 charger, Rule 86-306. See Figure 8-14.

Level 2 Chargers
Level 2 chargers are fed from 208 volts (when con-
nected to three-phase power) and 240 volts (when
connected to single-phase power). The maximum
output power of a level 2 charger is 19.2 kW, and
it uses the same J1772 connector as a level 1 char-

Courtesy of Craig Trineer

ger (see Figure 8-15). Charging a car from a level 2
charger can take from 4 to 6 hours. Charging can
take longer on cars with larger batteries and in
colder climates. The residence plans show a 14-50R
receptacle located in the garage feed with a double
pole 50-ampere breaker using 8/3 NMD90 cable.
Figure 8-14 A Level 1 charger.

Level 3 Chargers (DC Fast)

Level 3 chargers are really called DC fast or DCFC
(DC fast charger). DC fast chargers can charge
a vehicle up to an 80% charge in approximately
30 minutes. See Figure 8-16. After that, the charge
rate tends to slow down. There are three different
types of connectors for DCFC chargers:
1. CHAdeMO connectors, which are for Japanese
and Korean cars with battery sizes up to
50 kW (future models with capacities of up to
150 kW).
2. CCS (combined charging standard) connectors,
which are used by North American–made and
German cars with battery sizes up to 50 kW
(future models with capacities of up to 150 kW).
3. Tesla connectors (also known as “super char-
Courtesy of Craig Trineer

gers”), which are used by Tesla vehicles and

have an output range of 90 to 150 kW. See
Figure 8-17. Tesla vehicles can determine the
type of connection they have and will adapt their
charging connection internally to accept the
charge provided. Teslas can connect to Level 1,
Level 2, or DCFCs with the connection Figure 8-15 A Level 2 charger.
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 149

Courtesy of Sam Maltese

Figure 8-17 A Tesla charger.

simply adjusting the output settings of the char-

Courtesy of Sam Maltese ger. For example, two Tesla chargers with name-
plate currents of 80 amperes are connected to one
100-ampere feed. In this example, the chargers are
set to share a single connection and at no point in
time will they draw a combined current in excess of
80 amperes. Tesla chargers connect up to a maxi-
Figure 8-16 A DC fast charger. mum of four chargers to a single 80-ampere supply.
Many chargers are capable of being set to a
lower output, lessening the demand on the ser-
vice and impacting only the time needed to fully
adapters, so that they can take advantage of any
charge. In most cases this is not an issue for the user
available EV power source.
because, as a general rule, a charger connected to a
When calculating the total load for service EV char- 240-volt supply will add 4.8 kW per hour for every
gers, a demand factor of 100% must be used. With 20 amperes available. This means a 20-ampere con-
the approval of the local inspection authority, the nection would easily charge a vehicle overnight.
maximum current listed on the name plate can be Chargers that are not capable of having their
reduced by adjusting the power output of the char- output reduced can be connected to an EV manage-
ger. If the existing service is close to its maximum ment system to reduce or eliminate their impact to
capacity, a service upgrade may be prevented by the service, as outlined in Rule 86-300 2).

Table 8-1

Examples of conduit fill for the service entrance conduit feeder conduit in this residence. Obtain
conductor area from Table 10A. Using Table 8, conduit fill is 40%. Use Table 9G for correct conduit size.

PANEL A
CONDUCTOR SIZE BASED ON AMPACITY

Three 3/0 RW75XLPE 227.5 mm2 3 3 5 682.5 mm2

(jacketed) (600 V)
Rigid PVC conduit 53 trade size
150 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

SERVICE ENTRANCE
CONDUIT SIZING
To determine the proper size of conduit, the conduit
fill is calculated using the same method as outlined
in Unit 7.
Look up the necessary data in CEC Tables 8,
9(A-H), and 10(A-D) (see Table 8-1). If all of the
wires in the unknown type raceway are the same size,
CEC Table 6(A-K) may be used for sizing the conduit.

METER
Some electric utility companies offer lower rates for

Courtesy of Milbank Manufacturing Company

water heaters and electric heating units connected to
separate meters. The residence in the plans has only
one meter, so all lighting, heating, cooking, and
water heater loads are registered on that meter.
For a typical overhead service, a meter socket
(Figure 8-18) is mounted at eye level on the outside
wall of the house; see Figure 8-7. The service con-
duit is connected to the socket at a threaded boss
(hub) on the top of the socket.
If non-metallic raceways are used for the service
conduit, the method of fastening to the top of the meter Figure 8-18 Typical meter socket.
socket will be different. If a threaded hub is used at
the meter socket, a short threaded conduit nipple will
be required, along with a non-metallic female adapter. outdoors. This is usually accomplished by drilling
Non-metallic raceways must never be threaded a small hole in the bottom of the “L” fitting on the
directly into a threaded boss, Rule 12-1112 2). outside of the building. The electrician’s responsi-
The lower index of expansion of the metal nipple pre- bility is to install the consumer’s service conductors
vents the raceway from breaking inside the threaded from the load side of the meter to the line side of the
boss. main service disconnect switch.
Alternatively, a non-metallic hub may be used in Figure 8-20 shows one type of underground
place of the threaded hub, with the raceway fastened meter base. Note the following:
with solvent cement.
This conduit would be carried down into the 1. The line side is designated. This is important
basement, connecting to the main service equip- because if the meter is installed with the load at
ment, as shown in Figures 8-7, 8-8, and 8-19. Proper the top, it will run backward.
fittings must be used, and the conduit must be sealed
where it penetrates the wall; see Figure 8-19. 2. These are stud-type connections and require the
This is required by Rule 6-312 1) and is achieved line conductors to have a crimped-on lug.
by placing duct sealing compound around the con- 3. Line-side insulated jaw shrouds help prevent
ductors in the raceway where they pass through shocks and faults when installing the cover on
the wall. Rule 6-312 also requires that the service the meter base.
raceway be suitably drained, either inside or outside 4. Insulated support blocks also provide a location
the building. However, if the service raceway termi- for a flat-rate water heater lug, which can be
nates in the top of the service box, the drain must be bolted on at the three o’clock position.
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 151

Rule 6-312 1) requires that when raceways pass through

areas having great temperature differences, some means
must be provided to prevent passage of air back and forth
through the raceway. Note that outside air is drawn in through
the conduit whenever a door opens. Cold outside air meeting
warm inside air causes condensation, which can cause rusting
and corrosion of vital electrical components. Equipment having
moving parts, such as circuit breakers, switches, and controllers, Inside Outside
are especially affected by moisture. Sluggish action of the moving

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

parts in this equipment is undesirable. Insulation or other type
of sealing compound can be inserted as shown to prevent the
passage of air. The raceway must also be drained where it enters
the building. This is usually accomplished by drilling a small hole
in the bottom of the “L” fitting. Hole required
for drainage

Insulation or other
sealing compound

Figure 8-19 Installation of conduit through a basement wall.

1
5. Load-side lugs are angled for ease of connec-
tion without too much cable bending.
6. Two-position ground lug. This is not normally
used because the meter base is bonded through
the grounded service conductor (neutral).
7. The enclosure is 450 × 300 × 112.5 mm,
which allows plenty of room for pulling in con-
ductors and terminating the lugs. 2 2
3
8. The knockouts are provided for the conduit 4
4
from the transformer to the meter base and for 3
Courtesy of Thomas & Betts Corporation

5
the conduit to the main disconnect. 5
2
6 7

GROUNDING—WHY
GROUND?
Electrical systems and their conductors are grounded
to minimize voltage spikes when lightning strikes,
or when other line surges occur. Grounding stabi-
Figure 8-20 An underground type of meter base
lizes the normal voltage to ground.
with studs for utility connection of line conductors
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) and equipment with optional overhead hub.
are bonded to ground so that the equipment volt-
age to ground is kept to a low value. In this way, the
shock hazard is reduced.
Proper grounding means that overcurrent ground path is provided. A low-impedance ground
devices can operate faster when responding to path means that there is a high value of ground-fault
ground faults. Effective grounding occurs when current. As the ground-fault current increases, there
a low-impedance (opposition to AC current flow) is an increase in the speed with which a fuse will
152 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

open or a circuit breaker will trip. Thus, as the over- Figure 8-21 and the following steps illustrate
current device senses and opens the circuit faster, what can happen if an entire system is not grounded:
less equipment damage results. This inverse time 1. A live wire contacts the gas pipe. The bonding
characteristic means that the higher the value of jumper (A) is not installed originally.
current, the less time it will take to operate the over-
2. The gas pipe now has 120 volts with respect to
current device.
ground. The pipe is hot.
Rule 10-100 and Appendix B provide the pur-
pose and requirements for effective grounding in 3. The insulating joint in the gas pipe results in
an electrical system. The arcing damage to electri- a poor path to ground; assume the resistance is
cal equipment and conductor insulation is closely 8 ohms.
related to the value of I2t, where 4. The 20-ampere overcurrent device does not
open:
I 5 current flowing from phase to ground, or
from phase to phase, in amperes E 120
t 5 time needed by the overcurrent device to I5 5 amperes 5 15 amperes
R 8
open the circuit, in seconds
I2t is measured in ampere-squared-seconds 5. If a person touches the hot gas pipe and the
water pipe at the same time, current flows
This expression shows that there will be less
through the person’s body. If the body resis-
equipment and/or conductor damage when the fault
tance is 12 000 ohms, the current is
current is kept to a low value and when the time
that the fault current is allowed to flow is kept to a
minimum. E 120
I5 5 amperes 5 0.01 amperes
Grounding conductors and equipment-bonding R 12 000
conductors carry an insignificant amount of current
under normal conditions. However, when a ground This value of current passing through a human
fault occurs, these grounding conductors must be body can cause death.
capable of carrying whatever value of fault current 6. The overcurrent device is “seeing” (15 1 0.01)
might flow for the time it takes the overcurrent pro- amperes 5 15.01 amperes; however, it still
tective device to clear the fault. does not open.
7. If the equipotential bonding concept had been
used, the bonding jumper would have kept the
GROUNDING ELECTRODE voltage difference between the water pipe and the
gas pipe at zero, Rule 10-700. Thus, the overcur-
In the grounding electrode, rather than ground-
rent device would open. If 3.05 m of No. 6 AWG
ing a single item such as the neutral conductor,
copper wire is used as the jumper, the resistance
the electrician must be concerned with grounding
of the jumper is 0.00395 ohms. The current is
and bonding together an entire system. The term
system means the service neutral conductor, the E 120
grounding electrode, cold water pipes, gas pipes, I5 5 amperes 5 30 380 amperes
R 0.00395
service entrance equipment, and jumpers installed
around meters. If any of these system parts become (In an actual system, the impedance of all
disconnected or open, the integrity of the ground- parts of the circuit is much higher, resulting in
ing system is maintained through other paths. This a much lower current. The current, however,
means that all parts of the system must be tied would be high enough to cause the overcurrent
(bonded) together. device to open.)
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 153

20-ampere
overcurrent
device

Bonding 120-volt
jumper source
Water piping
M

Insulating
joint
Gas piping
M

Figure 8-21 Equipotential grounding.

Advantages of Equipotential Bonding Conductor: A conductor that connects the

Bonding* non-current-carrying parts of electrical equipment
to the service equipment or grounding conductor.
To appreciate the concepts of proper grounding, let
us review some important CEC rules. Grounding Conductor: The conductor used to
Rule 10-002 sets out the objectives of grounding connect the service equipment to the grounding
and bonding, summarized as follows: electrode.
●● to protect life from the danger of electric shock
●● The potential voltage differences between the
parts of the system are minimized, reducing the
●● to limit the voltage on a circuit shock hazard.
●● to facilitate the operation of electrical apparatus ●● The impedance of the ground path is mini-
and systems mized. This results in a higher current flow
in the event of a ground fault: The lower the
●● to limit voltage on a circuit when exposed to
impedance, the higher the current flow. This
lightning
means that the overcurrent device will open
●● to limit AC circuit voltages to ground to faster under fault conditions.
150 volts or less on circuits supplying interior
wiring systems
Methods of Grounding
CEC Section 0 provides definitions for the terms
associated with grounding and bonding electrical Figure 8-24 shows that the metal cold water pipes,
systems: the service raceways, the metal enclosures, the ser-
vice switch, and the neutral conductor are bonded
Bonding: A low-impedance path obtained by per- together to form a grounded system, Rule 10-208.
manently joining all non-current-carrying metal Regarding the residence used as an example in
parts to ensure electrical continuity. Any current this textbook, the grounding electrode will be the
likely to be imposed must be conducted safely. service water pipe from the public water main. This
Grounding: A permanent path to earth with suffi- establishes an equipotential relationship with other
cient ampacity to carry any fault current liable to be non-current-carrying equipment, as outlined in
imposed on it. Rule 10-700.
Where a driven ground rod is the ground-
ing electrode, the size of the grounding conduc-
*© 2021 Canadian Standards Association tor that is the sole connection to the driven rod
154 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

When non-metallic water systems are used, one

of the other methods of system grounding as identi-
fied in Rule 10-102 must be used. One of the most
common methods is the ground plate.

Courtesy of Craig Trineer

If the water piping inside the building is non-
metallic and only short, isolated sections of metal
water piping are used, such as at water heaters,
these short sections may not need to be bonded.
Check with your local inspection authority to be
Figure 8-22 Ground plates. sure. Sometimes, the water system inside the dwell-
ing is metallic, even though the water service to the
street is non-metallic. With this large amount of
shall not be smaller than the requirements of metal water piping present, it must now be bonded
Rule 10-114. to ground.
If the driven ground rod is not selected as the
grounding electrode, any one of these items may
be used: at least 6 m of bare copper conductor not SUMMARY—SERVICE
smaller than No. 4 AWG (Table 43) or an approved ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT
manufactured ground plate; see Figure 8-22. GROUNDING
Both of these may be encased in concrete at least
50 mm thick and in direct contact with the earth, When grounding service entrance equipment, you
such as near the bottom of a foundation or footing must observe the following CEC rules*:
[Rule 10-102 2) c) and 3)]. ●● The system must be grounded when the maxi­
Either a bare copper conductor or a ground plate mum voltage to ground does not exceed
may be used when buried directly in the ground to a 150 volts, Rule 10-206 1) a).
minimum depth of 600 mm below finished grade. The
●● The system must be grounded if it incorporates
residence used as an example in this book is being fed
a neutral conductor, Rule 10-206 1) b).
from a jacketed 3/0 RW90XLPE, the rated ampacity
of which is 200 amperes based on the 75°C column of ●● All grounding schemes shall be installed so
Table 2, so our house would require a No. 3 bare copper that no objectionable currents will flow over
grounding electrode conductor, according to Table 43. the grounding conductors and other grounding
There is little doubt that this concept of a paths, Rule 10-100.
grounded system gives rise to many interpreta- ●● The neutral conductor must be grounded, Rule
tions of the CEC. The electrician must check with 10-208.
the local inspection authority to determine the local
interpretation. Refer to Figure 8-23. ●● All electrical and non-electrical equipment
must be bonded together. See Rule 10-700.
●● The grounding conductor used to connect the
GROUNDING THE SERVICE grounding conductor to the grounding electrode
WHEN NON-METALLIC WATER must not be spliced, except with thermit weld-
PIPE IS USED ing or compression connectors, Rule 10-118.

It is quite common to find the main water supply to a

●● The grounding conductor must be sized accord-
residence installed with plastic (PVC) piping. Even ing to Rule 10-114.
interior water piping systems may be non-metallic
piping. Some local building codes prohibit the use
of non-metallic piping. Regardless, it is important
that the electrical system be properly grounded and
bonded. *© 2021 Canadian Standards Association
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 155

Main
service
disconnect

Neutral
bus

Install green
bonding screw
Grounding
to enclosure
conductor
Approved
ground
Only one clamp,
grounding Rules
conductor 10-118 1) a)
required—
not both

Concrete encased
electrode,
Rule 10-102 3) b)

Text © 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Metal
underground
water supply,
Rule 10-700 a)

Install
conductor
near botttom
of footing

Figure 8-23 Rule 10-102 lists many options for a grounding electrode. Here a concrete-encased No. 3
AWG bare copper conductor is laid near the bottom of the footing, encased by at least 50 mm of concrete.
The minimum length of the conductor is 6 m. See Rule 10-102 3) b) and Table 43. Note: The CEC requires
that if more than one ground electrode connection exists, they must be bonded together, Rule 10-104 b).

●● The minimum conductor size for concrete- ●● The grounding conductor shall be electrically
encased electrodes is found in Table 43 and continuous throughout its length and must
Rule 10-102 3). be free from exposure to mechanical injury,
●● The metal water supply system shall be bonded Rule 10-116.
to the grounding conductor of the electrical sys- ●● The grounding conductor shall be copper,
tem, Rule 10-102 4) and Appendix B. aluminum, or another acceptable material,
●● When more than one grounding means exist, Rule 10-112.
they must be bonded together, Rule 10-104.
 156 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

Street side of
water meter Bonding
jumper

Point of connection
is on street side of
meter, Rule 10-700
The bonding jumper
assures electrical
continuity,
Rule 10-700 Bonding Meter
bushing located on
Hot outside of
water residence
line
All equipment
Ground Cold water line connectors
clamps 5312013 maintain bond,
Bond all parts that Rule 10-604
may become electrically Bonding
discontinuous, Rule 10-700 jumper
Gas
line
Dielectric
unions*

Water
Anode heater
Grounding
Dip tube

Text © 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Temperature/ Gas conductor
pressure inlet
relief valve

*Some mfgs. provide

dielectric fittings in Supplemental ground rod(s)
their water heaters The supplemental grounding
to stop stray electrical conductor may be connected: Rods must be 3 m
currents and to minimize 1. To the grounding conductor apart minimum
galvanic corrosion. 2. To the neutral bus in the main service panel and 3 m long,
** Intersystem bonding 3. To a nonflexible grounded service raceway Rule 10-102 2) a)
terminals 4. To any grounded service enclosure

Figure 8-24 One method that may be used to provide proper grounding and bonding of service
entrance equipment for a typical single-family residence.

●● Bonding shall be provided around all insulat- This residence is supplied by three 3/0 RW75X-
ing joints or sections of the metal water piping LPE service entrance conductors. According to
system that may be disconnected, Rule 10-700. Rule 10-114, a No. 6 AWG copper grounding
●● The connection to the grounding electrode must conductor is required. This conductor may be run in
be accessible, Rule 10-118. conduit or cable armour, or it may be run exposed if
it is not subjected to severe physical damage.
●● The grounding conductor must be connected
tightly to the grounding electrode using the
proper lugs, connectors, clamps, or other
approved means, Rule 10-118. BONDING
Figure 8-25 illustrates three common types of Bonding must be done at service entrance equip-
ground electrodes. These are connected to the neutral ment. Rule 10-604 lists the methods approved
in the main service portion of the combination panel. for bonding this equipment. Grounding bushings
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 157

1. Field-assembled
Must be bare copper minimum of 6 m long and within
grounding electrode
50 mm of bottom of concrete foundation footing or
direct buried to a minimum depth of 600 mm, conductor
sized from Table 43.

For 200-A service minimum No. 3 AWG bare copper, as per Table 43

2. Rod grounding
electrode Grounding
conductor
CEC 10-114

GRC series of ground rod

clamps are CSA-approved
for wet locations and for
direct burial

Bolted clamp
3 m minimum
may be copper,
Minimum in length
bronze, or brass, Manufactured
Rule 10-118. 3 m apart grounding
electrode,
Rule 10-102

3. Plate electrode
Grounding conductor,
Rule 10-114

Manufactured ground
plate approved for
the purpose

Noncorrosive lug and bolt

(Brass or copper)

Figure 8-25 Three common types of grounding electrodes: (1) a field-assembled grounding electrode,
(2) two rod electrodes, and (3) a plate electrode. In many instances, the grounding electrode is better than
the service water pipe (in situ) ground electrode, particularly since the advent of non-metallic (PVC) water
piping systems.

(Figure 8-26) and bonding jumpers are installed supplying the service equipment and the distance
on metallic service conduits at service entrance between the service equipment and the transform-
equipment to ensure a low-impedance path to ers. The short-circuit current can easily reach
ground if a fault occurs on any of the service 20 000 amperes or more in dwellings. Fault cur-
entrance conductors. Service entrance conductors rents can easily reach 40 000 to 50 000 amperes or
are not fused at the service head. Thus, the short- more in apartments, condominiums, and similar
circuit current on these conductors is limited only dwellings. These ins­t allations are usually served
by the capacity of the transformer or transformers by a large-capacity transformer located close to
158 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

Figure 8-26 Insulated ground bushing with bonding lug.

the service entrance equipment and the metering.

This extremely high-fault c­ urrent produces
severe arcing, which is a fire hazard. The use
of proper bonding reduces this hazard to some
extent.
Fault current calculations are presented later
in this unit. This book’s companion textbooks,
Electrical Wiring: Commercial and Electrical
Wiring: Industrial (also published by Cengage
Canada), cover these calculations in much greater
detail. Rule 10-616 states that the main bonding
jumpers must have an ampacity not less than the
corresponding ungrounded service conductor. The
grounding lugs on grounding bushings are sized
by the trade size of the bushing. The lugs become Figure 8-27 Insulated plastic bushings.
larger as the size of the bushing increases.
The conductor may be sized according to
Table 16 if used in conjunction with two locknuts
and a ground bushing.
Rule 12-906 2) states that if No. 8 AWG or larger MULTIPLE METER
conductors are installed in a raceway, an insulating INSTALLATIONS
bushing or equivalent must be used (Figure 8-27).
This bushing protects the wire from shorting or If multiple meter sockets are required, as in a multi-
grounding itself as it passes through the metal bush- family dwelling or a water heater metered at a differ-
ing. Combination bushings can be used. These bush- ent rate, a multigang meter socket is used. This is a
ings are metallic (for mechanical strength) and have single enclosure that is capable of holding more than
plastic insulation. When conductors are installed in one meter. The meter socket is rated in two ways:
EMT, they can be protected at the fittings by the use the maximum ampacity of the consumer’s service
of connectors with insulated throats. conductors feeding the enclosures and the maximum
If the conduit bushing is made of insulating ampacity that may be taken off each meter position.
material only, as in Figure 8-27, two locknuts must A commonly used two-position meter socket may
be used; see Figure 8-28 and Rule 10-606. have a maximum ampacity of 200 amperes on the
Figures 8-29 to 8-31 show various types of consumer’s service with a maximum ampacity of
ground clamps. 100 amperes per meter position.
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 159

Copper bonding jumper

for water meter

Metal
water
pipe

Figure 8-30 Ground clamp of the type used to

bond (jumper) around water meter.

Figure 8-28 The use of locknuts. See Rule 10-606.

Courtesy of Thomas & Betts Corporation

Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

Figure 8-29 Typical ground clamps used in Figure 8-31 Ground clamp of the type used to
residential systems. attach ground wire to well casings.

Since the grounding conductor is connected in the be made in other service equipment located on
service box of each service, the grounding of the mul- the supply side of the service disconnects. The
tiple services is the same as for a single service, that is, service can, therefore, be grounded at the mul-
based on the individual ungrounded service conduc- tigang meter socket by connecting the neu-
tor ampacity and Rule 10-616. However, Rule 10-210 tral conductor to the grounding electrode using
states that the system grounding connection may a conductor sized according to Rule 10-616,
160 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

based on the ampacity of the consumer’s service con- ●● Plug fuses shall have ratings not more than
ductors feeding the meter socket. 30 amperes, Rule 14-208 1).
If the raceway system from the meter socket is ●● Plug fuses with low melting-point characteris-
metallic, the requirements for bonding the raceway tics shall be marked “P,” and fuses with time
to the service enclosure, as previously outlined in this delay shall be marked “D,” Rule 14-200.
section, will apply. If the service raceways are non-
●● The screwshell of the fuseholder must be con-
metallic, a separate bonding conductor is required,
nected to the neutral of the circuit.
sized according to Table 16, based on the ampacity
of the individual service overcurrent device ratings. ●● Where there is an alteration to a fuse panel, the
Because the neutral conductor is already bonded to fuse panel is required to be equipped with fuse
the case of the meter enclosure and connected to the rejectors that are designed to limit the size of
grounding electrode from this location, you must fuse that can be accommodated by the fuse-
apply Rule 10-210. This rule requires that the neu- holder, Rule 14-204 2).
tral not be connected to the enclosure in the service ●● All new installations require fuse rejectors.
box of the individual services. Therefore, the brass ●● Fuse rejectors are classified at 0 to 15 amperes,
or green bonding screw must be removed from the
16 to 20 amperes, and 21 to 30 amperes. The
neutral bar in the individual services.
reason for this classification is given in the fol-
The neutral must be bonded to only non-
lowing paragraph.
current-carrying components in one loca-
tion, that location being at the point at which When the electrician installs fusible equipment,
the neutral is connected to the grounding the ampere rating of the various circuits must be deter-
electrode. mined. Based on this rating, a fuse rejector of the proper
size is inserted into the fuseholder. The proper Type P
or D fuse is then placed in the fuseholder. Because
BRANCH-CIRCUIT of the rejector, the fuse is non-interchangeable, as
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION required by Rule 14-204 1). For example, assume that
a 15-ampere rejector is inserted for the 15-ampere
The overcurrent devices commonly used to pro-
branch circuits in the residence. It is impossible to
tect branch circuits in dwellings are fuses and cir-
substitute a fuse with a larger rating without remov-
cuit breakers. CEC Section 14 discusses overcurrent
ing the 15-ampere rejector. If any alterations are made
protection.
to an existing panel, these rejectors must be installed,
Rule 14-204 2). Figure 8-32 shows typical fuse
Plug Fuses, Fuseholders, rejectors.
and Fuse Rejectors
15-ampere fuse 20-ampere fuse 30-ampere fuse
Fuses are a reliable and economical form of over- 15 ampere 20 ampere 30 ampere
current protection. Rules 14-200 through 14-212
give the requirements for plug fuses, fuseholders,
and fuse rejectors, including*
●● Plug fuses shall not be used in circuits exceed- No rejection
washer used
ing 125 volts between conductors. An excep- 15-ampere 20-ampere
tion to this rule is for a system having a fuse rejector fuse rejector
15-ampere fuses and 20-ampere fuses and 30-ampere fuses
grounded neutral where no conductor is more fuse rejectors are fuse rejectors are are colour-
than 150 volts to ground. (This is the case for colour-coded blue colour-coded red coded green
the 120/240-volt system used in the residence
Figure 8-32 Plug-type fuses and rejection
discussed in this textbook.) See Rule 14-202. washers are designed to prevent overfusing in
panelboards. Rejection washers can be added to
any existing panelboard that uses plug fuses.
*© 2021 Canadian Standards Association
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 161

Table 8-2
Characteristics of common low-voltage fuses.
FUSE
CLASS VOLTAGE CURRENT COMMENTS

Plug Fuses
C 125 0–30 Has rejection feature when used with rejection washers; low melting-point plug
fuses are Type P non-time-delay and Type D time-delay
S 125 0–30 May be time-delay or non-time-delay
Cartridge Fuses
H 250 0–600 Standard fuse used in circuits where interrupting capacity of 10 000 A or less is
600 required
J 250 0–600 UL Class J: 200 000-A interrupting capacity, smaller physical dimensions than
600 Class H fuses
K 250 0–600 UL Class K: Will be found on equipment imported from the United States
600
L 250 601–6000 UL Class L: High-temperature fuses
600
R 250 0–600 UL Class R: Rejection fuse may be placed in a standard fuseholder, but standard
600 fuses will not fit in a Class R fuseholder
T 250 0–600 UL Class T: Has smaller physical dimensions than either Class H or Class J
600

Often the term Dual-Element is used when refer- has a greater range of protection than the single-
ring to time-delay fuses. Dual-Element is a trade element fuse. The overload element opens
name of fuses made by Bussmann Division, Cooper circuits on current in the low overload range (up to
Industries. The term is used in much the same man- 500% of the fuse rating). The short-circuit element
ner as Romex is used for Type NMD90 cable and BX handles only short circuits and heavy overload
is used for AC90 cable. currents (above 500% of the fuse rating).
CSA has classified fuses according to their size
Overload Element. The overload element opens
and operating characteristics. Table 8-2 provides
when excessive heat is developed in the element.
information on common low-voltage fuses.
This heat may be the result of a loose connection or
poor contact in the fuseholder or excessive current.
Dual-Element Fuse (Time-Delay) When the temperature reaches 138°C, a fusible alloy
melts and the element opens. Any excessive current
Figure 8-33 shows the most common type of Dual-
produces heat in the element. However, the mass of
Element cartridge fuse. These fuses are available
the element absorbs a great deal of heat before the
in 250-volt and 600-volt sizes with ratings from
cutout opens. A small excess of current will cause
0 to 600 amperes, and have an interrupting rating of
this element to open if it continues for a long period
200 000 amperes.
of time. This characteristic gives the thermal cutout
A Dual-Element fuse has two fusible elements
element a large time lag on low overloads (up to
connected in series: the overload element and the
10 seconds at a current of 500% of the fuse rating).
short-circuit element. When an excessive current
In addition, it provides very accurate protection for
flows, one of the elements opens. The amount of
prolonged overloads.
excess current determines which element opens.
The electrical characteristics of these two ele- Short-Circuit Element. The capacity of the
ments are very different. Thus, a Dual-Element fuse short-circuit element is high enough to prevent it
 162 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

A from opening on low overloads. This element is

designed to clear the circuit quickly of short cir-
cuits or heavy overloads above 500% of the fuse
ratings.
Dual-Element fuses are used on motor and
B appliance circuits where the time-lag characteris-
tic of the fuse is required. Single-element fuses do
not have this time lag and blow as soon as an over-
current condition occurs. The homeowner may be
tempted to install a fuse with a higher rating. The
fuseholder adapter, however, prevents the use of
such a fuse. Thus, the Dual-Element fuse is recom-
mended for this type of situation.
The standard plug fuse can be used only to
replace blown fuses on existing installations. A Type P
or D fuse is required on all new installations. The car-
tridge fuse is a Dual-Element fuse that is available in
both ferrule and knife-blade styles.

Cartridge Fuses
Figure 8-34 shows another style of small-dimension
cartridge fuse.
A type of cartridge fuse that is also in use
is rated at not over 60 amperes for circuits of
300 volts or less to ground. The physical size of
Courtesy of Eaton

Courtesy of Eaton

Figure 8-33 Cartridge-type Dual-Element fuse

(A) is a 250-volt, 100-ampere fuse. The cutaway
view in (B) shows the internal parts of the fuse. Figure 8-34 Cartridge-type fuses.
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 163

this fuse is smaller than that of standard cartridge

fuses. The time-delay characteristics of this fuse
mean that it can handle harmless current surges or
momentary overloads without blowing. However,
these fuses open very rapidly under short-circuit
conditions.
These fuses prevent over-fusing since they are
size-limiting for their ampere ratings. For exam-
ple, a fuseholder designed to accept a 15-ampere
fuse will not accept a 20-ampere cartridge fuse. In

Courtesy of Eaton
the same manner, a fuseholder designed to accept
a 20-ampere fuse will not accept a 30-ampere car-
tridge fuse.

Class J Fuses Figure 8-35 Class J fuses rated at 30, 60, 100,
200, 400, and 600 amperes, 300 volts.
Another type of physically small fuse is the Class J
fuse; see Figure 8-35. This has a high-interrupting
rating in sizes from 0 to 600 amperes in both 300-
volt and 600-volt ratings. Such fuses are used as the Circuit Breakers
main fuses in a panel having fused branch circuits;
see Figure 8-36. In this case, the Class J fuses protect Installations in dwellings normally use thermal-
the low-interrupting capacity fuses against high-level magnetic circuit breakers. On a continuous over-
short-circuit currents. load, a bimetallic element in such a breaker moves
Most manufacturers list service equipment, until it unlatches the inner tripping mechanism of
metering equipment, and disconnect switches that the breaker. Momentary small overloads do not
make use of Class J fuses. This allows the safe cause the element to trip the breaker. If the overload
installation of this equipment where fault currents is heavy or if there is a short circuit, a magnetic coil
exceed 10 000 amperes, such as on large services, in the breaker causes it to interrupt the branch cir-
and any service equipment located close to pad- cuit instantly.
mounted transformers, such as those found in apart- Rules 14-300 to 14-308 give the requirements
ments, condominiums, shopping centres, and similar for circuit breakers, including*
locations.
The standard ratings for fuses range from
1 to 6000 amperes. *© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Available fault current

20 833.35 amperes
© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Service equipment
must have short-circuit
rating equal to or
greater than the Fuses must have
available fault current a 20 833.35-ampere
at supply terminals. interrupting rating
or greater.
Meeting requirements of Rule 14-012
for fused main/fused branch circuits

Figure 8-36 Fused main/fused branch circuits.

164 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

●● Circuit breakers shall be trip-free so that the INTERRUPTING RATINGS FOR

internal mechanism will trip to the OFF posi- FUSES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS*
tion even if the handle is held in the ON position
(which can be achieved using a lock-on device), Rule 14-012 a) states that all fuses, circuit breakers,
Rule 14-300 1). and other electrical devices that break current shall
have an interrupting capacity sufficient for the voltage
●● Breakers shall indicate clearly whether they are employed and for the current that must be interrupted.
on or off, Rule 14-300 2). According to Rule 14-012 a) and Appendix B,
●● A breaker shall be non-tamperable so that it all overcurrent devices, the total circuit imped-
cannot be readjusted (trip point changed) with- ance, and the withstand capability of all circuit
out dismantling the breaker or breaking the components (wires, contractors, switches) must be
seal, Rule 14-304. selected so that minimal damage will result in the
●● The rating shall be durably marked on the event of a fault, either line-to-line, line-to-neutral, or
breaker. For small breakers rated at 100 line-to-ground.
amperes or less and 600 volts or less, the The overcurrent protective device must be able
rating must be moulded, stamped, or etched on to interrupt the current that may flow under any con-
the handle (or on another part of the breaker dition (overload or short circuit). Such interruption
that will be visible after the cover of the panel must be made with complete safety to personnel and
is installed). without damage to the panel or switch in which the
overcurrent device is installed.
●● Every breaker with an interrupting rating other Overcurrent devices with inadequate inter-
than 5000 amperes shall have this rating marked rupting ratings are, in effect, bombs waiting for
on the breaker. Most have a 10 000-ampere a short circuit to trigger them into an explosion.
­minimum rating. Personal injury may result, and serious damage
●● Circuit breakers rated at 120 volts and 347 will be done to the electrical equipment.
volts and used for fluorescent loads shall not be Cartridge-type fuses have a maximum inter-
used as switches unless marked “SWD,” Rule rupting rating of 10 000 amperes root mean square
30-710 3) b). (RMS) symmetrical. Plug fuses can interrupt no
Most circuit breakers are ambient tempera- more than 10 000 RMS symmetrical. Cartridge dual-
ture compensated. This means that the tripping element fuses (Figure 8-33) and Class J fuses (Figure
point of the breaker is not affected by an increase 8-35) have interrupting ratings of 200 000 amperes
in the surrounding temperature. An ambient- RMS symmetrical. These interrupting ratings are
compensated breaker has two elements. One ele- described in CSA Standard C22.2 No. 59.1-M1987.
ment heats up due to the current passing through The interrupting rating of a fuse is marked on its
it and the heat in the surrounding area. The other label when the rating is other than 10 000 amperes.
element heats up because of the surrounding air
only. The actions of these elements oppose each Short-Circuit Currents
other. Thus, as the tripping element tends to lower This text does not cover in detail the methods of
its tripping point because of external heat, the calculating short-circuit currents (see this book’s
second element opposes the tripping element and companion textbooks, Electrical Wiring: Indus-
stabilizes the tripping point. As a result, the current trial and Electrical Wiring: Commercial for more
through the tripping element is the only factor that detailed circuit-fault calculations). The ratings
causes the element to open the circuit. It is a good required to determine the maximum available short-
practice to turn the breaker off and on periodically to circuit current delivered by a transformer are the
“exercise” its moving parts. kilovolt-ampere (kVA) and impedance values of the
CEC Table 13 gives the standard ampere ratings
of fuses and circuit breakers up to 800 amperes. *© 2021 Canadian Standards Association
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 165

transformer. The size and length of wire installed Step 3. Short-circuit current 5 Normal full-load
between the transformer and the overcurrent device secondary current 3 Multiplier
must be considered as well.
The transformers used in modern electri-
cal installations are efficient and have very low EXAMPLE
impedance values. A low-impedance transformer A transformer is rated at 100 kVA and
having a given kVA rating delivers more short- 120/240 volts. It is a single-phase trans-
circuit current than a transformer with the same former with an impedance of 1% (from the
kVA rating and a higher impedance. When an transformer nameplate). Find the short-circuit
electric service is connected to a low-impedance current.
transformer, the problem of available short-
circuit current is very serious. SOLUTION  For a single-phase transformer:
The examples given in Figure 8-36 show that
kVA 3 1000
the available short-circuit current at the transformer I5
E
secondary terminal is 20 833.35 amperes.
100 3 1000
5 amperes
240
Determining Short-Circuit Current
5 416.667 amperes, full-load current
The local power utility and the electrical inspector
are good sources of information for determining For a transformer impedance of 1%:
short-circuit current.
100
You can use this simplified method to determine Multiplier 5
Percent impedance
the approximate available short-circuit current at the
terminals of a transformer. 100
5
Step 1. Determine the normal full-load secondary 1
current delivered by the transformer. 5 100
For single-phase transformers:
Short-circuit current 5 I 3 Multiplier
kVA 3 1000 5 416.667 amperes 3 100
I5
E 5 41 666.667 amperes
For three-phase transformers: Thus, the available short-circuit current at the ter-
minals of the transformer is 41 600 amperes.
kVA 3 1000
I5
E 3 1.73
This value decreases as the distance from the
I 5 current, in amperes transformer increases. If the transformer impedance
kVA 5 kilovolt-amperes (transformer name- is 1.5%,
plate rating)
E 5 secondary line-to-line voltage 100
Multiplier 5 5 66.667
(transformer nameplate rating) 1.5

Step 2. Using the impedance value given on the The short-circuit current = 416.667 × 66.667
transformer nameplate, find the multiplier to deter- amperes
mine the short-circuit current. = 27 777.939 amperes
If the transformer impedance is 2%:
100 100
Multiplier 5 Multiplier 5 5 50
Percent impedance 2
166 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

The short-circuit current = 416.667 × 50 amperes ●● They must be sized to satisfy the required
= 20 833.35 amperes ampacity as determined by service entrance
calculations and/or local codes.
Note: A short-circuit current of 20 833.35 amperes
is used in Figures 8-36 through 8-39. ●● All fuses must have interrupting rating adequate
for the available fault current. Panel must have
WARNING: The line-to-neutral short-circuit short-circuit rating adequate for the available
current at the secondary of a single-phase trans- fault current.
former is about 1.5 times greater than the line-to-
●● For overload conditions on a branch, only the
line short-circuit current. For the previous example:
branch-circuit fuse(s) will open. All other circuits
Line-to-line short-circuit current remain energized. The system is selective.*
= 20 833.35 amperes ●● For short circuits (line-to-line or line-to-neutral)
Line-to-neutral short-circuit current and for ground faults (line-to-ground), only the
= 20 833.35 × 1.5 amperes = 31 250.025 fuse protecting the faulted circuit opens. All
amperes other circuits remain energized. The system is
selective.*
Note that CSA Standard C22.2 No. 47 allows the
marked impedance on the nameplate of a transformer
to vary plus or minus (6) 10% from the actual imped-
ance value of the transformer. Thus, for a transformer Fused Main/Breaker Branches
marked “2%Z,” the actual impedance could be as low (Figure 8-37)
as 1.8%Z or as much as 2.2%Z. Therefore, the available
short-circuit current at the secondary of a transformer ●● Fused main/breaker branches must be listed as
as calculated above should be increased by 10% if you suitable for use as service equipment.
want to be on the safe side when considering the inter- ●● They must be sized to satisfy the required
rupting rating of the fuses and breakers to be installed. ampacity as determined by service entrance
An excellent point-to-point method of calcu- calculations and/or local codes.
lating fault currents at various distances from the
secondary of a transformer that uses different sizes
●● Main fuses must have interrupting rating ade-
of conductors is covered in detail in the Electrical quate for the available fault circuit.
Wiring: Commercial textbook. It is simple and accu- ●● Panel must have short-circuit rating adequate
rate. The point-to-point method can be used to com- for the available fault current.
pute both single-phase and three-phase faults. ●● Main fuses must be current-limiting, such as
Calculating fault currents is just as important as Class J fuses, so that if a fault exceeding the
calculating load currents. Most equipment must be branch-circuit breaker’s interrupting rating
rated electrically to withstand or handle any overload (ampere interrupting rating, AIR) occurs, the
or short-circuit current applied so that the contacts fuse will limit the let-through fault current to a
don’t get welded shut. Overloads will cause conduc- value less than the maximum interrupting rat-
tors and equipment to run hot, will shorten their life, ing of the branch-circuit breaker. Branch-circuit
and will eventually destroy them. Fault currents that breakers generally have 10 000 amperes inter-
exceed the interrupting rating of the overcurrent pro- rupting rating.
tective devices can cause violent electrical explosions
●● For branch-circuit faults (L-N or L-G) exceed-
of equipment with the potential of serious injury to
ing the branch-circuit breaker’s interrupting rat-
people standing near it. Fire hazard is also present.
ing, one fuse opens, de-energizing one-half of
PANELS AND LOAD CENTRES the panel. The system is non-selective.*

Fused Main/Fused Branches (Figure 8-36)

●● Fused main/fused branch circuits must be listed
as suitable for use as service equipment. *See highlighted note on page 168.
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 167

Available fault current

20 833.35 amperes
10 000 ampere interrupting
rating breakers

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Service equipment must Current-limited fuses must limit
have short-circuit rating short-circuit current to protect the
equal to or greater than breakers. The fuses must have at
the available fault current least 20 833.35 ampere interrupting
at supply terminals. rating.

Meeting requirements of Rule 14-012 for fused main/breaker branch circuits.

Figure 8-37 Fused main/breaker branch circuits.

●● For branch-circuit faults (L-L) exceeding the ●● They must be sized to satisfy the required
branch-circuit breaker’s interrupting rating, ampacity as determined by service entrance
both main fuses open, de-energizing the entire calculations and/or local codes.
panel. The system is non-selective.* ●● Main and branch breakers must have inter-
●● Check time–current curves of fuses and breakers rupting rating adequate for the available fault
and check the unlatching time of breakers to deter- current.
mine at what point in “time” and “current” the ●● Panel must have short-circuit rating adequate
breakers are slower than the current-limiting fuses. for the available fault current.
●● For normal overloads and low-level faults, this ●● For overload conditions and low-level faults on
system is selective. a branch circuit, only the branch-circuit breaker
will trip off. All other circuits remain energized.
The system is selective.*
Breaker Main/Breaker Branches
(Figure 8-38) (All Standard Plastic-Case ●● For branch-circuit faults (short circuits or
Breakers) ground faults) that exceed the instant trip set-
ting of the main breaker (usually five times
●● These breaker main/breaker branches must be the breaker’s ampere rating), both the branch-
listed as suitable for use as service equipment. circuit breaker and main breaker trip off.

*See highlighted note on page 168.

Available fault current

20 833.35 amperes © 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Service equipment must

have a short-circuit rating
of at least 20 833.35 amperes. Standard branch circuit
breakers must have at
Standard main breaker least 20 833.35 ampere
must have at least interrupting rating.
20 833.35 ampere interrupting rating.

Meeting requirements of Rule 14-012 for breaker main/breaker branch circuits

Breakers are standard type–not series-connected type

Figure 8-38 Breaker main/breaker branch circuits.

168 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

Available fault current Panel is CSA-

20 833.35 amperes approved as “series
connected”

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Branch circuit
Main breaker rated
breakers with
22 000 amperes
10 000 ampere
Service equipment must interrupting rating
interrupting
have a short-circuit rating
rating of at least 20 833.35
amperes.
Meeting the requirements of Rule 14-014
for series-connected breaker main/breaker
branch circuits

Figure 8-39 Breaker main/breaker branch circuits (series-connected plastic-case type).

For instance, for a branch fault of 700 amperes, ●● Main breaker will have interrupting rating
a 100-ampere main breaker also trips because higher than the branch breaker. For exam-
the main will trip instantly for faults of 500 ple, main breaker has a 20 000-ampere inter-
(100 × 5) amperes or more. Entire panel is de- rupting rating, whereas branch breaker has a
energized. System is non-selective.* 10 000-ampere interrupting rating.
●● Check manufacturer’s data for time–current ●● Panel must be listed and marked with its maxi-
characteristic curves and unlatching times of mum fault current rating.
the breakers. ●● For branch-circuit faults (L-L, L-N, L-G) above
the instant trip factory setting (i.e., 200-ampere
Breaker Main/Breaker Branches main breaker with 5 × setting: 200 × 5 5 1000
(Figure 8-39) (Series Connected— amperes), both branch and main breakers will
Sometimes Called Series Rated, trip. The system is non-selective.
Rule 14-014) ●● For overload conditions and low-level faults on
a branch, only the branch breaker will trip. The
●● These breaker main/breaker branches must be system is selective.
listed as suitable for use as service equipment.
●● Obtain time–current curves and unlatching time
●● They must be sized to satisfy the required data from the manufacturer.
ampacity as determined by service entrance
calculations and/or local codes.
●● The panel’s integral rating is attained because
when a heavy fault occurs, both main and
●● They must be listed as series connected. branch breakers open. The two arcs in series add
Note: The terms and theory behind selective impedance; thus, the fault current is reduced to
and non-selective systems are covered in detail a level less than the 10 000 AIR rating of the
in the Electrical Wiring: Commercial textbook. branch-circuit breaker.
In all instances, you should check the time–cur- ●● For series-rated panelboards where the available
rent curves of fuses and circuit breakers to be fault current exceeds the interrupting rating of
installed. Also check the circuit-breaker manu- the branch-circuit breakers, the equipment must
facturer’s unlatching time data, as these will be marked by the manufacturer as having a series
help determine at what values of current the combination interrupting rating at least equal to the
system will be selective or non-selective. Fault maximum available fault current, Rule 14-014 d).
current calculations are also covered in the Elec-
trical Wiring: Commercial textbook.
●● When panels containing low interrupting rat-
ing circuit breakers are separated from the
equipment in which the higher interrupting
*See highlighted note on this page. rating circuit breakers protecting the panel are
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 169

installed, the system becomes a field-installed

series-rated system. This panel must be field-
marked (by the installer) and this marking must
be readily visible, Rule 14-014 e). This marking
calls attention to the fact that the actual avail-
able fault current exceeds the interrupting rat-
ing of the breakers in the panel, and that the
panel is protected by properly selected circuit
breakers back at the main equipment. The label
will appear on panelboards and enclosed panel-
boards and may appear as follows:

When protected by ___ A maximum HRC ___

fuse or (manufacturer’s name and type designa-

Courtesy of Landis+Gyr
tion) circuit breaker rated not more than ___ A,
this panelboard is suitable for use on a circuit
capable of delivering not more than ___ A RMS
symmetrical, ___ V maximum.

CAUTION: Closely check the manufactur-

Figure 8-40 Typical single-phase smart meter.
er’s catalogue numbers to make sure that the
circuit-breaker combination you are intend-
ing to install in series is recognized by the Starting with the first dial on the left, record
CSA Group for that purpose. This is extremely the last number the pointer has passed. Continue
important because many circuit breakers have doing this with each dial until the full reading is
the same physical size and dimensions, yet obtained. The reading on the five-dial meter is
have different interrupting and voltage rat- 18 672 kWh.
ings, and have not been tested as series-rated If the meter reads 18 975 one month later
devices. To install these as a series combina- (Figure 8-42), by subtracting the previous reading of
tion constitutes a violation of Rules 14-012 18 672, it is found that 303 kWh were used during the
and 14-014, which could be dangerous. month.
The number is multiplied by the rate per kilo-
watt-hour, and the power company bills the con-
READING THE METER
sumer for the energy used. The utility may also add
Figure 8-40 shows a typical single-phase smart a fuel adjustment charge.
meter. In some cases, you will need to know how to
read a watt-hour meter. In Figure 8-41, there are five
Cost of Using Electrical Energy
dials; reading them from left to right, the dials rep-
resent tens of thousands, thousands, hundreds, tens, A watt-hour meter is always connected into some
and units of kilowatt-hours. part of the service entrance equipment. In residential

0 0 0 0 0
9 1 1 9 9 1 1 9 9 1
8 2 2 8 8 2 2 8 8 2
7 3 3 7 7 3 3 7 7 3
6 4 4 6 6 4 4 6 6 4
5 5 5 5 5

Figure 8-41 The reading on this five-dial meter is 18 672 kWh.

170 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

0 0 0 0 0
9 1 1 9 9 1 1 9 9 1
8 2 2 8 8 2 2 8 8 2
7 3 3 7 7 3 3 7 7 3
6 4 4 6 6 4 4 6 6 4
5 5 5 5 5

Figure 8-42 One month later, the meter reads 18 975 kWh, indicating that 303 kWh were used during the
month.

metering, a watt-hour meter is normally installed as Solution

part of the service entrance.
175 3 8 3 15
All electrical energy consumed is metered so Cost 5 cents 5 21 cents
1000
that the utility can bill the customer on a monthly or
bimonthly basis.
Assume that a meter now reads 18 672 kWh.
The kilowatt (kW) is a convenient unit of electrical The previous meter reading was 17 895 kWh. The
power. One thousand watts (W) is equal to one kilowatt difference is 777 kWh.
(kW). The watt-hour meter measures both wattage and The following is how a typical bill might look.
time. As the dials of the meter turn, the kilowatt-hour
(kWh) consumption is continually recorded. GENERIC ELECTRIC COMPANY
Utility rates are based on so many cents per Days of Service: From To Due Date
kilowatt-hour. 33 01–28–21 03–01–21 03–25–21
Present reading 18 672
Last reading 17 895
EXAMPLE
Kilowatt-hours 777
One kWh will light a 100-watt light bulb for Rate/kWh 0.15
ten hours. One kWh will operate a 1000- Amount $116.55
watt electric heater for one hour. Therefore, if
Total $116.55 +
the electric rate is 15 cents per kilowatt-hour, applicable
the use of a 100-watt bulb for 10 hours would taxes
cost 15 cents.

Watts 3 Hours 100 3 10

kWh 5 5 kWh 5 1 kWh
1000 1000 Some utilities apply a fuel adjustment charge
that may increase or decrease the electric bill.
The cost of the energy used by an appliance is These charges, on a “per kWh” basis, enable the
electric utility to recover from the consumer extra
Watts 3 Hours used 3 Cost per kWh
Cost 5 expenses it might incur for fuel costs used in gen-
1000
erating electricity. These charges can vary each
time the utility prepares the bill, without it having
to apply to the regulatory agency for a rate change.
Some utilities increase their rates during the
EXAMPLE summer months when people turn on their air con-
Find the cost of operating a colour televi- ditioners. This air-conditioning load taxes the util-
sion for eight hours. The set is rated at ity’s generating capabilities during the peak summer
175 watts. The electric rate is 15 cents per kWh. months. The higher rate structure also gives people
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 171

an incentive to not set their thermostats too low, thus The widespread introduction of smart meter-
saving energy. ing worldwide has changed how utilities measure
To encourage customers to conserve energy, your power consumption. Smart meters communi-
a utility company might offer the following rate cate with the power utility and send data about your
structure: power consumption directly to the utility. It is pos-
sible for a utility to charge consumers different rates
First 500 kWh @ 6.12 cents per kWh for the energy they use, based on the time of day
Over 500 kWh @ 10.64 cents per kWh (summer the power was used. Some smart meters may send
rate) information about surge voltages and harmonics
Over 500 kWh @ 8.64 cents per kWh (winter to the utility, enabling the utility to diagnose local
rate) power problems.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences. Unless otherwise stated, consider all equipment to
have a 75°C termination temperature.

1. Where does an overhead consumer’s service start and end?

2. What are supply service conductors?

3. Who is responsible for determining the service location?

4. a. [Circle one.] The service head must be located (above) (below) the point where the
supply service conductors are spliced to the consumer’s service conductors.
b. What CEC rule provides the answer to (a)?
5. a. What size and type of conductors are installed feeding Panel A?

b. What size of conduit is installed from the meter base to Panel A?

c. What is the minimum size AWG copper grounding conductor to be connected to a

grounding electrode?
d. Is the grounding conductor insulated, armoured, or bare?
172 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

6. How and where is the grounding conductor attached to the manufactured plate
electrode?

7. When a service mast is extended through a roof, must it be guyed?

8. What are the minimum distances or clearances for the following?

a. Supply service conductors, clearance over private driveway
b. Supply service conductors, clearance over private sidewalks
c. Supply service conductors, clearance over alleys
d. Supply service conductors, clearance over a roof having a roof pitch that may be
walked on. (Voltage between conductors does not exceed 300 volts.)
e. Supply service conductors, horizontal clearance from a porch
f. Supply service conductors, clearance from a window or door
9. What size of ungrounded conductors is installed for each of the following residential
services? (Assuming it is NOT a calculated load, using type RW90 copper conductors.)
a. 60-ampere service No. RW90 copper
b. 100-ampere service No. RW90 copper
c. 200-ampere service No. RW90 copper
10. What minimum size copper grounding conductors are installed for the services listed
in Question 9? (Rule 10-114)
a. 60-ampere service No. AWG grounding conductor
b. 100-ampere service No. AWG grounding conductor
c. 200-ampere service No. AWG grounding conductor
11. What is the recommended height of a meter socket from the ground?
12. a. What is the minimum length of conductor that must be left extending out of the
service head?

b. What CEC rule covers this?

13. What are the restrictions on the use of bare neutral conductors?

14. How far must mechanical protection be provided when underground service conduc-
tors are carried up a pole?
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 173

15. What is the maximum number of consumer’s services allowed without special permis-
sion? Quote the CEC rule.

16. Complete the following table by filling in the columns with the appropriate information.

CIRCUIT AMPERE WIRE

NUMBER RATING POLES VOLTS SIZE
A. Living room receptacle outlets
B. Workbench receptacle outlets
C. Well pump
D. Central vacuum
E. Kitchen lighting
F. Hydromassage tub
G. Attic lighting
H. Counter-mounted cooking unit
I. Electric furnace

17. a. What size of conductors supply Panel B?

b. What size of overcurrent device protects the feeders to Panel B?

18. How many electric meters are provided for this residence?
19. According to the CEC, is it permissible to ground rural service entrance systems
and equipment to driven ground rods when a metallic water system is not
available? ____________________________________________________________

20. What CEC rule and table lists the sizes of field-assembled copper grounding electrode?

21. Do the following conductors require mechanical protection? Provide the CEC rule for
each.
a. No. 8 grounding conductor
b. No. 6 grounding conductor
c. No. 4 grounding conductor
22. Why is bonding service entrance equipment necessary?
174 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

23. What special types of bushings are required on service entrances when metallic
raceways are used?

24. When No. 8 AWG conductors or larger are installed, what additional provision is
required on the conduit ends?

25. What minimum size copper bonding jumpers must be installed to properly bond the
consumer’s service for the residence discussed in this text?

26. a. What is a Type D fuse?

b. Where could a Type D fuse be installed?

27. a. What is the maximum voltage permitted between conductors when using plug
fuses? ____________________________________________________________

b. May plug fuses be installed in a switch that disconnects a 120/240-volt clothes

dryer?

c. Give a reason for the answer to (b).

28. What part of a circuit breaker causes the breaker to trip

a. on an overload?
b. on a short circuit?
29. List the standard sizes of circuit breakers up to and including 100 amperes.

30. Using the method shown in this unit, what is the approximate short-circuit current
available at the terminals of a 50 kVA single-phase transformer rated 120/240 volts?
The transformer impedance is 1%.
 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment 175

a. Line-to-line?
b. Line-to-neutral?
31. Using alphanumeric references found on the drawings, where is the consumer’s
service for this residence located?
32. a. On what type of wall is Panel A fastened?
b. On what type of wall is Panel B fastened?

33. When conduits pass through the wall from outside to inside, the conduit must
be to prevent air circulation through the conduit.
34. Briefly explain why electrical systems and equipment are grounded.

35. What CEC rule states that all overcurrent devices must have adequate interrupting rat-
ings for the current to be interrupted?
36. All electrical components have some sort of “withstand rating,” which indicates the
ability of the component to withstand fault currents for the time required by the overcur-
rent device to open the circuit. What CEC rule refers to withstand ratings with reference
to short-circuit current rating?
37. Arcing fault damage is closely related to the value of .
38. In general, systems are grounded so that the maximum voltage to ground does not
exceed [circle one]
a. 120 volts
b. 150 volts
c. 300 volts
39. An electric clothes dryer is rated at 5700 watts. The electric rate is 10.091 cents per
kWh. The dryer is used continuously for three hours. Find the cost of operation,
assuming that the heating element is on continuously.
176 UNIT 8 Service Entrance Equipment

40. Rule 14-012 requires that the service equipment (breakers, fuses, and the panel itself)
be rated [circle one]
a. equal to or greater than the current it must interrupt
b. equal to or greater than the available voltage and the fault current that is available
at the terminals
41. Read the meter below. Last month’s reading was 22 796. How many kilowatt-hours of
electricity were used for the current month?

0 0 0 0 0
9 1 1 9 9 1 1 9 9 1
8 2 2 8 8 2 2 8 8 2
7 3 3 7 7 3 3 7 7 3
6 4 4 6 6 4 4 6 6 4
5 5 5 5 5
 UNIT

9
Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters,
Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters,
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors,
and Isolated Ground Receptacles
Objectives
RED SEAL
After studying this unit, you should be able to OCCUPATIONAL
●● understand the theory of ground-fault circuit STANDARD
interrupters (GFCI) devices (RSOS)
●● explain the operation and connection of GFCIs
For the Red Seal exam,
●● explain why GFCIs are required note that this unit covers
●● discuss locations where GFCIs must be installed the following RSOS task:
in homes ●● Task B-8
●● discuss the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC)
rules relating to the replacement of existing
receptacles with GFCI receptacles
●● understand the CEC requirements for GFCI
protection on construction sites
(Continued)
177
178 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles

●● understand the logic of the exemptions The shock hazard exists whenever the user
to GFCI mandatory requirements for can touch both the defective equipment and
receptacles in certain locations in grounded surfaces, such as water pipes, metal
kitchens, garages, and basements sink rims, grounded metal lighting luminaires,
earth, concrete in contact with the earth, water,
●● discuss the CEC requirements for arc- or any other grounded surface.
fault circuit interrupters (AFCIs) Figure 9-1 shows a time–current curve that indi-
cates the amount of current that a normal healthy
●● understand CEC requirements for the
adult can stand for a given time. Just as in overcur-
installation of GFCIs and AFCIs
rent protection for branch circuits, motors, appli-
●● understand and discuss the basics of ances, and so on, it is always a matter of how much
transient voltage surge suppressors and for how long.
isolated ground receptacles
CODE REQUIREMENTS
FOR GROUND-FAULT CIRCUIT
ELECTRICAL HAZARDS INTERRUPTERS (GFCIs)

The most important consideration in the installation To provide supplementary protection against shock
of an electrical system is that it does not kill anyone. hazard, the CEC requires that GFCIs be provided for
Many lives have been lost because of electric shock the receptacle outlets of dwellings in these situations:
from an appliance or a piece of equipment that is “hot.” ●● For all 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere
This means that the “hot” circuit conductor in the receptacles in bathrooms and washrooms, a Class
appliance is contacting the metal frame of the appli- A-type GFCI-protected receptacle is required
ance. This condition may be due to the breakdown of within 1 m of the sink, Rule 26-720 g). This
the insulation because of wear and tear, defective con- receptacle, where practical, shall be located at
struction, or accidental misuse of the equipment. least 1 m, but in no case less than 500 mm,
10.0
8.0
6.0
4.0 Heart fibrillation
Range of maximum threshold for normal
“let-go” currents healthy adults
for normal 2.0
healthy adults

1.0
.8
.6

Time in .4
seconds
.2

.1
Class “A” GFCI: .08
trips when current to .06 Maximum time/current
ground is 6 mA or greater. permitted by U.L.
.05
for class A GFCI
does not trip when current
to ground is less than 4 mA. .04 Typical time/current
.03 for class A GFCI
may or may not trip when
the current to ground is .02
between 4 mA and 6 mA.
.01
0 20 40 60 80 100 140 180 220 260
6 mA mA

Figure 9-1 The time–current curve shows the tripping characteristics of a typical Class A GFCI. If you
follow the 6 mA line vertically to the cross-hatched typical time–current curve, you find that the GFCI will
open in from about 0.035 to 0.08 seconds. One electrical cycle is 1/60 of a second (0.0167 seconds). An air
bag in an automobile inflates in approximately 1⁄20 of a second (0.05 second).
 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles 179

from the bathtub or shower stall. A bathroom/ A B

washroom is defined in CEC Section 0.
●● For all 125-volt, 15- or 20-ampere receptacles
installed within 1.5 m of a sink, GFCI protection
is required. For exceptions, see Rule 26-704 1)
and Appendix B.
●● For 125-volt, single-phase, 15-ampere recepta-
cles located outdoors and within 2.5 m of ground

Courtesy of Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All Rights Reserved

level, a Class A-type GFCI-protected receptacle is
required. Accordingly, a GFCI-protected recepta-
cle is required for a receptacle that may be used for
an electric lawn mower or trimmer, Rule 26-704 2).

Courtesy of Schneider Electric

One receptacle shall be provided for each car space
in the garage or carport, Rule 26-724 b) (note that Ground-fault circuit A single-pole
interrupter as an ground-fault
a GFCI-protected receptacle is only required for integral part of a circuit-interrupter
duplex grounding-type circuit-breaker.
outdoor areas such as in the carport; no GFCI is convenience receptacle Double-pole GFCI
circuit breakers
required for a garage), and Rule 86-306 deals with are also available.
receptacles for electric vehicle charging.
Figure 9-2 (A) A ground-fault circuit-interrupter
●● In boathouses, all 125-volt, single-phase, receptacle, and (B) a ground-fault circuit-interrupter
15-ampere receptacles must have GFCI protection. circuit breaker. The switching mechanism of a
GFCI receptacle opens both the ungrounded “hot”
The CEC does not require GFCI receptacles for
conductor and the white / identified conductor. The
●● the receptacle directly behind laundry equipment switching mechanism of a GFCI circuit breaker opens
the ungrounded “hot” conductor only.
●● a single-outlet receptacle that supplies a perma-
nently installed sump pump
●● a single-outlet receptacle that is supplied by a The CEC requirements for ground-fault circuit
dedicated branch circuit located and identified protection can be met in several ways. The two most
for specific use by a cord-and-plug-connected common types of GFCI protection are in the form of
appliance, such as a refrigerator or freezer receptacles and circuit breakers (Figure 9-2). The circuit
●● habitable, finished rooms in basements breakers are available in either single-pole configura-
tion for 120-volt applications, or double-pole configu-
●● the receptacle installed in the ceiling of a garage rations for 240-volt or 120/240-volt applications.
and designed for the overhead garage door opener Figure 9-3 illustrates a Class A GFCI circuit breaker
●● the receptacle installed for a cord-connected installed on a circuit. A fault or current of 6 milliam-
appliance occupying a dedicated space, such as a peres (6 mA) or more will shut off the entire circuit. For
freezer example, a ground fault at any point on circuit A17 will
●● a receptacle installed below the sink for plug-in shut off the powder room washroom, ensuite, and main
connection of a food waste disposal bathroom receptacles to the outlets on this circuit. A
GFCI circuit breaker is similar to the wiring of an AFCI
●● a receptacle installed solely for a clock
breaker; see Figure 9-20 for a connection diagram.
●● on a second-floor balcony, such as in a condo- When a GFCI receptacle is installed, only that
minium or apartment receptacle connects on the load side of the GFCI,
The CEC does not permit GFCIs to be used to pro- and downstream receptacles are shut off when a
tect circuits containing smoke alarms and carbon ground fault of 6 mA or more occurs; see Figure 9-4.
monoxide alarms. Figure 9-1 shows that current less than 4 mA will
Section 68 gives the electrical requirements not open the circuit, as stated in Appendix B, Sec-
for swimming pools and the use of GFCI devices. tion 0, in the CEC under GFCI, Class A. Upstream
(See Unit 22.) receptacles are not affected.
180 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles

Ground-fault circuit
interrupter installed here

Connected to Ground fault here

Branch neutral at service shuts off ground-fault
circuit circuit interrupter, and
entire circuit goes off.

White coil wire from the GFCI connected to the neutral bus bar.

Figure 9-3 A GFCI as a part of the branch-circuit overcurrent device.

Ground-fault
circuit interrupter
installed here

Branch circuit Ground fault here

shuts off this outlet
only. The rest of the
circuit is not affected.
Connected to neutral at service

Figure 9-4 A GFCI as an integral part of a receptacle outlet.

Regardless of the location of the GFCI in the against shock hazard should a person make contact
circuit, it must open the circuit when the current to with two of the normal circuit conductors on the load
ground exceeds 6 mA (0.006 ampere). side of the GFCI (e.g., line and neutral).
A GFCI does not limit the magnitude of ground- Figure 9-5 shows how a ground-fault circuit
fault current. It limits the time that a ground-fault cur- interrupter operates, whereas Figure 9-6 shows the
rent will flow. A GFCI does not provide protection internal wiring of a GFCI.
Solid-state Test
Shunt trip circuitry switch

No current is induced in the

Toroidal toroidal coil because both
coil Receptacle circuit wires are carrying
equal current. The contacts
remain closed.
Load

Equal current Equal current

An imbalance of from 4
to 6 milliamperes in the
coil will cause the
Contact
contacts to open. The
opens
GFCI must open in
approximately 25
6.0 A milliseconds.
Receptacle-type GFCIs
5.994 to 5.996 A have a switching
contact in each circuit
0.004 to 0.006 A returns outside the coil conductor.

Figure 9-5 Basic principle of how a GFCI operates.

 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles 181

Push to test
Shunt Solid-state
trip circuitry

Resistor
Switching
contacts
Sensor
“Hot” conductor

120-volt source 120 volts

Grounded
conductor

Figure 9-6 GFCI internal components and connections. Receptacle-type GFCIs switch both the phase
(“hot”) and white / identified conductors. When the test button is pushed, the test current passes through
the sensor and the test button, then back around (bypasses, outside of) the sensor to the opposite circuit
conductor. This is how the imbalance is created and then monitored by the solid-state circuitry to signal
the GFCI’s contacts to open. Since both “load” currents pass through the sensor, no imbalance exists
under normal receptacle use.

The GFCI monitors the current balance between building. A GFCI receptacle also has the ability to
the hot conductor and the identified conductor. interrupt current when a fault occurs. According to
As soon as the current in the identified conductor the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) standard
is less than the current in the hot conductor, the for GFCI receptacles, the current-withstand rating is
GFCI senses this imbalance and opens the circuit. 5000 amperes, RMS symmetrical.
The imbalance indicates that part of the current in So, unless the overcurrent protective device pro-
the circuit is being diverted to some path other than tecting the circuit that feeds the GFCI receptacle can
the normal return path along the identified conduc- limit the line-to-ground fault current to a maximum
tor. Thus, if the GFCI trips off, it is an indication of of 5000 amperes RMS symmetrical, installation of
a possible shock hazard from a line-to-ground fault. any GFCI receptacles close to the main panel should
Nuisance tripping of GFCIs is known to occur. be done only after a short-circuit study has been
Sometimes this can be attributed to extremely long runs made to ensure that the available line-to-ground
of cable for the protected circuit. Consult the manufac- fault current is 5000 amperes or less.
turer’s instructions to determine if maximum lengths Without this precaution, the GFCI sensing and
for a protected circuit are recommended. Some electri- tripping mechanisms could be rendered inoperable
cians advise using non-metallic staples or non-metallic should a line-to-ground fault occur. When the GFCI
straps instead of metallic to prevent nuisance tripping. is called on to prevent injury or electrocution of a per-
son, it might not operate safely. This is a very impor-
tant reason for periodically testing all GFCI devices.
PRECAUTIONS FOR GROUND- Instructions furnished with GFCIs emphasize “oper-
FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS ate upon installation and at least monthly and record
the date and results of the test on the form provided
Unit 8 covers interrupting ratings for overcurrent by the manufacturer.” Never test a GFCI receptacle
devices. For life safety reasons, electricians and elec- by shorting out line-to-neutral. The mechanism will
trical inspectors should always concern themselves be damaged and become inoperable.
with the interrupting ratings of fuses and circuit On single-phase systems, the line-to-ground
breakers, particularly at the main service entrance fault current can exceed the line-to-line fault cur-
equipment of a residence, condo, or apartment rent. See Unit 8.
182 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles

Check fuse and circuit-breaker manufacturers’ Swimming pools also have special requirements
current-limiting charts to determine their current- for GFCI protection. These requirements are cov-
limiting ability. ered in Unit 22.
A GFCI does not protect against shock when a per- Never ground a system neutral conductor except
son touches both circuit conductors at the same time at the service equipment; otherwise, the GFCI will
(two hot wires, or one hot wire and the identified wire). be inoperative, Rule 10-210 a).
Do not reverse the line and load connections on Never connect the neutral of one circuit to the
a feedthrough GFCI. This would result in the recep- neutral of another circuit.
tacle still being energized, even though the GFCI When a GFCI feeds an isolation transformer
mechanism has tripped. (separate primary and secondary windings), as
A GFCI receptacle does not provide overload might be used for swimming pool underwater lumi-
protection for the circuit conductor. It provides naires, the GFCI will not detect any ground faults on
ground-fault protection only. the secondary of the transformer.
Long branch-circuit runs can cause nuisance
GROUND-FAULT CIRCUIT tripping of the GFCI due to leakage currents in the
INTERRUPTER IN RESIDENCE circuit wiring. GFCI receptacles at the point of use
CIRCUITS tend to minimize this problem. A circuit supplied by
a GFCI circuit breaker in the main panel could cause
In this residence, the receptacle outlets installed out- nuisance tripping if the branch circuit is long: Some
doors, in the bathrooms, on the kitchen counter near electricians say 15 m or more can cause nuisance trip-
the sink, and specific ones in the basement are pro- ping of the GFCI breaker.
tected by GFCIs (Figure 9-7). These receptacle out- In older houses that were wired with knob-
lets are connected to the circuits listed in the panel and-tube wiring or early forms of non-metallic-
schedule in Unit 8 and identified on the floor plans. sheathed cable (which did not include a bonding

Courtesy of Legrand/Pass & Seymour, Inc.

Courtesy of Legrand/Pass & Seymour, Inc.

Ground-fault
circuit interrupter
as an integral part of
a duplex grounding-
type convenience
receptacle.

Figure 9-7 (A) The front side of a ground fault circuit interrupter. (B) The reverse side of a ground fault
circuit interrupter. Note the line side connection terminals and load side connection terminals.
 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles 183

Adjacent grounded
metal cold water pipe

Bonding wire

Bonding screw

Ground clamp

Figure 9-8 In existing installations that do not have bonding wire as part of the branch-circuit wiring,
the CEC permits replacing an old-style nonbonding-type receptacle with a bonding-type receptacle,
Rule 26-702 1). The bonding terminal on the receptacle must be properly bonded. One acceptable way to
bond the bonding terminal is to run a conductor to an effectively grounded water pipe. See Rule 26-702 for
other acceptable means of properly bonding the receptacle’s bonding terminal.

conductor), nonbonding receptacles were used. 11 receptacles lose power—not a good circuit
Rule 26-702 1) allows a bonding receptacle to be layout. Attempting to locate the ground-fault
used to replace older nonbonding receptacles, pro- problem—unless it is obvious—can be very time-
vided the receptacle bonding terminal is connected consuming. Using more GFCI receptacles is gener-
to ground by one of these means: ally the more practical approach.
●● bonding to the nearest metallic cold water pipe Figure 9-10 shows how the feedthrough GFCI
(Figure 9-8) receptacle is connected to the circuit. When con-
nected in this manner, the feedthrough GFCI recep-
●● running a separate bonding conductor to the
tacle and all downstream outlets on the same circuit
system ground
will have ground-fault protection; see Figure 9-11.
●● connecting to a metallic raceway The most important factors to consider are the
Rule 26-702 2) also permits a bonding receptacle continuity of electrical power and the economy of
to replace an existing nonbonding receptacle if each the installation. Factors to consider for a GFCI recep-
replacement receptacle is protected by a Class A-type tacle to a GFCI breaker are that the GFCI receptacle
GFCI and no bonding conductors are extended from is at a single location and can be reset at the location,
the receptacle to any other outlet, Rule 26-702 3). whereas with a GFCI breaker, you protect the com-
plete branch of receptacles but must go to the panel
to reset the complete circuit if it is tripped. The cost
FEEDTHROUGH GROUND- for a receptacle of a breaker is 10 times more than
FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER the cost of a regular receptacle or breaker.

The decision to use more GFCIs rather than ­trying CAUTION: Do not connect the freezer recepta-
to protect many receptacles through one GFCI cle in the workshop or the refrigerator receptacle
becomes one of economy and practicality. in the kitchen to a GFCI-protected circuit. These
GFCI receptacles are more expensive than regular devices are not required to be connected to a
receptacles. You must make the decision for each instal- GFCI-protected circuit, since any nuisance-trip-
lation, keeping in mind that GFCI protection is a safety ping of the circuit could result in spoiled [Link]
issue recognized and clearly stated in the CEC. How- leakage current tolerances allowed by the CSA
ever, the actual circuit layout is left up to the electrician. approach the minimum trip settings of Class A
Figure 9-9 illustrates how a feedthrough GFCI GFCIs (4 to 6 mA). Nuisance-tripping can shut off
receptacle supplies many other receptacles. Should the power to the refrigerator or freezer. Coming
a ground fault occur anywhere on this circuit, all home to spoiled food is not a pleasant experience.
184 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles

Panel

Feedthrough
GFCI

Figure 9-9 One GFCI feedthrough receptacle protecting 10 other receptacles. Although this might be
an economical way to protect many receptacle outlets with only one GFCI feedthrough receptacle, the
GFCI will probably nuisance-trip because of leakage currents. Use common sense and the manufacturer’s
recommendations as to how many devices should be protected by one GFCI.

A receptacle that is installed specifically for the IDENTIFICATION, TESTING,

washing machine in a combined laundry/bathroom is AND RECORDING OF GFCI
not required to be GFCI-protected if this receptacle is RECEPTACLES
not more than 600 mm above the finished floor, behind
the appliance, and inaccessible for use with general pur- Rule 68-068 5) requires warning signs to be placed
pose portable appliances, Rule 26-704 1), Appendix B. beside switches that control circuits protected
by GFCIs. The signs will alert the user to the fact
the circuits controlled by the switches are GFCI-
protected and will specify how often the GFCIs
Feed from panel or should be tested; see Figure 9-12.
Branch upstream device
circuit Figure 9-2 shows the GFCI receptacle Test
Grounded
and Reset buttons (identified as “T” and “R” in
at service Figure 9-11). Pushing the test button places a small
ground fault on the circuit. If operating properly, the
GFCI receptacle should trip to the OFF position. The
TEST

RESET

operation is the same for the GFCI circuit breakers.

Pushing the reset button will restore power.
The detailed information and testing instructions
Equipment and devices
GFCI
connected downstream
are furnished with GFCI receptacles and GFCI circuit
feed-through breakers. Monthly testing is recommended to ensure
of this receptacle are
receptacle Load GFCI protected. that the GFCI mechanism will operate properly if a
human being is subjected to an electric shock.
Figure 9-10 Connecting a feedthrough GFCI into
a circuit. ●● Will the homeowner remember to do the
monthly testing?
 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles 185

Bonding Panel
conductor N A20

Line Line
TR
Load Load

Upstream GFCI Downstream

receptacle receptacle
The GFCI receptacle and the downstream receptacle are protected. The upstream receptacle is not.

Figure 9-11 GFCI receptacle protecting downstream receptacles.

●● Will the homeowner recognize and understand These are important questions and a possible
the purpose and function of the GFCI receptacle? reason why the CEC requires identification, and
●● Should all of the bathroom GFCI-protected why the CSA requires detailed installation and test-
receptacles be identified? ing instructions to be included in the packaging
for the GFCI receptacle or circuit breaker. Instruc-
●● Will the homeowner recognize if a receptacle
tions are not only for the electrician but also for the
is protected by a GFCI circuit breaker located
homeowner, and must be left in a conspicuous place
in an electrical panel far from the actual
so that homeowners can familiarize themselves with
receptacle?
the receptacle, its operation, and its need for testing.
Figure 9-13 shows a chart the homeowner can use to
record monthly GFCI testing.
THIS RECEPTACLE PROVIDES
PROTECTION AGAINST
ELECTRIC SHOCK
REPLACING EXISTING
RECEPTACLES
The CEC is very specific on the type of receptacle
THIS RECEPTACLE IS
permitted as a replacement for an existing recepta-
GROUND-FAULT PROTECTED
cle, Rule 26-702.

Replacing Existing Receptacles

GROUND-FAULT PROTECTED Where Bonding Means Exist
Instructions at power panel
(Refer to Figure 9-14)
When replacing an existing receptacle (Figure 9-14,
Figure 9-12 GFCI labelled signs, which should
be placed on the GFCI. Part A) where the wall box is properly bonded (E)
or where the branch-circuit wiring contains an
186 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles

OCCUPANT’S TEST RECORD

TO TEST, depress the “TEST” button; the “RESET” button should extend. Should the “RESET” button not extend, the GFCI will not protect
against electric shock. Call qualified electrician.
TO RESET, depress the “RESET” button firmly into GFCI unit until an audible click is heard. If reset properly, the RESET button will be flush
with the surface of the test button.
This label should be retained and placed in a conspicuous location to remind the occupants that for maximum protection against electric
shock, each GFCI should be tested monthly.

YEAR JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

Figure 9-13 Homeowner’s testing chart for recording GFCI testing dates, as recommended from
GFCI manufacturers.

equipment-bonding conductor (D), the replacement Do not connect the white grounded circuit con-
receptacle must be of the bonding type (B) unless ductor to the green hexagon bonding terminal of the
the replacement receptacle is of the GFCI type (C). receptacle.
In either case, be sure that only the bonding con- Do not connect the white grounded conductor to
ductor of the circuit is connected to the receptacle’s the wall box.
green hexagon bonding terminal.

White / identified
conductor

Bonding “Hot”
conductor conductor
(bare)

A B C
D
Bond Bond
Bonded
box

TEST

RESET

Figure 9-14 Where box (E) is properly bonded, an existing receptacle of the type shown in (A) must be
replaced with a bonding-type receptacle (B). It is also acceptable to replace (A) with a GFCI receptacle (C).
See the text for further discussion.
 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles 187

The white conductor is the identified conductor Ground-fault protection is still there; see
and may be connected only to the identified termi- Figure 9-6.
nal on the receptacle. ●● Do not connect a bonding conductor from the
green hexagon bonding terminal of a replace-
Replacing Existing Receptacles ment GFCI receptacle (C) to any other down-
Where Bonding Means Do Not Exist stream receptacles that are fed through the
(Refer to Figures 9-15 and 9-16) replacement GFCI receptacle, Rule 26-702 3)
(see Figure 9-16).
When replacing an existing nonbonding-type recep-
The reason this is not permitted is that if
tacle (Figure 9-15, Part A) where the box is not
someone later saw the conductor connected
bonded (E) and an equipment-bonding conductor
to the green hexagon bonding terminal of the
has not been run with the circuit conductors (D), four
downstream receptacle, they would immedi-
choices are possible for selecting the replacement
ately assume that the other end of that con-
receptacle:
ductor had been properly connected to an
1. The replacement receptacle may be a acceptable grounding point of the electrical
nonbonding type (A). system. The fact is that the so-called bond-
2. The replacement receptacle may be a GFCI ing conductor had been connected to the
type (C). replacement GFCI receptacle’s green hexa-
gon bonding terminal that was not bonded in
●● The green hexagon terminal of the GFCI
the first place. This creates a false sense of
replacement receptacle is not bonded to
security—a real shock hazard.
ground. It must be left “unconnected.” The
GFCI’s trip mechanism will operate properly 3. The replacement receptacle may be a bond-
when ground faults occur anywhere on the ing type (B) if it is protected by a Class A-type
load side of the GFCI replacement receptacle. GFCI (C), Rule 26-702.

Grounded
conductor
Replacing a receptacle No equipment
where bonding “Hot”
bonding conductor
means does not exist conductor run
with circuit D
conductors

A B C

BOND BOND

TEST

RESET

Nonbonding
Old 2-wire Bonding-type GFCI box
receptacle receptacle receptacle

Figure 9-15 Where box (E) is not bonded and a bonding conductor has not been run with the
circuit conductors (D), an existing nonbonding-type receptacle (A) may be replaced with a nonbonding-
type receptacle (A), a GFCI-type receptacle (C), a bonding-type receptacle (B) if supplied through a
GFCI receptacle (C), or a bonding-type receptacle (B) if a separate bonding conductor is run from
the receptacle to a cold water pipe or other effective bonding means, Rule 26-702.
188 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles

Equipment bonding conductor

not permitted between devices

TEST

RESET

Figure 9-16 Do not connect a bonding conductor between the above receptacles. The text explains why
this is not permitted, Rule 26-702 3).

●● The green hexagon equipment-bonding If the unit fails the self-test, it is required to go
terminal of the replacement bonding-type into a “failed-mode” and become inoperative. As a
receptacle (B) need not be connected to any result, the expected and required protection is assured.
grounding means. It may be left unconnected. ●● Class A GFCI devices are the most common.
The upstream feedthrough GFCI receptacle They are designed to
(C) trip mechanism will work properly when
– trip when the current imbalance is 6 milliam-
ground faults occur anywhere on its load
peres (6⁄1000 of an ampere) or greater.
side. Ground-fault protection is still there;
see Figure 9-6. – not trip when the current imbalance is less
than 4 milliamperes (4⁄1000 of an ampere).
4. The replacement receptacle may be a bonding
type (B) if – either trip or not trip when the current imbal-
ance is between 4 and 6 milliamperes.
●● A bonding conductor sized per Table 16 is run
between the replacement receptacle’s green – o pen very quickly, in approximately
hexagon terminal and a grounded water pipe or 25 milliseconds.
other effective bonding means, Rules 26-702 1) ●● Class B GFCI devices are pretty much obsolete.
and 10–610. The acceptable means of connect- They were designed to trip on ground faults
ing the equipment-bonding conductor to the of 20 milliamperes (20⁄1000 of an ampere)
water pipe is described in Rule 10-700. or more. They were used only for underwater
The standard requires that GFCI devices be installed swimming pool lighting installations. For this
for circuits only when there is an ungrounded system, application, Class A devices were too sensitive
Rule 26-702. The device cannot provide the intended and would nuisance-trip.
protection if there is no return path to the source. Figure 9-17(A) shows a 3-wire, multiwire circuit.
GFCI receptacles are required to be self-testing. This particular GFCI is not listed as suitable for
This means that the internal electronic circuitry tests sharing a neutral conductor in a multiwire branch
the unit for the required protection features. This circuit. Trace the current flow and note that the
test occurs several times a minute. GFCI will sense a current unbalance of 5 amperes
 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles 189

and trip OFF. In fact, as long as the unbalance exists, Figure 9-17(B) illustrates a possible violation.
it cannot be turned ON. This generally requires that all conductors of a cir-
Figures 9-17(B) and 9-17(C) show a 2-wire cir- cuit be in the same raceway or cable. Conductors
cuit. Figure 9-17(B) is an improper connection of a in nonmetallic wiring methods to be run in differ-
feed-through GFCI receptacle. Note how the GFCI ent raceways or cables if the installation will not
detects a current unbalance of 1 ampere and will create the problem of heating metal enclosures by
trip OFF. As long as the unbalance exists, the GFCI induction. This can be avoided by using all non-
receptacle will continue to trip OFF until the mis- metallic components, including cable and nonme-
connection is corrected. Figure 9-17(C) illustrates tallic boxes.
the proper connection of a GFCI receptacle.

Improper connection of single-pole GFCI circuit breaker on a multiwire branch circuit. The current flowing in and out of the GFCI
A circuit breaker is different (unbalanced) because the circuit is a multiwire circuit. This difference of current flow will cause
the GFCI breaker to trip immediately.

Conventional single-pole circuit breaker

5A
5A
5A 5A
5A 5A
N

10A 5A 5A 10A
10A
10A

GFCI or AFCI circuit breakers require a "neutral" connection.

B Improper connection: The current flowing in and out of the GFCI receptacle is different (unbalanced). The GFCI receptacle will trip
immediately. The circuit may violate NEC 300.3(B) if metallic wiring methods or boxes are used.

1A

1A
2A 1A
1A
Load

GFCI STANDARD
Standard 1A
Line Load Load
Receptacle Receptacle
RECEPT

2A 2A 1A

C Proper connection: The current flowing in and out of the GFCI receptacle is the same (balanced). The GFCI receptacle operates
properly.
2A 2A 1A

GFCI Standard
STANDARD 1A
Line Receptacle Load Receptacle
RECEPT Load

2A 2A 1A

Figure 9-17 These diagrams show improper and proper connections of GFCI circuit breakers and GFCI
receptacles.
190 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles

GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION that provide ground-fault protection when plugged

FOR CONSTRUCTION SITES into non-GFCI receptacles.
The permanent site office and any temporary
Safety on construction sites is of paramount impor- lighting and/or power panels must fully comply with
tance to workers and employers. Safety regulations the CEC. They must be inspected by the electri-
such as provincial occupational health and safety cal inspection authority before connection can take
acts and the Canada Occupational Health and place, Rule 2-004 and also complies with Section 76
Safety Regulations govern how certain aspects of a of the CEC.
building’s construction will be completed. Tempo-
rary lighting and power are both referenced in the
acts and regulations. Along with the CEC, these ARC-FAULT CIRCUIT
determine the minimum requirements for the tempo- INTERRUPTERS (AFCIs)
rary wiring on a construction site.
Because of the nature of construction sites, About 10% of fires are electrical fires. One-third of
the continual presence of shock hazard can lead to electrical fires are caused by arcing at poor connections
serious personal injury or death through electrocu- or between conductors due to a breakdown in electrical
tion. Workers often are standing in water, standing insulation. For example, if the strands in a conductor of
on damp or wet ground, or standing in contact with the cord for an electric iron break, a few strands may
steel framing members. Electric cords and cables still be touching, and there may be enough of a path to
are lying on the ground, subject to severe mechani- permit current to flow. When the iron draws current,
cal abuse. All of these conditions spell danger. arcing will occur at the point of the conductor break.
GFCI receptacles provide protection for work- The current drawn by the iron will not trip the circuit
ers in the event of a ground fault. It is important that breaker or fuse protecting the circuit but can develop
workers not attempt to bypass this protection. If the intense heat at the break in the wire. Arcing faults can
GFCI trips, it is an indication that there is a ground result from such things as poor terminations during
fault. The GFCI has just protected you from a installation, equipment failure, and the failure of con-
ground fault. If you bypass the GFCI, you no longer ductor insulation due to circuit overloading or improp-
have the protection offered by the GFCI. You may erly sized overcurrent protection. Figure 9-19 is an
not get the chance to make the same mistake twice. arc-fault circuit interrupter circuit breaker that would
Figure 9-18 illustrates some portable GFCI devices be installed in the main panel branch-circuit side.
Courtesy of Progress Lighting

Courtesy of Schneider Electric

Figure 9-18 Plug- and cord-connected portable

GFCI devices are easy to carry around and use
anywhere when working with electrical tools
and extension cords. These devices operate
independently. These inexpensive portable GFCI
in-line cords should always be used with portable Figure 9-19 An arc-fault circuit interrupter circuit
electric tools. breaker.
 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles 191

Types of Arcs 120-VAC duplex

receptacle
Arc-fault
A series arc is one that occurs when a current- breaker
carrying conductor breaks or there is a poor connection
“Hot” load wire
between the conductor and a terminal screw. The cur-
rent from a series arc follows the normal circuit path.
Parallel arcing occurs between two conductors. 120 VAC
The arcing may occur from line-to-line, line-to-
(Identified)
neutral, or line-to-ground. Parallel arcing current Neutral bus load wire
does not follow the normal circuit path. Pigtail

How AFCIs Work Bonding conductor

An AFCI is designed to sense the fluctuations in

voltage and current that may occur during an arcing Figure 9-20 Connection diagram for single-pole
sequence and de-energize the circuit if dangerous arc- AFCI circuit breaker.
ing occurs. AFCIs are designed to sense both series
and parallel arcing and can distinguish between the
arcing that occurs in the normal operation of an elec- If the AFCI is reset and it doesn’t trip, recon-
trical system and the unwanted arcing that can lead nect the appliances that were connected to the cir-
to a fire. The arc that occurs when the filament of an cuit, one at a time. If the AFCI still does not trip, it
incandescent lamp breaks, when a switch is turned is possible that you have a loose connection or that
on and off, or when appliances that are turned on are the arc cleared the fault. The installation of an AFCI
plugged into a receptacle are examples of things that device must conform to Rule 26-658.
produce arcs that are normally considered harmless.

Installing and Using AFCIs Performing an Insulation Test

AFCIs are required to protect receptacles except as An insulation test is normally performed with
per CEC Rule 26-658. Installing an AFCI recepta- an insulation tester since it applies a voltage of
cle is similar to installing a GFCI receptacle. With around 500 volts to the system. If an insulation
a single-pole AFCI breaker, the white pigtail on the tester is not available, use your multimeter on its
breaker is connected to the neutral bus in the panel, highest resistance scale. Follow all safety proce-
and the circuit conductors, black (hot) and white dures. Turn off the power to the circuit. Isolate the
(identified), are connected to the respective brass- wiring system from its source by disconnecting
and silver-coloured terminals of the AFCI breaker. the wiring from the AFCI and disconnect all loads
See Figure 9-20. from the portion of the wiring system undergoing
Some manufacturers incorporate arc-fault pro- the test. (It is best to remove all the loads on the
tection and ground-fault protection on a single circuit, particularly electronic loads.) Isolate the
breaker. ends of the wires at both ends of the run. Connect
If an AFCI detects a fault, unplug and/or discon- the insulation tester (megger) to the circuit. The
nect all appliances connected to the circuit. Reset resistance between the conductors should be one
the AFCI. If the AFCI trips with the appliances megohm or greater.
removed from the circuit, this indicates a faulty
AFCI breaker or a fault in the wiring system. Dis-
connect the wiring from the AFCI circuit breaker
and retest the breaker. If the breaker still detects a Surge Protective Devices
fault, the breaker is faulty or has been damaged by
In today’s homes we find many electronic appli-
the arc fault. Before replacing the breaker, perform
ances (e.g., televisions, stereos, personal computers,
an insulation test on the wiring system.
DVD or Blu-ray players, digital stereo equipment,
192 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles

microwave ovens), all of which contain many sen- ●● Impulse transients originate outside the build-
sitive, delicate electronic components (e.g., printed ing and are caused by utility company switch-
circuit boards, chips, microprocessors, transistors). ing, lightning, and so on.
Voltage transients, called surges or spikes, can To minimize the damaging results of these tran-
stress, degrade, and/or destroy these components; sient line surges, service equipment, panels, load
they can cause loss of memory in the equipment or centres, feeders, branch circuits, and individual
“lock up” the microprocessor. receptacle outlets can be protected with a surge
The increased complexity of electronic inte- protective device (SPD), Figure 9-21. SPDs were
grated circuits makes this equipment an easy target previously referred to as transient voltage surge
for “dirty” power that can and will affect the perfor- suppressors (TVSSs). You may find the TVSS des-
mance of the equipment. ignation on older equipment.
Voltage transients cause abnormal current An SPD contains one or more metal-oxide varis-
to flow through the sensitive electronic compo- tors (MOVs) that clamp the transients by absorbing
nents. This energy is measured in joules. A joule the major portion of the energy (joules) created by
is the energy of one ampere passing through a one- the surge, allowing only a small, safe amount of
ohm resistance for one second. In other words, a energy to enter the connected load.
joule is the amount of energy used by a one-watt The MOV clamps the transient in less than
load in one second. Hence, 1 watt-hour equals one nanosecond (one-billionth of a second) and
3600 joules. limits the voltage spike passed through to the
Line surges can be line-to-neutral, line-to- connected load to a maximum range of 400 to
ground, and line-to-line. 500 peak volts.
Typical SPD devices for homes are available
Transients as an integral part of receptacle outlets that mount
in the same wall boxes as do regular receptacles.
Transients are generally grouped into two categories: They look the same as a normal receptacle, and may
●● Ring wave transients originate within the build- have an audible alarm that sounds when an MOV
ing and are caused by welders, elevators, pho- has failed. The SPD device may also have a visual
tocopiers, motors, air conditioners, or other indication, such as an LED (light-emitting diode),
inductive loads. which glows continuously until an MOV fails. Then

Line
surge Only small portion of
“Hot” surge current
conductor passes through load.

Branch-circuit
overcurrent
protection

120-volt SPD LOAD

supply

Neutral conductor

Equipment bonding conductor

Figure 9-21 A surge protective device (SPD) absorbs and bypasses (shunts) transient currents around
the load. The MOV dissipates the surge in the form of heat.
 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles 193

Noise
Low-level non-damaging transients can also be
present. These can be caused by fluorescent lamps
and ballasts, electronic equipment in the area, X-ray
equipment, motors running or being switched on
and off, improper grounding, and so forth. Although
not physically damaging to the electronic equip-
ment, they can cause computers to lose memory or
perform wrong calculations. Their intended pro-

Courtesy of Hubbell Canada LP

gramming can malfunction.
“Noise” comes from electromagnetic interference
(EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI). EMI
is usually caused by ground currents of very low
values from motors, utility switching loads, or light-
Figure 9-22 Surge suppressor.
ning, and is transmitted through metal conduits. RFI
causes the buzzing heard on a car radio when you are
driving under a high-voltage transmission line. This
Courtesy of Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. interference radiates through the air from the source
and is picked up by the grounding system of the
building.
You can reduce this undesirable noise by install-
All Rights Reserved

ing an isolated bond receptacle, which will reduce the

number of ground reference points on a system.

Figure 9-23 Surge suppressors.

ISOLATED GROUND
RECEPTACLE
In a standard receptacle outlet (Figure 9-24), the
the LED starts to flash on and off. (See Figure 9-22.) green bonding hexagon screw, the bonding contacts,
SPD devices are also available in plug-in strips; see the yoke (strap), and the metal wall box are all con-
Figure 9-23. nected together and bonded to the building’s equip-
One SPD on a branch circuit will provide surge ment grounding system. If you picture all of the
suppression for nearby receptacles on the same bonding conductors in the building, you can see that
circuit. A practical approach in today’s installa- many outlets could be connected to ground by mul-
tion is to add a transient surge suppressor to your tiple paths.
home’s heat pump to aid in minimizing high volt- In an isolated ground receptacle, the green bond-
age and spikes from the supply utility providers. ing hexagon screw and the bonding contacts of the
This will add a longer life expectancy to the heat receptacle are isolated from the metal (strap) of the
pump. receptacle and also from the building’s bonding sys-
The code requirements for these devices tem. A separate green insulated bonding conductor
that are permanently installed are found in is then installed from the green hexagon screw on
Rule 26-420 in the CEC. In addition, CEC Rule the receptacle connected to the bonding terminal of
26-420 1) contains a requirement that surge protec- a device such that disconnection or removal of the
tion be installed at the service head supplying the device will not interfere with, or interrupt, the con-
consumer’s service. Carefully read and follow the tinuity of the bonding conductor, all the way back to
instructions furnished with the SPD. the panel, Rule 10-614 5). See Figure 9-24.
194 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles

Green hex head bonding

screw and circuit Mounting strap

Outlet box

Mounting strap

Green hex head bonding

screw and circuit

Bonding
jumper
Insulating barrier
Conduit
Normal “common”
building bond Isolated bond

Courtesy of Hubbell Canada LP

Conduit
Derived system
or service ground
Normal “common”
building bond

Conventional receptacle Isolated ground receptacle

Figure 9-24 Standard conventional receptacle and isolated ground receptacle.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. Explain the operation of a GFCI. Why are GFCI devices used?

 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles 195

2. Class A GFCI devices are set to trip when the current imbalance is .
3. What are the residential applications of GFCI receptacles?

4. The CEC requires GFCI protection for certain receptacles in the bathroom. Explain
where these are required.

5. Is it a CEC requirement to install GFCI receptacles in a fully carpeted, finished recrea-

tion room in the basement? Circle one. (Yes) (No)
6. A homeowner calls in an electrical contractor to install a separate circuit in an unfin-
ished basement for a freezer. Is a GFCI receptacle required?

7. GFCI protection is available as (a) a branch-circuit breaker GFCI, (b) a feeder-circuit

breaker GFCI, (c) an individual GFCI receptacle, (d) a feedthrough GFCI receptacle.
What type would you install for residential use? Explain your choice.

8. Extremely long circuit runs connected to a GFCI branch-circuit breaker might result
in [circle the letter of the correct answer]
a. nuisance-tripping of the GFCI
b. loss of protection
c. the need to reduce the load on the circuit
9. If a person comes into contact with the hot and grounded circuit conductors of a two-
wire branch circuit that is protected by a GFCI, will the GFCI trip? Why or why not?

10. What might happen if the line and load connections of a GFCI receptacle are reversed?
196 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles

11. May a GFCI receptacle be installed on a replacement in an old installation where the
two-wire circuit has no bonding conductor? Circle one. (Yes) (No)
12. What two types of receptacles may be used to replace a defective receptacle in
an older home with knob-and-tube wiring where a bonding means does not exist in
the box?

13. You are asked to replace a receptacle. Upon checking the wiring, you find that the wir-
ing method is conduit and that the wall box is properly bonded. The re­ceptacle is of
the older style two-wire type that does not have a bonding terminal. You remove the
old receptacle and replace it with [circle the letter of the correct answer]
a. the same type of receptacle as the type being removed
b. a receptacle of the bonding type
c. a GFCI receptacle
14. What colour are the terminals of a standard bonding-type receptacle?

15. What special shape are the bonding terminals of receptacle outlets and other devices?

16. Why are GFCI receptacles installed on construction sites?

17. What do the letters TVSS stand for?

18. Transients (surges) on a line can cause spikes or surges of energy that can damage
delicate electronic components. A TVSS device contains one or more _____________
              that bypass and absorb the energy of the transient.
 UNIT 9 Circuit Interrupters, Surge Suppressors, and Isolated Ground Receptacles 197

19. Undesirable noise on a circuit can cause computers to lock up or lose their memory,
and/or can cause erratic performance of the computer. This noise does not damage the
equipment. The two types of this noise are EMI and RFI. What do these letters mean?

20. What is the new term used for TVSS receptacles?

21. Briefly explain the difference between a GFCI breaker and an AFCI breaker.
UNIT

10
Luminaires and Ballasts
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to
●● understand luminaire terminology, such as Type
IC, Type Non-IC, suspended ceiling luminaires
recessed luminaires and surface-mounted
luminaires
●● connect recessed fixtures, both prewired and
RED SEAL non-prewired types, according to Canadian
OCCUPATIONAL Electrical Code (CEC) requirements
STANDARD ●● specify insulation clearance requirements
(RSOS)
●● discuss the importance of temperature effects
For the Red Seal exam, when planning recessed luminaire installations
note that this unit covers ●● describe thermal protection for recessed
the following RSOS task: luminaires
●● Task C-17 ●● understand Class P ballasts
●● explain energy-saving ballasts and lamps

198
 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts 199

Bringing Light to a Should one circuit have a problem, the second cir-
Building cuit would still supply power to the other outlets in
that room; see Figure 10-2.
An electrician plans circuits that are economical Some electricians consider it poor practice to
without sacrificing the quality of the installation. include outlets on different floors on the same cir-
(See Figure 10-1.) For example, some electricians cuit. Here, too, the decision can be a matter of per-
prefer to have more than one circuit feed a room. sonal choice. Some local building codes limit this
type of installation to lights at the head and foot of
a stairway.

Residential Lighting
Residential lighting is a personal thing. The home-
owner, builder, and electrical contractor must meet
to decide on what types of luminaires are to be
installed in the residence. Many variables, including
cost, personal preference, and construction obsta-
cles, must be considered.
Figure 10-1 Receptacle outlets connected back Residential lighting can be divided into four
to back can reduce the cost of the installation
groups: general, accent, task, and security lighting.
because of the short distance between the outlets.

General Lighting
General lighting provides overall illumination for an
area, such as the front entry hall, bedroom hall, and
Circuit A
garage.

Accent Lighting
Accent lighting provides a “focus” or accent on an
object or area in the home. This might be recessed
Circuit B
spotlights over the fireplace or track lighting on the
S ceiling of the living room to accent a photo, paint-
ing, or sculpture.

Task Lighting
Task lighting provides proper lighting where tasks
are performed. In the residence in our blueprints,
the fluorescent luminaires over the workbench, the
lighting inside the range hood in the kitchen, and
the recessed luminaires over the kitchen sink are
all examples.

Figure 10-2 Wiring layout showing one room

that is fed by two different circuits. If one of the
Security Lighting
circuits goes out, the other circuit still provides
electricity to the room.
Security lighting generally includes outdoor light-
ing (such as post lights, wall luminaires walkway
200 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts

lighting) and all other lighting used for security and luminaire manufacturer must conform. Common
safety. Security lighting is often provided by the nor- luminaire types are as shown in the table below.
mal types of luminaires found in the typical residence.
A visit to the showroom of one of the many FLUORESCENT LED INCANDESCENT
manufacturers or distributors of luminaires offers the ● Surface ● Surface ● Surface
buyer an opportunity to select from hundreds—in ● Recessed ● Recessed ● Recessed
some cases, thousands—of luminaires. Most of the ● Suspended ● Suspended ● Suspended
finer lighting showrooms are staffed with individuals ceiling ceiling ceiling
highly qualified to make recommendations to home-
owners so they get the most value for their money.
IMPORTANT: Always carefully read the label on
The lighting provided throughout this residence
the luminaire. The information will help you conform
conforms to accepted trade practice. Certainly,
to Section 30 of the CEC and complete a safe installa-
many other variations are possible. For the purposes
tion. The label provides such information as
of studying an entire wiring installation for the resi-
dence, all load calculations, wiring diagrams, and so ●● for wall mount only
on use the luminaire selection indicated on the plans ●● ceiling mount only
and in the specifications. ●● maximum lamp wattage
●● type of lamp
●● access above ceiling required
TYPES OF LUMINAIRES ●● suitable for air handling use
This unit provides an in-depth coverage of recessed ●● for chain or hook suspension only
luminaires commonly installed in homes. It also ●● suitable for operation in ambient temperatures
considers other types of available luminaires. not exceeding     °C
CEC Section 30 sets out the requirements for the
●● for line volt–amperes, multiply lamp wattage
installation of luminaires. Although not involved in
by 1.25
the actual manufacture of luminaires, the electrician
must “meet code” when installing luminaires, includ- ●● suitable for use in suspended ceilings
ing mounting, supporting, grounding, live-parts ●● suitable for use in non-insulated ceilings
exposure, insulation clearances, supply conductor ●● suitable for use in insulated ceilings
types, and maximum lamp wattages.
●● suitable for damp locations (such as bathrooms
The homeowner, interior designer, architect, or
and under eaves)
electrician has thousands of luminaires from which
to choose. Specific needs, space requirements, and ●● suitable for wet locations
price considerations are among the factors to con- ●● suitable for use as a raceway
sider when selecting luminaires. ●● suitable for mounting on low-density cellulose
It is essential for the electrician to know early fibreboard
in the roughing-in stage of wiring a house what
●● for supply connections, use wire rated for at
types of luminaires are to be installed, particularly
least       °C
for recessed-type luminaires. The electrician must
work closely with the general building contractor, ●● not for use in dwellings
carpenter, plumber, heating contractor, and the other ●● thermally protected luminaire
building tradespeople to ensure that requirements ●● Type IC
for location; proper and adequate support; and clear-
●● Type Non-IC
ances from piping, ducts, combustible material, and
insulation are complied with during construction. ●● inherently protected
The Canadian Standards Association (CSA) The CEC, Part II, and the luminaire manufactur-
Group provides the safety standards to which a ers’ catalogues and literature are excellent sources
 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts 201

of information. The CSA tests, lists, and labels

luminaires for conformance to its standards and to
the CEC, Parts I and II.

Recessed Lighting
Recessed luminaires (Figures 10-3A and 10-3B) in Open Closed

particular have an inherent heat problem. Therefore, Figure 10-4 Recessed luminaire thermal cutout.
they must be suitable for the intended application
and must be properly installed.
To protect against overheating, the CSA requires
that some types of recessed luminaires be equipped
with an integral thermal protector; see Figure 10-4.
This device shuts the luminaire off if it overheats,
then resets once the luminaire cools down.
Because of the potential fire hazard when mount-
ing luminaires near combustible materials, Rule
30-200 1) states that luminaires must be equipped with

Tyler Olson/[Link]
shades or guards to limit the temperature to which
such materials may be exposed to a maximum of
90°C. If lights are installed over combustible material,
each luminaire must be controlled by an individual wall

Figure 10-5 When mounted on low-density ceiling

fibreboard, surface-mounted fluorescent luminaires
must be installed so as to limit the temperature of
the fibreboard to less than 90°C. See Rule 30-200 1).
Courtesy of Cooper Industries

switch if it is located less than 2.5 m above the floor, or

if the luminaire is not guarded so that the lamps cannot
be readily removed or damaged, Rule 30-200 3).
Figure 10-5 shows a fluorescent luminaire mounted
Figure 10-3A  Typical recessed luminaire. on low-density cellulose fibreboard treated with fire-
retarding chemicals to meet specific standards.
All branch-circuit conductors used for wiring a
ceiling outlet box must have insulation approved to
90°C (e.g., NMD 90), but their ampacity is de-rated
to that of 60°C wire, Table 2, Column 3, Rule 30-408.
This applies to most residential applications.

CEC REQUIREMENTS
FOR INSTALLING RECESSED
LUMINAIRES

Figure 10-3B Recessed luminaire mounted in CEC Rules 30-308, 30-408, and 30-900 through
ceiling. 30-912 list requirements for the installation and
construction of recessed fixtures. Of particular
202 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts

The junction box is placed at least 300 mm from

the luminaire, so heat radiated from the luminaire
cannot overheat the wires in the junction box. Con-
ductors rated for higher temperatures must run in
a metal raceway between the luminaire and the
junction box. This raceway must be 450 mm to
2 m long. Any heat conducted from the luminaire
along the metal raceway will be reduced before
reaching the junction box. Many recessed lumi-
naires are factory-equipped with a flexible metal
Figure 10-6 Roughing-in box of a recessed
raceway containing high-temperature (1508C)
luminaire with mounting brackets and junction box.
wires that meet the requirements of Rule 30-910 1).
Figure 10-7 illustrates clearance requirements for
installing recessed luminaires.
importance are the restrictions on conductor tempera-
ture ratings, luminaire clearances from combustible
materials, and maximum lamp wattages. Recessed Suspended Ceiling Luminaires
luminaires generate a great deal of heat within
the enclosure, making them a fire hazard if they In most residential applications, these luminaires
are not wired and installed properly. Figure 10-6 would still be classified as recessed and the CEC
shows the roughing-in box of a recessed luminaire requirement of a minimum of 13 mm clearance
with mounting brackets and junction box. from combustible material must be maintained,
The branch-circuit conductors are run to the Rule 30-902.
junction box for the recessed luminaire. Here they Figure 10-8 shows the typical layout look at the
are connected to conductors whose insulation can suspended ceiling in the recreation room of these
handle the temperature at the luminaire lampholder. premises with the recessed luminaires mounted.

All recessed luminaires must be marked IC At least 450 mm, but not more than
and approved where they are blanketed by 2 m, of suitable raceway with
thermal insulation, Rule 30-906. conductors having insulation suitable
Branch-circuit conductors with insulation Junction box for temperature encountered, If 12 mm flex, may not
suitable for temperature encountered at least 30 cm Rule 30-910 3). be more than 2 m,
may be run directly into approved from luminaire, Rule 30-910 3).
junction box on prewired luminaires, Rule 30-910 4).
Rule 30-910 2).

Non-Type IC
Type IC This box must be luminaire
luminaire accessible, without
Rule 30-910 4) a) and integral
Rule 12-3014. junction box
Text © 2021 Canadian Standards Association

• Type IC, no minimum Keep insulation away from luminaire

clearance unless luminaire is suitable for
• Permitted to be enveloped in direct contact with insulation,
insulation Rule 30-902.
• Junction box accessible
through luminaire housing

Figure 10-7 Clearance requirements for installing recessed luminaires.

 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts 203

EMT, non-metallic-sheathed cable, armoured cable,

or whatever type of wiring method is acceptable by
the governing electrical code, with outlet boxes stra-
tegically placed above the ceiling near the intended
location of the luminaires. Then make a flexible con-
nection between the outlet box and the luminaire.
The flexible connection can be up to 2 m long
and is usually made by installing either of the fol-
lowing items:
●● Flexible metal conduit with conductors suitable
for the temperature requirement as stated on
the luminaire label, usually 90°C, Rule 30-910
Figure 10-8 Suspended ceiling luminaires.
1). Rule 12-1010 3) specifies that when flex-
ibility is required, flexible metal conduit does
not require a clip within 300 mm of the outlet
box except where the metal conduit is fished,
and no lengths over 900 mm at terminals where
Support of Suspended Ceiling flexibility is necessary.
Luminaires ●● Armoured cable containing conductors suitable
When framing members of a suspended ceiling grid for the temperature requirements as stated on the
are used to support luminaires, the grid installer luminaire label, usually 90°C. Be sure to staple
must securely fasten all members together and to the armoured cable within 300 mm of the outlet
the building structure. All suspended ceiling fix- box. See Rules 12-510 1) and 12-618 and
tures must be securely fastened to the ceiling grid Figures 10-9A, 10-9B, and 10-9C.
members by bolts, screws, or rivets. Most luminaire It is necessary for the electrician who is install-
manufacturers supply special clips suitable for fas- ing recessed luminaires to work with the installer of
tening the luminaire to the grid. The luminaire must the insulation to be sure that the clearances around
NEVER be supported by the ceiling tile. the luminaire are maintained. If the ceiling has insu-
Some inspection authorities interpret the intent lation blanketing the luminaire, it must be a Type IC
of Rule 30-302 to mean that the recessed luminaire luminaire, Rule 30-906 (Figure 10-10). Clearances
must be supported independent of a suspended ceil- are required if the luminaire is non-IC as well.
ing structure. This is usually accomplished by using a When the only access to the junction box is through
chain attached to the luminaire and the building struc- the luminaire opening, the opening must be at least
ture above the ceiling. Large fixtures such as fluores- 180 cm2 with no dimension less than 15 cm unless
cents require at least two chain supports, which is a the entire luminaire and junction box can be removed
requirement of the National Building Code. from the ceiling, Rule 30-910 5). Many small,
The logic behind all of the “securely fastening” low-voltage spotlights installed in today’s homes do
requirements is that in the event of a major problem not meet this requirement. Therefore, an alternative
(e.g., earthquake or fire) the luminaires will not fall
down and injure someone.

Connecting Suspended Ceiling

Luminaires
Steel

The most common way to connect suspended ceiling Figure 10-9A  Clips for supporting flexible metal
lay-in luminaires is to complete all of the wiring above conduit or AC90 cable.
the suspended ceiling using normal wiring methods,
204 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts

Flexible metal conduit requires

separate bonding conductor,
Rule 10–610 3) Secure within
300 mm of outlet box

12 mm flexible metal
conduit not over 2 m long
Outlet box
Tie wires

Suspended ceiling
luminaire

Suspended ceiling
Conductors in flexible metal conduit
must be suitable for temperature
requirements as listed on luminaire
label. Usually 90°C minimum.

Figure 10-9B A suspended ceiling luminaire supplied by not over 2 m of flexible metal conduit.
Rule 12-1010 3) b) indicates that if the conduit is less than 900 mm long, it does not require clipping.
Remember that flexible metal conduit cannot be more than 2 m long, Rule 30-910 3).

Secure within 300 mm

of outlet box

Armoured cable not

over 2 m long Outlet box
Tie wires

Suspended
ceiling luminaire
Suspended ceiling Armoured cable with
Conductors in armoured cable equipment bonding
must be suitable for temperature conductor per
requirements as listed on luminaire label. Rule 10-610 1) b)

Figure 10-9C A suspended ceiling luminaire supplied by armoured cable not over 2 m long. Cable must
be secured (stapled) within 300 mm of the outlet box, Rule 12-510 1) a).

access method would be required, such as through an The cables to be installed in the residence have
attic, or a removable luminaire must be installed. 90°C insulation. If the temperature will exceed this
Prewired luminaires do not require additional value, conductors with other types of insulation
wiring; see Figure 10-11. Rule 30-910 8) states that must be installed, Table 19 and Table D1.
branch-circuit wiring shall not be passed through an
outlet box that is an integral part of an incandescent
luminaire unless the luminaire is approved and marked BALLAST PROTECTION
for through wiring.
For a recessed luminaire that is not prewired, the A fluorescent ballast is a regulating component of the
electrician must check the luminaire for a label indicat- luminaire which limits the current and provides the
ing what cable insulation temperature rating is required. proper voltage to start the lamps.
 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts 205

All approved fluorescent ballasts installed

indoors (except simple reactance-type ballasts) for
both new and replacement installations must have
THERMAL INSULATION
built-in thermal protection from the manufacturer;
see Figure 10-12. Ballasts provided with built-in
X thermal protection are listed by the CSA as Class P
ballasts. Under normal conditions, the Class P bal-
X RECESSED last has a case temperature not exceeding 908C. The
LUMINAIRE thermal protector must open within 2 hours when
the case temperature reaches 1108C.
THERMAL INSULA TION

Some Class P ballasts also have a non-resetting

“X” = a distance of at least 76 mm. fuse integral with the capacitor to protect against
Insulation above the luminaire must not
trap heat. Insulation must be installed capacitor leakage and violent rupture. The Class P
to permit free air circulation, unless the ballast’s internal thermal protector will disconnect
luminaire is identified for installation
directly in thermal insulation, this also the ballast from the circuit in the event of a high
applies to non-IC luminaires, temperature. Excessive temperatures can be caused
Rules 30-902, 30-904, and 30-906.
by abnormal voltage and improper installation, such
as being covered with insulation.
The reason for thermal protection is to reduce
the fire hazard from an overheated ballast. Ballasts
Figure 10-10 Clearances for recessed luminaires
installed near thermal insulation. Luminaires must can overheat if they are shorted, grounded, covered
be CSA-approved for use in thermal insulation, with insulation, or lacking air circulation.
Rule 30-906.

Figure 10-11 Installation permissible only with prewired recessed luminaires with approved junction
boxes Rule 30-910 8).

Figure 10-12 Fluorescent ballasts installed on new or replacement installations are required to have
built-in thermal protection. These ballasts are called Class P ballasts, CEC, Part II.
206 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts

Fluorescent Lamp Dimming LUMINAIRE VOLTAGE

LIMITATIONS
In the case of compact fluorescent lighting, even the
lamps must be specified (four-pin instead of two- The maximum voltage allowed for residential lumi-
pin) specifically to work with the dimming system. naires is 150 volts between a conductor and ground,
The fluorescent lamp is a negative-resistive load that Rules 2-110 and 30-102 1).
requires a ballast to control the electrical input for Rule 30-706 makes a further restriction in stating
starting and maintaining operation. Dimming con- that for dwelling occupancies, no electrical discharge
trols designed to reduce voltage input, as in the case lighting equipment shall be used if it operates with an
of incandescent dimming, will extinguish the arc in open-circuit voltage over 300 volts; see Figure 10-13.
addition to reducing lamp life. Fluorescent and neon lights are examples of dis-
Fluorescent lamps can be dimmed from con- charge lighting. Rule 30-706 addresses the increasing
trols designed for standard magnetic ballasts, mag- use of neon lighting for decorative purposes. Some
netic dimming ballasts, and electronic dimming important CSA and CEC requirements for installing
ballasts. Like a low-voltage incandescent lighting recessed luminaires are summarized in Figure 10-14.
system, a fluorescent dimming control must be
matched to the technology for which it is speci- LED versus Incandescent
fied. Standard magnetic fluorescent dimmers pro- Brightness
vide full range dimming to 40% of rated lumen
output. When considering energy-efficient lighting electricians
Magnetic dimming ballasts, available for only are sometimes asked which is brighter, incandescent
30-watt and 40-watt lamps, can provide full range lights or light emitting diode lights (LED). The incan-
dimming to 10% of rated lumen output. Electronic descent light works by running a current of electricity
ballasts for dimming compact fluorescent lamps can through a small piece of wire that has a low resistance.
provide full range dimming to 5% of rated lumen Any time a low resistance path exists when there is a
output. voltage potential difference, a high current will flow—
Electronic dimming ballasts for long fluores- that is, a large number of electrons will move towards
cent lamps can provide full range dimming to 1% of the lower energy like air jetting out of a balloon. A
rated lumen output. To date, few manufacturers of large number of electrons moving means that amperes
long fluorescent dimming ballasts and controls offer of electricity are flowing, and if amperes of electricity
reliable full range dimming to 1% of rated lumen move through a substance with resistance, it will get
output. Several new manufacturers of fluorescent hot! When a substance gets hot, the particles that make
dimming ballasts and controls have recently entered it up move more. When the particles move more, they
the market, and several more are expected to come take up more space on average. Warmer substances
on the market. usually have increased resistance to electricity as the

Neon tubing

120-volt supply Open circuit secondary

TRANSFORMER
voltage: 15 000 volts

Figure 10-13 It is NOT permitted to use neon luminaires in residences where the open circuit voltage is
over 300 volts, unless there is no access to live parts when changing the lamps, Rule 30-706.
 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts 207

Surface When mounted on combustible material, the luminaire must be

controlled by a wall switch.
Temperature that combustible material may be subjected
to must be less than 90°C, Rule 30-200 1).
See Figure 10-5.
Read the label on the luminaire for special requirements or
limitations (e.g., approved for end-to-end assembly).

Recessed Suitable for recessed installation.

May be mounted in suspended ceilings if provided with
appropriate hardware for mounting to or in suspended
ceilings.
Read luminaire label for special requirements or limitations.
See Figures 10−6 through 10−11.
Must be Type IC if ceiling is insulated.

Suspended For installation in a suspended grid only where the lay-in

tiles are not fastened in place, and where the tie wires,
T bars, ceiling tiles, and other components directly associ-
ated with the grid are not part of the building structure.
The luminaires are intended to be mounted in the ceiling open-
ings (lay-in tiles).
Read luminaire label or instructions furnished with the
luminaire for special requirements or limitations.

Fluorescent

If branch circuit conduc-

tors are within 75 mm of Surface For surface mounting only.
ballast, use 90°C conduc- Read luminaire label or instructions furnished with the
tors, Rule 30-308 3). luminaire for special requirements or limitations.
Do not use as raceway
unless permitted.
Rule 30-310 1) .
Luminaires All fluorescent ballasts Recessed Type IC
installed indoors must May be installed in insulated ceilings where insulation and
See Section 30. be Class P type, CEC- other combustible materials may be in direct contact with
Will be marked with Part II. and over the top of the luminaire.
insulation tempera- If luminaire will be in contact Has integral thermal protection that deactivates the lamp
ture rating required with the ceiling insulation. if the luminaire is mis-lamped, Figure 10-4.
for supply conduc- Is marked “Notice—thermally protected luminaire. Blinking
tors if over 60°C. light may indicate improper lamp wattage or improper lamp
size.”
Read the label and
May also be marked with other conditions that will cause
instructions fur-
Incandescent overheating and will result in the lamp blinking.
nished with all May be used in non-insulated ceilings.
luminaires. Usually are low-wattage luminaires.
Read luminaire label or instructions furnished with the
luminaire for special requirements or limitations.
See Figure 10-3A and/or 10-3B.

Type Non-IC
For installation in uninsulated ceilings.
If installed in insulated ceilings, keep insulation away from
sides and top of luminaire to avoid trapping the heat pro-
duced by the luminaire.
Unless otherwise marked, keep luminaire at least 13 mm away
from combustible material (like wood joists) except at sup-
port points.
Read luminaire label or instructions furnished with the
luminaire for special requirements or limitations.

Inherently protected
If marked “Inherently protected,” the luminaire is so designed
that the surface temperature will not exceed 90°C even if
the luminaire is covered with insulation, is mis-lamped or
over-lamped. An example might be “double-walled” con-
struction.
These luminaires are not thermally protected.
Read luminaire label or instructions furnished with the
luminaire for special requirements or limitations.

For installation in a suspended grid only where the lay-in

Suspended
tiles are not fastened in place, and where the tie wires,
T bars, ceiling tiles, and other components directly associ-
ated with the grid are not part of the building structure.
The luminaires are not intended to be mounted in ceiling openings.
Read luminaire label or instructions furnished with the
luminaire for special requirements or limitations. See Figure 10-5.

Figure 10-14 Some of the most important CSA and CEC requirements for recessed luminaires. Always
refer to the CSA standards, the CEC, and the manufacturer’s label and/or instructions furnished with the
luminaire.
208 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts

extra kinetic activity of its particles impede the passage infrared photons. If the objective is to create illumi-
of electrons moving through it. This is not always true nation, then the photons being produced must have
in semiconductors, but it is true for all metals. an energy and frequency useful to humans. The light
Creating light through incandescence using elec- emitting diode is a semiconductor that is made from
tricity involves running current through a small metal P-type material and N-type material; when a volt-
wire until it glows white-hot. The hotter things get, age is applied, electrons flow from the N-type to
the more they radiate heat, and incandescent bulbs are the P-type material, which releases energy as visible
no exception. Once any conductor heats up enough, it light. No heat is needed, but even an LED will warm
will start to emit visible radiation in the form of light. up in use. The operating temperature inside the semi-
The tungsten filament in an incandescent bulb can conductor is usually 60 to 80°C—way less than the
reach extremely high temperatures (2500 to 2700°K, incandescent bulb—thus resulting in a very good
often higher), and this is why they make light. Not energy efficiency of power. See Table 10-1.
that 70% of the energy that an incandescent light con- LED bulbs require much less wattage than
sumes makes heat, while the other 30% makes light. incandescent light bulbs, which is why LEDs are
The mechanism by which all light is produced is a more energy efficient and longer lasting.
quantum mechanical one. In incandescent lights, the The far left of Table 10-1 shows the lumens
metal of the tungsten filament resists the passage of (brightness) of intensity, and the other columns
a high number of electrons in a very short time. This compare how many watts of power each light bulb
resistance causes the metal to heat up, which increases type requires to produce that level of brightness.
the resistance of the tungsten and makes more heat The lower the wattage needed, the better.
until the temperature of the metal hits a point where its Now compare the cost of a 60-watt replacement
resistance to the flow of electrons through it stabilizes incandescent bulb to the other bulbs listed; from
and limits the increase of electrons. 2020 rates, the average cost is 17 cents per kWh in
The thermal energy in an incandescent metal Canada. See Table 10-2.
excites the electrons in the atoms of tungsten, pushing In the long run, the winner in this comparison is
them to high-energy orbits around the atomic nuclei. the LED. In addition to LED’s cost savings, govern-
These higher orbits are unstable, so the electrons tend ment-backed rebates also exist in some scenarios for
to dissipate their acquired energy by creating a packet Energy Star products.
with a specific quanta of energy in it called a photon. Table 10-3 provides a layout of the LEDs used
What we call light is thought to be a stream of these in this premises.
wave/particles being thrown out by the overheated Keyless luminaires are standard fixtures that are
atoms of the metal. The colour of the light is an indi- typical in areas that require light. They are made
cation of how much energy needs to be carried away, of plastic or ceramic material and use an A19 bulb.
with higher energy packets being bluer and lower Keyless means that they require a switch to turn them
energy being redder. When the electron falls back to on or off. A pull-chain type requires constant power,
the lower energy orbit, its energy is carried by a photon and the switch is the pull chain on the luminaire.
and radiated away, or in other words, light is produced.
Given the ratio of light to heat in an incandescent light,
it is easy to see why incandescent light has been largely Table 10-1
replaced by the more efficient LED technology.
Lumen and wattage comparison chart.
LEDs, on the other hand, do not work by heating
Lumens LED Incandescent
up a wire. LEDs emit light by electroluminescence. Brightness Watts Watts
Electroluminescence also produces light by the same 400–500 6–7 W 40 W
mechanism, elevating the orbital shells of electrons,
650–850 7–10 W 60 W
but it does so at a much lower temperature. Lower
1000–1400 12–13 W 75 W
voltages and lower currents mean less power is lost
1450–17001 14–20 W 100 W
creating undesired and wasteful photons outside the
27001 25–28 W 150 W
visible spectrum. What we feel as heat is actually
 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts 209

Table 10-2
Cost of LED versus incandescent.
LED versus Incandescent Cost Incandescent LED
Watts used 60 W 7W
Average cost of bulb $1 $4 or less
Average life span 1200 hours 25 000 hours
Bulbs needed for 25 000 hours 21 1
Total purchase price of bulbs over 20 years $21 $4
Cost of electricity (25 000 hrs @ $0.17 per kWh) $191.60 $34
(2020 Energy cost)
Total estimated cost over 20 years $212.60 $38

Table 10-3
A comparison of common lighting options.
Basement Bulb Required
Quantity Location Type Cost/Unit Cost LED Total Current
11 Recreation room Pot lights $25.00 $275.00 9W 3K .825 A
1 Recreation room closet Pot lights $25.00 $25.00 9W 3K .075 A
3 Recreation wet bar Pot lights $25.00 $75.00 9W 3K .225 A
2 Workshop Keyless luminaires $2.00 $4.00 9W 3K .15 A
3 Workshop Pull-chain luminaire $3.00 $9.00 .225 A
2 Workshop LED strip style $40.00 $80.00 35W 3K .583 A

Outside Garage Bulb Required

Quantity Location Type Cost/Unit Cost LED Total Current
7 Front of garage Pot light soffit mount $25.00 $175.00 9W 3K .525 A
1 Back door entrance Coach light wall mount $28.00 $28.00 9W 3K .075 A
1 Front area Post light $145.00 $145.00 9W 3K .075 A

Inside Garage Bulb Required

Quantity Location Type Cost/Unit Cost LED Total Current
2 Ceiling luminaires Keyless luminaires $2.00 $4.00 9W 3K .15 A
Front Porch Entrance AND OUTSIDE Bulb Required
Quantity Location Type Cost/Unit Cost LED Total Current
2 Front porch Pot light $25.00 $50.00 9W 3K .15 A
3 East side of house Pot light soffit mount $25.00 $75.00 9W 3K .225 A
4 Front area Pot light soffit mount $25.00 $100.00 9W 3K .3 A
5 Back of house Pot light soffit mount $25.00 $125.00 9W 3K .375 A
1 West side of house Pot light soffit mount $25.00 $25.00 9W 3K .075 A

(continued)
210 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts

Table 10-3 (Continued )

Front Entrance Area and Stairs to Basement Bulb Required
Quantity Location Type Cost/Unit Cost LED Total Current
2 Entry ceiling foyer Pot light $25.00 $50.00 9W 3K .15 A
1 Stairs landing area Ceiling luminaire pot LED $25.00 $25.00 9W 3K .075 A
1 Closet luminaire Pot light $25.00 $25.00 9W 3K .075A

SERVICE ENTRANCE, Powder Room, and Laundry Room Bulb Required

Quantity Location Type Cost/Unit Cost LED Total Current
3 Rear hall near garage Pot light $25.00 $75.00 9W 3K 0.225 A
2 Laundry room Pot LED $25.00 $50.00 9W 3K .15 A
1 Washroom Wall luminaire $45.00 $45.00 7W 3K .06 A
Kitchen Bulb Required
Quantity Location Type Cost/Unit Cost LED Total Current
8 Kitchen Area Pot light $25.00 $200.00 9W 3K .6 A
1 Sink area Pot light $25.00 $25.00 9W 3K .075 A
Living Room Bulb Required
Quantity Location Type Cost/Unit Cost LED Total Current
8 Living room ceiling Pot light $25.00 $200.00 9W 3K .6 A
2 Fireplace area Pot light $25.00 $50.00 9W 3K .15 A
Bedrooms Bulb Required
Quantity Location Type Cost/Unit Cost LED Total Current
3 Hallway area near Pot light $25.00 $75.00 9W 3K .225 A
bedrooms
4 Study / bedroom Pot light $25.00 $100.00 9W 3K .3 A
1 Study / bedroom Fan with light combo $99.00 $99.00 2 @ 7W 0.133 A
E17
1 Study / bedroom closet Pot light $25.00 $25.00 9W 3K .075 A
4 Master bedroom Pot light $25.00 $100.00 9W 3K .3 A
1 Master bedroom Fan with light combo $99.00 $99.00 2 @ 7W 0.133 A
E17
2 Master bedroom closets Pot light $25.00 $50.00 9W 3K .15 A
1 Ensuite bathroom Shower pot $25.00 $25.00 9W 3K .075 A
1 Ensuite bathroom Fan with light combo $99.00 $99.00 2@ 7W .133 A
E17
1 Main bathroom Fan with light combo $99.00 $99.00 2 @ 7W 0.133 A
E17
1 Ensuite bathroom Wall luminaire $45.00 $45.00 7W 3K .06 A
1 Main bathroom Wall luminaire $16.00 $16.00 7W E17 .116 A
1 Main bathroom Shower pot $25.00 $25.00 9W 3K .075 A
4 Front bedroom Pot light $25.00 $100.00 9W 3K .3 A
1 Front bedroom Fan with light combo $99.00 $99.00 2 @ 7W 0.133 A
E17
1 Front bedroom closet Pot light $25.00 $25.00 9W 3K .075 A
 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts 211

Table 10-4
A comparison of various lamps’ characteristics. These characteristics are typical and vary by
manufacturer. Always verify application with lamp and luminaire manufacturer’s label, literature, and
installation instructions.
TYPE OF LUMEN COLOUR AND LIFE
LAMP PER WATT DIMMING APPLICATION (APPROX. HOURS) TYPICAL SHAPES

Incandescent 14.3 Yes Warm and natural. 1000 hours. Standard, spots,
Great for general Depends on type floods, decorative,
lighting. Brand names of lamp. Lamp life flame, tubes, globes,
have various trade typically is based PAR (similar to stan-
names for their lamps, on operating the dard spots and floods
such as Reveal, Soft lamp an average but stronger).
White, etc. of three hours Use rough service
of operation per bulbs where there is
start. vibration, like garage
door openers and
ceiling fans.
Base types: cande-
labra, intermediate,
medium, mogul.
Halogen 24.6 Yes Brilliant white. Excel- 4000 hours. PAR spots and floods,
Are more lent for accent and Lamp life typically flame, crystal, mini-
efficient than task lighting. Are filled is based on oper- reflector spots.
conventional with halogen gas and ating the lamp an Base types: cande-
incandescent floods and have an average of three labra, intermediate,
lamps. More inner lamp, allowing hours of operation and medium.
lumen output the filament to run per start.
hotter (whiter). Can replace most
per watt. incandescent lamps.
Fluorescent T12, 82 Yes, but only Warm and deluxe 6000 to 24 000 Straight, U-tube,
T8, 92 40-watt rapid warm white, cool and hours. circular.
start lamps deluxe cool white, Average life with Single pin and dou-
T5, 104 using special plus many other lamps turned off ble pin.
dimming shades of white. and restarted once
ballast. See Great for general every 12 operat-
Unit 13. lighting, such as a ing hours.
recreation room. The
higher the K rating,
the cooler (whiter) the
colour rendition.
Light-emitting 100+ Yes, if so Colour temperatures 40 000+ Tubular. Same as
diodes (LEDs): Varies by marked. of 3000K, 3500K, Varies by typical fluorescent
Tubular manufacturer. Check manu- 4100K, and 5000K. manufacturer. lamps.
facturer’s Generally may be May or may not
instruc- used as replacement require replacement
tions and for typical fluorescent of existing ballast.
warnings. lamps. Check manu-
facturer’s instructions
and warnings.
Light-emitting >94 Yes, if so Bright white and soft 25 000 to 50 000 Shapes: Standard
diodes (LEDs) An LED lamp marked. white. Excellent colour hours. “A,” candle, spots.
contains a Check manu- rendition. Base types: Medium
cluster (array) facturer’s Very desirable for and candelabra.
of many indi- instruc- home, office, and out- Can replace incan-
vidual LEDs tions and door lighting. descent lamps.
to produce warnings.
this lumen
output.
212 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts

Lamp Efficacy Fluorescent lamps are available in a wide range

of “coolness” to “warmth.” Warm fluorescent lamps
A lumen is a measurement of visible light output bring out the red tones. Cool fluorescent lamps tend
from a lamp. One lumen on 1 ft2 of surface produces to give a person’s skin a pale appearance.
1 footcandle. Another term you will hear in light- Fluorescent lamps might be marked daylight
ing is efficacy. Efficacy is the ratio of light output D (very cool), cool white CW (cool), white W
from a lamp to the electric power it consumes and is (moderate), and warm white WW (warm). These
measured in lumens per watt (lm/w). In other words, categories break down further into a deluxe X
efficacy is a measurement of input to output. series (i.e., deluxe warm white—deluxe cool
Examples: white), specification SP series, and specification
●● Lamp #1: 100-watt incandescent lamp produces deluxe SPX series.
1,200 lumens at rated voltage, which equates to Typical colour temperature ratings for lamps
12 lm/w. are 2800K (incandescent), 3000K (halogen), 4100K
●● Lamp #2: 100-watt halogen lamp produces (cool white fluorescent), and 5000K (fluorescent
2,460 lumens at rated voltage, which equates to that simulates daylight). Note that a halogen lamp is
24.6 lm/w. “whiter” than a typical incandescent lamp.
Catalogues from lamp manufacturers provide
●● Lamp #3: An LED lamp equivalent to a 60-watt detailed information about lamp characteristics.
incandescent lamp is rated 800 lumens but Fluorescent lamps and ballasts are a moving target.
consumes only 10.5 watts which equates to In recent years, there have been dramatic improve-
76 lm/w. ments in both lamps and electronic ballast efficiency.
The more lumens per watt, the greater the effi- First, the now-antiquated T12 fluorescent lamps
cacy of the lamp. See Table 10-4. (40 watts) were replaced by energy-saving T8 fluo-
It is obvious that typical incandescent lamps are rescent lamps. These original T8 lamps are becom-
very inefficient compared to fluorescent and LED ing a thing of the past. The latest T8 high-efficiency,
lamps. There is a dramatic trend toward the use of energy-saving (25 watts versus 32 watts) lamps have
LED lamps: more light for less energy, and less an expected 50% longer life than the original T8
energy means lower electric bills! lamps.
The newer T8 lamps use approximately 40%
less energy than the older T12 lamps. At $0.06 per
Lamp Colour Temperature kWh, one manufacturer claims a savings of $27.00
Lamp colour temperature is rated in Kelvin degrees, per lamp over the life (30 000 hours) of the lamp.
and the term is used to describe the colour of the At $0.10 cents per kWh, the savings is said to be
lamp light. In incandescent lamps, colour tempera- $45.00 per lamp over the life of the lamp. Using the
ture is related to the physical temperature of the newer T8 lamps on new installations and as replace-
filament. ments for existing installations makes the payback
In fluorescent lamps where no hot filament is time pretty attractive. One electronic ballast can
involved, colour temperature is related to the light operate up to four lamps, whereas the older style
as though the fluorescent discharge were operating magnetic ballast could operate only two lamps. For
at a given colour temperature. The lower the Kelvin a three- or four-lamp luminaire, one ballast instead
degrees, the “warmer” the colour tone. Conversely, of two results in quite a saving. Some electronic bal-
the higher the Kelvin degrees, the “cooler” the lasts can operate six lamps.
colour tone.
Tungsten filament halogen lamps have a gas LED Lighting
filling and an inner coating that reflects heat. This
keeps the filament hot with less electricity. Their It has been said that the incandescent bulb is from
light output is “whiter.” They are more expensive the dinosaur age, having been around since Thomas
than the standard incandescent lamp. Edison applied for a patent on May 4, 1880.
 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts 213

Coming on strong is a new concept for lighting

Courtesy Hubbell Lighting Outdoor & Industrial

that uses light-emitting diodes (LEDs) as its source
of light. It is called “solid-state lighting.” LED light-
ing has very low power consumption, very high
lumen per watt output, and typically a long life—a
winning combination!
LEDs are solid-state devices that have been
around since 1962. When connected to a DC source,
the electrons in the LED smash together, creating
light. Think of an LED as a tiny light bulb, but with
no filament. Figure 10-15(A) is a typical LED that
luminaire manufacturers can cluster in their lumi-
naires to obtain the amount of light output they are
looking for. Figure 10-15(B) is a high light output
LED that lighting manufacturers can use in their
luminaires.
Because the lumens per watt for LEDs is contin-
ually on the rise, which in turn means lower energy
consumption, LED lighting has literally become the
norm for all types of lighting. Figure 10-16 An assortment of light bulbs
LEDs for lighting are a rather recent concept. (lamps) powered by a number of individual light-
emitting diodes (LEDs). These lamps screw into a
Because the lumens per watt in LEDs are on the standard medium Edison-base lampholder.
increase and the cost of LED lamps is declining, it is
now making sense to use LEDs in luminaires. Indi-
vidual LEDs are rather small. Putting a cluster (called available with the standard Edison base and cande-
an array) of LEDs together (i.e., 5, 20, 30, 60, 120) labra base to replace existing incandescent lamps.
produces a lot of light. The result is an LED bulb, The light is white, but with different LEDs other
usable in a luminaire the same as a typical medium colours are available. Today’s LEDs last 60 000 to
Edison-base lamp holder incandescent bulb. Figure 100 000 hours. They have no filament to burn out,
10-16 shows three different styles of LED lamps. can withstand vibration and rough usage, contain
Lamp manufacturers have come out with many no mercury, operate better when cool, lose life
different types of lamps for accent, task, con- and lumen output at extremely high temperatures,
ventional shape, flood, spots, and so on. They are and can operate at temperatures as high as 240°F
(240°C). The lumen output of LEDs slowly declines
over time. The decline varies. The industry seems
to be settling on a lumen output rating of 70% after
50 000 hours of use.
LEDs use less electricity per lumen output than
Source: Courtesy Philips Lumileds

incandescent or fluorescent lamps. LEDs are much

more efficient in converting electrical energy to
lighting energy than most other lighting sources.
The purpose of lighting is to have illumination—not
A B heat. Heat is a waste by-product that generally is
undesirable, costs money, and has to be disposed of.
Figure 10-15 Some types of LEDs that luminaire Some LEDs may be dimmed, whereas oth-
manufacturers can use in their product. (A) is a
typical single light-emitting diode (LED). (B) is a
ers may not. Check with the manufacturer of the
high light output LED. lamp (bulb) to verify the dimming or no dimming
capability.
214 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts

LEDs start instantly with no flickering. LEDs put ●● The total cost (lamps and cost of electricity) for
out directional light as compared to the conventional the incandescent lamps was $400 compared to
incandescent lamp that shoots light out in almost all the cost of operating the LED lamp, which was
directions. A study was recently made to compare an $47.
LED’s predicted life of 60 000 hours (that’s almost The lumen output of LED lamps is often greater
7 years of continuous burning, or 21 years at 8 hours when compared to CFLs, producing up to
per day of usage) to a standard 60-watt incandescent 90+ lm/w. This is expected to improve to 150 lm/w
lamp that has a rated life of 1000 hours. Over the in the future. Compare the LED lumen output to
60 000-hour life (study done on July 2015): a typical incandescent lamp that has a lumen out-
●● Sixty standard incandescent lamps would be put of approximately 14 lm/w. That’s a significant
used compared to one LED bulb. increase in lumens per watt! Remember, you pay
●● The standard incandescent lamps would use for watts!
3600 kilowatt-hours, resulting in the cost of Many luminaires come complete with the proper
electricity at $360. The LED lamp would use LED lamps. The electrician must simply select the
120 kilowatt-hours, resulting in a cost of elec- style or light output for the task or scene. Check out
tricity at $12. lighting showrooms or home centres.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. Is it permissible to install a recessed luminaires directly against wood ceiling joists?

Explain why or why not.

2. If a recessed luminaire without an approved junction box is installed, what extra wiring
must be provided?

3. Recessed luminaires are available for installation in direct contact with thermal insulation.
These luminaires bear the CSA mark “Type .”
4. Unless specially designed, what must all recessed luminaires have provided by the factory
manufacturers when in contact with insulation?
.
5. Plans require the installation of a surface-mounted fluorescent luminaire on the ceiling of
a recreation room that is finished with low-density ceiling fibreboard. What sort of mark
would you look for on the label of the luminaire

6. If a recessed luminaire bears no marking that it is listed for branch-circuit feedthrough

wiring, is it permitted to run the circuit conductors from luminaire to luminaire? What
section of the CEC covers this?

7. Fluorescent ballasts for all indoor applications must be type. These

ballasts contain internal protection to protect against overheating.
 UNIT 10 Luminaires and Ballasts 215

8. You are called on to install a number of luminaires in a suspended ceiling. The ceiling
will be dropped about 200 mm from the ceiling joists. Briefly explain how you might
go about wiring these luminaires.

9. The CEC places a maximum open circuit voltage on lighting equipment in

homes. [Circle the correct answer.] The maximum voltage is (150) (300)
(600) (750) (1000). Where in the CEC is this voltage maximum referenced?

10. What metal can handle temperatures of 2600K for an incandescent bulb?

11. What does the term lamp efficacy mean?

12. When was the incandescent bulb developed, and who was the inventor?
UNIT

11
Branch Circuits for the
Bedrooms, Study, and
Halls
Objectives
RED SEAL
After studying this unit, you should be able to
OCCUPATIONAL
STANDARD ●● explain the factors that influence the grouping of
outlets into circuits
(RSOS)
●● estimate loads for the outlets of a circuit
For the Red Seal exam,
●● draw a cable layout and a wiring diagram based
note that this unit covers
on information given in the residence plans,
the following RSOS tasks:
specifications, and Canadian Electrical Code
●● Task A-3 (CEC) requirements
●● Task C-16 ●● select the proper wall box for a particular
●● Task C-17 installation
●● explain how wall boxes are bonded to ground
●● list the requirements for the installation of
luminaires in clothes closets
●● make connections for three-way and four-way
switches

216
 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls 217

GROUPING OUTLETS good wiring practices, and common sense. A good

wiring practice is to
A branch circuit is all of the wiring from the final
●● divide all loads as evenly as possible among the
overcurrent device in the system to the point of
circuits
utilization. The grouping of outlets into branch
circuits must conform to CEC standards and good ●● ensure that no more than 12 outlets are placed
wiring practices. There are many possible combi- on a two-wire circuit
nations of groupings of outlets. In most residen- ●● keep cable runs as short as possible
tial installations, the electrician usually does the ●● use boxes that have adequate space for conduc-
circuit planning. In larger, more costly residences, tors and devices.
the architect may complete the circuit layout and
include it on the plans. In either case, the electri- See Rules 8-104 and 8-304.
cian must ensure that the branch circuits conform
with the CEC. ESTIMATING LOADS
As per Rule 26-658 1), all receptacles 20 amperes FOR OUTLETS
or less are to be AFCI protected in dwelling units.
It is not stated that luminaires cannot be connected When calculating loads, remember that
to arc-fault circuit interrupter (AFCI) branch cir- Volts 3 Amperes 5 Volt–amperes
cuits, though in the past it was often not done. Due to Yet, many times we say that
the additional cost of running separate branch Volts 3 Amperes 5 Watts
circuits for lighting, they are connected in this
dwelling. It should be noted that some luminaires or What we really mean to say is that
fans connected to these AFCI branch circuits may Volts 3 Amperes 3 Power factor
cause nuisance trips, though newer AFCI protection 5 Watts (true power)
devices make this much less likely. Some electri-
In a pure resistive load, such as a simple light
cians will insist upon separating lighting and recep-
bulb, a toaster, an iron, or a resistance electric heat-
tacles. Additional cost is the only drawback of this
ing element, the power factor is 100%. Then
practice.
Volts 3 Amperes 3 1 5 Watts (true power)
With transformers, motors, ballasts, and other
CABLE RUNS “inductive” loads, wattage is not necessarily the
Studying the wiring diagrams throughout this text, same as volt–amperes. Therefore, to be sure that
you will find many ways to run the cables and branch-circuit wiring has adequate ampacity and to
make up the circuit connections. Sizing of boxes provide for feeder sizing and service calculations,
that will conform to the CEC for the number of the volt–amperes calculation would reflect the true
wires and devices is covered in great detail. When current draw of the alternating current (AC) load.
a circuit is run through a recessed luminaire like
the type shown in Figure 10-3B in Unit 10, that EXAMPLE
recessed luminaire must be approved for “through
Calculate (a) the wattage and (b) the
wiring,” a subject discussed in Unit 10. When you
volt–amperes of a 120-volt, 10-ampere
are unsure whether a luminaire can accommodate
resistive load.
the extra wiring for a run to another luminaire or
some other part of the circuit, it is best to design
Solution
the circuit so that the wiring ends at the recessed
luminaire with just the conductors needed to a. 120 3 10 3 1 5 1200 watts true power
connect it. b. 120 3 10           5 1200 volt–amperes
The grouping of outlets into circuits must satisfy (apparent power)
the requirements of the CEC, local building codes,
218 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls

EXAMPLE highest reported causes of electrical fires. Rarely, if ever,

Calculate (a) the wattage and (b) the volt–
would all of the outlets be fully loaded at the same time.
amperes of a 120-volt, 10-ampere motor
load at 50% power factor. Circuit Loading Guidelines
(Rules 8-104 6) and 8-304)
Solution
a. 120 3 10 3 0.5 5 600 watts (true power) A good rule to follow in residential wiring is never load
the circuit to more than 80% of its capacity. A 15-ampere,
b. 120 3 10 5 1200 volt–amperes
120-volt branch circuit would be calculated as
(apparent power)
15 3 0.80 5 12 amperes
or
In most Code calculations, watts are used in cal- 12 amperes 3 120 volts 5 1440 volt–amperes
culating the demand on service or feeder conductors
because the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Certain luminaires such as recessed lights and flu-
requires that all electrical equipment be marked with orescent lights, are marked with their maximum lamp
a wattage or kilowatt rating, Rule 2-100 1) e). wattage; fluorescent luminaires also list their ballast
Most residential loads are resistive; therefore, current. Other luminaires however, are not marked, and
the power factor of 1 gives the same value to the the electrician does not know the size of the lamps that
demand watts as volt–amperes, and kW ratings are will be installed in them. Furthermore, the electrician
equivalent to kVA values. Therefore, this text uses does not know the exact load that will be connected to
the terms wattage and volt–amperes when calculat- the receptacle outlets as it is difficult to anticipate what
ing and/or estimating loads. the homeowner may do after the installation is com-
Building plans typically do not specify the ratings plete. The room in which the outlets are located gives
in watts for the outlets shown. When planning circuits, some indication of their possible uses. Therefore, the
the electrician must consider the types of luminaires that electrician should plan the circuits accordingly.
may be used at the various outlets, based on the general
Load Estimation
uses of the receptacle outlets in the typical dwelling.
The CEC specifies that the maximum number of The electrician can estimate the lamp loads in the
receptacle and lighting outlets to any 2-wire branch circuit luminaires. By determining the lamp wattages that
in a residence is 12 outlets on a 15 A circuit or 16 outlets on will probably be needed to provide adequate light-
a 20 A circuit. This is based on the fused switch or circuit ing for an area, many lighting manufacturers publish
breaker having a marked continuous operation at 80%. useful information and recommendations in cata-
If the fused switch or circuit breaker is marked logues and on the Internet.
for 100% continuous operation, it is permitted to
install 15 outlets on a 15 A circuit or 20 outlets on a Estimating the Number of Outlets by
20 A circuit, Rule 8-304 1). Assigning an Amperage Value to Each
When a receptacle is used as an outlet, a duplex
shall be considered as 1 outlet, a triplex receptacle One method of determining the number of lighting
as 1.5 outlets, and a quadplex receptacle shall be and receptacle outlets to be included on one circuit
considered as 2 outlets, Rule 8-304 2). is to assign a value of 1 ampere to each outlet, to a
However, Rule 8-304 3) could permit more outlets if total of 12 amperes. Thus, a total of 12 outlets can
the connected load is known, provided the load current be included in a 15-ampere circuit.
does not exceed the continuous operation marking on Although the CEC limits the number of outlets
the fused switch or circuit breaker protecting the circuit. on one circuit to 12 outlets, local building codes
The layout of the receptacles on the walls must sat- may specify fewer. Therefore, before planning any
isfy Rules 26-720, 26-722, and 26-724. This should vir- circuits, the electrician must check the local build-
tually eliminate the use of extension cords, one of the ing code requirements.
 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls 219

All outlets will not be required to deliver one 3. Alternatively, add up the actual loading of out-
ampere. For example, closet lights, night-lights, and lets in a circuit, verify that the overcurrent device
clocks use only a small portion of the allowable cur- is not loaded to more than 80% of its capacity,
rent. A 60-watt closet light draws less than 1 ampere: and the number may, in this instance, exceed
12, Rule 8-304 3). Including outlets for smoke
W 60 alarms is a good example of a situation in which
I5 5 5 0.5 amperes
E 120 the number could exceed 12. The wattage of a
120-volt smoke alarm is approximately ½ watt.
If low-wattage luminaires, such as LED, are
connected to a circuit, it is quite possible that 15 or Methods 1 and 3 are laid out in the CEC. Method 2
more lighting outlets could be connected to the cir- is only a guideline because the general lighting
cuit without a problem. On the other hand, if the load loads in homes are so varied. As the electrician lays
consists of high-wattage lamps, the number of out- out the circuits of a residence, these guidelines will
lets would be less. In this residence, estimated loads generally provide adequate circuitry for both light-
were calculated at 120 volt–amperes (one ampere) ing outlets and receptacle outlets that are intended
for those receptacle outlets intended for general use. for general lighting, not appliance-circuit receptacle
To estimate the number of 15-ampere lighting branch outlets. Be practical. Consider the diversity of uses.
circuits desired for a new residence where the total count
of lighting and receptacle outlets is, for example, 80: Divide Loads Evenly
80 It is mandatory to divide loads evenly among the cir-
5 6.7 (seven 15-ampere branch circuits)
12 cuits to avoid overloading some while leaving others
lightly loaded. At a main service panel, do not connect
We divide by 12 because each outlet counts as 1
the branch circuits and feeders to result in, for instance,
ampere. Twelve amperes is 80%, or the maximum for a
120 amperes on Phase A and 40 amperes on Phase B.
15-ampere circuit, as 15 3 80% 5 12, Rule 8-304 1) a).
Look at the probable and/or calculated loads to attain a
In residential occupancies there is great diver-
balance of loads on the A phase and the B phase.
sity in the loading of lighting branch circuits.
CAUTION: This procedure for estimating
the number of lighting and receptacle outlets SYMBOLS
is for branch circuits only. Where the branch
The symbols used on the cable layouts in this text-
circuits in the kitchen, laundry area, and other
book are the same as those found in the legend of
areas supply heavy concentrations of plug-in
symbols on the electrical plans for the residence.
appliances, the 1-ampere-per-receptacle-outlet
Pictorial illustrations are used on all wiring dia-
assumption is not applicable. These circuits are
grams in this text to make it easy for the reader to
discussed in more detail in Units 14 through 16.
understand the diagrams; see Figure 11-1.
Review of How to Determine the
Minimum Number of Lighting Circuits DRAWING THE WIRING
1. Connect 12 outlets per circuit. The required DIAGRAM OF A LIGHTING CIRCUIT
number of outlets should be divided by 12; this The electrician must convert information from the
will show the minimum number of branch cir- building plans to the form most useful for planning
cuits, Rule 8-304 1) a). an installation that is economical, conforms to all
2. Estimate the probable loading for each light- code regulations, and follows good wiring practice.
ing and receptacle outlet (do not include the To do this, the electrician makes a cable layout and
small-appliance receptacle outlets covered by a wiring diagram to clearly show each wire and all
Rules 26-720 through 26-724). Try to have a connections in the circuit.
total load not over 1440 volt–amperes for each After many years of experience, skilled elec-
15-ampere lighting circuit. tricians will not always prepare wiring diagrams
220 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls

Duplex receptacle, Duplex split-wired Ceiling or Pilot

outlet grounding type receptacle, outlet wall luminaire light
grounding type outlet

Single-pole 3-way 4-way

switch switch switch

Figure 11-1 Pictorial illustrations used on wiring diagrams in this text.

for most residential circuitry because they have not truly a neutral conductor unless it is part of
the ability to “think” the connections through. An a multiwire (three-wire) circuit.
unskilled individual should make detailed wiring 5. Draw a line from the ungrounded (“hot”) termi-
diagrams. nal on the panel to connect to each single-pole
The following steps will guide you in preparing switch and unswitched outlet. Connect to com-
wiring diagrams. (You will be required to draw wir- mon terminal of one three-way switch only.
ing diagrams in later units of this textbook.) As you
6. Show splices where the various wires are to be con-
work on the wiring diagrams of the many circuits
nected. In the wiring diagram, the terminal of a
provided in this text, note that the receptacles are
switch or outlet may be used for the junction point
positioned exactly as though you were standing in
of wires. However, the CEC does not permit more
the centre of the room. The CEC does not address
than one wire to be connected to a terminal unless
receptacle orientation on the wall. Many electricians
the terminal is a type approved for more than one
install receptacles with the ground pin on top. This
conductor. The standard screw-type terminal is not
provides for an added measure of safety. If a plug
approved for more than one wire.
cap was not fully plugged in and a metal faceplate
or other electrically conductive object should fall,
it would hit the ground pin and not the live plug
blades.
S3
1. Refer to the plans and make a cable layout of all
lighting and receptacle outlets; see Figure 11-2.
2. Draw a wiring diagram showing the traveller
conductors for all three-way switches, if any;
see Figure 11-3.
3. Draw a line between each switch and the outlet
it controls. For three-way switches, do this for
S3
one switch only. This is the “switch leg.”
4. Draw a line from the neutral bus bar on the Panel

lighting panel to each current-consuming out-

let. This line may pass through switch boxes,
but must not be connected to any switches. This
is the white grounded circuit conductor, often Figure 11-2 Typical cable layout.
called the neutral or identified conductor. It is
 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls 221

3-way switch

Traveller
conductors (Step 2)
(Step 3)

Splice

(Step 4)

(Step 5) (Step 5)

(Step 4)

3-way
switch
Lighting
panel Splice

Figure 11-3 Wiring diagram of circuit shown in Figure 11-2. Used in the master bedroom switched
receptacles. For simplicity, no bonding is shown.

7. Mark the colour of the conductors; see Receptacle BRANCH-CIRCUIT

­Fig­ure 11-3. Note that the colours selected— Master and Study Bedroom
black (B), white (W), and red (R)—are the colours
of two- and three-conductor cables. You could use The receptacles in the master bedroom and liv-
coloured pens or markers for different conductors ing room have split-switched receptacles. Half the
when drawing the wiring diagram. Write the let- receptacle (normally the bottom half) is controlled
ter of the colour beside each conductor. Note this by a wall switch in the room, and the other half is
on the diagram, Rule 4-022. energized continuously. Receptacles in a dwell-
ing must be tamper-resistant, as per Rule 26-706.
These receptacles must be clearly marked “Tamper-
Estimating Cable Lengths
Resistant” or “TR.”
The length of cable needed to complete an installa- Radios, televisions, and other electrical items
tion can be estimated roughly. It may be possible to not intended to be controlled by the wall switch will
run the cable in a straight line directly from one wall be plugged into the unswitched (“hot” continuously)
outlet to another. However, obstacles such as steel half of the duplex receptacle.
columns, sheet-metal ductwork, and plumbing may The recessed closet light is controlled by a
require the cable routing to follow a longer path. single-pole switch outside and to the right of the
To ensure that the estimate is not short, make closet door.
all measurements “square.” For example, measure The study/bedroom circuit is fed from A11
from the ceiling outlet straight to the wall, and (Figure 11-4).
finally measure straight over to the wall outlet. Add Checking the actual electrical plans, we find
300 mm of cable at each cable termination. This one television outlet and one telephone outlet are to
allowance is for the 150 mm of conductor needed to be installed in each bedroom. Television and tele-
make connections in the junction and outlet boxes. phones are discussed in Unit 23. Table 11-1 sum-
Check the plans carefully to determine where the marizes the outlets in the front bedroom and the
cables can be routed. estimated load.
222 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls

Figure 11-4 Cable layout for study/bedroom, Circuit A11.

Rule 26-704 2) states that all outdoor receptacles

Table 11-1
2.5 m or less above ground or grade level shall be
Study/bedroom receptacles: outlet count and Class A-type GFCI-protected. Ordinary receptacles
estimated load, Circuit A11. may be installed above 2.5 m, but must incorporate a
VOLT– weatherproof cover. Cover plates marked “Wet Loca-
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY WATTS AMPERES tion Only When Cover Closed” shall be installed for
Receptacles @ 4 480 480 receptacles facing downward at an angle of 458 or less
120 watts each
from horizontal, located at least 1 m above finished
Totals 4 480 480
grade, and not in a wet location, Rule 26-708 3).

DETERMINING THE WALL

BRANCH-CIRCUIT A24 BOX SIZE
OUTSIDE RECEPTACLES
The electrician must consider several factors when
Branch-Circuit A24 is a 15-ampere circuit provid- determining the size of the wall box:
ing power to the outside receptacle outlets for this ●● the number of conductors entering the box
house. The receptacles are Class A-type Ground-
Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI)–protected with a ●● the types of boxes available
weatherproof cover on the receptacle outlet box. ●● the space allowed for the installation of the box
 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls 223

Sizing Boxes According to the Use the volume of the box plus the space pro-
Number of Conductors in a Box vided by plaster rings, extension rings, and raised
(Rule 12-3034) covers to determine the total available volume.
If the box contains one or more devices, such as
To find the proper box size for any location, you luminaire studs or hickeys, the number of conduc-
must determine the total number of insulated con- tors permitted in the box shall be one less than
ductors entering the box (Figure 11-5). For example: shown in Table 23 for each type of device contained
1.  Count the No. 14 AWG circuit in the box.
conductors 2131358
2. A
 dd one conductor for each pair
of wire connectors 2 BONDING OF WALL BOXES
3. A  dd two conductors for the The specifications for the residence state that all
receptacle 2 metal boxes are to be bonded. The bare conductor
                Total 12 conductors included in non-metallic-sheathed cables (NMSC) or
The pigtails connected to the receptacle need armoured cable (AC90) is connected to the bonding
not be counted when determining the correct box screw in the box and, for receptacles or switches with
size (Figure 11-5). Rule 12-3034 1) c) states, “an bonding screws, carries on from the connection in the
insulated conductor of which no part leaves the box box to the bonding screw on the device. This con-
shall not be counted.” ductor is used only to bond the metal box. This bare
Once you know the total number of conductors, bonding conductor must not be used as a current-
refer to CEC Table 23 and Figure 3-16 in Unit 3 to carrying conductor, since severe shocks can result.
determine the box suitable for the conductors. According to CEC Diagram 1 and Rule
26-700, grounding-type receptacles must be
The “pigtails” connected to the receptacle need installed on 15-ampere and 20-ampere branch
not be counted when determining the correct
box size, Rule 12-3034 1) c). circuits. Figure 11-5 shows how to attach the
bonding conductor to the proper terminal on the
receptacle.

POSITIONING OF SPLIT-
CIRCUIT RECEPTACLES
The receptacle outlet shown in the living room
includes a split-switched receptacle. The top por-
tion of such a receptacle is hot at all times, and the
bottom portion is controlled by the wall switch (see
Figure 11-6). The electrician should wire the bot-
tom of the receptacle as the switched section. Then,
when the lamp is plugged into the switched bottom
portion of the receptacle, the cord does not hang in
front of the unswitched section. This unswitched
section can be used for a clock, vacuum cleaner,
Figure 11-5 The tab must be broken between radio, stereo, CD player, personal computer, televi-
the red and black conductor terminals. The box sion, or some other appliance where a switch con-
size is determined according to the number of trol is not necessary or desirable.
conductors. This box would be required to be
102 3 38 mm, (4” x 2-1/8”) complete with a When mounting split-switched receptacles hori-
plaster ring for the receptacle. zontally, locate the switched portion to the right.
224 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls

LUMINAIRES IN CLOTHES
CLOSETS
Clothing, boxes, and other material normally
stored on closet shelves are potential fire hazards.
These items may ignite on contact with the hot
surface of exposed lamps. Rule 30-204 gives very
specific rules about the location and types of lumi-
Figure 11-6 Split-switched wiring for receptacles
naires permitted in clothes closets (Figure 11-7).
in the bedroom. Luminaires should not be installed above closet
shelves. Luminaires may be installed on the ceiling
in front of a shelf or above a closet door. See Figure
11-8 for suggested clearances.
POSITIONING OF The first-floor electrical drawing shows recessed
RECEPTACLES NEAR ELECTRIC luminaires being used in the closets as well as other
BASEBOARD HEATING areas of the house. These luminaires should be Type
IC, approved for insulated ceiling use, Rule 30-906.
When laying out receptacles in residential appli- See Figure 11-9. Figure 11-9A shows the type of
cations, ensure that any cords plugged into the LED pot light that will be used for the entire house.
receptacles do not pass over heat-generating The shower LED pot will require a gasket that pre-
sources such as baseboard heaters, or hot air, vents moisture from entering the luminaire.
hot water, or steam registers, Rule 26-722 a) in When installed, these luminaires will be covered
Appendix B. with a vapour barrier and blanketed with insulation.
Unit 17 discusses installing electric baseboard Because heat is not dissipated from insulation-blanketed
heating units and their relative positions below luminaires as rapidly as from other types of luminaires,
receptacle outlets. a higher operating temperature will exist. Type IC

Permitted by
Rule 30-204 2)
Recessed Recessed incandescent
fluorescent luminaire with completely
enclosed lamp(s)
Surface-mounted incandescent
luminaire with completely
enclosed lamp(s)

Not permitted by
Rule 30-204 2)

Unprotected
fluorescent Incandescent
open or partially
open lamps

Pendant Pendant
luminaires lampholders

Figure 11-7 Types of luminaires permitted in clothes closets. The CEC does not permit pendant luminaires,
pendant lampholders, or luminaires with bare bulbs to be installed in clothes closets. Present-day luminaires
are the LED type, reducing the possibility of overheating.
 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls 225

Location of luminaires in closets,

Section 30-204, showing recommended
clearance between luminaires and
storage area. Luminaires must be of the
enclosed type. 300 mm
Storage Area
May install surface-mounted
incandescent luminaires on ceiling 300 mm
or on wall above door.

Storage Area
May install surface-mounted fluorescent 300 mm
luminaires on ceiling or on wall above
door. Luminaire must be of the enclosed
type.
300 mm

Storage Area
May install recessed incandescent 150 mm
luminaires that have the lamps totally
enclosed, or enclosed recessed
fluorescent luminaires on ceiling or on 150 mm
wall above door. If ceiling is insulated, a
luminaire Type IC would be required.

Figure 11-8 Suggested clearances between luminaires and the storage shelf area. The CEC does not
specify exact clearances. Present-day luminaires are the LED type, reducing the possibility of overheating.
INTERPRO/[Link]

[Link]/adavino

Figure 11-9 (A) An LED light luminaire. (B) A recessed pot light.
226 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls

luminaires include a thermal cutout device to prevent

the maximum temperature from being exceeded.

LIGHTING BRANCH-CIRCUIT
A14 FOR MASTER BEDROOM,
FRONT BEDROOM, AND
BATHROOMS
The residence panel schedules show that the master
bedroom, front bedroom, and hall receptacles are
supplied by Circuit A14. Because Panel A is located
in the southeast corner of the basement workshop, the
home run for Circuit A14 is brought into the closest
device box to the panel. This would be brought to the
front bedroom two-gang switch device box near the
entrance of the front bedroom. Again, it is a matter of
studying the circuit to determine the best choice for
conservation of cable or conduit in these runs and to
economically select the correct size of wall boxes.
Figure 11-10 and Table 11-2 show a sample
device and wiring layout for Circuit A14. The master
bedroom, front bedroom, and hall receptacles power
from this circuit.
In addition, an outdoor GFCI weatherproof
receptacle is located adjacent to the sliding door and
is connected to Circuit A24, which also includes the
other outdoor receptacles.
Because there are two entrances to this room, the
split-switched receptacle outlets are controlled by two
three-way switches and one four-way switch. One switch
is located next to the sliding door; one switch is on the Figure 11-10 Cable layout for master bedroom,
front bedroom, and hall receptacles, Circuit A14.
far wall between the three-way near the sliding door
where the bed will be located. The use of split-switched
receptacles offers the advantage of having switch control
of the receptacles, one on either side of the bed. on the number of conductors entering the box.
Beside the door to the hall is a three-way switch The cable layout in the master bedroom near the
that goes with the other one by the sliding door, for sliding door shows that three cables enter the box
the pot lights, and a speed switch for the ceiling fan. next to the sliding glass door, for a total of seven

SLIDING GLASS DOORS

Table 11-2
CEC Rule 26-724 c) covers spacing for receptacle out-
Master bedroom, front bedroom, and hall.
lets on walls where sliding glass doors are installed. Outlet count and estimated load, Circuit A14.
VOLT–
SELECTION OF BOXES DESCRIPTION QUANTITY WATTS AMPERES

In the master bedroom, the electrician may decide Receptacles @

120 watts each 10 1200 1200
to install a three-gang welded box or three sectional
Totals 10 1200 1200
device boxes ganged together. The size of box depends
 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls 227

conductors, each No. 14 AWG circuit conductors. LIGHTING CIRCUIT FOR

Rule 12-3034 2) c) stipulates that the number of STUDY, EXTERIOR REAR, LIVING
conductors shall be reduced by two if the box con- ROOM, AND HALL LIGHTS
tains one or more flush devices mounted on a single
strap. Therefore, the number of conductors to be The study/bedroom circuit feeds the bedroom,
included in determining proper box size is eight cir- which provides excellent space for a home office or
cuit conductors plus two conductors for each switch, den. Should it become necessary to have a third bed-
for a total of 12 wires. room, the changeover is easily done.
Circuit A18 originates at main Panel A. This cir-
cuit feeds the study/bedroom at the closet switch. From
1. Add the circuit conductors 2 1 3 1 3 5 8
this point, the circuit feeds the closet recessed light and
2. Add two for each switch     (2 1 2) 5 4 then on to the paddle fan/light. Here it splits to feed the
Total       12 hallway light and from there, you have the rear exterior
lighting, which is controlled from each sliding door to
Now look at the Quick-Check Box Selection the rear of the home. The other leg goes to the switches
Guide, Figure 3-16 in Unit 3, and select a box or by the doors leading to the living room. Figure 11-11
a combination of gangable device boxes that are shows the cable layout for Circuit A18.
permitted to hold 12 conductors. For example, you The black and white conductors carry the live circuit,
can gang two 76 3 51 3 64-mm (3 3 2 3 2½-in.) and the red conductor is the switch return for the con-
device boxes together (8 3 2 5 16 No. 14 AWG trol of the switched half of the split-circuit receptacles.
conductors allowed). These switched receptacles are fed from Circuit B16.

Figure 11-11 Cable layout for study/bedroom, exterior rear, living room, and hall lights, Circuit A18. For
receptacles in study, see Figure 11-4.
228 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls

Table 11-3
Study/bedroom: Outlet count and estimated
load, Circuit A18
VOLT–
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY WATTS AMPERES
Closet luminaire 1 9 9

Tom Grundy/[Link]
Recessed luminaire 4 36 36
Paddle fan/light 1 14 14
Totals 6 59 59

Table 11-3 summarizes the outlets and estimated Figure 11-12 Paddle fan.
load for the study/bedroom.

are remote control. The receiver is mounted inside

PADDLE FANS the outlet box; see Figure 11-14.
A single-pole remote-control switch is used to con- Safely supporting a paddle fan involves
trol the power to the fan and light. The fan speed is ●● the actual weight of the fan
remotely controlled with three speeds (low, medium, ●● the twisting and turning motion when started
and high). Paddle fans have become extremely pop- ●● vibration
ular in recent years (see Figure 11-12). These fans
rotate slowly (60 to 250 rpm for home-type fans). ●● the ceiling outlet box shall be marked for fan
The air currents they create can save energy during support, Rule 12-3000 9)
the heating season because they destratify the warm To ensure the safe support of the fan, you should
air at the ceiling, bringing it down to living levels. In not use outlet boxes as the sole support of ceiling
the summer, even with air conditioning, a slight cir- (paddle) fans unless the CSA approves and lists
culation of air creates a wind-chill factor and causes them for this purpose. The CSA also requires that
a person to feel cooler. the motor housing have a cable attached to an inde-
Residential paddle fans usually extend 305 mm pendent means of support to prevent the fan from
or less below the ceiling; so, for 2.44 m ceilings, falling if it vibrates loose from its mounting screws.
the fan blades are about 229 to 254 mm below the Always check the instructions furnished with
ceiling; see Figure 11-13. The fans in this location the ceiling fan to be sure that the mounting and

Outlet box or outlet

box system must be
marked “Acceptable
for fan support.”

Ceiling Canopy

Motor
Fan blades

Figure 11-13 Typical mounting of a ceiling paddle fan.

 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls 229

Outlet box

3-wire connectors

Green (or bare)

Black
White

Red
White
Green

Receiver

Antenna

Figure 11-14 Ceiling fan receiver module; connect red to power black connection and white to white.
Remember to connect green bonding wire to supply bond wire. Use wire connectors for connection.

supporting methods will be safe. Boxes that are per- Figure 11-16 shows an adjustable-type ceiling fan
mitted to support a fan are marked “Acceptable for hanger installed. This type of hanger is useful when
fan support.” there is no access to the ceiling cavity, since it can be
Rule 12-3010 8) requires that a pendant ceiling fan installed through the hole where the outlet box will
be mounted securely attached directly to the building be mounted and adjusted to tighten against the joists.
structure or attached by a bar hanger securely atttached The electrician must install an outlet box where
to the building structure. If the luminaire weighs more the fan or fan/light is to be located. Since the fan is
than 16 kg, Rule 12-3010 9) the outlet box must be quite heavy, the box must be solidly secured to the
supported independently of the outlet box. ceiling joist. One type of certified fan outlet box is
Figure 11-14 shows the receiver module connec- shown in Figure 11-17.
tions that control the light and the fan speed using A typical home-type paddle fan motor draws 50
a remote control. Figure 11-15 shows the fan/light to 100 watts (50 to 100 volt–amperes), about 0.4 to
combination with the supply at the switch. 0.8 amperes.
230 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls

Receiver

120-volt
supply

Figure 11-15 Fan/light combination with the supply at the switch.

Paddle fan/light combinations increase the load Many fans have a pull-chain motor speed con-
requirements somewhat. Some paddle fan/light units trol (OFF–HIGH–MED–LOW) on the bottom
have one lamp socket, whereas others have four or of the fan housing. Some fans can be used with a
five lamp sockets. solid-state control that is continuously variable. In
For the paddle fan/light unit in the bedrooms, this home we are using a remote control that sends
240 volt–amperes were included in the load calcula- a signal to a receiver at the fan, controlling both the
tions. The current draw is light and fan.
Most fan motors are of the reversible type to
VA 240 allow proper circulation of air in the room below.
I5 5 5 2 amperes
V 120

A B C D

Figure 11-16 (A), (B), (C), and (D) show how a listed ceiling fan hanger and box assembly is installed
through a properly sized and carefully cut hole in the ceiling. This is done for existing installations. Similar
hanger/box assemblies are used for new work. The hanger adjusts for 400 mm and 600 mm joist spacing
but can be cut shorter if necessary. (E) shows a type of box listed and identified for the purpose where
the fan is supported from the joist, independent of the box, as required by CEC Rules 12-3010 8) and
12-3010 9) for fans that weigh more than 16 kg.
 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls 231

Courtesy of Legrand/Pass & Seymour, Inc.

Figure 11-17 A ceiling fan outlet box that is ULC-listed to support 60 kg.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. Why do some electricians prefer to have more than one circuit feeding a room?

2. Is it good practice to have outlets on different floors on the same circuit? Why or why not?

3. What usually determines the grouping of outlets into a circuit?

4. To determine the maximum number of outlets in a circuit, having a breaker with a con-
tinuous operation of 80% for a 15-ampere circuit results in a maximum of
outlets.
5. To determine the maximum number of outlets in a circuit, having a breaker with a con-
tinuous operation of 100% for a 20-ampere circuit results in a maximum of
outlets.
6. For this residence, what are the estimated wattages used in determining the loading of
Branch-Circuit A18?
Closet recessed luminaire watts (volts–amperes)
232 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls

Main recessed luminaires watts (volts-amperes)

Paddle fan/light watts (volts-amperes)
Total load watts (volts-amperes)
7. What size of wire is used for the lighting circuit in the front bedroom?
8. What main factor influences the choice of wall boxes?

9. How is a wall box bonded?

10. What is a split-switched receptacle?

11. Is the switched portion of an outlet mounted toward the top or the bottom? Why?


12. The following questions pertain to luminaires in clothes closets.
a. Does the CEC allow bare incandescent luminaires such as switched lampholders,
or pull-chain lampholders, or porcelain pull-chain lampholders to be installed?

b. Does the CEC allow bare fluorescent luminaires to be installed?

c. Does the CEC permit pendant luminaires or pendant lampholders to be installed?

13. How many switches are in the front bedroom circuit, and of what type are they? ____

14. Using the cable layout shown in Figure 11-4, make a complete wiring diagram of
the front bedroom receptacle circuit. Indicate the colour of each conductor. Use the
correct electrical symbols (found in Unit 2) to create your layout.
 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls 233

15. When planning circuits, how should you divide loads?

16. The CEC uses the terms watts, volt–amperes, and kilowatts. Explain their significance
in calculating loads.

17. How many No. 14 AWG conductors are permitted in a device box that measures 76 3 51 3
64 mm (3 3 2 3 2½ in.)?
18. A 102 3 38 mm (4 3 1½ in.) octagon box has one cable clamp, one luminaire
stud or hickey, and three wire connectors. How many No. 14 AWG conductors are
permitted?

19. What circuits supply the master bedroom?

20. The sliding glass door in the master bedroom could affect the number of required
receptacle outlets. Answer the following statements True or False.
a. Sliding glass panels are considered to be wall space.
b. Fixed panels of glass doors are considered to be wall space.
21. What type of receptacle will be installed outdoors, just outside of the master bedroom?

22. The study/bedroom has receptacles and lighting connected to which circuits?

23. Is it necessary to install a receptacle in the hallway space leading to the bedroom?

24. Using the drawings show the calculations needed to select a properly sized box for
the receptacle outlet in Question 23. NMSC is the wiring method. Refer to the Quick-
Check Box Selection Guide, Figure 3-16 in Unit 3.
234 UNIT 11 Branch Circuits for the Bedrooms, Study, and Halls

25. Refer to the cable layout shown in Figure 11-11 to make a complete wiring diagram of
Circuit A16. Indicate the colour of each conductor. Use the correct electrical symbols
(found in Unit 2) to create your layout.

26. Create a complete wiring diagram of the lighting for circuit A16, using the drawing
package. Indicate the colour of each conductor. Use the correct electrical symbols (found
in Unit 2) to create your layout.
 UNIT

12
Branch Circuits
for the Living Room
and Front Entry
Objectives
RED SEAL
After studying this unit, you should be able to OCCUPATIONAL
●● understand various types of dimmer controls STANDARD
●● connect dimmers to incandescent lamp loads (RSOS)
●● understand the phenomenon of incandescent For the Red Seal exam,
lamp inrush current note that this unit covers
●● discuss Class P ballasts and ballast overcurrent the following RSOS tasks:
protection ●● Task A-3
●● understand how to install a switch in a door ●● Task C-16
jamb for automatic ON–OFF when the door is ●● Task C-17
opened or closed
●● discuss the type of fixtures recommended for
porches and entries
●● discuss the advantages of switching outdoor
receptacles from indoors
●● define wet and damp locations

235
236 UNIT 12 Branch Circuits for the Living Room and Front Entry

LIGHTING CIRCUIT OVERVIEW

Table 12-1
Figure 12-1 shows a sample device and wiring lay- Living room: Lighting count and estimated load,
out for the living room area that is connected to Circuit A18.
Circuit A18, a 15-ampere circuit. The home run is VOLT–
brought from Panel A to the four-gang switch device DESCRIPTION QUANTITY WATTS AMPERES
box near the sliding door in the living room leading Fireplace 2 18 18
to the back of the house. A three-wire 14/3 NMD luminaire
is brought to the only split switched receptacle Living 8 72 72
(Figure 12-2) installed in the living room heading luminaires
toward the kitchen entrance area. From this four- Totals 10 90 90
gang switch device box, all the lighting circuits
are distributed accordingly to the luminaires. Split
switched receptacles are discussed in Unit 14. spacing receptacles on exterior walls when sliding
Accent lighting above the fireplace is in the form glass doors are involved, Rule 26-722 c).
of two recessed fixtures controlled by a single-pole
dimmer switch. See Unit 10 for installation data and
Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) requirements for DIMMER CONTROLS
recessed fixtures. Electronic Solid-State Dimmer Controls
Table 12-1 summarizes the number of lighting
and estimated load for the living room circuit. According to their Canadian Standards Associa-
Unit 4 covers requirements for spacing recepta- tion (CSA) listing, solid-state electronic dimmers
cle outlets and locating lighting outlets, as well as of the type sold for home use “are intended only

Figure 12-1 Cable lighting layout for the living room, Circuit A18.
 UNIT 12 Branch Circuits for the Living Room and Front Entry 237

Sound system
plugs in here

“Hot” line

Leave tab
bridge
Remove tab
between
terminals
Switch leg

15-ampere one-pole
circuit breaker
Light plugs Two-wire
in here circuit from
Bonding panel
conductor
Identified conductor

Figure 12-2 Split-switched receptacle wiring diagram.

for the control of permanently installed incan- features like 600-watt universal LED/incandescent
descent fixtures”; see Figure 12-3. For residen- smart Wi-Fi and that allow control from anywhere
tial installations, the dimmer commonly used is a using iOS or Android applications. Owners can
600-watt unit that fits into a standard single-gang add and name their devices and control them indi-
wall box. Both single-pole and three-way dim- vidually or as a room with a single button, creating
mers are available. schedules, scenes, and customized experiences with
Existing single-pole or multiway dimmers can adjustable fade rates, maximum/minimum illumina-
be easily replaced with market products that offer tion levels, and more.
Electronic dimmers use TRIACS to chop the
alternating current (AC) sine wave, controlling the
amount of voltage supplied to the load. Compact
1000-watt dimmer units are available for use in two-
gang wall boxes.
These boxes should be No. 1004 boxes, which are
3 inches deep. Figure 12-4 shows how single-pole
and three-way solid-state dimmer controls are used
in circuits.
Courtesy of Legrand/Pass & Seymour, Inc.

Dimming LED Lighting

The manufacturers of many LED lamps adver-
tise that they are dimmable. Because there are so
many variables to LED lighting installations, the
electrician should carefully read the manufactur-
er’s instructions to ensure proper installation. This
A B
includes both the lamp and dimmer. Be sure the
lamp and dimmer are compatible.
Figure 12-3 Some typical electronic dimmers;
rotating knob and slider knob. If you want to get more information about LED
lighting and LED dimming, you can find loads of
238 UNIT 12 Branch Circuits for the Living Room and Front Entry

3-way connection with power fed at load

Single pole with power fed at switch
Hot
Splice Line
Hot Common terminal Neutral
black or copper colour
Neutral
to light

14/2 cable Twin leads

from dimmer Bond
Green bond lead
14/3 cable (2) black
Power fed at load
Dimmer and switch may be interchanged.

3-way connection with power fed at switch

Common terminal
Line black or
Single pole with power fed at switch copper colour
Neutral Hot

Load Neutral

Splice

Line
Green

Twin leads
Bond
from dimmer (2)

Dimmer and switch may be interchanged.

Caution: The power must be off before the dimmer is connected to the circuit.

Dimmer switch 3-way 3-way

dimmer switch switch

3-wire cable

Light controlled by a single-pole dimmer Light controlled by a 3-way dimmer

A switch. B switch and a standard 3-way switch.

Figure 12-4 Single-pole and three-way solid-state dimmer control circuits.

 UNIT 12 Branch Circuits for the Living Room and Front Entry 239

technical information on the Internet. The manufac- fixture they are powering. The major difference
turers of LEDs, LED luminaires, and LED dimming is that with reverse phase dimming the electron-
circuitry have their installation instructions on their ics in an LED driver or fluorescent ballast are
websites. If you know the manufacturer’s name, do powered first and dimming occurs second. We
an Internet search for that manufacturer. If you are cannot physically see the difference in the two
looking for a broad spectrum of data about LEDs, types of dimming, but the LED driver and/or the
just enter the words “LED dimming” or “LED light- fluorescent ballast certainly notices the differ-
ing.” You will be amazed at how much information ence and will respond very differently to the dif-
is available online. ferent styles.
Dimming traditionally involved what is called Almost all dimmers made worldwide before
forward phase dimming, and the newer technology 2010 were forward phase (TRIAC-based). This
in use is reverse phase dimming. The distinction is explains why the LED drivers and/or fluorescent
important because of the LED lamps and drivers that ballasts often do not work well when connected to
are now being used around the world (“driver” is existing dimmers. Since there are so many of these
the term for the electronics that run the LED lamp). dimmers around the world, the leading manufac-
Lack of resistance in LED drivers causes problems turers are working to try to make their LEDs and
in the dimming of LED lamps. forward phase dimmers work together. However,
A reverse phase dimmer can help correct the because LED is a growth industry there is a lot of
issue, using the cycle of power and how it is applied room for error in the design. When you are choos-
with a reverse phase or electronic low-voltage (ELV) ing a dimmer device, make sure it is forward phase
dimmer. Figure 12-5 shows both a forward phase dimming capable. This point is especially impor-
(TRIAC-based) and a reverse phase (ELV-based) dim- tant if you have existing dimmers. It is also impor-
mer curve. tant to note that the manufacturers of fluorescent
As depicted in Figure 12-5, in forward phase lamps and ballasts have worked out many of these
dimming power comes in from the left but is sup- issues and the majority of these projects that say
pressed or prevented from operating until it has gone “dimming capable” are forward phase dimming
through approximately one-third of the cycle (shown capable.
by the dots on the curve). Then power comes in
quickly from the crossover (centre horizontal) line
and goes to the correct level. In reverse phase dim-
ming, power comes in normally through approxi- INCANDESCENT LAMP LOAD
mately two-thirds of the cycle’s wave and then is cut INRUSH CURRENTS
out or suppressed for the last one-third of the cycle’s An unusual action occurs when a circuit is energized
wave. to supply a tungsten filament lamp load. A tungsten
Both forward and reverse phase dimming filament lamp has a very low resistance when it is
provide the same amount of energy to the light cold. When the lamp is connected to the proper volt-
age, the resistance of the filament increases very
quickly (within 1/240 second, or one-quarter of a
60-Hz cycle) after the circuit is energized. During
this period, there is an inrush current that is about
10 to 20 times greater than the normal operating
current of the lamp.
T-rated switches are required for many applica-
Forward (TRIAC) Reverse (ELV)
Phase Control Phase Control tions of tungsten filament lamps, Rule 14-508 b),
and are generally not required in dwelling units.
Figure 12-5 Forward phase and reverse phase Canopy switches are required to be T-rated and have
dimming curves. Power comes in from the left
edge and flows out the right edge. an ampacity at least three times the connected load
if they are used to supply incandescent lighting.
240 UNIT 12 Branch Circuits for the Living Room and Front Entry

Table 12-2
Front entry and porch: Lighting count and
estimated load, Circuit A15.
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY WATTS

Garage/East recessed 14 126

luminaires

Courtesy of Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

Front porch 2 18
Post light 1 9
Closet recessed 1 9

All Rights Reserved

luminaire
Stairwell luminaire 1 9
Entry foyer 2 18
Figure 12-6 Solid-state slider dimmer control Smoke/CO detectors 8 0.5
with rocker ON–OFF switch to maintain the same
Totals 21 189.5
light level.

Dimmer Controls for Incandescent the six-gang switch box next to the front door.
Lighting From this box, the circuit spreads out, feeding the
entry light, the stairwell light, the closet light, the
The wiring diagram in Figure 12-4 shows the cir- porch recessed luminaires, the seven recessed lumi-
cuit used to control incandescent lamps. The entire naires around the garage area, the seven recessed
load is cut off when the internal switch is in the luminaires around the east side of the house, and
OFF position. These dimmers are available in the post light in the front lawn. The outdoor weath-
single-pole and three-way switches. Figure 12-6 erproof GFCI-protected (by circuit breaker that is
shows a slider-type dimmer switch with a rocker- AFCI and GFCI rated) receptacle on the porch is
type ON–OFF switch, which allows the slider to controlled by a single pole switch and connected
remain at the same place, thus maintaining the to Circuit A24 along with the other outdoor recep-
same light level. tacles. Table 12-2 summarizes the estimated load
Leviton manufactures a full line of dim- for the entry and outdoor lights at the front of the
mers ranging from rotary, toggle, and slider up house.
to a designer series with special features such as The receptacle on the porch is controlled by
remote control on one model. Depending on the a single-pole switch just inside the front door,
model, dimmers are available for incandescent, which gives the homeowner control of decorative
fluorescent, and magnetic low-voltage lumi- lighting plugged into the outdoor receptacle; see
naires for loads up to 600 or 1000 watts, with Figure 12-8.
many models having matching paddle fan speed Ty p i c a l c e i l i n g l u m i n a i r e s c o m m o n l y
controls. installed in front entryways, where it is desir-
able to make a good first impression on guests,
BRANCH CIRCUIT FOR FRONT are shown in Figure 12-9. Typical wall-mounted
ENTRY, PORCH porch and entrance luminaires are shown in
Figure 12-10.
Figure 12-7 shows a possible device and wiring According to Rule 30-318, any wiring of light
layout for the front entry and porch area. This area luminaires in damp or wet locations requires lumi-
is connected to Circuit A15. The home runs enter naires to be approved and marked for use in such
 UNIT 12 Branch Circuits for the Living Room and Front Entry 241

Figure 12-7 Cable layout of the front entry and porch, Circuit A15.

locations. For example, the luminaires will be location just inside the front door, because there are
marked “Suitable for wet locations.” six toggle switches.
The CEC defines partially protected areas ●● One single-pole switch for the light
under roofs, canopies, or open porches as damp luminaires (front and side garage
locations. Luminaires to be used in these locations pot lights and east soffit house
must be marked “Suitable for damp locations.” luminaires) 2 wires
Many types of luminaires are available. Always ●● One single-pole switch for
check the label on the luminaire for CSA approval the entry light 2 wires
or consult with your electrical supplier to deter-
mine the suitability of the luminaire for a wet or
●● One single-pole switch for the
porch lights 2 wires
damp location. See Figure 12-11.
Probably the most difficult part of the A15 ●● One single-pole switch for the
circuit is planning the connections at the switch post light 2 wires
242 UNIT 12 Branch Circuits for the Living Room and Front Entry

Low-voltage
decorative
lighting

120- to 12-volt
transformer

Weatherproof
outlets stubbed
out of ground

(Covers
shown
closed)

Covers must be weatherproof with

plug inserted or removed

Figure 12-8 Typical low-voltage decorative lighting for use around shrubbery. Cord plugs into 120-volt
receptacle and feeds transformer that reduces 120 volts to a safer 12 volts.

●● One single-pole switch for the weather- This location is another challenge for determining
proof receptacle on the porch 2 wires the proper size wall box:
●● Jumper to feed the smoke and 1. Count the circuit conductors 19 wires
CO2 alarms 2 wires
2. Add the switches
●● 3-way switch controlling 6 switches each count @ 2 12
basement landing light 3 wires
3. Add the wire connectors
●● Panel feed home run A15 2 wires
3 connectors 1
Total 32 volume
of wire required
Courtesy of Progress Lighting

Figure 12-9 Entry luminaires: Ceiling mount and chain mount. In this residence, the owner wanted
recessed luminaires.
 UNIT 12 Branch Circuits for the Living Room and Front Entry 243

Courtesy of Progress Lighting

Figure 12-10 Outdoor porch and entrance luminaires: Wall bracket styles. In this residence, the owner
requested recessed luminaires.

The Quick-Check Box Selection Guide inside of the 2 3 4 framing for the closet door.
(Figure 3-16) and Tables 3-1 and 3-2 give many The electrician runs the cable to this point and lets
possibilities. For example, two sets of three 76 3 it hang out until the carpenter can cut the proper
51 3 64-mm (3 3 2 3 2½ in.) device boxes can be size of opening into the door jamb for the box.
ganged together (6 3 8 5 48 conductors). After the finish woodwork is completed, the elec-
An interesting possibility presents itself for trician installs the switch; see Figure 12-12. The
the front entry closet. Although the plans show plunger on the switch is pushed inward when the
that the recessed closet luminaire is turned on and edge of the door pushes on it as it closes, shut-
off by a standard single-pole switch to the left ting off the light. The plunger can be adjusted in
as you face the closet, a door jamb switch could or out to make the switch work properly. These
have been installed. A door jamb switch is usu- door jamb switches come complete with their own
ally mounted about 1.83 m above the floor, on the special wall box.
244 UNIT 12 Branch Circuits for the Living Room and Front Entry

Roof or
overhang

Damp
location 45°
angle

Wet location

WP receptacle

Figure 12-11 Outdoor areas considered to be

damp or wet locations. Figure 12-12 Door jamb switch.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. How many duplex receptacles are connected to the living room circuit?

2. a. How many wires enter the switch box at the four-way switch located near the
study?

b. What type and size of box may be installed at this location? __________________
 UNIT 12 Branch Circuits for the Living Room and Front Entry 245

3. a. What is meant by incandescent lamp inrush current? ________________________

b. Does the CEC require T-rated switches for incandescent lamps in dwelling units?

4. What are the different devices that solid-state dimmers are able to control?
5. What is the difference between a split-switched receptacle and a split-wired (three-
wire) receptacle? ______________________________________________________

6. How many branch circuits are required for

a. a split-switched receptacle? ___________________________________________
b. a split-wired (three-wire) receptacle? ____________________________________
7. a. How many television outlets are provided in the living room? ________________

b. What symbol is used on the drawing to indicate the TV outlet? ________________

8. a. Where is the telephone outlet located in the living room? ____________________

b. What symbol is used on the drawing to indicate the telephone outlet? ___________

9. How is it possible to have 20 lights on a single branch circuit? ____________________

10. How many lighting outlets are supplied by Circuit A15?

11. Outdoor luminaires directly exposed to the weather must be marked as [circle the
correct answer]
a. suitable for damp locations
b. suitable for dry locations only
c. suitable for wet locations
12. Make a materials list of all types of switches connected to Circuit A15.

13. Explain what is meant by forward and reverse phase dimming for LED. What is the
advantage of each type of dimming?
UNIT

13
Branch Circuits
for Bathrooms
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to
●● list bonding requirements for bathroom
installations
●● discuss fundamentals of proper lighting
RED SEAL for bathrooms
OCCUPATIONAL ●● describe the operation of a humidistat
STANDARD
(RSOS) ●● install attic exhaust fans with humidistats, both
with and without a relay
For the Red Seal exam, ●● list the various methods of controlling exhaust
note that this unit covers fans
the following RSOS task:
●● understand advantages of installing exhaust
●● Task C-17 fans in residences
●● understand the electrical circuit and Canadian
Electrical Code (CEC) requirements for
hydromassage bathtubs

246
 UNIT 13 Branch Circuits for Bathrooms 247

Bathrooms and ensuite bath are likely to be used in the morn-

ing at the same time by people using hair dryers
Electrical equipment in bathrooms and washrooms that draw as much as a toaster or kettle (1200 W),
requires special installation considerations. For it is not uncommon to put the receptacles on their
example, in the residence used as an example in this own circuit. This is not a CEC requirement.
textbook, the hydromassage bathtub in the ensuite A hydromassage tub, located in the bathroom
bathroom requires ground-fault circuit protection, serving the master bedroom, is connected to a sepa-
Rule 68-302. Switches must be properly located. rate circuit A.
There must be enough circuits to operate all of the Figure 13-1 and the electrical plans for this area
equipment without the possibility of overloading of the home show that each bathroom has a fixture
circuits. It is also important to correctly locate lumi- above the vanity mirror: Some typical fixtures are
naires to achieve proper lighting. shown in Figure 13-2. The homeowner might decide
The vanity lighting for the two bathrooms is to purchase a medicine cabinet complete with a self-
pro­­vided from circuit A16. The circuit that sup- contained lighting fixture. Figure 13-3 illustrates
plies the ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI)– how to rough-in the wiring for medicine cabinets
protected receptacle in each bathroom is circuit with or without such a lighting fixture. These fixtures
A17. Because the receptacles in the main bathroom are controlled by single-pole switches at the doors.

$$ $
A

F
Ensuite GFCI

GFCI
$ $ $

Main F
bathroom

Figure 13-1 Cable layout for bathrooms.

248 UNIT 13 Branch Circuits for Bathrooms

All photos: Courtesy of Progress Lighting

Figure 13-2 Vanity luminaires of the side bracket and strip types.

A bathroom or powder room should have proper A lighting fixture directly overhead will light
lighting for shaving, combing hair, putting on the top of one’s head, but will cause shadows on the
makeup, and so on. If the face is poorly lit and in face. Mirror lighting and/or adequate lighting above
shadow, that is what will be reflected in the mirror. and forward of the standing position at the vanity can

A B
Be sure to bring cable or conduit in
at proper location. It is best to have
Mount octagon or device box the actual medicine cabinet or
to provide enough clearance installation instructions to determine
between luminaire and mirror. exact location of cable knockout.

Cable is
connected
to wiring
compartment
knockout on
cabinet.

Framed opening Framed opening for recessed

for recessed medicine cabinet that comes
medicine cabinet complete with a luminaire

Figure 13-3 Two methods most commonly used for roughing-in the wiring for lighting above a vanity.
 UNIT 13 Branch Circuits for Bathrooms 249

provide excellent lighting in the bathroom, Figure 13-4. With fluorescent lighting, you should use
Figures 13-5 to 13-6 show pictorial and section views fluorescent lamps that bring out the warm flesh
of typical soffit lighting above a bathroom vanity. tones, such as warm white (WW) and warm white
The receptacles in each bathroom are located deluxe (WWX), which simulate incandescent
adjacent to the vanity and within 1 m of the wash lamps, or cool white deluxe (CWX), which simulate
basin, Rule 26-720 f). Bathroom receptacles outdoor daylight on a cloudy day.
must be at least 1 m from the bathtub or shower White (W) or cool white (CW) fluorescents
when practicable, Rule 26-720 g). As required by downplay flesh tones and give the skin a pale
Rule 26-704 and as discussed in Unit 9, these must appearance. Compact fluorescent lamps provide
be GFCI receptacles. Section 0 defines a bathroom excellent colour rendition. With respect to colour,
as “a room containing a wash basin together with LED lights refer to the degrees Kelvin equiva-
bathing or showering facilities”; see Figure 13-7. lent of a black body radiating at some tempera-
Switches controll­ing lights must not be within 1 m ture. Thus, an incandescent light that is yellow in
of the shower or bathtub, Rule 30-320 3). appearance would radiate light at 2700–3000 K.
The fluorescent light found in an office would be
GENERAL COMMENTS 4000–5000 K. Different combinations of colours
ON LAMPS AND COLOUR enhance the ability of the human eye to see differ-
ent features.
Incandescent lamps (light bulbs) provide pleasant
colour tones, bringing out warm flesh tones similar
to the way that natural light does.

Wrong Right

Figure 13-4 Positioning bathroom lighting fixtures.

250 UNIT 13 Branch Circuits for Bathrooms

Junction
Luminaire box

End cutaway of soffit showing recessed

LED luminaires in typical soffit
above bathroom vanity. Two 9 W LED
warm white luminaires with a colour
at 2700 to 4000 K will provide enough
lumens to provide proper lighting.

Typical LED recessed soffit

lighting over bathroom vanity

Figure 13-5 LED luminaire soffit lighting.

Cement board

T8-18 W LED
luminaires

Drywall

End cutaway view of soffit above

bathroom vanity showing surface-type
LED luminaires concealed
above translucent acrylic lens

Typical LED luminaires concealed

over bathroom vanity. Note additional
“side-of-mirror” LED strip lights.

Figure 13-6 Combination fluorescent and incandescent bathroom lighting.

 UNIT 13 Branch Circuits for Bathrooms 251

This is not a bathroom.

A (basin, toilet)
This is a bathroom.
B (basin, toilet, tub)

This is not a bathroom. This is a bathroom even though a door

C (basin only) D separates the area into two parts.

Figure 13-7 Definition of a bathroom, Section 0.

LIGHTING FIXTURES
IN BATHROOMS
Rule 30-320 1) requires any light fixture (luminaire)
or lampholder that is located within 2.5 m vertically 1.5 m
1.5 m
or 1.5 m horizontally of bathtubs, laundry tubs, or
other grounded surfaces to be controlled by a wall
switch. The switch must be located at least 1 m from 1.5 m
a tub or shower so that a person standing in the tub
or shower will not be able to reach the switch. In
installations where this distance is impracticable,
the CEC does allow us to reduce this distance to Figure 13-8 The horizontal area around a tub
500 mm. However, the circuit must be ground-fault- in which luminaires must be controlled by a wall
protected. See Figures 13-8 and 13-9. switch, at least 1 m away, Rule 30-320.

HALLWAY LIGHTING RECEPTACLE OUTLETS

IN HALLWAYS
The hallway lighting is provided by one ceiling fix-
ture controlled with two 3-way switches located at One receptacle outlet has been provided in the hall-
either end of the hall and supplied from Circuit A18. way, supplied from Circuit A14. Rule 26-722 e)
252 UNIT 13 Branch Circuits for Bathrooms

Requires wall
switch 1 m Requires wall
from tub or switch 1 m
This is okay.
GFCI protection. from tub or
This is okay. GFCI protection.

2.5 m
2.5 m

1.5 m 1.5 m
Tub 1.5 m
Sunken
tub

Figure 13-9 Luminaires must be controlled by a wall switch outside the reach of a person in the tub.
A wall switch must be a minimum of 1 m from the tub. Where this is not possible, the spacing may be
reduced to 500 mm if the switch is protected by a GFCI, Rule 30-320.

requires that in a dwelling unit, no point in a hallway ●● if they are located in wet or damp locations,
shall be more than 4.5 m from a duplex receptacle. such as bathrooms, showers, and outdoors
●● if they are in electrical contact with metal, includ-
ing metal lath and aluminum foil insulation
BONDING REQUIREMENTS Equipment is considered bonded to ground
FOR A BATHROOM CIRCUIT when it is properly and permanently connected to a
metal raceway, a separate bonding conductor, or the
All exposed metal equipment, including fixtures,
bonding conductor in non-metallic-sheathed cable
electric heaters, faceplates, and similar items, must
or armoured cable. The bonding conductor must
be bonded. The bonding requirements for bath-
itself be properly grounded.
room circuits and any other equipment in a resi-
In general, residential cord-connected electrical
dential building are contained in Section 10. The
appliances must be grounded. Many appliances,
2018 Code revised Section 10 to simplify bonding
tools, and devices require no ground pin because
by characterizing it as adding a conductor that acts
they are “double insulated” or constructed from
as a low-impedance path to ground for unwanted or
non-conductive materials that prevent the case or
dangerous electrical currents. This convention was
frame of the device from becoming hazardous in
continued in the 2021 code.
the event of an internal fault. Occasionally, reliable
In general, all exposed non-current-carrying
grounding cannot be obtained and equipment must
metal parts of electrical equipment must be bonded
then be supplied from a double-insulated portable
together and connected to ground in order to estab-
Class A GFCI.
lish equipotentiality—that is, to ensure that all equip-
Double-insulated appliances must be clearly
ment is at the same electrical potential. If the voltage
marked , or with the words “Double insulated,”
is the same at all points, then no current can flow
and do not require a separate bonding conductor.
●● if wiring supplying the equipment contains a These appliances are furnished with a two-wire
bonding conductor cord that is designed for a polarized receptacle.
●● if the ground or a grounded surface and the The short blade must be connected to the “hot”
electrical equipment can be touched at the same conductor and the long blade to the neutral or
time identified conductor.
 UNIT 13 Branch Circuits for Bathrooms 253

Residential electrical appliances that must be

grounded, unless double insulated, are
●● facial saunas
●● freezers and refrigerators
●● clothes washers and dryers
●● dishwashers
●● aquarium equipment
●● handheld motor-operated tools
●● electric motor-operated hedge trimmers, lawn
mowers, and snow blowers
●● air conditioners
●● sump pumps

Courtesy of Broan-NuTone Canada Inc.

INDOOR AIR QUALITY
AND THE BATHROOM FAN
Like a load calculation on a house, the air volume
that needs to be removed in a bathroom can be cal-
Figure 13-10 Combination heater, ventilation
culated. The fan on the ceiling in your bathroom or fan, light, and night light.
powder room removes moisture and odours from the
room, turning the air over at a recommended volume
of 1 cubic foot (approximately 28 litres) of air per
square foot of floor space, per minute in bathrooms It is important to remove moisture because
under 100 square feet (10 m2). In bathrooms over it supports the growth of bacteria, moulds, mil-
100 square feet, the devices in the water closet, pow- dews, and fungi, which can damage a structure
der room, or bathroom are given a numeric value in and/or make it unhealthy to live in. The pollutants
cubic feet per minute (CFM) of air, which must be found in homes can come from external sources
removed to moderate their effect on the structure. like nearby manufacturing facilities and farming
Hot tubs and whirlpools generate a lot of moisture, activities or internally from some of the surfaces
so 100 CFM of air needs to be removed for them. or furnishings inside a house. Molecules are emit-
A typical toilet or shower stall, on the other hand, ted by carpet and underpad, particle board, paint,
requires 50 CFM worth of air movement. Adding plastic items, or even the flame retardants used in
the recommended air volume for each appliance furniture, in a process called off-gassing. Volatile
yields a capacity for any installed fan to meet some organic compounds, or VOCs, are also released
building code requirements. by the cleaning products, paints, and plastics we
bring into our homes. These can accumulate in
Whirlpool tub 100 CFM a house and cause health complications in some
Toilet 50 CFM individuals. A periodic turnover of the air in a
Shower stall 50 CFM house is advised. It is possible for the air quality
Total 200 CFM minimum required inside a house to be worse than the air outside,
Installing a fan with the capacity to remove even in industrialized areas.
200 CFM of air from this dwelling should assure Older homes are not typically very airtight, so
that excess moisture, odours, and pollutants are the air inside homes turns over and is replaced with
removed. outside air naturally. This means that the air quality
254 UNIT 13 Branch Circuits for Bathrooms

in newer homes can be worse than in older homes. HYDROMASSAGE BATHTUB

To make matters worse, new homes have new car- CIRCUIT A
pet, paint, and particle board surfaces, which emit
more VOCs than they do after being installed for The ensuite bathroom is equipped with a hydro-
several years. The emission rate tends to taper off massage bathtub, sometimes referred to as a whirl-
in time. Additionally, newer homes have fewer air pool bath. Pools, tubs, and spas are covered by CEC
changes per hour due to more stringent construction Section 68.
requirements that have gradually been implemented Rule 68-050 defines a hydromassage bathtub as
over the last 50 years to reduce air leakage and a permanently installed bathtub having an integral
increase efficiency. Some ventilation is required to or remote water pump or air blower, and having a
keep the indoor air quality at acceptable levels. As fill and drain water system.
already indicated, fans that you wish to install must In other words, fill—use—drain!
have the capacity to move a given amount of air out The significant difference between a hydro-
of a building in a given timeframe. The CFM rat- massage bathtub and a regular bathtub is the recir-
ing on a fan indicates this level of ability. ASHRAE culating piping system and the electric pump that
standard 62.2-2016 (formerly the American Soci- circulates the water. Both types of tubs are drained
ety of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning completely after each use.
Engineers) recommends that no less than 15 CFM Spas and hot tubs are intended to be filled and
of air be brought into a building per occupant, or then used. They are not drained after each use
0.35 air changes per hour, for the building to main- because they have a filtering and heating system.
tain comfort and health.
Bathroom fans have a wide range of character-
istics due to their construction and capabilities. The Electrical Connections
fan motors in bathroom fans are very often shaded
pole induction motors. This type of motor has been The hydromassage tub is fed with Circuit A9,
around for 130 years. Shaded pole induction motors a separate 15-ampere, 120-volt circuit using
are inefficient, but they are cheap and easy to pro- No. 14 AWG NMD90.
duce. They are seldom used in sizes larger than Table A–1, Schedule of Special-Purpose
1/3 Hp because of their inefficiency and low start- Outlets, in this book’s Appendix A, indicates that
ing torque, but they are suitable for use in small fan the hydromassage bathtub in this residence has a
motors. ½-hp motor that draws 10 amperes.
The operational characteristics of bathroom Rule 68-302 requires that the circuit supplying a
fans, such as how loud they are and how much air hydromassage bathtub has Class A GFCI protection,
they move, are contingent upon how well made as discussed in Unit 9.
the motor they are using is and the type of fan Rule 68-304 1) requires that the hydromassage
mounted on the shaft of the motor. Bathroom fans bathtub be controlled by an on/off device. An
are marketed by the amount of noise they make automatic shut-off timer is recommended; see
as well as their capacity to move air. The sound Figure 13-11.
a fan generates is listed in an industry standard Rule 68-304 2) requires that any associated
called sones, where 1 sone is about the amount of electrical controls be located behind a barrier not
noise your refrigerator makes when it is running. less than 1 m horizontally from the wall of the
Lower-priced fans tend to make more noise and hydromassage bathtub. Pneumatic (air) controls
move less air. Builders who construct whole sub- are often used instead of electrical controls. These
divisions save money by using cheaper fans that controls can be mounted on the tub. The 1 m rule
generally move less air and virtually always make does not apply.
more noise, up to 4 or even 5 sones. When install- Spas, hot tubs, and swimming pools introduce
ing a bathroom fan, a noise level of 2 or fewer additional electrical shock hazards; these issues are
sones is preferable to most people. covered in Unit 22.
 UNIT 13 Branch Circuits for Bathrooms 255

ON–OFF
switch

Courtesy of Broan-NuTone Canada Inc.

Courtesy of Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All Rights Reserved

Control
panel

Some hydromassage
Pump
bathtubs are equipped
with a cord and plug.
Equipment
grounding
conductor
Connect to 15-ampere,
A B 120-volt, single-pole,
GFCI circuit breaker

Figure 13-11 (A) A 15-minute mechanical timer Figure 13-12 Typical wiring diagram of a
and (B) a 30-minute electronic timer for control of hydromassage tub showing the motor, power
a hydromassage bathtub. panel, and electrical supply leads, Rules 68-302
to 68-308.

The hydromassage bathtub’s electrical control

is prewired by the manufacturer. The electrician
just has to run the separate 15-ampere, 120-volt
GFCI-protected circuit to the end of the tub where
the pump and control are located. Generally, the
manufacturer will supply a 900-mm length of
watertight flexible conduit that contains one black,
one white, and one green equipment bonding
conductor; see Figure 13-12. Make sure that the
equipment-bonding conductor of the circuit is
properly connected to the green bonding conductor
of the hydromassage tub.
Do not connect the green bonding conduc-
tor to the grounded (white) circuit conductor.
Make proper electrical connections in the
junction box where the branch-circuit wiring is to
be connected to the hydromassage wires. Because Figure 13-13 The basic roughing-in of a
it contains splices, this junction box must be hydromassage bathtub is similar to that of a
accessible, usually by means of a removable cover regular bathtub. The electrician runs a separate
on the side of the hydromassage tub. 15-ampere, 120-volt GFCI-protected circuit to the
area where the pump and control are located.
The pump and power panel may also need Check the manufacturer’s specifications for this
servicing. Access may be from underneath or the data. An access panel from the end or from
end, whichever is convenient for the installation; see below is necessary to service the wiring, the
Figure 13-13. pump, and the power panel after the installation
is complete.
Figure 13-14 shows a typical hydromassage tub.
256 UNIT 13 Branch Circuits for Bathrooms

Robert Nolan/[Link]
Figure 13-14 A typical hydromassage bathtub, sometimes referred to as a whirlpool bathtub.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. Most appliances of the type commonly used in bathrooms, such as hair dryers, electric
shavers, and curling irons, have two-wire cords. These appliances are
insulated.
2. The CEC requires that all receptacles within 1.5 m of a sink or tub in a bathroom be
protected.
3. Draw the symbol or other markings used to identify double-insulated equipment.

INDOOR AIR QUALITY AND THE BATHROOM FAN

1. What function does a bathroom fan perform?

2. What does CFM stand for?

3. How much airflow must a fan installed in a bathroom with a floor space of 75 square
feet have?
 UNIT 13 Branch Circuits for Bathrooms 257

4. What amount of air must a bathroom fan installed in a bathroom with 110 square feet
of space that has a toilet and a whirlpool tub installed in it have?

5. Why must excess moisture be removed from homes?

6. Name the main sources of pollutants inside a home?

7. What is the name given for the organic molecules emitted by interior surfaces and
cleaning supplies in a home?

8. How many CFMs of air should be brought in to a building per occupant, per minute
according to ASHRAE?

9. What type of motor is often found in a bathroom fan?

10. What is a sone?

11. What level of sones would a bathroom fan have to be at to be considered “noisy”?

HYDROMASSAGE BATHTUB CIRCUIT A

1. What circuit supplies the hydromassage bathtub? ______________________________

2. Should the circuit supplying the hydromassage bathtub have GFCI protection?

3. What conductor size feeds the hydromassage tub? _____________________________

4. What is the fundamental difference between a hydromassage bathtub and a spa or hot tub?

5. What rules of the CEC refer to hydromassage bathtubs? ________________________

6. Must the metal parts of the pump and power panel of the hydromassage tub be
grounded?
258 UNIT 13 Branch Circuits for Bathrooms

7. If not integral to the tub, where should the electric controls be located for the
hydromassage tub?

8. Which Red Seal occupational skill outcome best describes the installation of a
bathroom fan?
 UNIT

14
Lighting Branch Circuit
and Small-Appliance
Circuits for the Kitchen
Objectives
RED SEAL
After studying this unit, you should be able to OCCUPATIONAL
●● discuss typical kitchen, dining area, and STANDARD
undercabinet lighting (RSOS)
●● discuss exhaust fan noise ratings
For the Red Seal exam,
●● explain the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) note that this unit covers
requirements for small-appliance circuits in the following RSOS task:
kitchens ●● Task C-17
●● understand the CEC requirements for receptacles
that serve countertops
●● discuss split-circuit receptacles
●● discuss multi-wire circuits

259
260 UNIT 14 Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Circuits for the Kitchen

LIGHTING CIRCUIT B7
Table 14-1
Circuit B7 supplies the lighting in the kitchen and Kitchen lighting: Outlet count and estimated
service entrance as well as the garage and attic lights load, Circuit B7.
and the outside pot lights on the northeast side of the DESCRIPTION QUANTITY WATTS
building: see Figure 14-1.
Pot lights 8 72
Recessed fixture over sink 1 9
KITCHEN LIGHTING Outdoor pot lights 2 18
Recessed lights in service 7 63
The general lighting for the kitchen is provided by entrance and attic lights
eight pot lights controlled by three-way switches AFCI Receptacle in 1 120
located next to the doorway leading to the living service entrance
room and at the rear entrance. All fixtures must be Total 19 282
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) approved.
Figures 14-2A through 14-2C show other types
of ceiling-mounted lighting fixtures used in kitch- in the kitchen. The eight pot lights, the fixture
ens, dining areas, and dining rooms. above the sink, and the fixture in the range hood
One goal of good lighting is to reduce shad- will provide excellent lighting in the work area
ows in work areas, which is particularly important of the kitchen. The pot lights in the dining nook

$3$3
F
GFC
$$

H F
1400 mm
G to center
s
GFCI

$3

REF\G
5 SHELF
s P PANTRY

Figure 14-1 Cable layout for the kitchen lighting, Circuit B7.
 UNIT 14 Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Circuits for the Kitchen 261

offer good lighting for that area. Low-profile is part of the upper cabinets so that the lights are
light-emitting diode (LED) pot lights are a popu- hidden from view (Part B in Figure 14-3), or fas-
lar lighting source in homes. Most are dimmable tened under and to the front of the upper cabinets
and can commonly be found in the more desirable (Part C in Figure 14-3). All three require close coor-
2700 to 3000 Kelvin colours that match incandes- dination with the cabinet installer to be sure that
cent lights in spectra. the wiring is brought out of the wall at the proper
location to connect to the undercabinet fixtures.
Undercabinet Lighting The installation of extra-low-voltage cabinet light-
ing systems is covered by Rule 30-1208.
In homes with little natural light, the architect might
specify strip LED or fluorescent fixtures under the Lamp Type
kitchen cabinets. Several methods may be used to
install undercabinet lighting fixtures: They can be Good colour rendition in a kitchen area is achieved
fastened to the wall just under the upper cabinets with incandescent lamps or fluorescent fixtures
(Part A in Figure 14-3), installed in a recess that with compact lamps or standard warm white deluxe

All photos: Courtesy of Progress Lighting

Figure 14-2A Fixtures that can be hung either singly or on a track over dinette tables.

Courtesy of Progress Lighting

Figure 14-2B Typical kitchen ceiling fixture, which might have three 9-watt LED lamps.
262 UNIT 14 Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Circuits for the Kitchen

All photos: Courtesy of Progress Lighting

Figure 14-2C Types of fixtures used over dining room tables.

(WWX), warm white (WW), cool white deluxe incandescent lamps (300 watts). When used five
(CXW), or Ultralume™ 3000 lamps. hours a day at $0.17/kWH, a luminaire with two
Fluorescent lamps use up to 80% less energy fluorescent lamps will save $71.31 annually at
than incandescent ones and last 10 to 20 times lon- the current peak rate in Ontario. Still even more
ger, saving on the cost of replacement. Fluorescent saving can be achieved through the use of LED
lighting also produces less heat, thus saving on air systems, which offer even greater efficiency and
conditioning. longevity. Five 9 watt LED bulbs retrofitted in
For example, two F40 34-watt fluores- to a fixture would save $79.11 over a year over
cent lamps (78 watts including ballast) provide using incandescent bulbs, easily recouping the
about the same illumination as five 60-watt cost of the bulbs.

Door

Bottom of cabinets

Strip Strip
lighting lighting
Finish
wall
A B C

Figure 14-3 Methods of installing undercabinet lighting fixtures.

 UNIT 14 Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Circuits for the Kitchen 263

Range Hood Exhaust Fan barrier of polyethylene plastic film tends to retain
and Light Outlet humidity.
Vapour barriers are installed to keep moisture
The exhaust fan has two lamps at 9 watts out of the insulation. This protection normally is
(18 watts altogether) and a motor at 120 volts, installed on the warm side of ceilings, walls, and
1.33 amperes, for a total wattage of 178 watts. Fans floors; under concrete slabs poured directly on the
can be installed in a kitchen either to exhaust the ground; and as a ground cover in crawl spaces. Insu-
air to the outside of the building via ducts or vents, lation must be kept dry to maintain its effectiveness.
or to recirculate the air through various types of fil- For example, a 1% increase of moisture in insulating
ters (e.g., charcoal or foam). Both types of fans can material can reduce its efficiency by 5%. (Humidity
be used in a residence. The ductless hood fan does control using a humidistat connected to an exhaust
not exhaust air to the outside and does not remove fan is covered in Unit 16.) Building inspectors
humidity from the air. Figure 14-4 shows a typical require the vapour barrier to be intact around all out-
range hood exhaust fan. let boxes on the outside walls of the house. It is the
Homes heated electrically with resistance-type electrician’s responsibility to maintain the integrity
baseboard units usually have excess humidity. of the vapour barrier, Rule 12-3000 and Appendix B.
These heating units neither add nor remove mois- An exhaust fan simultaneously removes odours
ture from the air. The proper use of weather strip- and moisture from the air and exhausts heated air;
ping, storm doors, storm windows, and a vapour see Figure 14-4. The electrician, builder, and/or
architect may make suggestions to guide the owner
in making the choice of type of fan to install.
For the residence in the blueprints that accom-
pany this book, a separate wall switch is not required
because the fan speed switch, light, and light switch
are integral parts of the fan.

Fan Noise
The fan motor and the air movement through an exhaust
fan generate noise. The unit used to define fan noise
is the sone (rhymes with tone; see Unit 13), a subjec-
tive unit equal to the loudness of a 1000-hertz tone at
40 decibels as perceived by a person with normal
hearing. All manufacturers of exhaust fans provide
this information in their descriptive literature. Some
manufacturers reduce noise level by moving the fan
into an attic space, away from the body of the unit.

Clock Outlets
Michael Higginson/[Link]

A deep sectional box is recommended because a

recessed clock outlet takes up considerable room in
the box; see Figure 14-5.
Some decorative clocks have the entire motor
recessed so that only the hands and numbers are
exposed on the surface of the wall. Some of these
clocks require special outlet boxes, usually furnished
Figure 14-4 Typical range hood exhaust fan.
Speed control and light are integral parts of the unit. with the clock. Other clocks require a standard 4-inch
square outlet box. If the clock is available when the
264 UNIT 14 Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Circuits for the Kitchen

All photos: Courtesy of Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All Rights Reserved
Figure 14-5 Recessed clock receptacle.

Figure 14-6 Single and duplex receptacles.

electrician is roughing in the wiring, its dimensions
can be checked to help in locating the outlet.
If an electrical clock outlet has not been pro- ●● Countertop receptacles must be supplied by at
vided, battery-operated clocks are available. least two 15-ampere, three-wire branch circuits. As
an alternative, 5–20R receptacles may be used in
SMALL-APPLIANCE AND accordance with Rule 26-722 d); see Figure 14-8.
BRANCH CIRCUITS FOR ●● There must be a receptacle within 900 mm of any
CONVENIENCE point along the wall behind all counters except
those less than 300 mm long; see Figure 14-9.
Receptacles in Kitchen
Figure 14-6 shows single and duplex receptacles. The
CEC requirements for small-appliance circuits and
Receptacle installed
the spacing of receptacles in the kitchens of dwell- solely to support
ings are covered in Rules 26-654, 26-656, 26-720, electric clock.

and 26-724. This was discussed in detail in Unit 4.

Highlights are
●● A microwave in its own enclosure gets its own
circuit and so does a refrigerator.
●● These small-appliance circuits shall be assigned
a maximum load of 80% each when calculating
branch-circuit connectors.
●● Receptacles may not be directly in front of a
sink, but may be behind one if they are 450 mm
or greater back, Rule 26-700 8).
●● The clock outlet may be connected to the refrig- 15-ampere refrigerator
branch circuit in kitchen,
erator circuit only when this outlet is to supply a Rule 26–652 a)
recessed clock receptacle intended for use with
Figure 14-7 A receptacle installed solely to supply
an electric clock, Rule 26-654 (Figure 14-7). and support an electric clock may be connected to a
In the residence in the blueprints, the clock out- refrigerator receptacle, Rule 26-654.
let is connected to the lighting circuit.
 UNIT 14 Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Circuits for the Kitchen 265

900 900

Peninsula

Island
Typical kitchen counter receptacle layout. The two receptacles closest to the sink require GFCI protection
because they are within 1.5 m of the sink. 5–20 R duplex receptacles (20-ampere, 125-volt, T-slot)
have been used throughout for uniformity. 15-ampere three-conductor split duplex receptacles connected
to multi-wire branch circuits may be used in place of the 20-ampere T-slot receptacles. No more than two
counter receptacles are permitted on a circuit.

Figure 14-8 Layout of receptacles behind the counter in a kitchen. If two or more countertop receptacles
are required by Rule 26-722 d) iii), at least two 20-ampere branch circuits or two 15-ampere, three-wire
branch circuits are required, Rule 26-656 d).

1800 900 900 1800

max max max max

max
900

All dimensions in mm

Figure 14-9 In kitchens, all duplex 125-volt, 15-ampere duplex receptacles located along the wall of
counter work surfaces must be of the split-wired type (three-wire circuit) or 20-ampere 125-volt T-slot
receptacles must be used. Receptacles must be located so that no point along the wall line is more than
900 mm from a receptacle, Rule 26-722 d) iii).
266 UNIT 14 Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Circuits for the Kitchen

●● Microwave enclosures must be supplied with appliances. For example, one type of cord-connected
a receptacle on a separate circuit, Rule 26-654. microwave oven is rated 1440 watts at 120 volts. The
If no cupboard or enclosure is provided, the current required by this appliance alone is
microwave would be powered by one of the
countertop split or T-slot receptacles. W 1440
I5 5 5 12.0 amperes
●● All outdoor receptacles within 2.5 m of the E 120
finished grade must be on a separate GFCI-
A maximum of two counter receptacles are
protected circuit, Rule 26-704) 2).
permitted on one circuit. This provides the best
●● Counter receptacles may be 15-ampere three- availability of electrical power for the variety of
conductor split-circuit or 20-ampere T-slot appliances that will be used in the heavily concen-
receptacles. Counter receptacles prevent cir- trated work areas in the kitchen.
cuit overloading when small appliances such as Figure 14-10 shows the circuiting for the
kettles and toasters are plugged in at the same special-purpose outlets and counter receptacles in
time, Rule 26-722 d). the kitchen.
In the kitchen, split-circuit receptacles and A receptacle outlet installed below the sink for
20-ampere T-slot receptacles prevent circuit overload- easy plug-in connection of a food waste disposal
ing from the heavy concentration and use of electrical is not included in the CEC requirements for split

B-6,8
B-16
F B-13
B-2,4
B-19

B-5
B-11
H B-15 G

I B-17
S

P
B-1,3

B-11
Dryer

D
Washer

Figure 14-10 Circuiting for special-purpose and counter receptacles in the kitchen and laundry.
 UNIT 14 Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Circuits for the Kitchen 267

circuits and is not required to be GFCI-protected or circuits for use with kitchen split receptacles is
tamper-resistant (CEC Rules 26-704 and 26-706 2)). found in Figure 14-13.
Split or 20-ampere T-slot receptacles are
mandatory along the countertop in the kitchen,
SPLIT-CIRCUIT RECEPTACLES Rule 26-722 d). These must be arranged so that
AND multi-wire CIRCUITS no more than two receptacles are on a circuit. Any
receptacle within 1.5 m of the sink must be a GFCI
Split-wired receptacles may be installed where a receptacle or GFCI-protected.
heavy concentration of plug-in load is anticipated, When a multi-wire branch circuit is used to
in which case, each half of the duplex recepta- supply fixed lighting loads and non-split duplex
cle is connected to a separate circuit, as shown in receptacles, the continuity of the identified neu-
Figures 14-11 and 14-12. An example of a two-pole tral conductor must be independent of the device
15-ampere breaker that feeds a three-wire branch connections. Instead of making connections of the

Proper way to connect grounded Improper way to connect grounded

A neutral conductors in a multi-wire B neutral conductors in a multi-wire
branch circuit. The receptacle can branch circuit. Not permitted. Removing
be removed without disrupting the receptacle will disrupt the circuit
the circuit. because the neutral bar on the
receptacle is part of the circuit.

Figure 14-11 Connecting the neutral in a three-wire (multi-wire) circuit, Rule 4-022 1) d).

Rule 14-010 b) requires that a

means must be provided to
120/240 volt simultaneously disconnect both
3-wire ungrounded conductors at the
circuit panelboard where the branch circuit
(multi-wire originates. This could be a two-pole
circuit) switch with fuses, a two-pole circuit
Split-wired breaker, or two single-pole circuit
receptacle breakers with a listed tie.

Figure 14-12 Split receptacle connected to a multi-wire circuit.

268 UNIT 14 Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Circuits for the Kitchen

240 volts are present on the wiring device, only

120 volts are connected to each receptacle on the
wiring device. The “simultaneous disconnect” rule
applies to any receptacles, lampholders, or switches
mounted on one yoke, Rule 14-010 b).
In the case of three-conductor split-duplex recep-
tacles installed in kitchens connected to multi-wire
branch circuits, the two-pole breaker in the panel
will disconnect all ungrounded conductors of the
circuit simultaneously. The local inspection author-
ity may permit you to make connections of the neu-
tral at the terminals of the receptacle when looping
between the counter receptacles in the kitchen.

GENERAL BONDING
CONSIDERATIONS
The specifications for the residence in the blueprints
Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

provided with this book require that all outlet boxes,

switch boxes, and fixtures be bonded to ground. In
other words, the entire wiring installation must be a
grounded system.
Rules 10-600 through 10-616 outline the bond-
Figure 14-13 Example of a two-pole 15-ampere ing requirements of electrical equipment. Every
breaker for use in multi-wire branch circuits for electrical component located within reach of a
kitchen split receptacles. grounded surface must be bonded. Post lights,
weatherproof receptacles, basement wiring, boxes
and fixtures within reach of sinks, ranges, and range
neutral at the terminals of the receptacle, the neutral hood fans must all be bonded. Hot water heating,
is tailed in the junction box and the tail is brought hot air heating, and steam heating registers are all
out to the receptacle; see Figure 14-11. grounded surfaces. This means that any electrical
Rule 14-010 b) requires all of the ungrounded equipment, boxes, or fixtures within reach of these
conductors of multi-wire branch circuit except for surfaces must be bonded. CEC Rule 10-700 requires
those supplying light fixtures or non-split recep- that all conductive non-electrical equipment in
tacles (which are connected to the neutral and plumbing, gas supply, and waste systems be kept
one ungrounded conductor) to be disconnected equipotential, or at the same voltage as the ground-
simultaneously. Therefore, when the breaker in a ing system for the dwelling.
panel supplying a receptacle is turned off, current Bonding is accomplished through the proper use
cannot be flowing in the neutral conductor. Still, of non-metallic-sheathed cable, armoured cable, and
Rule 4-022 1) d) requires that any identified conduc- metal conduit.
tor can be disconnected without disconnecting any When using non-metallic-sheathed cable (NMSC),
other identified conductor. The hazards of open neu- do not confuse the bare bonding conductor with the
trals are covered in Unit 19. grounded circuit conductor. The grounding or bond-
When multi-wire branch circuits supply more ing conductor is used to ground equipment, whereas
than one receptacle on the same yoke, a means must the white grounded conductor is one of the branch-cir-
be provided to simultaneously disconnect all of the cuit conductors. They may not be connected together
hot conductors at the panelboard where the branch except at the main service entrance equipment, where
circuit originates. Figure 14-12 shows that although this is achieved through the bonding screw or jumper.
 UNIT 14 Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Circuits for the Kitchen 269

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. What provision does the CEC require for microwave ovens in enclosures?

What is the relevant rule number?

2. Which circuit feeds the kitchen lighting? What size of conductor is used?

3. How many kitchen lighting outlets are connected to circuit A7?

4. Which colour of lamps is recommended for residential kitchen installations?

5. a. What is the minimum number of 15-ampere split circuits or 20-ampere circuits

required for a kitchen counter according to the CEC?
b. How many are there in this kitchen?
6. How many duplex receptacle outlets are provided in the kitchen?
7. What is meant by the term split-circuit receptacle?

8. A single receptacle connected to a circuit must have a rating

the ampere rating of the circuit.
9. In kitchens, receptacles along the countertop must be installed no farther than
mm apart.
10. A fundamental rule regarding the bonding of metal boxes, fixtures, and so on, is that they
must be grounded when “in reach of .”
11. How many circuit conductors enter the box
a. in the pot light box over the eating area?
b. at the two-gang switch located to the right of the sliding door?
12. How much space is there between the countertop and upper cabinets?
13. Where is the speed control for the exhaust fan located?
270 UNIT 14 Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Circuits for the Kitchen

14. Who furnishes the range hood?

15. List the small appliances in the kitchen that must be connected.

16. Complete the wiring diagram below by connecting feedthrough GFCI 1 to protect
receptacle 1, both to be supplied by Circuit A1. Also connect feedthrough GFCI 2 to
protect receptacle 2, both to be supplied by Circuit A2. Use coloured pencils or pens
or provide labels to show insulation colours. Assume that the wiring method is EMT,
where more freedom in the choice of insulation colours is possible.

A1 A2

Line Line Line Line

T R T R
Load Load Load Load

17. Each 15-ampere appliance circuit load demand shall be a maximum of: [circle one]
(1440 watts) (1500 watts) (1800 watts).
18. It is permitted to connect an outlet supplying a clock receptacle to the branch circuit
dedicated to the refrigerator circuit. [Circle one.] (True) (False)
19. Receptacles located above the countertops in the kitchen must be supplied by at least
15-ampere, three-wire circuits or 20-ampere T-slot.
 UNIT 14 Lighting Branch Circuit and Small-Appliance Circuits for the Kitchen 271

20. The following diagram is a layout for the lighting circuit for the kitchen. Complete
the wiring diagram using coloured pens or pencils to show or otherwise indicate the
conductors’ insulation colour.

B7

21. a. According to Rule 26-722 a), no point along the floor line shall be more than
m from a receptacle outlet.
b. According to Rule 26-722 c), a receptacle must be installed in any wall space
m wide or greater.
22. The CEC states that in multi-wire circuits, the screw terminals of a receptacle must
not be used to splice the neutral conductors. Why? Quote the rule number.

23. Exhaust fans produce noise. It is possible to compare the noise levels of different fans
before installation by comparing their ratings.
24. Is it permitted to connect the white grounded circuit conductor to the grounding
terminal of a receptacle?
UNIT

15
Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges,
Counter-Mounted Cooking Units , G

Wall-Mounted Ovens , Food Waste F

Disposals , and Dishwashers H I

Objectives
RED SEAL
OCCUPATIONAL After studying this unit, you should be able to
STANDARD ●● interpret electrical plans to determine special
(RSOS) installation requirements for freestanding
ranges, counter-mounted cooking units,
For the Red Seal exam,
wall-mounted ovens, food waste disposals, and
note that this unit covers
dishwashers
the following RSOS task:
●● compute demand factors for ranges, counter-
●● Task C-17
mounted cooking units, and wall-mounted
ovens
●● select proper conductor sizes for wiring
installations based on the ratings of appliances
●● ground all appliances properly regardless of the
wiring method used
(Continued)

272
 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units 273

●● understand how infinite heat covered by a sheet of high-temperature ceramic.

temperature controls operate These units have the same controls as standard
units and are wired according to the general
●● supply counter-mounted cooking units Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) guidelines for
and wall-mounted ovens by connecting cooking units. When the elements of these ceramic-
them to one feeder using the “tap” rule covered units are turned on, the ceramic above
●● understand how to install a feeder to each element changes colour slightly. Most of these
a junction box, and divide the feeder cooking units have a faint design in the ceramic to
locate the heating elements. The ceramic is rugged,
to individual circuits to supply the
attractive, and easy to clean.
appliances
In the residence in the plans, a separate circuit
●● install circuits for dishwashers and food is provided for a standard, exposed-element,
waste disposals counter-mounted cooking unit. This unit is rated
at 7450 watts and 120/240 volts. The ampere
rating is

The residence used as an example in this textbook W 7450

I5 5 amperes 5 31.04 amperes
has one built-in oven and one counter-mounted E 240
cooktop. Checking Table B-1, Schedule of Special-
The cooking unit outlet is indicated by the symbol
Purpose Outlets, in Appendix B at the back of the
book, we find that the built-in wall-mounted oven is G.
Rule 8-300 discusses how to calculate the
supplied by Circuit B6/B8, and the built-in cooktop
demand on the conductors feeding the counter-
is supplied by Circuit B2/B4.
mounted cooking unit.
Running separate circuits to individual appli-
ances is probably the most common method used
to connect appliances. However, according to
Rule 26-746 3), two or more separate built-in Installing the Cooking Unit
cooking units shall be counted as one appliance. CEC Table 2 and Rule 14-104 2) shows that
A single circuit is run from the main panel to a No. 8 AWG NMD90 may be used as the circuit
junction box located close to both the oven and conductors for the 31.04-ampere cooking unit
the cooktop. From this junction box, “taps” of installation. These circuit conductors are con-
smaller conductors are made to feed each appli- nected to Circuit B2/ B4, a two-pole, 40-ampere
ance. These taps should be less than 7.5 m long. circuit in Panel B.
Which method to use is governed by local rules The electrician must obtain the roughing-in
and consideration of the cost of installation (time dimensions for the counter-mounted cooking unit so
and material). that the cable can be brought to the proper location
This is how to use a single circuit for a separate at the proper height. In this way, the cable is hidden
cooktop and oven, and for a freestanding range. from view. To simplify both servicing and installa-
tion, a plug and receptacle combination may be used
in the supply line.
COUNTER-MOUNTED Most cooktop ma n ufacturers provide a junc-
COOKING UNIT CIRCUIT tion box on their units. The electrician can termi-
G
nate the circuit conductors of the appliance in this
Counter-mounted cooking units are available in box and make the proper connections to the resi-
many styles. Units may have two, three, or four dence wiring, or the manufacturer may connect a
surface heating elements. The surface heating short length of flexible conduit to the appliance.
elements of some cooking units are completely This conduit contains the conductors to which the
274 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units

electrician will connect the supply conductors in a General Wiring Methods

junction box furnished by either the electrician or
the manufacturer. You may use any of the standard wiring methods to
In the residence in the blueprints, the cooktop connect counter-mounted cooking units and wall-
range is installed in the island. (See the plans for mounted ovens. Freestanding ranges and clothes
details.) The feed will be a three-conductor non- dryers must be connected using receptacles and
metallic-sheathed cable with three No. 8 AWG cord-connected plugs, according to Rule 26-744.
copper conductors, plus an equipment-bonding Armoured or non-metallic-sheathed cable (NMSC)
conductor. The cable emerges from the right side may be used.
of Panel B, through the ceiling joists in the recre- Verify any local restrictions on the use of the
ation room, then upward into the base of the island wiring methods listed before proceeding.
cabinet. Because the recreation room has a dry-
wall ceiling, the cable is run to a point just below Bonding Requirements
the intended location of the kitchen island, leaving
ample cable length hanging in the basement. Before CEC Section 10 requires electric ranges, oven cook-
the gypsum board in the basement is installed, the top units, and electric clothes dryers to be bonded to
cable must be run up into the kitchen. ground, with a bonding conductor sized according
Later when the kitchen cabinets and the island to Table 16.
are installed and other finishing touches are being
done in the kitchen, the built-in appliances are set Surface Heating Elements
into place. Following this, the electrician completes for Cooking Units
the final hookup of the built-in appliances.
The plans show that a receptacle outlet is to The heating elements used in surface-type cooking
be installed on the side of the island containing units are manufactured in several steps. First, spiral-
the cooktop. This outlet is supplied by Circuit B15 wound nichrome resistance wire is impacted in
(see Figure 14-10 in Unit 14). magnesium oxide (a white, chalklike powder). The
wire is then encased in a nickel–steel alloy sheath,
flattened under very high pressure, and formed
Temperature Effects on Conductors
into coils. The flattened surface of the coil makes
Before beginning the installation, always check the good contact with the bottoms of cooking utensils.
appliance instructions provided by the manufac- Thus, efficient heat transfer takes place between the
turer. The supply conductors may require an insula- elements and the utensils.
tion rated for temperatures higher than the standard Cooktops with a smooth ceramic surface
rating of 60°C. offer the user ease in cleaning and a neater, more
If such information is not provided, it is safe to modern appearance. The electric heating elements
assume that the conductors used may have insula- are in direct contact with the underside of the
tion rated for 60°C. Table 19 gives the conductor ceramic top.
insulation temperature limitations and the accepted Figures 15-1 and 15-2 illustrate typical electric
applications for conductors. range surface units.
In addition, it is important to remember that the
conductors are hooked up to lugs or breakers that have
a temperature rating of their own and this imposes a TEMPERATURE CONTROL
limitation on the conductors. If a 90°C-rated conduc-
Infinite-Position Temperature Controls
tor is hooked up to a 75°C-rated breaker, the conduc-
tor may not carry more current than is indicated by Modern electric ranges are equipped with infinite-
the 75°C column of CEC Table 2, Rule 4-006 1). All position temperature knobs (controls) or programma-
circuit breakers are marked with a maximum temper- ble touch screens; see Figure 15-3. Older-style heat
ature of either 60°C or 75°C. controls connect the heating elements of a surface
 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units 275

Figure 15-1 Typical 240-volt electric range

Courtesy of Craig Trineer

surface heating element of the type used with
infinite heat controls.

FIGURE 15-4 Induction hotplate.

unit to 120 volts or 240 volts in series or in parallel

to attain a certain number of specific heat levels.
Some control knobs on ranges have a rotating cam
that provides an infinite number of heat positions. The
contacts open and close as a result of a heater-bimetal
device that is an integral part of the rotary control.
When the control is turned on, a separate set of pilot
light contacts closes and remains closed, while the
contacts for the heating element open and close to
attain and maintain the desired temperature of the sur-
Figure 15-2 Typical electric range surface unit face heating unit; see Figure 15-5.
of the type used with seven-position controls, as Inside these infinite-position temperature controls,
discussed in this textbook. contacts open and close repetitively. The temperature
of the surface heating element is regulated by the ratio
of the time the contacts are in the closed position ver-
sus the open position. This is termed input percentage.
The contacts in a temperature control of this
type have an expected life of over 250 000 automatic
cycles. The knob rotation expected life exceeds
30 000 operations.

Heat Generation by Surface

Heating Elements
The surface heating elements generate a large
amount of radiant heat. For example, a 1000-watt
heating unit generates about 3415 Btus of heat per
hour. A British thermal unit (Btu) is the amount of
Figure 15-3 Infinite-heat control switch. heat required to raise the temperature of 1 pound
(0.45 kg) of water by 1°F (0.556°C).
276 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units

Pilot
light
120 volts
Range
heating
Contacts element
L1

Heater (bimetal)
240 volts 120 volts

Contacts
L2

Figure 15-5 Typical internal wiring of an infinite-heat surface control.

Heat Generation by Induction certain metallic objects, it causes the electrons within
that object to move. When the electrons in a piece
Induction heating involves using the magnetic field of cookware on an induction cooking surface move
that surrounds every flow of electrons to create eddy after being attracted or repelled by the polarity of
currents in metal. When inductive forces are com- the magnetic field passing through the pot or pan,
bined in parallel with capacitive ones in a “tank the electrical resistance of the material that composes
circuit,” resonant current flow can result in induc- the cookware causes it to heat up. Induction heating
tion heating. When electrons move, this is referred heats the cookware itself, and then this heat transfers
to as a current flow, and it is measured in amperes. to the food. This allows efficient and precise heating
Any time that electrons move from one place to control, since the electronic mechanisms that control
another, a magnetic field accompanies this current current flow in an induction heat can switch power on
flow. In alternating current in North America, the and off very fast, or very slow, in a manner similar
direction of flow changes at a frequency of 60 Hz. to how a dimmer switch works. Induction hotplates
This means that the amperage that flows through a and stoves can heat food or boil water faster and with
device builds up to a maximum value in one direc- greater precision and efficiency than either an electric
tion, declines to zero amps, and then builds up to a or a gas stove because there is no convective process
maximum current in the other direction of the con- being applied to transfer heat to the pot or pan. The
ductor or device before once again declining to zero heat that is generated comes from within the pot itself.
amps. If this happens 60 times per second and maxi- For this reason, portable hotplates that run off of a
mum current is reached twice per cycle (once in each typical 15A breaker can cook faster than either the
alternating direction), then the current reaches a max- double-pole-breaker-fed resistive heating cooktops or
imum value of 120 times per second. The magnetic the gas burners that are typically found in homes.
field that accompanies any flow of electrons is pro- A drawback to cooking this way is that ceramic,
portional to the number of electrons flowing, so the aluminum, or copper cookware cannot be used with
magnetic field changes with the current. Since mag- an induction surface. Induction cookware is typi-
netism passes through all known matter, it penetrates cally made of thicker alloys of iron, so they will be
all nearby matter with the matter nearest to the source heavier and are sometimes more expensive.
of the field receiving the greatest intensity of the field.
The magnetism that passes through matter affects the WALL-MOUNTED OVEN
loosely bound electrons in that matter, causing the CIRCUIT F
electrons to move. It has been known for thousands
of years that some types of metals respond to mag- A separate circuit is provided for the wall-mounted
netic fields differently than other types of matter. Iron oven. The circuit is connected to Circuit B6/B8, a
in particular has “magnetic” properties, but all con- two-pole, 40-ampere circuit in Panel B and wired
ductive metals are affected by magnetism in subtle using a No. 8/3 AWG NMD90 cable. The receptacle
ways. When a changing magnetic field encounters for the oven is indicated by the symbol F.
 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units 277

The wall-mounted oven installed in the residence Clock timer

is rated at 6.6 kW or 6600 watts at 120/240 volts.
The current rating is
Pilot light
W 6600
I5 amperes 5 amperes 5 27.5 amperes
E 240
After determining the current rating (I = W/E), Thermostat
Bake unit
refer to CEC Table 2. You find No. 10 AWG copper
NMD 90 cable may be used to supply this 27.5-ampere
wall-mounted oven. However, Rule 14-104 2)
states that No. 10 conductors cannot be on a circuit
that is greater than 30 A. Therefore, a 40-ampere cir-
cuit breaker and No. 8 AWG NMD90 will be used. Broil unit
This allows the wire to be run at less than 80% of its
capacity since 27.5A/0.8 5 34.375A. (Another way Terminal block
to do this is 27.5A *1.25 5 34.375A.) See branch- 120 120
circuit requirements for ranges, ovens, and counter- volts volts
240 volts
top cooking units later in this unit.
Figure 15-6 Wiring diagram for an oven unit.
Self-Cleaning Oven
Self-cleaning ovens are popular appliances because
they automatically remove cooking spills from the on automatically at a preset time, heats for a preset
inside of the oven. Lined with high-temperature duration, and then turns off.
material, a self-cleaning oven can be set for a clean- Ovens are insulated with fibreglass or polyure-
ing temperature that is much higher than baking thane foam insulation placed within the oven walls
and broiling temperatures. When the self-clean con- to prevent excessive heat leakage. Figure 15-6 shows
trol is turned on, oven temperatures will approxi- a typical wiring diagram for a standard oven unit.
mate 427°C. At this temperature, all residue in the
oven, such as grease and drippings, is burned until
it is fine ash that can be removed easily. During the
Microwave Oven
self-clean cycle, for safety reasons, a special latch- The electrician’s primary concern is how to calculate
ing mechanism makes it impossible to open the the microwave oven load and how to install the
oven door until a predetermined safe temperature is circuit for microwave appliances to conform to
reached. Self-cleaning ovens do not require special Rule 26-720 h). The same rules apply for both
wiring and are electrically connected in the same electrical and electronic microwave cooking
manner as standard electric ovens. appliances.

Operation of the Oven

The oven heating elements are similar to the sur- BRANCH-CIRCUIT
face elements. The oven elements are mounted in REQUIREMENTS FOR RANGES,
removable frames. A thermostat controls their tem- OVENS, AND COUNTERTOP
perature. Any oven temperature can be obtained by COOKING UNITS*
setting the thermostat knob to the proper point on
The requirements for branch circuits supplying
the dial. The thermostat controls both the baking
ranges, ovens, and countertop cooking units are
element and the broiling element. These elements
covered in Rules 8-300 and 26-740 through 26-750.
can be used together to preheat the oven.
A combination clock and timer is used on most
ovens. The timer can be preset so that the oven turns *© 2021 Canadian Standards Association
278 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units

Some key requirements are 4. In amperes, the calculated load is

●● Branch-circuit conductors for electric ranges, W 8820
countertop cooking units, and built-in ovens are I5 5 amperes 5 36.75 amperes
E 240
based on the demand factors of Rule 8-300.
This range requires that No. 8 NMD90 con­ductors
●● When sizing the conductors for a range, the
be used for the branch circuit to the range. The size of
demand is considered to be 8 kW if the range
the neutral is the same as that of the line conductors
is 12 kW or less. If the range has a rating of
even though the 120 V load is minimal for the element
more than 12 kW, the demand is considered to
pilot lights and clock. If a range is rated at not over
be 8 kW 1 40% of the amount by which the
12 kW, the maximum power demand is based on Rule
range exceeds 12 kW, Rule 8-300.
8-300 1) a). For example, if the range is rated at 11.4
●● Two or more separate built-in units may be con- kW, the maximum demand is based on 8 kW:
sidered as a single range, Rule 8-300.
W 8000
●● When a single branch circuit is used to sup- I5 5 amperes 5 33.3 amperes
E 240
ply separate built-in units, tap conductors to an
individual unit must have an ampacity equal to Therefore, as required by Rule 14-104 2), No. 8 AWG
the rating of the unit they supply, Rule 26-742. three-wire NMD90 cable can be installed for this range.
The disconnecting means for a freestanding
●● The demand factors of Rule 8-300 may not be
range having a demand of 50 amperes or less shall
applied to cord-connected appliances such as
be a cord and plug; see Figure 15-7. For electric
hot plates and rangettes.
ranges, these cords and plugs are rated at 50 amperes
●● When a gas range is installed, a receptacle and must have an attachment plug of Canadian
will be required in the wall behind the range. Standards Association (CSA) configuration
The receptacle should be mounted as close to 14-50R. Figure 15-8 shows the correct wiring to
the centreline of the range as possible and not the terminals on the receptacle. The receptacle for
more than 130 mm above the finished floor, this plug must be flush-mounted, when practical,
Rule 26-722. Rule 26-744 9), and be installed according to Rule
26-744 6):
●● centre of the receptacle not more than 130 mm
above the finished floor (AFF)
FREESTANDING RANGE
●● as near as possible to the centreline of the space
The demand calculations for a single freestand- the range will occupy
ing range are simple. For example, a single electric ●● with the U-ground oriented to either side
range to be installed has a rating of 14 050 watts
(exactly the same as the combined built-in units):
1. 14 050 watts 2 12 000 watts 5 2050 watts or
2 kW
2. According to Rule 8-300 1) b), the conduc-
Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

tors of a branch circuit supplying a range shall

be considered to have a demand of 8 kW plus
40% of the amount that the rating of the range
exceeds 12 kW.
For example,
Figure 15-7 Range receptacles rated at
2050 watts 3 40% 5 820 watts 50 amperes, 125/250 volts. Be sure to mount the
or 0.8 kW 4-11/16 in. box so that the ground pin will be to
either side.
3. Calculated load 5 8 kW 1 0.8 kW 5 8.8 kW
 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units 279

(L1) Black Figure 15-9 shows a countertop cooking unit

Y “hot” conductor and a built-in oven connected to a single branch
circuit. The calculation of the demand load is

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

W G Green or bare
bonding
conductor
Counter-mounted cooking unit 7450 watts
X Built-in oven 6600 watts
White
Total connected load 14 050 watts
neutral (L2) Red
conductor “hot” conductor

Orient the U-ground to either side The demand on the conductors will be consid-
ered to be
Figure 15-8 Correct wiring connections for
the terminals on the range receptacle rated at 8 kW 1 40% of the amount the units exceed
50 amperes, 125/250 volts, CSA configuration 12 000 watts. The units exceed 12 000 watts
14–50R, Diagram 1. by 14 050 watts 2 12 000 5 2050 watts
The demand on the conductors is then
(8000 1 40% of 2050) watts 5 8820 watts
BRANCH CIRCUITS 8820/240 amperes 5 36.8 amperes
SUPPLYING SEPARATE BUILT-IN
COOKING UNITS Therefore, No. 8 AWG copper NMD90 cable may be
used as the branch-circuit conductors for the cooking
The branch circuit that supplies a separate unit and built-in oven. The wire can handle up to 90°C,
counter-top cooking unit and a built-in oven but it is hooked up to a breaker and breakers have a
may be treated the same as a circuit for a single limitation of either 60°C or 75°C at their terminals.
range. (Remember to consult your local inspection The tap conductors to the cooking unit and built-
authority before you initiate construction). The in oven must have a current-carrying capacity that is
demand on the conductors is considered to be equal to the ratings of the units they supply.
8 kW for ranges up to 12 kW and 8 kW 1 40% of Counter-mounted cooking unit:
the amount by which the cooking units exceed
12 kW when the combined load of the units exceed 7450/240 amperes = 31.04 amperes
12 kW. No. 8 AWG copper NMD90 (Table 2) and
Rule 14-104 2)

50-ampere Feeders No. 8 NMD90

Junction boxes
circuit

120/240
volt
supply

Taps must be of suitable

Taps No. 8 capacity for load to be served. Taps No. 8
Refer to Rules NMD90
NMD90
26-742 a) b) c)
and 14-100 c)

Wall-mounted oven Counter-mounted

6600 watts, cooking unit, 7450 watts,
27.5 amperes 31 amperes

Figure 15-9 Counter-mounted cooktop and wall-mounted oven connected to one circuit.
280 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units

Built-in oven: Single-pole

ON–OFF switch
6600/240 amperes = 27.50 amperes located above
countertop near
No. 10 AWG copper NMD90 (Table 2) and disposal unit.
Rule 14-104 2)
The tap conductors should not be longer than
necessary. If you are in doubt about the length of 120-volt supply.
these conductors, consult with your electrical AFCI protection Food
required. waste
inspector; otherwise, consider 7.5 m to be the limit. disposal
At one time, a separate fuse or breaker was
required to provide overcurrent protection for a
countertop cooking unit and built-in oven. This Two-wire Type AC cable.
requirement has been deleted from the CEC. If Type NM cable is used,
equipment bonding
Overload protection
built into disposal
conductor is required. unit.

FOOD WASTE DISPOSAL H Figure 15-10 Wiring for a food waste disposal
operated by a separate switch located above the
The food waste disposal outlet is represented on the countertop near the sink.
plans by the symbol H . The food waste disposal
is rated at 7.2 amperes. This appliance is connected
to Circuit B19, a separate 15-ampere, 120-volt install a built-in thermal protector to meet CEC
branch circuit in Panel B. No. 14 NMD90 conduc- requirements. Either a manual reset or an automatic
tors are used to supply the unit. The conductors ter- reset thermal protector may be used.
minate in a junction box provided on the disposal.
Disconnecting Means
Overload Protection
All electrical appliances must be provided with some
The food waste disposal is a motor-operated means of disconnecting them, Rule 14-010. The dis-
appliance. Food waste disposals normally are driven connecting means may be a separate ON–OFF switch
by a ¼ hp or ¹⁄ ³ hp, split-phase, 120-volt motor. (see Figure 15-10), a cord connection (Fig­­­ure 15-11),
Therefore, running overload protection must be or a branch-circuit switch or circuit breaker, such as
provided. Most food waste disposal manufacturers that supplying the installation in Figure 15-12.

EGC
Branch-circuit wiring concealed in
wall behind cabinets. Wiring feeds
into flush-mounted switch box under
countertop in space near food waste
disposal.

Flush-mounting box
cover unit with grounding
receptacle. Food
waste
disposal

Three-wire grounding-type
attachment plug cap.
Permitted to serve as Three-conductor cord, Type S, SO, ST, SJ, SJO, SJT.
the disconnecting means. Cord must not be less than 450 mm long or over 900 mm long.
Cord must be provided by appliance manufacturer.

Figure 15-11 Typical cord connection for a food waste disposal, Rule 14-602.
 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units 281

Single-pole, ON–OFF switch in the switch box provides the ON–OFF

control switch actuated
by twisting drain lid. control of the disposal.
In the kitchen of this residence, the food waste
Food
Running overload waste disposal is controlled by a single-pole switch located
protection built into disposal
the disposal. to the right of the kitchen sink, above the countertop.
Another possibility, but not as convenient, is to
120-volt supply. install the switch for the disposal inside the cabinet
AFCI protection of outlet required.
space directly under the sink near the food waste
Two-wire Type AC cable. If Type NMS cable is used,
equipment bonding conductor is required. disposal.

Figure 15-12 Wiring for a food waste disposal Integral ON–OFF Switch. A food waste dis-
with an integral ON-OFF switch. posal may be equipped with an integral prewired
control switch. This integral control starts and
stops the disposal when the user twists the drain
cover into place. An extra ON–OFF switch is not
Some local codes may require that food waste
required. To connect the disposal, the electrician
disposals, dishwashers, and trash compactors be
runs the supply conductors directly to the junction
cord-connected (Figure 15-11) to make it easier to
box on the disposal and makes the proper connec-
disconnect the unit, replace it, service it, and reduce
tions; see Figure 15-12.
noise and vibration. The appliance shall be intended
or identified for flexible cord connection. Disposal with Flow Switch in Cold Water Line.
Some manufacturers of food waste disposals recom-
Turning the Food Waste mend that a flow switch be installed in the cold water
Disposal On and Off line under the sink; see Figure 15-13. This switch
is connected in series with the disposal motor. The
Separate ON–OFF Switch. When a separate flow switch prevents the disposal from operating
ON–OFF switch is used, a simple circuit arrange- until a predetermined quantity of water is flowing
ment can be made by running a two-wire sup- through it. The cold water helps prevent clogged
ply cable to a switch box located next to the sink drains by solidifying any grease in the disposal.
at a convenient location above the countertop Thus, the addition of a flow switch means that the
(Fig­ure 15-10). Not only is this convenient, but it disposal cannot be operated without water.
positions the switch out of the reach of children. A Figure 15-13 shows one method of installing a
second cable is run from the switch box to the junc- food waste disposal with a flow switch in the cold
tion box of the food waste disposal. A single-pole water line.

Single-pole, ON–OFF
To control switch actuated
Flow faucet by twisting drain lid.
switch
120-volt supply
AFCI protection of outlet required

Food
Cord connected as per waste
Two-wire AC; if Type NM, Rule 26-744 8) disposal
then equipment
bonding conductor
required. Running overload
Cold water protection built
pipe into the disposer.

Figure 15-13 Disposal with a flow switch in the cold water line.
282 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units

Bonding Requirements Wiring the Dishwasher

Rule 10-600 states that all exposed, non-current- The dishwasher manufacturer normally supplies
carrying parts are to be bonded to ground. The pres- a terminal or junction box on the appliance. The
ence of any of the conditions outlined in Rules 10-600, electrician connects the supply conductors in this
10-606, 10-610, and 10-614 requires that all electrical box. The electrician must verify the dimensions of
appliances in the dwelling be grounded. Food waste the dishwasher so that the supply conductors are
disposals can be grounded using any of the methods brought to the proper point.
covered in the previous units, such as the separate The dishwasher is a motor-operated appliance and
bonding conductor of non-metallic-sheathed cable. requires running overload protection. Such protection
prevents the motor from burning out if it becomes
overloaded or stalled. Normally, the required protec-
tion is supplied by the manufacturer as an integral
Dishwasher I
part of the dishwasher motor. If the dishwasher does
Although not a requirement of the CEC, the dish­ not have integral protection, the electrician must pro-
washer is supplied by a separate 15-ampere circuit vide it as part of the installation of the unit.
connected to Circuit B5. No. 14 NMD90 conductors
are used to connect the appliance. The dishwasher
has a ¼ hp motor rated at 5.8 amperes and Grounding
120 volts. The outlet for the dishwasher is shown The dishwasher must be bonded to ground. The
by the symbol I . During the drying cycle of the bonding of appliances is described fully in previous
dishwasher, a thermostatically controlled, 750-watt units and in the discussion of the food waste disposal.
electric heating element turns on. Use a 15-ampere
circuit.

PORTABLE DISHWASHERS
Actual
connected load Circuit calculation Portable dishwashers have one hose that is attached
Motor   5.8 A 5.8 A 3 1.25 5 7.25 A to the water faucet and a water drainage hose that
Heater 6.25 A 6.25 A hangs in the sink. The obvious location for a portable
Total 12.05 A 13.5    A dishwasher is near the sink, so the dishwasher prob-
ably will be plugged into the outlet nearest the sink.
Portable dishwashers are supplied with a
For most dishwashers, the motor does not run three-wire cord containing two circuit conduc-
during the drying cycle. Thus, the actual maximum tors and one bonding conductor and a three-wire
demand on the branch circuit would be only the grounding-type attachment plug cap. If the three-
larger of the two loads—the 750-watt heating ele- wire plug cap is plugged into the three-wire
ment. In some dishwashers, there is a fan or blower grounding-type receptacle, the dishwasher is ade-
to speed up the drying time. In either case, for the quately grounded. Whenever there is a chance
dryer example shown, a 15-ampere circuit is more that the user may touch the appliance and a
than adequate. grounded surface such as the water pipe or
Energy-saving dishwashers are equipped with a faucet at the same time, the equipment must
built-in booster water heater that allows the home- be bonded to ground to reduce the shock haz-
owner to adjust the regular water heater temperature ard by providing a low impedance path back
to 50°C or lower. The booster heater of the dish- to the transformer via the neutral. This initi-
washer then raises the water temperature from 50°C ates the overcurrent protection and removes
to a temperature not less than 60°C for the wash the energized state from the appliance. Some
cycle, and 80°C for the rinse cycle, the temperature appliances are double-insulated, which means that
considered necessary to sanitize dishes. the appliance or tool has two independent layers of
 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units 283

insulation between the hot conductor and the per- CORD CONNECTION
son using the device. Although refrigerators, cook- OF FIXED APPLIANCES
ing units, water heaters, and other large appliances
are not double-insulated, many portable hand-held As with the previously discussed food waste dis-
appliances and tools have double insulation. posal, residential built-in dishwashers are permitted
All double-insulated tools and appliances to be cord-connected.
must be marked by the manufacturer to indicate Some electrical inspectors feel that using the
this feature. These tools and appliances must be cord-connection method to connect these appliances
marked with the words “Double Insulated” or the is better than direct connection (sometimes referred
symbol as specified in CSA Standard C22.2 No. to as “hard-wired”) because it allows them to be
0.1–M1985. easily removed for maintenance and repairs.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

Counter-Mounted Cooking Unit Circuit G

1. a. What circuit supplies the counter-mounted cooking unit in this residence?

b. What is the rating of this circuit?

2. What methods may be used to connect counter-mounted cooking units?

3. Is it permissible to use standard 90°C insulated conductors to connect all counter-

mounted cooking units? Why?

4. Indicate the maximum operating temperature (in degrees Celsius) for the following.
a. Type TW conductors
b. Type TWN75 conductors
c. Type R90 conductors
5. May NMWU cable be used to connect counter-mounted cooking units?
284 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units

6. a. What CEC rule applies to bonding a counter-mounted cooking unit?

b. How is the counter-mounted cooking unit bonded to ground?

7. a. What is the mounting height of the receptacle supplying a range?

b. In which direction should the U-ground slot be oriented?

c. Give the CEC section number and rule.

8. Heating elements have a fixed resistance but can vary in wattage put out. When the
voltage to an element is doubled, the wattage [circle one]
a. increases. b. decreases.
9. One kilowatt equals Btu per hour.
10. How much heat will a 1000-watt heating element produce if operated continuously
for 1 year?
11. What advantages does induction-heated cooking have over resistive-heating
cooking elements?

12. What is a potential disadvantage of cooking on an induction heating surface?

WALL-MOUNTED OVEN CIRCUIT F

1. To what circuit is the wall-mounted oven connected?

2. An oven is rated at 7.5 kW. This is equal to
a. watts. b. amperes at 240 volts.
3. a. What section of the CEC governs the bonding of a wall-mounted oven?

b. How are wall-mounted ovens bonded to ground?

 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units 285

4. What is the type and rating of the overcurrent device protecting the wall-mounted oven?

5. How many metres of cable are required to connect the oven in the residence?

6. When connecting a wall-mounted oven and a counter-mounted cooking unit to one

feeder, how long are the taps to the individual appliances?

7. A 6 kW counter-mounted cooking unit and a 4 kW wall-mounted oven are to be

installed in a residence. Calculate the demand according to Rule 8-300 1). Show all
calculations.
8. a. What size conductors will feed both the counter-mounted cooktop and
the wall-mounted oven in Question 7 from the panel to the junction box?

b. What size conductors would be required if each of the units in Question 7 were
wired individually? and
9. a. A freestanding range is rated at 11.8 kW, 240 volts. According to Rule 8-300 1),
what is the demand?
b. What size wire (Type NMD90) is required?
c. What type of receptacle is required for the range?

FOOD WASTE DISPOSAL CIRCUIT Disposals H

1. How many amperes does the food waste disposal draw?

2. a. To what circuit is the food waste disposal connected?
b. What size wire is used to connect the food waste disposal?
3. Means must be provided to disconnect the food waste disposal. The homeowner
need not be involved in electrical connections when servicing the disposal if the
disconnecting means is

4. How is running overload protection provided in most waste disposal units?

5. Why are flow switches sometimes installed on food waste disposals?

286 UNIT 15 Special-Purpose Outlets for Ranges, Counter-Mounted Cooking Units

6. What CEC sections relate to the bonding of appliances?

7. Do the plans show a wall switch for controlling the food waste disposal?

8. A separate circuit supplies the food waste disposal in this residence. How many metres
of cable will be required to connect the disposal?

DISHWASHER CIRCUIT I

1. a. To what circuit is the dishwasher in this residence connected?

b. What size wire is used to connect the dishwasher?

2. The motor on the dishwasher is [circle one]
a. ¼ hp     b. ¹⁄³ hp     c. ½ hp
3. The heating element is rated at [circle one]
a. 750 watts     b. 1000 watts     c. 1250 watts
4. How many amperes at 120 volts do the following heating elements draw?
a. 750 watts
b. 1000 watts
c. 1250 watts
5. How is the dishwasher in this residence grounded?

6. What type of cord is used on most portable dishwashers?

7. How is a portable dishwasher grounded?

8. a. What is double insulation?

b. What is the symbol for double insulation?

9. Who is to furnish the dishwasher?

10. Does the CEC require a separate circuit for the dishwasher?
 UNIT

16
Branch Circuits for
the Laundry, Powder
Room/Washroom,
and Attic
Objectives
RED SEAL
After studying this unit, you should be able to
OCCUPATIONAL
● make the proper wiring and bonding STANDARD
connections for large appliances, using various (RSOS)
wiring methods
● understand the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) For the Red Seal exam,
requirements governing the receptacle outlet(s) note that this unit covers
for laundry areas the following RSOS task:
● discuss the CEC rules pertaining to wiring
●● Task C-17
methods in attics
● demonstrate the proper way to connect pilot
lights and pilot light switches

287
288 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic

DRYER CIRCUIT residence also has an exhaust fan located in the

D
laundry room.
A separate circuit is provided in the laundry room
for the electric clothes dryer (Figure 16-1). This Connection of Electric Clothes Dryer
appliance demands a large amount of power. The
The connection of electric clothes dryers is gov-
special circuit provided for the dryer is indicated
erned by Rule 26-744 2) 3). Figure 16-2 shows the
on the plans by the symbol D
. The dryer is con- internal components and wiring of a typical electric
nected to Circuit B1/B3. clothes dryer.
A separate receptacle, as shown in CSA con-
Clothes Dryer figuration 14–30R, Diagram 1, should be installed
on the wall adjacent to the dryer. Rule 26-744 3)
Clothes dryer manufacturers make many dryer requires that a cord set as shown in Canadian Stan-
models with different wiring arrangements and dards Association (CSA) configuration 14–30P
connection provisions. All electric dryers have be used to connect the dryer to the receptacle;
electric heating units and a motor-operated drum, see Figure 16-3. A disconnecting means is not
which tumbles the clothes as the heat evaporates required for this appliance, since the attachment
the moisture. Dryers also have thermostats to regu- plug and dryer receptacle may be used instead of a
late the temperature of the air inside the dryer. switch, even though it is within 1.5 m of the sink,
Timers regulate the lengths of the various drying Rule 26-746 2) a).
cycles. Drying time, determined by the type of fab- The dryer receptacle can be wired with NMD90
ric, can be set to a maximum of about 85 minutes. cable if concealed wiring is desired. If the NMD90 is
Dampness controls are often provided to stop the dry- run exposed, it must be protected from mechani-
ing process at a preselected stage of dampness so that cal injury. In the residence, the wiring method for
it is easier to iron the clothes. the dryer is non-metallic-sheathed cable (NMSC),
Clothes dryers create a lot of humid air. There- which runs from Panel B to a dryer receptacle on
fore, be sure the dryer is vented to the outside. This the wall behind the dryer (Figure 16-4). A cord set is

B11
B7

F GFCI

POWDER ROOM
D F

$$
$$

SERVICE
W ENTRANCE

LAUNDRY
ROOM

To attic lampholders

Figure 16-1 Cable layout for Circuits B7 and B11.

 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic 289

Heating
Motor elements
protector
M H

L
Timer
SWITCH

Terminal
block
MOTOR Light

120 V
240 V
120 V
Temperature
Bonding strap NC
safety switch
Bonding strap must
Equipment be connected to neutral
bonding if equipment bonding
conductor conductor is not supplied THERMOSTAT
with branch circuit.

Figure 16-2 Laundry dryer: Wiring and components.

Courtesy of Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

10/3 NMD90 cable

All Rights Reserved.

4-wire, 30-ampere
125/250-volt
NEMA 14-30R receptacle
Surface mount outlet Flush mount outlet
4-wire cord Dryer
Figure 16-4 Surface mount and flush mount
Figure 16-3 Dryer connection using a cord set. dryer receptacles.

attached to the dryer and is plugged into this recep- Green or bare
bonding conductor
tacle. The dryer receptacle and cord have a current-
carrying capacity that is rated at 125% greater than
the dryer rating. G

A standard dryer receptacle and cord set, as

shown in Figure 16-3, is usually rated at 30 amperes, Black
Y X
Red
125/250 volts. Figure 16-5 shows the correct L1 “hot” L 2 “hot”
conductor conductor
wiring connections to the terminals on the receptacle. W
Cords and receptacles rated for a higher current are
available. The L-shaped neutral slot of the outlet
White neutral
does not accept a 50-ampere cord set. conductor
The receptacle must be flush-mounted, if prac-
tical, according to Rule 26-744 9). The outlet will Figure 16-5 Correct wiring for the terminals on the
dryer receptacle rated at 30 amperes, 125/250 volts,
fit a 411/16 in. square box. Make sure that the box CSA configuration 14–30R. Refer to Diagram 1.
is mounted in the proper orientation to ensure that
290 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic

the appliance cord hangs down and reduces strain No. 12 AWG wire if 90°C-rated and No. 10 AWG
on the receptacle. wire if 75°C-rated. Since all devices in this house
In this residence, the dryer is installed in the laun- are to be hooked up to circuit breakers and since cir-
dry room. The schedule of special-purpose outlets cuit breakers have either a 60°C or 75°C rating, the
in the specifications shows that the dryer is rated at No. 10 non-metallic-sheathed cable will have to be
5700 watts and 120/240 volts. The schematic wiring used.
diagram, Figure 16-2, shows that the heating ele- By CEC definition, a branch circuit refers to
ments are connected to the 240-volt terminals of the circuit conductors between the final overcur-
the terminal block. The dryer motor and light are rent device and the outlet. Therefore, the conduc-
connected between the hot wire and the neutral tors between the overcurrent device in Panel B
terminal, 120 volts. and the dryer outlet constitute the dryer’s branch
The motor of the dryer has integral thermal pro- circuit.
tection. This prevents the motor from reaching dan-
gerous temperatures as a result of an overload or
failure to start. Rule 14-610 specifies the overcurrent Overcurrent Protection
protection requirements for electric clothes dryers Rule 14-104 states that the branch-circuit overcur-
and states that, when fuses are used, they must be rent device rating is not to exceed the allowable
time-delay (D) or low melting point fuses (P). ampacity of the conductors. The size of the fuse
To determine the feeder rating for the house, the or circuit breaker may be obtained from Table 13.
CEC requires that the load included for a dryer be Here, again, the manufacturer of the appliance will
25% of the nameplate rating, assuming that an elec- mark the circuit overcurrent device rating. If the
tric range has been included, Rule 8-200 1) a) vii). appliance is not marked, the overcurrent protection
The branch-circuit ampacity is based on the shall be in accordance with Rule 4-004 for the
nameplate rating of the dryer. If it is not clear what conductors—30 amperes for our example, as
the load of an appliance is, always base it on the discussed above.
nameplate rating.

Conductor Size Bonding Frames of Ranges

Rule 26-746 1) states that any appliance rated at
and Dryers
more than 1500 watts shall be supplied from a Rule 10-600 requires that the exposed non-current-
branch circuit used solely for one appliance. carrying metal parts of portable equipment such as
The electric clothes dryer in this residence has a clothes dryers or ranges be bonded to ground.
nameplate rating of 5700 watts. Thus, As already stated, the branch-circuit conductors
for the dryer are connected to Panel B, Circuit B1/
W 5700
I5 5 5 23.75 amperes B3. This is a double-pole circuit that breaks only the
E 240 two ungrounded conductors. The neutral conductor
If we apply Rule 8-104, that is, to multiply the remains solid and unbroken.
current rating times 125% to find the required cir-
cuit ampacity, we find that
RECEPTACLE
OUTLETS—LAUNDRY
23.75 amperes × 1.25 = 29.7 (30) amperes
Rule 26-720 e) i) and ii) requires that at least two
Accordingly, the dryer Circuit B1/B3 is a three- receptacles be installed in a laundry room—one for
wire, 30-ampere, 240-volt circuit. Consulting CEC a washing machine and at least one more.
Table 2, it can be seen that the conductors in the non- In the laundry room in this residence, the
metallic-sheathed cable that feed the dryer could be 15-ampere Circuit B11 supplies the receptacle for
 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic 291

Courtesy of Broan-NuTone Canada Inc.

Wall type Ceiling type

Figure 16-6 Exhaust fans.

the washer, as well as the other two receptacles Any exhaust ducting located in an attic space
in the room, which will serve an iron, a sewing must be insulated. During the cold season, any
machine, and other small portable appliances. The moisture that is removed by an exhaust fan will
receptacle is not required to be ground-fault circuit condense in an uninsulated duct. This will lead to
interrupter (GFCI)–protected. Figure 16-1 shows premature rusting of the exhaust duct and fan. The
the cable layout for the laundry room. moisture can also leak out of the fan or duct, causing
serious water damage.
The fan unit terminates in a metal hood or
LIGHTING CIRCUIT grille on the exterior of the house. The fan has a
The general lighting circuit for the laundry, powder shutter that opens as the fan starts up and closes as
room/washroom, kitchen, garage, attic, and service the fan stops. The fan may have an integral pull-
entrance lights are all supplied by Circuit B7. chain switch for starting and stopping, or it may
The types of vanity lights, ceiling fixtures, and be used with a separate wall switch. In either case,
standard wall receptacle outlets, as well as the cir- single-speed or multispeed control is available.
cuitry and switching arrangements, are similar to The fan in use has a very small power demand, 90
those discussed in other units of this text. volt–amperes.

HUMIDITY CONTROL
Exhaust Fans
An electrically heated dwelling can experience a
Ceiling exhaust fans are installed in the laundry problem with excess humidity due to the “tightness”
and powder room/washroom and connected to of the house because of the care taken in the instal-
Circuit B7.
lation of the insulation and vapour barriers. High
The exhaust fan in the laundry will remove excess
humidity is uncomfortable. It promotes the growth of
moisture resulting from the use of the clothes washer
mould and the deterioration of fabrics and floor cover-
and dryer.
Exhaust fans may be installed in walls or ceil- ings. In addition, the framing members, wall panels,
ings; see Figure 16-6. The wall-mounted fan can be and plaster or drywall of a dwelling may deteriorate
adjusted to fit the thickness of the wall. If a ceiling- because of the humidity. Insulation must be kept
mounted fan is used, sheet-metal duct is recom- dry, or its efficiency decreases. A low humidity level
mended between the fan unit and the outside of the can be maintained by automatically controlling the
house. exhaust fan.
292 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic

One type of automatic control is the humidistat. The humidistat and relay for the attic exhaust
This device starts the exhaust fan when the rela- fan are installed using No. 14 NMD90. The cable
tive humidity reaches a high level. The fan exhausts runs from Circuit A26 to a 4 in. square, 1½ in.
air until the relative humidity drops to a comfort- deep outlet box located in the attic near the fan;
able level. The comfort level is about 50% relative see Figure 16-8, Part B. A motor circuit switch is
humidity. Adjustable settings are from 0 to 90% mounted on this outlet box. This switch unit serves
relative humidity. as a disconnecting means within sight of the motor,
The electrician must check the maximum cur- as required by Rules 28-600 and 28-602 3) e).
rent and voltage ratings of the humidistat before Motor overload protection is provided by the heater
the device is installed. Some humidistats are extra- unit installed in the motor-rated switch. As an alter-
low-voltage devices and require a relay. Other native, an AC general-purpose switch rated at 125%
humidistats are rated at line voltage and can be of the full load amperes (FLA) of the motor may be
used to switch the motor directly (a relay is not used as the disconnecting means.
required). However, a relay must be installed on Mounted next to the switch unit is a relay that
the line-voltage humidistat if the connected load can carry the full-load current of the motor. Extra-
exceeds the maximum allowable current rating of low-voltage thermostat wire runs from this relay
the humidistat. to the humidistat. (The humidistat is located in
The switching mechanism of a humidistat is the hall between the bedrooms.) The thermostat
controlled by a nylon element (see Figure 16-7) that cable is a two-conductor cable since the humidistat
is very sensitive to changes in humidity. A bimetal- has a single-pole, single-throw switching action.
lic element cannot be used because it reacts to tem- The line-voltage side of the relay provides single-
perature changes only. pole switching to the motor. Normally, the white
grounded conductor is not broken.
Although the example in this residence utilizes
a relay to use extra-low-voltage wiring, it is also
proper to install line-voltage wiring and use line-
voltage thermostats and humidity controls. These
are becoming very popular, with the switches actu-
ally being solid-state speed controllers, permitting
operation of the fan at an infinite number of speeds
between high and low settings.

ATTIC LIGHTING AND PILOT

LIGHT SWITCHES
It is always good practice to install at least one
lighting outlet in an attic and to control it by a
switch located near the access point of the attic.
The light should have a guard to protect it from
Courtesy of Craig Trineer

injury or a short flexible drop light may be used.

Many attics are used for storage. They may also
contain equipment that might need to be ser-
viced, so it is desirable to install a lighting outlet.
Ambient temperatures in attics can exceed the rat-
Figure 16-7 The details a humidity control used
ings of some equipment. Any circuit and equip-
with an exhaust fan. ment wiring calculations and requirements must
take this into account, Rule 4-004 7). Table 16-2,
 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic 293

Disconnect switch within sight and

running overload protection
(1.25 x full-load amperes) Outlet box
Motor

120-volt
circuit

Line-voltage
humidistat
SPST

A Humidistat without a relay included in the circuit

Low-voltage conductors

Low-voltage
humidistat
SPST Relay

Motor
Outlet box

120-volt
circuit

Disconnect switch within sight and

running overload protection
(1.25 x full-load amperes)

B Humidistat with a relay included in the circuit

Figure. 16-8 Wiring for humidity control.

which reproduces CEC Table 5A, shows the de- be in series with the lamp load; see Figure 16-10.
rating factors for ambient temperatures greater The voltage across the load lamp is virtually zero,
than 30°C. These must be applied for wiring in so it does not light, and the voltage across the
attics where the ambient temperature could easily neon lamp is 120 volts, allowing it to glow. When
exceed 30°C. the switch is turned on, the neon lamp is bypassed
The four keyless lampholders in the attic are (shunted), causing it to turn off and the lamp load
turned on and off by a single-pole switch on the to turn on.
garage wall close to the attic storable stairway. Use this type of switch when it is desirable to
Associated with this single-pole switch is a pilot have a switch glow in the dark to make it easy to
light. The pilot light may be located in the handle locate.
of the switch or separately mounted. Figure 16-9
shows how pilot lamps are connected in circuits Installation of Cable in Attics
containing either single-pole or three-way switches.
If a neon pilot lamp in the handle (toggle) of a The wiring in the attic is to be done in cable and
switch does not have a separate grounded conductor must meet the requirements of Rules 12-500
connection, it will glow only when the switch is in through 12-526 for non-metallic-sheathed cable.
the OFF position because the neon lamp will then These rules describe how the cable is to be
294 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic

Table 16-2
CEC Table 5A.
CEC TABLE 5A
CORRECTION FACTORS APPLYING TO TABLES 1, 2, 3, 4, and 60
(AMPACITY CORRECTION FACTORS FOR AMBIENT TEMPERATURES ABOVE 30°C)
(Rules 4-004 7) and 16-330 and Tables 1 to 4, 57, 58, and 60)

CORRECTION FACTOR

Ambient Insulation Temperature Rating, °C†

temperature
°C 60 75 90 105* 110* 125* 150* 200* 250*
35 0.91 0.94 0.96 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.98 0.99 0.99
40 0.82 0.88 0.91 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98
45 0.71 0.82 0.87 0.89 0.90 0.92 0.94 0.95 0.97
50 0.58 0.75 0.82 0.86 0.87 0.89 0.91 0.94 0.95
55 0.41 0.67 0.76 0.82 0.83 0.86 0.89 0.92 0.94
60 — 0.58 0.71 0.77 0.79 0.83 0.87 0.91 0.93
65 0.47 0.65 0.73 0.75 0.79 0.84 0.89 0.92
70 — 0.33 0.58 0.68 0.71 0.76 0.82 0.87 0.90
75 — — 0.50 0.63 0.66 0.73 0.79 0.86 0.89
80 — — 0.41 0.58 0.61 0.69 0.76 0.84 0.88
90 — — — 0.45 0.50 0.61 0.71 0.80 0.85
100 — — — 0.26 0.35 0.51 0.65 0.77 0.83

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

110 0.40 0.58 0.73 0.80
120 — — — — 0.23 0.50 0.69 0.77
130 0.41 0.64 0.74
140 — — — — — 0.29 0.59 0.71
Col. 1 Col. 2 Col. 3 Col. 4 Col. 5 Col. 6 Col. 7 Col. 8 Col. 9 Col. 10

*
These ampacities are applicable only under special circumstances where the use of insulated conductors having this temperature rating is
acceptable.
†
The insulation temperature rating is the temperature marked on the conductor.
Notes:
1. These correction factors apply to Tables 1, 2, 3, 4, and 60. The correction factors in Column 2 also apply to Table 57.
2. The ampacity of a given conductor type at these higher ambient temperatures is obtained by multiplying the appropriate value from
Tables 1, 2, 3, 4, or 60 by the correction factor for that higher temperature.

3-way switch 3-way

Single-pole switch with pilot lamp switch
with pilot lamp

L LAMPHOLDER L LAMPHOLDER

A Single-pole switch B 3-way switch

Figure 16-9 Pilot lamp connections.

 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic 295

protected; see Figure 16-11. In accessible attics (see

Figure 16-11A), cables must not be
● run across the top of floor or ceiling joists j
Neon lamp Load
● run across the face of studs k or rafters l that
have a vertical distance between the floor or
floor joists exceeding 1 m.
Figure 16-10 Neon pilot lamp in the handle Guard strips are not required if the cable is run
of the toggle switch. along the sides of rafters, studs, or floor joists m,
provided Rule 12-516 1) 2) is met.

Indicates
guard strips

3
2
2.134 m

4 Attic access
A

1.83 m 1.83 m
1 1

Attic access
B

Attic access
C

Figure 16-11 Protection of cable in attic.

296 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic

Figure 16-11C illustrates a cable installation codes will not allow manufactured roof sys-
that most electrical inspectors consider to be safe. tems to be drilled. This includes roof trusses.
Because the cables are installed close to the point When running cables through framing mem-
where the ceiling joists and the roof rafters meet, bers, be careful to maintain at least 32 mm between
they are protected from physical damage. It would the cable and the edge of the framing member. This
be very difficult for a person to crawl into this space minimizes the possibility of driving nails or screws
or to store cartons in an area with a clearance of less into the cable.
than 1 m; see Figure 16-11B.
The plans for this residence show a 600 mm-wide
catwalk in the attic (see DWG 4). In the future, the ATTIC EXHAUST FAN
owner may decide to install additional flooring in CIRCUIT
the attic to obtain more storage space. Because of the
large number of cables required to complete the cir- An exhaust fan is mounted in the roof of the house;
cuits, it would interfere with flooring to install guard see Figure 16-13A. When running, this fan removes
strips wherever the cables run across the tops of the hot, stagnant, or humid air from the attic. It will
joists; see Figure 16-12. However, the cables can be also draw in fresh air through louvres located in the
run through holes bored in the joists and along the end gables. Such an attic exhaust fan can be used
sides of the joists and rafters. In this way, the cables to lower the indoor temperature of the house by as
do not interfere with the flooring. Most building much as 5°C to 10°C.

Guard strips required when cables

are run across the top of joists.

Cables run through bored

holes in joists are considered
protected if 32 mm or more
from top or bottom.

Figure 16-12 Methods of protecting cable installations in attics.

 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic 297

Attic
Attic

Louvre Fan with

louvre
Louvre Fan
Louvre
Louvre

A B

Figure 16-13 Exhaust fan installation in an attic.

The exhaust fan in this residence is connected

to Circuit A26, a 120-volt, 15-ampere circuit in the
main panel utilizing No. 14 NMD90 cable. The de-
rating factors in Table 5A must be applied because
of the high ambient temperature in the attic.
Exhaust fans can also be installed in a gable of a

Courtesy of Broan-NuTone Canada Inc.

house; see Part B in Figure 16-13.
On hot days, the air in the attic can reach a tem-
perature of 65°C or more, so it is desirable to provide
a means of taking this attic air to the outside. The heat
from the attic can radiate through the ceiling into the
living areas, raising their temperature and increas-
ing the air-conditioning load. Personal discomfort
Figure 16-14 Ceiling exhaust fan viewed from
increases as well. These problems are minimized by the roof.
properly vented attic exhaust fans; see Figure 16-14.
Fan Control
Fan Operation
Typical residential exhaust fans can be controlled by
The exhaust fan installed in this residence has a ¼-hp
a choice of switches. Some electricians, architects,
direct-drive motor. Direct-drive means that the fan
and home designers prefer to have fan switches (con-
blade is attached directly to the shaft of the motor.
trols) (see Figures 16-15 and 16-16) mounted 1.83 m
It is rated 120 volts, 60 hertz (60 cycles per second),
above the floor so that they will not be confused with
5.8 amperes, and 696 watts, and operates at a maximum
other wall switches. This is a matter of personal pref-
speed of 1050 rpm. The motor is protected against
erence and should be verified with the owner.
overload by internal thermal protection. The motor is
Figure 16-17 shows some of the options avail-
mounted on rubber cushions for quiet operation.
able for the control of an exhaust fan:
When the fan is not running, the louvre remains
in the closed position. When the fan is turned on, the a. A simple ON–OFF switch (A).
louvre opens. When the fan is turned off, the louvre b. A speed control switch that allows multiple
automatically closes to prevent the escape of air. and/or an infinite number of speeds, (B). (The
298 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic

A F

B F

Courtesy of Craig Trineer

ST

Figure 16-15 Speed control switch.

C F

H
D F

Temp
E F

Temp High
F temp
F
limit

Temp
Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

G
High F
temp
limit

Figure 16-17 Options for the control of exhaust

Figure 16-16 Timer switch with speed control. fans.
 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic 299

exhaust fan in this residence has this type of Some manufacturers of motor controls also make
control.) See also Figure 16-15. switches with overload devices. Such a switch may
c. A timer switch that allows the user to select how be installed in any standard flush switch box open-
long the exhaust fan is to run, up to 12 hours ing 3 × 2 in. (76 mm × 51 mm). A pilot light may
(C). See also Figure 16-16. be used to indicate that the fan is running. Thus,
a two-gang switch box or 4 × 1½ in. (102-mm ×
d. A humidity control switch that senses mois-
38-mm) square outlet box with a two-gang raised
ture build-up (D). See the section on “Humidity
plaster cover may be used for both the switch and
Control” in this unit for further details on this
the pilot light.
type of switch.
Rule 28-308 states that an automatically started
e. Exhaust fans mounted into end gables or roofs motor having a rating of 1 hp or less does not need to
of residences are available with an adjustable have overload protection if the motor on the unit has
temperature control on the frame of the fan. protection features that will safely protect the motor
This thermostat generally has a start range of from damage if it stalls or the rotor locks. This must
21°C to 54°C, and will automatically stop at a be indicated on a nameplate located so that it is vis-
temperature 5°C below the start setting, thus ible after installation. This would be indicated on
providing totally automatic ON–OFF control of this particular fan motor since it does have integral
the exhaust fan (E). overload protection.
f. A high-temperature automatic heat sensor that
will shut off the fan motor when the tempera- Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit
ture reaches 93°C (F). This is a safety feature Protection for the Fan Motor
so that the fan will not spread a fire. Connect in
series with other control switches. CEC Table D16 specifies short-circuit and over-
load protection for motors; Table 45 lists the full-
g. A combination of controls, this circuit shows load current in amperes for single-phase AC motors.
an exhaust fan controlled by an infinite-speed For a full-load current rating of 5.8 amperes,
switch, a temperature control, and a high- Table D16 shows that the rating of the branch-
temperature heat sensor (G). The speed con- circuit overcurrent device shall not exceed
trol and the temperature control are con- 15 amperes if time-delay or non-time-delay fuses are
nected in parallel so that either can start the used and 15 amperes if standard thermal-magnetic
fan. The high-temperature heat sensor is in circuit breakers are used.
series so that it will shut off the power to the The exhaust fan is connected to Circuit A26,
fan when it senses 93°C, even if the speed which is a 15-ampere, 120-volt circuit. This circuit
control or temperature control is in the ON does not feed any other loads. The circuit supplies
position. the exhaust fan only.
Time-delay fuses sized at 115% to 125% of the
Overload Protection for the Fan Motor full-load ampere rating of the motor will provide
both running overload protection and branch-circuit
There are several ways to provide running overload short-circuit protection. If the motor is equipped
protection for the ¼ hp attic fan motor. For example, with inherent, built-in overload protection, the time-
an overload device can be built into the motor, or delay fuse in the circuit provides secondary backup
a combination overload tripping device and ther- protection, providing double protection against pos-
mal element can be added to the switch assembly. sible motor burnout.
300 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

DRYER CIRCUIT AND LAUNDRY ROOM CIRCUITS D

1. What type/dimension device box is required for the dryer in this house?

2. What CEC rules refer to the receptacle required for the laundry equipment? Briefly
state the requirements.

3. The receptacle outlets are connected to branch circuits that have been calculated to
have a maximum load of ___ watts per circuit. Circle one: 1200, 1440, 1500 watts.
4. a. What regulates the temperature in the dryer?

b. What regulates the drying time?

5. What is the method of connection to an electric clothes dryer?

6. What is the unique shape of the neutral blade of a 30-ampere dryer cord set?

7. a. What is the minimum number of duplex receptacle outlets that must be installed in
a laundry room?
b. Is a separate branch circuit required?
c. Quote the CEC rule numbers.
8. What is the maximum permitted current rating of a portable appliance on a 30-ampere
branch circuit?
 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic 301

9. What is the current draw of the exhaust fan in the laundry?

10. What special type of switch controls the attic lights?

11. If an attic exhaust fan draws 12 amperes at 120 volts and the ambient temperature
reaches 50°C, what size and type of wire will be required to feed the fan? Refer to
CEC, Table 5A.

12. When installing cables in an attic along the top of the floor joists, _____-m clearance
must not be exceeded.
13. The total estimated watts for a circuit has been calculated to be 1300 volt–amperes.
How many amperes is this at 120 volts?
14. In what circumstances would lighting and/or power be provided in an attic?

15. The following is a layout of the lighting circuit for the laundry, powder room/
washroom, rear entrance hall, and attic. Complete the wiring diagram using coloured
pens or pencils to indicate conductor insulation colour.
B_ B__

GFCI
Line Line

T R
Load Load

Fan Fan
B__

Attic lights
302 UNIT 16 Branch Circuits for the Laundry, Powder Room/Washroom, and Attic

ATTIC EXHAUST FAN CIRCUIT L

1. What is the purpose of the attic exhaust fan?

2. At what voltage does the fan operate?

3. What is the horsepower rating of the fan motor?
4. Is the fan direct-driven or belt-driven?
5. How is the fan controlled?

6. What is the basic difference between a thermostat and a humidistat?

7. What size of conductors are to be used for this circuit?

8. How many metres of cable are required to complete the wiring for the attic exhaust
fan circuit?
9. May the metal frame of the fan be grounded to the grounded circuit conductor?

10. What CEC rule prohibits bonding equipment to a grounded circuit conductor?

11. How many attic lights are on Circuit B7?

 UNIT

17
Electric Heating and
Air Conditioning
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to
●● list the advantages of electric heating
●● describe the components and operation of
electric heating systems (baseboard heater,
heating cable, furnace) RED SEAL
OCCUPATIONAL
●● describe thermostat control systems for electric
STANDARD
heating units
(RSOS)
●● install electric heaters with appropriate
temperature control according For the Red Seal exam,
to Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) rules note that this unit covers
the following RSOS task:
●● discuss the CEC requirements and electrical
connections for air conditioners and heat pumps ●● Task C-19
●● explain how heating and cooling may be
connected to the same circuit

303
304 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning

GENERAL DISCUSSION part of an electric baseboard heating system is the

thermostat. This means that there is a minimum of
Many types of electric heat are available for heating maintenance. The biggest disadvantage to electric heat
homes—unit heaters, boilers, electric furnaces, heat is cost. Generally, the cost of electricity per British
pumps, duct heaters, baseboard heaters, and radiant thermal unit (Btu) is greater than that of other fuels.
heating panels. The residence discussed in this text- If an electric heating system is used, adequate
book is heated by an electric furnace located in the insulation must be provided to minimize elec-
workshop. tric bills. Insulation also helps keep the residence
Detailed requirements are found in CEC cool during the hot summer months. The cost of
Section 62, which covers fixed electric space and extra insulation is offset through the years by the
surface heating systems. decreased burden on the air-conditioning and heat-
This textbook cannot cover in detail the meth- ing equipment. Energy conservation measures
ods used to calculate heat loss and the wattage require the installation of proper and adequate insu-
required to provide a comfortable level of heat in lation as well as a good quality vapour barrier. In
the building. Many variables must be taken into general, baseboard heating is calculated at 10 watts
account when doing heat loss calculations. Soft- per square foot for each room being heated that way.
ware is available for doing these calculations, both
on the Internet and from manufacturers. The Heat-
ing, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Institute of TYPES OF ELECTRIC HEATING
Canada offers courses for calculating heat losses for SYSTEMS
residential and commercial/industrial buildings.
Some of the variables that must be taken into Electric heating units are available in baseboard, wall-
account include construction of the building envelope, mounted, and floor-mounted styles. These units may
type and thickness of the insulation, size of windows, have built-in thermal overload protection. The type of
and whether the siding is of brick or wood. Another unit to be installed depends on structural conditions
variable would be in what direction most windows and the purpose for which the room is to be used.
and doors face. One of the most important variables Another method of providing electric heating is
is the location of a house within the country. Each to embed resistance-type cables in the plaster of ceil-
region has a different number of degree days, which ings or between two layers of drywall on the ceil-
affects the heat requirements to maintain a comfort- ing, Rules 62-214 through 62-216. Resistance-type
able living temperature. To heat this residence, the heating cables may also be used for melting snow
total estimated wattage is 13 000 watts (13 kW). and ice on roof overhangs, eavestroughs, walkways,
Compared with other types of heating systems, and driveways, Rule 62-300.
electric heating is not widely used. However, it does Electric heat can also be supplied by an electric
have a number of advantages over other systems. furnace and a duct system similar to the type used on
Electric heating is flexible when baseboard heating conventional hot-air central heating systems. The heat
is used, because each room can have its own ther- is supplied by electric heating elements rather than the
mostat. Thus, one room can be kept cool while an burning of fuel. Air conditioning, humidity control,
adjoining room is warm. This type of zone control air circulation, electronic air cleaning, and zone con-
for an electric, gas-fired, or oil-fired central heating trol can be provided on an electric furnace system.
system is more complex and more expensive. Many homes are now built or renovated with
Electric heating is safer than heating with fuels ceramic tile flooring. Often, heating cable is installed
since no combustible or explosive materials are used under the tile to eliminate cold floors. It is very
to produce heat. The system does not require storage important to follow the manufacturer’s installation
space, tanks, or chimneys. Electric heating is quiet and instructions. Although some heat will radiate from
does not add to or remove anything from the air. As a the tile into the room, underfloor heating cable sets
result, electric heat is cleaner. This type of heating is are not intended to be the sole source of heat for the
considered to be healthier than fuel heating systems, room. The wattage of the heating cable set is usually
which remove oxygen from the air. The only moving quite low, as it is meant to heat only the floor.
 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning 305

SEPARATE CIRCUIT REQUIRED The “separate circuit” rule is due to the possi-
bility that if the central heating equipment was con-
Rules 62-110 1) a) and 26-806 1) require that cen- nected to another circuit, such as a lighting circuit, a
tral heating equipment be supplied by a separate fault on that circuit would shut off the power to the
branch circuit. This includes electric, gas, and oil heating system. This could cause freezing of water
central furnaces and heat pumps. The exception to pipes. Refer to Figure 17-1.
Rules 62-110 1) and 26-806 1) is equipment directly A disconnecting means must be provided to
associated with central heating equipment, such as open all ungrounded conductors to the central
humidifiers and electrostatic air cleaners, which heating unit. This disconnect must be within the
are permitted to be connected to any branch circuit, sight of and no farther than 9 m from the unit,
Rule 26-806 4). Rule 62-206 5).

Thermostat

Disconnecting means:
Suitable disconnecting means shall be provided
Field wiring of low-voltage, class 2 for the branch circuit, Rule 62-206 3) 5)
control circuit conductors shall not
be placed in the same raceway, box,
or enclosure with power conductors
except where they are separated
by an acceptable barrier, Rule 16-212 3). Must be
separate circuit,
Rule 62-110 1) a)

Typical
electric
furnace

Branch-circuit conductors:
These conductors are required to have an ampacity
not less than the current ratings of all the equipment
they supply, that is, they must be able to carry the load,
Rules 62-110 1) b), 62-114 7) a), and 62-118 1).

Nameplate will show manufacturer’s name, volts and amperes,

or volts and watts, or volts and kilowatts.

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Example: What size copper conductors (NMD 90), fuses, and disconnect switch are required for a furnace marked
79 amperes, 240 volt, single phase, 60 cycles? Terminals on furnace and switch marked 75°C.

Answer: Conductor size: From CEC Table 2, select No. 4 NMD 90.
[85 amperes at 758C, Rule 4-006 1)],
Rule 62-118 1).
Size of overcurrent device: Install 100-ampere fuse or circuit breaker,
Rule 62-114 6) b)
79 3 1.25 5 98.75 amp fuses.
Switch: 100-ampere switch

Figure 17-1 Basic CEC requirements for an electric furnace. These “package” units have all of the
internal components, such as limit switches, relays, motors, and contactors, prewired. The electrician
provides both the branch-circuit and the control-circuit wiring, together with the thermostat wiring. See
CEC Section 62 for additional information.
306 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning

CONTROL OF ELECTRIC integral component of the furnace. The low-voltage

HEATING SYSTEMS contacts of the relay are connected to the thermo-
stat. The line-voltage contacts of the relay are used
Line-voltage thermostats can be used to control the to switch the actual heater load. Low-voltage ther-
heat load for most baseboard electric heating systems; mostat cable is run between the low-voltage termi-
see Figure 17-2. Common wattage limits for line- nals of the relay and the thermostat; see Figure 17-3.
voltage thermostats are 2500, 3000, and 5000 watts. In general, contacts and relays serve the function in
(Additional ratings are available.) The electrician the electrical industry of using a low voltage or low
must check the nameplate ratings of the heating unit current to control a much higher one. This is done
and the thermostat to ensure that the total connected for safety and to lower expense, as the smaller con-
load does not exceed the thermostat rating. trol wires of a relay or contactor are much cheaper
The wattage limit of a thermostat is found using to run than the large conductors that bring power to
the amperage formula. For example, if a thermostat heating or cooling devices.
has a rating of 20 amperes at 125 or 250 volts, the When the connected load is larger than the
wattage value is maximum current rating of a thermostat and relay
W 5 E 3 I 5 125 3 20 5 2500 watts combination, the thermostat can be used to control
a heavy-duty relay or contactor; see Figure 17-4.
or
An example of such a relay is the magnetic switch
W 5 250 3 20 5 5000 watts used for motor controls. The load side of the mag-
The total connected load for this thermostat must netic switch feeds a distribution panel containing
not exceed 20 amperes. as many 15- or 20-ampere circuits as needed for the
When the connected load is larger than the rat- connected load. A 40-ampere load may be divided
ing of a line-voltage thermostat, as in the case of into three 15-ampere circuits and still be controlled
an electric furnace, low-voltage thermostats may by one thermostat. The proper overcurrent protec-
be used. In this case, a relay must be connected tion is obtained by dividing the 40-ampere load
between the thermostat and load. The relay is an into several circuits having lower ratings.

All photos Courtesy of Craig Trineer

Figure 17-2 Thermostats for electric heating systems.

 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning 307

240-volt DPST relay

2P

Panelboard
Electric baseboard
Low heating unit, 240 volts
240 V
voltage

Low-voltage Low-voltage
conductors thermostat SPST

Figure 17-3 Wiring for a baseboard electric heating unit having a low-voltage thermostat and relay.
Note: If using black and white wires in a two-wire non-metallic-sheathed cable (NMSC) or AC cable, tape or
paint the white wire red. When using NMSC, many inspection authorities require the use of special cable
that contains one black and one red conductor.

The wiring for an individual baseboard heat-

ing unit or group of units is shown in Figures 17-6
and 17-7. A two-wire cable (armoured cable or non-
metallic-sheathed cable with ground) would be run
from a 240-volt, two-pole circuit in the main panel
to the outlet box or switch box installed at the ther-
mostat location. A second two-wire cable runs from
the thermostat to the junction box on the heater
unit. The proper connections are made in this junc-
tion box. Most heating unit manufacturers provide
Courtesy of Craig Trineer

knockouts at the rear and on the bottom of the junc-

tion box. The supply conductors can be run through
these knockouts, using proper connectors for their
wiring method.
Figure 17-4 Relay for controlling an electric Most baseboard units also have a channel or wir-
heater that can be used for baseboard heaters. ing space running the full length of the unit, usually
at the bottom. When two or more heating units are
joined together, the conductors are run in this wir-
CIRCUIT REQUIREMENTS ing channel. Most manufacturers indicate the type
FOR BASEBOARD UNITS of wire required for these units because of conduc-
tor temperature limitations.
Figure 17-5 shows typical baseboard electric heat- A variety of fittings, such as internal and exter-
ing units. These units are rated at 240 volts, but are nal elbows (for turning corners) and blank sections,
also available in 120-volt ratings. are available from the manufacturer.

Figure 17-5 Baseboard electric heating systems.

308 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning

Two-pole,
240-volt
supply

Electric baseboard
Single-pole heating unit, 240 volts
thermostat,
Rule 62–120

Figure 17-6 Wiring for a single baseboard electric heating unit. See the note in the caption of Figure 17-3.

240-volt
2P

Electric baseboard
Panel
heating units, 240 volts

Two-pole
thermostat

Figure 17-7 Wiring for two baseboard electric heating units at different locations in a room. See the note
in the caption of Figure 17-3.

Most wall and baseboard heating units are avail- LOCATION OF ELECTRIC
able with built-in thermostats (see Figure 17-5). BASEBOARD HEATERS IN
The supply cable for such a unit runs from the main RELATION TO RECEPTACLE
panel to the junction box on the unit. OUTLETS
Manufacturers of electric baseboard heaters list
“blank” sections ranging in length from 0.5 m to 2 m. Approved electric baseboard heaters shall not be
These blank sections give the installer the flexibil- installed below wall receptacle outlets unless the
ity needed to spread out the heater sections and to instructions furnished with the heaters indicate that
install these blanks where wall receptacle outlets are they may be installed there, Rule 26-722 a) and
encountered; see Figure 17-8. Appendix B. The reason for this is the possible fire
and shock hazard if a cord hangs over and touches
the heated electric baseboard unit. The insulation on
the cord can melt from the heat. See Figures 17-9
and 17-10.
The electrician must pay close attention to the
location of receptacle outlets and the electric base-
board heaters in the plans and specifications. Blank
HEATER BLANK HEATER
spacer sections may be installed, following the CEC
Figure 17-8 Use of blank baseboard heating
requirements for spacing receptacle outlets and just
sections. how much (wattage and length) baseboard heating
is required.
 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning 309

ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATER

Figure 17-9 Code violation. Unless the instructions furnished with the electric baseboard heater
specifically state that the unit is listed for installation below a receptacle outlet, this installation is a violation
of Appendix B Rule 26-722 a). In this type of installation, cords attached to the receptacle outlet would hang
over the heater, creating a fire hazard and possible shock hazard if the insulation on the cord melted.

Position electric baseboard heating units If installed as shown, electrical cords

A so they will not be directly below a wall B could come in contact with the baseboard
receptacle outlet. unit, subjecting this cord to rubbing
(abrasion) and heat, which might result
in failure of the insulation of the cord,
a potential fire and shock hazard.

Baseboard heater
Baseboard heater

Receptacle
outlet

An example of how the receptacle

C outlets in the window corner
of a bedroom might be installed.

Figure 17-10 Position of electric baseboard heaters.

310 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning

This receptacle shall not be

connected to the heater circuit. Table 17-1
Comparison of wattages and currents for
electric heating elements at 240 and 208 volts.
ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATER
AMPERES AMPERES
WATTS @ @ 240 WATTS @ @ 208
240 VOLTS VOLTS 208 VOLTS VOLTS
Figure 17-11 Factory-installed receptacle outlets
or receptacle outlet assemblies provided by the 500 2.08 375.6 1.81
manufacturer for use with its electric baseboard 750 3.13 563.3 2.71
heaters may be counted as the required receptacle
1000 4.17 751.1 3.61
outlet for the space occupied by a permanently
installed heater. 1250 5.21 938.9 4.51
1500 6.25 1126.7 5.42
1750 7.29 1314.4 6.32
The Canadian Standards Association (CSA) 2000 8.33 1502.2 7.22
approves the use of factory-installed or factory- 2500 10.42 1877.8 9.03
furnished receptacle outlet assemblies as part of per-
manently installed electric baseboard heaters. These
receptacle outlets shall not be connected to the
Many electric furnaces furnish the wattage (or
heater circuit; see Figure 17-11. It is a CEC require-
kilowatt) output for more than one voltage level. For
ment that heater controls within 1 m of a tub or sink
every 1% drop in voltage, there will be an almost 2%
be GFCI protected in accordance with Rule 62-130.
drop in wattage output. For instance, if a 240-volt-
Controls outside of 1 m do not require a GFCI. The
rated heater is connected to 208 volts, its actual out-
same can be said of the heaters themselves. Within
put of heat is less than its rated watts; see Table 17-1.
1 m of a tub or sink, they require GFCI protection,
The actual voltage at the supply terminals of
Rule 62-132.
the electric furnace or baseboard heating unit deter-
mines the true wattage output of the heating ele-
CIRCUIT REQUIREMENTS ments. The effect that different voltages have on
FOR ELECTRIC FURNACES electric heating elements is covered in Unit 20.
The demand factors for service conductors
In an electric furnace, resistance heating element(s) used to supply heating equipment are set out in
are the source of heat. The blower motor assembly, Rule 62-118, which requires service conductors to
filter section, condensate coil, refrigerant line con- have an ampacity not less than the current ratings
nection, fan motor speed control, high-temperature of all of the equipment supplied. In the case of an
limit controls, relays, and similar components are electric furnace, this would be 100% of the total
similar to those found in gas furnaces. connected load (Rule 62-118 4)).
In most installations, the supply conductors If baseboard heating is being used, Rule 62-118 3)
must be copper conductors having a minimum 90°C allows the ampacity of the main service conductors
temperature rating, such as Type T90. The instruc- to be reduced. If each room or heated area is thermo-
tions furnished with the unit will have information statically controlled, the demand factor is 75% for
relative to supply conductor size and type. each kW above 10 kW. So, if the total connected load
Since proper supply voltage is critical to ensure was 20 kW for baseboard heating with thermostats in
full output of the heating elements, voltage must be each room, the demand load must be calculated as
maintained at not less than 98% of the unit’s rated
voltage to provide its rated wattage. Therefore, the 1st 10 kW @ 100% 5 10.0 kW
voltage drop should not be allowed to exceed 2% of 2nd 10 kW @ 75%    5 7.5 kW
the unit’s rated voltage to achieve its rated output. Total 17.5 kW
The CEC allows a maximum voltage drop of 3% on Total connected load 5    20.0 kW
a branch circuit, Rule 8-102 1) a). Total demand load 5   17.5 kW
 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning 311

These demand watts would be applied to the service baseboard heaters appears to violate the CEC. How-
conductors. ever, according to Rule 4-030 1) two-wire cable may
Two or more heating fixtures, such as baseboard be used for the 240-volt heaters if the white conduc-
heaters, may be connected on a single heating branch tor is permanently marked as ungrounded by paint,
circuit, provided that the overcurrent device does coloured tape, or other effective means. This is nec-
not exceed 30 amperes. Therefore, the maximum essary, since people may assume that an unmarked
load on each branch circuit is 80% or 24 amperes or white conductor is a grounded circuit conductor hav-
5760 watts at 240 volts, Rule 62-114 6). ing no voltage to ground. However, the white wire in
The electric furnace must be supplied by an indi- the heater circuit is connected to a “hot” phase and
vidual branch circuit, Rule 62-110. The “separate has 120 volts to ground. Therefore, a person can
circuit” requirement pertains to any type of central be subject to a harmful shock by touching this
heating, including oil and gas systems, Rule 26-806. wire and the grounded baseboard heater (or
any other grounded object) at the same time.
Most electrical inspectors accept black or red
HEAT PUMPS paint or tape as a means of changing the colour of
the white conductor. The white conductor must be
A heat pump cools and dehumidifies on hot days and
made permanently unidentifiable at every accessible
heats on cool days. To provide heat, the pump picks
point, such as at heater and service panels. A more
up heat from the outside air, which it adds to the heat
commonly used method is to install two-wire cable
created by the compression of the refrigerant. This
with black and red conductors. One such cable is
heat is used to warm the air flowing through the unit,
Heatex™, a red-sheathed NMSC cable manufactured
which is then delivered to the inside of the building.
by Nexans Inc., specifically designed for heating
The heat pump can also be used to cool the
circuits. Unit 6 also addresses wire colour coding.
building when the outside air temperature is warm.
To achieve this, the direction of flow of the refrig-
erant is reversed. Warm air is then delivered to the ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS
outside, and the house is cooled.
For homes without central air conditioning, win-
Heat pumps are available as self-contained
dow or through-the-wall air conditioners may be
packages that provide both cooling and heating. In
installed. These room air conditioners are available
the Canadian climate, the heat pump alone may not
in both 120-volt and 240-volt ratings. Because room
provide enough heat. Therefore, the heat pump may
air conditioners are plug-and-cord connected, the
use supplementary heating elements contained in
receptacle outlet and the circuit capacity must be
the air-handling unit, or be used in combination with
selected and installed according to the CEC.
a forced-air gas furnace.
The basic CEC rules for installing these units
and their receptacle outlets are
BONDING ● the air conditioners must be grounded

Bonding of electrical baseboard heating units and

●● the air conditioners must be connected using a
other electrical equipment and appliances has been cord and attachment plug
covered previously in this textbook. Refer to Rule ●● the rating of the branch-circuit overcurrent
10-600. device must not exceed the branch-circuit con-
ductor rating or the receptacle rating, which-
ever is less
MARKING THE CONDUCTORS ●● the air-conditioner load shall not exceed 80%
OF CABLES of the branch-circuit ampacity if no other loads
Two-wire cable contains one white conductor, are served
one black conductor, and one bonding conductor. ●● the attachment plug cap may serve as the dis-
Using two-wire cable to supply 240-volt electric connecting means, Rule 28-602 3) c)
312 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning

RECEPTACLES FOR AIR on a 240-volt installation; (B) a 20-ampere, 125-volt

CONDITIONERS receptacle for use with a 120-volt air-conditioner
circuit; and (C) a 15-ampere, 250-volt receptacle for
Figure 17-12 shows three types of receptacles use with a 240-volt installation.
that can be used for air-conditioning installations:
(A) shows a 20-ampere, 250-volt receptacle for use

CENTRAL HEATING AND AIR

CONDITIONING
A B C
20 A/250 V 20 A/125 V 15 A/250 V The residence used as an example in this textbook
has central electric heating and air conditioning,
consisting of an electric furnace and a central air-
conditioning unit.
G G G
The wiring for central heating and cooling sys-
Y W Y
tems is shown in Figure 17-13. One branch circuit
runs to the electric furnace, and another runs to the
air conditioner or heat pump outside the dwelling.
Extra-low-voltage wiring is used between the inside
and outside units to provide control of the systems.
The extra-low-voltage Class 2 circuit wiring must
not be run in the same raceway as the power con-
ductors, Rule 16-212 1).
Figure 17-12 Types of receptacles used for air
conditioners.

Electric furnace/ Thermostat

air-conditioner unit

Electric L
heating COI Disconnect
Air-conditioner/
Class 2 heat pump unit
elements switch
low-voltage
wiring
FAN
Disconnect
A
switch
COIL

Refrigerant vapour

Liquid refrigerant

BLOWER COMPRESSOR

B
Air-conditioner/heat pump branch circuit

Electric
furnace Caution: Do not run the low-voltage Class 2
branch circuit ELECTRICAL
PANEL circuit wires A in the same conduit as the power
wires B , Rule 16-212 1)

Figure 17-13 Connection diagram showing typical electrical furnace and air-conditioner/heat pump
installation.
 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning 313

SPECIAL TERMINOLOGY conductor size, disconnect switch size, controller

size, and short-circuit and ground-fault protective
These terms pertain to air conditioners, heat pumps, device ratings; see Figure 17-14.
and other hermetically sealed motor-compressors. Rule 2-100 5) requires that approved equip-
Rated load current is the current drawn when the ment be used only in accordance with instructions
unit is operating at rated load, at rated voltage, and included in the original approval of the equipment.
at rated frequency. For example, the nameplate of an air-conditioning
Branch circuit conductor ampacity is based unit reads “Maximum size fuse 40 amperes,” so only
on the rated load current, which must be marked 40-ampere fuses can be used. Forty-ampere circuit
on the label, Rule 2-100 1) d). This will determine

Disconnecting means:
Select size based on nameplate rated load
Branch circuit over-
current or branch circuit selection current—
current protection:
whichever is greater—and locked rotor current.
Must be able Ampere rating of switch must be at least 115%
to carry starting of nameplate rated load current or branch circuit
current selection current, Rule 28-714 1).
Size according May also be horsepower rated, Rule 28-704.
to data on the Must be within sight of the equipment and within 3 m.
equipment label
Must be fuses
Branch-circuit conductors:
unless label on
equipment shows The conductor ampacity rating required for
that circuit breakers the air-conditioning unit is found on the label.
are permitted This has been determined by the manufacturer,
taking into consideration the compressor motor
current, fan motor current, and heater current.
This is generally 125% of the largest motor plus
the full-load rating of the rest of the equipment’s
loads, such as fans and heaters, Rule 28-108 1).
Typical
air-conditioning
unit

Overload protection:
This is usually an integral part of the equipment,
supplied by the manufacturer.

Fan Label:
motor Manufacturer’s name
Voltage
Frequency
Phases
Minimum supply circuit conductor ampacity
Maximum rating of branch circuit, short-circuit,
Hermetically and ground fault protective device
sealed motor Will state “maximum size fuse” or
“maximum size fuse or circuit breaker”

Figure 17-14 Basic circuit requirements for a typical residential-type air conditioner or heat pump.
Reading the label is important because the manufacturer has determined the minimum conductor size and
branch circuit fuse size.
314 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning

Disconnect switch within 3 m

Panel and within sight, Rule 28-604 5)
inside
building

40-ampere
circuit
breaker

Must be capable
of being locked off,
Rule 28-604 1) b) ii).

Air-conditioner
nameplate reads
“maximum overcurrent
device 40 amperes”

Figure 17-15 This installation conforms to Rule 28-604. The panel contains the 40-ampere circuit
breaker called for on the air-conditioner nameplate as the branch circuit protection. The disconnect must
be capable of being locked off, Rule 28-604 1) b) ii). Neither the air conditioner nor its disconnect switch
shall be located any closer than 1 m to a natural gas vent, Rule 2-328, Appendix B.

breakers are not permitted. If the nameplate called

for “Maximum overcurrent protection,” either fuses
or circuit breakers could be used. See Fig­ures 17-15
Courtesy of Craig Trineer

and 17-16.
The air conditioner requires a motor-rated
disconnect to be installed within 3 m and within
sight of the unit, Rule 28-604 5); see Figures 17-17
and 17-18.
Figure 17-16 Air conditioner disconnect.

Branch circuit

Disconnecting means,
Rule 28-604 5)

40-ampere fuses or circuit breaker

Large
relay Small relay Small wires Small fan
motor
2 amperes

Large wires Large

compressor
30 amperes

Figure 17-17 In a typical air-conditioner unit, the branch-circuit protective device is called on to protect
the large components (wire, relay, compressor) and the small components (wire, relay, fan motor).
 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning 315

LOADS NOT USED

SIMULTANEOUSLY
Heating and air-conditioning loads are not likely
to operate at the same time. Therefore, when cal-
culating feeder sizes to an electric furnace and an
air conditioner, you need to consider only the larger
load. In Rule 8-106 3), the use of interlocks makes
it impossible for both devices to operate. The larger
connected load is used to calculate the demand on
the service feeders.
If the air conditioning has the larger demand,
this demand is used at 100%. If the heating demand
is greater, this is used to calculate the demand watts.

Figure 17-18 The nameplate provided by the

manufacturer of the air conditioner outdoor unit.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

ELECTRIC HEAT

1. a. What is the allowance in watts made for electric heat in this residence?

b. What is the value in amperes of this load?

2. What are some of the advantages of electric heating?

316 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning

3. List the different types of electric heating system installations.

4. There are two basic voltage classifications for thermostats. What are they?

5. Which device is required when the total connected load exceeds the maximum rating of
a thermostat?

6. The electric heat in this residence is provided by what type of equipment?

7. At what voltage does the electric furnace operate?

8. A certain type of control connects electric heating units to a 120-volt supply or a

240-volt supply, depending on the amount of the temperature drop in a room. These
controls are supplied from a 120/240-volt, three-wire, single-phase source. Assum-
ing that this type of device controls a 240-volt, 2000-watt heating unit, what is the
wattage produced when the control supplies 120 volts to the heating unit? Show all
calculations.

9. What advantages does a 240-volt heating unit have over a 120-volt heating unit?
 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning 317

10. a. The white wire of a cable may be used to connect to a hot circuit conductor only if

b. Quote the rule number.

11. Electric baseboard heaters shall not be installed beneath wall receptacle outlets.
Explain and quote the CEC rule.

12. [Circle the correct answer.] The branch circuit supplying a heater shall have an ampacity of
a. not less than the connected load supplied
b. 125% of the current rating of the heater
13. Compute the current draw of the following electric furnaces. The furnaces are all
rated 240 volts.
a. 7.5 kW

b. 15 kW

c. 20 kW

14. The wattage output of a 240-volt electric furnace connected to a 208-volt supply will be
about 75% of the wattage output than if the furnace is connected to a 240-volt supply.
Referring to Question 13, calculate the wattage output of (a), (b), and (c) if the furnace
is connected to a 208-volt supply.
318 UNIT 17 Electric Heating and Air Conditioning

15. A central electric furnace heating system is installed in a home. Should a separate
branch circuit supply this furnace? Explain.

16. What CEC rule provides the answer to Question 15?

AIR CONDITIONING

1. When calculating air-conditioner load requirements and electric heating load require-
ments, is it necessary to add the two loads together to determine the combined load on
the service? Explain your answer.

2. The total load of an air conditioner shall not exceed what percentage of a separate
branch circuit? [Circle one of the following.]
a. 75%
b. 80%
c. 125%
3. Do window air conditioners count as a connected load when calculating the demand
watts on a service?
4. Must an air conditioner installed in a window opening be bonded to ground?

5. A 120-volt air conditioner draws 12 amperes. What size is the circuit to which the air
conditioner will be connected?
6. When a central air-conditioning unit is installed and the label states “Maximum size
fuse 50 amperes,” is it permissible to connect the unit to a 50-ampere circuit breaker?

7. Which CEC rule prohibits installing Class 2 control circuit conductors in the same
raceway as the power conductors?
 UNIT

18
Oil and Gas Heating
Systems
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to
●● understand the basics of gas and oil heating
systems
●● identify some of the more important
components of gas and oil heating systems RED SEAL
OCCUPATIONAL
●● interpret basic wiring diagrams
STANDARD
●● explain the principles of the thermocouple and (RSOS)
the thermopile in a self-generating system
For the Red Seal exam,
●● understand and apply the requirements for
note that this unit covers
control-circuit wiring, CEC Section 16
the following RSOS task:
●● Task C-18

319
320 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems

Unit 17 discussed the circuit requirements for electric PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

heating (furnace, baseboard, ceiling cable). Unit 18 dis-
cusses typical residential oil and gas heating systems. Most residential gas or oil heating systems operate
Heating a home with gas or oil is possible with as follows. A room thermostat is connected to the
proper electrical terminals on the furnace or boiler,
●● warm air—fan-forced warm air or gravity (hot
where the controls and valves are interconnected to
air rises naturally)
provide safe and adequate heat to the home. Some
●● hot water (hydronic)—hot water circulated typical wiring diagrams are shown in Figures 18-1,
through the piping system by a circulating pump; 18-2, and 18-3A and B.
the system uses tubing embedded in the floor or Most residential gas or oil heating systems
radiators that look very much like electric base- are “packaged units” in which the safety controls,
board heating units. valves, fan controls, limit switches, and so on are

*Disconnecting means and overcurrent protection Thermostat

as required, Rule 26-806 5) 6) 7)
Class 2 circuit
High-
Safety shut-off temperature
valve limit control
T T
Line-voltage
gas valve 2 1 3 4 Relay

Junction box

Text © 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Circulating

120-volt source*
(Hot)

Figure 18-1 Simplified wiring diagram for a gas burner, radiant hot water system.

Safety shut-off High-temperature

Thermostat 120-volt source* valve limit control

Fan
Class 2 Class 2 switch
circuit transformer Fan
Wiring must
24-volt secondary conform
Fan to Class 2
Text © 2021 Canadian Standards Association

Junction motor circuits,

box Rules 16-200
and 16-210.

*Disconnecting means and overcurrent protection

as required, Rule 26-806 5) 6) 7)

Gas valve

Figure 18-2 Simplified wiring diagram for a gas burner, forced warm air system.
 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems 321

Thermostat Liquid immersion Oil burner

controller primary control
Class 2 circuit (high limit) (stack switch)

3 1
T T
Relay 4 2
T T
2 1 3 4
Junction
box

Text © 2021 Canadian Standards Association

120-volt
source*
(Hot)
Circulator
Oil
burner

* Disconnecting means and Ignition

overcurrent protection as transformer
required, Rule 26-806 5) 6) 7)

Figure 18-3A Simplified wiring diagram of an oil-burning hot water heating installation.

24-volt
thermostat
High limit
control Oil burner
primary control

L1 Class 2
L2 wiring
120-volt
power supply

Flame
OV Oil valve detector
Burner motor
Igniter
M
Microprocessor controls:
Oil valve
IGN Motor
Ignition
Flame detector
Thermostat command

Figure 18-3B An oil burner featuring an electronic microprocessor that controls all facets of the
burner operation. Most components are integral to the unit, so field wiring is kept to a minimum. All
manufacturers provide detailed wiring diagrams for their products. Always consult the manufacturer’s
wiring diagrams for a particular model heating unit.

integral, preassembled prewired parts of the furnace MAJOR COMPONENTS

or boiler.
For the electrician, the “field wiring” generally Gas-fired and oil-fired warm air systems and hot
consists of installing the low voltage thermoplastic water boilers contain many components.
(LVT) cables from the thermostat location to the Aquastat. This direct immersion water temper-
gas or oil heating system. The electrician connects ature thermostat regulates boiler or tank temperature
the AC power supply to the furnace or boiler and in hydronic heating systems, ensuring that the cir-
the HVAC technician connects the LVT thermostat culating water maintains a satisfactory temperature;
wires. Refer to Figure 18-4. see Figure 18-5.
322 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems

Extra-low-voltage
thermostat wiring

All internal
components prewired by
manufacturer of furnace.

Power supply must be

installed by electrician
from panel. The circuit
breaker must be marked
as controlling the furnace,
Rule 2-100.

Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

Disconnect switch must not
be located on the furnace, or
in a position that would require
a person to walk past the
furnace to operate the switch,
Rule 26-806 7).

Figure 18-5 Aquastat (liquid immersion

Figure 18-4 Diagram showing thermostat,
controller).
power supply wiring, and disconnect switch.

Cad Cell. A photoconductive flame detector. a given time in seconds after the main burner has
Detector must be installed so that it can see flame. come on. This timing ensures that the blower will
Connects to primary control system. blow warm air. Older adjustable temperature fan
controls still exist. See Figure 18-6.
Circulating Pump. Circulates hot water in a
hydronic central heating system. Fan Motor. An electric motor that forces warm
Combustion Chamber. Surrounds the flame and air through the heating ducts. In typical residential
radiates heat back into the flame to aid in combustion. heating systems, the motor is provided with integral
overload protection. The motor may be single,
Combustion Head. Creates a specific pattern of multiple, or variable speed.
air at the end of the air tube. The air is direct­ed to
force oxygen into the oil spray so the oil can burn. A
combustion head is also referred to as the turbulator,
fire ring, retention ring, or end cone.
Control Circuit. Any electric circuit that controls FAN
MAN
any other circuit through a relay or an equivalent
device; also referred to as a remote control circuit.
AUTO

Draft Regulator. A counterweighted swinging

door that opens and closes to help maintain a
constant level of draft over the fire.

Fan Control. Controls the blower fan on forced

warm air systems. On newer furnaces, the fan con- Figure 18-6 Fan/limit control.
trol is an electronic timer that starts the fan motor
 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems 323

Flow Valve. Prevents gravity circulation of water Induced draft Blower. When the thermostat calls
through the piping system. for heat, this blower first expels any gases remaining
in the combustion chamber from a previous burning
Flue. A channel in a chimney or a pipe for
cycle. It continues to run, pulling hot combustion
conveying flame and smoke to the outer air.
gases through the heat exchangers, and then vents
Heat Exchanger. Transfers the heat energy from the gases to the outdoors.
the combustion gases to the air in the furnace or to
Integrated Control. A printed circuit board that
the water in a boiler.
contains many electronic components. When the
High-Temperature Limit Control. A safety thermostat calls for heat, the integrated circuit board
device that limits the temperature in the plenum of takes over to manage the sequence of events that
the furnace to a safe value predetermined by the allow the burner to operate safely.
manufacturer. When this temperature is reached, Low-Water Control. Also called a low-water
the control shuts off the power to the burner. In cutoff, this device senses low water levels in a boiler.
newer furnaces, the control is part of an integrated When a low-water situation occurs, this control
circuit board and is communicated to by a sensor shuts off the electrical power to the burner.
strategically located in the plenum. Some older
furnaces have individual high-temperature limit Main gas Valve. Allows the gas to flow to the
controls and a separate fan control; others have main burner of a gas-fired furnace; see Figure 18-7.
combination high-temperature limit/fan controls. It may also function as a pressure regulator, a safety
shut-off, and the pilot and main gas valve. Should
Hot Surface Igniter. Heats to a cherry red/orange there be a “flame-out,” if the pilot light fails to
colour in furnaces without a standing constant pilot operate, or in the event of a power failure, this valve
light. When it reaches the proper temperature, the will shut off the flow of gas to the main burner.
main gas valve is allowed to open. If the hot surface
igniter does not come on, the main gas valve will Nozzle. Produces the desired spray pattern for the
not open. Most energy-efficient furnaces use this particular appliance in which the burner is used.
kind of ignition. Oil Burner. Breaks fuel oil into small droplets,
Hydronic System. A system of heating or cooling mixes the droplets with air, and ignites the resulting
that involves transfer of heat by circulating fluid spray to form a flame.
such as water in a closed system of pipes. Primary Control. Controls the oil burner motor,
Ignition. ignition, and oil valve in response to commands from
a thermostat; see Figure 18-3B. It monitors safety
Continuous pilot ignition. The igniter is designed devices such as the flame detector and also monitors
to stay on continuously. the status of the high-temperature limit. If the oil fails
Intermittent duty ignition. Defined by UL 296 as to ignite, the controller shuts down the oil burner.
“ignition by an energy source that is continuously
maintained throughout the time the burner is firing”;
the igniter is on the entire time the burner is firing.
Interrupted duty ignition. Defined by UL 296 as
“an ignition system that is energized each time the
main burner is to be fired and de-energized at
the end of a timed trial for ignition period or after the
main flame is proven to be established”; the igniter
comes on to light the flame. After the flame is estab-
lished, the igniter is turned off and the main flame
keeps burning. Figure 18-7 Main gas valve.
324 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems

Pump and Zone Controls. Regulate the flow of

water or steam in boiler systems to specific “zones”
in the building.

Safety Controls. Safety controls such as pressure

relief valves, high-temperature limit controls,
low-water cutoffs, and burner primary controls
protect against appliance malfunction.

Solenoid. An electrically operated device; when

the valve coil is energized, a magnetic field is
developed, causing a spring-loaded steel valve
piston to overcome the resistance of the spring and
immediately pull the piston into the stem. The valve
is now in the open position. When de-energized, the
solenoid coil magnetic field instantly dissipates,
and the spring-loaded valve piston snaps closed,

Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

stopping oil flow or gas flow to the nozzle. The
flame is extinguished, allowing fuel to flow. Usu-
ally a spring returns the valve back to the closed
position.
Spark Ignition. The spark comes on while pilot Figure 18-8 Switching relay.
gas flows to the pilot orifice. Once the pilot flame is
“proven” through an electronic sensing circuit, the
main gas valve opens. Once ignition takes place, the
current flows; see Figure 18-9. To operate, there
sensor will monitor and prove existence of a main
must be a temperature difference between the metal
flame. If the main flame goes off, the furnace shuts
junctions. In a gas burner, the source of heat for the
down. Energy-efficient furnaces may use this for
thermocouple is the pilot light. The cold junction of
ignition.
the thermocouple remains open and is connected to
Switching Relay. Used between the low-voltage the pilot safety shut-off gas valve circuit. A single
wiring and line-voltage wiring; see Figure 18-8. thermocouple develops a voltage of about 25 to
When a low-voltage thermostat calls for heat, the 30 direct current (DC) millivolts. Because of this
relay “pulls in,” closing the line-voltage contacts extremely low voltage, circuit resistance is kept to
on the relay, which turns on the main power to a very low value.
the furnace or boiler. Usually they have a built-in
transformer that provides the low-voltage Class 2
control circuit.
Chrome-iron alloy
Thermocouple. In systems that have a standing
pilot, a thermocouple holds open a gas valve pilot Hot Cold
solenoid magnet. A thermocouple consists of junction Flow of junction
electric
two dissimilar metals connected together to form current
a circuit. The metals might be iron and copper,
copper and iron constantan, copper-nickel alloy
and chrome-iron alloy, platinum and platinum- Copper-nickel
Candle alloy
rhodium alloy, or chromel and alumel. The types of
metals used depend on the temperatures involved. Figure 18-9 Principle of a thermocouple.
When one of the junctions is heated, an electrical
 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems 325

Copper- Hot
nickel A A A A A A
alloy

B B B B B
Cold
Chrome-iron
alloy

Thermopile

Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

Figure 18-10 Principle of a thermopile.

Figure 18-11 A digital electronic programmable

Thermopile. More than one thermocouple
thermostat provides proper cycling of the heating
connected in series is a thermopile; see Figure 18-10. system, resulting in comfort and energy savings.
The power output of a thermopile is greater than that This type of thermostat could be programmed to
of a single thermocouple—typically either 250 or control temperature, time of operation, humidity,
750 DC millivolts. For example, 10 thermocouples ventilation, filtration, circulation of air, and zone
control. Installation and operational instructions
(25 DC millivolts each) connected in series result
are furnished with the thermostat.
in a 250 DC millivolt thermopile. Twenty-six
thermocouples connected in series results in a
750 DC millivolt thermopile.
Water Circulating Pump. In hydronic systems, a
Thermostat. A thermostat turns the heating/ circulating pump circulates hot water through the pip-
cooling system on and off. Programmable ther­mo­ ing system. Multizone systems have more than one
stats might have day/night setback settings, tempera- pump, each controlled by a thermostat for a particular
ture, humidity, and time displayed, see Figure 18-11. zone. In multizone systems, a high-temperature con-
Thermostats are usually mounted about 1.3 m above trol (aquastat) might be set to maintain the boiler
the finished floor. Do not mount thermostats in areas water temperature to a specific temperature. Some
influenced by drafts or air currents from hot or cold multizone systems have one circulating pump and
air registers, near fireplaces, near concealed hot or
cold water pipes or ducts, in the direct rays of the
sun, or on outside walls. Some thermostats contain
a small vial of mercury that “tips,” so the mercury
closes the circuit by bridging the gap between the
electrical contacts inside the vial. These thermostats
must be kept perfectly level to ensure accuracy.

WARNING: Do not throw mercury thermo-

stats into the trash. Mercury is a hazardous
waste material, and must be given to a waste-
management organization for proper disposal.
Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

Transformer. Converts (transforms) the branch-

circuit voltage to extra-low voltage; see Figure 18-12.
For residential applications, these are Class 2
transformers, 120 to 24 volts. The low-voltage
wiring on the secondary of this transformer is Figure 18-12 Transformer.
Class 2 wiring.
326 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems

burners are prewired at the factory, so the only wir-

ing at the site is done by the electrician, who runs an
extra-low-voltage cable to the thermostat. This sys-
tem is not affected by a power failure because there
is no outside power source.
Self-generating systems operate in the millivolt
range, typically 250 or 750 mV. A special thermostat
is required to function at this extra-low-voltage level.
All other components of the system are matched to
operate at the low voltage.

Courtesy of Wilo SE
SUPPLY CIRCUIT WIRING
Figure 18-13 Water circulator. The wiring for the branch circuit for heating
equipment that uses solid, liquid, or gaseous fuel is
covered in CEC Rules 26-800 through 26-808.
The branch-circuit wiring must be adequate for
use electrically operated valves that open and close
the power requirements of the motors, fans, relays,
on command from the thermostat(s) located in a par-
pumps, ignition, transformers, and other power-
ticular zone(s). See Figure 18-13.
consuming components of the furnace or boiler. The
sizing of conductors, overcurrent protection, conduit
SELF-GENERATING fill, and so on has been covered in other units of this
(MILLIVOLT) SYSTEM textbook.
The basic requirements for the branch circuit are
Several manufacturers of gas burners provide ●● The power for the heating unit and associated
self-generating systems on decorative appliances equipment must be supplied from a single
such as gas fireplaces. These systems do not require circuit. For exceptions, see Rule 26-806 1) 2).
an outside power supply. Figure 18-14 shows
●● A suitable disconnecting means is required.
the wiring diagram of a typical self-generating
The branch-circuit breaker in the panel may
system. The components are connected in series.
be used as the disconnecting means, if no
The small amount of energy required by the gas
one has to walk past the furnace to reach the
valve is supplied by a thermopile. Many of these
breaker.
●● If a separate disconnecting means is required,
Thermostat it cannot be mounted on the furnace or in a
location that would require a person to walk
past the furnace to operate it.
●● The switch must be marked to indicate that it
controls the furnace.

Thermopile Gas valve

CONTROL-CIRCUIT WIRING
Limit switch
CEC Section 16 covers four types of control circuits:
Figure 18-14 Wiring diagram of a self- ●● Class 1 and 2 remote control circuits
generating system.
●● Class 1 and 2 signal circuits
 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems 327

If failure of the limit Limit

switch or the wiring to switch
the limit switch would
cause a direct threat
to life or a fire hazard,
the circuit is classified
as a Class 1 circuit,
Rule 16-010.

Controller Controller

Start/stop
button

A No control circuit B These wires could be a Class 1

conductors leave or Class 2 circuit, or they could be a
the controller motor control circuit,
CEC Section 0, definitions.

Motor Motor

Figure 18-15 Diagram showing Class 1 and Class 2 circuits.

●● Class 1 extra-low-voltage power circuits in Figure 18-15, the control wires leave the equipment.
●● Class 2 low-energy power circuits These insulated conductors are classified as Class 1
or Class 2, depending on voltage, current, and other
Rule 26-804 and Appendix B give excerpts from issues discussed in Section 16. Motor control circuits
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 3 entitled “Electrical Fea- may be protected by control fuses in the controller.
tures of Fuel-Burning Equipment.” Rule 4.8.8 of When No. 16 and No. 18 insulated conductors of
this standard states that a safety control shall inter- a Class 1 circuit are run between pieces of equipment,
rupt the current in the ungrounded conductor of the they must be protected by overcurrent devices rated
circuit between the overcurrent protection and the or set at not more than 10 and 5 amperes, respectively.
load. This must be provided for in the control circuit Figure 18-16 shows a Class 1 circuit. Where the
connected to the Class 2 transformer. failure of equipment or wiring, such as high-limit and
As soon as the conductors for remote control, low-water controls, would “introduce a direct fire or
signalling, or power-limited circuits leave the life hazard,” Rule 16-010, the circuit is deemed to be
equipment, they are classified as Class 1 or Class 2 a Class 1 circuit. Because of this potential hazard,
circuits; see Figure 18-15, Rule 16-002. There Rule 16-116 requires that the wiring be installed in
are different requirements for Class 1 and Class 2 rigid or flexible metal conduit, EMT, or armoured
circuits regarding wire sizes, derating factors, cable, or be otherwise suitably protected from
overcurrent protection, insulation, wiring methods, physical damage. See Rules 16-100 through 16-118
and materials that “differentiate” control-circuit for requirements applicable to Class 1 circuits.
wiring from regular (normal) light and power Class 1 remote control and signalling circuits
circuits, Sections 4 and 12. may be supplied from a source having a maximum
In Part A in Figure 18-15, the control circuitry is voltage of 600 volts. Class 1 extra-low-voltage
contained completely within the equipment, so none of power circuits are limited to 30 volts and 1000 volt-
the control wiring is governed by Section 16. In Part B amperes, Rule 16-100.
328 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems

Thermostat

Class 2 Primary High-limit Low-water

circuit control control cutoff
wiring

Class 1 circuit wiring,

Rule 16-010
Oil
burner
Power supply boiler
wiring per
Section 12

Figure 18-16 Any failure in Class 1 circuit wiring would introduce a direct fire or life hazard. A failure in
the Class 2 circuit wiring would not introduce a direct fire or life hazard. See Rule 16-010.

The insulated conductors of Class 1 circuits and diagrams for residential air-conditioning units indi-
power conductors may be run in the same raceway cate that their extra-low-voltage circuitry is Class 2,
only if they are connected to the same equipment in which case the field wiring of the power and extra-
and the Class 1 insulated conductors have the same low-voltage circuits must be run separately. See
voltage rating as the highest rated wire in the race- Figure 18-17B.
way, Rule 16-114 (Figure 18-17A). Most wiring

Liquidtight flexible
This conduit contains conductors Limit metallic conduit or
that supply the motor, plus the switch liquidtight flexible
conductors connected to the non-metallic conduit
limit switch.
Class 1
Air conditioner
circuit
wiring
Motor
Controller
Junction
Box

Basement

Motor

Figure 18-17A The power conductors supplying

the motor and the Class 1 circuit remote control
conductors to the limit switch and controller may Figure 18-17B Class 2 wiring (LVT) cannot be
be run in the same conduit when the Class 1 run in the same raceway as power conductors.
conductors are insulated for the maximum voltage Typically, LVT is attached to the outside of the
of any other conductors in the raceway. flexible conduit.
 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems 329

Class 1 and Class 2 cables include

●● CIC, ACIC, control, and instrumentation cable
Class 2 low-voltage ●● LVT and ELC Class 2 remote control, signal-
control circuit cable
ling, and power-limited cables
●● Type FAS, FAS 90 power-limited fire protective
signalling cables
Insulated conductors for Class 2 circuits are not
permitted to be run in the same raceway, enclosure,
This conduit
contains
box compartment, or fitting with the regular light-
the power ing circuits, power circuits, or Class 1 circuit wiring,
conductors
supplying 16-212 1) 3).
the furnace. Sometimes it is tempting to cut corners by
Junction
installing Class 2 insulated conductors in the same
box raceway as the power conductors. Even if the Class 2
insulated conductors were insulated with 600-volt
insulation, the same as the power conductors, this is
Figure 18-18 Rule 16-212 prohibits installing a violation of Rule 16-212 3); see Figure 18-18.
the extra-low-voltage Class 2 insulated conductors It is permitted to fasten a Class 2 extra-
in the same raceway as the power conductors low-voltage control cable to a conduit containing the
even if the Class 2 insulated conductors have a
600-volt insulation.
power conductors that supply a furnace or similar
equipment; see Figure 18-18.
Type ELC cables in Class 2 wiring are not permit-
ted for heating control circuits, Rule 16-210 3).
Conductor sizing and overcurrent protection
Figure 18-18 shows a Class 2 circuit, where requirements are found in Subsection 16-100 for
the wiring runs to the thermostat. This will be Class 1 circuits and Subsection 16-200 for Class 2
done with LVT cable as listed in CEC Table 19. circuits.
Type ELC cable is not approved for heating control Transformers that are intended to supply Class 2
circuits, Rule 16-210, but would be suitable for circuits are listed by UL and approved by the
door chimes. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) and are
Table 57 lists the allowable ampacities for marked “Class 2 Transformer.” Figure 18-19 illus-
Class 2 insulated copper conductors. Note that the trates the definitions of remote control, signalling,
derating factors for more than three wires or an and power-limited terminology.
ambient temperature above 30°C are the same as
in Table 5A and Table 5C. For example, a No. 16/4
LVT cable at 35°C has the following ampacity:
Temperature derating from Table 5A, Column 2:
10 amperes 3 0.82 5 8.2 amperes per conductor

Table 57 correction factor for four to six conductors:

8.2 amperes 3 0.8 5 6.56 amperes per conductor
330 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems

Equipment

Overcurrent device or N.O. N.C. N.C.

power-limited circuit

A remote control, signalling, or power-limited circuit is that portion of the wiring system between
A the load side of the overcurrent device or the power-limited supply and all connected equipment,
CEC Section 0 and Rule 16-002.
L1 L2

Start M M
2

3
Stop
M

Coil
M

A remote control circuit is any electrical circuit that controls any other circuit through a relay or
B equivalent device, CEC Section 0, Definitions.

120 volts 16 volts

CHIME

A signal circuit is any electrical circuit that energizes signalling equipment, such as doorbells
C and signal lights, CEC Section 0, Definitions.

Figure 18-19 Remote control and signalling circuits.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. In most cases, what two cables are required to be field installed by the electrician to a
gas or oil heating system?

2. Where does the CEC require that a disconnecting means be installed for a gas furnace
or boiler?
 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems 331

3. What device in an oil-burning system will shut off the burner in the event of a
flame-out?

4. Name the control that limits dangerous water temperatures in an oil-fuelled boiler.

5. Name the control that limits the temperature in the plenum of a furnace.

6. In the wiring diagrams in this unit, are the safety controls connected in series or
parallel?

7. What is meant by the term “self-generating”?

8. Because a self-generating unit is not connected to an outside source of power, the

electrician need not use care in selecting the conductor size or making electrical con-
nections. Is this statement true or false? Explain.

9. Explain what a thermocouple is and how it operates.

10. Explain what a thermopile is.

11. If Class 2 extra-low-voltage insulated conductors are 32 volts, and the power conduc-
tors are insulated for 600 volts, does the CEC permit pulling these conductors through
the same raceway?
332 UNIT 18 Oil and Gas Heating Systems

12. If Class 2 extra-low-voltage insulated conductors are used on a 24-volt system but
are actually insulated for 600 volts (T90 nylon No. 14, for example), does the CEC
permit running these conductors together in the same raceway as the 600-volt power
conductors?

13. Under what conditions may Class 1 insulated conductors and power conductors be
installed in the same raceway?

14. What is the CEC section and rule for Question 13?

15. In Figure 18-2, with the fan running, what voltage would be present across the fan
switch?
a. 0 volts
b. 5 volts
c. 24 volts
d. 120 volts
 UNIT

19
Recreation Room
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to
●● understand three-wire (multiwire) circuits—the
advantages and the cautions
●● calculate watts loss and voltage drop in two-wire
and three-wire circuits
●● understand the term fixture drops
RED SEAL
●● understand the advantages of installing
multiwire branch circuits
OCCUPATIONAL
STANDARD
●● understand problems that can be encountered (RSOS)
on multiwire branch circuits as a result of open
neutrals For the Red Seal exam,
note that this unit covers
the following RSOS task:
●● Task C-17

333
334 UNIT 19 Recreation Room

RECREATION ROOM LIGHTING

Recessed luminaires can be installed in suspended
ceilings where the acoustical tiles, lay-in drywall
panels, and suspended grid are not part of the actual
building structure. The recreation room ceiling is
finished with 13 mm gypsum board, cut to 600 mm ×
600 mm panels layed into a suspended T-bar ceil-
ing grid installed below the ceiling joists. There are
11 recessed luminaires installed throughout the sus-
pended ceiling. The three wet bar recessed luminaires
are to be placed in a drywall bulkhead. Figure 19-1 Recessed luminaires (pot lights)
A typical suspended ceiling installation is installed in a T-bar ceiling.
shown in Figure 19-1. Figure 19-2 shows a device
and wiring layout. When conduit is used, junction
boxes are mounted above the dropped ceiling, usu- and load requirements for recessed luminaires. In
ally within half a metre of the intended luminaires houses wired with non-metallic-sheathed cable, the
location. One to two metres of AC90 armoured luminaire may be wired directly using NMD90.
cable are installed between these junction boxes and Pot lights of the type shown in Figure 19-3
the luminaires. These short cables are commonly might bear the label “Recessed luminaires.”
called fixture drops; Figure 19-3. They must contain Recessed luminaires are intended for installation
the correct type and size of conductor for the Cana- in cavities in ceilings and walls and are to be wired
dian Electrical Code (CEC) temperature ratings according to Rules 30-900 through 30-912. These

Figure 19-2 Cable layout for recreation room.

 UNIT 19 Recreation Room 335

Flexible metal conduit requires

separate bonding conductor,
Rule 10-610 3). Secure within
300 mm of outlet box

Tap connection insulated

conductors shall not be over
Outlet box
Tie wires

2 m long.

Suspended ceiling
recessed luminaire

Suspended ceiling
Conductors in flexible metal conduit
must be suitable for temperature
requirements as listed on luminaires
label. Usually 90°C minimum.

Figure 19-3 A suspended ceiling recessed luminaire supplied by not over 2 m of flexible metal conduit.
Rule 12-1010 3) b) indicates that if the conduit is less than 900 mm long, it does not require clipping. The
insulated tap conductors cannot be more than 2 m long, Rule 30-910 3).

luminaires may also be installed in suspended ceil-

ings if they have the necessary mounting hardware. Table 19-1
The National Building Code and most elec- Recreation room: Outlets and estimated load
trical inspection departments require luminaires (four circuits).
to be chained based on the weight and size of the VOLT—
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY WATTS AMPERES
luminaire. This provides an independent means of
support so, if the ceiling collapses, the luminaires Circuit B10
Wet bar receptacles 2 240 240
remain supported, Rule 30-302. (GFCI-protected)
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Stan- Circuit B12
dard C22.2 E598 covers suspended ceiling recessed Recessed luminaires 15 135 135
luminaires in detail. Circuit B14
Receptacles 9 1080 1080
The recessed luminaires’ style in the main area
of the recreation room is a slim LED downlight with Circuit B18
Bar fridge receptacle 1 1440 1440
a colour code of 3000 K warm white installed in the
suspended ceiling. They are controlled by a single-
pole switch located at the bottom of the stairs.
Circuit B12 feeds the slim LED downlights in
the recreation room; see Figure 19-2. Table 19-1 and watts loss for a three-wire circuit compared to sim-
summarizes the outlets and estimated load for the ilar loads connected to two separate two-wire circuits.
recreation room. Figures 19-4 and 19-5 illustrate the benefits of a
multiwire circuit for watts loss and voltage drop. The
example is a purely resistive circuit with equal loads.
TWO- AND THREE-WIRE
CIRCUITS
EXAMPLE 1
Using a multiwire circuit can save money since one
TWO 2-WIRE CIRCUITS (Figure 19-4)
three-wire circuit will do the job of two two-wire cir-
cuits. Also, if the loads are nearly balanced in a three-
Watts loss in each current-carrying conductor is
wire circuit, the neutral conductor carries only the
unbalanced current. This results in less voltage drop Watts 5 I2R 5 10 3 10 3 0.154 or 15.4 watts
336 UNIT 19 Recreation Room

0.154 V 0.154 Ω 1.54 volts

10 ampere 10 ampere
116.92 volts 118.46 volts
120 volts Load 120 volts Load
10 amperes 10 amperes
0.154 V 0.154 Ω
240 volts
10 ampere 0 amperes
118.46 volts
120 volts Load
0.154 V 10 amperes
0.154 Ω 1.54 volts
10 ampere
116.92 volts 10 ampere
120 volts Load
10 amperes
0.154 V Figure 19-5 Diagram of Example 2.
10 ampere

Figure 19-4 Diagram of Example 1. Voltage available at loads is

(240 2 3.08) volts 5 236.92 volts

Watts loss in all four current-carrying conduc-
Voltage available at each load is
tors is
236.92
15.4 watts 3 4 5 61.6 watts volts 5 118.46 volts
2
Voltage drop in each current-carrying conductor is

Ed 5 IR The distance from the load to the source is

5 10 3 0.154 15 m. The conductor size is No. 14 AWG copper.
5 1.54 volts The resistance of each 15-m length of No. 14 AWG
Ed for both current-carrying conductors in each is about 0.154 ohm.
circuit is The maximum distance that a 14/2 NMD90
copper wire, based on a 3% voltage drop, may be
2 3 1.54 volts 5 3.08 volts
run is 19.76 m, using Table D3 at a 10-ampere
Voltage available at load is load. Therefore, for runs longer than 20 m in resi-
dential applications, Table D3 should be used to
(120 2 3.08) volts 5 116.92 volts
ensure that the wire is not too small, Rule 8-102
and Appendix D.
It is apparent that a multiwire circuit can greatly
EXAMPLE 2 reduce watts loss and voltage drop. This is the same
reasoning that is used for the three-wire service
ONE 3-WIRE CIRCUIT (Figure 19-5)
entrance conductors and the three-wire feeder to
Panel B in this residence.
Watts loss in each current-carrying conductor is
It is important to connect the neutral according
Watts 5 I2R 5 10 3 10 3 0.154 5 15.4 watts to Rule 4-030 4), which states that the continuity of
the identified (white) conductor must be indepen-
Watts loss in both current-carrying conductors is
dent of the device connections. This means that a
15.4 watts 3 2 5 30.8 watts pigtail connection must be made at receptacles and
lampholders; see Unit 11, Figure 11-5.
Voltage drop in each current-carrying conductor is
Take care when connecting a three-wire circuit to
Ed 5 IR the panel. The black and red conductors must be con-
5 10 3 0.154 nected to the opposite phases in the panel to prevent
5 1.54 volts heavy overloading of the neutral (white) conductor.
Ed for both current-carrying conductors is A two-pole breaker may be used for this purpose, but
is not mandatory for multiwire circuits serving fixed
2 3 1.54 volts 5 3.08 volts lighting and not split receptacles, Rule 14-010 b).
 UNIT 19 Recreation Room 337

Panel
Phase A Phase B

Line current – 12 amperes

Circuit properly
120 V Load 12-ampere
240 V connected to
opposite phases A load

Neutral current – 2 amperes

120 V Load 10-ampere

B load

Line current – 10 amperes

Figure 19-6 Correct wiring connections for a three-wire (multiwire) circuit.

The neutral conductor of the three-wire cable conductors rather than the unbalanced current. As
carries the unbalanced current. This current is the a result, the neutral conductor will be overloaded.
difference between the current in the black wire and All single-phase, 120/240-volt panels are clearly
the current in the red wire. For example, if one load marked to help prevent an error in phase wiring.
is 12 amperes and the other is 10 amperes, the neu- The electrician must check all panels for the proper
tral current is the difference between these loads: wiring diagrams before beginning an installation.
2 amperes; see Figure 19-6. Figure 19-7 shows how an improperly connected
If the black and red conductors of the three- three-wire circuit results in an overloaded neutral
wire cable are connected to the same phase in conductor. If an open neutral occurs on a three-wire
Panel A (Figure 19-7), the neutral conductor must circuit, some electrical appliances in operation may
carry the total current of both the red and black experience voltages higher than normal for the circuit.

Panel
Phase A Phase B

Line current – 12 amperes

Circuit improperly
120 V Load 12-ampere
240 V connected
to same phase A load

Current in white
wire – 22 amperes
120 V Load 10-ampere
B load

Line current – 10 amperes

Figure 19-7 Improperly connected three-wire (multiwire) circuit.

338 UNIT 19 Recreation Room

Figure 19-8 shows that for an open neutral con- Voltage appearing across the toaster is
dition, the voltage across Load A decreases and
E 5 I 3 R 5 2.71 3 8.45 5 22.9 volts
the voltage across Load B increases. If the load on
each circuit changes, the voltage on each circuit also Voltage appearing across the television is
changes. According to Ohm’s law, the voltage drop
E 5 I 3 R 5 2.71 3 80 5 216.8 volts
across any device in a series circuit is directly pro-
portional to the resistance of that device. Therefore, if The toaster that is rated at 1700 watts is produc-
Load B has twice the resistance of Load A, then Load ing only 62 watts, whereas the TV that is rated at
B will be subjected to twice the voltage of Load A for 180 watts is producing 587 watts. Therefore, the
an open neutral condition. To ensure the proper con- toaster will produce little heat, and the TV compo-
nection, take care when splicing the conductors. nents will be damaged, with a possibility of fire.
Figure 19-9 shows what can occur if the neutral This example illustrates the problems that can arise
of a three-wire multiwire circuit opens. Trace the with an open neutral on a three-wire, 120/240-volt
flow of current from Phase A through the television multiwire branch circuit.
set, then through the toaster, then back to Phase B, The same problem can arise when the neutral
thus completing the circuit. The following simple of the utility company’s incoming service entrance
calculations show why the television set (or stereo conductors (underground or overhead) opens.
or home computer) can be expected to burn up. The problem is minimized because the neutral of
With the neutral broken, the TV and the toaster the service is solidly connected (grounded) to the
are connected in series across 240 volts. The total building’s water piping system or other approved
resistance (Rt) is now the sum of these two loads: grounding electrode, Rule 10-102. However,
there are cases where poor service grounding has
Rt 5 (8.45 1 80) ohms 5 88.45 ohms resulted in serious and expensive damage to appli-
The total current of the circuit is the available ances within the home because of an open neutral
voltage (240 volts) divided by the total resistance in the incoming service entrance conductors.
(88.45 ohms), therefore, Three-wire circuits are used occasionally in resi-
dential installations. The two hot conductors of three-
E 240 wire cable are connected to opposite phases. One
I5 5 5 2.71 amperes
R 88.45 white neutral (grounded) conductor is common to

Panel
Phase A Phase B

Line current – 10.91 amperes

Circuit properly Ed = I x R
Load
240 V connected to R = E = 120 = 10 A = 10.91 x 10
opposite phases. I 12 = 109.1 V
Open
neutral

Neutral current – 0 amperes

R = E = 120 = 12 Load Ed = I x R
I 10 = 10.91 x 12
TOTAL = 22 B = 130.9 V
Line current – 10.91 amperes

It = E = 240 = 10.91 amperes

Rt 22
N

Figure 19-8 Example of an open neutral conductor.

 UNIT 19 Recreation Room 339

Phase A Phase B

Black

White
Open neutral
(poor connection)

Red
N

Toaster Television set

Before 14.2 amperes Before 1.5 amperes
neutral 1704 watts neutral 180 watts
breaks 8.45 ohms breaks 80 ohms
120 volts 120 volts

2.71 amperes 2.71 amperes

After After
62.1 watts 588 watts
neutral neutral
8.45 ohms 80 ohms
breaks breaks
22.9 volts 217 volts...TV burns up

Figure 19-9 Problems that can occur with an open neutral on a three-wire (multiwire) circuit.

both hot conductors. All three-wire cables supplying above it. See Unit 10 for information on recessed
multiwire circuits must be connected to a common- luminaires.
trip, two-pole breaker unless they feed fixed lighting The basic switch, receptacle, and luminaire con-
loads or non-split receptacles, Rule 14-010 b). nections are similar to those discussed in previous
The two receptacle outlets above the wet bar in units.
the recreation room are ground-fault circuit inter- The selection of wall boxes for the receptacles is
rupter (GFCI)-protected as indicated on the plans. based on the measurements of the furring strips on the
All receptacles within 1.5 m of a sink require GFCI walls. Two-by-two furring strips will require the use
protection, Rule 26-704 1). An exception to this rule of shallow device boxes. If the walls are furred with
is when the receptacle is located behind a stationary two-by-fours, regular sectional device boxes could be
appliance and is inaccessible for use with general used. Select a box that can contain the number of con-
purpose portable appliances. ductors, devices, and connectors to meet CEC require-
A single-pole switch to the right of the wet ments, as discussed in this text (CEC Table 23). After
bar controls the three recessed luminaires all, the installation must be safe.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. What is the total current draw when all the recessed luminaires located in the recre-
ation room are turned ON? Include the wet bar and recreation room closet.
340 UNIT 19 Recreation Room

2. Why is it important that the hot conductors in a three-wire circuit be properly con-
nected to opposite phases in a panel?

3. In the diagram below, Load A is rated at 10 amperes, 120 volts, and Load B is rated at
5 amperes, 120 volts.

120 V Load 10-ampere

A load
Neutral
240 V

120 V Load 5-ampere

B load

a. When connected to the three-wire circuit as indicated, how much current will flow
in the neutral?
b. If the neutral should open, to what voltage would each load be subjected, assuming
both loads were operating at the time the neutral opened? Show all calculations.

4. Calculate the watts loss and voltage drop in each conductor in the following circuit:

15.24 m No. 12 AWG solid copper

15 ampere Load

15.24 m No. 12 AWG solid copper

5. Unless specially designed, all recessed luminaires must be provided with

­factory-installed .
6. What is the current draw of the recessed luminaires above the bar?
 UNIT 19 Recreation Room 341

7. Calculate the total current draw for Circuit B14.

8. Using Table D3 in Appendix D of the CEC, calculate the maximum distance for a No. 12/2
NMD90 wire carrying 10 amperes at 240 volts for a 3% voltage drop. Answer in metres.
Show calculations.

9. Using the plans provided with this textbook, complete a material take-off for the
recreation room area to minimum CEC standards.

10. Using the diagram below, to get equal spread of illumination on the floor, when using
recessed luminaires, what is the distance “B”?

12 m

a. 0.6 m
b. 1.2 m
c. 2.0 m
d. 2.4 m
UNIT

20
Branch Circuits for
Workshop and Utility
Area
RED SEAL
Objectives
OCCUPATIONAL
STANDARD After studying this unit, you should be able to
(RSOS) ●● understand the meaning, use, and installation of
multioutlet assemblies
For the Red Seal exam,
note that this unit covers ●● list the requirements for a deep-well jet pump
the following RSOS tasks: installation
●● Task B-8 ●● calculate (given the rating of the motor) the
conductor size, conduit size, overcurrent, and
●● Task C-17
overload protection required for the pump circuit
●● Task D-22
●● list the electrical circuits used for connecting
●● Task D-24 electric water heaters
●● describe the basic operation of the water heater
●● make the proper bonding connections for the
water heater

342
 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area 343

WORKSHOP A single-pole switch at the entry controls all

five ceiling porcelain lampholders. However, note
The workshop area is supplied by four circuits: on the plans (Figure 20-1) that three of these lamp-
holders have pull-chains to allow the homeowner to
A12 Freezer receptacle
turn these lampholders on and off as needed, to save
B12 Lighting and exhaust fan
energy; see Figure 20-2.
A13 Workbench receptacles
Table 20-1 shows the estimated load for light-
A19 Utility receptacle ing, whereas Table 20-2 shows the load for the other

Figure 20-1 Cabling layout for the workshop.

344 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area

Table 20-2
Workshop: Outlet count and estimated load for
three 15-ampere receptacle circuits (wire with
Keyless Pull chain
conduit). Rule 8-304 4) counts each 300 mm of
multioutlet assembly as one outlet for areas
where a number of appliances will be used
simultaneously.
VOLT–
Figure 20-2 Porcelain lampholders. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY WATTS AMPERES

15-A circuit, A13

Receptacle next 1 120 120
to multioutlet
assembly @ 1 A
three 15-ampere circuits. See also Rules 30-104 a) A six-receptacle 1 720 720
plug-in multioutlet
and 14-600. assembly at 1 A
per outlet (120 VA)
15-A circuit, A19
WORKBENCH LIGHTING
Utility receptacle 1 120 120
Two two-lamp, 17-watt LED luminaires are 15-A circuit, A12
mounted above the workbench to reduce shadows Single receptacle 1 626 696
over the work area. The electrical plans show that for freezer (not
GFCI)
these luminaires are controlled by a single-pole wall
Total of the three 4 1586 1656
switch. Either a junction box is mounted immedi- circuits
ately above or adjacent to the LED luminaire so
that the connections can be made readily, or the
luminaire may be directly wired with NMD90. RECEPTACLE OUTLETS
NMD90 can be used to connect the luminaire to
the junction box. Flexible cord (Type S, SJ, or equiv- Rule 26-720 e) iv) stipulates that at least one duplex
alent) cannot be used to connect the luminaire to the receptacle shall be provided in any unfinished base-
junction box since it cannot be used as a substitute ment area. Rule 26-720 l) requires that at least one
for the fixed wiring of structures, Rule 12-402 3). duplex receptacle be provided for a central vacuum
The LED luminaire must be grounded. system, where the complete duct is already installed.
In this residence, the outlet for the central vacuum
is in the garage. In some jurisdictions, the installa-
tion of a sump pump in the basement is mandatory.
A separate branch circuit is required for the recep-
Table 20-1
tacle feeding the sump pump and does not have to
Workshop: Outlet count and estimated be ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI)–protected
load for circuit B12. or AFCI-protected as long as a single 5-15R recep-
VOLT– tacle outlet that is clearly labelled for the purpose is
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY WATTS AMPERES installed; see Rule 26-658 1) b).
LED A-19 bulbs 5 40 40
@ 8 W each
LED luminaires: 2 34 34 CABLE INSTALLATION
Two @ 17 W each IN BASEMENTS
Exhaust fan 1 80 90
Totals 8 154 164 Unit 5 covers the installation of non-metallic-sheathed
cable (NMD90) and armoured cable (AC90).
 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area 345

Running non-metallic-sheathed cable is covered pull, start at one end of the basement and drill
by the 12-500 series of rules, and armoured cable every second joist. At the end of the run, turn
installations by the 12-600 series of rules. When lay- around and drill the remaining joists from the
ing out the basement, consider the following: opposite direction. The cable will be much eas-
●● Cables cannot be run across the lower face of ier to pull through holes drilled this way.
basement joists unless they are protected from
mechanical injury.
MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY
●● When run through holes in the joists, cables are
considered to be supported. A multioutlet assembly has been installed above
●● Cables for concealed installations must be kept the workbench. For safety and adequate wiring, any
at least 32 mm from the edge of the joist. workshop receptacles should be connected to a sep-
arate circuit; see Figure 20-3. In the event of a mal-
●● Check with your local inspection authority to
function in any power tool commonly used in the
see how many cables may be run through holes
home workshop (saw, planer, lathe, or drill), only
in the joists before Rule 4-004 13) is applied.
receptacle Circuit A13 is affected. The lighting in
●● When cables are run near heating ducts, they the workshop is not affected by a power outage on
must be 25 mm from the duct to prevent heat the receptacle circuit.
transfer from the duct to the cable. If it is not The installation of multioutlet assemblies must
possible to obtain a 25 mm separation, a ther- conform to the requirements of Rule 12-3028.
mal barrier must be installed. Running the
cable below the ducts whenever possible will
also help prevent heat transfer from the ducts. Load Considerations
●● If the cable is run near a concrete or masonry for Multioutlet Assemblies
chimney, a distance of 50 mm must be main- A maximum of 12 outlets are permitted on any two-
tained between the conductor and a chimney, wire circuit. These outlets have a load of 1 ampere
and 150 mm must be maintained between the each. The maximum load is, therefore, 12 amperes,
conductor and a chimney cleanout. which is 80% of the 15-ampere circuit breaker
●● Some installations will require drilling of the that feeds Circuit A13. Where a number of appli-
basement joists. To make the cable easier to ances may be used simultaneously, each 300 mm of

Panelboard A

Electrical metallic
tubing

Plug-in strip

Figure 20-3 Detail of how the workbench receptacle plug-in strip is connected through the receptacle
located adjacent to the workbench. This is Circuit A13.
346 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area

multioutlet assembly is considered to be one outlet,

Rule 8-304 4).
Because the multioutlet assembly has been pro-
vided in the workshop for plugging in portable tools,
a separate Circuit A13 is provided. This circuit has
been included in the service entrance calculations as
part of the general lighting and power load require-
ments for the residence.
Many types of convenience receptacles are avail-
able for various sizes of multioutlet assemblies,
including duplex, single-circuit grounding, split-
circuit grounding, and duplex split-circuit receptacles.
Figure 20-5 Multioutlet assembly starter is
Wiring the Multioutlet Assembly mounted on an outlet box and is used to supply
power to the assembly track.
The electrician first attaches the base of the multi-
outlet assembly to the wall or baseboard. The recep-
tacles are snapped into the base; see Figures 20-4
EMPTY CONDUITS
and 20-5. Covers are then cut to the lengths required
to fill the spaces between the receptacles. Manufac- Although not truly part of the workshop wiring,
turers of these assemblies can supply prefabricated Specification 13 and note 6 on the first-floor electri-
covers to be used when evenly spaced receptacles cal plans indicates that two empty 27 trade size race-
are installed. These receptacles are usually installed ways are to be installed, running from the workshop
300 mm or 450 mm apart. to the attic. This is unusual but certainly handy when
In general, multioutlet installations are simple additional wiring might be required at some later
because of the large number of fittings and acces- date. The empty raceways will provide the necessary
sories available. Connectors, couplings, ground route from the basement to the attic, thus eliminat-
clamps, blank end fittings, elbows for turning cor- ing the need to fish through the wall partitions.
ners, and end entrance fittings can all be used to
simplify the installation.
WORkShOP/UTILITY AREA
In the workshop/utility area, the sump pump, freezer,
furnace, and water heater show that special-purpose
outlets are being used; see Table B-1 in Appendix B at
the back of the book for a description for each symbol.

WELL PUMP CIRCUIT B

All dwellings need a good water supply. City dwell-

ings generally are connected to the city water sys-
Courtesy of Legrand/Wiremold

tem. In rural areas, where there is no public water

supply, each dwelling has its own system in the form
of a well. The residence plans show that a deep-well
pump located outside on drawing 1 of 8 is used to
pump water from the well to the various plumbing
Figure 20-4 One type of multioutlet assembly
outlets. The outlet for this pump is shown by the
showing track, receptacle, and track cover. symbol. B
An electric motor drives the pump. A
circuit must be installed for this system.
 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area 347

JET PUMP OPERATION provided at the end of the tailpipe. The foot valve pre-
vents water in the pumping equipment from draining
Figure 20-6 shows the major parts of a typical jet back into the well when the pump is not operating.
pump. The pump impeller wheel j forces water When the pump is operating, the lower part of
down a drive pipe k at a high velocity and pressure the storage tank fills with water, and air is trapped
to a point just above the water level in the well cas- in the upper part. As the water rises in the tank, the
ing. (Some well casings may be driven to a depth of air is compressed. When the air pressure is 276 kilo-
more than 30.5 m before striking water.) Just above pascals (kPa), a pressure switch r disconnects the
the water level, the drive pipe curves sharply upward pump motor. The pressure switch is adjusted so
and enters a larger vertical suction pipe l. The drive that as the water is used and the air pressure falls to
pipe terminates in a small nozzle or jet m in the suc- 138 kPa, the pump restarts and fills the tank again.
tion pipe. The water emerges from the jet with great
force and flows upward through the suction pipe.
Water rises in the suction pipe, drawn up through The Pump Motor
the tailpipe n by the action of the jet. The water rises A jet pump for residential use may be driven by a
to the pump inlet and passes through the impeller wheel one-horsepower (hp) motor at 3400 rpm. A dual-
of the pump. Part of the water is forced down through voltage motor is used so that it can be connected to
the drive pipe again. The remaining water passes 120 or 240 volts. For a 1-hp motor, the higher volt-
through a check valve and enters the storage tank o. age is preferred since the current at this voltage is
The tailpipe is submerged in the well water to a half that at the lower voltage. It is recommended
depth of about 3 m. A foot valve p and strainer q are that a single-phase, capacitor-start motor be used
for a residential jet pump. Such a motor is designed
to produce a high starting torque, which helps over-
9 6
Pressure
come the back pressure within the tank and the
switch weight of the water being lifted from the well.

1
Impeller
The Pump Motor Circuit
Figure 20-7 is a diagram of the electrical circuit that
Precharged
water
operates the jet pump motor and pressure switch.
tank This circuit is taken from Panel A, Circuits A5/A7.
CEC Table 45 indicates that a 1-hp single-phase
motor has a rating of 8 amperes at 230 volts. This
2 Drive pipe
motor is provided with internal thermal protection.
With this information, the conductor size, conduit
3 Suction pipe
size, branch-circuit overcurrent protection, and
Well casing overload protection can be determined for the motor.
Bond to system ground with
No. 6 AWG copper minimum,
4 Jet Rule 10-612 6) Conductor Size [Rule 28-106 1)]

5 Tailpipe
Rule 28-106 1) requires that conductors supplying
motors have an ampacity of not less than 125% of
7 Foot valve the motor full-load current rating. Therefore, the
8-ampere pump motor would require a minimum of
8 Strainer a 10-ampere conductor, which would be a minimum
No. 14 AWG. However, the schedule of special-pur-
Figure 20-6 Components of a jet pump. pose outlets in the specifications states that No. 12
AWG conductors are to be used for the pump circuit.
348 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area

Panelboard ●● Time-delay fuses

Line
A
Line
B
Maximum of 175% of motor FLC
8 3 175% 5 14 amperes, Rule 28-200 3) a).
C Therefore, use a 15-ampere fuse.
●● Circuit breakers—inverse time
E
Maximum of 250% of motor FLC
8 3 250% 5 20 amperes
B Therefore, use a 20-ampere breaker.
A D
When overcurrent devices, as selected above,
will not allow the motor to start, it is permissible to
A 240-volt bus in panelboard F increase the overcurrent device according to Rule
28-200 4) as follows:
B 20-ampere, 2-pole circuit breaker
●● Non-time-delay fuses
C No. 12 AWG THHN/THWN conductors Maximum of 400% of motor FLC, for fuses
Two-pole fused disconnect switch and rated up to 600 A
D motor overload protection
●● Time-delay fuses
E Two-pole pressure switch Maximum of 225% of motor FLC
F 1-HP, 230-volt, single-phase motor ●● Circuit breakers—inverse time
Maximum of 400% of motor FLC, for circuit
Figure 20-7 Pump circuit. breaker rated up to 100 A
The previously mentioned percentage ratings, as
indicated in Table 29 and Rule 28-200 4), are maxi-
Conduit Size
mum values. If the value calculated by this method
If rigid PVC conduit is run from the house to the does not correspond to a standard size or rating of
wellhead, two No. 12 AWG black conductors and overcurrent device from Table 13, the next smaller
one No. 14 AWG green conductor type RW90/ size must be used. However, overcurrent devices
RWU90 conductors require 16 trade size conduit, smaller than 15 amperes are not required, Rule
Rules 12-910 and 12-1120. 28-200 3) a). Overcurrent devices may be sized
smaller than the maximum allowable size if desired.
Branch-Circuit Overcurrent Protection
(Rule 28-200, Tables 29 and D16) Overload Protection for the
Rule 28-200 requires the jet pump motor to be pro- Motor (Rule 28-300)
tected with an overcurrent device sized according to All motors are required to have overload protection
Table 29. Therefore, Table 29, line 1, can be used. (Rule 28-300) unless they meet the requirements of
Motor circuit overcurrent sizing may be deter- Rule 28-308.
mined using Table D16, which is based on Table 29. Overload devices can be time-delay fuses or ther-
However, since not all motor full-load current mal devices of the fixed or adjustable type. When siz-
ratings are listed in this table, the overcurrent ing overload devices, it is important to note the motor
devices should be sized according to Table 29 and service factor (SF), which is indicated on the motor
Rule 28-200 as follows: nameplate. If the motor has a marked service factor of
●● Non-time-delay fuses 1.15 or greater, the overload devices are sized at 125%
Maximum of 300% of the motor FLC (full-load of the motor full-load current, Rule 28-306 1) a).
current) If the service factor is less than 1.15 or is unknown,
8 3 300% 5 24 amperes the overload devices will be sized at a maximum of
Therefore, use a 20-ampere fuse. 115% of the motor FLC, Rule 28-306 1) b).
 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area 349

Assuming that the pump has, as most modern 11 Controller

motors do, a service factor of 1.15 or greater, the 9
USED ON
overloads will be sized as “3-WIRE” SWITCH
PUMPS
12 ONLY
8 amperes 3 125% 5 10 amperes Power supply
cable run shall Pressure
comply with switch
Wiring for the Pump Motor Circuit 8
Rule 26-954

The well pump circuit is run from Panel A Cir-

cuits A5/A7, to a disconnect switch and controller
mounted on the wall next to the pump. Thermal 7 Precharged
Deep-well water tank
overload devices (also called heaters) are installed 6 pipe
in the controller to provide overload protection. High-pressure
Two No. 12 conductors are connected to the dou- Centering 10 safety cutoff
guide switch
ble-pole, 20-ampere branch-circuit overcurrent pro-
tective device in Panel A to form Circuit A5/A7. Cable strapped to
Time-delay fuses may be installed in the disconnect water pipe (drop pipe)

switch. These fuses will serve the dual function of Centering guide
providing both branch-circuit overcurrent protection 4 Permanent water level
for the pump motor and backup protection for the
thermal overload protecting the motor. These fuses 3 Housing

Centrifugal pump drives

may be rated at not more than 125% of the full-load 1 water upward
running current of the motor.
Water intake screen
A short length of flexible metal conduit is con-
Squirrel-cage
nected between the load side of the thermal overload 2 induction motor
switch and the pressure switch on the pump. This pres- Well casing driven
sure switch is usually connected to the motor at the fac- 5 to depth necessary to
reach below permanent
tory. Figure 20-7 shows a double-pole pressure switch at water level
(E). When the contacts of the pressure switch are open,
all conductors feeding the motor are disconnected.
Figure 20-8 Deep well submersible pump.

 EEP WELL SUBMERSIBLE

D
PUMP
the water. This assures that air is not absorbed by the
Figure 20-8 shows the major components of a typical water. The absorption of air causes a slow reduction
deep well submersible pump. A deep well submers- of the water pressure, and, ultimately, the tank will
ible pump consists of a centrifugal pump, j, driven fill completely with water with no room for the air.
by an electric motor, k . The pump and the motor The use of a vinyl bag to hold the air ensures that
are contained in one housing, l , submersed below the initial air charge is always maintained.
the permanent water level, m, within the well casing, Power to the motor is supplied by a cable espe-
n. The pump housing is a cylinder 3–5 in. in diameter cially designed for use with deep well submersible
and 2–4 ft long. When running, the pump raises the pumps. 12 , the deep well submersible power supply
water upward through the piping, o, to the water tank, cable shall be marked for –40°C; this cable is gen-
p. Proper pressure is maintained in the system by a pres- erally supplied with the pump and its other compo-
sure switch, q. The disconnect switch, r, high-pressure nents. The cable is cut to the proper length to reach
safety cutoff switch s, and controller, 11 , are installed in between the pump and its controller. When needed,
logical and convenient locations near the water tank. the cable may be spliced according to the manufac-
Some water tanks have a precharged air cham- turer’s specifications. Rule 26-954 details the wiring
ber containing a vinyl bag that separates the air from permitted for deep well submersible pumps.
350 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area

The wiring from the wellhead to the main dis- pump motor will minimize or eliminate stray volt-
tribution panel must be in accordance with CEC age problems that could occur if the pump is not
Section 12. Should it be required to run the pump’s bonded to ground.
circuit underground for any distance, it is necessary Key Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) rules that
to install underground feeder cable type NMWU, or relate to bonding water pumping equipment are
a raceway with suitable conductors, and then make ●● Rule 26-954 d): Pumps shall be bonded to
up the necessary splices in an approved weather- ground according to Section 10.
proof junction box.
●● Rule 10-600 1): Motors operating at more than
Figure 20-9 illustrates how to provide proper
30 volts must be bonded to ground.
bonding of a deep well submersible water pump and
the well casing. Proper grounding of the well cas- ●● Rule 10-616: Bonding conductor size.
ing and the bonding of the deep well submersible

Splices made
in space provided
in well cap or
junction box.

Bonding conductor connected to

pump, Rule 10-612.
Well Pump controller and
cap Case bonding, min No. 6 copper from disconnect switch
case of main panel to case of well pump,
Rule 10-708.
Disconnect must be in
sight and within 9 m
of controller,
Rule 28-604 3).

Disconnect must be
capable of being locked
in the “off” position,
Well Rule 28-604 1).
casing
Type NMWU or cable or raceway with properly
sized conductors must carry bonding conductor
sized per CEC Table 16. Disconnect must open
all ungrounded
(hot) conductors,
Rule 14-010 b).

Pump shall be grounded, Disconnect may be

Rule 26-954 d). in same enclosure
as controller,
Rule to 28-604 1) b).

Intake Disconnect must be

horsepower-rated,
Deep well submersible pump Rule 28-602 1) a).

Figure 20-9 Bonding requirements for deep well submersible pumps. Rules 26-954 d) and 10-612
require that deep well submersible pumps be bonded to ground.
 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area 351

●● Rule 10-708: Bond water-piping system to temperature does not exceed 96°C. They are usually
ground with No. 6 copper. combined in one device; see Figure 20-10.
See Unit 24 for information about underground Most customers will, for safety reasons, ask for
wiring. a setting less than the maximum. See the section
In a deep well submersible pump, the controller “Scalding from Hot Water” later in this unit.
contains the motor starting relay, overload protection, The plumber usually installs pressure/tem-
starting and running capacitors, lightning arrester, and perature relief valves into an opening provided and
terminals for making the necessary electrical connec- marked for the purpose on the water heater. The
tions. Thus, there are no moving electrical parts with the plumber also installs tubing from the pressure/tem-
pump itself, such as would be found in a typical single- perature relief valve downward to within 150 mm of
phase, split-phase induction motor that would require a the floor so that any discharge will exit close to the
centrifugal starting switch. floor. This reduces the possibility of scalding some-
The calculations for sizing the conductors, and one who might be standing nearby. The water heater
the requirements for the disconnect switch, the manufacturer can also provide a factory-installed
motor’s branch-circuit fuses, and the grounding pressure/temperature relief valve.
connections are the same as those for the jet pump Pressure/temperature relief valves are installed
motor. The nameplate data and instructions fur- to prevent the water heater tank from rupturing
nished with the pump must be followed. under excessive pressures and temperatures, should
the adjustable thermostat and the high-temperature
cutoff fail to open. This failure would allow the
water to boil (100°C) and create steam, and could
WATER HEATER CIRCUIT C lead to the tank rupturing.
All homes require a continuous supply of hot
water. To meet this need, one or more automatic
water heaters are installed close to the areas in the
home with the greatest need for hot water. The
proper size and type of water piping is installed
to carry the heated water from the water heater to
the plumbing fixtures and to the appliances that
require hot water, such as clothes washers and
dishwashers.
Modern water heaters have adjustable temperature-
regulating controls that maintain the water tempera-
ture at the desired setting, generally within a range
of 45°C–75°C.
For safety reasons, the Canadian Standards
Association (CSA) requires that electric water heat- Courtesy of Craig Trineer
ers be equipped with a high-temperature cutoff. This
high-temperature control limits the maximum water
temperature to about 96°C. This control is set at the
factory and cannot be changed in the field. Electric
Figure 20-10 Electric water heater controls.
water heaters shall be equipped with a temperature
This seven-terminal control combines water
limiting means in addition to the control thermostat. temperature control plus high-temperature
This temperature limiting means must disconnect all limit control. This is the type commonly used to
ungrounded conductors. control the upper heating element and provide
In most residential water heaters, the upper ther- a high-temperature limiting feature. The two-
terminal control is the type used to control water
mostat is set so that it will not exceed 90°C, and temperature for the lower heating element.
the high-temperature cutoff is set so that the water
352 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area

Residential water heaters typically are available discussed later in this unit. Most heating elements will
in 60-, 101-, 170-, 225-, and 270-L sizes. burn out if operated at voltages 5% higher than that
To reduce corrosion, most water heaters have glass- for which they are rated.
lined steel tanks and contain one or two magnesium To reduce the element burnout situation, some
anodes (rods) permanently submerged in the water. manufacturers will supply water heaters with heat-
Their purpose is to provide “cathodic protection.” Sim- ing elements that are actually rated for 250 volts, but
ply stated, corrosion problems are minimized as long will mark the water heater 240 volts with its corre-
as the magnesium anodes are in an active state. Infor- sponding wattage at 240 volts. This allows a cushion
mation about replacing the anode is in the manufactur- should higher than normal voltages be experienced.
er’s literature included with every electric water heater. CSA Standard CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 110-M90,
entitled “Construction and Test of Electric Storage-
Tank Water Heaters,” details the specifications and
test procedures for water heater storage tanks and
HEATING ELEMENTS
elements.
The wattage ratings of electric water heaters vary Heating elements consist of a high-resistance
greatly, depending on the size of the heater in litres, nickel–chrome (nichrome) alloy wire that is coiled
the speed of recovery desired, local electric utility and embedded (compacted) in magnesium oxide in
regulations, and local plumbing and building codes. a copper-clad, or stainless steel, tubular housing; see
Wattage ratings are usually 1650, 2000, 2500, Figure 20-11. The magnesium oxide is an excellent
3000, 3800, 4500, or 5500 watts; other wattage rat- insulator of electricity, yet it effectively conducts
ings are available. the heat from the nichrome wire to the housing.
The heating elements are generally rated The construction of heating elements is the same as
240 volts. Elements are also available with 120-volt that of the surface units of an electric range. Terminals
ratings and 208-volt ratings. These elements will are provided on the heating element for the connec-
produce rated wattage output at rated voltage. When tion of the conductors. A threaded hub allows the ele-
operated at less than rated voltage, the wattage out- ment to be screwed securely into the side of the water
put will be reduced. The effect of voltage variation is tank. Water heater resistance heating elements are in

Figure 20-11 Heating elements.

 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area 353

L1

240 volts

3800 watts
L2

Jumper
1700 watts
L3

Figure 20-12 A dual-wattage heating element. The two wires of the incoming 240-volt circuit are connected
to L1 and L2. These leads connect to the 3800-watt element. To connect the 1700-watt element, the jumper is
connected between L2 and L3. With both heating elements connected, the total wattage is 5500 watts.

direct contact with the water for efficient transfer of located near the bottom of the tank. Two-element
heat from the element to the water. water heaters have one heating element near the bot-
Electric water heaters are available with one tom of the tank and the other about halfway up.
or two heating elements; see Figure 20-12. Single- Thermostats, as illustrated in Figure 20-13, turn
element water heaters have the heating element the heating elements on and off, thereby maintaining

/////
///
//
//

//
//
///
// ///
////
////
/////// ///////// // // /// /////// / / /// // /////// // /// // /

Upper thermostat Upper

and high- heating
temperature element
limit control

Lower
heating
element

Lower
thermostat

Figure 20-13 Typical electric water heater showing location of heating elements and thermostats.
354 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area

the desired water temperature. In two-element water shows that a 3500-watt element can raise the water
heaters, the top thermostat is an interlocking type, temperature 90°F (32.22°C) of a little more than
sometimes referred to as a snap-over type. The bot- 16 gallons (about 60 L) an hour. A 5500-watt element
tom thermostat is a single-pole, on/off type. Both can raise water temperature 90°F (50°C) of about
thermostats have silver contacts and have quick 25 gallons (about 95 L) an hour. Speed of recovery
make-and-break characteristics to prevent arcing. is affected by the type and amount of insulation sur-
The various wiring diagrams in this unit mention rounding the tank, the supply voltage, and the tem-
that both heating elements cannot be energized at the perature of the incoming cold water. The eventual
same time. temperature should be 49°C, for health reasons.

SPEED OF RECOVERY SCALDING FROM HOT WATER

Speed of recovery is the time required to bring the The following are plumbing code issues but are dis-
water temperature to satisfactory levels in a given cussed briefly because of their seriousness.
time. The current accepted industry standard is Temperature settings for water heaters pose
based on a 32.22°C rise. For example, Table 20-3 a dilemma. Set the water heater thermostat high
enough to kill bacteria on the dishes in the dish-
washer and possibly get scalded in the shower. Or
set the thermostat to a lower setting and not get
Table 20-3
scalded in the shower, but live with the possibility
Electric water heater recovery rate per litre that bacteria will still be present on washed dishes.
of water for various wattages. In the United States, the Consumer Product Safety
LITRES PER HOUR RECOVERY FOR INDICATED Commission reports that 3800 injuries and 34 deaths
TEMPERATURE RISE
occur each year due to scalding from excessively hot
Heating tap water. Unfortunately, the victims are mainly the
element
wattage 30°C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 55°C
elderly and children under the age of 5. They recom-
mend that the setting should not be higher than 49°C.
750 21 18 16 14 13 12
Some Canadian laws require that the thermostat be
1000 29 25 21 19 17 16
preset at no higher than 49°C. Residential water heat-
1250 36 31 26 24 22 20
ers are all preset by the manufacturer at 49°C.
1500 43 37 32 29 26 24
Manufacturers post caution labels on their water
2000 57 49 43 38 34 31 heaters that read something like this:
2250 65 55 48 43 39 35
2500 72 61 54 48 43 39
SCALD HAZARD: WATER TEMPERA-
3000 86 74 65 57 52 47
TURE OVER 49°C CAN CAUSE SEVERE BURNS
INSTANTLY OR DEATH FROM SCALDS. SEE
3500 100 86 75 67 60 55
INSTRUCTION MANUAL BEFORE CHANGING
4000 115 98 86 77 69 63
TEMPERATURE SETTINGS.
4500 129 111 97 86 77 70
5000 143 123 108 96 86 78 To reduce the possibility of scalding, today’s
5500 158 135 118 105 95 86 ­single-handle shower and sink taps have a thermo-
6000 172 147 129 115 103 94 static non-scald mixing valve or pressure-balancing
valve that holds a selected water temperature to within
Notes: If the incoming water temperature is 5°C, use the 45°C col- one degree, regardless of incoming water pressure
umn to raise the water temperature to 50°C.
For example, about how long would it initially take to raise the
changes. This prevents sudden unanticipated changes
water temperature in a 160 L electric water heater to 50°C when in water temperatures.
the incoming water temperature is 5°C? The water heater has a Table 20-4 shows time/temperature relation-
2500-watt heating element. Answer: 160 1 48 5 3.47 hours (about
3 hours and 20 minutes) ships relating to scalding.
 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area 355

Figure 20-15 shows the wiring for flat rate con-

Table 20-4
nection, where electricity to the water heater is “off”
Time/temperature relationships related to during peak load periods of the day. This is controlled
scalding an adult subjected to moving water. by the hydro utility. Generally, the flat rate charged
For children, the time to produce a serious depends on the size of the hot water tank in the resi-
burn is less than for adults.
dence. Figure 20-14 shows the wiring for connection
TIME TO PRODUCE to the main panel, so that the kilowatt-hour power
TEMPERATURE (°C) A SERIOUS BURN
consumption of the water heater is metered, but has
37 Safe temperature for bathing the advantage of having 24-hour operation.
48 5 minutes When all of the water in the tank is cold, the
51 3 minutes upper element heats only the water in the upper half
52 1 minute of the tank. The upper element is energized through
56 15 seconds the lower contacts of the upper thermostat. The
60 5 seconds lower thermostat also indicates that heat is needed,
64 2 seconds but heat cannot be supplied because of the open con-
68 1 second dition of the upper contacts of the upper thermostat.
71 0.5 seconds When the water in the upper half of the tank
reaches a temperature of about 49°C, the upper ther-
mostat snaps over; the upper contacts are closed
and the lower contacts of the upper thermostat are
opened. The lower element now begins to heat the
WHAT ABOUT WASHING cold water in the bottom of the tank. When the entire
DISHES? tank is heated to 49°C, the lower thermostat shuts
off. Electrical energy is not being used by either ele-
Older automatic dishwashers required incoming ment at this point. The heat-insulating jacket around
water temperature of 60°C or greater to get the the water heater is designed to keep the heat loss to
dishes clean. A water temperature of 49°C is not hot
enough to dissolve grease, activate powder deter-
120/240 volt
gents, and kill bacteria. That is why commercial A service
and restaurant dishwashers boost temperatures to as
high as 82°C.
B
Newer residential dishwashers have their own
Meter
built-in water heaters to boost the incoming water
temperature in the dishwasher from 49°C to 60°C
1 3

F 4

to 63°C. This heating element also provides the heat D

for the drying cycle. Today, a thermostat setting of 6 5

49°C on the water heater should be satisfactory.

MAIN
G

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
H
Water heaters can be connected in many ways,
2

Neutral
usually depending on the local power company’s 5

regulations. This book illustrates only three types of Double-pole circuit

connections. Consult your power utility and/or your breaker connected to I
bus in panelboard
supplier of electric water heaters to find out what
connections are available in your area. Figure 20-14 Feedthrough wiring for off-peak
Figure 20-14 illustrates wiring for water heaters control.
that are two-element, limited-demand operation type.
356 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area

A
B C
A 120/240-volt service with flat rate control

B Main meter socket (meter removed)

No. 10 AWG red wires in 21-trade size
C rigid conduit F
1 3

D To main switch
D 4

E Double-pole fused disconnect switch

6 5

F High temperature cutoff/Upper thermostat MAIN E

G Upper element Neutral
G
H Lower thermostat

I Lower element H
2

Figure 20-15 Wiring for typical off-peak water heating installation.

a minimum. Thus, it takes many hours for the water simple and additional switches, breakers, time
to cool only a few degrees. clocks, or meters are not required. This is the
Most of the time, the bottom heating element connection for the residence used as an exam-
will keep the water at the desired temperature. If a ple in this textbook. This method provides elec-
large amount of hot water is used, the top element tricity to the water heater 24 hours of every day.
comes on, resulting in fast recovery of the water in 2. Connect the water heater in a flat rate arrange-
the upper portion of the tank, which is where the hot ment; see Figure 20-13. The utility supplies
water is drawn from. power to the consumer via a four-wire cable. This
contains the three feeder lines and a fourth wire
to control the water heater during peak demand
METERING AND SEQUENCE periods. This wire is connected to a separate ter-
OF OPERATION minal block located at the 3 o’clock or 9 o’clock
position in the meter base. The electrician then
Electric water heaters are available in a number of connects two red No. 10 AWG solid wires to the
styles: terminal block at the 3 o’clock position and to the
●● Single element water heater lug on the line side of the meter base.
These wires pass through the service conduit
●● Double element, simultaneous operation
and through the main disconnect into a separate
●● Double element, nonsimultaneous operation 30-ampere, fusible disconnect. The 10/2 AC90 or
There are several ways that a utility company NMD 90 then connects to the water heater.
can provide metering and for the electrician to make 3. Connect the water heater circuit, as shown in
the connections: Figure 20-15, but install a time clock in the cir-
1. Connect the water heating to one of the two- cuit leading to the water heater. The time clock
pole, 240-volt circuits in the main distribution would be set to be “off” during certain times
panel; see Figure 20-15. This is probably the of the day deemed peak hours by the utility.
most common method because the wiring is The utility gives special incentives to the
 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area 357

homeowner for agreeing to this arrangement.

This is a good conservation method that many EXAMPLE
supply authorities are promoting. A water heater nameplate indicates
4. Some utilities use radio-controlled switching to 4500 watts, 240 volts. What is the maxi-
control water heater loads. They send a carrier mum size of overcurrent protection permitted by
signal through the power line, which is received the CEC?
by the electronic controlling device, thereby turn-
ing the power to the water heater “on” and “off” SOLUTION
as required by the utility; see Figure 20-14. This is
commonly called a flat rate water heater. The util- 4500
amperes 5 18.75 amperes
ity will charge a fixed rate regardless of the energy 240
used. This is still very common in many centres. 18.75 3 1.25 amperes 5 23.44 amperes

Therefore, the CEC permits the use of a mini-

WATER HEATER LOAD
mum 25-ampere fuse or circuit breaker, Table 13. If
DEMAND
the calculated ampacity of an overcurrent device is
The following CEC rules apply to load demands not a standard value, the next larger standard size
placed on an electric water heater branch circuit. must be used.
Rule 8-104 2) requires that a branch circuit shall Rule 8-104 2) states that the branch-circuit
have a rating not less than the calculated load of the rating shall have an ampacity not less than the maxi-
heater. mum load to be served.
Rule 8-104 6) a) requires that a continuously Rule 8-104 1) states that the branch-circuit rat-
loaded appliance must have a branch-circuit rating not ing is the lesser of the wire ampacity or that of the
less than 125% of the marked rating of the appliance. overcurrent device.
The water heater for the residence is connected
to Circuits A6/A8, a 20-ampere, double-pole over-
Disconnecting Means
current device located in the main panel in the work-
Rule 26-746 requires that the appliance have a means shop. This circuit is straight 240 volts and does not
of disconnect. This would normally be located in the require a neutral conductor.
combination panelboard (load centre), or it could Checking Table B–1, “Schedule of Special-Purpose
be provided by a separate disconnect switch. Rule Outlets,” in Appendix B at the back of this textbook,
14-416 allows the unit to have a switch that is an we find that the electric water heater has two heat-
integral part of the appliance having an “off” posi- ing elements: a 2000-watt element and a 3000-watt
tion and capable of disconnecting all ungrounded element. Because of the thermostatic devices on the
conductors from the source, to be considered the water heater, both elements cannot be energized at the
required disconnecting means. In many local codes, same time. Therefore, the maximum load demand is
however, this is not acceptable. Watts 3000 watts
Rules 14-300 and 14-408 require that switches Amperes 5 5 5 12.5 amperes
Volts 240 volts
and circuit breakers used as the disconnecting means
be of the indicating type, meaning they must clearly For water heaters with two heating elements
show that they are in the “on” or “off” position. connected for nonsimultaneous (limited demand)
operation, the nameplate on the water heater will be
marked with the largest element’s wattage at rated
Branch-Circuit Overcurrent Protection
voltage. For water heaters with two heating ele-
The rating or setting of overcurrent devices shall not ments connected for simultaneous operation, the
exceed the allowable ampacity of the conductors nameplate on the water heater will be marked with
they protect, Rule 14-104. the total wattage of both elements at rated voltage.
358 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area

Conductor Size W 2521

I5 5 amperes 5 11.46 amperes
E 220
CEC Table 2 indicates that the conductors will be
No. 12 AWG. The specifications for the residence At 230 volts,
call for conductors to be NMD90. See Specifica- E2 230 3 230
tions 7 and 11. W5 5 watts 5 2755 watts
R 19.2
W 2755
Bonding I5 5 amperes 5 11.98 amperes
E 230
If flexible conduit is run from a junction box to the In resistive circuits, current is directly pro-
water heater, the water heater is bonded through portional to voltage and can be simply calculated
a separate bonding conductor sized according to using a ratio and proportion formula. For example,
Table 16, which is run in the flex to the box. if a 240-volt heating element draws 12.7 amperes
at rated voltage, the current draw can be deter-
mined at any other applied voltage, say 208 volts
EFFECT OF VOLTAGE 208 x
VARIATION 5
240 12.7
The heating elements in the water heater in this 208 3 12.7
residence are rated 240 volts. They will operate at amperes 5 11.01 amperes
240
a lower voltage with a reduction in wattage. If con-
nected to voltages above their rating, they will have To calculate this example if the applied voltage
a very short life. is 120 volts
Ohm’s law and the wattage formula show how 120 x
the wattage and current depend on the applied 5
240 12.7
voltage:
120 3 12.7
E2 240 3 240 amperes 5 6.35 amperes
R5 5 ohms 5 19.2 ohms 240
W 3000
Also, in a resistive circuit, wattage varies as the
E 240 square of the current. Therefore, when the voltage
I5 5 amperes 5 12.5 amperes
R 19.2 on a heating element is doubled, the current also
If a different voltage is substituted, the watt- doubles and the wattage increases four times. When
age and current values change accordingly. At the voltage is reduced to one-half, the current is
220 volts, halved, and the wattage is reduced to one-fourth.
According to these formulas, a 240-volt heating
E2 220 3 220 element connected to 208 volts will have about three-
W5 5 watts 5 2521 watts
R 19.2 quarters of the wattage rating it has at the rated voltage.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

WORKSHOP

1. a. What circuit supplies the workshop lighting?

 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area 359

b. What circuit supplies the plug-in strip over the workbench?

c. What circuit supplies the freezer receptacle?
2. What type of luminaires are installed on the workshop ceiling?

3. Does a receptacle for a freezer have to be GFCI-protected? Explain.

4. Does a receptacle for a sump pump have to be GFCI-protected? Explain.

5. When a single receptacle is installed on an individual branch circuit, the receptacle

must have a rating the rating of the branch circuit.
6. Calculate the total current draw of Circuit B12 if all luminaires and the exhaust fan
were turned on.


7. If a No. 10 NMD90 cable is located in an ambient temperature of 42°C, what would be
the temperature correction factor?



360 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area

8. The following is a layout of the the lighting and receptacle circuits for the workshop.
Using the cabling layout in Figure 20-1, make a complete wiring diagram. Indicate all
conductor colours.

Fan
A__

P.S.

A__

A__

P.S. P.S.

WELL PUMP CIRCUIT B

1. How is the motor disconnected if pumping is no longer required?

2. Why is a 240-volt motor preferable to a 120-volt motor for use in this residence?

3. How many amperes does a 1 hp, 240-volt, single-phase motor draw? (See Table 45.)

4. What size are the conductors used for this circuit?

5. a. What is the branch-circuit protective device?
b. What furnishes the overload protection for the pump motor?

c. What is the maximum ampere setting required for overload protection of the 1 hp,
240-volt pump motor?
 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area 361

6. [Circle correct answer.] Deep well submersible water pumps operate with the electrical
motor and actual pump located
a. above permanent water level.
b. below permanent water level.
c. half above and half below permanent water level.
7. In a deep well submersible pump, the controller contains the motor starting relay and
the running and starting capacitors, the motor itself contains
.
8. What type of pump moves the water inside the deep-well pipe?

9. Proper pressure of the deep well submersible pump system is maintained by a

10. Fill in the data for a continuous duty, 16-ampere electric motor, single-phase, with
1.15 service factor. The electric motor is to operate under normal conditions. There is
no termination temperature marked on the equipment.
a. Branch-circuit protection, non-time-delay fuses.
Maximum size A   Switch size A
b. Branch-circuit protection, time-delay fuses.
Maximum size A   Switch size A
c. Branch-circuit protection, instant-trip breaker.
Maximum size A
d. Branch-circuit protection, inverse time circuit breaker.
Maximum size A
e. Branch-circuit copper conductor.
Minimum size
11. The CEC is very specific in its requirement that deep well submersible electric
water pump motors be grounded. Where is this specific requirement found?

12. Does the CEC allow deep well submersible pump cable to be buried directly into the ground?

WATER HEATER CIRCUIT C

1. At what temperature is the water in a residential heater usually maintained?

2. Magnesium rods are installed inside the water tank to reduce .
3. Is a separate meter required to record the amount of energy used to heat the water?
362 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area

4. What is meant by “flat rate” installation?

5. What is the most common method of metering water heater loads?

6. Two thermostats are generally used in an electric water heater.

a. What is the location of each thermostat?

b. What type of thermostat is used at each location?

7. a. How many heating elements are provided in the heater in the residence discussed
in this text?
b. Are these heating elements allowed to operate at the same time?
8. When does the lower heater operate?

9. The CSA requires that electric water heaters must have a temperature regulating device
set at °C maximum. Secondary protection is provided by a temperature
cutoff set at the factory at °C.
10. Why does the storage tank hold the heat so long?

11. The electric water heater is connected for “limited demand” so that only one heating
element can be on at one time.
a. What size of wire is used to connect the water heater?
b. What size of overcurrent device is used?
 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area 363

12. a. For an unlimited demand both elements of the water heater are energized at the
same time, how much current will they draw? (Assume the elements are rated at
240 volts.)
Element No. 1 = 3000 watts

Element No. 2 = 2000 watts

b. What size of wire is required for the load of both elements? Show your calculations.

13. a. How much current do the elements in Question 12 draw if connected to 220 volts?
Show your calculations.

b. What is the wattage value at 220 volts? Show your calculations.

364 UNIT 20 Branch Circuits for Workshop and Utility Area

14. A 240-volt heater is rated at 1500 watts.

a. What is its current rating at rated voltage?
b. What current draw would occur if connected to a 120-volt supply?

c. What is the wattage output at 120 volts?

15. A customer asks the electrician to set the water heater thermostat 30°C below the
maximum permitted. The thermostat is set at which of the following temperatures?
[Circle one]
a. 70°C
b. 66°C
c. 60°C
d. 49°C
 UNIT

21
Smoke and Carbon
Monoxide Alarms
and Security Systems
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to
●● identify the Underwriters Laboratories of Canada
RED SEAL
(ULC) standard that refers to household fire
warning equipment OCCUPATIONAL
STANDARD
●● name the two basic types of smoke alarms
(RSOS)
●● discuss the location requirements for the
installation of smoke alarms For the Red Seal exam,
●● list the locations where smoke alarms may not note that this unit covers
be installed the following RSOS task:
●● describe the wiring requirements for the ●● Task E-26
installation of and smoke alarms
●● list the major components of a typical residential
security system
●● identify the CEC Section 32 requirements for the
installation of residential fire alarm systems
●● identify the requirement for the installation of
carbon monoxide alarms
365
366 UNIT 21 Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms and Security Systems

THE IMPORTANCE OF smoke

alarms
Fire is the third leading cause of accidental death.
Home fires account for the biggest share of these
fatalities, most of which occur at night during
sleeping hours.
In recent years, the standards of the ULC,
combined with the National Building Code of
Canada, Canadian Electrical Code (Appendix G),
and associated provincial and municipal codes, have
made mandatory the installation of smoke alarms
in critical areas of a home. A sufficient number of
smoke alarms must be installed to provide full cov-
erage. Smoke alarm locations may vary, check with

Courtesy of Craig Trineer

associate provincial and municipal codes in your
area for more details.
Smoke alarms are installed in a residence to give
the occupants an early warning of the presence of a
fire, see Figure 21-1. Fires produce smoke and toxic Figure 21-1 Combination smoke/CO alarm.
gases, which can overcome the occupants while
they sleep. Most fatalities result from the inhalation these are installed, they must be interconnected so
of smoke and toxic gases rather than from burns. that all will go into alarm mode at the same time.
Heavy smoke also reduces visibility. It is recommended that smoke alarms be placed
strategically to provide protection for living rooms,
The Underwriters Laboratories dining rooms, bedrooms, hallways, attics, furnace
of Canada and utility rooms, basements, and heated attached
The Underwriters Laboratories of Canada Standard garages. Detectors in kitchens must not be directly
CAN/ ULC S524-14 discusses the proper selection, above the stove.
installation, operation, and maintenance of fire warn-
ing equipment commonly used in residential occupan-
cies. Minimum requirements are stated in the standard.
TYPES OF smoke alarms
In some provincial jurisdictions, it is mandatory Two types of smoke alarms commonly used are the
that qualified technicians install, verify, and maintain photoelectric type and the ionization type.
fire alarm systems. The certification to become a
fire alarm technician is available through a variety
Photoelectric Smoke Alarms
of government-approved courses, through colleges,
and through local electrical unions, such as the Inter- In the photoelectric type of smoke detector, a light sen-
national Brotherhood of Electrical Workers (IBEW) sor measures the amount of light in a smoke chamber
and the Canadian Fire Alarm Association (CFAA). inside the unit. When smoke is present, an alarm sounds,
Smoke alarms must be installed near sleeping indicating that light is being reflected off the smoke in
areas in the immediate vicinity of the bedrooms, and the chamber. This type of sensor detects smoke from
on each additional storey of the dwelling, including burning materials that produce great quantities of white
basements but excluding crawl spaces and unfin- or grey smoke, such as furniture, mattresses, and rags. It
ished attics. is less effective for gasoline and alcohol fires, which do
Residential-type smoke alarms incorporate both not produce heavy smoke. It is also not as effective with
the initiating circuit (detector) and the alarm circuit black smoke, which absorbs light rather than reflecting
(buzzer) in the same device. If more than one of it, as grey or white smoke does.
 UNIT 21 Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms and Security Systems 367

Ionization Smoke Alarms

150 mm
1 min.
The ionization type of smoke detector contains a low- 2
level radioactive source that supplies particles that Attic
ionize the air in the smoke chamber of the detector.
2
Plates in this chamber are oppositely charged. 4 1
Because the air is ionized, an extremely small amount Centre 150 mm
of room min.
of current (millionths of an ampere) flows between or area to 300 mm
max.
the plates. Smoke entering the chamber impedes the
movement of the ions, reducing the current flow,
3
which causes an alarm to go off. This type of detector 4
Top of
is able to sense products of combustion in the earliest Centre stairway
of room
stages of a fire. It can detect airborne particles (aero- or area
sols) as small as 5 microns in diameter.
The ionization type of detector is effective for 5
detecting small amounts of smoke, as in gasoline
and alcohol fires, which are fast-flaming. It is also
more effective for detecting dark or black smoke
than the photoelectric type of detector.
Notes:
1 Do not install detectors in dead airspaces.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 2 Mount detectors on the bottom edge of
joists or beams. The space between
The following information concerns specific rec- these joists and beams is considered
to be dead airspace.
ommendations for installing smoke alarms; see 3 Do not mount detectors in dead airspace
Figures 21-2, 21-3, and 21-4. Complete data are at the top of a stairway if there is a door
at the top of the stairway that can be
found in the ULC standards. closed. Detectors should be mounted at
the top of an open stairway because heat
and smoke travel upward.
4 Mount detectors in the centre of a room or area.
5 Basement smoke alarms must be located
close to the stairway leading to the floor above.

Bedroom Kitchen
Figure 21-3 Recommendations for the installation
of smoke alarms.

It is mandatory to install smoke alarms in

Living all new homes (National Building Code of Canada
Room
[Link]).
Bedroom
●● Do install smoke alarms on each floor of a
residence for minimum protection. Make sure
that one of these alarms is located between the
sleeping area and the rest of the house. These
Figure 21-2 Recommended location of smoke
alarm between the sleeping areas and the rest of alarms must be interconnected so that if one
the house. In Ontario, the building code requires alarm detects smoke, they all sound.
that any new home constructed after 2015 must ●● Do install smoke alarms in all rooms, hallways,
have a combination strobe/smoke and carbon
monoxide alarm on every storey of a residence and attics, basements, and storage areas of a
a strobe/smoke alarm inside every sleeping area. residence to provide protection that exceeds the
minimum recommendation above.
368 UNIT 21 Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms and Security Systems

●● Do not connect detectors to wiring that is

150 mm min.
controlled by a wall switch.
●● Do not connect smoke alarms, carbon mon-
oxide alarms, or a combination of a smoke
150 mm alarm/carbon alarm to a circuit that is protected
Edge of detector
must be no closer
min. by a ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI)
than 150 mm to wall. or an arc-fault circuit interrupter (AFCI),
Rule 32-200 b). If it is known that a smoke alarm,
Top of detector must
300 mm carbon monoxide alarm, or a combination smoke/
max.
be no closer than carbon monoxide alarm has an integral battery, it
150 mm from ceiling,
or more than 300 mm shall be permitted to be connected to a circuit pro-
from ceiling.
tected by a GFCI or AFCI, Rule 32-200 2).
The shaded area is
●● Do not install detectors where relative humidity
considered to be dead exceeds 85%, for example, adjacent to showers,
airspace. Do not install
detectors in this space. laundry areas, or other areas where large
amounts of visible water vapour exist.
●● Do not install detectors in front of air ducts, air
conditioners, or any high-draft areas where the
Figure 21-4 Do not mount detectors in the dead moving air will keep the smoke or heat from
airspace where the ceiling meets the wall. entering the detector.
●● Do not install detectors in kitchens where the
accumulation of household smoke can result in
●● Do install the detector on the ceiling as close as false alarms with certain types of detectors. The
possible to the centre of the room or hallway. photoelectric type may be installed in kitchens,
●● Do install a smoke alarm on a basement ceiling but must not be installed directly over the range
close to the stairway to the first floor. or cooking appliance.
●● Do place a detector within 900 mm of the ●● Do not install where the temperature can fall
peak on a sloped ceiling that has greater than below 0°C or rise above 50°C.
300 mm rise per 2400 mm horizontally (1:8). ●● Do not install in garages (vehicle exhaust can
●● Do install smoke alarms at the top of an open set off the detector).
stairway, because heat and smoke travel up. ●● Do not install detectors in airstreams that will
●● Do install hard-wired detectors in new construc- pass air originating at the kitchen cooking appli-
tion. These detectors are directly connected ances across the detector. False alarms will result.
to a 120-volt alternating current (AC) source.
For existing homes, either battery-powered units
MANUFACTURERS’
or hard-wired 120-volt AC units may be used.
REQUIREMENTS
●● Do not install detectors in the dead airspace at
the top of a stairway that can be closed off by a Manufacturers of smoke alarms have certain
door. responsibilities:
●● Do not place the edge of a detector mounted on ●● The power supply must be capable of operating
the ceiling closer than 150 mm from the wall. the signal for at least 4 minutes continuously.
●● Do not place a wall-mounted detector closer than ●● Battery-powered units must be capable of a
150 mm from the ceiling and not farther than low-battery warning “beep” of at least one beep
300 mm from the ceiling. The area where the per minute for seven consecutive days.
ceiling meets the wall is considered dead airspace ●● Direct-connected 120-volt AC detectors must
where smoke and heat may not reach the detector. have a visible indicator that shows “Power On.”
 UNIT 21 Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms and Security Systems 369

●● Detectors must not signal when a power loss

occurs or when power is restored.
In this residence, the smoke and carbon monoxide
alarms are connected to Circuit A15 located in Panel
A in the workshop. Run a dedicated 14/2 NMD 90
to the first smoke alarm and include part of a light-
ing circuit, usually the front hallway lights, and then
interconnect the other alarms by running 14/3 NMD
90 between all other smoke alarms; in this way, if
one smoke alarm is triggered, all the others in the
circuit will sound as well.
According to the plans for this residence, based
on a new home installation in Ontario, smoke alarms
with strobe light and combination smoke and carbon
Figure 21-5 An AC–DC smoke alarm that
monoxide alarms are located as follows: operates on 120-volts AC as the primary source
Smoke-strobe alarms (3 total): of power and a 9-volt battery as the secondary
●● Master bedroom: 1 source of power. In a power outage, the alarm
continues to operate on the battery.
●● Bedroom no. 2: 1
●● Study/bedroom: 1 be of the interconnected type and may include other
Combination smoke-strobe/carbon monoxide features such as battery backup or a built-in carbon
alarms (5 total): monoxide detector. A direct-connect unit with bat-
●● Hall between bedrooms: 1 tery backup is shown in Figure 21-5.
When using interconnected smoke alarms, it is
●● Entry/service entrance: 1 important to refer to the manufacturer’s literature
●● Basement recreation room: 1 for the maximum number of devices allowed. Each
●● Basement workshop area: 1 manufacturer and model may allow different maximum
numbers. When devices are interconnected, all alarms
●● Living room: 1
will sound at the same time, regardless of which device
actually detected smoke. All new residential construc-
Features of Smoke Alarms tion requires an interconnected smoke alarm on each
level of the home and near the bedrooms. If bedrooms
Smoke alarms may contain an indicating light to
are located at opposite ends of a home, it may be
show that the unit is functioning properly. They
necessary to install more than one alarm on a level.
may also have a test button to test the circuitry
Interconnected smoke alarms have one white
and alarm capability: When the button is pushed,
wire, one black wire, and one red or yellow wire,
it is the circuitry and alarm that are tested, not the
which is used to interconnect them. Refer to
smoke-detecting ability.
Figure 21-6 for wiring these devices. (Interconnec-
Combination smoke and carbon monoxide with
tion of these units can also be wireless.)
strobe light alarms are available as a complete unit,
called a 3-in-1. Battery-Operated Units. These units require
no wiring; they are simply mounted in the desired
locations. Batteries last for about a year. Battery-
Wiring Requirements
operated units should be tested periodically, as rec-
Direct-Connected Units. All new construction ommended by the manufacturer.
requires smoke alarms to be connected to a 120-volt Always follow the installation requirements and
circuit that feeds a lighting circuit, Rule 32-200 1) a). recommendations of the unit manufacturer. Refer to
Smoke alarms must never be connected to a dedi- the ULC standards for additional technical data relat-
cated circuit. This type of smoke alarm will usually ing to the installation of smoke.
370 UNIT 21 Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms and Security Systems

120-volt
Outlet boxes in ceiling
circuit

Ceiling

Plug-in power
block on
rear of alarm
Battery
Smoke alarms compartment

Figure 21-6 Interconnected smoke alarms. The two-wire branch circuit is run to the first alarm, then
three-wire non-metallic-sheathed cable interconnects the other alarms. If one alarm in the series is
triggered, all of the other alarms will sound.

COMBINATION DIRECT/ CARBON MONOXIDE alarms

BATTERY/FEEDTHROUGH
ALARMS National, provincial, and local building codes set
the standards for the installation of carbon monox-
Combination units are connected directly to a ide (CO) alarms in dwelling units. These may be
120-volt AC circuit (not GFCI- or AFCI-protected) free-standing units, permanently wired to a source
and are equipped with a 9-volt direct current (DC) of supply, or part of a smoke detector. If the build-
battery; see Figure 21-5. In a power outage, these ing code requires hard-wired CO alarms, a battery-
alarms will continue to operate on the 9-volt DC operated or plug-in device is not acceptable. It must
battery. The ability to interconnect a number of be permanently wired.
alarms offers “whole house” protection, because A CO alarm is required when
when one unit senses smoke, it triggers all of the ●● the dwelling has a solid-fuel-burning appliance
other interconnected units into alarm mode as such as a wood stove, wood-burning fireplace,
well. or wood or corn furnaces.
Because of the vital importance of smoke
●● the dwelling contains a fuel-burning appliance
and fire alarms to prevent loss of life, you should
such as a furnace or fireplace operating from
very carefully read the application and installation
a non-solid fuel such as natural gas, propane,
manuals that are prepared by the manufacturers of
or oil.
the smoke alarms.
The residence featured in this textbook has ●● the dwelling shares a wall with a garage.
multiple smoke alarms, hard-wired directly to a
120-volt AC branch circuit, A15. They are inter- Location and Connection
connected feedthrough units that will set off sig- of Carbon Monoxide Alarms
nalling in all units, should one unit trigger. These
interconnected smoke alarms are also powered by If a solid-fuel appliance (wood-burning fireplace)
a 9-volt DC battery that allows the unit to operate is used, an alarm must be located on or near the
in the event of a failure in the 120-volt AC power ceiling in the room or area where the appliance is
supply. located. When the dwelling uses another source
 UNIT 21 Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms and Security Systems 371

of fuel or shares a wall with a garage, an alarm

must be located in each bedroom or outside each
bedroom within 5 m of the bedroom doors, this
distance being measured along the corridor. If the
house is large and bedrooms are located on multiple
floors or at opposite ends of the building, it may
require multiple CO alarms. If the dwelling has a
solid-fuel-burning appliance, an alarm in the room
with the appliance and detectors near the bedrooms
are required.

Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

CO alarms shall be connected to a 15-ampere
lighting circuit or from a circuit that supplies a
mix of lighting and receptacles. They must not be
connected to GFCI- or AFCI-protected circuits or
circuits that supply only receptacles. A switching
Figure 21-7 The wireless key allows the end
or disconnecting means between the device and the
user to disarm and arm the security system
circuit breaker is not allowed. with the press of a button. There is no need to
remember a security code, and it can also be used
to operate lights and appliances.

SECURITY SYSTEMS
It is beyond the scope of this text to cover every type to prevent damage to these smaller cables. Usually
of residential security system; we focus on some the wiring can be done at the same time as the door
of the features available from the manufacturers of chime wiring is being installed. Security system
these systems. wiring comes under the scope of Section 16.
Installed security systems range from simple to When such detectors as door-entry, glass-break,
very complex. Features and options include intruder floor mat, and window foil are used, circuits are
detectors for doors and windows, motion detectors, electrically connected in series so that if any part
infrared detectors, and under-the-carpet floor of the circuit is opened, the security system will
mat detectors for “space” protection. Indoor and
outdoor horns, bells, electronic buzzers, and strobe
lights can provide audio as well as visual alarm.
Telephone interconnection to preselected telephone
numbers, such as the police or fire departments, is
also available. (See Figures 21-7 to 21-14.)
The homeowner and electrician should discuss
specific features and benefits of security systems.
Most electricians are familiar with a particular man-
ufacturer’s selection of systems. Figure 21-15 shows
the range of devices available for such a system.
Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

These systems are generally on display at

lighting fixture stores that offer the homeowner an
opportunity to see a security system “in action.”
Wiring for a security system consists of small,
easy-to-install, extra-low-voltage, multiconductor
cables made up of No. 24 AWG conductors. The Figure 21-8 Professionally monitored smoke
actual installation of these conductors should be alarms/heat detectors are on 24/7, even if the
burglary protection is turned off.
done after the regular house wiring is completed
372 UNIT 21 Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms and Security Systems

Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

Figure 21-9 Magnetic contacts are often located Figure 21-11 Motion detectors are interior security
at vulnerable entry points such as doors. devices that sense motion inside the home.

detect the open circuit. These circuits are generally The instructions furnished with all security
referred to as “closed” or “closed loop.” Alarms, systems cover the installation requirements in
horns, and other signalling devices are connected detail, alerting the installer to Canadian Electri-
in parallel, since they will all signal at the same cal Code (CEC) regulations, clearances, suggested
time when the security system is set off. Smoke locations, and mounting heights of the system’s
alarms are generally connected in parallel because components.
all of these devices will “close” the circuit to the Always check with the local electrical inspection
security master control unit, setting off the alarms. authority to determine if there are any special
Fire detectors are available for series connection requirements in your locality for the installation of
for use in security systems that require normally security systems.
closed contacts for circuit operation.

Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

Figure 21-12 A wireless personal panic

Figure 21-10 Sirens, such as these placed inside transmitter allows the user to press a button to
the home, alert families to emergencies. signal for help.
 UNIT 21 Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms and Security Systems 373

Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

Figure 21-13 The wireless keypad is portable so Figure 21-14 Glass-break detectors, available in
you can arm or disarm the system from the yard a variety of sizes, will sound the alarm when they
or driveway. Newer systems can also be armed or detect the sound of breaking glass.
disarmed with smartphones.

Smoke
alarms/detectors
Heat
detectors

120-volt
Inside Auxiliary circuit
alarm relay

Light

Glass Strobe
Door break Outside alarms light
entry detector Magnetic
detector detector

SECURITY
ALARMS
Floor mat MASTER TELEPHONE Phone
120-volt CONTROL DIALLER line
detector
supply UNIT

Roller/plunger
Ground
detector

Window Ultrasonic
foil motion Key-operated remote
detector switches

Audio
(sharp sound)
detector

Digital Infrared
keyboard transmitter

Infrared
receiver

Figure 21-15 Typical residential security system showing some of the devices available. Complete wiring
and installation instructions are included with these systems. Check local code requirements and follow the
detailed instructions furnished with the system. Most of the interconnecting conductors are No. 24 AWG.
374 UNIT 21 Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms and Security Systems

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. What is the name and number of the ULC standard that gives information about smoke
alarms?

2. Name the two basic types of smoke alarms.__________________________________

3. Why is it important to mount a smoke alarm on the ceiling not closer than 150 mm to
a wall?

4. [Circle the correct answer.] A basic rule is to install smoke alarms

a. between the sleeping area and the rest of the house.
b. at the top of a basement stairway that has a closed door at the top of the stairs.
c. in a garage that is subject to subzero temperatures.
d. in every sleeping area and at every floor on the rest of the house.
5. Who is responsible for maintaining a fire alarm system?

6. Although the ULC gives many rules for the installation of smoke alarms, always
follow the installation recommendations of
7. Security systems are usually installed with wire that is much smaller than normal
house wires. These wires are generally No. _____ AWG, which is similar in size to the
wiring for chimes.
8. [Circle the correct answer.] Because the wire used in wiring security systems is rather
small and cannot stand rough service and abuse, security wiring should be installed
during the rough-in stages of a new house (before) (after) the other power-circuit wir-
ing is completed.
9. [Circle the correct answer(s).] When several smoke alarms are installed in a new
home, these units must be
a. connected to separate 120-volt circuits.
b. connected to one 120-volt circuit.
c. interconnected so that if one smoke alarm is set off, the others will also sound
a warning.
 UNIT 21 Smoke and Carbon Monoxide Alarms and Security Systems 375

10. [Circle the correct answer.] It is advisable to connect smoke alarms to circuits that are
protected by GFCI devices. True / False
11. [Circle the correct answer.] Because a smoke alarm might need servicing or cleaning,
be sure to connect it so that it is controlled by a wall switch. True / False
12. [Circle the correct answer.] Smoke alarms of the type installed in homes must be able
to sound a continuous alarm when set off for at least
a. 4 minutes.
b. 30 minutes.
c. 60 minutes.
13. If a carbon monoxide alarm is located in the hall outside the bedrooms, what is the
maximum distance that the alarm may be from the bedroom doors?

14. If a home has an attached garage, is a CO alarm required?

15. In a home with a wood-burning fireplace, where must the CO alarm(s) be located?
UNIT

22
Swimming Pools, Spas,
and Hot Tubs
Objectives
RED SEAL
OCCUPATIONAL After studying this unit, you should be able to
STANDARD ●● recognize the importance of proper swimming
(RSOS) pool wiring for human safety

For the Red Seal exam,

●● discuss the hazards of electric shock associated
note that this unit covers with faulty wiring in, on, or near pools
the following RSOS tasks: ●● describe the differences between permanently
●● Task B-11 installed pools and pools that are portable or
storable
●● Task C-16
●● understand and apply the basic Canadian
●● Task C-17 Electrical Code (CEC) requirements for the
●● Task D-22 wiring of swimming pools, spas, hot tubs, and
hydromassage bathtubs
●● Task D-24

376
 UNIT 22 Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs 377

POOL WIRING (SECTION 68) the years. Extreme care is required when wiring all
equipment associated with pools.
The risk of electric shock and electrocution increase
significantly when people, water, and electricity are
combined. To protect people against the hazards of ELECTRICAL HAZARDS
electric shock associated with swimming pools, spas,
hot tubs, and hydromassage bathtubs, special code A person can suffer an immobilizing or lethal
requirements are necessary. For easy reference, a shock in a residential-type pool in two ways:
detailed drawing of the CEC requirements for swim- 1. An electrical shock can be transmitted to some-
ming pool wiring is included with this textbook (Sheet one in a pool who touches a live wire or the live
8 of the residence plans provided with this textbook). casing or enclosure of an appliance, such as a hair
Refer to this drawing as you study this unit. dryer, radio, or extension cord; see Figure 22-1.
Swimming pools, wading pools, hydromassage 2. If an appliance falls into the pool, an electri-
bathtubs, therapeutic pools, decorative pools, hot cal shock can be transmitted to a person in
tubs, and spas must be wired according to CEC Sec- the water by means of voltage gradients in the
tion 68. To protect people using such pools, rules water. Refer to Figure 22-2 for an illustration of
specific to pool wiring have been developed over this life-threatening hazard.

“Live” faulty
appliance

A person touches a “live”

faulty appliance.
Current flows through
the body to ground,
resulting in lethal shock.

Figure 22-1 Touching a “live” faulty appliance can cause a lethal shock.

A 120-volt radio
falls into the water.
90

lt s
vo
60

The pool
vo

is at zero
lt s

or ground
potential.
0 volts

Figure 22-2 Voltage gradients surrounding a person in the pool can cause severe shock, drowning,
or electrocution.
378 UNIT 22 Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs

As Figure 22-2 shows, “rings” of voltage radi- Another hazard associated with spas and hot
ate outwardly from the radio to the pool walls. tubs is prolonged immersion in hot water. If the
These rings can be likened to the rings that form water is too hot and/or the immersion too long, leth-
when a rock is thrown into the water. The voltage argy (drowsiness, hyperthermia) can set in. This
gradients range from 120 volts at the radio to zero can increase the risk of drowning. The Canadian
volts at the pool walls. The pool walls are assumed Standards Association (CSA) standard establishes
to be at ground or zero potential. The gradients, maximum water temperature at 40°C. The sug-
in varying degrees, are found in the entire body gested maximum time of immersion is generally
of water. 15 minutes.
Figure 22-2 shows voltage gradients in the pool Instructions furnished with spas and hot tubs
of 90 volts and 60 volts. (This figure is a simplifica- specify the maximum temperature and time per-
tion of the actual situation, in which there are many mitted for using the spa or hot tub. Hot water,
voltage gradients.) In this case, the voltage differen- in combination with drugs and alcohol, presents
tial, 30 volts, is an extremely hazardous value. The a hazard to life. Caution must be observed at all
person in the pool, who is surrounded by these times.
voltage gradients, is subject to severe shock, The figures in this unit show the CEC rules that
immobilization (which can result in drowning), relate to safety procedures for wiring pools.
or actual electrocution. Tests conducted over the
years have shown that a voltage gradient of 1.5 volts
per 300 mm can cause paralysis.
Wiring Methods
Study Sheet 8 of the house plans supplied Throughout Section 68, you will find that the wir-
with this text. Note that, in general, underwater ing must be installed in rigid metal conduit, flexible
swimming pool luminaires must be positioned not metal conduit, rigid non-metallic conduit, flexible
more than 600 mm below the normal water level, cord for wet locations, or, in some cases, EMT. For
so that when a person is in the water close to an wet-niche luminaires, see Rule 68-100 2).
underwater luminaire, the relative position of the For a permanently installed pool, Rule 68-100 3)
luminaire is well below the person’s heart. Lumi- allows any type of wiring method recognized in
naires that are permitted to be installed no less than Section 12 for that portion of the interior wiring of
10 mm below the normal water level have under- one-family dwelling installations that supplies pool-
gone tougher, abnormal impact tests, such as those associated pump motors, provided the wiring method
tests given to cleaning tools or other mechanical contains an equipment bonding conductor no smaller
objects. The lenses on these luminaires can with- than that required by Table 16.
stand these abnormal impact tests, whereas the stan- Be sure to read the requirements of Rule 68-100
dard underwater luminaires that are required to be closely to determine the proper wiring method to be
600 mm below the water level are subjected to nor- used for a particular situation.
mal impact tests that duplicate the impact of a per-
son kicking the lens.
The shock hazard to a person in a pool is quite CEC-DEFINED POOLS
different from that of the normal “touch” shock haz-
ard to a person not submersed in water. The water The CEC describes a permanently installed swim-
makes contact with the entire skin surface of the ming pool as one that cannot be disassembled read-
body rather than just at one “touch” point. Also, ily for storage, Rule 68-050.
skin wounds, such as cuts and scratches, reduce the The CEC describes a storable swimming pool as
body’s resistance to shock to a much lower value one that can be disassembled for storage and reas-
than that of the skin alone. Body openings such as sembled to its original form, Rule 68-050.
ears, nose, and mouth further reduce the body resis- Pools that have non-metallic inflatable walls are
tance. As Ohm’s law states, for a given voltage, the considered to be storable pools regardless of their
lower the resistance, the higher the current. dimensions.
 UNIT 22 Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs 379

GROUNDING AND BONDING ●● any metal parts of the pool located within 1.5 m
OF SWIMMING POOLS of the inside wall of the pool
●● all electrical equipment associated with the
Bonding to Ground (Rule 68-058) recirculating system of the pool
Rule 68-058 requires that all of the following ●● junction boxes
items must be bonded to ground, as illustrated in ●● transformer enclosures
Figure 22-3:
●● ground-fault circuit interrupters
●● wet- and dry-niche luminaires
●● panelboards that are not part of the service
●● any electrical equipment within 1.5 m of the equipment and supply the electrical equipment
inside wall of the pool associated with the pool
●● pool-reinforcing steel

If pump motor is used with a storable swimming

pool and is within 3 m of the pool wall, it shall be
marked for the purpose, Rule 68-202 2).

Rigid conduit or flexible cable Main service: See

Unit 4 for grounding
Pool-associated motors shall and bonding
be bonded with conductor requirements
sized per CEC Table 16.
Panelboard,
Rule 68-058 6)
Transformer, Main
Rule 68-062 neutral terminal
Bonding
Pri screw
Junction box,
Rule 68-060 Equipment
4

60
Sec bonding

60
terminal
1

20
1

15
1 System
1
grounding
2 conductor
Service
box
3 3 5 3
Flexible cord
supplied with luminaire,
Section 68-100 2) Bonding conductor,
Rule 68-058 6) A separate insulated copper bonding
A separate insulated copper conductor shall be run in the same
Wet-niche bonding conductor sized conduit as the insulated circuit feeder
luminaire according to CEC Table 16. conductors or cable. This conductor
must be connected between the
No. 6 AWG copper bonding equipment bonding terminal at the
conductor to metal parts of main service and the equipment
the pool and associated bonding conductor terminal at the main
non-electrical equipment panelboard. If smaller than No. 6 AWG,
Text © 2021 Canadian Standards Association

it shall be sized as per Table 16, installed

and mechanically protected in the same
manner as the insulated feeder circuit
Luminaire shall be mounted no
1 Equipment-bonding conductor terminal conductors or cable.
deeper than 600 mm to lens
centre, unless suitable and Bonding conductor between junction box and transformer must be
marked for submersion
2 sized according to the overcurrent device of the circuit, CEC Table 16.
at greater depths,
Rule 68-066 1) b).
3 This feeder shall be rigid conduit or flexible cable.

Figure 22-3 Grounding and bonding of important metal parts of a swimming pool, as covered in
Rule 68-058. Refer to Sheet 8 of the plans supplied with this text.
380 UNIT 22 Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs

Proper grounding and bonding ensures that all metal ●● ladders

parts in and around the pool area establish an effective ●● other metal parts of the pool or non-electrical
equipotential plane, thus reducing the shock hazard. equipment
Proper grounding and bonding practices also facilitate
Bonding conductors
the opening of the overcurrent protective device (fuse
or circuit breaker) in the event of a fault in the circuit. ●● need not be installed in conduit
Grounding is covered in other units of this text. ●● may be connected directly to the equipment
that requires bonding, by means of brass, cop-
Bonding Conductors. Bonding conductors must
per, or copper-alloy clamps.
●● when smaller than No. 6 AWG, be run in the
same conduit with the insulated circuit conduc-
tors, or be part of an approved flexible cord
LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
assembly, as used for the connection of wet-
UNDER WATER
niche underwater luminaires;
●● terminate on equipment-bonding terminals pro- Rule 68-066 covers underwater luminaires for per-
vided in the junction box, transformer, ground- manently installed pools. There are three types of
fault circuit interrupter, subpanel, or other underwater luminaires:
specific equipment. 1. Dry-niche luminaires are mounted in the
Metal conduit by itself is not considered to side walls of the pool and are designed to
be an adequate grounding means for bonding be relamped from the rear. These luminaires
in and around pools. are waterproof.
2. Wet-niche luminaires are mounted in the
side wall of the pool and are designed to be
Bonding (Rule 68-058) relamped from the front. The supply cord is
Rule 68-058 requires that all metal parts of a pool stored inside the luminaire. The cord should be
installation be bonded together. For in-ground pools, a long enough to reach the top of the pool deck
No. 6 AWG copper conductor is required. For above- for lamp replacement. The forming shell to
ground pools, a copper conductor sized in accordance which the luminaire attaches is intended to fill
with Table 16 is acceptable; see Figure 22-4. The No. 6 up with pool water.
or larger copper bonding wire must be run to the main 3. No-niche luminaires are mounted on a bracket
distribution panel board and “tie everything together.” on the inside wall of the pool. The supply con-
This helps keep all metal parts in and around the pool at duit terminates on this bracket. The supply cord
the same voltage potential, reducing the shock hazard runs through this conduit to a deck box for con-
brought about by stray voltages and voltage gradients. nection to the circuit wiring. The extra supply
cord is stored in the space behind the no-niche
Bonding Conductors. The bonding conductor
luminaire. The cord should be long enough to
must be connected to
reach the top of the pool deck for lamp replace-
●● the steel reinforcing bars in the concrete using ment. This type of luminaire is mainly used
a minimum of four equally spaced connections; in retrofit installations and for above-ground
when epoxy-coated reinforcing steel is used in pools.
the construction of a swimming pool, placing
Extra-low-voltage lighting has recently
a loop of No. 6 AWG copper around the pool
become more popular for pool installations. This
below the normal water level could be an alter-
type of lighting receives its power from an extra-
native to bonding the reinforcing steel at four
low-voltage transformer fed from a ground-fault
locations, Rule 68-058 3)
circuit interrupter (GFCI)–protected circuit. The
●● the wall of a bolted or welded metal pool transformer and the GFCI are generally located
●● any deck boxes over 3 m from the pool.
 UNIT 22 Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs 381

Forming shells
Ladders (the wet-niche luminaire
Diving boards installed in the
All clamps for forming shell must
bonding must be also be grounded)
brass, copper,
All bonding wires must or copper alloy.
be copper No. 6 AWG or
larger, insulated, covered,
or bare.
Structural steel or wall of bolted
Drains or welded metal must have four
equally spaced bonding connections Water
using No. 6 AWG or larger inlet
copper conductors.

Water
outlet

Junction boxes (also

must be grounded)

Usual tie wires can

be used to bond rods
together.

It is recommended that
all metal be interconnected
with No. 6 copper,
Rule 68-058, Appendix B.

Pump
Pool water
motor
heater

Water circulating equipment

Pool cover
(Pump motor and other
electric equipment
associated with recirculating
systems must also be grounded.) Fences
Electric motor and
metal parts of pool
cover

Figure 22-4 Bonding the metal parts of swimming pool installations, Rule 68-058. In addition to
bonding, some of the above items must also be grounded. Refer to Rules 68-058 and 68-060 for specifics.
See Sheet 8 of the plans supplied with this text.

ELECTRIC HEATING Circuit sizing for electric heaters: The branch-

OF SWIMMING POOL DECKS circuit overcurrent protective devices shall be rated
not less than 125% of the heater’s nameplate rating,
Recommendations for deck-area electric heating according to Rule 62-114 8). The insulated branch-
units are illustrated in Figure 22-5. circuit conductors must have an ampacity not less
382 UNIT 22 Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs

Unit heater must be Permanently wired radiant heater must be

Rigidly mounted on structure At least 3 m above deck
At least 1.5 m back from edge Suitably guarded
of pool Securely fastened
Of the totally enclosed or At least 1.5 m back from edge of pool
guarded types Permanently wired
Marked as suitable for Marked as suitable for the
the particular location, Rule 62-106 particular location, Rule 62-106
Protected by a GFCI if GFCI-protected, Rule 62-116 1)
within 3 m of pool

Min Min Min

1.5 m 1.5 m 3.0 m
Unit heaters or radiant heaters
not permitted over the pool

Maximum water level

Pool Radiant trace heater sets embedded

in or below the deck must be
marked for this application and
GFCI-protected, Rule 62-116 1).

Figure 22-5 Recommendations for deck-area electric heating 3 to 6 m from the inside edge of swimming
pools.

than the connected load supplied, and not less than

80% of the rating of the overcurrent devices protect-
ing the circuit, Rules 62-110 1) b) and 62-114 6) b).
All trace heater sets used for surface heating
sidewalks, driveways, and pool decks must be fed
from a GFCI-protected circuit, Rule 62-116 1).

SPAS AND HOT TUBS (RULES

Courtesy of Hot Spring Spas

68-400 THROUGH 68-408)
There is really no difference between a spa and a hot
tub. Today, the terms are interchangeable, regardless
of what they are made of. They can be constructed Figure 22-6 A typical spa.
of wood, such as redwood, teak, cypress, oak, plas-
tic, fibreglass, concrete, tile, or other manufactured
products. See Figure 22-6.
identified as “convertible” spas and hot tubs. The
Spas and hot tubs contain electrical equipment
manufacturer must provide clear instructions on how
for heating and recirculating water. They have no
to convert from cord-and-plug set to hard wiring.
provisions for direct connection to the building
plumbing system. Outdoor Installation
Spas and hot tubs are intended to be filled and
used. They are not drained after each use, as in the Spas and hot tubs installed outdoors must conform
case of a regular bathtub. to the installation requirements for regular swim-
Some spas and hot tubs are furnished with a ming pools, Rule 68-000 2).
cord-and-plug set when shipped by the manufac- The metal parts of spas and hot tubs must be
turer. If these can be converted from cord-and-plug bonded together and to ground in accordance with
connection to “hard wiring,” they are listed and Rule 68-058.
 UNIT 22 Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs 383

Rule 68-402 2) states that the metal bands and Bonding to Ground (Rule 68-402)
hoops that secure the wooden staves of a spa or hot
tub do not have to be bonded. The requirements for bonding spas and hot
tubs are
●● Bond all electrical equipment within 1.5 m of the
Indoor Installation inside wall of the spa or hot tub.
Spas and hot tubs installed indoors must conform to ●● Bond all electrical equipment associated with
the following requirements: the circulating system, including the pump
●● must be connected using the wiring methods motor.
covered in Section 12 ●● Bonding must conform to all of the applicable
●● may be cord-and-plug connected, provided CEC rules.
the placement of the receptacle complies ●● Bonding conductor connections must be made
with Rule 68-404 2). according to the applicable requirements of
the CEC.
●● If equipment is connected by a flexible cord,
Receptacles (Rule 68–064)
the bonding conductor must be part of the flex-
●● Any receptacles located between 1.5 m and ible cord, and must be fastened to a fixed metal
3 m of the inside walls of a pool, hot tub, or part of the equipment.
spa shall be protected by a GFCI of the Class
A-type, Rule 68-064 2).
Bonding (Rule 68-402)
●● No receptacle shall be located less than 1.5 m
from the edge of the pool, Rule 68-064 1). The bonding requirements for spas and hot tubs are
●● Any receptacles that supply power to a spa or similar to those for regular swimming pools. Bond
hot tub must be GFCI-protected, no matter how together
far they are from the spa or hot tub. ●● all metal fittings within or attached to the spa
or hot tub
Luminaires and lighting equipment ●● all metal parts of electrical equipment associ-
ated with the circulating system, including
(Rule 68-066)
pump motors
1. All lighting outlets and luminaires located ●● all metal pipes, conduits, and metal surfaces
within 3 m of the inside wall or the water within 1.5 m of the inside edge of the spa or
surface of the spa or hot tub must be GFCI- hot tub (this bonding is not required if the
protected. GFCI protection is not required for materials are separated from the spa or hot
luminaires more than 3 m above maximum tub by a permanent barrier, such as a wall or
water level, Rule 68-066 6). building)
2. Recessed luminaires may be installed less than ●● all electrical devices and controls not associated
3 m above the hot tub or spa if the luminaires with the spa or hot tub located less than 1.5 m
are GFCI-protected and are suitable for use in from the inside edge of the spa or hot tub. If
damp locations. located 1.5 m or more from the hot tub or spa,
3. Surface-mounted luminaires may be installed bonding is not required
less than 3 m above the hot tub or spa if the Bonding is to be accomplished by means of
luminaires are GFCI-protected and are suitable threaded metal piping and fittings, metal-to-metal
for use in damp locations. mounting on a common base or frame, or by means
4. If any underwater lighting is to be installed, the of a solid, insulated, covered, or bare bonding con-
rules for regular swimming pools apply. ductor sized according to Table 16.
384 UNIT 22 Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs

Electric Water Heaters associated with the hydromassage bathtub to

[Rule 68-408 2) ] be installed according to all the normal CEC
requirements covering installation of that equip-
Electric water heaters must be suitable for the ment in bathrooms.
purpose. This residence has a hydromassage tub in the
They must have overcurrent protection rated ensuite bathroom. It is powered by a ½ hp, 120 V,
not less than 125% of the total load, as indicated on 3450 rpm, single-phase motor rated at approxi-
the nameplate of the heater, due to the panel being mately 10 amperes.
marked for 80% continuous operation. A hydromassage tub and all of its associated
equipment (generally provided by the manufacturer)
must be connected to a circuit that has GFCI pro-
Wiring and Circuit Protection tection. Some manufacturers provide a GFCI device
Most spas and hot tubs require a 120/240-volt cir- built into the hydromassage tub control sys-
cuit with an overcurrent device ranging from 40 to tem. Otherwise, the GFCI device must be sup-
60 amperes. All spas and hot tubs must be fed from plied and installed by the electrician. This can be
a GFCI-protected circuit. As with pools, this GFCI a feedthrough device installed in a device box in
device must be located more than 3 m from the pool the bathroom, a GFCI receptacle located under the
water. Since the spa or hot tub has a motor, a motor- tub, or a GFCI circuit breaker. The device must be
disconnecting means must also be supplied. This is located where it is accessible for testing.
typically accomplished by installing the GFCI cir- If the hydromassage tub is cord-cap connected,
cuit breaker in a weatherproof enclosure, located the receptacle located under the tub must be located
in a convenient location for testing purposes, and at least 300 mm above the floor, Rule 68-306 1).
within sight of the hot tub or spa. Figure 13-14 in Unit 13 illustrates one manufac-
turer’s hydromassage bathtub.
By definition in Rule 68-050, a hydromassage
Leakage Current Collectors bathtub is intended to be filled (used) and then
(Rule 68-406) drained after each use, whereas a spa or hot tub is
Leakage current collectors must be installed in the filled with water and not drained after each use.
water inlets or water outlets of spas or hot tubs. They
must be electrically insulated from the tub and bonded
to the control panel of the unit or to the main service FOUNTAINS AND DECORATIVE
ground with a minimum No. 6 copper bonding con- POOLS
ductor, or the bonding conductor may be sized from The home discussed in this text does not have a
Table 16, provided it is mechanically protected in the fountain. When fountains share water with a regular
same manner as the insulated circuit conductors. swimming pool, the fountain wiring must conform to
pool wiring requirements. If the house has a water
pump for a waterfall or decorative pool in the garden,
HYDROMASSAGE BATHTUBS the pump must be protected by a GFCI, Rule 26-956.
(SUBSECTIONS 68-300 to 68-308) A decorative pool is one in which any dimension
is greater than 1.5 m, Rule 68-050. Decorative pools
Hydromassage bathtubs, also called whirlpool tubs must be wired in the same manner as swimming pools.
or whirlpool bathtubs, together with their associated
electrical components, must be GFCI-protected.
Because a hydromassage bathtub does not SUMMARY
present any more of a shock hazard than a reg-
ular bathtub, the CEC permits all other wiring The figures in this unit and the building plans
(luminaires, switches, receptacles, and other included with this book present a detailed overview
equipment) in the same room but not directly of the CEC requirements for pool wiring.
 UNIT 22 Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs 385

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

Quote rule numbers.

1. The CEC section that covers the requirements for wiring swimming pools is
Section .
2. Name two ways in which a person can receive an electrical shock when in a pool.

3. Rule 68-050 discusses types of pools. Name and describe two types.

4. Use Section 68 to determine if the following items must be bonded.

YES NO
a. Wet- and dry-niche luminaires ____ ____
b. Electrical equipment located beyond 1.5 m of the inside
edge of the pool ____ ____
c. Electrical equipment located within 3 m of the inside edge
of the pool ____ ____
d. Recirculating equipment and pumps ____ ____
e. Luminaires installed more than 7.5 m from the
inside edge of pool ____ ____
f. Junction boxes, transformers, and GFCI enclosures ____ ____
g. Panelboards that supply the electrical
equipment for the pool ____ ____
h. Panelboards 6 m from the pool that do not supply the
electrical equipment for the pool ____ ____
5. [Circle the correct answer.] Bonding conductors (must) (may) be run in the same con-
duit as the insulated circuit conductors.
6. [Circle the correct answer.] Bonding conductors (may) (may not) be spliced with the
wire-nut types of wire connectors.
7. The purpose of grounding and bonding is to
386 UNIT 22 Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs

8. What parts of a pool must be bonded together?

9. May electrical wires be run above the pool, see Rule 68-054, Figure B68-1 in
Appendix B? Explain.

10. What is the closest distance that a receptacle may be installed to the inside edge of a
pool?

11. Receptacles located between 1.5 m and 3 m from the inside edge of a pool must be
protected by a .
12. [Circle the correct answer.] Luminaires installed near a pool that is unprotected by a
Class A ground fault circuit interrupter must be mounted at least (3 m) (4 m) (4.5 m)
from a pool surface or wall, Rule 68-066 6).
13. Bonding conductor terminations in wet-niche metal-forming shells, as well as
the conduits entering junction boxes or transformer enclosures where the conduit
runs directly to the wet-niche luminaires, must be ___________________
with a (an) ___________________ to prevent corrosion to the terminal and to
prevent the passage of water through the conduit, which could result in corrosion,
Rule 68-060 7).
14. [Circle the correct answer.] Wet-niche luminaires are accessible (from the inside of the
pool) (from a tunnel) (on top of a pole).
15. [Circle the correct answer.] According to Rule 68-066, wet-niche luminaires shall not
be submersed to a depth of more than
a. 600 mm
b. 300 mm
c. 450 mm
d. 1 m
 UNIT 22 Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs 387

16. [Circle the correct answer.] Dry-niche luminaires are accessible (from a tunnel, or
passageway, or deck) (from the inside of the pool) (on top of the pole).
17. [Circle: True or False] In general, it is not permitted to install raceways less than
1.0 m measured horizontally from the inside edge of the pool, Rule 68-056, Table 61.
Explain.

18. [Circle the correct answer.] Junction boxes, transformers, and GFCI enclosures have
one thing in common. They all (are made of bronze) (have threaded hubs) (must have
a bonding wire or terminal screw).
19. [Circle the correct answer.] Luminaires are permitted to be mounted on standards
or supports less than 3 m measured horizontally from the inside edge of the pool
only if they are (marked for the location) (rigidly fastened to an existing structure)
(GFCI-protected).
20. The following statements about spas and hot tubs are either true or false. Check one.
   TRUE FALSE
a. Receptacles may be installed within 1.5 m of the edge
of the spa or hot tub.              _____ _____
b. All receptacles within 3 m of the spa or hot tub must
be GFCI-protected.              _____ _____
c. Any receptacles that supply power to pool equipment must
be GFCI-protected if within 3 m of the pool.       _____ _____
d. Wall switches must be located at least 1 m from
the spa or hot tub.        _____ _____
e. Luminaires above the pool or within 1.5 m from the
inside edge of the pool must be GFCI-protected.       _____ _____
21. [Circle the correct answer.] Bonding and grounding of electrical equipment in and
around spas and hot tubs (are required by the CEC) (are not required by the CEC) (are
decided by the electrician).
22. When installing a hot tub, a control shall be located behind a barrier or not less than ___ m
from the tub.
23. [Circle the correct answer.] For the circuit supplying a hydromassage or whirlpool
bathtub, be sure that the circuit (does not have GFCI protection that could result in
nuisance tripping) (is GFCI-protected).
388 UNIT 22 Swimming Pools, Spas, and Hot Tubs

24. [Circle: True or False] Leakage current collectors shall be bonded to the control panel
with a minimum No. 6 AWG copper bonding conductor.
25. What precautions must be taken when a fountain shares water with a regular swimming
pool?

26. Swimming pool pump motors shall be marked for the purpose, and, if within 3 m of the
pool wall, shall be

27. The metal parts of the pool and other non-electrical equipment associated with the
pool must be bonded together within how many metres from the pool edge?
a. 0.75 m
b. 1 m
c. 1.25 m
d. 1.5 m
 UNIT

23
Television, Telephone,
Data, and Home
Automation Systems
Objectives
RED SEAL
After studying this unit, you should be able to OCCUPATIONAL
●● install television outlets, antennas, cables, STANDARD
and lead-in wires (RSOS)
●● list cable television installation requirements
For the Red Seal exam,
●● describe the basic installation of satellite note that this unit covers
antennas the following RSOS tasks:
●● install telephone conductors, outlet boxes, ●● Task A-3
and outlets ●● Task E-27
●● install and terminate computer network cable ●● Task E-28
●● understand the basics of “wireless”
●● understand the basic terminology of home
automation
●● identify types of devices that can be controlled
by a home automation system

389
390 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems

TELEVISION TV   — Television Installation Methods

Television signals can be received by means of Figure 23-2 shows a master amplifier distribution
antenna, cable, or satellite dish. Because some sys- system. The lead-in wire from the antenna is con-
tems may not be available in the region of the coun- nected to an amplifier placed in an accessible area,
try or the area in which you will be working, the text such as the basement. Twin-lead, 300-ohm cable
discusses all three types of installations. runs from the amplifier to each of the outlet boxes.
The cable is connected to tap-off units, which have
General Wiring a 300-ohm input and a 300-ohm output. The tap-
off units have terminals or plug-in arrangements so
Television outlets may be connected in several ways, that the 300-ohm, twin-lead cable can be connected
depending on their proposed locations. In general, between the television outlet and the television.
for installation in dwellings, the electrician uses Amplified systems are generally not necessary
standard sectional switch boxes or 102 mm square, in typical residential installations, where cable tele-
38-mm deep outlet boxes with single-gang raised vision is available.
plaster covers. A box is installed at each point on the With a multiset coupler, the lead-in wire from
system where an outlet is located. Use non-metallic the antenna is connected to a pair of terminals on
boxes if the system is to be wired with unshielded the coupler. The cables to each television are con-
cable; see Figure 23-1. nected to other pairs of terminals. Two to four

Figure 23-1 Non-metallic boxes and a non-metallic raised cover.

Coaxial cable from antenna,

CATV, or satellite receiver

Amplifier
Coaxial cables from
amplifier to outlets

TV outlets

Figure 23-2 Television master amplifier distribution system. A television master amplifier distribution
system might be needed when many TV outlets are to be installed. This will minimize the signal loss.
 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems 391

Antenna mounted
to top of roof
Antenna mounted
to side of building

Antenna mounted
to chimney

Figure 23-3 Typical mounting of television antennas.

televisions can be connected to a coupler, depending Some manufacturers recommend shielded coaxial
on the number of terminal pairs provided. Because cable to prevent interference and keep the colour
an amplifier is not required, a coupler system is less signal strong. Both shielded and non-shielded lead-
expensive than an amplifier distribution system. in wire deliver good television reception when prop-
A third method of installing a television system erly installed.
uses shielded 75-ohm coaxial cable, which is con- Figure 23-3 shows common locations for a
nected to impedance-matching transformers with television antenna on a residence.
75- or 300-ohm outputs. Additional cable is then Faceplates are provided for tap-off units to
connected between the matching transformer and match conventional switch and convenience outlet
the television. Many older televisions have 300-ohm faceplates. Combination two-gang faceplates also
inputs; newer models generally have 75-ohm inputs. are available for tap-off (Figures 23-4 and 23-5).

Courtesy of Thomas & Betts Corporation

Figure 23-4 Mounting of power/communication box with coaxial outlet and duplex receptacle.
392 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems

3. The grounding conductor (Rule 54-300):

Courtesy of Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All

a. must be insulated
b. must not be smaller than No. 14 AWG
c. may be solid or stranded but must be of

Rights Reserved
copper
d. must be run in a line as straight as practi-
cable to the grounding electrode
Figure 23-5 Coaxial (F connector) and telephone
combination wall jacks and cover plate. e. shall be guarded from mechanical damage
f. shall be connected to the nearest acces-
sible location on the building or structure
grounding electrode (Rules 10-118 and
Both a 120-volt convenience receptacle and a televi- 54-304); the grounded interior water pipes
sion outlet can be mounted in one outlet box using (Rule 10-700); or the grounding electrode
this combination faceplate. conductor
However, a combination installation requires
g. If none of the options in (f) are available,
that a metal barrier be installed between the 120-volt
then ground to any of the electrodes per
section and the television section of the outlet box,
Rule 10-118, such as the metal frame of the
Rule 54-400 3) a). This barrier prevents line voltage
building, a concrete-encased electrode, or a
interference with the television signal and keeps the
plate electrode.
120-volt wiring away from the television wiring. In
addition, line voltage cables and lead-in wire must h. If none of the options in (f) and (g) are avail-
be separated to prevent interference when they are able, then ground to any of the electrodes
run in the same space within the walls and ceilings. per Rule 54-302 1). The electrodes shall be
The line voltage cables should be fastened to one driven to a depth of at least 2 m. The con-
side of the space and the lead-in cable to the nection may be by ground clamp or by a
other side. wire lead with a pressure connector. Refer
to ­Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
Standard C22.1–09.
CEC Rules for Cable Television
(Section 54) CAUTION: If any of the preceding results in
one grounding electrode for the CATV shield
Cable systems, also called community antenna tele- and another grounding electrode for the elec-
vision (CATV) or just cable TV, are installed both trical system, bond the two electrodes together
overhead and underground in a community. To sup- with a bonding jumper no smaller than No. 6
ply an individual customer, the cable company runs AWG copper, Rule 54-500 2). Grounding and
coaxial cables through the wall of a residence at a bonding the coaxial cable shield to the same
convenient point. Up to this point of entry, inside grounding electrode as the main service
the building, and underground, the cable company ground prevents voltage differences between
must conform to the requirements of Section 54, the shield and other grounded objects, such as
plus local codes if applicable. These are some of the a water pipe.
key rules:
1. The outer conductive shield of the coaxial
cables must be grounded as close as possible to SATELLITE ANTENNAS
the point of entry, Rule 54-200 1). A satellite antenna system consists of a parabolic
2. Coaxial cables shall not be run in the same con- dish, a low-noise block amplifier with integral feed
duits or box as electric light and power conduc- (LNBF), mounting hardware, and a receiver. At one
tors, Rule 54-604 1). time, satellite systems were most popular in the
 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems 393

rural areas where choices of stations on a conven- prone to lightning strikes and were very expensive
tional antenna were limited. The dish was 2 or 3 m to repair.
in diameter and was usually mounted on a large steel Modern satellite systems have dishes ranging
pole cemented into the ground (Figure 23-6). Many from 450 to 600 mm. They are light and easy to
of these systems had rotors that rotated and pointed install, with many users choosing to perform their
the dish to different satellites. These systems were own installation. These satellite systems are “fixed”
on one satellite, which is in a geosynchronous orbit
above Earth (Figure 23-7). Because of their light
These devices
Low-noise amplifier weight, many dishes are installed on the side of the
downconverter
are located in residence, where they are less likely to be struck by
this housing. Feedhorn
lightning.

Selecting a Mounting Location

Latitude adjustment for the Dish
head
The dish can be mounted on nearly any surface,
Rotation joint including brick, concrete, masonry block, wood
siding, roof, or a pole. When selecting the mounting
location, check the documentation included with
Post installed
in vertical position
the system. The dish must have an unobstructed
“view” of the satellite. Be sure to consider future
growth of trees and possible construction of adja-
cent buildings. Be sure to protect the antenna from
122 cm minimum
wind, as strong winds can bend mounting hardware
plus 15 cm or pull out mounting screws. The mounting surface
minimum below
frost line must also be strong enough to prevent movement
of the dish during high winds, as even the smallest
Allow post amount of movement may affect the signal recep-
to drain Gravel
tion. Because the system will be grounded to Earth,
46 cm it will provide a low resistance path to ground for
minimum
lightning. Locating the dish high on the building
Figure 23-6 Satellite antenna. or on a pole increases the likelihood of a lightning
strike.

“Clarke Belt”

Figure 23-7 Television satellites appear to be stationary in space because they are rotating at the same
speed as Earth. This is called geosynchronous orbit. The satellite receives the uplink signal from Earth,
amplifies it, and transmits it back to Earth. The downlink signal is picked up by the satellite antenna.
394 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems

Mounting the Satellite Dish

Each manufacturer of satellite dishes provides
detailed installation instructions with the systems.
The mounting base must be securely fastened to the
mounting surface. The mounting pole is attached to
the mounting base and adjusted as recommended
by the manufacturer. The support arm is attached to
the mounting pole with the dish and the low-noise
block feedhorn (LNBF) attached to the arm. After
installation of the system is complete, aim the dish
as recommended by the manufacturer.

Photography is reprinted with permission and provided courtesy of ERICO International Corporation
Grounding of a Satellite System
The system must be grounded according to the
manufacturer’s recommendations and all appli-
cable codes. To provide proper grounding, install
a grounding block in the coaxial cable that enters
the building from the dish. The distance from
the copper ground rod and the grounding block
should be as short as possible, and the grounding
block must be connected to the rod using a copper
grounding conductor of not less than No. 14 AWG
(Figure 23-8).

Installation of the Satellite Receiver

Figure 23-8 Intersystem bonding termination
The satellite receiver is a remote-controlled equipment.
device the viewer uses to control the channel.
It therefore must be installed close to the tele-
vision. More than one TV may be connected to
this system. However, the same program will be receiver must be Type RG-6. After the receiver,
viewed on all. It is possible to view up to two Type RG-59 may be used to distribute the signal
different programs at the same time on different throughout the residence. However, the higher-
televisions, but this will require that the LNBF quality video provided by digital and high-defini-
be a dual type and a second receiver must be tion television (HDTV) require RG-6 throughout
purchased. Also, a second coaxial cable must be the home.
supplied from the dish to the second receiver. Many signals received by a satellite dish provide
Satellite television companies offer pay-per- the audio portion of the program in stereo. Many
view service on their systems, which require satellite services even supply specialty audio (radio)
the receiver to be connected to a telephone line. stations. The satellite receiver has audio output jacks
Manufacturers recommend that the phone line be on the rear panel for connection to a conventional
left connected to the receiver at all times. Refer stereo system for improved audio. This connection
to Figure 23-9 for a diagram of the installation. usually requires two audio patch cables with RCA-
The coaxial cable from the satellite dish to the type jacks on both ends.
 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems 395

Connect to directions, a rotor on the mast turns the antenna to

satellite dish
face the direction of each transmitter. The rotor is
controlled from inside the building. The control-
ler’s cord is plugged into a regular 120-volt recep-
tacle to obtain power. A four-wire cable is usually
installed between the rotor motor and the control
unit. The wiring for a rotor may be installed during
the roughing-in stage of construction by running the
rotor’s four-wire cable into a device wall box, allow-
CATV and HD ing 1.5–1.8 m of extra cable, and then installing a
antenna
regular single-gang switch plate when finishing.
Section 54 covers this subject. Although instruc-
A-B switch
tions are supplied with antennas, be sure to follow
Cable these Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) rules:
Receiver
1. Antennas and lead-in wires shall be securely
supported, Rule 54-108.
75-ohm 75-ohm 2. Antennas and lead-in wires shall not be attached
coaxial coaxial to the electric service mast.
cable cable
3. Antennas and lead-in wires shall be kept away
120-volt
line cord
from all light and power conductors to avoid
DVD or Blu-ray accidental contact with them.
4. Lead-in wires shall be securely attached to the
antenna.
TV 5. Outdoor antennas and lead-in conductors shall
not cross over light and power wires.
6. Lead-in conductors shall be kept at least 50 mm
away from open light and power ­conductors,
Figure 23-9 Typical wiring diagram for a dual- Rule 54-400 1).
receiver satellite system.
7. Where practicable, antenna conductors shall not
be run under open light and power conductors.
8. On the outside of a building:
CEC RULES FOR INSTALLING a. position and fasten lead-in wires so they
ANTENNAS AND LEAD-IN WIRES cannot swing closer than 300 mm to light
(SECTION 54) and power wires having a maximum of
300 volts between conductors.
Home television sets and AM and FM radios gener-
b. keep lead-in conductors at least 2 m away
ally come complete with built-in antennas. For those
from the lightning rod system, or bond
locations in outlying areas, out of reach of strong
together, according to Rule 54-302.
signals, it is quite common to install a separate
antenna system. 9. On the inside of a building:
Either indoor or outdoor antennas may be used a. keep antenna and lead-in wires at least
with televisions. The front of an outdoor antenna 50 mm from other open wiring (as in old
is aimed at the television transmitting station. houses) unless the other wiring is in a metal
When transmitting stations are located in different raceway or in cable armour.
396 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems

b. keep lead-in wires out of electric boxes TELEPHONE WIRING ▲

unless there is an effective, permanently (SECTION 60)
installed barrier to separate the light and
power wires from the lead-in wire. New technology is always being incorporated into
telephones. It is recommended that you consult the
10. Grounding:
product information sheet to guide you through the
a. The grounding wire must be copper. installation of your product. Since the deregulation of
b. The grounding wire need not be insulated. telephone companies, residential do-it-yourself tele-
It must be securely fastened in place; may phone wiring has become quite common.
be attached directly to a surface without the A telephone company installs the service line to
need for insulating supports; shall be pro- a residence up to a protector device, which protects
tected from physical damage or be large the system from hazardous voltages. The company
enough to compensate for lack of protec- decides if the protector is mounted outside or inside
tion; and shall be run in as straight a line as the home. Always check with the phone company
is practicable. before starting your installation.
c. The grounding conductor shall be con- The telephone company’s wiring ends and the
nected to the nearest accessible location homeowner’s interior wiring begins at the demarca-
on the building or structure grounding tion point. The telephone wiring inside the home may
electrode, Rule 54-200 1); or the grounded be done by the telephone company, the homeowner,
interior water pipe, Rule 54-302; or the or the electrician. Whatever the case, the rules in Sec-
metallic power service raceway; or the tion 60 apply. Refer to Figures 23-10 through 23-12.
service equipment enclosure; or the Section 60 covers the installation of communica-
grounding electrode conductor or its metal tion systems. For the typical residence, the electri-
enclosure. cian or homeowner will rough in the boxes wherever
a telephone outlet is wanted. The most common
d. If none of the options in (c) is available, interior telephone wiring for a new home is with
ground to any one of the electrodes per four-conductor No. 22 AWG or No. 24 AWG cable,
Rule 10-102, such as a metal under- known as station wire. The outer jacket is usually of a
ground water pipe, an independent metal thermoplastic material, most often in a neutral colour
water-piping system, or a concrete-encased that blends in with decorator colours in the home.
electrode. This is particularly important in existing homes
e. The grounding conductor may be run inside where the telephone cable may have to be exposed.
or outside the building, but must be pro- Voice communication does not require a high-
tected where exposed to mechanical injury. quality cable within the residence. However, many
f. The grounding conductor shall not be consumers use their telephone lines for data commu-
smaller than No. 14 copper. nication through a modem connected to their com-
puter. The phone lines themselves are sometimes used
CAUTION: If any of the preceding rules as a computer data network within the home, using
results in one grounding electrode for the special equipment. In these cases, the performance
antenna and another grounding electrode for of station wire may not be satisfactory. In these situ-
the electrical system, bond the two electrodes ations, a three- or four-pair unshielded twisted pair
together with a bonding jumper not smaller (UTP) cable of the Category 3 type (or higher) is rec-
than No. 6 copper or its equivalent. ommended. Twisting the conductors within the pairs
and twisting the pairs themselves help reduce electro-
Grounding and bonding to the same grounding magnetic interference with data communication.
electrode as the main service ground prevents volt- Cables, mounting boxes, junction boxes, terminal
age differences between the two systems. blocks, jacks, adapters, faceplates, cords, hardware,
 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems 397

Box behind modular

jack installed during
rough-in stage

Wall phone

Modular
jacks
Meter

Service raceway

Protector Standard
network
interface (SNI)
Junction box

Demarcation point

Telephone Co. Customer responsible for

Underground responsible from interior wiring from this
telephone line this point out point in

Figure 23-10 Typical telephone installation. The telephone company installs and connects its
underground cable to the protector. In this illustration, the protector is mounted to the service raceway.
This establishes the ground that offers protection against hazardous voltages such as a lightning surge
on the incoming line. A cable is then run from the protector to a standard network interface (SNI). The
electrician or homeowner plugs the interior wiring into the SNI by means of the modular plug. The term
modular means that most of the phones are plugged-in rather than hard-wired connections.

Standard
network
interface (SNI)
Junction box features a short, prewired
cord that plugs into a standard network
interface (SNI). It allows easy connection
Junction box of additional telephone cables.

A B

Figure 23-11 Individual telephone cables run to each telephone outlet from the telephone company’s
connection point.
398 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems

Telephone Conductors
The colour coding of telephone cables is shown in
Figure 23-13. Figure 23-14 shows some types of
telephone cable. The colour coding of telephone
cables is also shown in Figure C-2 in Appendix C at
the back of this book.
Cables are available in these sizes:
2 pair (4 conductors)
3 pair (6 conductors)
6 pair (12 conductors)
Standard
network 12 pair (24 conductors)
interface (SNI) 25 pair (50 conductors)
50 pair (100 conductors)
Junction box
Telephone circuits require a separate pair of con-
Figure 23-12 A complete “loop system” of the ductors from the telephone all the way back to the
telephone cable. If something happens to one phone company’s central switching centre. To minimize
section of the cable, the circuit can be fed from the interference that could come from other electrical equip-
other direction.
ment, such as electric motors and fluorescent lumi-
naires, each pair of telephone wires is twisted together.
The recommended circuit lengths are:
No. 24 gauge: Not over 61 m
plugs, and so on are all available through electri-
No. 22 gauge: Not over 76 m
cal distributors, builders’ supply outlets, telephone
stores, electronic stores, hardware stores, and vari- When telephones had electromechanical ring-
ous wholesale and retail outlets. ers, one line had enough power to ring up to five

Green (tip) 1
Red (ring) 2
Two-pair
Yellow (spare)
Black (spare)

White with blue tracer (tip) 1

Blue (ring) 2

White with orange tracer

Three-pair
Orange

White with green tracer

Green

1 Tip is the conductor that is connected to the telephone company’s positive terminal.
It is similar to the neutral conductor of a residential wiring circuit.

2 Ring is the conductor that is connected to the telephone company’s negative terminal.
It is similar to the “hot” ungrounded conductor of a residential wiring circuit.

Figure 23-13 Colour coding of telephone cables.

 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems 399

Figure 23-14 Telephone cables. These cords are available in round and flat configurations, depending on
the number of conductors in the cable.

phones. Most telephones now have electronic were connected to phone jacks. As a result there
ringers, which use very little power; therefore, more would be no audible signal. However, most telephone
than five phones can be installed on one line. (Some companies no longer direct-connect phones, resulting
telephones are labelled with a ringer equivalence in all phones being cord- and jack-connected.
number [REN], with one REN equal to the power
required by one electromechanical ringer.) Check
this with the telephone company before installation.
It is recommended that at least one telephone be
permanently installed, probably the wall phone in
the kitchen. The remaining phones may be portable,
able to be plugged into any of the phone jacks; see
Figures 23-15 and 23-16. If all of the phones were por-
table, there might be a time when none of the phones
Courtesy of Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All
Rights Reserved

Figure 23-16 Three styles of wall plates for

modular telephone jacks: rectangular stainless
Figure 23-15 Telephone modular jacks. steel, weatherproof for outdoor use, and circular.
400 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems

The electrical plans show that nine telephone Conduit

outlets are provided, one in each of these areas:
In some communities, electricians prefer to install
Front bedroom Rear outdoor patio regular device boxes at a telephone outlet location,
Kitchen Recreation room then “stub” a 27 mm conduit to the basement or attic
Laundry Study/bedroom from this box. At a later date, the telephone cable
Living room Workshop can be “fished” through the conduit.
Master bedroom
Grounding (Rule 60-700 through
Installation of Telephone Conductors 60-710)
(Rules 60-300 through 60-334)
The telephone company will provide the proper
Telephone conductors should be as listed below (the grounding of its incoming cable sheath and protec-
items below that are marked with an asterisk are tor, generally using wire not smaller than No. 14
recommendations from residential telephone manu- AWG copper or equal. Or the company might clamp
facturers’ installation data): the protector to the grounded metal service raceway
1. Shall be of a type listed in Table 19 as suitable conduit to establish ground. The grounding require-
for communications and suitable for the instal- ments are practically the same as for CATV and
lation environment antennas, which were covered earlier in this unit.
2. Shall be separated by at least 50 mm from light
and power conductors operating at 300 volts Safety
or less, unless the light and power conductors
Open-circuit voltage between telephone conductors
are in a raceway, in hard-usage flexible cord, or
of an idle pair can range from 50 to 60 volts direct
Type AC90 cable, Rule 60-308 1)
current (DC). The ringing voltage can reach 90 volts
3. Shall not be placed in any conduit or boxes alternating current (AC) at 20 cycles per second.
with electric light and power conductors unless Therefore, always work carefully with insulated tools
the conductors are separated by a partition and stay clear of bare terminals and grounded sur-
4. May be terminated in either metallic or non- faces. Disconnect the interior telephone wiring if you
metallic boxes—check with the local tele- must work on the circuit, or take the phone off the
phone company or local electrical inspector for hook, in which case the DC voltage level will drop
specific requirements and there should be no AC ringing voltage delivered.
5. Should not share the same stud space as the
electrical branch-circuit wiring
DATA SYSTEMS
6. Should be kept at least 600 mm away from
the electrical branch-circuit wiring where the The constant evolution of data transmission sys-
telephone cable is run parallel to the branch- tems requires homeowners to familiarize themselves
circuit wiring to guard against induction with the most current capabilities of any hardware
noise and always install the latest firmware on all their
7. Should not share the same bored holes as elec- devices. It is recommended that owners consult
trical wiring, plumbing, or gas pipes the product information sheet that accompanies
all newly installed equipment. As more families
8. Should be kept away from hot-water pipes, enter the world of computers and the Internet, they
hot-air ducts, and other heat sources that might quickly discover the usefulness of this technology.
harm the insulation It provides the opportunity to find information on
9. Should be carefully attached to the sides of joists nearly any subject, to engage in multiplayer com-
and studs with insulated staples puter games, and to buy or sell just about anything.
 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems 401

Courtesy of Honeywell Inc.

Figure 23-17 Typical bundled cables showing both coaxial and Category 5e and Category 7A cables.

Many families have more than one computer and opt equipment is only slightly more expensive than
to install a home data network similar to those installed 10 Mbps equipment.
in small businesses, which allows all of the computers We recommend 100 Mbps equipment as a good
to share peripheral devices such as drives, printers, and compromise between communication speed and
scanners, as well as Internet access and files. affordability. The equipment is not permanently
installed and can be easily, although not necessarily
Data Rate inexpensively, replaced. The wiring, which is inside
the walls, is considerably more difficult to replace
For residential applications, a minimum of one when it becomes inadequate.
Category (Cat) 5e, 6, or 6e unshielded twisted
pair (UTP) cable with four twisted pairs of No. 24 Data Cable Type
AWG copper conductors or two Category 5e UTP
cables with two twisted pairs of No. 24 AWG cop- Communication cable is tested and listed in accor-
per conductors should be installed for the home runs dance with UL Standard 444. Optical fibre cable is
between each outlet location and a central distribu- tested and listed in accordance to UL Standard 1651
tion panel where all of the audio/video/data cables and is recognized in Canada under the label ULC. A
are run. Also, install one or two RG-6 quad-shielded ULC or UL mark on a product means that ULC or
coax cables to each outlet location. For overall supe- UL has tested and evaluated representative samples
rior performance, install Category 7 or Category 7a of that product and determined that they meet ULC/
cables. Figure 23-17 illustrates a typical bundled UL’s requirements. For these cable types, ULC stan-
cable with two coaxial cables, two Category 5E dards are mirror images of the EIA and TIA stan-
cables, and a Category 7 cable. dards. Cables that have passed testing by a qualified
Ethernet expanded to a data rate of 100 megabits electrical products testing laboratory will bear a
per second (Mbps) and is now up to 1000 Mbps, or “listing” mark from that organization.
1 Gbps (gigabits per second). Equipment for gigabit If the cable has also passed the data transmis-
networks is still quite expensive, while 100 Mbps sion performance category program, the cable will
402 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems

be surface-marked and tag-marked “Verified to UL

Performance Category Program.”
Some communities are installing underground
hybrid FO/coaxial cable systems that combine tele-
phone, CATV, and community intranet capabilities.
In other areas, the telephone utility provides
both voice and Internet services through its distribu-

Denis Dryashkin/[Link]
tion system. In more remote locations, Internet ser-
vices may be available only from satellite signals.
The features or functions of category-rated
cables are shown in Table 23-1. These cables are
then connected to an affordable network interface
card (NIC) for the computers and network switches
Figure 23-18 A popular choice for the home
(Figure 23-18), or hubs can be used. network. This router includes a four-port 10/100/
Proper selection and installation of any type of 1000 Mbps switch, a print server for printer
audio/video/data cable is extremely important. The sharing, and a WAN port for connection to the
final performance will be that of the weakest link Internet by cable or ADSL.

Table 23-1
Types of category-rated cables.
Category 1** Four-pair nontwisted cable. Referred to as quad wire. Not suitable for modern audio, data,
and imaging applications. This is the old-fashioned plain old telephone service (POTS)
cable. If you have any, get rid of it!
Category 2** Usually 4-pair with slight twist to each pair. Not suitable for modern audio, data, and
imaging applications. If you have any, get rid of it!
Category 3 UTP.* Data networks up to 16 MHz. Still available, but better choices are Categories 5e, 6,
6A, and 7.
Category 4* * UTP.* Data networks up to 20 MHz. Not suitable for modern audio, data, and imaging
applications. If you have any, get rid of it!
Category 5* * UTP.* Data networks up to 100 MHz. Four pairs with No. 24 AWG copper conductors, solid
(for structured wiring) and stranded (for patch cords). Cable has an outer PVC jacket. Was
the most popular prior to advent of Categories 5e, 6, and 7.
Category 5e UTP.* Basically an enhanced Cat 5 manufactured to tighter tolerances for higher
performance. Data networks up to 350 MHz. Audio/video, phones, communication. This is
detailed in the new TIA/EIA 568A-5 Standard. Preferred over Cat 5 for new installations.
Category 6 UTP.* Four twisted pairs. Data networks up to 250 MHz. Audio/video, phones,
communication. Has a spline between the four pairs to minimize interference between the
pairs.
Category 6A Augmented cable. Unshielded. Excellent for data centre environment.
Category 7 Best choice where high performance is required. Four twisted pairs, with each pair fully
foil shielded. Entire cable has added layer of insulation. Has an outer polyurethane jacket.
Eliminates crosstalk. Improves resistance to electromagnetic interference (noise). Good
choice for long runs. Estimated 15-year life cycle compared to 10 years for other category
cables. Data networks up to 800 MHz. Excellent for commercial installations.
Category 7a Enhanced Cat 7. Excellent choice for long runs. Data networks up to 1000 MHz. Excellent
for commercial installations.

Category 8 Newly adopted in 2013 by ISO/IEC. Has Class II performance. Excellent for commercial
installations.

* UTP means unshielded twisted pair.

** Categories 1, 2, 4, and 5 no longer supported by EIA/TIA. These cables are no longer manufactured and are listed for reference only.
 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems 403

in the system. Improper installation, connection

hardware, outlets, and other components can reduce
the performance to that of an old-fashioned phone
system.
Although you may not experience problems with

Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

audio transmission, using the proper cable for data
transmission is critical. Losing your Internet connec-
tion for no apparent reason could very well be pin-
pointed to older-style untwisted-pair connecting cables
that are unable to handle high-speed data transmission.
Using high-quality cables is extremely important. Figure 23-19 Category 5e data jacks.

Installation of Data Cable

Some require the use of a punchdown tool, shown in
There are only a few basic rules to remember for a Figure 23-20, while others snap together. Jacks are
successful installation of a computer data network: available as both surface and flush-mount. All jacks
1. All cable and terminations must be of the same are clearly identified as to the colour coding for termi-
type: Cat 5e cable requires Cat 5e terminations. nation. Two configurations are used for termination:
If cable and terminations of different categories 568A is the most common in Canada and 568B is the
are used, the system will perform to only the most common in the United States. Either configura-
lowest category standard. tion is acceptable if you use the same one throughout
2. The maximum pulling force applied to a data the network. Some manufacturers make jacks that are
cable is 11 kg. specifically 568A or 568B: Be sure to order carefully
and check that they are all the same when the order is
3. When installing UTP cable, maintain a separa- received. Other manufacturers make jacks that can be
tion of 300 mm from the cable and any electri- used for either configuration and provide both colour
cal equipment whenever possible. coding layouts.
4. A separation of 300 mm must be maintained When terminating the conductor to the jack,
between the data cable and ballasts of any type of ensure that no more than 12 mm of the conductor
luminaires, including fluorescent and transform- is exposed from the jacket. Each pair of conduc-
ers of low-voltage spotlights and track lights. tors in UTP is twisted together at different numbers
5. Data cable may be supported in many ways,
including straps and plastic ties. Take care
to not deform the cable when installing sup-
ports. If the supports are too tight, the twist-
ing of the conductors inside the cable will be
altered and the performance of the system
will decrease.
6. The minimum radius of the bend of data cable is
to be not less than 25 mm. A smaller bend radius
can damage the conductors or insulation and
Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

alter the twist rates of the conductors or pairs.

Installation of Termination Jacks

Jacks for data network installations are available in
Figure 23-20 Punchdown tools.
many forms from many manufacturers (Figure 23-19).
404 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems

of twists per unit length. The four twisted pairs are Wireless Data Networks
then twisted together. No more twisting shall be
removed than is necessary to complete the termina- Wireless data networks are now affordable for the
tion. Do not alter the twist rates of the pairs in any average consumer. The equipment used in wire-
way. Figure 23-25 demonstrates the use of a punch- less systems, such as routers and wireless network
down tool to terminate a jack, while Figures 23-21 adapters, is only slightly more expensive than their
through 23-26 show a detailed installation of a mod- wired counterparts. However, the up-front cost
ular type of snap-together jack.

Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

Figure 23-23 Fan out individual conductors.

Figure 23-21 Cut off outer jacket of nylon cable.

You can use a knife or a cable cutter as pictured
here.
Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

Figure 23-22 Remove outer coating of cable and Figure 23-24 Lay conductors in modular wiring
cut nylon thread. jig and cut off excess.
 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems 405

Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

Courtesy of Sandy F. Gerolimon

Figure 23-25 Termination of punchdown-type Figure 23-26 Assemble wiring jig and jack body.
data jack.

●● The network can be tapped into by outside com-

of the installation of the network cabling can be puters. It is essential that the security features
eliminated. supplied with the equipment be used.
With a wired network system, the consumer
is restricted to a location with the computer.
●● Wireless systems generally have a slower data
Relocating the computer may require installing transfer rate than wired systems; however, new
additional cabling and network jacks or using a technologies allow connection speeds as high
long network cable to connect to an existing jack. as 108 Mbps.
Most consumers do not want the long cables ●● Current [Link] systems’ data transmission
lying on their floors because of the appearance can range from 433 Mbps to several Gigabits
and the trip hazard. Wireless networks allow the per second in a laboratory, but can be limited
consumers to locate their computers anywhere by the speed of the Ethernet ports that feed their
they like. routers and switches or by other environmental
The advantages of wireless networks are factors in your home.
●● Increased flexibility when locating computers ●● Connection speed is affected by the signal
and peripherals such as printers. strength of the transmitter: It drops as the dis-
●● Portability when using laptop or portable com- tance from the transmitter increases.
puting devices, even into the yard surrounding ●● Network connectivity is affected by building
the building. construction. When heating system ductwork,
●● No wiring costs. refrigerators, or other metal objects are located
between the user and the wireless transmit-
●● Ease of adding devices to the network. ter, the metal will cast a “shadow” that makes
Its disadvantages are wireless connection not possible. Wood frame
●● Equipment is slightly more expensive than construction is generally better than concrete
comparable wired equipment. or steel for the use of wireless networking.
406 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems

●● Connectivity is affected by other systems operat- ●● Make sure both ends of a cable are wired the
ing in the same wireless frequency range, such same way.
as microwave ovens and wireless telephones. Cable terminal pin layout connections for EIA/
Wireless routers are small in size. A typical wireless TIA 568A and 568B are shown in Figure 23-28
router is shown in Figure 23-27. and also found in Appendix D.

EIA/TIA 568A & 568B Home Automation

STANDARD
Wired Communication
There are two accepted standards for eight-wire data
network jacks (commonly and incorrectly called The field of home automation is constantly changing.
RJ-45). See Appendix D for wire colour pin layout. New products and new companies are always popping
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B “Commercial Building into existence. It is recommended that you always
Telecommunications Cabling Standard” lists both consult the newest product information sheet for your
wiring configurations. T568B is the most prevalent product and use the latest firmware upgrade. Home
for commercial installations, and was used by AT&T automation in the past sought to use either a dedicated
for the original Merlin phone systems. To help you system of standalone conductors or the power cables
remember, associate “B” with “Bell.” in a home. The older 1970s-based systems that use
ANSI/TIA/EIA-570-B “Residential Telecommu- the power conductors in a house, such as X10 sys-
nications Cabling Standards” recommends T568A: tems, use zero-crossing techniques to place a signal
●● If the installation is residential, choose T568A into the power conductors at the point where the sine
unless other conditions apply. The two inner wave crosses zero. This happens 120 times per second
pairs of 568A are wired the same as a two-line in a 60 Hz system. These systems had the advantage
phone jack. of using the existing wires in a house, and the disad-
vantage of requiring a bridge to connect the two live
●● If there is pre-existing voice/data wiring (remodel, wires of the house to neutral. The unshielded wires
moves, adds, changes), duplicate this wiring of the house also were prone to electronic “noise,”
scheme on any new connection. and this could impact the functionality of the system.
●● If project specifications are available, use the Lastly, by today’s standards, X10 technology trans-
specified wiring configuration. ferred data too slowly to meet future requirements. A
●● If components used within the project are inter- maximum data rate of 60 bits per second (bps) could
nally wired for either T568A or T568B, use that reliably be transferred using X10 systems.
wiring scheme.
Power over Ethernet (PoE). Other wired solu-
tions still exist. The most popular wired systems
Courtesy © 2017 Belkin International, Inc. and/or its affiliates. All rights

Crossover Cable Straight-Through

Cable
RJ-45 Pin RJ-45 Pin
RJ-45 Pin RJ-45 Pin
1 Rx1 3 Tx1
2 Rc2 6 Tx2 1 Tx1 1 Rc1
3 Tx1 1 Rc1 2 Tc2 2 Rc2
6 Tx2 2 Rc2 3 Rx1 3 Tx1
568A 568B 6 Rc2 6 Tx2

A B
A Shows the crossover cable pin assignments.

B
reserved.

Shows the straight-through cable pin assignments.

Figure 23-28 Pin layout for EIA/TIA 568A

Figure 23-27 Wireless router. and 568B.
 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems 407

in use today use Cat 5e or Cat 6 Ethernet cables When combined with a medium access control
(“Cat” stands for “category”) to deliver both power (MAC) sublayer, FHSS enables multiple devices
to run devices and bidirectional communication to to inhabit and communicate on the same 2.4 GHz-
and from the devices being powered. Power over based set of frequencies. The Bluetooth standard
Ethernet (PoE) devices include cameras, intercoms, allows devices to adaptively utilize the radio spec-
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) phones, build- trum to avoid interference with other devices when
ing access equipment, industrial sensors, routers, exchanging data.
and switches. The availability of a shielded cable Unlike previous wired technologies for controlling
means that data transfer rates over 1 gigabit per sec- devices in the home, current systems use the existing
ond (Gbps) can routinely be achieved. As a result, Wi-Fi network or their own proprietary communica-
high-quality video and audio can be obtained from tion strategies to control devices, performing security
PoE cameras that provide infrared illumination as or home comfort functions. Wi-Fi follows the IEEE
well as the ability to be remotely controlled. 802.11 set of standards (Institute for Electrical and
Electronics Engineers) and is short for wireless fidelity.
Wireless Communication The early versions of this communication stand-
ard were slower than those in use today. The 1997
Frequency Hopping. As soon as wireless teleg- 802.11 standard could theoretically communicate at
raphy was invented, it was recognized that a need 2 Mbps or 2 Mbps—that is, 2 million “on” or “off”
existed to be able to communicate wirelessly in a signals per second. It is important to remember that
secure fashion so that information could not be over- transmitting each letter from the alphabet uses a
heard by others. To accomplish this, some modern unique pattern of 8 “on” and “off” signals to indicate
transmitters and receivers change tuning frequencies which letter is being sent. We call 8 bits of infor-
up and down the electromagnetic spectrum in mid mation a byte, so each letter from the alphabet uses
transmission. The pattern of frequency changes must one byte of information. Information is transmitted
be known to both the sending and receiving units for in Mbps, or megabits per second. However, data
information to be successfully exchanged. This com- are stored in MB, GB, or TB—that is, megabytes,
munication strategy is known as frequency-hopping gigabytes, or terabytes. This means that an 8 Mbps
spread spectrum (FHSS) communication. data connection is theoretically capable of transmit-
ting 1 million letters from the alphabet per second.
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth. Two commonly used wire-
It is important to note that theoretical transmis-
less protocols, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth, use FHSS to
sion speed can vary widely from actual speeds. An
transmit data securely using technology and meth-
802.11n Wi-Fi router that theoretically can send and
odology that have been in development for a century.
receive information at 300 Mbps may actually move
The protocols and technology of FHSS were origi-
information at a much lower rate, dependent upon
nally proposed in writing by Nikola Tesla in 1903,
electromagnetic interference and the placement of
though not originally called FHSS. The German mil-
obstacles between the transmitter and receiver.
itary used frequency hopping as a means of secure
Longer frequencies of radio waves tend to pene-
communication during the First World War. The
trate obstacles better but have slower data rates. Some
actress Hedy Lamarr and composer George Antheil
standards achieve higher data rates by using shorter fre-
proposed using a frequency-hopping system to guide
quencies of radio waves, however this usually comes at
torpedoes and prevent them from hitting allied ships
a penalty to distance when passing through barriers.
during the Second World War, but their system was
not put into use until the 1960s. Later, the Common- Wireless Home Automation. A wide range of
wealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organiza- home automation products are available for control
tion (CSIRO) in Australia filed patents in 1992 and through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth. The ability to transmit
again in 1996 after unsuccessfully using a refine- and receive data is now sufficiently high to man-
ment of the FHSS principles with newer equipment, age even data-intensive tasks through a wireless
to search for the characteristic signature radio sig- communication protocol. Security cameras and
nals emitted by exploding microscopic black holes. voice command control can be implemented, and
408 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems

environmental controls, smoke detection, lighting,

and autonomous cleaning robots can be controlled
and offer status information.
Examples of home automation companies that
make devices that communicate wirelessly are easy to
find. Google Nest® makes a popular camera that can
recognize faces and automatically zoom in and track
movement to get a better picture. Videos captured by
Nest® cameras are stored to the “cloud” for a monthly
fee, while email alerts can be configured to alert the
homeowner to any intrusion. A two-way conversation
can then be initiated remotely by the homeowner to
deter intruders. Nest® also makes a doorbell that does
many of the same things, notifying the homeowner—
who might be anywhere in the world—that somebody
is at the door. The option then exists to initiate two-way
communication with a visitor or intruder, making it dif-
ficult for the person at the door to determine whether

Courtesy of Craig Trineer

the homeowner is present. Nest® also makes smart
thermostats that program themselves in order to help
save energy. These devices are loaded with occupancy
sensors so that energy may be saved when nobody is
Figure 23-29 A Google Nest® thermostat
home. They can even control the humidity in a home
communicates wirelessly with smoke and carbon
if the required devices are present. Nest® smoke and monoxide alarms when problems are detected.
carbon monoxide (CO) alarms work with Nest® ther-
mostats to display messages once an alarm condition
is triggered, and the homeowner is notified through the homeowner when the garage door is left open
email of a problem (Figure 23-29). The thermostat and once the additional hub is purchased. The device can
the smoke alarms both gently light up a hallway they also remotely close the door via a smartphone-based
are placed in, whenever a person passes the device in app, or just be programmed to close a garage door
darkness. During an emergency, clear verbal directions that has been left open for longer than a user-defined
emanate from the smoke alarms, along with emergency
lighting, to assist the homeowner in getting to safety.

Integrative Technology
The trend for home automation in the age of the
“Internet of things” is to create an integrated device
and software control scheme for lighting, security,
cleaning, or environmental controls. The greatest
benefit to the consumer occurs when companies
allow their devices to communicate and control other
Courtesy of Craig Trineer

companies’ devices. Such partnerships conform to

existing communication standards but also allow
devices like garage door openers to communicate
with smoke/CO alarms, thermostats, and cameras.
The Chamberlain MyQ ® series garage door Figure 23-30 Chamberlain MyQ® series garage
door opener.
openers, like the one shown in Figure 23-30, notify
 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems 409

period of time. The device has a battery pack that set to clean on a regular schedule. These devices are
allows it to operate the door for several days with- packed with sensors and processors, which require
out power. This opener also has motion sensors on regular maintenance that can be easily be performed
the wall control pad that activate lighting if motion with a screwdriver and a cleaning cloth. Step-by-step
is detected in the garage, a handy thing when the maintenance diagrams and videos exist on smart-
homeowner enters the garage at night. phone apps to help the robot owner perform all
In addition to home security options, many peo- required maintenance tasks. Some makers of home
ple are now using robotic cleaning devices, like the robot vacuums also make robots that clean swimming
one shown in Figure 23-31, to vacuum and sweep pools, and still others that clean windows. Robots that
their floors. These devices have developed increas- mow your lawn or vacuum leaves have recently hit
ingly powerful vacuuming abilities in recent years the market, and these will in time be perfected to the
and can perform well on many types of floor sur- degree that the floor vacuums have achieved.
faces. The first generation of these devices were noto-
rious for falling down stairs and smearing any organic Smart Lighting
material they encountered all over people’s homes.
The latest generation combines stair avoidance, spill Nowhere has home automation become more evi-
and organic material detection, and advanced guid- dent than in the burgeoning home lighting market,
ance heuristics to safely and efficiently clean an entire with numerous manufacturers developing smart
multiroom floor of a house with the occasional trip lighting that can be controlled with the ubiquitous
back to the base station to recharge if required. The smartphone apps. Smart lighting can turn on and off
current Internet-connected devices notify the home- and adjust brightness of the light luminaire, with
owner when they complete a cleaning cycle or if they many devices capable of changing the colour of the
get stuck. They can be remotely started at any time or emitted light as well. Small Bluetooth and Wi-Fi
transmitters have even been placed into light bulbs
themselves to do all the things the more expensive
luminaires do. See Figure 23-32. The common
thread that binds these devices together is that they
are all using the same frequency-hopping technolo-
gies first developed in World War II.
The latest developments in home automation
allow homeowners to control all their devices using
only their voice. These devices require a high-speed
Courtesy of Craig Trineer

Courtesy of Craig Trineer

Figure 23-31 A robotic vacuum. Figure 23-32 A smart light luminaire.

410 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems

Internet connection and do not always function well, ultimately decide which technologies survive and
but like all new technologies they will get better if evolve into better versions of what we are using
there is support from the market. Consumers will now, and which ones will be relegated to history.

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

TELEVISION CIRCUIT

1. What depth does the electrode need to be driven for cable and television communica-
tion to provide grounding?

2. What types of boxes are recommended when unshielded lead-in wire is used?

3. What must be provided when installing a television outlet and receptacle outlet in one
wall box?

4. What precautions should you take when installing a television antenna and its lead-in wires?

5. What section of the CEC explains the requirements for cable television antenna
installation?
6. Grounding and bonding together all metal parts of an electrical system and the metal
shield of the cable television cable to the same grounding reference point in a resi-
dence will keep both systems at the same voltage level should a surge, such as light-
ning, occur. If the CATV company installer grounds the metal shield of the incoming
cable (to a house) to a driven ground rod, does this installation conform to the CEC?

7. What does a satellite antenna system consist of?

 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems 411

8. [Circle the correct answer.] All television satellites revolve above Earth in (the same
orbit speed)(different orbital speed).
9. What type of cable is used in today’s time for distribution of the satellite dish signal
throughout the residence?

TELEPHONE SYSTEM

1. How many locations are provided for telephones in the residence?

2. At what height are the telephone outlets mounted?

3. Sketch the symbol for a telephone outlet.

4. Is the telephone system regulated by the CEC?

5. a. Who is to furnish the outlet boxes required at each telephone outlet?

b. Who is to furnish the faceplates?

6. Who does the actual installation of the telephone equipment?

7. The point where the telephone company’s cable enters the residence and the inte-
rior telephone cable wiring meet is called the ______________________________
point.
8. What are the colours contained in a four-conductor telephone cable assembly and
what are they used for?

9. For a three-pair telephone installation what colour represents the second pair?

10. If finger contact was made between the red conductor and green conductor at the
instant a “ring” occurs, what voltage of shock would be felt?
412 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems

DATA SYSTEMS

1. What is the data rate for Ethernet networks as discussed in this unit?

2. What precautions must be taken when installing data cable?

3. Which termination configuration is most commonly used in Canada?

4. What category-rated cables are no longer supported by EIA/TIA?

5. What is the maximum pulling force that may be exerted on a data cable?

6. When supporting data cable, why is it important not to strap or tie the cable too
tightly?

7. What is the minimum radius of the bend of data cable and why?

8. List the factors that affect the connectivity and data transfer rate of wireless network
systems.

9. What other equipment can affect a wireless data network?

10. Give the network speed rates for the following category cables:
a. Category 5e
b. Category 6
c. Category 7a
 UNIT 23 Television, Telephone, Data, and Home Automation Systems 413

HOME AUTOMATION

1. Which system of wired communication in home automation uses the popular Cat 5e
or Cat 6 cables? What advantages does this technology offer?

2. What does FHSS stand for? Explain how it works.

3. List some residential devices that are used in home automation through Wi-Fi or
Bluetooth.
UNIT

24
Lighting Branch Circuit for the Garage
and Outdoor Lighting
RED SEAL Objectives
OCCUPATIONAL After studying this unit, you should be able to
STANDARD
(RSOS)
●● understand the fundamentals of providing
proper lighting in residential garages
For the Red Seal exam, ●● understand the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC)
note that this unit covers requirements for underground wiring, with
the following RSOS tasks: either conduit or underground cable
●● Task A-3 ●● complete the garage circuit wiring diagram
●● Task C-16 ●● discuss typical outdoor lighting, including CEC
●● Task C-17 requirements
●● Task D-22 ●● describe how conduits and cables are brought
through cement foundations to serve loads
●● Task D-24
outside the building structure
●● understand the application of ground-fault
circuit interrupter (GFCI) protection for loads fed
by underground wiring
●● make a proper installation for a residential
overhead garage door opener
●● make a proper installation for a residential
414 central vacuum system
 UNIT 24 Lighting Branch Circuit for the Garage and Outdoor Lighting 415

LIGHTING BRANCH
CIRCUIT
Figure 24-1 shows the receptacle layout for Circuit
B22, which originates at Panel B in the recreation
room and is brought into the receptacle near the side
of the garage. From there, the circuit conductors con-
tinue upward to the ceiling receptacle for the garage
door opener, and back down, as well as to the wall A Keyless B Pull chain

receptacle outlet.
Figure 24-2 Typical lampholders of the type
The garage ceiling’s keyless lampholders (see installed in garages, attics, basements, crawl
Figure 24-2) are controlled from switches located at spaces, and similar locations.
all three entrances to the garage. These two lamp-
holders are fed from Circuit B7, which powers the
attic lights.
The post light feed from Circuit A15 is con-
trolled by a switch in the front entrance, while the Table 24-1
post light turns on and off by a photocell, an integral
part of the light. Garage outlet count and estimated load
(Circuit B22).
The luminaires on the underside around the
garage are controlled by a single pole switch in the VOLT–
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY WATTS AMPERES
residence’s main entrance. These outdoor lumi-
Receptacles @ 3 360 360
naires are not connected to the garage lighting 120 W each
circuit.
Total 3 360 360

All of the wiring in the garage will be concealed

because the rear walls are to be covered with ¾-hour
fire-rated drywall. Table 24-1 summarizes the outlets
and the estimated load for the garage circuit.

RECEPTACLE OUTLETS
At least one receptacle must be installed for
each car space in an attached residential garage
or carport, Rule 26-724 b). The garage in this
residence has two receptacles, and if standard
receptacles are installed, they must be of a tamper-
resistant nature to comply with Rule 26-706.
T h e s e m u s t b e o n a s e p a r a t e c i r c u i t , bu t
the garage door opener and the luminaires
for the garage may be on the same circuit,
Rule 26-656 h). When electricity is provided in a
detached garage, all pertinent CEC rules become
Figure 24-1 Cable layout of both the lighting
and receptacles for the garage circuits. effective and must be followed. These include
rules relating to grounding, lighting outlets,
416 UNIT 24 Lighting Branch Circuit for the Garage and Outdoor Lighting

receptacle outlets, GFCI protection, and so on. Wiring with Type NMWU Cable
Because the 2021 Code requires electric vehicle
charging equipment as directed by the National The plans show that Type NMWU non-metallic-
Building Code of Canada, look for more infor- sheathed cable (Figure 24-5) is used to connect the
mation on electric vehicle charging in Unit 8, post light. The current-carrying capacity (ampacity)
“Service Entrance Equipment.” of NMWU cable is found in CEC Table 2, using the
60°C column. According to Table 19 and Table D1,
NMWU cable
●● is available in sizes from No. 14 AWG through
OUTDOOR WIRING No. 2 (for copper conductors) (see Table 2 for
the ampacity ratings)
If the homeowner requests that 120-volt receptacles
be installed away from the building structure,
●● may be used with non-metallic-sheathed cable
the electrician can provide weatherproof recep­­ fittings
tacle outlets; see Figure 24-3. These must be ●● is suitable for Category 1 and Category 2 loca-
GFCI-protected if within 2.5 m of ground level, tions, Table 19, CEC Section 22
Rule 26-704 2). ●● is moisture- and fungus-resistant
These types of boxes have 16 mm threaded ●● may be buried directly in the earth
openings in which conduit fittings secure the con-
duit “stub-ups” to the box. Any unused openings are ●● may be used for interior wiring in wet, dry, or
closed with plugs that are screwed tightly into the corrosive areas
threads; see Figure 24-4. ●● is installed using the methods for non-metallic-
sheathed cable, Rules 12-500 through 12-526

Low-voltage
decorative
lighting

120- to 12-volt
transformer

Weatherproof
outlets stubbed
out of ground

(Covers
shown
closed)

Covers must be weatherproof with

plug inserted or removed.

Figure 24-3 Weatherproof receptacle outlets stubbed out of the ground: Either low-voltage decorative
lighting or 120-volt PAR luminaires may be plugged into these outlets.
 UNIT 24 Lighting Branch Circuit for the Garage and Outdoor Lighting 417

A When two or more conduits are tightly threaded (or by equally This body is considered to
substantial means) in the device box, the conduit body is considered be adequately supported.
to be adequately supported, Rule 12-3012 2).

This conduit body is not adequately supported by the one conduit This body is not considered to be
B
threaded or glued into the hub. This conduit body could twist adequately supported. If volume
very easily, resulting in damaged insulation on the conductors is greater than 1640 mL, it must be
and a poor ground connection between the conduit and the supported.
conduit body.

C Conductors may be spliced in these conduit bodies. If the conduit Splices may be made in such
body is not marked with its capacity (in millilitres), the box volume conduit bodies when marked
may be calculated and the permissible conductor fill determined with their millilitre capacity.
using the conductor volume found in CEC Table 22.

Figure 24-4 Supporting threaded conduit bodies.

●● must not be used as service entrance cable

●● must not be embedded in concrete, cement, or
aggregate
Bonding
The grounding of equipment fed by Type screw
NMWU cable is accomplished by properly connect-
ing the bare bonding conductor in the cable to the
equipment to be grounded; see Figure 24-6.
Bare equipment
bonding
conductor

or Type NMWU cable

with equipment
bonding conductor

Figure 24-6 How the bare equipment bonding

conductor of a Type NMWU cable is used to bond
Figure 24-5 Type NMWU underground cable. the metal box.
418 UNIT 24 Lighting Branch Circuit for the Garage and Outdoor Lighting

UNDERGROUND WIRING depth of 600 mm (cover), plus the diameter of

the cable, plus 75 mm for screened sand or earth,
Underground wiring is common in such residential Table 53.
applications as decorative landscape lighting and
wiring to post lamps and detached buildings such as 600 mm + Cable diameter + 75 mm
garages or tool sheds. = Required depth
Table 53 shows the minimum depths required Do not backfill a trench with rocks, debris, or
for the various types of wiring methods; see similar coarse material, Rule 12-012 10) and
Figures 24-7A and 24-7B. Rule 12-012 4).
The CEC table specifies the minimum cover Rule 12-012 3) describes methods for the
in millimetres for the three approved wiring mechanical protection of buried conductor, cable,
methods, with further division into nonvehicular or raceway. CEC Appendix B adds two important
and vehicular areas. The term vehicular areas is points:
understood to refer to alleys, residential drive-
ways, and parking lots, as well as streets and 1. Planks should be pressure-treated with penta-
highways. chlorophenol if used to provide protection.
Pay careful attention to the note that specifies 2. Black poly water pipe is acceptable for mechan-
that minimum cover means the distance between ical protection, Rule 12-012 3) e).
the top surface of the conductor and the finished
Rule 12-012 2) indicates that approved mechan-
grade. For example, the basic rule for direct bur-
ical protection can reduce the cover requirements of
ied cable is that the cover must be a minimum of
Table 53 by 150 mm.
600 mm in depth. Thus, the trench must have a

Finished grade, non-vehicular area (750 volts or less)

300 mm

Concrete 450 mm 450 mm

encasement
50 mm thick
600 mm

Rigid or PVC conduit

with mechanical
protection as in
Rule 12-012 3)
Direct burial cable Rigid conduit approved
with armour or for direct burial when
metal sheath not concrete encased

Direct buried cables

Depth to be measured from the top of the buried cable or or conductors. This
conduit to the top of the finished grade, CEC Table 53. is minimum depth
unless protected as
Rule 12-012 2) allows lesser depths when cables or conduits are protected in Rule 12-012 3).
by certain methods such as concrete, but in residential installations, this is not normally done.
The direct burial cable must have at least 75 mm of sand above and below, Rule 12-012 4).

Figure 24-7A Minimum depths for cables and conduits installed underground. See CEC Table 53 for
depths for other conditions.
 UNIT 24 Lighting Branch Circuit for the Garage and Outdoor Lighting 419

Surface of driveway or parking area (750 volts or less)

450 mm

600 mm 600 mm

900 mm

Rigid or PVC conduit,

concrete encased or
with other forms of Rigid or PVC conduit Conductors or cables
mechanical protection listed for direct burial having a metal sheath
and not concrete or armour
encased

Conductors or cables
Depth to be measured from the top of the buried cable or not having a metal
conduit to the top of the finished grade. sheath or armour

Figure 24-7B Depth requirements under residential driveways and parking areas, Rule 12-012.

If metallic conduit is used for underground

Installation of Conduit Underground installations, a metal box is considered to
be properly grounded when attached to a
metallic raceway by acceptable means and
Some specifications require the installation of a separate bonding conductor is pulled through
conduit for all underground wiring, using conduc- the raceway.
tors approved for wet locations, such as Type TW,
TW75, or RW90. For other insulation ratings for
wet locations, see Table 19.
All metal conduit installed underground must Rigid metal conduit for
be protected against corrosion. The manufacturer of underground installations
the conduit and Section 12 of the CEC furnish the
information as to whether the conduit is suitable for Proper locknuts and
direct burial. bushings tightly fastened

When metal conduit is used as the wiring method Figure 24-8 For direct earth burial, the CEC
for an underground installation, the metal boxes, requires that a separate bonding conductor be
post lights, and so on that are connected to the metal installed in all rigid metal conduits, Rule 10-610.
raceways are not considered to be grounded because
the conduit cannot serve as the equipment bonding Figure 24-9, Rule 10-616 1) and also based on over-
conductor, Rule 10-610; see Figure 24-8. current protection, Rule 10-616 3)].
Therefore, a separate bonding conductor is Figure 24-10 shows two methods of bring-
required when either metallic or non-metallic race- ing the conduit into the basement: (1) It can be
ways are installed. The bonding conductor may be run below ground level and then brought through
bare if the length of the run does not exceed 15 m and the basement wall, or (2) it can be run up the
has no more than two quarter bends, or is insulated, side of the building and through the basement
Rule 10-612 3). When an insulated conductor is wall at the ceiling joist level. When the conduit
used, it must be green or green with a yellow stripe. is run through the basement wall, the opening
The size of a bonding conductor is determined from must be sealed to prevent moisture from seeping
the ampacity of the circuit conductors [Table 16, into the basement. The electrician must decide
420 UNIT 24 Lighting Branch Circuit for the Garage and Outdoor Lighting

which of the two methods is more suitable for the

installation.
Section 0 defines a wet location as an area where
Non-metallic electrical equipment will be exposed to liquids that
raceway may drip, splash, or flow against the equipment.
Outdoor luminaires must be constructed so
Separate
equipment that water cannot enter or accumulate in lamphold-
bonding
conductor
ers, wiring compartments, or other electrical parts.
These luminaires must be marked “Suitable for Wet
Figure 24-9 Bonding a metal box with a Locations” or approved for outdoor use.
separate equipment bonding conductor when PVC
The CEC defines partially protected areas,
conduit is used, Rules 10-610 and 10-612.
such as roofed open porches or areas under cano-
pies, as damp locations. Luminaires to be used in
these locations must be marked “Suitable for Damp
Locations.” Many types of luminaires are avail-
able, so be sure to check the approval label on the
luminaire or check with the supplier to determine
the suitability of the luminaire for a wet or damp
location. Figure 24-11 shows an outdoor luminaire
with lamps suitable for damp locations.

Weatherproof
lamp unit,
Rule 30-318 If conduits are run under
X driveways, they must be at least
600 mm deep. See CEC Table 53.
Cables must be 900 mm below grade
if no mechanical protection
is provided, and embedded in at
least 75 mm of sand above and
below, Rule 12-012.
Metal luminaire
and post must
LB conduit
be bonded,
fitting
Rule 10-600 1).

Conduit to protect
cable, Rule 12-518 Box on
ceiling
joist in
basement
Soil

X Backfill, NMWU cable

Rule 12-012 10)
Bushing to
© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

protect
conductors,
Rule 12-012

Sleeve through
foundation sealed
Post may with compound,
or may not Rule 12-018.
be embedded
in concrete.

Figure 24-10 Methods of bringing cable and/or conduit through a concrete wall and/or upward from a
concrete wall into the hollow space within a framed wall.
 UNIT 24 Lighting Branch Circuit for the Garage and Outdoor Lighting 421

Principles of Operation
The overhead door opener contains a motor, gear
reduction unit, motor reversing switch, and electri-
cal clutch. This unit is preassembled and wired by
the manufacturer.
Almost all residential overhead door open-
ers use split-phase, capacitor-start motors in sizes
from ¼ to ½ hp. The motor size depends on the size

Courtesy of Progress Lighting

(weight) of the door to be raised and lowered. If
springs are used to counterbalance the weight of the
door, a small motor with a gear reduction unit can
lift a fairly heavy door.
There are two ways to change the direction of a
Figure 24-11 Outdoor luminaire with lamps. split-phase motor: (1) Reverse the starting winding
with respect to the running winding or (2) reverse
the running winding with respect to the starting
The post in Figure 24-10 may be embedded in winding. Although method (2) is correct, it is not
concrete or not, depending on the consistency of the commonly used. The motor can be run in either
soil, the height of the post, and the size of the light- direction by properly connecting the starting and
ing luminaire. Most electricians prefer to embed running winding leads of the motor to the revers-
the base of the post in concrete to prevent rotting of ing switch. When the motor shaft is connected to a
wood posts and rusting of metal posts. Figure 24-12 chain drive or screw drive, the door can be raised
illustrates some typical post lights. or lowered according to the direction in which the
motor is rotating.
The electrically operated reversing switch can
OVERHEAD GARAGE DOOR be controlled by several means, including push-
OPENER E button stations (marked “open-close-stop,” “up-
The overhead garage door opener in this residence down-stop,” or “open-close”); indoor and outdoor
is plugged into the receptacle provided for this pur- weatherproof pushbuttons; and key-operated sta-
pose on the garage ceiling. The opener is ¼ hp, rated tions. Radio-operated controllers are popular
at 5.8 amperes at 120 volts. The installation of the because they permit overhead doors to be controlled
overhead door will be done by a specially trained from an automobile.
overhead door installer.

All photos: Courtesy of Progress Lighting

Figure 24-12 Post lights.

422 UNIT 24 Lighting Branch Circuit for the Garage and Outdoor Lighting

Wiring of Door Openers CENTRAL VACUUM

SYSTEM K
Wiring overhead door openers for residential use
is quite simple, since these units are completely It is common practice to make provision for a cen-
prewired by the manufacturer. The electrician must tral vacuum system in new homes, and to install it
provide a 120-volt circuit close to where the over- when renovating or upgrading existing homes. The
head door operators are to be installed. This 120-volt ductwork is installed soon after the house is framed
circuit can be wired directly into the overhead and provides a series of centrally located outlets for
door unit, or a receptacle can be provided into vacuuming with the 10 m hose provided with the
which the cord on the overhead door operator is system.
plugged. The outlet for the door opener is normally The system turns on when the hose-end is
placed about 3.2 m in from the centre of the door inserted into the outlet and turns off when the
opening. hose is removed. This is achieved by low-voltage
The pushbuttons used to operate a residential terminals that are built into the outlet. All of the
overhead door opener can be placed in any con- ducts are connected to the main unit, which is
venient location. They are wired with low-voltage located in the garage of this residence so that any
wiring, usually 24 volts; see Figure 24-13. This noise and dust that can escape through the exhaust
is the same type of wire used for wiring bells and will be outside the house. Rule 26-720 l) requires
chimes. From each button, the electrician runs a that a tamper-resistant receptacle be provided for
two-wire, low-voltage cable back to the control each cord-connected central vacuum system. If
unit. Since the residential openers use a simple con- the receptacle is located above 2 m from the floor
trol system, a two-wire cable is all that is necessary or finished grade it does not need to be tamper-
between the operator and the pushbuttons. Com- resistant, Rule 26-706 2).
mercial overhead door openers can require three or A separate branch circuit, B20, feeds the recep-
more conductors. tacle in the garage for the power unit. This circuit
It is desirable to install pushbuttons at each door is required by Rule 26-654 e) and provides power
leading into the garage. The actual connection of for the motor rated at 12 amperes, 120 volts; see
the low-voltage wiring between the controller and Figure 24-14, a typical example of a vacuum
the pushbuttons is a parallel circuit connection; see mounted indoors.
Figure 24-13.

Overhead door operator

Low-voltage
wiring

Remote pushbuttons

Overhead door operator

Courtesy of Jeff Wampler

Low-voltage
wiring

Remote pushbuttons Figure 24-14 The central vacuum system

requires a separate circuit for the unit in the
Figure 24-13 Pushbutton wiring for overhead garage, which is a 1/2 hp motor and draws
door operator. 12 amperes at 120 volts.
 UNIT 24 Lighting Branch Circuit for the Garage and Outdoor Lighting 423

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. Which circuit supplies the garage receptacles and the lighting?

2. What is the circuit rating for the receptacle circuit?
3. How many receptacle outlets are connected to the garage circuit?

4. a. How many cables enter the wall receptacle box located next to the east garage wall?

b. How many circuit conductors enter the ceiling device box?

c. How many bonding conductors enter the ceiling device box?
5. In what location would you use NMWU cable, according to the CEC?

6. What CEC rules would support your answer to Question 5?

7. From how many points in the garage of this residence are the ceiling lights controlled?

8. List three methods by which the cover requirements of CEC Table 53 can be reduced.

9. The total estimated load of the garage receptacle draws how many amperes? Show your
calculations.

10. How high from the floor are the switches and receptacles to be mounted?
424 UNIT 24 Lighting Branch Circuit for the Garage and Outdoor Lighting

11. If the wires for a post light are to be brought into a residence without being brought
above ground, what needs to be done? Use CEC rules to support your answer.

12. Describe the appropriate method of backfilling trenches containing cables, conduits,
and/or direct burial conductors. Quote the CEC rule:

13. In the spaces provided, fill in the minimum cover (depth) for the following residential
underground installations (120/240 volt):
a. Type NMWU in a non-vehicular area with no other protection. mm
b. Type NMWU below the driveway. mm
c. Rigid conduit under the lawn. mm
d. Rigid 240-volt circuit conduit under the driveway. mm
e. NMWU cable in 16 mm conduit between the house
and detached garage. mm
f. TECK cable under the lawn; circuit
is 120 volts, 20 amperes, GFCI-protected. mm
g. TECK cable with an approved plank covering
under the driveway; the circuit is 240 volts AC. mm
h. Rigid non-metallic conduit, concrete-encased (50 mm);
the circuit is 120 volts, 20 amperes, GFCI-protected. mm
i. Rigid conduit embedded in rock and grouted
with concrete to the level of the rock surface. mm
14. What rule of the CEC prohibits embedding type NMWU cable in concrete?

15. What type of motor is generally used for garage door openers?

16. How is the direction of a split-phase motor reversed?

 UNIT

25
Standby Power Systems
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to
●● discuss some of the safety issues concerning
optional standby power systems
●● understand the basics of standby power
●● describe the types of standby power systems RED SEAL
●● identify wiring diagrams for portable and OCCUPATIONAL
standby power systems STANDARD
●● explain transfer switches, disconnecting means, (RSOS)
and sizing recommendations
For the Red Seal exam,
note that this unit covers
the following RSOS tasks:
●● Task B-11
●● Task B-12

425
426 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems

The Need for Power WHY STANDBY (TEMPORARY)

POWER?
This unit provides only a general discussion and
overview of home-type temporary generator Everyone has experienced a power outage,
systems. It is not possible in the available space to sometimes more often than one would like. You
cover all of the variables and details involved with are left in the dark. Your furnace does not operate.
the many types of standby power systems available You are concerned about water pipes freezing in
in the marketplace today. the winter. Your refrigerator and freezer are not
running. Your sump pump is not operating, and
CAUTION: Exhaust gases contain deadly
your basement is flooding. These are all important
carbon monoxide, the same as an automobile
concerns. A standby generator system can address
engine. One 5.5-kilowatt generator produces
many of these concerns.
as much carbon monoxide as six idling auto-
Before selecting a system, a few questions have
mobiles. Carbon monoxide can cause severe
to be answered. In your home, which loads are
nausea, fainting, or death. It is particularly dan-
critical and must continue to operate in the event
gerous because it is an odourless, colourless,
of a utility power outage? You need to know this so
tasteless, nonirritating gas. Typical symptoms
you can select a generator panelboard with adequate
of carbon monoxide poisoning are dizziness,
space for branch circuits. Only you can make this
headache, light-headedness, vomiting, stom-
decision. Another question that must be answered
ach ache, blurred vision, and the inability to
is: How large must the generator be to serve the
speak clearly. If you suspect carbon monoxide
loads that are considered critical in your home? Still
poisoning, remain active. Do not sit down, lie
another question is: How simple or complicated a
down, or fall asleep. Breathe fresh air—fast!
standby system do you want?

Precautions to Follow When

Operating a Generator WHAT Types OF STANDBY
POWER SYSTEMS ARE AVAILABLE?
●● Always install equipment such as generators,
power inlets, transfer switches, and panelboards The Simplest
that are listed by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory. Home supply centres usually carry the simplest
and most economical portable generators, as shown
●● Always carefully read, understand, and follow
in Figure 25-1. These consist of a gasoline-driven
the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
motor/generator set that must be started manually.
●● Always turn off the power when hooking up Some models have the recoil “pull-to-start”
standby systems. Do not work on “live” equipment. feature; others have battery electric start. These are
●● Do not stand in water or have wet hands when the types of portable generators that construction
working on electrical equipment. workers use for temporary power on job sites.
●● Do not touch bare wires. Depending on the size of the fuel tank and the load
being supplied, these smaller generators might
●● Store gasoline only in approved red containers be capable of running for 4 to 8 hours. This type
clearly marked “GASOLINE.” of portable generator is commonly referred to as
●● Do not operate a generator inside a building. backup power.
Operate a portable generator only outside in the These small portable generators consist of a
open air, not close to windows, doors, or other vents. gasoline engine driving a small electrical genera-
Exhaust fumes from the generator could infiltrate tor, just like a gasoline engine drives the blades of
your house or a neighbour’s house. a lawn mower or snow thrower. Some generator sets
Death is just around the corner when the above have one or more standard 15- or 20-ampere single
warnings are not heeded! or duplex grounding-type receptacles, some have
 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems 427

Portable
generator

Sump
Cord (2-wire plus pump
equipment ground)

Figure 25-1 A portable generator serving standby power to a 120-volt sump pump.

ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles, power inlet receptacle. This cord and the generator
and others have 20- and 30-ampere twist-lock-type are set up as needed.
receptacles. Some are rated 120 volts, whereas The permanent wiring part of the installation
others are rated 120/240 volts. These generators involves connecting specific branch circuits to a
are available in sizes up to about 7000 watts. Also separate generator panelboard (usually located right
available are models with more bells and whistles, next to the main panelboard), installing and properly
such as oil alerts, adjustable output voltage, larger connecting a transfer switch (discussed later), and
fuel tanks, and so on. installing a power inlet receptacle (also discussed
The procedure for this type is to start up the later). The generator panelboard serves those
generator and then plug an extension cord into the circuits that you have selected as critical to operate
receptacle and run it to whatever critical cord-and- in the event of a power outage. This panelboard is
plug-connected load needs to operate. If you are sometimes referred to as a generator panelboard, an
not home when a power outage occurs, you are out emergency panelboard, and sometimes as a critical
of luck! load panelboard (Figure 25-3).
These are gasoline-powered generators that use
The Next Step Up a flexible four-wire rubber cord (No. 12 AWG for
5000-watt generators, No. 10 AWG for 7500-watt
Standby home generator systems are available in generators) that plugs into a polarized twistlock
both permanent wiring and cord-and-plug-connected receptacle on the generator. The other end of the
wiring. The cord-and-plug-connected system is cord plugs into a polarized twistlock receptacle
by far the most popular when it comes to standby mounted on the outside of the house in a weather-
power for homes. In the event of a power outage, proof power inlet box. This polarized twistlock recep-
you must manually start the generator, flip the trans- tacle is permanently connected to transfer equipment
fer switching device over from normal power to or to a special electrical generator panelboard in
standby power, and plug in the power “patch” cord which the critical branch circuits are connected. The
(Figure 25-2). The cord-and-plug-connected part of generator panelboard will have a transfer mecha-
the installation consists of merely a flexible power nism, and from 4 to 20 branch-circuit breakers; it
patch cord that runs between the generator and the all depends on the wattage rating of the generator.
428 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems

Utility
power Critical load panelboard
Generator
Main located at .. A
service Equipment
ground bus
Main
disconnect

Main fuses
2P
40A B Isolated neutral bus
A 3-pole transfer switch or equipment coordinated
Neutral bus with generator for separately derived system
Switched
Main bonding neutral B Feeder with equipment bonding conductor
jumper
Power WARNING: Warning sign required at inlet to
Equipment indicate the connection is for a
inlet For connec
ground bus bonded neutral generator system
Grounding
electrode (separately derived).
conductor
Grounding Cord (3-wire or 4-wire,
electrode depending on whether
generator is 120 volts
or 120/240 volts)

15 kW and smaller portable generator

with neutral bonded to the frame.
Also suitable for “stand alone” use as
GFCI and line-to-ground protection can
function through fault-return path.

Figure 25-2 A portable generator supplies standby power to a critical load panelboard. The circuit
breakers in the critical load panelboard must be manually turned to the temporary power position. These
breakers are equipped with a mechanical interlock so there will be no feedback of electricity between the
generator power and the utility normal power.

Some generator panelboards have the polarized twist- neutral from a portable generator must be switched.
lock receptacle mounted as part of and just below the These breakers serve as the transfer switching
generator panelboard. means. Only one breaker can be in the ON posi-
During normal operation, this generator panel- tion at a time. One of these breakers brings the
board is fed from a two-pole circuit breaker in the normal power to the generator panelboard. The
main panelboard. This two-pole breaker might be second breaker brings the power from the gen-
rated 30, 40, 50, or 60 amperes, depending on the erator to the generator panelboard. When one
number of critical branch circuits to be supplied. breaker is turned off, the other is turned on. This
When utility power is lost, this generator panelboard panelboard will have four or more branch-circuit
is fed from the generator. When the electric util- breakers (Fig­­ures 25-2 and 25-3).
ity loses power, you must manually turn the trans- With this system, the procedure generally is to
fer switch from its normal power position to its first plug the four-wire cord into the polarized twist-
temporary power position. lock receptacle on the generator, plug the other end
One manufacturer of electrical equipment into the power inlet receptacle, and then start the
furnishes a panelboard that contains two circuit generator, which is always located outdoors. The
breakers that are mechanically interlocked. These transfer switch in the generator panelboard is then
are required to be three-pole breakers because the switched to the GEN position.
 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems 429

Utility
power Critical load panelboard
Generator
Main located at .. A
service Equipment
ground bus
Main
disconnect

Main fuses
2P
40A B Isolated neutral bus
A 2-pole transfer switch or equipment coordinated
Neutral bus with generator with floating neutral
Solid neutral
Main bonding connection B Feeder with equipment bonding conductor
jumper
Power WARNING: Warning sign required at inlet to
Equipment indicate the connection is for a
inlet For connec
ground bus generator having a floating neutral
Grounding
electrode system (nonseparately derived)
conductor
Grounding Cord (3-wire or 4-wire,
electrode depending on whether
generator is 120 volts
or 120/240 volts)

15 kW and smaller portable generator

that has a “floating neutral” system.
Floating neutral generators should not be
used in “stand alone” operation as GFCI
and line-to-ground protection cannot
function.

Figure 25-3 A critical load panelboard served by normal power from the main service panelboard.
A portable generator is shown plugged into the power inlet. To switch to standby power, the circuit
breakers in the critical load panelboard must be manually turned to the standby position. These breakers
are equipped with a mechanical interlock so there will be no feedback of electricity between the generator
power and the utility normal power.

When normal power is restored, turn the

transfer switch in the generator panelboard back to
its normal position, turn off the generator according
to the manufacturer’s instructions, unplug the power
cord from the generator, and finally, unplug the
other end of the cord from the power inlet recep-
tacle. See Figure 25-4 for an example of a weather-
proof inlet fitting for connection of the flexible cord
from the generator.
Courtesy of Kohler Power Systems

STANDARD REQUIREMENTS
FOR STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS
Two standards are used in North America: Canadian
Standards Association CSA C22.2 No. 100-14, enti-
FIGURE 25-4 An inlet fitting for connection of a
tled “Motors and Generators,” and UL safety stan- flexible cord from a portable generator.
dard UL 2201, entitled “Portable Engine-Generator
430 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems

Assemblies.” Both standards are very similar. Stan- 1. “The generator is considered a separately
dards change, so we should always refer to the latest derived system in accordance with ANSI/NFPA
CSA C22.2 No. 100-14 update before any installa- 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).” The
tion. For the purpose of our discussion, we will refer term separately derived system as defined in
to UL 2201. The Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Article 100 means that the transfer equip-
counterpart in the United States is the National ment must break all system conductors from
Electrical Code (NEC). the generator, including the neutral, as per CEC
The guide card information for the standard Rule 28-900. This rule is in place to prevent the
in the UL White Book in the category “Engine equipment ground conductor from being in paral-
Generators for Portable Use (FTCN)” reads: lel with the neutral and carrying neutral current.
Normally, this rule would require the generator
This category covers internal-combustion
to be grounded at the source. CEC Rule 10-212
engine-driven generators rated 15 kW or less,
deals with grounding connections for AC systems.
250 volt or less, which are provided only with
receptacle outlets for the AC output circuits. The 2. “The generator is intended to be connected
generators may incorporate alternating or direct- through permanently installed Listed transfer
current generator sections for supplying energy equipment that switches all conductors other
to battery-charging circuits. than the equipment ground conductor.” The
installation of transfer equipment that switches
When a portable generator is used to supply a
all conductors, including the grounded or
building wiring system:
neutral conductor, is the deciding factor in
1. The generator is considered a separately derived determining that the system is in fact a sepa-
system in accordance with the CEC and ANSI/ rately derived system. Once again, separately
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). derived systems are generally required to have
2. The generator is intended to be connected the neutral grounded (connected to earth) at
through permanently installed Listed transfer the source. This is not the case for portable
equipment that switches all conductors other generators.
than the equipment grounding conductor. 3. “The frame of a Listed generator is connected
3. The frame of a Listed generator is connected to the equipment-ground conductor and the
to the equipment-grounding conductor and grounded (neutral) conductor of the generator.
the grounded (neutral) conductor of the gen- When properly connected to a premises
erator. When properly connected to a prem- or structure, the portable generator will be
ises or structure, the portable generator will connected to the premises or structure ground-
be connected to the premises or structure ing electrode for its ground reference.” These
grounding electrode for its ground reference. connections ensure that a ground-fault return
path is established back to the source, which
4. Portable generators used other than to power
is the generator winding. Be very cautious
building structures are intended to be con-
when selecting a generator. Some manufactur-
nected to ground in accordance with the NEC.*
ers produce generators with a floating neutral.
The safety standard adds to or supplements As a result, it is impossible for an overcurrent
requirements in the CEC/CSA and NEC.† Let’s look device to operate on a ground fault because
at these UL rules one by one. no circuit for fault current can be established.
The connection of the neutral and equipment
ground conductor to the frame of the generator
*
Reprinted from the White Book with permission from Under­ is required. See CEC Rule 10-214 2) c).
writers Laboratories Inc. ® Copyright © 2010 Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.® 4. “Portable generators used other than to power
†
Reprinted from the White Book with permission from Under­ building structures are intended to be con-
writers Laboratories Inc. ® Copyright © 2010 Underwriters nected to ground in accordance with the NEC.”
Laboratories Inc.®
 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems 431

This sentence might better be read as “Porta- Standby power is a system that allows you to
ble generators used other than to power build- safely provide electrical power to your home in the
ing structures are intended to be connected to event of a power outage. Instead of running extension
ground (grounded).” The NEC contains special cords from a portable generator located outside the
requirements for grounding of portable gen- house to critical loads (lights, sump pumps, refrig-
erators in 250.34. The CEC requires ground- erators, etc.), you select the branch circuits that you
ing for connections of an AC system that the feel are critical or essential to satisfactorily operate
portable generator delivers. CEC Rule 10-214 your home electrical system. These branch circuits
covers this grounding issue. As long as the gen- are placed in a panelboard that will be transferred to
erator supplies loads only through receptacles the generator in the event of a power outage from the
mounted on the generator and the equipment electric utility. The diagrams in this unit show this.
grounding conductor is connected to the gener- The generator for this type of system is per-
ator frame, the frame of the portable generator manently installed on a concrete pad at a suitable
is not required to be connected to a grounding location outside the home that is convenient for mak-
electrode. ing up all of the electrical connections to serve the
When connected to the service-supplied electri- selected critical loads. These systems generally run
cal system by cord-and-plug connection, the equip- on natural gas (Figure 25-5) or propane (liquid petro-
ment grounding conductor serves as a ground or earth leum gas—LPG), and in rare cases, on diesel fuel. All
reference for the electrical system because the con- of the conductors between the generator, the transfer
ductor is extended to the windings of the generator. switch, and the generator panelboard installed for the
selected critical loads are permanently wired.
CAUTION:  If you intend to have a GFCI The automatic transfer switch monitors the
breaker–protected branch circuit transferred to incoming electric utility’s voltage. Should a power
the generator panelboard, be sure to connect outage occur, the standby generator automatically
this circuit to a GFCI breaker in the generator starts, the transfer switch “transfers,” and the
panelboard. selected loads continue to function. When normal
Because GFCIs and AFCIs require a neutral power is restored, the transfer switch automatically
conductor, make sure the neutral conductor is prop- “transfers” back to the normal power source, and
erly connected between the main panelboard neutral the generator shuts down. Because the fuel supply
bus and the neutral bus in the critical panelboard. is a permanently installed natural gas line, these
The neutral bus in the generator panelboard is systems can run indefinitely in conformance with
insulated from the generator panelboard enclosure. the manufacturer’s specifications.
The ground bus in the generator panelboard To be totally automatic, an electronic controller
is bonded to the generator panelboard enclosure. that is part of the transfer switch immediately senses
Standby generators of this type can have run times the loss of normal power and “tells” the standby gen-
as long as 16 hours. Again, it depends on the load- erator to start and “tells” the transfer switch to transfer
ing. The manufacturer’s installation and operating from normal power to standby power. This controller
instructions will provide this information. senses when normal power is restored, allowing the
To see a demonstration on how to connect transfer switch to return to normal power and to shut
a home meter base to a standby generator, visit off the standby generator. All of the circuitry is reset,
[Link] and click on the Gener- and it is now ready for the next power interruption.
Link tab. From there, you can see how it works.
WIRING DIAGRAMS FOR A
Permanently Installed Generator TYPICAL STANDBY GENERATOR
A permanently installed generator is truly standby For simplicity, the diagrams in Figures 25-6 and
power. These types of generator systems are covered 25-7 are one-line diagrams. Actual wiring consists
under UL 2200 and CSA C22.2 No. 100-14. of two ungrounded conductors and one grounded
432 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems

Courtesy of Kohler Power Systems

Figure 25-5 A natural gas-fuelled generator.

Utility
power

S IGN
Main Transfer Panelboard for
service switch critical loads
Branch
Main circuits to
DPDT
disconnect critical
loads
Main fuses

60A

Neutral bus
Main bonding
jumper
Equipment
Neutral bus Equipment
ground
(isolated from ground
bus
Grounding metal enclosure) bus
electrode
conductor Separation of control
Grounding circuit wiring required
electrode
Solid neutral bus

The bonding jumper at the

generator must be removed if a
2-pole transfer switch is used
for a 120/240 volt,1-phase
generator
G

Generator

Figure 25-6 A natural gas-driven generator connected through a transfer switch. The transfer switch is in
the normal power position. Power to the critical load panelboard is through the main service panelboard,
then through the transfer switch.
 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems 433

Utility
power

S IGN
Main Transfer Panelboard for
service switch critical loads
Branch
Main circuits to
DPDT
disconnect critical
loads
Main fuses

60A

Neutral bus
Main bonding
jumper
Equipment
Neutral bus Equipment
ground
(isolated from ground
bus
Grounding metal enclosure) bus
electrode
conductor Separation of control
Grounding circuit wiring required
electrode by NEC 725.136
Solid neutral bus

The bonding jumper at the

generator must be removed if a
2-pole transfer switch is used
for a 120/240 volt,1-phase
generator
G

Generator

Figure 25-7 A natural gas-driven generator connected through a transfer switch. The transfer switch is in
the standby position, feeding power to the critical load panelboard.

“neutral” conductor. The neutral bus in a panelboard Manufacturers of generators in most cases do
that serves selected loads must not be connected to not connect the generator neutral conductor lead
the metal panelboard enclosure. Connecting the neu- to the metal frame of the generator. Instead, they
tral conductor, the grounding electrode conductor, connect it to an isolated terminal. Then it is up to
and the equipment grounding conductors together is you to determine how to connect the generator in
permitted only in the main service panelboard, CEC compliance with local electrical codes.
Rule 10-214. The generator neutral shall be solidly Most inspectors will permit the internal neutral
connected to the normal supply isolated neutral bond in a portable generator to remain in place. In
bus in the transfer switch. The neutral shall not be fact, when you purchase a portable generator, you
switched. should insist that the neutral-to-case bond be in place.
If you were to bond the neutral conductor and the Without the bond, an overcurrent device cannot func-
metal enclosures of the equipment (panelboard, trans- tion on a ground fault because a return path does not
fer switch, and generator) together beyond the main exist. For permanently installed generators, inspec-
service panelboard, you would create a parallel path. A tors will generally not permit a bond between the gen-
parallel path means that some of the normal return cur- erator neutral and the metal frame of the generator.
rent and fault current will flow on the grounded neutral A sign must be placed at the service entrance
conductor and some will flow on the metal raceways main panelboard indicating where the standby gen-
and other enclosures. This is not a good situation! erator is located and what type of standby power it is,
434 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems

Rule 84-030. As required (Rules 10-610 and 10-612), listed portable generators, a three-pole, double-
an equipment bonding conductor shall be installed with throw transfer switch or equipment is required.
the circuit conductors to bond all non-current-carrying For permanently installed generators, either a
metal parts of the installation, including generator two-pole or three-pole transfer switch or equipment is
frame, transfer switch, and main service panelboard. permitted as long as the generator-produced electrical
The total time for complete transfer to standby system is coordinated with the transfer equipment.
power is approximately 45 to 60 seconds. Two-pole transfer switches or equipment do
To further give the homeowner assurance that not break the “neutral” conductor of a 120/240-volt
the standby generator will operate when called on, single-phase system. Technically speaking, this type of
some systems provide automatic “exercising” of the system is a nonseparately derived system. A nonsepa-
system periodically, such as once every 7 or 14 days rately derived system is properly grounded through
for a run time of 7 to 15 minutes. the grounding electrode system of the normal prem-
ises wiring at the service equipment. A system where
CAUTION:  When an automatic type of stand-
the neutral is disconnected by the transfer switch is
by power system is in place and set in the
referred to as a separately derived system and must
automatic mode, the engine may crank and
be regrounded. Separately derived systems are com-
start at any time without warning. This would
mon in commercial and industrial installations and are
occur when the utility power supply is lost. To
required for connection of portable generators.
prevent possible injury, be alert, aware, and
If a transfer switch is connected on the line side of
very careful when working on the standby gen-
the main service disconnect, it must be listed as being
erator equipment or on the transfer switch.
suitable for use as service equipment. In Figures 25-5
Always turn the generator disconnect to the
and 25-6, the transfer switch is not on the line side
OFF position, then lock out and tag out the
of the main service disconnect and therefore does not
switch, warning others not to turn the switch
have to be listed for use as service equipment.
back to ON. In the main panelboard, locate the
A transfer switch must be a “break before
circuit breaker that supplies the transfer equip-
make.” Without the break-before-make feature,
ment, turn it to OFF, then lock out and tag out
a dangerous situation is present and could lead to
the circuit breaker feeding the transfer switch.
destruction of the generator, personal injury, or
death. If the transfer switch does not separate the
utility line from the standby power line, utility work-
TRANSFER SWITCHES
ers working on the line could be seriously injured.
OR EQUIPMENT
For low-cost, nonautomatic transfer systems, the
A transfer switch or equipment shifts electrical transferring means might consist of 2 two-pole or
power from the normal utility power source to the three-pole circuit breakers that are mechanically
standby power source. A transfer switch isolates the interlocked so both cannot be on at the same time.
utility source from the standby source in such a way
that there is no feedback from the generator to the Capacity and Ratings of Transfer
utility’s system, or vice versa. When normal power Equipment
is restored, the automatic transfer switch resets itself
and is ready for the next power outage. The rating of the transfer switch must be capable
Transfer switches or equipment for typical of safely handling the load to be served. Otherwise,
residential applications might have ratings of 40 to the transfer switch could get hot enough to cause
200 amperes. Some have wattmeters for balancing a fire. This is nothing new; it is the same hazard
generator loads. as overloading a conductor. Specific rules on the
For home installations, transfer switches may capacity of the generator are dependent on the type
be three-pole double throw (TPDT) or double-pole, of the transfer switch used, as follows:
double throw (DPDT), depending on how the type 1. If manual transfer equipment is used, an op­tional
of system is being installed. As stated above for standby system is required to have adequate
 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems 435

capacity and rating for the supply of all equip- When the normal power main service discon-
ment intended to be operated at one time. The necting means is located inside the home, CEC
user of the optional standby system is permitted Rules 84-024 and 28-900 require that a discon-
to select the load that is connected to the system. nect for the standby power from the generator be
2. If automatic transfer equipment is used, an installed near the main service equipment.
optional standby system must comply with Having one disconnecting means inside the
parts (a) or (b): home and another outside the home presents quite
a challenge for firefighters or others wanting to
a. Full Load. The standby source shall be capa-
totally shut off the power to the home. This is why
ble of supplying the full load that is trans-
Rule 84-030 requires that a sign be placed at the
ferred by the automatic transfer equipment.
service entrance equipment that indicates the type
b. Load Management. If a system is employed and location of on-site optional standby power
that will automatically manage the con- sources.
nected load, the standby source must have a
capacity sufficient to supply the maximum
load that will be connected by the load man-
agement system. GENERATOR SIZING
RECOMMENDATIONS
A transfer switch must also be capable of safely
interrupting the available fault current that the gen- No matter what type or brand of generator you pur-
erator or utility is capable of delivering. Listed trans- chase, you will have to size it properly. There is
fer switches or equipment may be provided with or no better way to do this than to follow the manu-
without integral overcurrent protection. The suit- facturer’s recommendations. Generators for home
ability of listed transfer equipment for interrupting use are generally rated in watts. The manufacturer
or withstanding short-circuit current is marked on of the generator has taken into consideration that:
the transfer equipment. Watts = Volts × Amperes. Some manufacturers
A typical transfer switch might take 10 to 15 suggest that after adding up all of the loads to be
seconds to start the generator. This eliminates nui- picked up by the generator, another 20% capacity
sance start-ups during momentary utility power out- should be added for future loads.
ages. After start-up, another 10- to 15-second delay As stated earlier, the type of transfer switch
is provided to allow the voltage to stabilize. After installed determines the minimum capacity required
start-up and warm-up, full transfer takes place. Sim- for the generator. If a manual transfer switch or
ilar time-delay features are used for the return to equipment is installed, a generator is required to
normal power. Some systems can do the full transfer have capacity for all of the equipment intended to
in a few seconds. be operated at one time. The user of the optional
standby system is permitted to select the load con-
nected to the system.
DISCONNECTING MEANS If the generator is supplied with an automatic
transfer switch or equipment, it is required to be
A disconnecting means is required for a generator. capable of supplying the full load that is trans-
Rule 84-020 states: “Disconnecting means shall ferred by the automatic transfer equipment. A load
be provided to disconnect simultaneously all management system is permitted to be installed, in
ungrounded conductors of any electric power which case the generator must be sized not smaller
production source of an interconnected system than required to supply the maximum load that the
from all circuits supplied by the electric power load management system will allow for it to be con-
production source equipment.” Most electrical nected to the equipment.
inspectors will allow the cord-and-plug connec- Resistive loads such as toasters, heaters, and
tion for a portable generator to serve as the dis­ lighting do not have an initial high inrush surge of
con­necting means. current. Motors, on the other hand, do have a high
436 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems

inrush surge of starting current, which lasts for Permits

only a few seconds until the motor gets up to speed.
This inrush must be taken into consideration when Permanently installed generators require a considerable
selecting a generator. amount of electrical work and gas line piping. The
Table 25-1 shows some typical approximate installation will require applying for a permit so that
wattage requirements for household loads. For proper inspection by the authorities can be made.
heating-type appliances, the typical operat-
ing wattage values are used. For motor-operated Sound Level
appliances, the starting wattage values should be
used. Verify actual wattage ratings by checking Because generators produce a certain level of noise
the nameplate on the appliance. Verify that the (decibels) when running, you will want to check
connected loads do not exceed the generator’s with your local building authority to make sure the
marked capacity. Most generators are capable of generator you choose is in compliance with local
handling a momentary inrush of an extra 50% of codes relative to any sound ordinance that might be
their rating. Here again, check the manufacturer’s applicable. Sound-level information is provided by
specifications. manufacturers in their descriptive literature.

Table 25-1
Approximate typical wattage requirements for appliances.
TYPICAL OPERATING WATTAGE STARTING WATTAGE
APPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS REQUIREMENTS
Blender 600 700
Broiler 1600 1600
Central air conditioner
10 000 BTU 1500 4500
20 000 BTU 2500 7500
24 000 BTU 3800 11 000
32 000 BTU 5000 15 000
40 000 BTU 6000 18 000
Coffeemaker 900–1750 900–1750
CD player 50–100 50–100
Clothes dryer
Electric 5000 @ 240 volts 6500
Gas 700 2200
Computer 300–800 300–800
Curlers 50 50
Dehumidifier 250 350
Dishwasher 1500 2500
Electric
Drill 250–750 300–900
Frying pan 1300 1300
Blanket 50–200 50–200
Space heater 1,650 1,650
Water heater 4500–8000 @ 240 volts 4500–8000 @ 240 volts
Electric range
6-in. surface unit 1500 1500
8-in. surface unit 2100 2100

(continued)
 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems 437

Table 25-1 (Continued )

TYPICAL OPERATING WATTAGE STARTING WATTAGE
APPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS REQUIREMENTS
Oven 4500 4500
Lights: Add wattage of bulbs Add wattage of bulbs
Furnace fan
1/8 horsepower motor 300 900
1/6 horsepower motor 500 1500
1/4 horsepower motor 600 1800
1/3 horsepower motor 700 2100
1/2 horsepower motor 875 2650
Garage door opener
1/3 horsepower 725 1400
1/4 horsepower 550 1100
Hair dryer 300–1650 300–1650
Iron 1200 1200
Microwave oven 700–1500 1000–2300
Radio 15 to 500 (with components) 15 to 500
Refrigerator 700–1000 2200
Security, home 25–100 25–100
Sump pump
1/3 horsepower 800 2400
1/2 horsepower 1050 3150
Television 300 300
Toaster
Four-slice 1500 1500
Two-slice 950 950
Automatic washer 1150 3400
Well pump motor
1/3 horsepower 800 2400
1/2 horsepower 1050 3150
1 horsepower 1920 @ 240 volts 5500
Vacuum cleaner 1100 1600
VCR 150–250 150–250
Window fan 200 300

REVIEW

Note: Refer to the CEC or the blueprints provided with this textbook when necessary. Where applicable,
responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. The basic safety rule when working with electricity is to ________________________.

2. When using a disconnecting means to a generator, how shall the ungrounded conductors
be arranged to meet the requirements of the Canadian Electrical Code?_______________

438 UNIT 25 Standby Power Systems

3. [Circle the correct answer.] The best advice to purchase is to always use the (listed)
(cheapest) (smallest) equipment.
4. How would you define the term standby power? ______________________________
5. Describe in simple terms the three types of standby power systems.



6. Briefly explain the function of a transfer switch.



7. [Circle the correct answer.] When a transfer switch transfers to standby power, the
electrical connection inside the switch
a. maintains connection to the normal power supply as it makes connection to the
standby power supply.
b. breaks the connection to the normal power supply before it makes connection to
the standby power supply.
8. [Circle the correct answer.] A typical nonseparately derived transfer switch for resi-
dential application is
a. three-pole, double-pole switch (TPDT).
b. double-pole, double-throw switch (DPDT).
c. single-pole, double-throw switch (SPDT).
d. double-pole, single-throw switch (DPST).
9. The CEC requires that a __________________________________ means be pro-
vided for standby power systems. In the case of portable gen sets, this might be as
simple as pulling out the plug on the extension cord that is plugged into the receptacle
on the gen set. For permanently installed standby power generators, this might be on
the gen set and/or separately provided inside or outside the home.
10. Using the Table 25-1 wattage requirements, calculate the size of the generator required
for this home to power the following:
a. coffeemaker ________
b. furnace motor ________
c. refrigerator ________
d. 1 hp well pump ________
e. sump pump 1/3 hp ________
f. electric range, 6 in. surface unit ________
 UNIT

26
Alternative Energy
Systems
Objectives
After studying this unit, you should be able to
●● discuss and contrast the operational
characteristics, limitations, and potential hazards
associated with various alternative power
systems RED SEAL
●● differentiate between grid-tied and standalone OCCUPATIONAL
power systems STANDARD
●● discuss the requirements for installation of
(RSOS)
various alternative energy systems For the Red Seal exam,
●● understand the maintenance requirements of note that this unit covers
various alternative energy systems the following RSOS task:
●● identify the components of a residential ●● Task B-13
utility-interactive solar photovoltaic system
●● recognize the electrical hazards unique to solar
photovoltaic systems

439
440 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems

Homes that produce electricity either for their own Feed-In Tariff (MicroFIT)
consumption or to add power to the electrical grid and Net Metering across
without emitting greenhouse gases are said to have Canada
alternative energy sources installed. These homes
have an alternative to getting electricity from the In regions where grid-tied distributed genera-
grid of wires that connect all the homes and busi- tion is permitted, the electricity produced locally
nesses in Canada to supply electrical power. When can aid the utility during periods of peak demand.
equipment is installed in an off-grid residence, it is Table 26-1 shows the payout rates for Ontario’s
said to be for a remote power application. Remote microfit program in 2017. In Ontario, where a feed-
power systems either must produce more power in tariff (FIT) program exists, all electricity gen-
than is consumed or must have a battery system to erated must go to the utility. Ontario’s microFIT
store surplus power when it is available to be used program is designed for systems 10 kilowatts or less
when cyclic loads like refrigerators, freezers, wells, in size and guarantees a rate of pay for a 20-year
or sump pumps switch on. The maintenance and life term for solar- and wind-based electrical systems;
cycle of batteries must be factored into any installa- a 40-year guaranteed term exists for water-based
tion that requires them. systems. The electricity contributed by these distrib-
When on-site equipment feeds power back into uted generation systems is subtracted from the con-
the electrical grid, this is considered to be a distrib- sumer’s utility bill, and in the event that it exceeds
uted generation system and can be used as a source the electricity consumed, a refund will be sent to the
of revenue for a homeowner. home or business owner.

Table 26-1
FIT/microFIT price schedule (January 1, 2017).
Renewable Fuel Project Size Tranche* Price (¢/kWh) Percentage Escalated**

Solar (PV) (Rooftop) < 6 kW 31.1 0%

. 6 kW < 10 kW 28.8 0%
. 10 kW < 100 kW 22.3 0%
. 100 kW < 500 kW 20.7 0%
Solar (PV) (Non-Rooftop) < 10 kW 21.0 0%
. 10 kW < 500 kW 19.2 0%
On-Shore Wind < 500 kW 12.5 20%
Water Power < 500 kW 24.1 20%
Renewable Biomass < 500 kW 17.2 50%
On-Farm Biogas < 100 kW 25.8 50%
< 10 kW < 250 kW 20.0 50%
Biogas < 500 kW 16.5 50%
Landfill Gas < 500 kW 16.8 50%

*
The FIT Program is available to Projects generally ≤ 500 kW.
**
The Percentage Escalated is the percentage of the Contract Price (indicated in this chart and to be reflected, as applicable, on the FIT Con-
tract Cover Page).
-
Independent Electricity System Operator (IESO), FIT/microFIT PRICE SCHEDULE (January 1, 2017). [Link] participants/ieso-news/2016/09/fit-microfit-price-
schedule-for-2017-now-available. Program is closed to new applications and prices are historic.
 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems 441

In Ontario, the rate of pay per kilowatt hour Commission recently stopped accepting new
(kWh) of electricity generated to the homeowner of applications for this program but continues to
these systems is initially much higher than the cost to process already accepted ones.
consumers of a kWh supplied by the utility. This helps ●● Saskatchewan is approaching the 16 MW cap
shorten the ROI, or return on investment, to incen- it imposed for new projects on its net metering
tivize consumers to adopt greenhouse gas–friendly program, so it will soon offer no more incen-
power sources. For this reason, microFIT systems tives until it completes a review of the program.
may not have batteries installed to store the energy It does pay out for excess energy generated at
produced at a residence. This prevents the homeowner the same rate it charges for electricity on exist-
from charging their backup batteries from the utility ing installations.
at 7.7¢/kWh and then selling it back to the electrical
●● Manitoba offered $1 per watt of installed photo-
utility at 28.8¢/kWh. As a result, when the power goes
voltaic systems until May 2018 when it discon-
out due to a storm, homes tied in to a microFIT sys-
tinued incentives until 2022 at least. The utility
tem also lose power despite having their own power
still pays out at 7.67 cents per kWh produced
generation system on premises. The inverter of any
above that consumed. This money is frequently
alternative energy system that is grid-tied must have
used to pay back the loan for the photovoltaic
“anti-islanding” capabilities to prevent an installation
(PV) array installation.
from backfeeding the grid. The term anti-islanding
means that an inverter must automatically turn off AC ●● Yukon applies excess energy to the home-
output when utility power is lost; this feature prevents owner’s bill in the form of credits that can be
an inverter from supplying electricity into the utility redeemed for cash if they exceed consumption
grid when there is an outage. at the end of the year. It also offers $800 per
Various other energy programs exist across Can- kilowatt installation incentives up to $5000.
ada. They are usually referred to as net metering and ●● The net metering systems in Quebec, New
are similar in scope and size to the FIT program in Brunswick, Newfoundland, Nunavut, North-
Ontario. Net metering may or may not pay consum- west Territories, and PEI pay credits for the
ers for their energy contributions to the grid. energy contributed but do not pay out cash.
In general, different rebates and incentives exist ●● The abundant hydroelectric power in Quebec
for residential, commercial, and agricultural renew-
has resulted in a low cost of electricity in Que-
able installations, with funding distributed among
bec, so there are currently no specific incentives
wind, solar, micro hydro, geothermal, tidal, and
for solar installation, but some other tax credits
biomass installations that vary by province. Fund-
can be applied to solar installations.
ing may derive from municipal, regional, provincial,
or federal programs, as well as from commercially ●● New Brunswick offers rebates that vary with the
offered sources, and they change constantly, so the size of the installation and can give the home-
most recent information should be obtained before owner up to 30 cents per kilowatt as a rebate.
planning any project. Focusing on the solar incen- ●● Nova Scotia calls its program enhanced net
tives across Canada for the residential market, we can metering for individuals and COMFIT for com-
see the different approaches used by each province munities. It too gives credit on the bill, but at the
and territory in accordance with their vision of the end of the year pays out any surplus that may
future of energy production for their region. be generated over what was used for the year
●● In British Columbia, a net metering program at the current rate for the utility. Nova Scotia
gives homeowners with excess power 9.99¢/ offers a 60 cent per kilowatt rebate to eligible
kWh for the electricity they put into the grid. consumers, which can cover up to 16% of the
total cost, with a maximum payout of $6000.
●● Alberta has a net billing program, and the gov-
ernment offers rebates on the installation costs ●● In Prince Edward Island, the incentives cover
of installed solar arrays of 75 cents per watt or up to 40% of the cost of installation, with a
35%, whichever is less. The Alberta Utilities maximum value of $10 000.
442 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems

So it can be seen that each province and terri- vary their magnetic fields. Rotation of this central
tory offers a different approach to encouraging solar shaft inside a stationary housing filled with coiled
installations. wires produces electricity.
The initial cost of alternative energy systems is
a deterrent to homeowners, but in the long term they
are cheaper than fossil fuel–based systems and so Hydro Power
are widely adopted as a supplement or replacement
Water power can be thought of as stored solar energy.
for fuelled systems. Each alternative energy system
The sun heats up water, which evaporates and falls
has advantages and limitations and it is necessary to
at higher elevations. That water will reduce its own
gain familiarity with them to determine their suit-
energy by falling, following the contour of the land,
ability for installation. Factors such as both quality
expending energy and eroding the landscape all the
and quantity of power produced are critical to the
way down to the ocean. Water that is changing eleva-
assessment of which system or combination of sys-
tion has the potential to do work. Falling or flowing
tems is most suitable.
water has been harnessed for centuries to run machin-
ery. Prior to the advent of electricity, wind, steam,
Generating Electricity and hydrokinetic power ran virtually all machinery
with Magnetism that existed. In a hydroelectric installation, falling
water is channelled through a penstock to a turbine,
Electricity produced by grid-tied utilities uses prop-
which converts the kinetic energy of the water into
erties of magnetism to generate power. Magnetic
rotational energy that rotates the shaft of a generator.
fields penetrate matter and interact with the elec-
Hydroelectricity is characterized by the way
trons that bind matter together. When magnetic
water is converted into rotational energy. This is
fields penetrate conductors, they cause some of the
achieved by means of impulse turbines, reaction
electrons in the conductors to move. Hydroelectric,
turbines, or hydrokinetic turbines.
fossil fuel, and nuclear power generation all work
by first causing the rotation of a shaft that sits on
smooth bearings within stationary coils of conduc- Impulse Turbines
tors. Magnets that can be attached to the rotating
Using an impulse turbine involves increasing the veloc-
shaft have fields that penetrate the surrounding coils
ity of the water out of the penstock by concentrating
of conductors in the stationary part of the genera-
the flow through a nozzle and directing it at a runner,
tor. Conversely, the magnets can be stationary and
imparting its kinetic energy to the buckets on the run-
the wires can be made to rotate through the mag-
ner. After striking the buckets on the turbine the water
netic fields. The movement of these magnetic fields
is again at atmospheric pressure, and it flows away not
through the stationary conductors causes a kind of
providing any suction to further assist the transfer of
pressure on the electrons that we know as voltage
energy. Examples of impulse turbines are the Pelton,
(V). If pressure or voltage in a system is raised at one
Turgo, and cross-flow turbines. Impulse turbines are
point but not as highly in an adjacent section, then
best when pressure is high and overall flow is low.
the tendency will be for the pressure to move toward
the lower pressure or voltage area. This movement Pelton Turbine. Invented in the 1870s by Lester
of electrons is known as amperes (A). Amperes are Allan Pelton, the Pelton wheel or Pelton turbine is
referred to as electrical current. A common analogy very efficient at extracting the energy of impulse or
likens pressure to voltage, and current to amps. velocity from the water that hits it. After striking the
As with the grid-tied utilities, micro hydroelec- paddles, water leaves the turbine at a low velocity
tric and wind power systems both convert the force having had most of its energy transferred to the tur-
of moving water or air into a rotational force. This bine bucket. These types of turbines are used when
force is applied to a shaft with either permanent high head pressure is available—that is, when the
magnets on it or to a shaft that has a combination water has a large change in elevation. Head pressure
of permanent magnets and electromagnets that can occurs when the mass of a liquid above the point of
 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems 443

Transferred from [Link] to Commons by Teratornis

utilization exerts a force. Every 70.36 cm (27.7 in.)

using CommonsHelper, CC BY-SA 2.5, [Link]

By the original uploader PC21 at English Wikipedia—
of fresh water exerts a force of one pound per square
inch (psi) or 6.825 kiloPascals (kPA). See Figure 26-1.

[Link]/w/[Link]?curid=7977926
Turgo Turbine. The Turgo turbine is used in me­di­um
to high head pressure applications (15 to 300 m).
The design is easier to manufacture, which makes
the Turgo cheaper to produce and thus more popular
with smaller hydroelectric installations.
Cross-Flow Turbine. Water strikes the cross-
flow turbine perpendicular to the shaft, imparting
its energy to the horizontal blades in this turbine.
Figure 26-2 Cross-flow turbine.
These are sometimes called “squirrel cage turbines.”
Water flows through the cage, striking both the lead-
ing and trailing blades and extracting additional
Francis Turbine. In a Francis turbine the water
energy. Simpler to construct, cross-flow turbines
enters into the sides (radially) of the runner and exits
are cheaper to manufacture and are efficient at vari-
from the bottom (axially). The Francis turbine has the
ous flow rates. Peak efficiency is less than Pelton or
greatest range of operating conditions—that is, vary-
Turgo turbines, but variations in flow affect perfor-
ing conditions of velocity and flow—of any turbine.
mance less so cross-flow turbines are popular with
It is for this reason that they are the most common
micro hydro applications. See Figure 26-2.
hydroelectric turbine to be found. See Figure 26-3.

Reaction Turbines Kaplan Turbine. Kaplan turbines resemble boat

propellers mounted vertically. These turbines har-
Reaction turbines extract the kinetic energy of water vest both the kinetic energy of the flowing water as
by forcing pressurized water to undergo a pressure well as the pressure from changes in head pressure.
drop across the turbine blades, the same as impulse See Figure 26-4.
turbines. The difference between reaction and impulse
turbines is that reaction turbines do not require as
high velocity, but they do require greater flow as they
need more mass flowing. Examples of reaction tur-
bines include Francis and Kaplan turbines.

Mariusz Hajdarowicz/[Link]
ManeeshUpadhyay/[Link]

Figure 26-1 Pelton turbine. Figure 26-3 Francis turbine.

444 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems

By Reinraum—Foto selbst erstellt, Technisches Museum Wien, CC0,

via Wikimedia Commons, [Link]

By Ocean Renewable Power Company (ORPC), USA,

org/wiki/File:Chain_of_Horizontal_Gorlov_Turbines_
[Link] .[Link]/w/[Link]?curid=27608079

in_Maine.png
Figure 26-5 Hydrokinetic turbine.

Figure 26-4 Kaplan turbine. to tie in to the grid. It is also a requirement for all of
the devices and appliances manufactured for use in
North America.
Hydrokinetic Turbines Once a steady rotation rate is established, con-
Turbines that harness only the kinetic energy of verting the mechanical energy into electrical energy
flowing water are hydrokinetic. To take full advan- can be accomplished by connecting the shaft of
tage of the flow of water of a river due to ocean cur- the turbine to a synchronous generator (an alterna-
rents or from the change of tides, a different type of tor). The challenges associated with making a good
turbine is needed. The speed of flow is lower and
space constraints are lessened, so a larger structure

United States Department of Energy, Office of Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy, [Link]
is needed to provide sufficient reaction surface. One
type of hydrokinetic turbine is the Gorlov-style
water turbine. See Figure 26-5.

Micro Hydro Power Intake

Generation
Smaller hydroelectric projects often siphon only a Canal

portion of the flow from a river or other body of

water. Micro hydro installations must take full Forebay
advantage of elevation changes to maximize the
head pressure change. See Figure 26-6. The con-
Penstock
struction of a small diversion structure such as
a weir or small pond acts as a reserve of stored
energy for release as needed. With all turbines, an
optimal flow rate and pressure must be matched
to the design of the turbine in order to maintain a
steady frequency of electricity. Once constructed,
the penstock and upstream reservoir maintain a Powerhouse

constant head pressure. Constant head pressure

ensures a steady flow rate allowing the generator to
maintain a regular 60 Hz output. In North America, Figure 26-6 Micro hydro system.
a 60 Hz alternating current is necessary to be able
 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems 445

mechanical connection to the spinning turbine can Hydro Turbine

Image courtesy of Reid Wylde

Supply
be formidable. A direct mechanical connection or a Induction

Engineering Ltd. © 2012

AC System AC Service Authority
Generator
belt drive is typically required. Disconnect Disconnect Box

Standalone Micro Hydro

Maintaining the frequency of the output is crucial. Figure 26-7 Grid-tied hydropower system with
To ensure the output is constant, high-quality elec- induction generator.
tricity, a diversion load controller is connected to
help maintain the frequency of the output. The diver-
sion load controller keeps a steady electrical load on installations may also opt to use a permanent mag-
the generator so that the turbine does not become net alternator. Generator output would be rectified
unloaded and spin too fast. Photovoltaic load con- to DC and then inverted back to AC. This process
trollers use pulse width modulated outputs to vary eliminates any frequency and voltage variation pres-
the charge rate on the batteries, but this would not ent in the output power. Inverters are also required
work with a turbine coupled to either a synchronous to have anti-islanding features that shut down the
generator (alternator) or an asynchronous (induc- inverter in the event of a grid-wide power outage.
tion) generator because switching the generator out- This prevents the generator from backfeeding faults
put off would remove the counter-torque associated and presenting a hazard to utility repair crews or
with a loaded generator. As a result, the turbine and from being damaged by efforts to feed the entire
the coupled armature on the generator would spin grid. A diversion load may be switched on to keep
faster as the magnetic field collapsed. This unde- the smaller generator loaded during a power outage.
sirable increase in rotation speed would change
Alternators (Synchronous Generators). Once a
the frequency of the electricity output and possibly
steady water flow has been established and a suit-
result in damage to the mechanical linkage between
able turbine has been selected, it must be coupled
the generator and the turbine due to water hammer
to a device that changes the rotational energy into
effect once the magnetic field is re-established.
electrical energy as previously stated. This often is
Micro hydro systems typically use a dump load
accomplished by coupling the spinning turbine to
controller that switches on a bank of parallel con-
a synchronous generator, also known as an alterna-
nected resistors that either heat up in the air or heat
tor. In synchronous machines, the output frequency
water to maintain a constant load on the generator.
directly corresponds to the rotational frequency of
This keeps the speed of rotation and subsequently
the rotor (the part of the generator that spins). The
the frequency of the electricity produced constant.
frequency of electricity output by a synchronous
Other electronic power conditioning units (PCUs)
generator follows the formula f 5 N 3 P/120, where
may be present to regulate and maintain battery
f 5 frequency in Hz, N 5 the speed of the rotor in
charge, but they will be discussed along with code
rotations per minute, and P 5 the number of poles.
requirements in the photovoltaic part of this unit.
For a four-pole synchronous generator spinning at
Grid-Tied Micro Hydro 1800 rpms, f 5 1800 3 4/120 Hz, and the output
frequency is 60 Hz.
To tie in to the grid, the frequency of the elec- Synchronous generators have either slip rings
tricity must match the frequency of the grid. To or a commutator and carbon brushes to supply elec-
achieve this, grid-tied micro hydro installations use tricity to create an excitation field in the armature.
an induction generator (Figure 26-7). This type of The armature then spins inside the stationary sta-
generator synchronizes itself when it is hooked up tor, creating either alternating current (slip rings) or
to the grid. The moment of connection will need DC current (commutator with brushes). A separate
some field monitoring and manipulation, but once source of DC excitation current must be supplied to
it is connected, the load imposed on the generator the armature in a synchronous generator. The degree
by the grid keeps it aligned. Small grid-tied hydro of excitation of the armature determines the output
446 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems

voltage. A mechanism for automatically regulating

By S.J. de Waard (Own work) [CC BY-SA 3.0 ([Link]

armature field excitation by monitoring output volt-
age is desirable. If output voltage starts to climb, a
decrease in the voltage to the armature will mean
less current flows through it. Less current in the
armature means less magnetic field and thus less
excitation field.
When generating electricity, it is important to

by-sa/3.0)], via Wikimedia Commons

remember that the farther the electricity must be
transmitted, the more voltage will need to be con-
verted into heat in the conductors. When Thomas
Edison first attempted to develop commercial elec-
tricity generation, his system was direct current. DC
voltage decreases from the point where it is gen-
erated to the point where it is used. The farther a Figure 26-8 Induction generator.
customer is from a DC generating station, the less
their voltage will be. Edison’s solution was to just
build more power stations. DC electricity lost out to however, also be used as a motor as they are funda-
an alternating current system developed by Nikola mentally the same thing, just hooked up in reverse.
Tesla because AC can be transformed into higher If an induction motor is made to spin faster than the
voltages with a transformer and then transmitted synchronous speed of the motor, it will feed elec-
longer distances before being transformed again, tricity back into the system. Synchronous speed
down to whatever voltage a customer requires. If is typically 1200 or 1800 rpms. To keep induction
DC is required to charge batteries, it can then be rec- generators working properly—that is, producing
tified using another piece of equipment. power and not consuming it under differing load
Induction Generators (Asynchronous Generators). conditions—an induction generator controller is
Induction generators are simpler, more reliable, and required to maintain a constant load and to supply
therefore generally cheaper than synchronous gen- diversion loads as required. The terms armature and
erators because they do not require either brushes or rotor are frequently applied to the rotating part of a
slip rings, which eventually wear out. For induction generator and motor interchangeably because of the
generators (asynchronous generators), frequency is dual nature of induction motors.
still regulated by the power system to which they
are connected. Frequency is still calculated in an
induction generator by f 5 N 3 P/120, but the inter-
Wind Power
connection with an outside power system creates a Humans have been harnessing the power of wind to
mechanical counterforce via the associated mag- grind grain and pump water for hundreds of years.
netic fields when generator speed varies. A reac- Indeed, wind is still used to pump water all around
tive force is drawn from the power system to build the globe. However, wind has always had one chief
an excitation field in the armature. If an induction liability: It does not always blow! Eventually it
generator is used as a standalone supply of power, it does, though, so it makes sense to harness wind
may need to be connected to a capacitor bank to get when it is there. Wind power, like micro hydro,
the required field excitation. Otherwise, rotating the converts the kinetic energy of wind into a rotational
armature will produce nothing as a magnetic field and then ultimately into electrical energy. As such,
may not be present in the armature. See Figure 26-8. a great many similarities exist in the equipment as
The application of torque to the shaft of an the dynamics are essentially the same. Figure 26-9
induction generator that results in rotation will, if shows a depiction of a system for using wind power
a residual magnetic field is present, result in the to create electricity to power an AC load, which is
production of voltage. An induction generator can, in this case an electric-powered water pump. Water,
 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems 447

Wind Turbine

Image courtesy of Reid Wylde Engineering

Alternator AC Load
Disconnect Controller AC Load

Ltd. © 2012
Diversion
Load

Figure 26-9 Wind-electric pumping system.

Encyclopaedia Britannica/UIG/Getty Images

however, is much denser than air. One cubic metre
of fresh water weighs 1000 kg. The same volume
of air weighs approximately 1.293 kg, depending
on the humidity level. The energy in moving water
is, therefore, much greater than in moving air. The
equipment used to get energy from water will tend Figure 26-11 Wind turbine cut-out with labels.
to be much smaller than that which gathers energy
from moving air. Wind power uses different-shaped
turbines to spin the associated generators. As with power to a power utility. These turbines look like
hydro systems, wind-based systems can use either airplane propellers and have either two or three
vertical or horizontally oriented turbines. blades; the three-bladed version is most common on
small turbines. The cutaway image in Figure 26-11
gives a good representation of the internal composi-
Horizontal-Axis Turbines
tion of a horizontal turbine. The stationary part that
The most common configuration for wind turbines attaches to the pole or tower is called the nacelle
is the horizontal-axis turbine. Figure 26-10 shows and it houses the generator and blade hub. The tail
a typical utility-grade horizontal-axis turbine that that extends out behind the blades keeps the turbine
works in concert with other turbines to provide oriented toward the wind to optimize the efficiency
of the turbine. It must smoothly pivot on the pole or
tower to which it is attached to make the most of
the available wind power. Larger horizontal tur-
bines add pitch and yaw controls to the nacelle to
further maximize the orientation of the blades them-
selves. The tower that supports the nacelle may be
a monopole, a tubular tower, or a latticed structure.
It may self-support or may be supported by guy
wires. Smaller towers can have a pivot point at the
base with a winch that allows the entire tower to be
raised and lowered, gin pole style, to the ground for
maintenance.
Courtesy of Craig Trineer

An alternative to the bladed design is the Archi-

medes turbine, which claims to be more efficient,
quieter, and more bird-friendly. Modelled on the
Archimedean screw, it has a nautilus shell-shaped
Figure 26-10 Horizontal-axis turbine. design that rotates horizontally. Comparatively few
are deployed at this time.
448 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems

Vertical-Axis Turbines They also do not need to be mounted high up, so

they are safer to work on. The gearboxes and gen-
Less common than horizontal-axis turbines, verti- erators in vertical turbines can be mounted at
cal-axis turbines (Figure 26-12) are more routinely ground level, so there is no need for climbing gear.
found in small wind installations, although several This makes maintenance more cost-effective as it
large units are in operation around the globe. Their takes less time and is less risky. Vertical wind tur-
blades vary widely in appearance from wing-shaped bines can fit into smaller spaces, making them bet-
vertical bars to helical-shaped foils to multiple- ter suited to city-based installations. Despite these
cup-shaped paddles, and all rotate around a vertical advantages, several drawbacks limit the applica-
shaft. There are many innovative designs such as the tion of vertical wind turbines. While their sim-
Savonius rotor (Figure 26-13), Darrieus foil, and plicity and design means that maintenance is less
Giromill wind turbines (Figure 26-14), each style expensive, there tends to be more of it due to the
with design variations of its own. stresses imposed upon the equipment by the design.
Vertical-axis turbines have fewer parts and Vertical-axis wind turbines are also less efficient
work better under gusty conditions because of their overall, because not all the blades of a vertical
omnidirectional nature. It takes time for horizontal turbine catch the wind—their rotation puts blades
wind turbines to orient to changes in wind direc- behind the main body of the turbine, where they
tion, but vertical ones are always oriented to take can no longer contribute turning force.
advantage of the available wind in any direction.

Praiwun Thungsarn/[Link]
meunierd/[Link]

Figure 26-12 Vertical-axis turbine. Figure 26-13 Savonius generator.

 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems 449

flow of liquid is desired, a multistage centrifugal

pump can be used.
As with micro hydro turbines, load must be
maintained on a wind turbine to give some counter-
torque to oppose the force of the wind. Rotating a
magnetic field within the stationary windings inside
the generator creates magnetic forces that oppose the
rotation. If a disconnect were to be suddenly thrown
or a malfunction were to occur in the diversion load
controller and all loads removed from a working
wind turbine, the blades would speed up, possibly
to the point of self-destruction. Diversion load con-
trollers switch the load between the intended load
and a diversion load to maintain a constant rota-
tion rate on the blades attached to the armature of
the generator. High wind conditions can also create
dangerous rotation rates on the blades. When pitch
and yaw controls and electrical field manipulations
are insufficient to slow or stop the blades, a fail-safe
mechanical braking system exists on large turbines
to prevent complete destruction. Failing safe means
that, like the brakes on commercial trucks, if any-
chinahbzyg/[Link]

thing goes wrong with the system, the brake deploys

and the turbine is stopped. Comparisons between
micro hydro systems and wind power standalone
systems are valid as the principal of operation of
the equipment and the magnetic forces and coun-
Figure 26-14 Giromill generator.
terforces are the same. The differences between the
two arise from the available energy and the kinetic
forces involved.
Standalone Wind Power The intermittent nature of wind power frequently
necessitates the installation of banks of batteries in
When a three-phase induction motor is connected order to store energy when it is available. Batteries
to a pump and fed power from a three-phase syn- must be installed in series to create the desired volt-
chronous alternator driven by a wind turbine, age, and in parallel to provide the amperage needed
changes in wind speed will result in changes in to meet the energy requirements of consumers. Thus,
pump output. A typical variation in wind speed will the storage systems are scalable but increase in com-
mean that turbine output frequency may vary from plexity, installation, and maintenance costs with
25 to 100 Hz. As the voltage and frequency output output capacity. Since batteries use DC power and
of the generator change, so too will the output of many generators coupled to wind turbines produce
a single-stage centrifugal pump. When a generator variable frequency AC, the addition of a rectifier
and pump are properly matched, optimum tip speed is necessary. Selecting a DC generator solves this
ratio can nearly be achieved. Tip speed ratio is a problem but is subject to availability constraints. In
comparison between the rotation speed of the tip of either event, where batteries are used for storage, an
the blades on a turbine and the speed of the wind inverter must be connected to the system to convert
that drives it. Optimum tip speed represents the the stored DC power to AC for use. Increasingly, on
most efficient use of available energy for a given smaller systems the functions of controllers, recti-
turbine and blade configuration. If a more constant fiers, and inverters is performed by one integrated
450 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems

device. This reduces overall complexity and cost. should be electrically connected before an
An equipment configuration such as that seen in attempt is made to mount the turbine onto the
Figure 26-15 is needed to ensure safe and reliable pole or tower. Installation and code require-
electrical power for off-grid wind power systems. As ments will be discussed at the end of the unit.
shown, a disconnecting means must exist at the bot-
tom of the tower to isolate the generator and another
one must exist after the charge regulator to permit Grid-Tied Wind Power
maintenance. Caution must be exercised when ser-
vicing this equipment as live voltage sources exist When small wind systems are tied to the grid the
on both sides of the charge regulator. inverter must also synchronize the output frequency
to the grid for a successful tie in. Figure 26-16
Caution: Since the turning blades pose shows two examples of small grid-tied systems. No
a significant risk both mechanically and elec- batteries would generally be permitted, for reasons
trically, installation should not be attempted given in the microFIT and net metering discussion.
if the wind speed is even moderate. Also, the As such, the equipment in grid-tied wind setups is
turbine can produce very high voltages so simpler.

Wind Turbine
DC Charge DC AC AC Distribution
Alternator

Image courtesy of Reid Wylde Engineering

Rectifier Disconnect Regulator Disconnect Inverter Disconnect Service Disconnect

AC Loads

Diversion Battery
Load Disconnect

Ltd. © 2012
Battery

Figure 26-15 Off-grid wind power system.

Wind Turbine
Supply
DC System AC Authority
Alternator
Rectifier Disconnect Inverter Disconnect Service Box

Image courtesy of Reid Wylde Engineering Ltd. © 2012

Wind Turbine
Supply
AC System AC Authority
Alternator
Disconnect Rectifier Inverter Disconnect Service Box

Figure 26-16 Small wind grid-tied systems (top and bottom).

 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems 451

A disconnecting means must be present at the Electrical Hazards

supply authority end as well as at the bottom of the
tower to enable maintenance. Two examples are Electrical work for the installation of photovoltaic
shown. In one example the rectifier is a component systems is not complex, but there are significant
of the nacelle. In the other example, the rectifier is differences when compared to typical residential
on the ground. The disconnect is before the rectifier wiring. First and foremost, a utility-interactive pho-
in the second example to permit maintenance and tovoltaic system is a supply of electricity for the
safe electrical isolation. home, not another load. Photovoltaic modules on
the roof generate electricity when exposed to sun-
light. Although the utility disconnect (main circuit
breaker) for a house can be turned off, dangerous
Utility-Interactive Solar levels of electricity will still be present in the dwell-
Photovoltaic Systems ing as long as the sun is shining.
Modules on the roof of a house are connected
Electricity from sunlight? Is this possible? This is in series in strings that operate at up to 600 volts.
not only possible, but also has become very prac- Electricity generated by the photovoltaic modules
tical through the installation of utility-interactive is direct current (DC). All conductors and compo-
solar photovoltaic (PV) systems. A combination of nents must be listed for use with DC voltage. The
factors recently has made photovoltaic systems very sun can shine for more than three hours at a time, so
popular: all conductors/components must be sized for contin-
●● increased use of electricity throughout Canada uous currents (three hours or longer of operation).
Because string conductors of the correct type are
●● increased costs for electricity production permitted to be exposed on the roof of a dwelling,
●● environmental concerns about the use of fossil good workmanship is critical. There are open con-
fuels ductors, exposed to the elements, operating at up to
●● concern over dependence on foreign sources of 600 volts of continuous current (VDC) that cannot
energy be turned off!
If a short circuit does occur, it is not always
●● increased efficiency of photovoltaic systems
obvious. Module short-circuit current is only slightly
Installation of photovoltaic systems is being higher than normal operating current. Contrast this
encouraged by government and electric utili- with the short-circuit current from sources such as
ties through tax incentives and rebates. Electric a utility or even 12-VDC vehicle batteries. Shorting
utilities can construct large central photovoltaic out these sources results in extremely high-fault
generating plants to encourage the needs set by gov- currents. High-fault currents are easier to detect.
ernment incentives. Generation of electricity by the High-fault currents will also cause an overcurrent
consumer at the point of use (distributed genera- device (fuse or circuit breaker) to open quickly.
tion) decreases the need for utility-generated power. The connection of the utility-interactive PV system
Excess electricity will be supplied to the utility grid to the existing service panel is of concern. Service-
for use by other customers. Electric utility compa- disconnecting means, grounding, and proper
nies are required to purchase customer-generated labelling must be accomplished to maintain a safe
electricity at predetermined rates. electrical installation.
Depending on size, a utility-interactive photo- It is obvious that there are some special con-
voltaic system can supply most or all of a home’s siderations for the installation of residential pho-
electrical load. Photovoltaic systems are being ret- tovoltaic systems. Local jurisdictions may have
rofitted to existing homes and even installed in new amendments to Section 64, which was added to
homes as they are constructed. Battery storage of the Canadian Electrical Code in 2015 for renew-
the generated electricity may also be included, but is able energy systems. Rules 64-200 through
not as common. 64-222 provide a guide for photovoltaic systems.
452 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems

Always check with the local authority having

Protection Association. For a full copy of NFPA 70, please go to [Link]. NFPA 70®, National Electrical Code®, and NEC® are
registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA. Please note that this permission is restricted to the
use of the language referenced and does not include any permission to use the NEC Logo or any other NFPA logo or indicia, which
DC-to-DC
jurisdiction (AHJ) before starting an installation

Reproduced with permission of NFPA from NFPA 70®, National Electrical Code®,2014edition. Copyright© 2013, National Fire
converter
Fuses
in a new area. (optional
location)

PV source
circuit
PV or
THE BASIC UTILITY- Solar
cells DC-to-DC
INTERACTIVE PHOTOVOLTAIC converter
output
SYSTEM
Module
Several components are required in order to con-

may be used solely with the express written permission of NFPA.

vert sunlight into useful amounts of electricity. Panel

A basic utility-interactive system will consist

of modules, mounting racks, combiner/transi- Array, subarray, or
tion boxes, inverter(s), and several disconnects. PV power source
A grounding electrode system and connection
to the existing service panel will be required. See
Notes:
Figures 26-17 and 26-18 for examples of basic (1) These diagrams are intended to be a means of identification for
PV system components and arrangements. PV power source components, circuits, and connections that
make up the PV power source.
(2) Custom PV power source designs occur, and some components
are optional.

Figure 26-17 Identification of solar photovoltaic

system components.

Interactive Inverter PV system disconnect PV power Interactive Inverter output circuit

source Inverter PV system
Electric disconnect
production and
PV power source Inverter output circuit distribution
network
Energy storage Multimode
Interactive system
system Inverter
Electric
Inverter output circuit production
and
Electric production and
distribution
distribution network Energy storage network
system disconnect Inverter system
PV system disconnect disconnect
AC coupled multimode system
AC module (includes inverter)
Array (of AC modules) PV power PV system Stand alone Inverter
AC module system source disconnect Inverter output circuit

Stand alone
PV power PV system Multimode Inverter system
system
source disconnect Inverter disconnect
loads
Electric PV system
production DC circuit(s) DC loads
Inverter and Energy storage system disconnect
output distribution
DC loads
circuits network
Energy storage system
Energy storage Stand alone
system disconnect system
Energy storage system loads Stand alone system
Reproduced with permission of NFPA from NFPA 70®, National Electrical Code®,2014edition. Copyright©
2013, National Fire Protection Association. For a full copy of NFPA 70, please go to [Link]. NFPA 70®,
DC coupled multimode system National Electrical Code®, and NEC® are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association,
Quincy, MA. Please note that this permission is restricted to the use of the language referenced and does not
include any permission to use the NEC Logo or any other NFPA logo or indicia, which may be used solely with
the express written permission of NFPA.
Figure 26-18 Identification of solar photovoltaic system components in common system configurations.
 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems 453

Solar Cells, Modules, and Arrays

A photovoltaic module is the basic unit of power
production in the system. A module is a manufac-
tured unit made up of many semiconductor PV cells
encased in a protective covering and mounted to
an aluminum frame. All modules are required by
the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) to be listed
to nationally recognized standards. Individual pho-
tovoltaic modules are mounted to either a support
rack that is connected to roof members or to ground-
mounted structural supports. Figure 26-19 shows a
crystalline silicon photovoltaic cell used to produce
solar power typically in an array with other modules.
Individual modules are wired together in a Figure 26-20 Rooftop array of modules.
series circuit. Factory-installed leads are provided
by the manufacturer for this purpose. Type RPV
conductors to deliver current to an inverter. Combiner
or RPVU conductors can be spliced to module
boxes may be fused or nonfused. Most residential PV
leads to facilitate circuiting. A separate equipment-
systems are made up of three to six strings that can be
grounding conductor is used to ground each module.
combined in a single box. String fusing is generally
Most strings will consist of 8 to 15 modules. The
not required for three strings or fewer. Module ratings
number of modules in a series circuit will be limited
will determine this, but some designers specify fused
by the combined open-circuit voltage of the string.
combiner boxes even when these are not required.
A typical residential array of roof-mounted modules
Many inverters have the ability to combine sev-
is shown in Figure 26-20.
eral strings at the input terminals. With an inverter
Multiple strings are combined together (in paral-
like this, the string conductors are routed to the
lel) at the combiner box. This allows a single pair of
inverter without being combined first. The combiner
box would not be required. A junction box, known
as a transition box, is used to splice the open-string
conductors to a wiring method for connection of the
By WhistlingBird (Own work) [CC BY-SA 4.0 ([Link] via

inverter. The entire assembly of racks, modules, and

combiner/junction boxes is known as a photovol-
taic array. Available space, sunlight, and the ulti-
mate amount of electricity desired will determine
the number of modules in the array. Obviously, the
larger the system, the more expensive the installa-
tion, so the budget must be considered.
A disconnect for the ungrounded DC string
conductor(s) is required before the conductors
enter the dwelling unless a metallic raceway is
used as the wiring method. Use of a metallic wir-
ing method such as EMT or FMC is common so that
Wikimedia Commons

string conductors can be routed through a dwelling

unit attic. Metallic raceways provide more protec-
tion for the 400–600 VDC string conductors, which
remain energized until the sun goes down. Firefight-
Figure 26-19 Example of a crystalline silicon
solar photovoltaic cell.
ers responding to a house fire will open the service-
disconnecting means on arrival. This does not
454 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems

de-energize the photovoltaic string conductors if the A new grounding electrode must be installed (and
sun is still shining. Metallic raceways will provide a bonded to the existing premises’ grounding electrode)
level of protection for the firefighters who may encoun- or the existing grounding electrode for the dwelling
ter the DC wiring method when responding to a fire. must be accessed for connection. Correct termination
Use of a metallic raceway eliminates the of the grounding electrode conductor, equipment-
requirement for an array disconnect on the roof but grounding conductors, and grounded AC/DC con-
not at the inverter. The inverter will be energized ductors at the inverter is critical. Utility-interactive
from two different sources: DC from the array and inverters are required to provide ground-fault protec-
alternating current (AC) from the utility connec- tion for the array. Proper operation of the ground-fault
tion. Disconnecting means must be provided for protection system is dependent on the correct termi-
both sources. Some inverters are manufactured nations of the grounding and grounded conductors.
with integral disconnects. A circuit breaker in an Inverter design will dictate whether the posi-
adjacent electrical panel can serve as the AC dis- tive or the negative DC conductor is the grounded
connect, but all safety disconnects must be within current-carrying conductor for the array. Inverter
sight of the inverter and may need to be grouped. size is based on the capacity of the array. Most
The DC grounded conductor is not permitted to be residential inverters are in the 2 to 10 kW range.
opened by any disconnecting means. The inverter There are advantages to installing an inverter
in Figure 26-21 has an integrated DC disconnect. indoors. Cooler temperatures result in better oper-
ating efficiency, but outdoor installation is also
The Inverter common.

The inverter will need to be installed in a loca-

tion with sufficient working space. Larger sys- Safety Features of Inverters
tems may use two or more inverters with output
Just as with modules and combiner boxes, invert-
combined in a separate AC panelboard before sup-
ers are required to be manufactured to nationally
plying the service. Grounding/bonding of the util-
recognized standards. Inverters that are listed by a
ity-interactive photovoltaic system is required and
nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) to
is usually accomplished at the inverter location.
Underwriters Laboratory of Canada/Other Recog-
Both the AC and the DC systems contain
nized Document - Canadian (ULC/ORD-C) 1741
grounded current-carrying conductors. Grounding
have met this standard, and CSA C22.2 No.107.1,
of the DC conductor is accomplished at the inverter.
Clause 14, applies to utlity-interconnected inverters.
Both rules call this anti-islanding. CEC Appendix B,
Rule 84-024, addresses this also. Without this fea-
ture, electric utility workers risk being electrocuted
by inverter-supplied electricity.

Connection of Inverters
The two options for connection of the inverter to
the electric service panel are known as a supply-
side or a load-side connection. The supply-side
connection is on the utility side of the main discon-
nect. A load-side connection will supply electric-
ity on the customer side of the main disconnect. A
dedicated circuit breaker (suitable for backfeed) or
Figure 26-21 A residential utility-interactive fusible disconnect is required. The total supply of
inverter. current to a panelboard is limited to 120% of the
 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems 455

busbar rating in general and to 125% in a dwelling Micro-Inverters and AC

unit, Rule 64-112 4) c) d). Photovoltaic Modules
The service panel is supplied by both the utility
(through the main circuit breaker) and the inverter A single small inverter connected to each pho-
(through a back-fed circuit breaker). The sum of the tovoltaic module is known as a micro-inverter.
ampere ratings of the main circuit breaker and the Instead of connecting multiple modules to a single
inverter circuit breaker cannot exceed the rating of inverter, each module will have its own attached
the panelboard bus multiplied by 1.2 (120%) or by inverter. The output of each module is connected
125% in a home. A circuit breaker used for con- directly to the micro-inverter with the existing
nection of the inverter will have to be located at module leads. Multiple micro-inverters are con-
the opposite end of the bus from the main circuit nected in parallel on a single circuit, which then
breaker to avoid overloading of the bus. supplies the service panel of the home. Micro-
inverters are required to be listed, just as with the
larger string inverters. Ground-fault protection,
Building-Integrated anti-islanding, and the other requirements of util-
Photovoltaic Modules ity-interactive inverters are applicable. Output cur-
rent for a single micro-inverter is approximately
Photovoltaic modules that also serve as an outer
0.8 amps. This would permit up to 16 inverters
protective finish for a building are known as build-
on a single 20-amp circuit. The inverter shown in
ing-integrated photovoltaic (BIPV) modules. This
Figure 26-23 is a micro-inverter.
type of module is often installed in the form of
The CEC permits different methods for connec-
roofing tiles intended to blend in with surrounding
tion of a utility-interactive photovoltaic system to
non-photovoltaic roof tiles. See Figure 26-22. BIPV
the electrical service. Requirements for both meth-
modules are investigated through the listing process
ods are found in Rule 64-112, “Point of Connec-
for conformance to appropriate fire-resistance and
tion.” A connection on the line side of the service
waterproofing standards that apply to roofing tiles,
disconnecting means is known as a supply-side con-
along with the electrical standards of ULC/ORD
nection, Rule 64-112 2). The size of the photovoltaic
C-1703-01. A module the size of a roofing tile is
system is virtually unlimited, but the rules of CEC
obviously much smaller than the standard photovol-
Section 6 will apply to these service conductors.
taic module. Many more of the smaller modules are
Requirements for load-side connections are found
required to create strings.
in Rule 64-112 3). The photovoltaic system size is
limited by the panel bus rating and main circuit-
breaker size. A dedicated PV system circuit breaker,
suitable for backfeed and positioned at the opposite
end of the bus from the main circuit breaker, is a
requirement of Rule 64-058 4). See Figures 26-24
and 26-25 for a representation of the connection
methods discussed.
Courtesy Enphase Energy

Figure 26-22 Building-integrated photovoltaic

roof tiles. Figure 26-23 A utility-interactive micro-inverter.
456 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems

UTILITY

METER

Main circuit breaker

UTILITY- Branch circuits

INTERACTIVE
INVERTER

Back-fed
circuit breaker

Figure 26-24 Load-side connection.

An AC photovoltaic module is essentially a nor- installing or maintaining any alternative energy sys-
mal DC module with the micro-inverter installed tem consult Rule 64-002 at the very least to try to
at the factory. The DC conductors are covered and gain an understanding of the function of the myriad
inaccessible on an AC module. The absence of devices they will encounter. The objective of the
field-installed DC string conductors is a big advan- CEC is to establish rules for safely installing and
tage with both micro-inverters and AC modules. maintaining electrical equipment. As such, wher-
Hazards associated with the DC string conductors ever a power source exists so does a disconnection
are minimized with the use of micro-inverters and means (Rule 64-060), as close to the point of entry
eliminated with AC modules. CEC requirements for as is feasible. The ability to safely disengage a power
AC circuits connecting micro-inverters/AC mod- source is critical to safety. Whether the system being
ules to service panels are similar to normal branch- worked on is a standalone system or a grid-tied one,
circuit rules. the ability to de-energize equipment is important.
This is particularly true during fault conditions, and
the CEC makes multiple references to the neces-
The CEC and Alternative sity of energy systems having this capability. The
Energy Installations additional equipment present may create confusion
during an emergency situation, so it is required that
Definitions for much of the equipment and termi- adequate signage be posted at main disconnects,
nology found in alternative energy installations can Rule 84-030 1) 2). A firefighter or family member
be found in Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Rule may need to be assured that they are not about to
64-002. Because alternative energy systems com- spray water on live equipment during an emergency.
prise equipment normally found only in industrial For this reason, a diagram showing all of the equip-
settings, it is advisable that anyone considering ment and disconnecting means must be present at
 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems 457

To/From Utility

050616 kWh Meter

by Utility

B
SIGNS
REQUIRED
B
Junction Box

Sign Indicating
Location of Rapid
Shutdown
Equipment

B B

WARNING
Electric Shock
Hazard as
Terminals May Be
Energized in Open
Position

PV System
Disconnect

240-VAC
120/240-V, 1-Ph Inverter
Service L1

L2
B = Bonded to Neutral N

Figure 26-25 Supply-side connection.

the main disconnection. Because equipment may be The CEC ensures that minimum installation
located in hard to reach places additional disconnects requirements are met as micro hydro, wind, and
may be required, Rule 64-104. The disconnects typi- photovoltaic installations frequently make use of
cally must be placed where they are visible but a controllers, inverters, rectifiers, and other devices
safe distance from the equipment, or where they can that manipulate the generated power. This is done
be reached even in an emergency. A typical example to ensure safety. It also assures compatibility with
of an alternative energy distribution system can be the electrical grid and all of the devices that depend
seen in Figures 26-26 and 26-27. upon it. Electricity that has been generated by
458 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems

Point of
common
coupling
(PCC)

Service
entrance

Distributed
resource (DR):
solar PV, fuel cell,
micro-hydro,
or wind Local
loads

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

DC AC
T ~ T
=
Internal disconnects
Grid-dependent
inverter Main AC
Existing installation breaker
panel
Breaker with no line and load markings

Figure 26-26 Supply authority distribution system (part 1).

Point of
common
coupling
(PCC)

Service
entrance
Essential
Distributed loads
resource (DR):
solar PV, fuel cell, Essential Internal
micro-hydro, loads AC transfer
or wind breaker switch Local
panel loads

© 2021 Canadian Standards Association

DC AC
T ~ T

DC =
T Internal
Electrical Grid-dependent disconnects
storage inverter Main AC
device Existing installation breaker
panel
Breaker with no line and load markings

Figure 26-27 Supply authority distribution system (part 2).

alternative energy may not have the appropriate fre- synchronized and, further, must also be capable of
quency or voltage to be used either in a standalone conditioning the voltage and frequency in order to
or a grid-tied installation as wind, water, and sun maintain a safe connection. To condition the elec-
all provide varying levels of energy. Rule 84-006 tricity produced, it may have to be changed from
stipulates that systems capable of producing power AC to DC by a rectifier so it can charge batteries.
must be capable of determining if power is properly It may then have to be turned back into AC by an
 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems 459

inverter for use by the consumer. Figure 26-27 is an forbids the use of any piece of equipment for a pur-
example of a supply authority distribution system pose it was not designed and intended for. Wire
with a grid-tied inverter. The inverter is designed to designed to be used indoors works well for the pur-
put out electrical power only at a designated volt- pose it was designed for but has a limited ability
age and frequency, so any variations in the gener- to cope with sunlight or water and gets inflexible
ated power are effectively removed at this point. and brittle in cold temperatures. The conductors
If an inverter is tied to the grid, it must also have selected for use in any alternative energy instal-
anti-islanding capabilities to prevent turbine output lation are designed for the environment in which
from being sent out onto the grid if a power outage they are installed. As such, wires installed on sys-
occurs, Rule 84-004. It must also be able to protect tems are sized and insulated for the loads that they
itself from faults in the utility operated grid, Rule must carry and are rated for exposure to ultraviolet
84-008. Alternative energy systems are permitted to light, temperature extremes, the presence of water
be tied to the main ground of a consumer service, in a liquid and solid form, and exposure to poten-
but where DC voltage sources are connected to tial mechanical abuse. If the potential for damage
an AC-fed inverter the inverter must be connected from mechanical abuse is high, wires must be pro-
through an isolation transformer, Rule 84-028 2). tected with a metal sheath or conduit. For instance,
Rule 64-062 states that the DC utility interactive
Overcurrent Protection inverter feeds must be protected this way all the
way to the disconnect.
In any electrical installation, the ability to safely
stop the flow of electrical current is essential. The
CEC makes numerous mention of this as it per-
Solar Conductors
tains to alternative energy installations (see Rules Rule 64-210 indicates that flexible cords suitable
64-058; 64-214 [solar]; 64-308 [small wind]; for extra hard usage are permitted, and therefore
64-404 [large wind]; 64-506 [micro hydro]; mandated for interconnecting photovoltaic mod-
64-606 [hydrokinetic]; 64-704 [fuel cell]; ules. These cords are frequently installed in exposed
64-806 [storage batteries]; and 84-010 [any grid- locations and subject to the effects of weather and
tied application]). With the exception of large mechanical damage, and so they require addi-
wind installations, overcurrent protection is not tional protection. Type RPVU cable is identified by
required if the short-circuit current is not greater CEC Rule 64-210 as solar voltaic cable. It can be
than the rated ampacity of the equipment. With used in wet or dry raceways or buried directly in the
individual solar modules in a PV array, the short- earth, and it generally is used to transport the power
circuit current is close to the operating current and produced in a solar array back to the equipment that
frequently no overcurrent protection is required. conditions it (used in a “home run”). RPVU may
However, in a photovoltaic array, multiple solar also be used in a solar installation between mod-
modules are connected in series and parallel. ules if mechanical protection is provided and if the
The parallel-connected modules accumulate cur- area is not accessible to the public, Rule 64-210 3).
rent with each new module added. Rule 64-214 1) RPVU conductors can have a temperature rating
addresses the necessity for overcurrent protection above 90°C. Rule 64-210 4) mandates the protection
in individual array modules when the output is not of RPVU from mechanical damage, supporting the
more than the conductors can handle. cable within 300 mm of every box connector and
ensuring that the wire is not without supports over
gaps of greater than 1 m. In addition, Rule 64-210 5)
states that the conductors must be protected from
Conductors
damage by rodents if they are not installed with DC
All energy that moves in an electrical system must arc-fault protection.
do so through the conductors that bring power to The conductors in a PV system, which have
all points in a system. As a general rule, the CEC many parallel components, must be identified to
460 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems

reduce the possibility of a misconnection. It is a installations, the requirements of Section 12 and

requirement of Rule 64-212 that the conductors of a Table 21 must be observed.
photovoltaic system be colour-coded to indicate the
polarity of the wires.
Micro Hydro Conductors
Section 12 requirements apply to all installations
Wind Conductors unless amended by a rule in another section. In
micro hydro, photovoltaic, and wind installations,
In Rule 64-306, conductors on wind turbines must conductors must be able to conduct 125% of the full
be either mineral-insulated cable, run in conduit, load-rated current of the system. This ensures that
or armoured cable. If conductors are run inside the conductors cannot be damaged by being overloaded.
tower of a wind turbine, they may be a flexible cord Conductors that are subject to abrasion or rodent dam-
suitable for extra hard usage (such as SOW), they age must be mechanically protected. The conductors
may be armoured cable, or they may be installed in in micro hydro systems are subject to excess moisture
a raceway. In all cases for conductor and raceway so must also conform to the rules of Section 22.

REVIEW

Refer to the CEC when necessary. Where applicable, responses should be written in complete sentences.

1. CEC Rules through contain most

of the requirements for installation of Inverter systems.
2. CEC Rules through will apply to
PV installations except as modified.
3. Name four electrical hazards associated with photovoltaic systems.

4. Name five components of a utility-interactive photovoltaic system.

5. Which conductor types are permitted to be installed exposed for array circuits?

6. To size conductors and overcurrent devices for source circuits, you must multiply the
module string short-circuit current by .
7. When is a metallic raceway required for photovoltaic source circuits?

8. Photovoltaic modules that also serve as an outer protective finish for a building are
known as
 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems 461

9. Grounding electrode system requirements for a utility-interactive photovoltaic system

are found in which section of the CEC?

10. The two methods permitted for connection of a utility-interactive photovoltaic system
to a service are known as and .
11. List the recent factors that have made photovoltaic systems popular.

12. What are the benefits of photovoltaic systems encouraged by government and utilities?

13. What other considerations should you consider regarding the efficiency of a photo­
voltaic system in general home applications?

14. What section and rule numbers cover renewable energy systems for small wind
turbines in the Canadian Electrical Code for 2021?

15. According to the CEC, what is the maximum output voltage for small wind turbines?

16. Why must an electrical load be maintained on micro-hydro and wind turbines at all
times?

17. What device in a photovoltaic system can be energized from two different sources?

18. What requirements regarding the disconnecting means for the inverter must be observed?

19. What does the term anti-islanding mean regarding inverters?

462 UNIT 26 Alternative Energy Systems

20. According to the CEC, what is the minimum ampacity of the insulated conductors
that supply power derived from a micro-hydro powered installation, and what is the
minimum temperature rating of those conductors?

21. A single small inverter connected to each photovoltaic module is known as _________.
22. When equipment is installed in an off-grid residence, it is said to be for a(n)
______________application.
23. What criteria must be kept in mind when a remote power system is provided?

24. When on-site equipment feeds power back into the electrical grid and it can be used as
a source of revenue, this is considered to be what type of system?

25. What is a FIT program and which province uses it?

26. What are the typical design size ranges for microFIT programs?

27. What system guarantees a 40-year term for a rate of pay?

28. What system has a disadvantage in not providing power after a power outage?

29. Which system, at the end of the year, pays out any surplus that may be generated over
what was used for the year at the current rate for the utility?

30. The movement of magnetic fields through the stationary conductors causes a kind of
pressure on the electrons that we know as ________________.
31. Hydroelectricity is characterized by the way water is converted into rotational energy.
How are these means achieved?
Appendix A

Profession as an “Electrician”
This series of books is currently being utilized across the country to deliver content to stu-
dents in a variety of programs. Most of these students share a common goal. That goal is to
successfully complete a Red Seal examination for their trade to become a licensed electri-
cian. New to the complete series of books is a direct link to the RSOS to aid in preparing for
that examination.

What Is the RSOS / NOA?

The Red Seal National Occupational Analysis (NOA) or Red Seal Occupational Standard
(RSOS) is a document that lists all the tasks performed in the occupation and describes
the knowledge, skills, and abilities required to demonstrate competence in that trade. Some
trades have an NOA, and some trades have an RSOS.

What Is a Red Seal?

The Red Seal represents the interprovincial standard of excellence. The Red Seal endorse-
ment provides recognition that your certificate meets an interprovincial standard that is rec-
ognized in each province and territory.

Where Can Red Seal Documentation Be Obtained?

The website [Link] has free resources, including PDF downloads of all documen-
tation for your specific trade.
You can also download the Red Seal Occupational Standard by going online: publicentre
.[Link]. This document is available on demand in multiple formats by contacting
1 800 O-Canada (1-800-622-6232), or by teletypewriter (TTY), 1-800-926-9105.
© Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, 2016
[Link]@[Link]
PDF
Cat. No.: Em15-3/1-2016E-PDF
ISBN: 978-0-660-04592-4
ESDC
Cat. No.: LM-600-02-16E

463
464   APPENDIX A

Why Is This Documentation Important?

It is likely that at some point you will need to prepare for one of two examinations that are directly
associated with the profession title of electrician (NOC—National Occupational Classification).
Construction Electrician
NOC: 7241
Construction electricians plan, assemble, install, alter, repair, inspect, verify, commission,
operate, and maintain electrical systems. Electrical systems provide heating, lighting, power,
security, communication, and control in residential, commercial, institutional, industrial,
and entertainment environments.
Industrial Electrician
NOC: 7242
Industrial electricians install, maintain, test, troubleshoot, service, and repair industrial
electrical equipment and associated electrical controls. Their work includes equipment or
components directly or indirectly exposed to electrical power, such as motors, generators,
pumps, and lighting systems.

Red Seal Occupational Standard (RSOS)

This standard has the following objectives:
●● To describe and group the tasks performed by skilled workers
●● To identify which tasks are performed in every province and territory
●● To develop instruments for use in the preparation of Interprovincial Red Seal Examina-
tions and assessment tools for apprenticeship and certification authorities
●● To develop common tools for apprenticeship on-the-job and technical training in Canada
●● To facilitate the mobility of apprentices and skilled workers in Canada
●● To supply employers, employees, associations, industries, training institutions, and gov-
ernments with analyses of occupations

Structure of the Occupational Standard

To facilitate understanding of the occupation, this standard contains the following sections:
●● Description of the Construction Electrician Trade: An overview of the trade’s duties,
work environment, job requirements, similar occupations, and career progression
●● Essential Skills Summary: An overview of how each of the nine essential skills is
applied in this trade
●● Trends in the Construction Electrician Trade: Some of the trends identified by indus-
try as being the most important for workers in this trade
●● Pie Chart: A graph that depicts the national percentages of exam questions assigned to
the major work activities
●● Task Matrix and Examination Weightings: A chart that outlines graphically the major
work activities, tasks, and subtasks of this standard and their respective exam weightings
●● Major Work Activity (MWA): The largest division within the standard that is com-
posed of a distinct set of trade activities
●● Task: Distinct actions that describe the activities within a major work activity
●● Task Descriptor: A general description of the task
 APPENDIX A   465

●● Industry Expected Performance: A description of the expectations regarding the level

of performance of the task, including information related to specific codes, regulations,
and standards that must be observed
●● Subtask: Distinct actions that describe the activities within a task
●● Essential Skills: The most relevant essential skills for this subtask
●● Skills:
●● Performance Criteria: Description of the activities that are done as the subtask is
performed
●● Evidence of Attainment: Proof that the activities of the subtask meet the expected
performance of a tradesperson who has reached journeyperson level
●● Knowledge:
●● Learning Outcomes: Describes what should be learned relating to a subtask while
participating in technical or in-school training
●● Learning Objectives: Topics to be covered during technical or in-school training in
order to meet the learning outcomes for the subtask
●● Range Variables: Elements that provide a more in-depth description of a term used in the
performance criteria, evidence of attainment, learning outcomes, or learning objectives
●● Appendix A–Acronyms: A list of acronyms used in the standard with their full name
●● Appendix B–Tools and Equipment: A non-exhaustive list of tools and equipment used
in this trade
●● Appendix C–Glossary: Definitions or explanations of selected technical terms used in
the standard

E A
10% 11%
D
20% B
29%

C
30%

Performs Common
MWA A 11%
Occupational Skills
Installs, Services, and Maintains Generating,
© Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, 2016

MWA B 29%
Distribution, and Service Systems
Installs, Services, and
MWA C 30%
Maintains Wiring Systems
Installs, Services, and Maintains
MWA D 20%
Motors and Control Systems
Installs, Services, and Maintains
MWA E 10%
Signalling and Communication Systems

Figure A-1 Pie chart of Red Seal Examination (Construction Electrician Trade)
weightings (MWA—Major Work Activity).
466   APPENDIX A

This pie chart represents a breakdown of the Interprovincial Red Seal Examination. Percent-
ages are based on the collective input from workers from the trade from across Canada. A
task matrix within the RSOS documentation indicates the breakdown of tasks and subtasks
within each major work activity and the breakdown of questions assigned to the tasks. Inter-
provincial examinations typically have between 100 and 150 questions.
Note: The construction electrician trade was used as the example as it has the largest
number of members. The industrial electrician trade has a similar breakdown and a majority
of identical items. It is important when preparing for your examination that you reference
the correct trade documentation.

Structure of the Red Seal Trade Profile

This profile has two sections that provide a snapshot of the trade’s description and all trade
activities as they are organized in the Red Seal Occupational Standard:
●● Description of the Construction Electrician Trade: An overview of the trade’s duties,
work environment, job requirements, similar occupations, and career progression
●● Task Matrix: A chart that outlines graphically the major work activities, tasks, and sub-
tasks of this trade
●● Major Work Activity (MWA): The largest division within the standard that is com-
posed of a distinct set of trade activities
●● Task: Distinct actions that describe the activities within a major work activity
●● Subtask: Distinct actions that describe the activities within a task

Preparing for the Examination

A typical apprenticeship is a five-year journey, and during this time, it is the responsibility
of the apprentice to gain exposure to all tasks in the trade profile. In most cases, apprentices
eligible to write the examination will find themselves concerned about some of the required
trade knowledge. This material may have been delivered in the first year of their training,
making the preparation process difficult. The adopted RSOS reference in each book will
provide a powerful tool in the preparation for the Red Seal examination.

B—INSTALLS, SERVICES, AND MAINTAINS GENERATING, DISTRIBUTION, AND SERVICE SYSTEMS

Task B-7 B-7.01 Installs single-phase B-7.02 Installs three-phase B-7.03 Performs servicing
Installs, services and consumer/supply services consumer/supply services and maintenance of
Source: To © Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, 2016

maintains consumer/supply and metering equipment. and metering equipment. single-phase services
services and metering and metering equipment.
equipment.

B-7.04 Performs servicing

and maintenance of three-
phase services and
metering equipment.

Task B-8 B-8.01 Installs overcurrent B-8.02 Installs ground B-8.03 Performs servicing
Installs, services and protection devices. fault, arc fault, and surge and maintenance of
maintains protection protection devices. protection devices.
devices.

Figure A-2 Installs, services, and maintains generating, distribution, and service
systems.
 APPENDIX A   467

UNIT

1
General Information
for Electrical Installations
ObjECTIvES
After studying this unit, you should be able to
● identify the purpose of codes and standards RED SEAL
related to electrical systems
OCCUPATIONAL
● describe the importance of the Canadian STANDARD
Electrical Code (CEC) (RSOS)
● describe the layout of the CEC
For the Red Seal exam,
● identify approved equipment note that this unit covers
● explain the importance of electrical inspection the following RSOS task:
● identify links to websites relating to the electrical ● Task A-3
trade
● list the agencies that are responsible for
establishing electrical standards and ensuring
that materials meet the standards
● discuss systems of measurement used on
construction drawings
● begin to refer to the CEC

Figure A-3 New to this edition, direct links to the RSOS at the beginning of each unit.

The RSOS task index is provided below to easily locate material in this book that covers or
supports portions of a given RSOS task.

Table A-1
Red Seal Occupational Standard textbook reference table.
RSOS ELECTRICAL WIRING
Residential Commercial Industrial
Task A-1 U-7, U-16
Task A-2 U-11
Task A-3 U-1, U-2, U-4, U-11, U-12, U-1, U-14, U-16 U-1, U-8
U-13, U-14, U-15, U-16, U-23,
U-24
Task A-4
Task A-5 U-7
Task A-6
Task B-7 U-5, U-7, U-8 U-2, U-3 U-5
Task B-8 U-9, U-20 U-2, U-3, U-8, U-10, U-12, U-5, U-16
U-17, U-18, U-19
Task B-9 U-2, U-8 U-2, U-3, U-5
Task B-10 U-14, U-21
Task B-11 U-5, U-6, U-7, U-8, U-22, U-25 U-2, U-12 U-16, U-17
Task B-12 U-25 U-5
Task B-13 U-26 U-21
Task B-14 U-2, U-3
Task B-15 U-2
(Continued)
468   APPENDIX A

Table A-1 (Continued )

Red Seal Occupational Standard textbook reference table.
RSOS ELECTRICAL WIRING
Residential Commercial Industrial
Task C-16 U-3, U-4, U-5, U-6, U-7, U-2, U-3, U-8, U-11, U-12, U-4, U-6, U-7, U-13, U-20
U-11, U-12, U-22, U-24 U-14, U-15
Task C-17 U-3, U-4, U-5, U-6, U-10, U-3, U-4, U-10, U-12, U-13, U-7, U-18, U-20
U-11, U-12, U-13, U-14, U-14, U-15
U-15, U-16, U-19, U-20,
U-22, U-24
Task C-18 U-18 U-4, U-9, U-12 U-15
Task C-19 U-17 U-4, U-12
Task C-20 U-3, U-4, U-5
Task C-21
Task D-22 U-20, U-22, U-24 U-4, U-12 U-8, U-9, U-20
Task D-23
Task D-24 U-20, U-22, U-24 U-12, U-17 U-9, U-10, U-20
Task D-25 U-11, U-12, U-20
Task E-26 U-21, U-23 U-6 U-22
Task E-27 U-23, APP-C, APP-D U-19, U-22
Task E-28 U-23 U-20
Appendix B

Specifications for Electrical

Work—Single-Family Dwelling
1. General: The “General Clause and Conditions” shall be and are hereby made a part of
this division.
2. Scope: The electrical contractor shall furnish and install a complete electrical system
as shown on the drawings and/or in the specifications. Where there is no mention of
the responsible party to furnish, install, or wire for a specific item on the electrical
drawings, the electrical contractor will be responsible completely for all purchases and
labour for a complete operating system for this item.
3. Workmanship: All work shall be executed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All
exposed conduits shall be routed parallel or perpendicular to walls and structural mem-
bers. Junction boxes shall be securely fastened, set true and plumb, and set flush with
the finished surface when the wiring method is concealed.
4. Location of Outlets: The electrical contractor shall verify location, heights, outlet and
switch arrangements, and equipment prior to rough-in. No additions to the contract sum
will be permitted for outlets in wrong locations, in conflict with other work, and so on.
The owner reserves the right to relocate any device up to 3 m prior to rough-in, without
any charge by the electrical contractor.
5. Codes: The electrical installation is to be in accordance with the latest edition of the
Canadian Electrical Code (CEC), Part I, all local and provincial electrical codes, and
the utility company’s requirements.
6. Materials: All materials shall be new and shall be listed and bear the appropriate label
of the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) or another nationally recognized testing
laboratory for the specific purpose. The material shall be of the size and type specified
on the drawings and/or in the specifications.
7. Wiring Method: Wiring, unless otherwise specified, shall be non-metallic-sheathed
cable (NMSC), armoured cable, or EMT adequately sized and installed according to the
CEC and local ordinances.
8. Permits and Inspection Fees: The electrical contractor shall pay for all permit fees,
plan review fees, licence fees, inspection fees, and taxes applicable to the electrical
installation, and these amounts shall be included in the base bid as part of this contract.

469
470   APPENDIX B

9. Temporary Wiring: The electrical contractor shall dishwasher, central vacuum, and food proces-
furnish and install all temporary wiring for hand- sor power unit.
held tools and construction lighting according to These appliances are to be furnished by the
the CEC and National Building Code of Canada owner.
standards and include all costs in the base bid. 16. Chimes: Furnish and install two two-tone door
10. Number of Outlets Per Circuit: In general, not chimes where indicated on the plans, complete
more than 12 outlets shall be connected to any with two pushbuttons and suitable chime trans-
one branch circuit. Exceptions may be made former. Allow $100 for above items. Chimes
for low-current-­consuming outlets. The maxi- and buttons are to be selected by the owner.
mum number of receptacle and lighting outlets 17. Dimmers: Furnish and install dimmer switches
to any two-wire branch circuit in a residence is where indicated.
12 outlets on a 15 A circuit or 16 outlets on a
18. Exhaust Fans: Furnish, install, and provide
20 A circuit. This is based on the fused switch
connections for all exhaust fans indicated on
or circuit breaker having a marked continuous
the plans, including, but not limited to, ducts,
operation at 80%.
louvres, trims, speed controls, and lamps.
If the fused switch or circuit breaker is
Included are laundry, rear-entry, powder room/
marked for 100% continuous operation, it is
washroom, range hood, and ensuite and main
permitted to install 15 outlets on a 15 A circuit
bathrooms. Allow a sum of $2000 in the base bid
or 20 outlets on a 20 A circuit.
for this. The fans that are in the master bedroom,
11. Conductors: General lighting and power branch study/bedroom, and front bedroom are to have
circuits shall be No. 14 AWG copper protected a remote control speed module in the canopy of
by 15-ampere overcurrent devices. All other the fan on the ceiling outlet.
circuits wire and overcurrent device as required
19. Luminaires: A luminaire allowance of $3500
by the CEC. All conductors shall be part of
shall be included in the electrical contractor’s
an approved cable assembly or, if installed in
bid. This allowance shall include the furnishing
raceway, Type R90XLPE without jacket or
and installation of all surface, recessed, track,
RW90XLPE, unless specified otherwise.
strip, pendant, and/or hanging luminaires, com-
12. Load Balancing: The electrical contractor shall plete with lamps. This allowance includes the
connect all loads, branch circuits, and feeders per one washroom and two bathroom medicine
Panel Schedules, but shall verify and modify these cabinets with lights. The ceiling fans used in
connections as required to balance connected and the bedrooms are to have remote control fea-
computed loads to within 10% variation. tures, purchased by the homeowner.
13. Spare Conduits: The electrical contractor shall Labour for installation of the luminaires shall
furnish and install two empty 27 trade size con- be included in the base bid.
duits between the workshop and the attic for 20. Sump Pump: Electrical contractor to provide
future use. a 5-15R single receptacle to provide power to
14. Guarantee of Installation: The electrical con- the sump pump. Sump pump to be supplied and
tractor shall guarantee all work and materials installed by mechanical contractor.
for a period of one full year after final accep- 21. Plug-In Strip: Where noted in the workshop,
tance by the architect/engineer and owner. furnish and install a multioutlet assembly with
15. Appliance Connections: The electrical con- outlets 1.2 m from floor. Total outlets: 6.
tractor shall furnish all wiring materials and 22. Switches, Receptacles, and Faceplates: All
make all final electrical connections for all per- flush switches shall be of the quiet AC-rated
manently installed appliances such as, but not toggle type. They shall be mounted 1.3 m
limited to, furnace, water heater, water pump, to centre above the finished floor unless other-
built-in oven and cooktop, food waste disposal, wise noted.
 APPENDIX B   471

Receptacle outlets shall be mounted 300 mm 26. Service Entrance: Furnish and install one
to centre above the finished floor unless other- 30-circuit, 200-ampere, 120/240-volt single-
wise noted. All general receptacles shall be of phase, three-wire combination panel (rated for
the grounding type. Furnish and install ground- continuous operation at 80%), complete with
fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles a 200-ampere main breaker in the workshop
where indicated, to provide ground-fault circuit where indicated on the plans. Branch-circuit
protection as required by the CEC. All branch protection in the panel is to incorporate circuit
circuits except bathroom and washroom recep- breakers. The panel is to have a 10 000-ampere
tacles, refrigerator, kitchen counter work area, interrupting rating.
island receptacle, and sump pump with a single 27. Service entrance underground consumer’s
receptacle shall be protected by a combination- service conductors are to be furnished and
type arc-fault circuit interrupter. All wiring installed by the utility. The meter equipment
devices are to be provided with white Decora® model number is to be furnished by the utility
style switches and receptacles, complete with and installed by the electrical contractor where
screwless wall plates, throughout. indicated on plans. The electrical contractor is
Receptacle outlets, where indicated, shall to furnish and install all panels, conduits, fit-
be split-switched. All receptacles within the tings, conductors, and other materials required
dwelling shall be tamper-resistant (TR), with to complete the service entrance installation
the exception of the receptacle for a freezer or from the demarcation point of the utility’s
microwave, and any that are 2 m or more above a equipment to and including the main panel.
finished floor or grade, Rule 26-706 2).
28. Service entrance conductors supplied by the
23. Television Outlets: Furnish and install a electrical contractor shall be three copper 3/0
4 3 4 single-gang raised plaster cover at each RW75XLPE jacketed 600 volt in 53 trade size
television outlet where noted on the plans. Pro- PVC from main Panel A to the meter base.
vide a vapour boot in all insulated walls. Mount
29. Bond and ground service entrance equipment in
at the same height as receptacle outlets. Furnish
accordance with the CEC and local and utility
and install RG-6 coaxial cable to each televi-
code requirements. Install No. 6 AWG copper
sion outlet from a point in the workshop near the
system grounding conductor.
main service entrance switch. Allow 2 m of cable
in workshop. Furnish and install television plug- 30. Subpanel: Furnish and install one 24-circuit,
in jacks at each location. Faceplates are to match 120/240-volt, single-phase, three-wire load centre
other faceplates in the home. All remaining work in the recreation room. The load centre is to have
is to be done by others. 100-ampere mains. Feed the load centre with
No. 3/3 NMD90 copper cable to a 100-ampere,
24. Telephones: Furnish and install a 3 in. deep
two-pole overcurrent device in the main panel.
device box or 4 in. square box, 1½ in. deep with
Branch-circuit protection in this panel is to
suitable single-gang raised plaster cover, at each
incorporate circuit breakers. Optional method
telephone location, as indicated on the plans.
would be to run EMT conduit to the subpanel.
Furnish and install four-conductor No. 22
Size of conduit would be 35 trade size with three
AWG copper telephone cable or Cat 6 cable to
No. 3 RW75XLPE jacketed conductors.
each designated telephone location; terminate
in proper modular jack, complete with face- 31. Circuit Identification: All panelboards shall be
plates. Installation shall be according to any and furnished with legible directories with proper
all applicable CEC and local code regulations. designation of the branch-circuit feeder loads
and equipment served. The directories shall be
25. Overhead Garage Door Opener: Receptacle
located in the panel in a holder for clear view-
outlet mounted 3.2 m from inside edge of over-
ing. Test charts for GFCI and arc-fault circuit
head door opening. The overhead garage door
interrupter (AFCI) breakers will be located on
opener to be purchased and installed by a spe-
the panel enclosure.
cially trained overhead door installer.
472   APPENDIX B

32. The electrical contractor shall seal and weath- contractor, including equipment furnished by
erproof all penetrations through foundations, the owner or others and removed from the car-
exterior walls, and roofs. ton by the electrical contractor.
33. Upon completion of the installation, the electri- 34. Special-Purpose Outlets: The electrical con-
cal contractor shall review and check the entire tractor shall install, provide, and connect
installation, clean equipment and devices, and all wiring (see Schedule of special-purpose
remove surplus materials and rubbish from the outlets). Upon completion of the job, all
owner’s property, leaving the workplace neat luminaires and appliances shall be operating
and clean and in complete working condition. properly. See plans and other sections of the
The electrical contractor shall be responsible specifications for information as to who is to
for the removal of any cartons, debris, and rub- furnish the luminaires and appliances.
bish for equipment installed by the electrical

Table B-1
Schedule of special-purpose outlets.
TOTAL
APPLIANCE
APPLIANCE WATTAGE CIRCUIT WIRE
HORSE- AMPERE RATING AMPERE SIZE CIRCUIT
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION VOLTS POWER RATING (OR VA) RATING POLES NMD 90 NUMBER COMMENTS

Hydromassage 120 ½ 10 1200 15 1 14 A9 Connect to

A tub, ensuite Class A GFCI.
bathroom Separate circuit.
Well pump 240 1 8 1920 20 2 12 A5/A7 Run circuit to
B disconnect
switch on wall
adjacent to
pump; protect
with Fusetron
dual-element
time-delay fuses
sized at 125%
of motor’s FLA.
Water heater: top 240 -0- 8.33 2000 20 2 12 A6/A8 Connected for
C element 2000 W, 12.50 3000 limited demand.
bottom element
3000 W.
Dryer 120/240 120 V 23.75 5700 30 2 10 B1/B3 Provide flush-
D 1/6 Total mounted 30-A
Motor dryer receptacle.
Only 14–30R.
Overhead garage 120 1/4 5.8 696 15 1 14 B22 Unit comes with
E door opener 3-wire cord.
Unit has integral
protection.
Wall-mounted 120/240 -0- 27.5 6600 40 2 8 B6/B8
F oven

Counter-mounted 120/240 -0- 31 7450 40 2 8 B2/B4

G cooking unit

Food waste 120 1/3 7.2 864 15 1 14 B19 Controlled by

H disposal single-pole
switch on wall.

(continued)
 APPENDIX B   473

Table B-1 (Continued )

TOTAL
APPLIANCE
APPLIANCE WATTAGE CIRCUIT WIRE
HORSE- AMPERE RATING AMPERE SIZE CIRCUIT
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION VOLTS POWER RATING (OR VA) RATING POLES NMD 90 NUMBER COMMENTS

Dishwasher 120 1/4 Motor 5.8 1446 15 1 14 B5 Motor and

I Motor Htr. 6.25 heater are
Only Total 12.05 not on
simultaneously.
Bar fridge 120 -0- 12 1440 15 1 14 B18 Minimum circuit
J ampacity 18.6 A

Central vacuum 120 1/2 12 1440 15 1 14 B20 Receptacle in

K unit garage

Attic exhaust fan 120 1/4 5.8 696 15 1 14 A26 Run circuit to
L 4 in. square box.
Locate near fan
in attic. Unit
has integral
protection.
Electric furnace 240 1/3 Motor 3.5 13 000 70 2 4 A1/A3 The overcur-
M Motor Htr. 50.7 rent device
Total 54.2 shall not be less
than 125% of
the total load
of the h­ eaters
and motor. 54.2
3 1.255 67.75
[Rules 62-114 7)
a) b); 62-114 8].

Air conditioner 240 -0- 30 7200 40 2 8 A2/A4 Compressor

N rated load
amperes 27.8.
Compressor
locked rotor
amperes 135.0.
Condenser
fan full load
amperes 2.2.
Condenser
locked rotor
amperes 4.5.
Branch-circuit
O.C. device
40-A 40.0.
Minimum circuit
ampacity 37.5.
Freezer 120 1/4 5.8 696 15 1 14 A12 Install single
O receptacle outlet.
Do not provide
GFCI protection.

Microwave oven 120 -0- 12 1440 15 1 14 B17

P outlet

Sump pump 120 1/3 6.2 744 15 1 14 A10 Single receptacle

Q located in base-
ment workshop.

EVSE Electric Vehi- 240 -0- 40 9600 50 2 8 A20/22 Install a 14-50R

cle Supply receptacle in a
Equipment 72171-K square
box.
474   APPENDIX B

35. Electric-vehicle-charging equipment: Electric- 36. According to the National Building Code
vehicle-charging equipment is calculated at of Canada and CEC Rules 26-720 n) and
100% of the load. Furnish and install a 411∕16 in. 86-306, for EVSE wiring, a 5-20R receptacle
junction box in the garage, located as shown in is required to be installed if a 120-volt instal-
the drawings, and in a conduit connected to Panel lation is involved. Further, the Code mandates
A to enable the EVSE equipment to be installed. a device with the appropriate configuration
The charger will then be connected to a double- (see CEC Diagrams 1 or 2) if a different voltage
pole breaker and conductors sized according to is used. A Level 2 charger has been selected for
the manufacturer’s instructions. this residence, which is rated for 9600 W. This
The charger is fed with a double pole will be installed in the garage near the entrance
50-ampere breaker and sized according to of the garage overhead doors.
manufacturer specification.
Appendix C

Jack Pin Designations and

Colour Codes
Standard 4 -Pair Wiring Colour Codes Pin # Jack Type
Pair 1 T White/Blue 8P8C/
R Blue/White 8P8C Keyed 6P6C MMJ
Pair 2 T White/Orange 1 Blue (L) White (W) Orange (O)
R Orange/White
Pair 3 T White/Green 2 Orange (O) Black (B) Green (G)
R Green/White 3 Black (B) Red (R) Red (R)
Pair 4 T White/Brown
R Brown/White 4 Red (R) Green (G) Yellow (Y)

Note: For 6-wire jacks use pair 1, 2, and 3 colour codes. 5 Green (G) Yellow (Y) Black (B)
For 4-wire jacks use pair 1 and 2 colour codes.
6 Yellow (Y) Blue (L) Brown (N)

7 Brown (N) — —

8 White (W) — —
6P4C Pin 3 Pin 4
Ring 1 Tip 1
Yellow Red Red Green

Pin 2 Pin 5
Tip 2 Ring 2
Black Yellow
Green Black

RED SEAL
Pair 3 OCCUPATIONAL
6P6C Pin 3 Pin 4 Pair 2

Yellow Red
Ring 1
Red
Tip 1
Green Polarity
Pr 1 STANDARD
(RSOS)
+ + – + – – ‘Tip’ and ‘Ring’
White
Pin 2 Pin 5 destinations
*
Tip 2 Ring 2
T T R T R R
Blue Black Yellow

Green Black
Pin 1 Pin 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
Jack pin number
For the Red Seal exam,
Tip 3
White
Ring 3
Blue
USOC
designations
note that this unit cov-
ers the following RSOS
task:
Pair 3
MMJ Pin 3 Pin 4
Ring 1
Red
Ring 2
Yellow
Pr 1 Pr 2
† No preferred
●● Task E-27
Yellow Red Orange wiring format
+ + – – + –
Pin 2 Pin 5
Tip 2 Tip 2
Brown Green Black
OR
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Green Black
Pin 1 Pin 6
Tip 3 Ring 3
Orange Brown DEC pairing

*Some equipment standards may vary from the standards shown here.

Figure C-1 Jack pin designations and colour codes for communication
jacks and cables.

475
476   APPENDIX C

Green (tip) 1
Red (ring) 2
2-pair
Yellow (spare)
Black (spare)

White with blue tracer (tip) 1

Blue (ring) 2

White with orange tracer

3-pair
Orange

White with green tracer

Green

1 Tip is the conductor that is connected to the telephone company’s positive terminal.
It is similar to the neutral conductor of a residential wiring circuit.

2 Ring is the conductor that is connected to the telephone company’s negative terminal.
It is similar to the “hot” ungrounded conductor of a residential wiring circuit.

Figure C-2 Colour codes for communication jacks and cables.

Appendix D

EIA/TIA 568A and 568B: Stan-

dards for Cabling Used in Tele-
communications Applications
Pair 2 Pair 3

Pair 3 Pair 1 Pair 4 Pair 2 Pair 1 Pair 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Wht Grn Wht Blu Wht Org Wht Brn Wht Org Wht Blu Wht Grn Wht Brn
/Grn /Org /Blu /Brn /Org /Grn /Blu /Bm

T568 A T568 B

Wht Solid white with green stripe Wht Solid white with orange stripe
/Grn
Wht Solid white with blue stripe
/Org
Wht Solid white with brown stripe
RED SEAL
/Blu /Brn OCCUPATIONAL
Grn Solid green Org Solid orange
STANDARD
Blu Solid blue Brn Solid brown
(RSOS)
Standard Colour Connections for Categories 5 and 6
For the Red Seal exam,
Figure D-1 EIA/TIA 568A and 568B. note that this unit cov-
ers the following RSOS
task:
●● Task E-27

477
 Code Index

A 4-004 13), 84, 345 8-102 1), 81

ANSI/NFPA, 430 4-006 1), 274 8-102 1) a), 79, 310
ANSI/TIA/EIA, 406, 477 4-008, 120 8-102 1) b), 80
Appendix B, 82, 84, 96–97, 120, 4-018, 75 8-104, 76, 217
129, 139–141, 152, 155, 4-018 1), 75 8-104 1), 61, 72, 126, 129, 357
164, 179, 184, 224, 263, 4-018 2), 75 8-104 2), 62, 357
308–309, 418, 454 4-020, 106 8-104 3) a), 62
4-022 1) d), 267–268 8-104 6), 218
D 4-022 2), 110, 112, 221 8-104 6) a), 62, 357
Diagrams, 65, 223, 279, 4-024 1), 106–107 8-106 3), 126, 128, 315
288–289 4-024 2), 106 8-108, 145
4-030 1), 107–108, 311 8-108 1), 130
N 4-030 4), 336 8-110, 126–127
Note 1, 76 4-032 1), 107 8-200, 75, 125, 129
Note 5, 81 4-032 3), 107–108 8-200 1) a), 125
6-102 1),131 8-200 1) a) i), 125
P 6-112, 139–141 8-200 1) a) i) ii), 127
Part 9, 59 6-112 3), 139, 142 8-200 1) a) iv), 125, 128
6-112 4), 139 8-200 1) a) v), 125
R 6-112 5) 6), 140 8-200 1) a) vi), 125
Rules 6-112 9), 140 8-200 1) a) vii), 125, 290
2-004, 190 6-116, 142 8-200 1) b) i), 125, 145
2-030, 76 6-200, 144 8-200 1) b) ii), 125, 145
2-100, 322 6-200 1), 144–145 8-200 3), 63, 125
2-100 3) a), 144 6-206 1), 142, 144 8-202, 131
2-100 5), 313 6-206 1) b) c), 143 8-202 3), 132
2-108 1) d), 313 6-206 3), 138 8-300, 273, 277
2-110, 109, 206 6-300, 142–143 8-300 1) a), 278
2-130, 93 6-308, 140 8-300 1) b), 278
2-132, 93 6-308 a), 128 8-304, 62, 64, 217
2-304 2), 111 6-312, 150 8-304 3), 218
2-328, 314 6-408, 138, 142 8-304 4), 346
4-004, 65, 76, 82 6-410, 138 10-002, 153
4-004 3), 106 8-100, 64 10-102, 154–155, 157, 338, 396
4-004 7), 292 8-102, 78, 336 10-102 2) a), 156

479
480   Code Index

Rules (Continued) 12-012 3) e), 419 12-3000–3034, 40

10-102 3), 154–155 12-012 4), 119, 418 12-3000 1), 31, 39
10-102 3) b), 155 12-012 10), 418 12-3000 2), 39
10-104, 155 12-018, 420 12-3000 6), 46
10-104 b), 155 12-30–34, 223 12-3002, 52
10-112, 155 12-100, 74 12-3010, 91
10-114, 126, 129, 131, 138, 12-112, 73 12-3010 1), 39
156–157 12-116, 73 12-3010 2), 41, 44
10-116, 155 12-118, 73 12-3010 5), 41
10-118, 156–157, 392 12-118 3), 128 12-3014, 202
10-118 1) a), 155 12-118 6), 109 12-3014 1), 31, 39
10-206 1) a), 154 12-402 3), 344 12-3016 1), 40, 44
10-206 1) b), 154 12-500–526, 84, 91, 293, 416 12-3024, 42, 46
10-208, 154 12-506 4), 84 12-3028, 345
10-210, 142, 159–160 12-510 1), 203 12-3034, 42, 47–49, 76
10-210 1) b), 146 12-510 1) a), 204 12-3034 1), 46
10-210 a), 146, 182 12-514, 86 12-3034 1) c), 223
10-210 d), 145 12-516, 89–91 12-3034 1) d), 49
10-212, 430 12-516 1), 92–93 12-3034 2), 49
10-214, 431, 433 12-516 1) 2), 93, 295 12-3034 2) c), 227
10-214 2) c), 430 12-516 2), 90 12-3034 3), 46
10-600, 145, 282, 311 12-518, 84, 420 12-3034 6), 48
10-600–614, 83, 282 12-520, 90 12-3036 1), 40
10-600–616, 268 12-524, 39, 87 14-010, 142, 280
10-604, 95, 138 12-600–618, 87 14-010 b), 268, 336, 350
10-606, 158–159 12-618, 203 14-012, 142, 163, 167, 169
10-610, 188, 420, 434 12-904 1), 119 14-012 a), 164
10-610 2), 203 12-906, 84, 95 14-014, 168–169
10-610 3), 99–101, 203 12-910, 100 14-014 d), 168
10-612, 350, 434 12-914, 71 14-014 e), 169
10-612 3), 419 12-924, 96 14-104, 65, 357
10-614, 116, 160 12-1000–1014, 99 14-104 1) a), 62
10-614 3), 85, 117 12-1004, 100 14-104 2), 76, 273, 278, 280
10-614 5), 110–111, 117, 193 12-1010, 95 14-200, 160
10-616, 101, 138, 158 12-1010 3), 203 14-200–212, 160
10-616 1), 419 12-1010 3) b), 204 14-202, 160
10-616 2), 129 12-1014, 100 14-204 1), 160
10-616 3), 419 12-1108, 96–97 14-204 2), 160
10-700, 137–138, 152, 154, 12-1110, 31 14-208 1), 160
156, 188, 392 12-1112 2), 150 14-300, 357
10-700 a), 155 12-1114, 95–96 14-300–308, 163
10-708, 351 12-1114 3), 96 14-300 1), 164
10-906 2), 158 12-1120, 348 14-300 2), 164
12-010 5), 93–94 12-1300–1308, 99–101 14-304, 164
12-012, 419–420 12-1302 2), 101 14-408, 357
12-012 2), 418 12-1406, 95 14-416, 357
12-012 3), 418 12-3000, 263 14-508, 109
 Code Index   481

14-508 b) iii), 109 26-720 k), 59 28-604 5), 314

14-600, 65, 344 26-720 l), 344, 422 28-704, 313
14-610, 290 26-722, 50 28-714 1), 313
16-002, 330 26-722 a), 308–309 28-900, 430, 435
16-010, 327–328 26-722 c), 236 20-102 1), 206
16-100–118, 327 26-722 d), 264, 266–267 30-104, 64
16-114, 328 26-722 d) iii), 265 30-104 a), 344
16-116, 327 26-722 e), 251 30-200 1), 201, 207
16-200, 320 26-724, 218, 264 30-200 3), 201
16-210, 320 26-724 b), 179, 415 30-204, 224
16-210 3), 329 26-724 c), 226 30-302, 203, 335
16-212, 329 26-740–750, 277 30-308 3), 207
16-212 1), 312 26-742, 278 30-310 1), 207
16-212 1, 3), 329 26-744, 274 30-318, 240, 420
16-212 3), 329 26-744 2), 288 30-320 1), 251
16-330, 294 26-744 3), 288 30-320 3), 249
26-142, 76 26-744 6), 278 30-408, 20, 75
26-654, 264, 266 26-744 9), 278, 289 30-600, 112
26-656, 66 26-746, 357 30-706, 206
26-656 d), 265 26-746 2) a), 288 30-900–912, 201, 334
26-656 h), 415 26-746 3), 273 30-902, 205
26-658, 59, 147, 190 26-800–808, 326 30-904, 205
26-658 1), 217 26-806, 311 30-906, 202–203, 205, 224
26-658 1) b), 344 26-806 1), 305 30-910 1), 202–203
26-700, 223 26-806 1) 2), 326 30-910 2), 202
26-702, 183, 185, 187 26-806 4), 305 30-910 3), 202, 204, 335
26-702 1), 183, 188 26-806 5) 6) 7), 320 30-910 4), 202
26-702 1) a), 118 26-806 7), 322 30-910 4) a), 202
26-702 1) b), 118 26-954, 349 30-910 5), 203
26-702 1) c), 118 26-954 d), 350 30-910 8), 204–205
26-702 2), 183 26-956, 384 30-1208, 261
26-702 3), 183, 187–188 28-106 1), 347 42-008, 76
26-704, 147, 179, 184, 249, 28-108 1), 313 42-016, 76
267 28-200 3), 348 54-108, 395
26-704 1), 339 28-200 4), 348 54-200 1), 392, 396
26-704 2), 179, 222, 415 28-204, 65 54-300, 392
26-706, 59, 66, 120, 221, 415 28-300, 348 54-302, 392, 395–396
26-706 2), 267, 422 28-306 1), 348 54-304, 392
26-708 3), 222 28-308, 299, 348 54-400 3) a), 392
26-720, 60, 218, 264 28-600, 292 54-604 1), 392
26-720 1), 422 28-602 3) c), 311 60-300–334, 400
26-720–724, 219 28-602 3) e), 292 60-302, 400
26-720 e), 344 28-604, 314 60-308 1), 400
26-720 e) i) ii), 290 28-604 1), 350 60-700–710, 400
26-720 f), 249 28-604 1) b), 350 62-106, 382
26-720 g), 249 28-604 1) b) ii), 314 62-110, 311
26-720 h), 277 28-604 3), 350 62-110 1), 305
482   Code Index

Rules (Continued) 68-064, 383 Standard C22.2 No. 100-14,

62-110 1) a), 305 68-064 1), 383 429, 432
62-110 1) b), 305, 382 68-064 2), 383 Standard C22.2 No. 110-M90,
62-114 6), 311 68-066, 380, 383 352
62-114 6) b), 382 68-066 1) b), 379 Standard C22.2 No. 111, 109
62-114 7) a), 305 68-066 6), 383
62-116 1), 382 68-068 5), 184 T
62-118, 310 68-100, 378 Table 1, 71
62-118 1), 305 68-100 2), 378 Table 2, 62, 71, 72, 75–76, 78,
62-118 3), 125, 128, 310 68-100 3), 378 128 –131, 154, 201, 273,
62-118 4), 125, 128, 310 68-114 8), 381 277, 279–280, 358, 416
62-120, 308 68-202 2), 379 Table 3, 71
62-130, 310 68-302, 247, 254 Table 4, 71, 72, 75
62-132, 310 68-302–308, 255 Table 5A, 62, 71, 293–294,
62-206 3) 5), 305 68-304 1), 254 297, 329
62-206 5), 305 68-304 2), 254 Table 5B, 72
62-214 1), 460 68-306 1), 384 Table 5C, 72, 84, 329
62-214–216, 304 68-400–408, 382 Table 6A–K, 150
62-300, 304 68-402, 383 Table 7, 96
64-002, 456 68-402 2), 383 Table 8, 95, 126, 129,
64-058, 459 68-404 2), 383 149, 150
64-062, 459 68-406, 384 Table 9A–H, 95, 150
64-104, 457 68-408 2), 384 Table 9G, 126, 129, 149
64-112, 455 84-004, 459 Table 10A–D, 95, 150
64-112 4) c) d), 455 84-006, 458 Table 10A, 126, 129, 149
64-200–222, 451 84-008, 459 Table 11, 75
64-210, 459 84-010, 459 Table 12, 71
64-210 3), 459 84-020, 435 Table 13, 62, 126, 129, 164,
64-210 4), 460 84-024, 435, 454 290, 348, 357
64-210 5), 460 84-028 2), 459 Table 16, 83, 116, 129–130,
64-212, 460 84-030, 434–435 158, 160, 188, 274, 358,
64-214, 459 84-030 1) 2), 456 378–380, 383–384, 419
64-306, 460 86-100, 147 Table 19, 75, 82, 84, 204, 274,
64-308, 459 86-300 2), 149 329, 400, 416, 419
64-404, 459 86-306, 147, 179, 414 Table 21, 460
64-506, 459 Table 22, 42, 49
64-606, 459 S Table 23, 42, 46–50, 223
64-704, 459 Section 0, 137, 251 Table 29, 348
64-806, 459 Section 10, 252, 274 Table 43, 154–155, 157
68-050, 254, 378, 384 Section 62, 304 Table 45, 299, 347
68-058, 379–381 Standard C22.2 E598, 335 Table 53, 418
68-058 3), 380 Standard C22.2 No. 0.1-M1985, Table 57, 329
68-058 6), 379 283 Table D1, 86, 204, 416
68-060, 381 Standard C22.2 No. 47, 166 Table D3, 71, 81–82
68-060 2), 379 Standard C22.2 No. 59.1- Table D5, 71
68-062, 379 M1987, 164 Table D16, 299, 348
 Subject Index

A generating electricity with ground floor unit, 131

A11 branch-circuit lighting, magnetism, 442 minimum service ampacity,
221–222 hydro power, 442–444 132
A24 branch-circuit lighting, 222 micro hydro power generation, Appendixes, in CEC, 3
AC photovoltaic modules, 456 444–446 Appliance connections, 470
Accent lighting, 199 overview, 440 Appliance wattage requirements,
Acceptable, defined, 3 utility-interactive solar 436–437
Accreditation, 4–6 photovoltaic systems, Apprentice, 466
AFCIs (arc-fault circuit 451–452 Apprenticeship, 466
interrupters). See Arc- wind power, 446–451 Aquastat (liquid immersion
fault circuit interrupters Alternators (synchronous controller), 321–322
(AFCIs) generators), 445–446 Arc-fault circuit interrupters
Air conditioning Aluminum conductors, 72 (AFCIs)
branch-circuit protective American National Standards circuit breakers and,
device, 313–314 Institute, 14 190–191
central units, 71, 144, 312 American standard unit (ASU) installing and using, 191
circuit requirements, 311 of measurement, 6 insulation test, 191
connection diagram, 312 American Wire Gauge (AWG) mechanism of operation, 191
loads, 311, 313, 315 standard, 71 types of, 191
nameplate, 313–314 Ampacity Architectural drafting symbols,
receptacles, 311–312 apartments, 132 17–18
room units, 311 copper conductors, 75 Architectural drawings, 12, 22,
service calculation, 127–128 defined, 71–72 52
service entrance calculations, main service panel, 130 Architectural practice, 22
127–128 rating, consumer’s service, 129 Architectural scale, 22
terminology, 313–314 Ampacity rating, 129 Armoured cable
Alphabet of lines, 12 ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B standard, AC90 (BX), 86, 106–107,
Alternative energy systems 406 334
basic utility-interactive Antenna mounting, 391 ACWU90, 86, 88
photovoltaic, 452–456 Antennas, 391–393, 395–396, colour coding (cable wiring),
CEC and, 456–459 400 106–107
conductors, 459 Anti-islanding, 441, 459 description, 86–88
feed-in tariff (microfit) and net Apartment, service entrance TECK90, 86–88
metering, 440–442 calculations use and installation, 87–88
basement units, 132 Arrays, photovoltaic, 453, 459

483
484   SUBJECT INDEX

ASU (American standard unit) light positioning, 248 conduit wiring, 43

of measurement, 6 lighting fixtures, 249 device, 31, 39–50
ASU to SI units, 8 overview and code, 247–249 fill, 50
ASU units of measure, 6 special considerations, flush-mounted, 46
Attic cable installation, 92 247–256 gang-type, 36
Attic exhaust fan circuit vanity luminaires, 248 junction, 32
fan control, 297–299 Battery-operated smoke alarms, junction boxes, 36–40, 279–
fan operation, 297 369 280, 379, 381, 396, 469
overload protection, 299 Bedroom, front, receptacle number of conductors in,
overview, 296–297 branch-circuit, 221–222 49–50
short-circuit protection, fan Bedroom, master, 226 octagonal, 35, 47, 95
motor, 299 BIPV (building-integrated outlet, 31, 35, 37, 42, 53, 75,
Attic lighting and pilot light photovoltaic) modules, 203, 221, 228, 263, 268,
switches 455 390
installation of cable, 293–296 Bonding positioning, 43
overview, 292–293 bathroom circuit, 252–253 quick-check box selection
Authorization for connection or defined, 53 guide, 43
current permit, 6 definition of, 153 selecting, 46–50
AWG (American wire gauge), electric heating, 311 selection of, 226–227
8, 71 electrical outlets, 53 sizes, 42, 49, 222–223, 227
equipotential, 153 switch, 36–40, 50, 107, 240,
B jumpers and conductors, 83 280–281, 299, 307
Ballast protection kitchen circuit, 268 symbols, 35
fluorescent lamp dimming, main service entrance, 145, wall box size, 42, 49, 222–223,
206 268 227
overview, 204–205 ranges and dryers, 268 Branch circuit(s), 222–223
Bare bonding conductor, 85, at receptacles, 114–117 A24 outside receptacles, 222
268, 383, 417 service entrance equipment, attics, 292–297
Baseboard units, 307–308, 320 156–158 bathrooms, 247–256
Basement area, single-family spa or hot tub, 383 bedrooms, study, and halls,
dwelling, 64, 68, 127, 344 swimming pools, 379–380 217–231
Basement units, apartments, 132 wall boxes, 223 bonding of wall boxes, 223
Basement wall installation, 90, Bonding conductors box selection, 226–227
126–127, 151, 419–420 bare, 85, 268, 383, 417 cable runs, 217
Basements, cable installation, definition of, 153 CEC requirements, 67
344–345 pools, 380 defined, 60
Bathrooms Bonding-type receptacles, 114– definition of, 60
bonding requirements, 117, 183, 186–188 determining wall box size,
252–253 Box fill, 50 222–223
cable layout, 247 Box selection guide, 43 drawing wiring diagram of
definition of, 251 Boxes lighting circuit, 219–221
fan, 253–254 bonding metal box, 420 dwelling unit requirements,
hydromassage bathtub, cable clamps, 95 66–67
254–256 ceiling fan junction box, 230 estimating loads for outlets,
lamps and colour, 249–250 conductors in, 49–50, 85 217–219
 SUBJECT INDEX   485

front entry, porch, 240–244 metering and sequence of Branch-circuits, lighting and
garage, 67, 415–422 operation, 356–357 receptacle
grouping outlets, 217 multioutlet assembly, 345–346 basics, wire sizing and
kitchen, 67, 260–268 receptacle outlets, 344 loading, 60–64
laundry and washroom, scalding from hot water, Class J fuse, 163
288–291 354–355 dual-element (time-delay)
lighting, A14 for master sequence of operation, fuse, 161–162
bedroom, 226 355–356 lighting, 58–59
lighting and receptacle, speed of recovery, 354 lighting branch circuits, 64
59–64, 163 submersible pump, 349–351 preparing lighting and
lighting circuit for study, utility area, 346 receptacle layout, 66–69
exterior rear, living voltage variation, 358 receptacle branch circuits,
room, and hall lights, washing dishes, 355 65–66
227–228 water heater circuit, 351–352 receptacles, 59–60
living room and front entry, water heater load demand, voltage, 64
236–244 357–358 Break lines, 12–13
luminaires in clothes closets, well circuit, 346 Breaker. See Circuit breaker
224–226 workbench lighting, 344 Breaker main/breaker branches,
near electric baseboard workshop, 343–344 168–169
heating, 224 Branch-circuit overcurrent British thermal unit (Btu), 275,
overcurrent protection, 60, protection 304, 436
145, 160, 180, 192, 290, plug fuses, fuseholders and Brotherhood of Electrical
299, 311, 313, 347–349, fuse rejectors, 160–161 Workers (IBEW), 366
357 workshop, 357 Building-integrated photovoltaic
paddle fans, 228–231 Branch circuits, bathrooms (BIPV) modules, 455
receptacle A11, front bedroom bonding requirements, Building views
and study, 221–222 252–253 elevations, 14
sliding glass doors, 226 hallway lighting, 251 plan views, 14
split-circuit receptacles, 223 hydromassage bathtub, sections, 14
symbols, 219 254–256 Building visualizations, 13–14,
utility area, 346 lamps and colour, 249–250 23
voltage, 64 lighting fixtures, 251 Built-in cooking units, 67, 273,
workshops, 343–345 overview, 247–249 465
Branch circuit, living room receptacle outlet hallway, Bundled cables, 84, 86, 401
dimmer controls, 236–238 251–252 Bushings, 84, 88, 91, 95, 129,
incandescent lamp load inrush Branch circuits, laundry, 138, 143, 146, 156–158,
currents, 239–240 washroom and attic 420
lighting circuit overview, 236 attic exhaust fan, 296–299
Branch circuit, workshop and attic switches and pilot light C
utility area switches, 292–296 Cable(s)
cable installation in for dryer, 288–290 armoured, 86–88, 106–107
basements, 344–345 humidity control, 291–292 in attics, 91–93, 295
empty conduits, 346 lighting circuit, 290–291 bundled, 84
heating elements, 352–354 receptacle outlet, laundry, Category 5e, 401
jet pump operation, 347–349 290–291 coaxial, 401
486   SUBJECT INDEX

Cable(s) (Continued) requirements for lighting, 58 branch-circuit breaker,

installation of, 91–93 standards, 4 166–167
marking, 311 table of contents and index, 3 breaker main/breaker branches
NMSC. see Non-metallic- tables, 3 (series connected),
sheathed cable (NMSC) temperature ratings, 334 168–169
NMWU, 81, 84, 350, Canadian Fire Alarm currenting limiting ability, 182
416–417, 420 Association (CFAA), 366 description of, 163–164
protection of, 92, 295 Canadian Standards Association food waste disposal, 280
through ducts, 93 (CSA), 81, 351, 430 fuses and, 64
through wood and metal Carbon monoxide (CO) alarms GFCIs, 78, 144, 147, 185,
framing members, 89–91 code requirements, 370 255
wiring, 42, 50, 106 location and connection, interrupting ratings, 164–166
Cable, maximum length 370–371 lighting branch circuits, 64
calculation (CEC Table Carport. See Lighting branch main service, 129
D3), 81 circuits, garage and oil and gas furnace, 322, 326
Cable clamps outdoor lighting overcurrent protection,
boxes, 46, 51, 95 Cartridge-type fuses, 162–163 laundry, 290
description of, 46, 51, 95 Category 5E cables, 401 pools, 380, 384
Cable connectors, 73, 93–95 Category 5E data jacks, 403 single-pole AFCI circuit
Cable jack installation, 404 CATV (community antenna breaker, 191
Cable layout television), 390, 392, smoke alarms and security
bathroom, 247 395, 400 systems, 371
front bedroom, 221–222 CEC (Canadian Electrical split receptacle, 60
garage, 415 Code). See Canadian standby power systems, 428,
kitchen, 260 Electrical Code (CEC) 434
living room, 236 Ceiling fan hanger, 229, 230 symbol for, 34
master bedroom, 226–227 Ceiling luminaires, 240 two-pole, 267
recreation room, 334 suspended, 202–204 water heater, 357
study/bedroom, 227 Ceiling outlet, 21, 31, 201, 204, workshop, 345, 348, 356
symbols, 219–220 221–222, 226, 370 Circuit breaker wall-mounted
typical, 220 Central air conditioning, 312 oven, 277
workshop, 343 Central heating and air Circuit identification, 184–185
Cable length estimation, 221 conditioning, 312 Circuit loading guidelines, 218
Cable markings, 311 Central vacuum system, 422 Circuit rating, 72
Cable runs, 217 Centre lines, 12 conductors, 72
calculation, 81 CFAA (Canadian Fire Alarm Circuit requirements
Cable systems, 390, 392, 395, 400 Association), 366 air conditioning, 313
Cable television, 390, 392, 395, Chimes, 21, 422, 465 heating, 307–308, 311, 320
400 Circuit B7, 260, 286 Circuit schedule, 144, 146–147
Cad cell, 322 Circuit B11, 288 Circuit sizing, 381
Canada Occupational Health and Circuit breaker. see also Fuse(s) Circulating pump, 322
Safety Regulations, 190 AFCIs (arc-fault circuit Class 1 circuiting, 327–328
Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) interrupters), 190–191 Class 2 circuiting, 327–328
appendixes, 3 air conditioning, 313–314 Class A-type Ground-Fault
code terminology, 3 alternative energy solutions, Circuit Interrupter
diagrams, 3 452–456 (GFCI), 222
 SUBJECT INDEX   487

Class J fuse, 163–164 Communication jacks and marking, 73

Clearance requirements, mast- cables, jack pin micro hydro conductors,
type service, 139 designations and colour 460
Clock outlets, 263–264 codes, 475–476 neutral, 106–107, 141, 267,
Clothes closet luminaires, Community antenna television 337–338
224–226 (CATV), 390, 392, 395, neutral size, 75
Clothes dryer 400 number of conductors in box,
appliance connections, 465 Compact fluorescent lights 42–45, 47
branch circuits for, (CFL) overcurrent protection, 326.
288–290 cost of, 209 See also Overcurrent
calculating load, 125, 127–128, description of, 206–210 protection
132 Complete loop system, service entrance, 128–129
circuiting for, 266 telephone cable, 398 solar conductors, 459–460
neutral current, 75 Conductor(s) space for insulated conductors
outlet symbol, 21 alternative energy solutions, in box, 48
special purpose outlets, 472 459 telephone, 400
wattage needed, 436 aluminum, 72 temperature considerations, 75
Cloud (internet), 408 ampacity, 71–72 temperature effects, 274
CMA formula, 78 applications chart, 71 temperature ratings, 75
Coaxial cables, 401 bare bonding, 85, 268, 383, in trenches, 120
Coaxial (F) connector, 392 417 wind conductors, 460
Code terminology, 3 bonding, 51, 53, 83, 129, 145– wire connections, 73
Codes and Standards. See 146, 183, 193, 380 wire insulation, 74–75, 78,
Canadian Electrical Code box sizing, 42, 222–223, 227 82–83, 86, 88, 106–107,
(CEC) in boxes, 47–48 120, 141
Cold resistance, 109 circuit rating, 72 wire size, 71
Colour coding colour coding, 106–107, Conductor count, 51
cable wiring, 106 112–114 Conductor identification
conductors, 106–108, 311, 460 connection problems, 72–73, changing colours, 107–108
communication jacks and 75 colour coding (cable wiring),
cables, 475–476 consumer’s service, 140, 142, 106–107
fuses, 160 150, 158, 160 colour coding (conduit wiring),
raceway wiring, 107 count, 48, 50–51, 223 107
rules for changing, counter-mounted cooking colour coding for switch
conductors, 107–108, 311 units and, 274 connections, 112–114
switch connections,112–113 for electric water heater, 358 neutral conductor, 106
telephone cables, 398 equipment combinations and, Conductor size, approximate
termination jacks, 403 73 Rule One, 79–80
Combustion chamber, 322 grounded circuit, 106, 119, Rule Two, 80–81
Combustion head, 322 186, 220, 268, 311 Conductors, size
COMFIT, 441 identified/identification of, approximate, 79–80
Commonwealth Scientific 106–108 bonding-type receptacles,
and Industrial Research installation of, 73 116
Organization (CSIRO), insulation of wires, 74–75 for concrete-encased electrodes,
407 jet pumps and, 347 155
488   SUBJECT INDEX

Conductors, size Conduit size, 126, 129, 141– Control-circuit wiring, 305,
(Continued) 142, 150, 347–348 326–330
conductor application chart, Conduit wiring, boxes for, Cool white (CW), 212, 249
71 42–43 Cool white deluxe (CWX), 249,
counter-mounted cooking unit, Connections 262
273 bonding-type receptacles, Cord-connected portable
heat and air conditioning, 310, 116 devices, 190
313 dryers, 288–290 Cord connections, 280–281, 283
insulated copper, 82 flexible, 99 Correction factors, 62
jet pump operation, 347 at main panelboards, 146 Cost, electrical energy, 169–170,
laundry and washroom, 290 Connectors 208–210, 304, 441
neutral conductor, 128–129, for armoured cable, 93, 95 Counter-mounted cooking unit,
160 for non-metallic-sheathed 128
pools, 379–380, 383 cable, 93–94 bonding requirements, 274
service entrance equipment, Construction drawings, 7 general wiring methods, 274
128 Construction electrician, 464 installing, 273–274
for single dwelling unit, 126 Construction site, ground-fault overview and code, 273
voltage drop, 77 protection, 190 surface heating elements, 274
water heater, 357 Consumer’s service conductors, temperature effects on
workshop, 358 3, 142, 150, 158, 160 conductors, 274
Conduit(s) Continuous pilot ignition, 323 Critical load panelboard,
basement wall installation, Contour lines, 13, 24 427–429
151, 419–420 Control(s) Cross-flow turbines, 443
connection to meter base, 141 dimmers. See Dimmer Cross-section view, 12
empty conduits, 346 controls Crystalline silicon solar
EMT, 84, 327 electric heating, 306 photovoltaic cell, 453
fill, 149 fan, 228–230, 297, 299, 320, CSA (Canadian Standards
flexible metal conduit, 322–323 Association), 4, 14
99–100 fan/limit, 322 Cutting plane lines, 13
liquidtight flexible metal fan speed, 263
conduit, 100–101 humidity, 263, 291–293, 299, D
liquidtight flexible 304 Data systems
non-metallic conduit, 101 integrated, 323 data cable type, 401–403
rigid metal, rules for, 93–95 low-water, 323 data rate, 401
rigid PVC, 85, 89, 93–97, primary, 323 EIA/TIA 568A & 568B
348 pump, 321–324, 328 standard, 406
single-family dwelling, 130 remote-control circuit, 322, 326, installation of data cable, 403
sizing, 150 329 installation of terminal jacks,
spare, 147, 465 safety, 306, 320, 324 403–404
telephone, 400 temperature, 274–275, 299, overview, 400
telephone wiring, 400 325, 352, 355 wireless data networks,
underground, 143 three-way switch, 14, 404–406
wire colour coding, 107 110–114, 220, 226–227, DC fast or DCFC (DC fast
wiring, 42, 45, 107 236, 240, 293 chargers), 148–149
wiring boxes, 4, 45 zone, 304, 324 Decorative lighting, 242
Conduit fill, 129, 149, 326 Control circuit, 322 Decorative pools, 384
 SUBJECT INDEX   489

Demarcation point, 396 dimensions, 22 Electric heating

Details and sections, drawings, shop, 25 air conditioning and. see
24 specifications, 25 Heat pumps; Room air
Device boxes, 36–41 symbols and notation, 14–22 conditioners
Diagrams, working drawings, 24 technical, 12–13 baseboard units, 307–308
Dimensions, 22 visualizing a building, bonding, 311
Dimmer controls 13–14 control of electric heating,
electronic solid-state, working drawings, 23–25 306–307
236–238 Drawing scale, 23 electric furnaces, 310–311
incandescent lamps, 240 Drawing set, 23–24 general discussion, 304
Dimming, of light-emitting Drawing wiring diagram, 12 heat pumps, 311
diode lights, 213, 237, Dry-niche lighting luminaires, heating. see Electric heating;
239 380 Heat pumps
Direct/battery/feedthrough Dryer(s) loads not used simultaneously,
combination smoke alarms, bonding frames of ranges and 313–314
370 dryers, 290 location of baseboard units,
Direct-drive, defined, 297 clothes dryers, 288 308–310
Direct earth burial, 414–419 conductor sizes, 290 marking the conductors of
Disconnect location, 143 connection of, 288–290 cables, 311
Disconnecting means cord set, 288 separate circuit required, 305
electric water heater, load load calculation, 125, 127, 132 special terminology, 313–314
demand, 357 overcurrent protection, 290 types of heating systems, 304
food waste disposal, 280–281 surface mount and flush Electric range, 128
generators, 435 mount receptacles, 289 Electric vehicles (EV), 474
lighting fixtures, 112 wiring and components, 288 level 1 chargers, 148
main service, 435 Dual-element fuse (time-delay) level 2 chargers, 148
service entrance, 125–126 overload element, 161 level 3 chargers (DC fast),
standby power systems, 435 short-circuit element, 148–149
Dishwasher, 282–283 161–162 overview, 147–148
Dishwasher temperatures Dual-wattage heating element, Electric water heater
grounding, 282 353 controls for, 355
overview, 282 Duplex grounding receptacles, dish washing, 355
wiring, 282 179, 182, 426–427 metering and sequence of
Distribution generator, 440 operation, 356–357
Diversion load controller, 445 E overview, 352–354
Door jamb switch, 243–244 EIA-568-A standard, 406 recovery rate per litre of water,
Double-pole disconnect switch, EIA-568-B standard, 406 354
114 EIA/TIA 568A and 568B scalding from hot water,
Double-pole double throw cabling used for 354–355
(DPDT) transfer switch, telecommunications sequence of operation,
434 applications, 477 355–356
Double-pole switch, 113–114 description of, 406 voltage variation, 358
Draft regulator, 322 Eight-wire data network jacks, wiring for, 355
Drafting symbols, 322 477 Electric water heater, load
Drawing(s) Electric furnace, service demand
building views, 14 calculation, 127–128 bonding, 358
490   SUBJECT INDEX

Electric water heater, load box fill, 50 Electronic programmable

demand (Continued) boxes for conduit wiring, 42 thermostat, 325
branch-circuit overcurrent device boxes, 31 Electronic solid-state dimmer
protection, 357 ganged switch (device) boxes, controls, 238
conductor size, 358 39–42 Electronic timer, 255
disconnecting means, 357 grouping, 217 Elevation drawings, 24
Electrical floor plan symbols, 21 junction boxes, 36 Elevation views, 14, 18
Electrical hazards load estimating, 217–219 Elevations, 17–18, 24
installation, 178 locating, 50 Emergency panelboard, 427
pools, overview, 377–378 luminaires and outlets, 31–36 EMI (electromagnetic
pools, wiring methods, 378 multioutlet assembly, 21, 33, interference), 193
Electrical heating 343–346 EMT (electrical metallic tubing),
air conditioning and. see non-metallic outlet and device 7, 39, 50, 84, 90, 93, 95,
Heat pumps; Room air boxes, 39 151, 158, 203, 327, 453,
conditioners number of conductors in box, 469
baseboard units, 307–310 42–45 End cone, 322
bonding, 311 outlet count, 219, 222, 226, Enlarged scale, 22
circuit requirements, 305, 240, 260, 344, 415 Entry luminaires, 242
310–311 overview and code, 30–31 Equipotential bonding, 153
conductor and cable markings, positioning, 50–53 Exhaust fans, 291, 299
311 receptacle outlet, 30, 33 Extra-low voltage lighting, 261
control of, 306–307 selecting a box, 46–50 Extra-low voltage luminaires,
electric furnaces, 310–311 special purpose, 42 380
general discussion, 304 switch (device) boxes, 36–39
heat pumps, 311 switches, 36, 38 F
heating. see Electric heating; symbols and notation, 30–32 F connector coaxial cable, 392
Heat pumps Electrical symbols, 16 Faceplates, 52–53
heating systems, 304 Electrical Wiring: Commercial, Fan(s)
induction, 118 77 bathroom, 253–254
loads, 315 Electrician exhaust, 297–299, 344, 422
marking the conductors of apprenticeship, 466 paddle, 21, 31, 34
cables, 311 construction, 464 Fan control, 322
overview, 304 examination preparation, 466 Fan/limit control, 322
separate circuit required, 305 industrial, 464 Fan motor, 322–323
surface heating elements, profession as, 463–468 Fan noise, 263
273–274 Electrode Fan outlet, 21, 33, 263
swimming pool deck, conductor, 155 Feeder
381–382 grounding, 131, 137, 152–157, CEC table 39, 126
terminology for, 313–314 392, 428–429, 454 conductor application chart,
water heaters, 351–354 overview, 152 71
Electrical inspection, 6 Electrode systems, 152 defined, 61
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) Electromagnetic interference determining feeder rating,
cable installation, 89–91 (EMI), 193 290–291
rules for, 93–95 Electronic dimmers, 236–237 estimating loads for outlets,
Electrical outlets Electronic microprocessor, oil 217–218
bonding, 53 burner, 321 load balancing, 470
 SUBJECT INDEX   491

metering and sequence of Fountains, 384 Gas valve, 320, 323–324, 326
operation, 356 Four-way switch, 113 Gasoline powered generators,
underground, 350 Francis turbine, 443 426–427
Feedthrough ground-fault circuit Freestanding range, 278–279 General Clauses and Conditions,
interrupters, 182–184, heat generation by surface 25
188, 356, 370, 384 heating elements, 275 General lighting, 39, 127, 199,
Fire ring, 322 temperature control, 274–275 219, 236, 260, 291, 346,
Fittings Freezer receptacles, 179, 183, 465
boxes, 48 344 Generator(s)
flexible metal conduit, 99–100 Frequency hopping, 407 disconnecting means, 435
pipe, 19 Front elevation, 15 next step up, 427–429
PVC, 98 Front entry, porch overview, 435–436
Five-dial meter, 169 cable layout, 241 permanently installed, 431
Fixture drops, 334 front entry, porch, 241 permits, 436
Fixture specifications, 31 overview, 240–244 precautions for, 426
Fixture stud, 46, 48 Full scale, 22 reasons for, 426
Flat rate water heater, 357 Furnaces, 310–311 simplest, 426–427
Flexible connections, 99 Fuse(s) sizing recommendations,
Flexible metal conduit, 99–100 cartridge-type, 162–163 435–436
Flexible non-metallic conduit, Class J fuse, 163–164 sound level, 436
101, 328 interrupting ratings, 164–166 standard requirements for,
Floor plan, 15, 24 low-voltage, 161 430–431
Flow switch, 281 main service, 129 wiring diagrams, 431–434
Flow valve, 323 plug fuses, fuseholders and Generator panelboard, 427
Flue, 323 fuse rejectors, 160–161 Generator sizing, 435
Fluorescent ballasts, 205 Fuse rejecters, 160–161 Geosynchronous orbit, 393
Fluorescent lamps Fused main/breaker branches, GFCI. See Ground–fault circuit
colour temperature of, 212 166–167 interrupters
and incandescent combined, Fused main/fused branches, 163, Giromill generator (turbine),
250 166 448–449
kitchen lighting, 262 Fuseholders, 160–161 Glass-break detectors, 373
Fluorescent lighting, dimming, Graphical symbols, 14
206 G Grid-tied micro hydro, 445–446
Fluorescent valance, 31 Gang-type switch (device) box, Grid-tied wind power, 450
Flush-mounted box, 40, 46, 280 36, 39–42 Ground-fault circuit interrupters
Flush switches, 39, 41, 108, 112, Gangable device boxes, 87, 227 (GFCIs)
299 Garage(s) CEC requirements, 178–181
Food waste disposal cable layout. see Lighting circuit breaker, 78, 144, 147,
bonding, 282 branch circuits, garage 185, 255
disconnecting means, 280–281 and outdoor lighting connections of, 189
flow switch, 281 outlet count and estimated construction sites, 185–190
overcurrent protection, 280 load, 415 duplex grounding, 179
turning on and off, 281 Garage door opener, 67, 179, extra-low-voltage lighting in
wiring for, 281 408, 421, 437, 471 pools, 380
Footcandle, 212 Gas heating. See Oil and gas feedthrough, 183–184
Forward phase dimming, 239 heating front and back photo, 182
492   SUBJECT INDEX

Ground-fault circuit interrupters Grounding, definition, 153 Hot resistance, 109

(GFCIs) (Continued) Grounding bushings, 156–158 Hot surface igniter, 323
identification, testing Grounding clamp, 156 Hot terminal placement, 51
and recording GFCI Grounding conductor, definition, Hot tubs, 125, 254–255,
receptacles, 184–185 153 377–384
improper connections of, 189 Grounding electrodes, 131, 137, Hot water scalding, 354–355
internal components and 152–157, 160, 392, 396, Humidistat, 263, 292–293
connections, 181 428–429, 432–433, 452, Humidity control
interrupting ratings, 181 454 overview, 291–292
labelled signs, 185 Grounding plates, 154 wiring, 292
operation of, 180 Guarantee of installation, 465 wiring for, 293
plug- and cord-connected Guard strips, 92–93, 295–296 Hydro power
portable devices, 179 hydrokinetic turbines, 444
precautions for, 181–182 H impulse turbines, 442–443
principle of, 180 Hallway lighting, 251 reaction turbines, 443
receptacle, 49, 118, 184–185, Heat exchanger, 323 Hydrokinetic turbines, 444
187–189 Heat generation, by induction, Hydromassage tub, 384
recording, 184–185 118–119, 276 electrical connections,
in recreation room, 339 Heat pumps, 311 254–255
replacing existing receptacles, Heat/vent/light/night-light units, overview, 254
185–189 144, 247, 253 Hydronic system, 323
residence circuits, 182–183 Heatex™, 311
testing, 184–185 Heating. See Electrical heating; I
in workshops, 344 Oil and gas heating IBEW (International
Ground-fault protection, Heating, Refrigeration and Air Brotherhood of Electrical
construction sites, 190 Conditioning Institute of Workers), 366
Ground-floor units, 131–132 Canada, 304 Identified conductor, 21, 106–
Ground plates, 154 Heating elements, 352–354 108, 181, 187, 220, 268
Grounded circuit conductor, Hickey, 42, 48, 223 IEC (International
106, 186, 220, 268, 311 Hickey and fixture stud, 48 Electrotechnical
Grounding Hidden lines, 12 Commission), 4
dishwasher, 282 High-definition television Ignition, 321, 323–324, 326
electrode conductor, 137, (HDTV), 395 Impulse transients, 192
152–157, 428–429 High-temperature limit control, Impulse turbines
electrode systems, 152–154 323 cross-flow turbine, 443
main service, 129 High-temperature wire, 78 Pelton turbine, 442–443
methods of, 153–154 Home automation Turgo turbine, 443
non-metallic water pipe, 154 integrative technology, Incandescent
reasons for, 151–152 408–409 cost of, 209
requirements, 138, 141, 400 smart lighting, 409–410 lumen and wattage
satellite antennas, 394 wired communication, comparison, 208
service entrance equipment, 406–407 options for, comparison of,
154–156 wireless communication, 209–210
summary, grounding, 154–156 407–408 Incandescent/fluorescent
system grounding, 157, 159–160 Home network router, 402 lighting, 200–201,
telephones, 400 Horizontal-axis turbines, 447 213–214
 SUBJECT INDEX   493

Incandescent lamp dimmer J lamp type, 261–262

controls, 239–240 J class fuse, 161, 163–164, 166 lighting in, 260–264
Indoor air quality, 253–254 Jack pin designations and microwave oven, 277
Induced draft blower, 323 colours, 475–476 portable dishwashers,
Induction heating, 118–119, 276 Jet pump operation 282–283
Inductor generators branch-circuit overcurrent range hood exhaust fan, 263
(asynchronous protection, 348 ranges, ovens, and countertop
generators), 446 conductor size, 347 cooking units, branch
Industrial electrician, 464 conduit size, 347 circuits for, 277–278
Infinite-position temperature overload protection for motor, receptacles in, 264–267
controls, 274–275 348–349 self-cleaning oven, 277
Input percentage, 275 overview, 347 split-circuit receptacles
Inspection, 75, 108, 140, 203, pump motor, 347 and multiwire circuits,
268, 345, 372, 436, 469 pump motor circuit, 347 267–268
Inspection fees, 469 wiring for, 349 surface heating elements, 274
Installation, guarantee of, 470 Joule, defined, 192 temperature control, 274–275
Institute of Electrical and Junction boxes, 32, 34, 36, undercabinet lighting, 261
Electronics Engineers 39–40, 50, 202–203, 205, wall-mounted oven, 276–277
(IEEE), 14, 407 250, 255, 268, 274, 279– Knockouts, 42, 93, 95, 151,
Insulated ground bushing, 158 280, 307–308, 320–321, 248, 307
Insulated plastic bushing, 158 328–329, 344, 350, 358,
Insulation test, 191 379–381, 396–398, 453, L
Integrated control, 323 457, 469 Lamp
Intermittent duty ignition, 323 colour of, 212, 249–250
International Brotherhood K efficacy of, 212
of Electrical Workers Kaplan turbine, 443–444 Lampholders, 415
(IBEW), 366 Kilowatt (kW), 170 Laundry
International Electrotechnical Kilowatt hour (kWh), 441 lighting circuit, 291
Commission (IEC), 4 Kilowatt rating, 218 receptacle outlet, 290–291
International Organization for Kitchen Laundry and washroom,
Standardization (ISO), 4 B7 circuit, 260 288–291
International System of Units bonding, 268 Lead-in wires, 390, 392,
(SI), 6 branch circuits, 277–280 395–396
Interrupted duty ignition, 323 built-in cooking units, 273, Leakage current collectors, 384
Interrupting ratings 279–280 Legend of symbols, 24
fuses and circuit breakers, cable layout, 260 Length measurements, 6–7
164–166 clock outlets, 263–264 Level 1 chargers, 148
GFCIs, 181–182 cord connection, fixed Level 2 chargers, 148
Inverse time characteristic, 152, appliances, 283 Level 3 chargers (DC fast),
348 counter-mounted cooking unit, 148–149
Inverters, 454–456 272–273 Light-emitting diodes (LEDs),
Ionization smoke alarms, 21, dishwasher, 282 212–214
367 electric ranges, 274 array of, 213
ISO (International Organization fan noise, 263 brightness, 206–210
for Standardization), 4 food waste disposal, 280–282 cost of, 209
Isolated ground receptacle, 193 freestanding range, 278–279 dimming of, 213, 237, 239
494   SUBJECT INDEX

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Lighting fixtures Low-voltage decorative lighting,

(Continued) in bathrooms, 250 242
history of, 213 outdoor, 243 Low-voltage fuses, 161
life of, 214 post lights, 421 Low-voltage incandescent
luminare, 225 spa or hot tub, 383 lighting system, 239–240
soffit lighting, 250 types of, 35 Low-water control or cutoff, 323
TVSS devices and, 192–193 underwater, 378 LPG (propane) powered
types of, 213 Lighting outlet symbols, 31 generators, 431
workbench lighting, 344 Lighting outlets, dwelling unit, Lumens per watt (lm/w), 212
Lighting 59 Luminaires
B7 circuit, 260 Line(s) entry, 242
branch circuits, 64. See also break, 13 fixtures and outlets, 31–37
Branch circuits centre, 12 outdoor porch and entry, 243
CEC requirements, 58 contour, 13 recessed, 202–204
hallway, 251 cutting plane, 13 residential, 199–200
kitchen, 260–264 hidden, 12 suspended ceiling, 203–204
options for, comparison of, phantom, 13 types of, 37, 199–204. see
209–210 section, 12–13 also Lighting
outlets for a dwelling unit, 59 types of, 12 underwater, 380–381
preparing layout, 66–69 visible, 12 valance, 31
residential, 199–200 Line-to-line loads, 77 vanity, 248
workbench, 344 Line-to-neutral loads, 77 wires for, 49
Lighting branch circuits, garage Lineweight, 13 Luminaires and ballasts
and outdoor lighting Liquid immersion controller ballast protection, 204–206
central vacuum system, 422 (aquastat), 321–322, 325 CEC requirements recessed
lighting branch circuits, 415 Liquidtight flexible metal fixtures, 201–204
outdoor wiring, 416–417 conduit, 100–101, 328 LED vs. CFL brightness,
overhead garage door opener, Liquidtight flexible non-metallic 206–210
421–422 conduit, 101, 328 types of, 200–201
receptacle outlets, 415–416 Living room, 236 voltage limitations, 206
underground wiring, 418–421 Load
Lighting branch circuits, kitchen air conditioning, 311–315 M
bonding, 268 heating, 315 Magnetic contacts, 372
kitchen lighting, 260–264 incandescent lamp, 239–240 Main gas valve, 323
lighting circuit B7, 260 pump, 348–349 Main service, 129–131, 143–
small-appliance, 264–267 range, 128 147, 150, 156, 181, 219,
split-circuit receptacles Load balancing, 470 268, 310, 379, 384, 392,
and multiwire circuits, Load centre, 145–146, 166, 357 396, 428–429, 432–433
267–268 Load estimating, 218 Main service disconnect
Lighting circuit Load-side connection, 456 location
B7 circuit, 260 Location of outlets, 30–31, disconnect means (Panel A),
laundry and washroom, 291 50–53, 308, 469 144–146
overview, 236 Locknuts, 158–159, 420 load centre (Panel B),
for study, exterior rear, living Loomex, 81 146–147
room, and hall lights, Low-noise block amplifier overview, 143–144
227–228 with integral feed Main service fuse or circuit
wiring diagram, 219–221 (LNBF), 392 breaker, 129
 SUBJECT INDEX   495

Main service panel, 129 Multiple meter installation, connecting ceiling fixtures, 203
Mast-type service entrance 158–160 counter-mounted cooking unit,
clearance requirements, 139 Multiset coupler, 390 274
support, 139–141 Multiwire circuits, 106, 220, 268 description, 81–85
Materials, specifications, 25 dryers, 288
May, defined, 3 N food waste disposal, 282
Measurement systems, 6–8 Nameplate, air conditioner, 315 garage and outdoor lighting,
Measuring instruments, 22–23 National Building Code of 417–418
Mechanical timer, 255 Canada, 335, 416 Heatex™, 311
Medium access control (MAC) National Electrical Code (NEC), installation, 84–86
sublayer, 407 430–431 kitchen, 268
Metal box, bonding, 420 National Standards of Canada laundry and washroom, 290
Metal conduit, 51, 77, 84, 89, (NSC), 4 octagonal outlet box, 25
93, 95, 100–101, 138, Natural gas-fuelled generator, outdoor wiring, 416–417
193, 203–204, 268, 327, 431–433 smoke alarms and security
349, 378, 380, 419 Natural gas powered generators, systems, 370
Metal-oxide varistors (MOVs), 431–433 telephone conductors, 400
192 Neon lamp, 115 types of, 417
Meter, 150–151 Neon lighting fixtures, 206 workshop, 345
Meter base, conduit connection, Neon pilot lamp, 293, 295 Non-metallic water pipe, 154
141 Nest®, 408 Nonseparately derived system,
Meter installations, multiple, Net metering, 441 434
158–160 Neutral conductor, 106–107, Notes explaining symbols, 16,
Meter reading, 169–171 141, 337–338 22
Meter socket, 73, 132, 141–142, Neutral current, 75, 430 Notwithstanding, defined, 3
150 NMD90 cable, 75, 81, 83–84, Nozzle, 323
Metering, 158, 163, 170–171, 336 NSC (National Standards of
356, 440–442, 450 workbench lighting, 344 Canada), 4
Metric (SI) units of measure, 6–7 NMSC gangable device boxes,
Micro hydro power generation 87 O
grid-tied micro hydro, NMW cable, 81, 84 Occupant’s test record, 186
445–446 NMWU cable. See Non- Octagonal outlet boxes, 35–36
overview, 444–445 metallic-sheathed cable Off-gassing, 253
standalone micro hydro, 445 (NMSC) Off-grid wind power system,
Micro-inverters, 455 No-niche luminaires, 380 450
Microwave oven, 277 Noise, 193, 263, 400, 422, 436 Ohm’s law, 338
Millivolt (self-generating) Non-metallic outlet box, 36, 39 Oil and gas heating
system, 326 Non-metallic-sheathed cable control circuit wiring,
Miscellaneous symbols, 34 (NMSC), 274 326–330
Modular, defined, 397 in attics, 91–93, 293 major components, 321–326
Motion detectors, 34, 371–373 bare bonding conductor vs. principles of operation,
Multioutlet assembly, 21, 33, grounded circuit conductor, 320–321
343–346 268 self-generating (millivolt)
Multioutlet assembly, workbench bathroom, 252, 254 system, 326
load considerations, 34 5–346 colour coding (cable wiring), supply circuit wiring, 326
wiring to, 346 106–107 wiring diagram, 326
496   SUBJECT INDEX

Oil burner, 323 Overhead service, 138, 142 Piping symbols, 19

Orthographic projection, 14 Overload element, 161 Plan views, 14
Outdoor area lighting, 416–421 Overload protection, 182, Plaster rings, 49
Outdoor luminaires with lamps, 280–281, 292–293, Plug- and cord-connected
421 299, 304, 313, 323, portable GFCIs, 190
Outdoor wiring, 243 347–349, 351 Plug-connected portable devices,
overview, 416 179, 427
wiring with NMWU cable, P Plug fuses, 160–161
416–417 Paddle fans, 228–231 Plug-in strip, 193, 345, 470
Outlet box, vapour boot, 35 Panel Plug-type fuses, 160
Outlet count, 219, 222, 226, 228, main service, 130, 156, 219, Plumbing symbols, 19
240, 260, 335, 344, 415 429, 432–433 Pools, spas, and hot tubs
Outlet locations, 52 service entrance equipment, CEC-defined pools, 378
Outlets. See also Electrical outlets 144–147 electric heating of pool decks,
grouping, 217 standby power systems, 381–382
special purpose, 472–473 426–427 electrical hazards, 377–378
Outlets, estimating loads for Panel A, 144–146 fountain and decorative pools,
circuit loading guidelines, 218 Panel B, 146–147 384
divide load evenly, 219 Panels and load centres grounding and bonding,
estimating number of outlets breaker main/breaker branches 379–380
by amperage, 218–219 (series connected), hydromassage bathtub, 384
load estimation, 218 168–169 pool wiring, 377
overview, 217–219 breaker main/breaker branches spas and hot tubs, 382–384
review, determining minimum (standard plastic case), summary, 384
number of light circuits, 167–168 underwater luminaires,
219 fused main/breaker branches, 380–381
Outside receptacle, 222 166–167 Porcelain lampholders, 344
Oven, wall mounted, 128 fused main/fused branches, Portable dishwashers, 282–283
Overcurrent protection 166 “Portable Engine-Generator
air conditioning, 306 Parabolic dish, 392 Standard UL 2201,”
branch-circuit. see Branch- Pelton turbine, 442–443 429–430
circuit overcurrent Permanently installed generator, Portable generators, 427–428
protection 431–433, 436 Post lights, 421
for conductors, 65 Permanently installed swimming Power conditioning units, 445
dryers, 290 pool, 378 Power over Ethernet (PoE),
fan motor, 299 Permits, 436 406–407
food waste disposal, 280 Personal safety, 4 Practicable, defined, 3
fuse rejecters, 160, 165 Photoelectric smoke alarms, Primary control, 323
fuseholder, 160 366 Propane (LPG) powered
jet pump motor, 347–349 Photovoltaic array, 453 generators, 431
plug fuses, 164 Photovoltaic system, 441, 451– Pryouts, 93, 95
utility-interactive solar 452, 455–456, 460 Pump and zone controls, 324
photovoltaic systems, 459 Pictorial drawings, 13–14 Pump controls, 350
Overhead garage door opener Pilot light connections, Pump motor, 347–351, 378–379,
principles of operation, 421 294 381, 383, 437
wiring door openers, 422 Pilot light switches, 114 Punchdown tools, 403
 SUBJECT INDEX   497

PVC conduit, 85, 89, 93, 96–98, kitchen, 63, 67 Recreation room
129, 138, 141–142, 154, in kitchens, laundry and cable layout for, 334
157, 348, 418–420 garage, 67 ceiling of, 334
PVC conduit, rigid, 85, 89, laundry and washroom, 291 lighting in, 334–335
93–98, 348 layout of, behind kitchen outlets in, 335
rules for, 93–95 counter, 265 recessed luminaires in, 334
PVC fittings, 98 locating in basement, 64 three-wire circuits in, 335–339
outlets, 30, 33, 199, 344 two-wire circuits in, 335–339
R outside, 222–223 Red Seal National Occupational
Raceways plug-in strip, 345 Analysis, 463
cable installation, 89 positioning, 50–52 Red Seal Occupational Standard,
empty conduits, 346 preparing layout, 66–69 463–468
SI and American designators range/oven, 278 Reduced scale, 22
for sizing, 8 recessed clock, 264 Refrigerator receptacles, 67,
trade size measurements, 8 replacing existing, 185–189 183, 264
Radio frequency interference replacing existing where Remote-control circuit, 329
(RFI), 193 bonding means do not Remote power application, 440
Raised covers, 49 exist, 187–189 Residential lighting
Range hood exhaust fan, 263 for room air conditioners, accent, 199
Range load, 128 312 general, 199
Ranges, freestanding. See single and duplex, 264 security, 199–200
freestanding range special purpose and counter, task, 199
Reaction turbines kitchen, 266 Residential security system, 373
Francis turbine, 444 split-circuit, 51, 227, 237, Retention ring, 322
Kaplan turbine, 443–444 266–267 Return on investment (ROI), 441
Receptacle(s) split-switched, 60, 237 Reverse phase dimming, 239
125 volt, duplex in kitchen, split-wired, 60 RFI (radio frequency
265 symbols, 21 interference), 193
air conditioning, 311–312 tamper-resistant, 59–60 Rigid metal conduit, rules for,
baseboard heating and, 224 ungrounded-type, 117–118 93–95
in basements, 68 weatherproof cover, 268 Rigid PVC conduit, 85, 89, 93–
bonding-type, 114–117 Receptacle outlet, 30–31, 33, 35, 98, 348
branch circuits, 65–66 37, 39, 50, 52, 63, 66, 90, Rigid PVC fittings, 98
CEC requirements, 60, 62 108, 178–179, 182, 184, Ring wave transients, 192
central vacuum system, 344 192–193, 199, 218–220, Robotic vacuum, 409
circuiting for, 67–68 222–224, 226–227, 236, Romex, 81
clothes dryers, 274 240, 251–252, 266, 274, Rooftop array of modules, 453
duplex grounding, 426–427 290–291, 308–311, 344, Room air conditioners
freezer, 179, 183 415–416, 422, 429, overview, 311
garage, 67 470–471 receptacles for, 311
GFCIs. see Ground-fault Recessed luminaires, 32, 37, Roughing-in
circuit interrupters 201–205, 334 cooking unit, 273
(GFCIs) CEC requirements, 207 hydromassage bathtub, 255
hallways, 63, 66, 226, lumen and wattage recessed luminare, 202
251–252 comparison, 208 rotor installation, 395
isolated ground, 193 Recessed pot light, 225 wiring, 247, 264
498   SUBJECT INDEX

Router, 402 basic load calculation, 127 Shall be, defined, 3

RSOS. See Red Seal code requirements, 126 Shall be permitted, defined, 3
Occupational Standard conductors, 129 Shall have, defined, 3
RW90, 419 counter-mounted cooking unit, Shall not, defined, 3
RW90XLPE, 75 128 Sheet metal ductwork symbols,
R90XLPE, 74 electric furnace, 127–128 20
electric range, 128 Sheet metal symbols, 17, 20
S ground-floor area, 131 Shop drawings, 25
Safety controls, 324 main service panel, 129 Short-circuit currents, 164–166
Satellite antennas neutral conductor, 128–129 Short-circuit element, 161–162
CEC rules for, 395–396 service calculation, 131 SI (International System of
dish mounting location, 393 service requirements, 125 Units), 6
grounding, 394 single-family dwelling, Simultaneous disconnect, 268
installation of receiver, 394 126–131 Single-family dwelling
mounting the dish, 394 size of conductors and air conditioning, 127–128
overview, 392–393 disconnecting means, basement area, 127
Satellite receiver, 394–395 125–126 calculation for subpanel B, 131
Savonious generator subpanel B, 131 consumer’s service ampacity
(turbine), 448 wall-mounted oven, 128 rating, 129
Scale, 22–23 watts calculation, service and electric furnace, 127–128
SCC (Standards Council of neutral conductor, 125 electric range, wall-mounted
Canada), 4–5, 14, 30 Service entrance equipment oven or counter mounted
Schedules, circuit, 144, 146–147 bonding, 156–158 cooking unit, 128
Schematic drawing, 12 branch-circuit overcurrent ground-floor area, 126
Sconces, 37 protection, 160–164 grounding electrode
Scope, of work, 441, 469 conduit size, 150 conductor, 131
Section lines, 12–13 disconnect location, 143–147 load calculation, 127
Section views, 14 feeding electric vehicles, main disconnect, 131
Sectional boxes, 42, 48, 263 147–149 main service bonding
Sectional view, 12, 14 grounding, 151–152 conductor, 129
Security lighting, 199–200 grounding electrode systems, main service conduit size, 129
Security systems, 371–373 152–154 main service fuse or circuit
Self-cleaning oven, 277 interrupting ratings, fuses and breaker, 129
Self-generating (millivolt) circuit breakers, 164–166 main service ground, 129
system, 326 mast-type, 139–141 main service panel, 129
Separately derived system, 430, meter, 150–151 main service panel ampacity
434 multiple meter installation, and number of circuits,
Sequence of operation, 355–357 158–160 130
Series-connected or rated non-metallic water pipe, 154 neutral conductor, 128–129
systems, 167–169 overhead service, 138 service entry conductor size,
Service entrance calculations, panels and load centres, 128
125–132 166–169 summary of calculations, 128
air conditioning, 127–128 reading the meter, 169–171 Single-family dwelling units, 24,
ampacity rating, 130, 166 service equipment, 137–138 125–126, 131, 145, 156,
for apartments, 131–132 summary, grounding, 154–156 469
basement area, 127 underground, 141–143 Single-phase watt-hour meter,
basement units, 132 Shall, defined, 3 169
 SUBJECT INDEX   499

Single-pole AFCI circuit Solar cells, 452–454 exhaust fans, 470

breaker, 191 Solar photovoltaic system, general, 469
Single-pole and three-way solid 452–456 guarantee of installation, 470
state dimmer control Solenoid, 324 load balancing, 470
circuits, 238 Sones, 254, 263 location of outlets, 469
Single-pole switch, 110–111 Spare conduits, 470 luminaires, 470
Sirens, 372 Spark ignition, 324 materials, 469
Site (plot) plan, 24 Spas and hot tubs, 125, 254–255, number of outlets per circuit,
Sizing 377–378, 382–384 470
AWG, 46–47 bonding, 383–384 overhead garage door opener,
boxes, 49, 217, 223 electric water heaters, 384 471
circuit, 381–382 indoor installation, 383 permits and inspection fees,
conductors, 277, 282, 326, 329 leakage current collectors, 384 469
conduit, 150 luminaires, 383 plug-in strip, 470
generator, 435–436 outdoor installation, 382–383 scope, 469
neutral current, 75 receptacles, 383 service entrance, 471
overload protection for motor, wiring and circuit protection, spare conduits, 470
348–351 384 special-purpose outlets,
service entrance conductor, Special-purpose outlets, 472–473 472–473
125–126 Specifications subpanel, 471
wall box, 222–223 baseboard units, 308 switches, receptacles and
wire, 60–64 conductor size, 347–348, 358 faceplates, 470–471
Sliding glass doors, 226 general bonding telephones, 471
Small appliances, 58–59, 219, considerations, 268 television outlets, 471
260–268 hydromassage bathtub, 255 temporary wiring, 470
Smart lighting, 409–410 lighting types, 200 wiring methods, 469
Smart thermostats, 408 locating outlets, 50–51 workmanship, 469
Smoke alarms luminaires and outlets, 31–36 Speed control switch, 299
direct/battery/feedthrough meter base, 95 Speed of recovery, 354
combination, 370 routers, 406 Spikes, 192
features, 369 special purpose outlets, 42 Split-circuit receptacles, 51, 227,
importance of, 366 submersible pump, 349 237, 266–267, 348
installation requirements, ULC (Underwriters Split-switched receptacle wiring,
367–368 Laboratories of Canada), 221, 223
interconnected, 370 5–6 positioning, 223
ionization, 367 underground conduits, 419 Squirrel cage turbines, 443
location of, 367–368 wall boxes, 223 Standalone micro hydro, 445
manufacturers’ requirements, work drawings, 25 Standalone wind power,
368–369 Specifications, for single-family 449–450
photoelectric, 366 dwelling Standard network interface
wiring requirements, 369 appliance connections, 470 (SNI), 397–398
Smoke and carbon monoxide chimes, 470 Standards
(CO) alarms, 366, 408 circuit identification, 471 CEC junction boxes, 39
Snap-over type thermostat, 354 codes, 469 codes and, 2–4
SNI (standard network conductors, 470 design and planning of
interface), 397–398 dimmers, 470 dwelling units, 58
500   SUBJECT INDEX

Standards (Continued) Supply authority distribution symbols, 14

grouping outlets, 217 system, 458 three-way, 38, 111–112
Institute of Electrical and Supply-circuit wiring, 326 timer, 298–299
Electronics Engineers Supply-side connection, 457 toggle, 38, 108–112
(IEEE), 14 Surface heating elements, Switch boxes, 35–36, 39–42, 50,
luminaires, 200–201 273–274, 304 52, 107, 220, 240, 268,
recessed luminaires, 207 Surface-mounted luminaires, 32, 280–281, 299, 307, 390
routers, 406–408 37, 201, 224–225 Switch connections, colour
solar cells, modules and Surge protective devices coding, 112–114
arrays, 453 description of, 191–192 Switching relay, 324
Standards Council of Canada schematic diagram of, 192 Symbols
(SCC), 30 transients, 192–193 cable layout, 219
standby power systems, Surge suppressors, 193 drafting, 17–18
429–431 Surges, 192 ductwork, 20
Standards Council of Canada Suspended ceiling luminaires, electrical, 37
(SCC), 4–5, 14 202–204 electrical floor plan, 21
Standby power systems Swimming pools graphical, 14
disconnecting means, 435 bonding and grounding rules, legend of, 24
generator sizing 379–381 lighting outlet, 32
recommendations, deck heating, 381–382 miscellaneous, 34
435–437 defined, 378 notations, 31
overview, 426 electric heating, 382 notes explaining, 16–22
panelboard, 454 electrical hazards, 377–378 overview, 219
permanently installed grounding, 379–380 plumbing, 19
generator, 431 lighting fixtures underwater, switches, 36
precautions for generators, 426 378 System grounding, 118, 138,
reasons for, 426 underwater luminaires, 142, 146, 154–157,
standard requirements for, 380–381 159–160, 183, 347,
429–431 wiring, 377 379, 471
transfer switches or Switch(es)
equipment, 434–435 boxes, 36–39, 44 T
types of, 426–429 control at 3 locations, 114 T-bar ceiling, 334
wiring diagrams, 431–434 door jamb, 243–244 T90 Nylon, 74–75
Station wire, 396 double-pole, 114 Tables, in CEC, 3
Steel stud installation, 91 flow, 281 Tamper-resistant receptacles,
Storable swimming pool, 378 flush, 39, 41, 108, 112, 299, 119–120
Study, 227 470 Task lighting, 199
Study/bedroom four-way, 113 Technical drawings, 12–13
cable layout, 227 gang-type, 39–42 Telecommunications
outlet count and estimated location, 110–114 applications, 477
load, 228 next to doorways, 52 Telephone cables, 397–399
Submersible pump overview, 36 Telephone installation, 397
bonding requirements, 350 pilot light, 114–115 Telephone jacks, 399
overview, 349–351 single-pole, 110–111 Telephone modular jacks, 399
Subpanel B calculation, 131 speed control, 297–298 Telephone specifications,
Subpanel specifications, 131 standard, 38 396–400
 SUBJECT INDEX   501

Telephone wiring, 399 Tiled wall, outlets on, 52 Underground service,

conduit, 400 Time-current curve, 167–168, 141–143
grounding, 400 178 Underground type meter base, 151
installation of conductors, 400 Time curve, 178 Underground wiring
overview, 396–398 Timer switch, 298–299 installation of conduit
safety features, 400 Toggle switches underground, 419–421
Television conductor colour coding, overview and rules, 418
CEC rules for cable TV, 392 112–114 Underwriters Laboratories of
general wiring, 390 toggle switch ratings, 109 Canada (ULC), 5–6, 366
satellite antennas, 392–395 toggle switch types, Ungrounded-type receptacles,
television installation 110–112 117–118
methods, 390–392 Trade size conversions, 7–8 Unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
Television installation, Transfer switches or equipment cables, 396
390–392 capacity and ratings of, Utility areas
Television outlets, 221, 390, 434–435 defined, 346
392, 471 Transformer, 325 dishwasher temperatures, 355
Temperature control, 274–275, Transformer leads, 49 heating elements, 352–354
299, 325, 351, 355 Transient voltage surge hot water scalding, 354–355
Temperature ratings, 75, 82, 202, suppressors (TVSS), 192 jet pump operation, 347–349
204, 207, 274, 294, 310 transients, 192–193 metering, 356–357
Temporary wiring, 470 Transients sequence of operation,
Tesla, Nikola, 407 impulse, 192 355–356
Tesla charger, 148–149 ring wave, 192 speed of recovery, 354
Testing, 4–6, 93, 169, 180–181, Transition box, 453 submersible pump, 349–351
184–185, 191, 201, 352, TRIACS, 237–238 voltage variation, 358
378, 384, 426, 445 Tungsten filament lamp, 109, water heater circuit, 351–352
Testing and accreditation, 4–6 239 water heater load demand,
TEW, 74 Turbulator, 322 357–358
Thermocouple, 324 Turgo turbine, 443 well pump circuit, 346
Thermopile, 325 TVSS (transient voltage surge Utility-interactive solar
Thermostat, 325 suppression), 192 photovoltaic system
Threaded conduit bodies, TW75, 419 arrays, 453–454
supporting, 417 TWN 75, 75 basic components, 452–456
Three-dimensional view, 13–14, Two-wire circuits, 335–339 building-integrated modules,
23 Type IC luminaire, 200, 203, 455
Three-pole double throw 207, 224–226 connection of inverters,
(TPDT) transfer switch, Type Non-IC luminaire, 200, 454–455
434 207 electrical hazards, 451–452
Three-way switch Type RG-6 coaxial cable, 394 inverter, 454–455
control feed at light, 112 Type RG-59 coaxial cable, micro-inverters and AC
control feed at switch, 112 394 modules, 455–456
description of, 110–112 modules, 453–454
Three-wire circuits, 31, 51, 106– U overview, 451–452
107, 109, 220, 264–265, UL White Book, 430 safety features of inverters, 454
267, 335–339 Ultralume™ 3000, 262 solar cells, modules and
TIA standard, 406, 477 Undercabinet lighting, 261 arrays, 453–454
502   SUBJECT INDEX

V scalding hazard, 354–355 for jet pump, 349

Vacuum system, central, 344, sequence of operation, multioutlet assembly, 346
422 355–356 outdoor, 416–417
Valves symbols, 19 spa or hot tub, 384 roughing-in, 247, 264
Vanity, 248 speed of recovery, 355–356 underground, 418–421
Visible lines, 12 time/temperature relationship, Wiring diagrams
Voltage, 64 354 circuit, 221
Voltage drop voltage variation, 358 estimating cable layouts, 221
CEC requirements, 78 Wattage rating, 218 gas burner, forced hot water
distance to centre of Wattage requirements for system, 320
distribution (CEC Table 3) appliances, 436–437 gas burner, forced warm air,
for 1” drop, 82 Weatherproof receptacles, 416 320
formula for, 72, 78–77 Well pump circuit, 346 lighting circuit, 219–221
high-temperature wire, 78–79 Wet-niche luminaires, 380 oil burner, electronic
maximum allowable, 79 Whirlpool bathtub, 254–256 microprocessor, 321
Voltage limitations, 206 White (W), 249 oil-burning hot water heating,
Voltage transients, 192 Wind-electric pumping system, 321
Voltage variation, 352, 358 447 pictorial illustrations, 220
Wind grid-tie systems, 450 Wiring jig and jack body, 404
W Wind power Wiring method specifications, 93,
Wall box grid-tied wind power, 450 100, 288, 327, 378, 383,
bonding, 223 horizontal-axis turbines, 447 418, 469
sizing, 222–223 standalone wind power, Workbench lighting, 199,
Wall-mounted luminaires, 37, 58 449–450 344–345
Wall-mounted oven vertical-axis turbines, 448 Working drawings
overview, 276–277 Wire, cross-sectional area, 78 details and sections, 24
self-cleaning oven, 277 Wire connections, 73 diagrams, 24
wiring diagram, 277 Wire insulation, 74–75 drawing set, 23–24
Wall section, typical, 16 Wire sizing, basics, wire sizing elevations, 24
Warm white deluxe (WWX), 249, and loading, 60–64 floor plan, 24
262 Wireless communication legend of symbols, 24
Warm white (WW), 212, 249, frequency hopping, 407 schedules, 24
262 Wi-Fi and bluetooth, 407 shop drawings, 25
Waste disposal unit, 179, 266, wireless home automation, site (plot) plan, 24
280–282 407–408 Workmanship, 451, 469
Water circulating pump, 320, Wireless data networks, Workshops
325–326, 381 404–406 cable layout, 343
Water circulator, 320, 325–326, Wireless home automation, outlet count and estimated load,
381 407–408 344
Water heaters Wireless key, security system, workbench lighting, 344
circuit, 351–352, 357–358 371
dishwasher temperatures, Wireless keypad, 373 X
282–283 Wireless personal panic X10 system, 406
heating elements, 352–354 transmitter, 372
load demand, 357–358 Wiring Z
recovery rate, 354 dishwasher, 282 Zone controls, 304, 324
Powered by You.
With engaging content to
challenge you and build your
confidence, MindTap™ gives
you complete control over your
coursework.

Study with digital flashcards, listen to

audio textbooks and take quizzes.

Review your current course grade and

stay on track with your progress.

Get the free Cengage Mobile App and

l learn wherever you are.

MindTap. Powered by You.